Huffman decoder

ABSTRACT

A multi-standard video decompression apparatus has a plurality of stages interconnected by a two-wire interface arranged as a pipeline processing machine. Control tokens and DATA Tokens pass over the single two-wire interface for carrying both control and data in token format. The apparatus includes a Huffman decoder for decoding data words encoded according to the Huffman coding provisions of either H.261, JPEG or MPEG standards. Data words in the tokens include an identifier that identifies the Huffman code standard under which the data words were coded. The Huffman decoder responds to the identifier and converts the received data words to JPEG Huffman coded data words. An index number into a lookup table is associated with each JPEG Huffman coded data word, and a decoded data word is generated corresponding to the index number.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This Application is a division of application Ser. No. 400,397, filedMar. 7, 1995, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser.No. 08/382,958 filed Feb. 2, 1995, which is a continuation of U.S.application Ser. No. 08/082,291 filed Jun. 24, 1993 (now abandoned).

The following U.S. Patent application have subject matter related tothis Application: application Ser. Nos. 08/382,958, filed Feb. 2, 1995;08/400,397, filed Mar. 7, 1995; 08/399,851 filed Mar. 7, 1995;08/482,296, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/486,396, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/484,730, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/479,279, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/483,020, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/487,224, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/400,722, filed Mar. 7, 1995 (now U.S. Pat. No. 5,596,517);08/400,723, filed Mar. 7, 1995 (now U.S. Pat. No. 5,594,678);08/404,067, filed Mar. 14, 1995 (now U.S. Pat. No. 5,590,067);08/567,555, filed Dec. 5, 1995 (now U.S. Pat. No. 5,617,458);08/396,834, filed Mar. 1, 1995; 08/473,813, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/484,456, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/476,814, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/481,561, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/482,381, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/479,910, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/475,729, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/484,578, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/473,615, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/487,356, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/487,134, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/481,772, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/481,785, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/486,908, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/486,034, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/487,740, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/488,348, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/484,170, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/516,038, filed Aug. 17, 1995;08/399,810, filed Jun. 7, 1995 (now U.S. Pat. No. 5,625,571);08/400,201, filed Mar. 7, 1995 (now U.S. Pat. No. 5,603,012);08/400,215, filed Mar. 7, 1995; 08/402,602, filed Mar. 7, 1995;08/400,206, filed Mar. 7, 1995; 08/400,151, filed Mar. 7, 1995;08/400,202, filed Mar. 7, 1995; 08/400,398, filed Mar. 7, 1995;08/400,161, filed Mar. 7, 1995; 08/400,141, filed Mar. 7, 1995;08/400,211, filed Mar. 7, 1995; 08/400,331, filed Mar. 7, 1995;08/400,207, filed Mar. 7, 1995; 08/399,898, filed Mar. 7, 1995;08/399,665, filed Mar. 7, 1995; 08/400,058, filed Mar. 7, 1995;08/399,800, filed Mar. 7, 1995; 08/399,801, filed Mar. 7, 1995;08/399,799, filed Mar. 7, 1995; 08/474,222, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/486,481, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/474,231, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/474,830, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/474,220, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/473,868, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/474,603, filed Jun. 7, 1995;08/485,242, filed Jun. 7, 1995; 08/477,048, filed Jun. 7, 1995; and08/485,744, filed Jun. 7, 1995.

This application claims priority from EPO Application No. 92306038.8filed Jun. 30, 1992, British Application No. 9405914.4 filed Mar. 24,1994 and British Application No. 9504019.2 filed Feb. 28, 1995.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is directed to improvements in methods andapparatus for decompression which operates to decompress and/or decode aplurality of differently encoded input signals. The illustrativeembodiment chosen for description hereinafter relates to the decoding ofa plurality of encoded picture standards. More specifically, thisembodiment relates to the decoding of any one of the well knownstandards known as JPEG, MPEG and H.261.

A serial pipeline processing system of the present invention comprises asingle two-wire bus used for carrying unique and specialized interactiveinterfacing tokens, in the form of control tokens and data tokens, to aplurality of adaptive decompression circuits and the like positioned asa reconfigurable pipeline processor.

Video compression/decompression systems are generally well-known in theart. However, such systems have generally been dedicated in design anduse to a single compression standard. They have also suffered from anumber of other inefficiencies and inflexibility in overall system andsubsystem design and data flow management.

Examples of prior art systems and subsystems are enumerated as follows:

One prior art system is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,216,724. Theapparatus comprises a plurality of compute modules, in a preferredembodiment, for a total of four compute modules coupled in parallel.Each of the compute modules has a processor, dual port memory,scratch-pad memory, and an arbitration mechanism. A first bus couplesthe compute modules and a host processor. The device comprises a sharedmemory which is coupled to the host processor and to the compute moduleswith a second bus.

U.S. Pat. No. 4,785,349 discloses a full motion color digital videosignal that is compressed, formatted for transmission, recorded oncompact disc media and decoded at conventional video frame rates. Duringcompression, regions of a frame are individually analyzed to selectoptimum fill coding methods specific to each region. Region decodingtime estimates are made to optimize compression thresholds. Regiondescriptive codes conveying the size and locations of the regions aregrouped together in a first segment of a data stream. Region fill codesconveying pixel amplitude indications for the regions are groupedtogether according to fill code type and placed in other segments of thedata stream. The data stream segments are individually variable lengthcoded according to their respective statistical distributions andformatted to form data frames. The number of bytes per frame is witheredby the addition of auxiliary data determined by a reverse frame sequenceanalysis to provide an average number selected to minimize pauses of thecompact disc during playback, thereby avoiding unpredictable seek modelatency periods characteristic of compact discs. A decoder includes avariable length decoder responsive to statistical information in thecode stream for separately variable length decoding individual segmentsof the data stream. Region location data is derived from regiondescriptive data and applied with region fill codes to a plurality ofregion specific decoders selected by detection of the fill code type(e.g., relative, absolute, dyad and DPCM) and decoded region pixels arestored in a bit map for subsequent display.

U.S. Pat. No. 4,922,341 discloses a method for scene-model-assistedreduction of image data for digital television signals, whereby apicture signal supplied at time is to be coded, whereby a predecessorframe from a scene already coded at time t-1 is present in an imagestore as a reference, and whereby the frame-to-frame information iscomposed of an amplification factor, a shift factor, and an adaptivelyacquired quad-tree division structure. Upon initialization of thesystem, a uniform, prescribed gray scale value or picture half-toneexpressed as a defined luminance value is written into the image storeof a coder at the transmitter and in the image store of a decoder at thereceiver store, in the same way for all picture elements (pixels). Boththe image store in the coder as well as the image store in the decoderare each operated with feed back to themselves in a manner such that thecontent of the image store in the coder and decoder can be read out inblocks of variable size, can be amplified with a factor greater than orless than 1 of the luminance and can be written back into the imagestore with shifted addresses, whereby the blocks of variable size areorganized according to a known quad tree data structure.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,122,875 discloses an apparatus for encoding/decoding anHDTV signal. The apparatus includes a compression circuit responsive tohigh definition video source signals for providing hierarchicallylayered codewords CW representing compressed video data and associatedcodewords T, defining the types of data represented by the codewords CW.A priority selection circuit, responsive to the codewords CW and T,parses the codewords CW into high and low priority codeword sequenceswherein the high and low priority codeword sequences correspond tocompressed video data of relatively greater and lesser importance toimage reproduction respectively. A transport processor, responsive tothe high and low priority codeword sequences, forms high and lowpriority transport blocks of high and low priority codewords,respectively. Each transport block includes a header, codewords CW anderror detection check bits. The respective transport blocks are appliedto a forward error check circuit for applying additional error checkdata. Thereafter, the high and low priority data are applied to a modemwherein quadrature amplitude modulates respective carriers fortransmission.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,146,325 discloses a video decompression system fordecompressing compressed image data wherein odd and even fields of thevideo signal are independently compressed in sequences of intraframe andinterframe compression modes and then interleaved for transmission. Theodd and even fields are independently decompressed. During intervalswhen valid decompressed odd/even field data is not available, even/oddfield data is substituted for the unavailable odd/even field data.Independently decompressing the even and odd fields of data andsubstituting the opposite field of data for unavailable data may be usedto advantage to reduce image display latency during system start-up andchannel changes.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,168,356 discloses a video signal encoding system thatincludes apparatus for segmenting encoded video data into transportblocks for signal transmission. The transport block format enhancessignal recovery at the receiver by virtue of providing header data fromwhich a receiver can determine re-entry points into the data stream onthe occurrence of a loss or corruption of transmitted data. The re-entrypoints are maximized by providing secondary transport headers embeddedwithin encoded video data in respective transport blocks.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,168,375 discloses a method for processing a field ofimage data samples to provide for one or more of the functions ofdecimation, interpolation, and sharpening. This is accomplished by anarray transform processor such as that employed in a JPEG compressionsystem. Blocks of data samples are transformed by the discrete evencosine transform (DECT) in both the decimation and interpolationprocesses, after which the number of frequency terms is altered. In thecase of decimation, the number of frequency terms is reduced, this beingfollowed by inverse transformation to produce a reduced-size matrix ofsample points representing the original block of data. In the case ofinterpolation, additional frequency components of zero value areinserted into the array of frequency components after which inversetransformation produces an enlarged data sampling set without anincrease in spectral bandwidth. In the case of sharpening, accomplishedby a convolution or filtering operation involving multiplication oftransforms of data and filter kernel in the frequency domain, there isprovided an inverse transformation resulting in a set of blocks ofprocessed data samples. The blocks are overlapped followed by a savingsof designated samples, and a discarding of excess samples from regionsof overlap. The spatial representation of the kernel is modified byreduction of the number of components, for a linear-phase filter, andzero-padded to equal the number of samples of a data block, this beingfollowed by forming the discrete odd cosine transform (DOCT) of thepadded kernel matrix.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,175,617 discloses a system and method for transmittinglogmap video images through telephone line band-limited analog channels.The pixel organization in the logmap image is designed to match thesensor geometry of the human eye with a greater concentration of pixelsat the center. The transmitter divides the frequency band into channels,and assigns one or two pixels to each channel, for example a 3 KHz voicequality telephone line is divided into 768 channels spaced about 3.9 Hzapart. Each channel consists of two carrier waves in quadrature, so eachchannel can carry two pixels. Some channels are reserved for specialcalibration signals enabling the receiver to detect both the phase andmagnitude of the received signal. If the sensor and pixels are connecteddirectly to a bank of oscillators and the receiver can continuouslyreceive each channel, then the receiver need not be synchronized withthe transmitter. An FFT algorithm implements a fast discreteapproximation to the continuous case in which the receiver synchronizesto the first frame and then acquires subsequent frames every frameperiod. The frame period is relatively low compared with the samplingperiod so the receiver is unlikely to lose frame synchrony once thefirst frame is detected. An experimental video telephone transmitted 4frames per second, applied quadrature coding to 1440 pixel logmap imagesand obtained an effective data transfer rate in excess of 40,000 bitsper second.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,185,819 discloses a video compression system having oddand even fields of video signal that are independently compressed insequences of intraframe and interframe compression modes. The odd andeven fields of independently compressed data are interleaved fortransmission such that the intraframe even field compressed data occursmidway between successive fields of intraframe odd field compresseddata. The interleaved sequence provides receivers with twice the numberof entry points into the signal for decoding without increasing theamount of data transmitted.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,212,742 discloses an apparatus and method for processingvideo data for compression/decompression in real-time. The apparatuscomprises a plurality of compute modules, in a preferred embodiment, fora total of four compute modules coupled in parallel. Each of the computemodules has a processor, dual port memory, scratch-pad memory, and anarbitration mechanism. A first bus couples the compute modules and hostprocessor. Lastly, the device comprises a shared memory which is coupledto the host processor and to the compute modules with a second bus. Themethod handles assigning portions of the image for each of theprocessors to operate upon.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,231,484 discloses a system and method for implementingan encoder suitable for use with the proposed ISO/IEC MPEG standards.Included are three cooperating components or subsystems that operate tovariously adaptively pre-process the incoming digital motion videosequences, allocate bits to the pictures in a sequence, and adaptivelyquantize transform coefficients in different regions of a picture in avideo sequence so as to provide optimal visual quality given the numberof bits allocated to that picture.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,267,334 discloses a method of removing frame redundancyin a computer system for a sequence of moving images. The methodcomprises detecting a first scene change in the sequence of movingimages and generating a first keyframe containing complete sceneinformation for a first image. The first keyframe is known, in apreferred embodiment, as a "forward-facing" keyframe or intraframe, andit is normally present in CCITT compressed video data. The process thencomprises generating at least one intermediate compressed frame, the atleast one intermediate compressed frame containing differenceinformation from the first image for at least one image following thefirst image in time in the sequence of moving images. This at least oneframe being known as an interframe. Finally, detecting a second scenechange in the sequence of moving images and generating a second keyframecontaining complete scene information for an image displayed at the timejust prior to the second scene change, known as a "backward-facing"keyframe. The first keyframe and the at least one intermediatecompressed frame are linked for forward play, and the second keyframeand the intermediate compressed frames are linked in reverse for reverseplay. The intraframe may also be used for generation of complete sceneinformation when the images are played in the forward direction. Whenthis sequence is played in reverse, the backward-facing keyframe is usedfor the generation of complete scene information.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,276,513 discloses a first circuit apparatus, comprisinga given number of prior-art image-pyramid stages, together with a secondcircuit apparatus, comprising the same given number of novelmotion-vector stages, perform cost-effective hierarchical motionanalysis (HMA) in real-time, with minimum system processing delay and/oremploying minimum system processing delay and/or employing minimumhardware structure. Specifically, the first and second circuitapparatus, in response to relatively high-resolution image data from anongoing input series of successive given pixel-density image-data framesthat occur at a relatively high frame rate (e.g., 30 frames per second),derives, after a certain processing-system delay, an ongoing outputseries of successive given pixel-density vector-data frames that occurat the same given frame rate. Each vector-data frame is indicative ofimage motion occurring between each pair of successive image frames.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,283,646 discloses a method and apparatus for enabling areal-time video encoding system to accurately deliver the desired numberof bits per frame, while coding the image only once, updates thequantization step size used to quantize coefficients which describe, forexample, an image to be transmitted over a communications channel. Thedata is divided into sectors, each sector including a plurality ofblocks. The blocks are encoded, for example, using DCT coding, togenerate a sequence of coefficients for each block. The coefficients canbe quantized, and depending upon the quantization step, the number ofbits required to describe the data will vary significantly. At the endof the transmission of each sector of data, the accumulated actualnumber of bits expended is compared with the accumulated desired numberof bits expended, for a selected number of sectors associated with theparticular group of data. The system then readjusts the quantizationstep size to target a final desired number of data bits for a pluralityof sectors, for example describing an image. Various methods aredescribed for updating the quantization step size and determiningdesired bit allocations.

The article, Chong, Yong M., A Data-Flow Architecture for Digital ImageProcessing, Wescon Technical Papers: No. 2 October/November 1984,discloses a real-time signal processing system specifically designed forimage processing. More particularly, a token based data-flowarchitecture is disclosed wherein the tokens are of a fixed one wordwidth having a fixed width address field. The system contains aplurality of identical flow processors connected in a ring fashion. Thetokens contain a data field, a control field and a tag. The tag field ofthe token is further broken down into a processor address field and anidentifier field. The processor address field is used to direct thetokens to the correct data-flow processor, and the identifier field isused to label the data such that the data-flow processor knows what todo with the data. In this way, the identifier field acts as aninstruction for the data-flow processor. The system directs each tokento a specific data-flow processor using a module number (MN). If the MNmatches the MN of the particular stage, then the appropriate operationsare performed upon the data. If unrecognized, the token is directed toan output data bus.

The article, Kimori, S. et al. An Elastic Pipeline Mechanism bySelf-Timed Circuits, IEEE J. of Solid-State Circuits, Vol. 23, No. 1,February 1988, discloses an elastic pipeline having self-timed circuits.The asynchronous pipeline comprises a plurality of pipeline stages. Eachof the pipeline stages consists of a group of input data latchesfollowed by a combinatorial logic circuit that carries out logicoperations specific to the pipeline stages. The data latches aresimultaneously supplied with a triggering signal generated by adata-transfer control circuit associated with that stage. Thedata-transfer control circuits are interconnected to form a chainthrough which send and acknowledge signal lines control a hand-shakemode of data transfer between the successive pipeline stages.Furthermore, a decoder is generally provided in each stage to selectoperations to be done on the operands in the present stage. It is alsopossible to locate the decoder in the preceding stage in order topre-decode complex decoding processing and to alleviate critical pathproblems in the logic circuit. The elastic nature of the pipelineeliminates any centralized control since all the interworkings betweenthe submodules are determined by a completely localized decision and, inaddition, each submodule can autonomously perform data buffering andself-timed data-transfer control at the same time. Finally, to increasethe elasticity of the pipeline, empty stages are interleaved between theoccupied stages in order to ensure reliable data transfer between thestages.

Accordingly, those concerned with the design, development and use ofvideo compression/decompression systems and related subsystems have longrecognized a need for improved methods and apparatus providing enhancedflexibility, efficiency and performance. The present invention clearlyfulfills all these needs.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

Briefly, and in general terms, the present invention provides a Huffmandecoder for decoding data words encoded according to the Huffman codingprovisions of either H.261, JPEG or MPEG standards, the data wordsincluding an identifier that identifies the Huffman code standard underwhich the data words were coded, and comprising means for receiving theHuffman coded data words, including means for reading the identifier todetermine which standard governed the Huffman coding of the receiveddata words, means for converting the data words to JPEG Huffman codeddata words, if necessary, in response to reading the identifier thatidentifies the Huffman coded data words as H.261 or MPEG Huffman coded,means operably connected to the Huffman coded data words receiving meansfor generating an index number associated with each JPEG Huffman codeddata word received from the Huffman coded data words receiving means,and means for operating a lookup table containing a Huffman code tablehaving the format used under the JPEG standard to transmit JPEG Huffmantable information, including an input for receiving an index number fromthe index number generating means, and including an output that is adecoded data word corresponding to the index number.

The invention further relates, in varying degrees of scope, to a methodfor decoding data words encoded according to the Huffman codingprovisions of either H.261, JPEG or MPEG standards, the data wordsincluding an identifier that identifies the Huffman code standard underwhich the data words were coded, such steps comprising receiving theHuffman coded data words, including reading the identifier to determinewhich standard governed the Huffman coding of the received data words,if necessary, in response to reading the identifier that identifies theHuffman coded data words as H.261 or MPEG Huffman coded, generating anindex number associated with each JPEG Huffman coded data word received,operating a lookup table containing a Huffman code table having theformat used under the JPEG standard to transmit JPEG Huffman tableinformation, including receiving an index number, and generating adecoded data word corresponding to the received index number

The above and other objectives and advantages of the invention willbecome apparent from the following more detailed description when takenin conjunction with the accompanying drawings.

DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 illustrates six cycles of a six-stage pipeline for differentcombinations of two internal control signals;

FIGS. 2a and 2b illustrate a pipeline in which each stage includesauxiliary data storage. They also show the manner in which pipelinestages can "compress" and "expand" in response to delays in thepipeline;

FIGS. 3a(1), 3a(2), 3b(1) and 3b(2) illustrate the control of datatransfer between stages of a preferred embodiment of a pipeline using atwo-wire interface and a multi-phase clock;

FIG. 4 is a block diagram that illustrates a basic embodiment of apipeline stage that incorporates a two-wire transfer control and alsoshows two consecutive pipeline processing stages with the two-wiretransfer control;

FIGS. 5a and 5b taken together depict one example of a timing diagramthat shows the relationship between timing signals, input and outputdata, and internal control signals used in the pipeline stage as shownin FIG. 4;

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of one example of a pipeline stage that holdsits state under the control of an extension bit;

FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a pipeline stage that decodes stageactivation data words;

FIGS. 8a and 8b taken together form a block diagram showing the use ofthe two-wire transfer control in an exemplifying "data duplication"pipeline stage;

FIGS. 9a and 9b taken together depict one example of a timing diagramthat shows the two-phase clock, the two-wire transfer control signalsand the other internal data and control signals used in the exemplifyingembodiment shown in FIGS. 8a and 8b.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a reconfigurable processing stage;

FIG. 11 is a block diagram of a spatial decoder;

FIG. 12 is a block diagram of a temporal decoder;

FIG. 13 is a block diagram of a video formatter;

FIGS. 14a-c show various arrangements of memory blocks used in thepresent invention:

FIG. 14a is a memory map showing a first arrangement of macroblocks;

FIG. 14b is a memory map showing a second arrangement of macroblocks;

FIG. 14c is a memory map showing a further arrangement of macroblocks;

FIG. 15 shows a Venn diagram of possible table selection values;

FIG. 16 shows the variable length of picture data used in the presentinvention;

FIG. 17 is a block diagram of the temporal decoder including theprediction filters;

FIG. 18 is a pictorial representation of the prediction filteringprocess;

FIG. 19 shows a generalized representation of the macroblock structure;

FIG. 20 shows a generalized block diagram of a Start Code Detector;

FIG. 21 illustrates examples of start codes in a data stream;

FIG. 22 is a block diagram depicting the relationship between the flaggenerator, decode index, header generator, extra word generator andoutput latches;

FIG. 23 is a block diagram of the Spatial Decoder DRAM interface;

FIG. 24 is a block diagram of a write swing buffer;

FIG. 25 is a pictorial diagram illustrating prediction data offset fromthe block being processed;

FIG. 26 is a pictorial diagram illustrating prediction data offset by(1,1);

FIG. 27 is a block diagram illustrating the Huffman decoder and parserstate machine of the Spatial Decoder.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram illustrating the prediction filter.

FIGURES

FIG. 29 shows a typical decoder system;

FIG. 30 shows a JPEG still picture decoder;

FIG. 31 shows a JPEG video decoder;

FIG. 32 shows a multi-standard video decoder;

FIG. 33 shows the start and the end of a token;

FIG. 34 shows a token address and data fields;

FIG. 35 shows a token on an interface wider than 8 bits;

FIG. 36 shows a macroblock structure;

FIG. 37 shows a two-wire interface protocol;

FIG. 38 shows the location of external two-wire interfaces;

FIG. 39 shows clock propagation;

FIG. 40 shows two-wire interface timing;

FIG. 41 shows examples of access structure;

FIG. 42 shows a read transfer cycle;

FIG. 43 shows an access start timing;

FIG. 44 shows an example access with two write transfers;

FIG. 45 shows a read transfer cycle;

FIG. 46 shows a write transfer cycle;

FIG. 47 shows a refresh cycle;

FIG. 48 shows a 32 bit data bus and a 256 kbit deep DRAMs (9 bit rowaddress);

FIG. 49 shows timing parameters for any strobe signal;

FIG. 50 shows timing parameters between any two strobe signals;

FIG. 51 shows timing parameters between a bus and a strobe;

FIG. 52 shows timing parameters between a bus and a strobe;

FIG. 53 shows an MPI read timing;

FIG. 54 shows an MPI write timing;

FIG. 55 shows organization of large integers in the memory map;

FIG. 56 shows a typical decoder clock regime;

FIG. 57 shows input clock requirements;

FIG. 58 shows the Spatial Decoder;

FIG. 59 shows the inputs and outputs of the input circuit;

FIG. 60 shows the coded port protocol;

FIG. 61 shows the start code detector;

FIG. 62 shows start codes detected and converted to Tokens;

FIG. 63 shows the start codes detector passing Tokens;

FIG. 64 shows overlapping MPEG start codes (byte aligned);

FIG. 65 shows overlapping MPEG start codes (not byte aligned);

FIG. 66 shows jumping between two video sequences;

FIG. 67 shows a sequence of extra Token insertion;

FIG. 68 shows decoder start-up control;

FIG. 69 shows enabled streams queued before the output;

FIG. 70 shows a spatial decoder buffer;

FIG. 71 shows a buffer pointer;

FIG. 72 shows a video demux;

FIG. 73 shows a construction of a picture;

FIG. 74 shows a construction of a 4:2:2 macroblock;

FIG. 75 shows a calculating macroblock dimension from pel ones;

FIG. 76 shows spatial decoding;

FIG. 77 shows an overview of H.261 inverse quantization;

FIG. 78 shows an overview of JPEG inverse quantization;

FIG. 79 shows an overview of MPEG inverse quantization;

FIG. 80 shows a quantization table memory map;

FIG. 81 shows an overview of JPEG baseline sequential structure;

FIG. 82 shows a tokenised JPEG picture;

FIG. 83 shows a temporal decoder;

FIG. 84 shows a picture buffer specification;

FIG. 85 shows an MPEG picture sequence (m=3);

FIG. 86 shows how "I" pictures are stored and output;

FIG. 87 shows how "P" pictures are formed, stored and output;

FIG. 88 shows how "B" pictures are formed and output;

FIG. 89 shows P picture formation;

FIG. 90 shows H.261 prediction formation;

FIG. 91 shows an H.261 "sequence";

FIG. 92 shows a hierarchy of H.261 syntax;

FIG. 93 shows an H.261 picture layer;

FIG. 94 shows an H.261 arrangement of groups of blocks;

FIG. 95 shows an H.261 "slice" layer;

FIG. 96 shows an H.261 arrangement of macroblocks;

FIG. 97 shows an H.261 sequence of blocks;

FIG. 98 shows an H.261 macroblock layer;

FIG. 99 shows an H.261 arrangement of pels in blocks;

FIG. 100 shows a hierarchy of MPEG syntax;

FIG. 101 shows an MPEG sequence layer;

FIG. 102 shows an MPEG group of pictures layer;

FIG. 103 shows an MPEG picture layer;

FIG. 104 shows an MPEG "slice" layer;

FIG. 105 shows an MPEG sequence of blocks;

FIG. 106 shows an MPEG macroblock layer;

FIG. 107 shows an "open GOP";

FIG. 108 shows examples of access structure;

FIG. 109 shows access start timing;

FIG. 110 shows a fast page read cycle;

FIG. 111 shows a fast page write cycle;

FIG. 112 shows a refresh cycle;

FIG. 113 shows extracting row and column address from a chip address;

FIG. 114 shows timing parameters for any strobe signal;

FIG. 115 shows timing parameters between any two strobe signals;

FIG. 116 shows timing parameters between a bus and a strobe;

FIG. 117 shows timing parameters between a bus and a strobe;

FIG. 118 shows a Huffman decoder and parser;

FIG. 119 shows an H.261 and an MPEG AC Coefficient Decoding Flow Chart;

FIG. 120 shows a block diagram for JPEG (AC and DC) coefficientdecoding;

FIG. 121 shows a flow diagram for JPEG (AC and DC) coefficient decoding;

FIG. 122 shows an interface to the Huffman Token Formatter;

FIG. 123 shows a token formatter block diagram;

FIG. 124 shows an H.261 and an MPEG AC Coefficient Decoding;

FIG. 125 shows the interface to the Huffman ALU;

FIG. 126 shows the basic structure of the Huffman ALU;

FIG. 127 shows the buffer manager;

FIG. 128 shows an imodel and hsppk block diagram;

FIG. 129 shows an imex state diagram;

FIG. 130 illustrates the buffer start-up;

FIG. 131 shows a DRAM interface;

FIG. 132 shows a write swing buffer;

FIG. 133 shows an arithmetic block;

FIG. 134 shows an iq block diagram;

FIG. 135 shows an iqca state machine;

FIG. 136 shows an IDCT 1-D Transform Algorithm;

FIG. 137 shows an IDCT 1-D Transform Architecture;

FIG. 138 shows a token stream block diagram;

FIG. 139 shows a standard block structure;

FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing; microprocessor test access;

FIG. 141 shows 1-D Transform Micro-Architecture;

FIG. 142 shows a temporal decoder block diagram;

FIG. 143 shows the structure of a Two-wire interface stage;

FIG. 144 shows the address generator block diagram;

FIG. 145 shows the block and pixel offsets;

FIG. 146 shows multiple prediction filters;

FIG. 147 shows a single prediction filter;

FIG. 148 shows the 1-D prediction filter;

FIG. 149 shows a block of pixels;

FIG. 150 shows the structure of the read rudder;

FIG. 151 shows the block and pixel offsets;

FIG. 152 shows a prediction example;

FIG. 153 shows the read cycle;

FIG. 154 shows the write cycle;

FIG. 155 shows the top-level registers block diagram with timingreferences;

FIG. 156 shows the control for incrementing presentation numbers;

FIG. 157 shows the buffer manager state machine (complete);

FIG. 158 shows the state machine main loop;

FIG. 159 shows the buffer 0 containing an SIF (22 by 18 macroblocks)picture;

FIG. 160 shows the SIF component 0 with a display window;

FIG. 161 shows an example picture format showing storage block address;

FIG. 162 shows a buffer 0 containing a SIF (22 by 18 macroblocks)picture;

FIG. 163 shows an example address calculation;

FIG. 164 shows a write address generation state machine;

FIG. 165 shows a slice of the datapath;

FIG. 166 shows a two cycle operation of the datapath;

FIG. 167 shows mode 1 filtering;

FIG. 168 shows a horizontal up-sampler datapath; and

FIG. 169 shows the structure of the color-space converter.

In the ensuing description of the practice of the invention, thefollowing terms are frequently used and are generally defined by thefollowing glossary:

GLOSSARY

BLOCK: An 8-row by 8-column matrix of pels, or 64 DCT coefficients(source, quantized or dequantized).

CHROMINANCE (COMPONENT): A matrix, block or single pel representing oneof the two color difference signals related to the primary colors in themanner defined in the bit stream. The symbols used for the colordifference signals are Cr and Cb.

CODED REPRESENTATION: A data element as represented in its encoded form.

CODED VIDEO BIT STREAM: A coded representation of a series of one ormore pictures as defined in this specification.

CODED ORDER: The order in which the pictures are transmitted anddecoded. This order is not necessarily the same as the display order.

COMPONENT: A matrix, block or single pel from one of the three matrices(luminance and two chrominance) that make up a picture.

COMPRESSION: Reduction in the number of bits used to represent an itemof data.

DECODER: An embodiment of a decoding process.

DECODING (PROCESS): The process defined in this specification that readsan input coded bitstream and produces decoded pictures or audio samples.

DISPLAY ORDER: The order in which the decoded pictures are displayed.Typically, this is the same order in which they were presented at theinput of the encoder.

ENCODING (PROCESS): A process, not specified in this specification, thatreads a stream of input pictures or audio samples and produces a validcoded bitstream as defined in this specification.

INTRA CODING: Coding of a macroblock or picture that uses informationonly from that macroblock or picture.

LUMINANCE (COMPONENT): A matrix, block or single pel representing amonochrome representation of the signal and related to the primarycolors in the manner defined in the bit stream. The symbol used forluminance is Y.

MACROBLOCK: The four 8 by 8 blocks of luminance data and the two (for4:2:0 chroma format) four (for 4:2:2 chroma format) or eight (for 4:4:4chroma format) corresponding 8 by 8 blocks of chrominance data comingfrom a 16 by 16 section of the luminance component of the picture.Macroblock is sometimes used to refer to the pel data and sometimes tothe coded representation of the pel values and other data elementsdefined in the macroblock header of the syntax defined in this part ofthis specification. To one of ordinary skill in the art, the usage isclear from the context.

MOTION COMPENSATION: The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiencyof the prediction of pel values. The prediction uses motion vectors toprovide offsets into the past and/or future reference picturescontaining previously decoded pel values that are used to form theprediction error signal.

MOTION VECTOR: A two-dimensional vector used for motion compensationthat provides an offset from the coordinate position in the currentpicture to the coordinates in a reference picture.

NON-INTRA CODING: Coding of a macroblock or picture that usesinformation both from itself and from macroblocks and pictures occurringat other times.

PEL: Picture element.

PICTURE: Source, coded or reconstructed image data. A source orreconstructed picture consists of three rectangular matrices of 8-bitnumbers representing the luminance and two chrominance signals. Forprogressive video, a picture is identical to a frame, while forinterlaced video, a picture can refer to a frame, or the top field orthe bottom field of the frame depending on the context.

PREDICTION: The use of a predictor to provide an estimate of the pelvalue or data element currently being decoded.

RECONFIGURABLE PROCESS STAGE (RPS): A stage, which in response to arecognized token, reconfigures itself to perform various operations.

SLICE: A series of macroblocks.

TOKEN: A universal adaptation unit in the form of an interactiveinterfacing messenger package for control and/or data functions.

START CODES SYSTEM AND VIDEO!: 32-bit codes embedded in a codedbitstream that are unique. They are used for several purposes includingidentifying some of the structures in the coding syntax.

VARIABLE LENGTH CODING; VLC: A reversible procedure for coding thatassigns shorter code-words to frequent events and longer code-words toless frequent events.

VIDEO SEQUENCE: A series of one or more pictures.

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT(S)

As an introduction to the most general features used in a pipelinesystem which is utilized in the preferred embodiments of the invention,FIG. 1 is a greatly simplified illustration of six cycles of a six-stagepipeline. (As is explained in greater detail below, the preferredembodiment of the pipeline includes several advantageous features notshown in FIG. 1.).

Referring now to the drawings, wherein like reference numerals denotelike or corresponding elements throughout the various figures of thedrawings, and more particularly to FIG. 1, there is shown a blockdiagram of six cycles in practice of the present invention. Each row ofboxes illustrates a cycle and each of the different stages are labelledA-F, respectively. Each shaded box indicates that the correspondingstage holds valid data, i.e., data that is to be processed in one of thepipeline stages. After processing (which may involve nothing more than asimple transfer without manipulation of the data) valid data istransferred out of the pipeline as valid output data.

Note that an actual pipeline application may include more or fewer thansix pipeline stages. As will be appreciated, the present invention maybe used with any number of pipeline stages. Furthermore, data may beprocessed in more than one stage and the processing time for differentstages can differ.

In addition to clock and data signals (described below), the pipelineincludes two transfer control signals--a "VALID" signal and an "ACCEPT"signal. These signals are used to control the transfer of data withinthe pipeline. The VALID signal, which is illustrated as the upper of thetwo lines connecting neighboring stages, is passed in a forward ordownstream direction from each pipeline stage to the nearest neighboringdevice. This device may be another pipeline stage or some other system.For example, the last pipeline stage may pass its data on to subsequentprocessing circuitry. The ACCEPT signal, which is illustrated as thelower of the two lines connecting neighboring stages, passes in theother direction upstream to a preceding device.

A data pipeline system of the type used in the practice of the presentinvention has, in preferred embodiments, one or more of the followingcharacteristics:

1. The pipeline is "elastic" such that a delay at a particular pipelinestage causes the minimum disturbance possible to other pipeline stages.Succeeding pipeline stages are allowed to continue processing and,therefore, this means that gaps open up in the stream of data followingthe delayed stage. Similarly, preceding pipeline stages may alsocontinue where possible. In this case, any gaps in the data stream may,wherever possible, be removed from the stream of data.

2. Control signals that arbitrate the pipeline are organized so thatthey only propagate to the nearest neighboring pipeline stages. In thecase of signals flowing in the same direction as the data flow, this isthe immediately succeeding stage. In the case of signals flowing in theopposite direction to the data flow, this is the immediately precedingstage.

3. The data in the pipeline is encoded such that many different types ofdata are processed in the pipeline. This encoding accommodates datapackets of variable size and the size of the packet need not be known inadvance.

4. The overhead associated with describing the type of data is as smallas possible.

5. It is possible for each pipeline stage to recognize only the minimumnumber of data types that are needed for its required function. Itshould, however, still be able to pass all data types onto thesucceeding stage even though it does not recognize them. This enablescommunication between non-adjacent pipeline stages.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, there are data lines, either single linesor several parallel lines, which form a data bus that also lead into andout of each pipeline stage. As is explained and illustrated in greaterdetail below, data is transferred into, out of, and between the stagesof the pipeline over the data lines.

Note that the first pipeline stage may receive data and control signalsfrom any form of preceding device. For example, reception circuitry of adigital image transmission system, another pipeline, or the like. On theother hand, it may generate itself, all or part of the data to beprocessed in the pipeline. Indeed, as is explained below, a "stage" maycontain arbitrary processing circuitry, including none at all (forsimple passing of data) or entire systems (for example, another pipelineor even multiple systems or pipelines), and it may generate, change, anddelete data as desired.

When a pipeline stage contains valid data that is to be transferred downthe pipeline, the VALID signal, which indicates data validity, need notbe transferred further than to the immediately subsequent pipelinestage. A two-wire interface is, therefore, included between every pairof pipeline stages in the system. This includes a two-wire interfacebetween a preceding device and the first stage, and between a subsequentdevice and the last stage, if such other devices are included and datais to be transferred between them and the pipeline.

Each of the signals, ACCEPT and VALID, has a HIGH and a LOW value. Thesevalues are abbreviated as "H" and "L", respectively. The most commonapplications of the pipeline, in practicing the invention, willtypically be digital. In such digital implementations, the HIGH valuemay, for example, be a logical "1" and the LOW value may be a logical"0". The system is not restricted to digital implementations, however,and in analog implementations, the HIGH value may be a voltage or othersimilar quantity above (or below) a set threshold, with the LOW valuebeing indicated by the corresponding signal being below (or above) thesame or some other threshold. For digital applications, the presentinvention may be implemented using any known technology, such as CMOS,bipolar etc.

It is not necessary to use a distinct storage device and wires toprovide for storage of VALID signals. This is true even in a digitalembodiment. All that is required is that the indication of "validity" ofthe data be stored along with the data. By way of example only, indigital television pictures that are represented by digital values, asspecified in the international standard CCIR 601, certain specificvalues are not allowed. In this system, eight-bit binary numbers areused to represent samples of the picture and he values zero and 255 maynot be used.

If such a picture were to be processed in a pipeline built in thepractice of the present invention, then one of these values (zero, forexample) could be used to indicate that the data in a specific stage inthe pipeline is not valid. Accordingly, any non-zero data would bedeemed to be valid. In this example, there is no specific latch that canbe identified and said to be storing the "validness" of the associateddata. Nonetheless, the validity of the data is stored along with thedata.

As shown in FIG. 1, the state of the VALID signal into each stage isindicated as an "H" or an "L" on an upper, right-pointed arrow.Therefore, the VALID signal from Stage A into Stage B is LOW, and theVALID signal from Stage D into Stage E is HIGH. The state of the ACCEPTsignal into each stage is indicated as an "H" or an "L" on a lower,left-pointing arrow. Hence, the ACCEPT signal from Stage E into Stage Dis HIGH, whereas the ACCEPT signal from the device connected downstreamof the pipeline into Stage F is LOW.

Data is transferred from one stage to another during a circle (explainedbelow) whenever the ACCEPT signal of the downstream stage into itsupstream neighbor is HIGH. If the ACCEPT signal is LOW between twostages, then data is not transferred between these stages.

Referring again to FIG. 1, if a box is shaded, the correspondingpipeline stage is assumed, by way of example, to contain valid outputdata. Likewise, the VALID signal which is passed from that stage to thefollowing stage is HIGH. FIG. 1 illustrates the pipeline when stages B,D, and E contain valid data. Stages A, C, and F do not contain validdata, At the beginning, the VALID signal into pipeline stage A is HIGH,meaning that the data on the transmission Line into the pipeline isvalid.

Also at this time, the ACCEPT signal into pipeline stage F is LOW, sothat no data, whether valid or not, is transferred out of Stage F. Notethat both valid and invalid data is transferred between pipeline stages.Invalid data, which is data not worth saving, may be written over,thereby, eliminating it from the pipeline. However, valid data must notbe written over since it is data that must be saved for processing oruse in a downstream device e.g., a pipeline stage, a device or a systemconnected to the pipeline that receives data from the pipeline.

In the pipeline illustrated in FIG. 1, Stage E contains valid data D1,Stage D contains valid data D2, Stage B contains valid data D3, and adevice (not shown) connected go the pipeline upstream contains data D4that is to be transferred into and processed in the pipeline. Stages B,D and E, in addition to the upstream device, contain valid data and,therefore, the VALID signal from these stages or devices into theirrespective following devices is HIGH. The VALID signal from the StagesA, C and F is, however, LOW since these stages do not contain validdata.

Assume now that the device connected downstream from the pipeline is notready to accept data from the pipeline. The device signals this bysetting the corresponding ACCEPT signal LOW into Stage F. Stage Fitself, however, does not contain valid data and is, therefore, able toaccept data from the preceding Stage E. Hence, the ACCEPT signal fromStage F into Stage E is set HIGH.

Similarly, Stage E contains valid data and Stage F is ready to acceptthis data. Hence, Stage E can accept new data as long as the valid dataD1 is first transferred to Stage F. In other words, although Stage Fcannot transfer data downstream, all the other stages can do so withoutany valid data being overwritten or lost. At the end of Cycle 1, datacan, therefore, be "shifted" one step to the right. This condition isshown in Cycle 2.

In the illustrated example, the downstream device is still not ready toaccept new data in Cycle 2 and, therefore, the ACCEPT signal into StageF is still LOW. Stage F cannot, therefore, accept new data since doingso would cause valid data D1 to be overwritten and lost. The ACCEPTsignal from Stage F into Stage E, therefore, goes LOW, as does theACCEPT signal from Stage E into Stage D since Stage E also containsvalid data D2. All of the Stages A-D, however, are able to accept newdata (either because they do not contain valid data or because they areable to shift their valid data downstream and accept new data) and theysignal this condition to their immediately preceding neighbors bysetting their corresponding ACCEPT signals HIGH.

The state of the pipelines after Cycle 2 is illustrated in FIG. 1 forthe row labelled Cycle 3. By way of example, it is assumed that thedownstream device is still not ready to accept new data from Stage F(the ACCEPT signal into Stage F is LOW). Stages E and F, therefore, arestill "blocked", but in Cycle 3, Stage D has received the valid data D3,which has overwritten the invalid data that was previously in thisstage. Since Stage D cannot pass on data D3 in Cycle 3, it cannot acceptnew data and, therefore, sets the ACCEPT signal into Stage C LOW.However, stages A-C are ready to accept new data and signal this bysetting their corresponding ACCEPT signals HIGH. Note that data D4 hasbeen shifted from Stage A to Stage B.

Assume now that the downstream device becomes ready to accept new datain Cycle 4. It signals this to the pipeline by setting the ACCEPT signalinto Stage F HIGH. Although Stages C-F contain valid data, they can nowshift the data downstream and are, thus, able to accept new data. Sinceeach stage is therefore able to shift data one seep downstream, they settheir respective ACCEPT signals out HIGH.

As Long as the ACCEPT signal into the final pipeline stage (in thisexample, Stage F) is HIGH, the pipeline shown in FIG. 1 acts as a rigidpipeline and simply shifts data one step downstream on each cycle.Accordingly, in Cycle 5, data D1, which was contained in Stage F inCycle 4, is shifted out of the pipeline to the subsequent device, andall other data is shifted one step downstream.

Assume now, that the ACCEPT signal into Stage F goes LOW in Cycle 5.Once again, this means that Stages D-F are not able to accept new data,and the ACCEPT signals out of these stages into their immediatelypreceding neighbors go LCW. Hence, the data D2, D3 and D4 cannot shiftdownstream, however, the data D5 can. The corresponding state of thepipeline after Cycle 5 is, thus, shown in FIG. 1 as Cycle 6.

The ability of the pipeline, in accordance with the preferredembodiments of the present invention, to "fill up" empty processingstages is highly advantageous since the processing stages in thepipeline thereby become decouple from one another. In other words, eventhough a pipeline stage may not be ready to accept data, the entirepipeline does not have to stop and wait for the delayed stage. Rather,when one stage is unable to accept valid data it simply forms atemporary "wall" in the pipeline. Nonetheless, stages downstream of the"wall" can continue to advance valid data even to circuitry connected tothe pipeline, and stages to the left of the "wall" can still accept andtransfer valid data downstream. Even when several pipeline stagestemporarily cannot accept new data, other stages can continue to operatenormally. In particular, the pipeline can continue to accept data intoits initial stage A as long as stage A does not already contain validdata that cannot be advanced due to the next stage not being ready toaccept new data. As this example illustrates, data can be transferredinto the pipeline and between stages even when one or more processingstages is blocked.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, it is assumed that the variouspipeline stages do not store the ACCEPT signals they receive from theirimmediately following neighbors. Instead, whenever the ACCEPT signalinto a downstream stage goes LOW, this LOW signal is propagated upstreamas far as the nearest pipeline stage that does not contain valid data.For example, referring to FIG. 1, it was assumed that the ACCEPT signalinto Stage F goes LOW in Cycle 1. In Cycle 2, the LOW signal propagatesfrom Stage F back to Stage D.

In Cycle 3, when the data D3 is latched into Stage D, the ACCEPT signalpropagates upstream four stages to Stage C. When the ACCEPT signal intoStage F goes HIGH in Cycle 4, it must propagate upstream all the way toStage C. In other words, the change in the ACCEPT signal must propagateback four stages. It is not necessary, however, in the embodimentillustrated in FIG. 1, for the ACCEPT signal to propagate all the wayback to the beginning of the pipeline if there is some intermediatestage that is able to accept new data.

In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 1, each pipeline stage will stillneed separate input and output data latches to allow data to betransferred between stages without unintended overwriting. Also,although the pipeline illustrated in FIG. 1 is able to "compress" whendownstream pipeline stages are blocked, i.e., they cannot pass on thedata they contain, the pipeline does not "expand" to provide stages thatcontain no valid data between stages that do contain valid data. Rather,the ability to compress depends on there being cycles during which novalid data is presented to the first pipeline stage.

In Cycle 4, for example, if the ACCEPT signal into Stage F remained LOWand valid data filled pipeline stages A and B, as long as valid datacontinued to be presented to Stage A the pipeline would not be able tocompress any further and valid input data could be lost. Nonetheless,the pipeline illustrated in FIG. 1 reduces the risk of data loss sinceit is able to compress as long as there is a pipeline stage that doesnot contain valid data.

FIG. 2 illustrates another embodiment of the pipeline that can bothcompress and expand in a logical manner and which includes circuitrythat limits propagation of the ACCEPT signal to the nearest precedingstage. Although the circuitry for implementing this embodiment isexplained and illustrated in greater detail below, FIG. 2 serves toillustrate the principle by which it operates.

For ease of comparison only, the input data and ACCEPT signals into thepipeline embodiment shown in FIG. 2 are the same as in the pipelineembodiment shown in FIG. 1. Accordingly, stages E, D and B contain validdata D1, D2 and D3, respectively. The ACCEPT signal into Stage F is LOW;and data D4 is presented to the beginning pipeline Stage A. In FIG. 2,three lines are shown connecting each neighboring pair of pipelinestages. The uppermost line, which may be a bus, is a data line. Themiddle line is the line over which the VALID signal is transferred,while the bottom line is the line over which the ACCEPT signal istransferred. Also, as before, the ACCEPT signal into Stage F remains LOWexcept in Cycle 4. Furthermore, additional data D5 is presented to thepipeline in Cycle 4.

In FIG. 2, each pipeline stage is represented as a block divided intotwo halves to illustrate that each stage in this embodiment of thepipeline includes primary and secondary data storage elements. In FIG.2, the primary data storage is shown as the right half of each stage.However, it will be appreciated that this delineation is for the purposeof illustration only and is not intended as a limitation.

As FIG. 2 illustrates, as long as the ACCEPT signal into a stage isHIGH, data is transferred from the primary storage elements of the stageto the secondary storage elements of the following stage during anygiven cycle. Accordingly, although the ACCEPT signal into Stage F isLOW, the ACCEPT signal into all other stages is HIGH so that the dataD1, D2 and D3 is shifted forward one stage in Cycle 2 and the data D4 isshifted into the first Stage A.

Up to this point, the pipeline embodiment shown in FIG. 2 acts in amanner similar to the pipeline embodiment shown in FIG. 1. The ACCEPTsignal from Stage F into Stage E, however, is HIGH even though theACCEPT signal into Stage F is LOW. As is explained below, because of thesecondary storage elements, it is not necessary for the LOW ACCEPTsignal to propagate upstream beyond Stage F. Moreover, by leaving theACCEPT signal into Stage E HIGH, Stage F signals that it is ready toaccept new data. Since Stage F is not able to transfer the data D1 inits primary storage elements downstream (the ACCEPT signal into Stage Fis LOW) in Cycle 3, Stage E must, therefore, transfer the data D2 intothe secondary storage elements of Stage F. Since both the primary andthe secondary storage elements of Stage F now contain valid data thatcannot be passed on, the ACCEPT signal from Stage F into Stage E is setLOW. Accordingly, this represents a propagation of the LOW ACCEPT signalback only one stage relative to Cycle 2, whereas this ACCEPT signal hadto be propagated back all the way to Stage C in the embodiment shown inFIG. 1.

Since Stages A-E are able to pass on their data, the ACCEPT signals fromthe stages into their immediately preceding neighbors are set HIGH.Consequently, the data D3 and D4 are shifted one stage to the right sothat, in Cycle 4, they are loaded into the primary data storage elementsof Stage E and Stage C, respectively. Although Stage E now containsvalid data D3 in its primary storage elements, its secondary storageelements can still be used to store other data without risk ofoverwriting any valid data.

Assume now, as before, that the ACCEPT signal into Stage F becomes HIGHin Cycle 4. This indicates that the downstream device to which thepipeline passes data is ready to accept data from the pipeline. Stage F,however, has set its ACCEPT signal LOW and, thus, indicates to Stage Ethat Stage F is not prepared to accept new data. Observe that the ACCEPTsignals for each cycle indicate what will "happen" in the next cycle,that is, whether data will be passed on (ACCEPT HIGH) or whether datamust remain in place (ACCEPT LOW). Therefore, from Cycle 4 to Cycle 5,the data D1 is passed from Stage F to the following device, the data D2is shifted from secondary to primary storage in Stage F, but the data D3in Stage E is not transferred to Stage F. The data D4 and D5 can betransferred into the following pipeline stages as normal since thefollowing stages have their ACCEPT signals HIGH.

Comparing the state of the pipeline in Cycle 4 and Cycle 5, it can beseen that the provision of secondary storage elements, enables thepipeline embodiment shown in FIG. 2 to expand, that is, to free up datastorage elements into which valid data can be advanced. For example, inCycle 4, the data blocks D1, D2 and D3 form a "solid wall" since theirdata cannot be transferred until the ACCEPT signal into Stage F goesHIGH. Once this signal does become HIGH, however, data D1 is shifted outof the pipeline, data D2 is shifted into the primary storage elements ofStage F, and the secondary storage elements of Stage F become free toaccept new data if the following device is not able to receive the dataD2 and the pipeline must once again "compress." This is shown in Cycle6, for which the data D3 has been shifted into the secondary storageelements of Stage F and the data D4 has been passed on from Stage D toStage E as normal.

FIGS. 3a(1), 3a(2), 3b(1) and 3b(2) (which are referred collectively asFIG. 3) illustrate generally a preferred embodiment of the pipeline.This preferred embodiment implements the structure shown in FIG. 2 usinga two-phase, non-overlapping clock with phases φ0 and φ1. Although atwo-phase clock is preferred, it will be appreciated that it is alsopossible to drive the various embodiments of the invention using a clockwith more than two phases.

As shown in FIG. 3, each pipeline stage is represented as having twoseparate boxes which illustrate the primary and secondary storageelements. Also, although the VALID signal and the data lines connect thevarious pipeline stages as before, for ease of illustration, only theACCEPT signal is shown in FIG. 3. A change of state during a clock phaseof certain of the ACCEPT signals is indicated in FIG. 3 using anupward-pointing arrow for changes from LOW to HIGH. Similarly, adownward-pointing arrow for changes from HIGH to LOW. Transfer of datafrom one storage element to another is indicated by a large open arrow.It is assumed that the VALID signal out of the primary or secondarystorage elements of any given stage is HIGH whenever the storageelements contain valid data.

In FIG. 3, each cycle is shown as consisting of a full period of thenon-overlapping clock phases φ0 and φ1. As is explained in greaterdetail below, data is transferred from the secondary storage elements(shown as the left box in each stage) to the primary storage elements(shown as the right box in each stage) during clock cycle φ1, whereasdata is transferred from the primary storage elements of one stage tothe secondary storage elements of the following stage during the clockcycle φ0. FIG. 3 also illustrates that the primary and secondary storageelements in each stage are further connected via an internal acceptanceline to pass an ACCEPT signal in the same manner that the ACCEPT signalis passed from stage to stage. In this way, the secondary storageelement will know when it can pass its date to the primary storageelement.

FIG. 3 shows the φ1 phase of Cycle 1, in which data D1, D2 and D3, whichwere previously shifted into the secondary storage elements of Stages E,D and B, respectively, are shifted into the primary storage elements ofthe respective stage. During the φ1 phase of Cycle 1, the pipeline,therefore, assumes the same configuration as is shown as Cycle 1 of FIG.2. As before, the ACCEPT signal into Stage F is assumed to be LOW. AsFIG. 3 illustrates, however, this means that the ACCEPT signal into theprimary storage element of Stage F is LOW, but since this storageelement does not contain valid data, it sets the ACCEPT signal into itssecondary storage element HIGH.

The ACCEPT signal from the secondary storage elements of Stage F intothe primary storage elements of Stage E is also set HIGH since thesecondary storage elements of Stage F do not contain valid data. Asbefore, since the primary storage elements of Stage F are able to acceptdata, data in all the upstream primary and secondary storage elementscan be shifted downstream without any valid data being overwritten. Theshift of data from one stage to the next takes place during the next φ0phase in Cycle 2. For example, the valid data D1 contained in theprimary storage element of Stage E is shifted into the secondary storageelement of Stage F, the data D4 is shifted into the pipeline, that is,into the secondary storage element of Stage A, and so forth.

The primary storage element of Stage F still does not contain valid dataduring the φ0 phase in Cycle 2 and, therefore, the ACCEPT signal fromthe primary storage elements into the secondary storage elements ofStage F remains HIGH. During the φ1 phase in Cycle 2, data can thereforebe shifted yet another step to the right, i.e., from the secondary tothe primary storage elements within each stage.

However, once valid data is loaded into the primary storage elements ofStage F, if the ACCEPT into Stage F from the downstream device is stillLOW, it is not possible to shift data out of the secondary storageelement of Stage F without overwriting and destroying the valid data D1.The ACCEPT signal from the primary storage elements into the secondarystorage elements of Stage F therefore goes LOW. Data D2, however, canstill be shifted into the secondary storage of Stage F since it did notcontain valid data and its ACCEPT signal out was HIGH.

During the φ1 phase of Cycle 3, it is not possible to shift data D2 intothe primary storage elements of Stage F, although data can be shiftedwithin all the previous stages. Once valid data As loaded into thesecondary storage elements of Stage F, however, Stage F is not able topass on this data. It signals this event setting its ACCEPT signal outLOW.

Assuming that the ACCEPT signal into Stage F remains LOW, data upstreamof Stage F can continue to be shifted between stages and within stageson the respective clock phases until the next valid data block D3reaches the primary storage elements of Stage E. As illustrated, thiscondition is reached during the φ1 phase of Cycle 4.

During the φ0 phase of Cycle 5, data D3 has been loaded into the primarystorage element of Stage E. Since this data cannot be shifted further,the ACCEPT signal out of the primary storage elements of Stage E is setLOW. Upstream data can be shifted as normal.

Assume now, as in Cycle 5 of FIG. 2, that the device connecteddownstream of the pipeline is able to accept pipeline data. It signalsthis event by setting the ACCEPT signal into pipeline Stage F HIGHduring the φ1 phase of Cycle 4. The primary storage elements of Stage Fcan now shift data to the right and they are also able to accept newdata. Hence, the data D1 was shifted out during the φ1 phase of Cycle 5so that the primary storage elements of Stage F no longer contain datathat must be saved. During the φ1 phase of Cycle 5, the data D2 is,therefore, shifted within Stage F from the secondary storage elements tothe primary storage elements. The secondary storage elements of Stage Fare also able to accept new data and signal this by setting the ACCEPTsignal into the primary storage elements of Stage E HIGH. Duringtransfer of data within a stage, that is, from its secondary to itsprimary storage elements, both sets of storage elements will contain thesame data, but the data in the secondary storage elements can beoverwritten with no data loss since this data will also be held in theprimary storage elements. The same holds true for data transfer from theprimary storage elements of one stage into the secondary storageelements of a subsequent stage.

Assume now, that the ACCEPT signal into the primary storage elements ofStage F goes LOW during the φ1 phase in Cycle 5. This means that Stage Fis not able to transfer the data D2 out of the pipeline. Stage F,consequently, sets the ACCEPT signal from its primary to its secondarystorage elements LOW to prevent overwriting of the valid data D2. Thedata D2 stored in the secondary storage elements of Stage F, however,can be overwritten without loss, and the data D3, is therefore,transferred into the secondary storage elements of Stage F during the φ0phase of Cycle 6. Data D4 and D5 can be shifted downstream as normal.Once valid data D3 is stored in Stage F along with data D2, as long asthe ACCEPT signal into the primary storage elements of Stage F is LOW,neither of the secondary storage elements can accept new data, and itsignals this by setting the ACCEPT signal into Stage E LOW.

When the ACCEPT signal into the pipeline from the downstream devicechanges from LOW to HIGH or vice versa, this change does not have topropagate upstream within the pipeline further than to the immediatelypreceding storage elements (within the same stage or within thepreceding pipeline stage). Rather, this change propagates upstreamwithin the pipeline one storage element block per clock phase.

As this example illustrates, the concept of a "stage" in the pipelinestructure illustrated in FIG. 3 is to some extent a matter ofperception. Since data is transferred within a stage (from the secondaryto the primary storage elements) as it is between stages (from theprimary storage elements of the upstream stage into the secondarystorage elements of the neighboring downstream stage), one could rust aswell consider a stage to consist of "primary" storage elements followedby "secondary storage elements" instead of as illustrated in FIG. 3. Theconcept of "primary" and "secondary" storage elements is, therefore,mostly a question of labeling. In FIG. 3, the "primary" storage elementscan also be referred to as "output" storage elements, since they are theelements from which data is transferred out of a stage into a followingstage or device, and the "secondary" storage elements could be "input"storage elements for the same stage.

In explaining the aforementioned embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 1-3,only the transfer of data under the control of the ACCEPT and VALIDsignals has been mentioned. It is to be further understood that eachpipeline stage may also process the data it has received arbitrarilybefore passing it between its internal storage elements or beforepassing it to the following pipeline stage. Therefore, referring onceagain to FIG. 3, a pipeline stage can, therefore, be defined as theportion of the pipeline that contains input and output storage elementsand that arbitrarily processes data stored in its storage elements.

Furthermore, the "device" downstream from the pipeline Stage F, need notbe some other type of hardware structure, but rather it can be anothersection of the same or part of another pipeline. As illustrated below, apipeline stage can set its ACCEPT signal LOW not only when all of thedownstream storage elements are filled with valid data, but also when astage requires more than one clock phase to finish processing its data.This also can occur when it creates valid data in one or both of itsstorage elements. In other words, it is not necessary for a stage simplyto pass on the ACCEPT signal based on whether or not the immediatelydownstream storage elements contains valid data that cannot be passedon. Rather, the ACCEPT signal itself may also be altered within thestage or, by circuitry external to the stage, in order to control thepassage of data between adjacent storage elements. The VALID signal mayalso be processed in an analogous manner.

A great advantage of the two-wire interface (one wire for each of theVALID and ACCEPT signals) is its ability to control the pipeline withoutthe control signals needing to propagate back up the pipeline all theway to its beginning stage. Referring once again to FIG. 1, Cycle 3, forexample, although stage F "tells" stage E that it cannot accept data,and stage E tells stage D, and stage D tells stage C. Indeed, if therehad been more stages containing valid data, then this signal would havepropagated back even further along the pipeline. In the embodiment shownin FIG. 3, Cycle 3, the LOW ACCEPT signal is not propagated any furtherupstream than to Stage E and, then, only to its primary storageelements.

As described below, this embodiment is able to achieve this flexibilitywithout adding significantly to the silicon area that is required toimplement the design. Typically, each latch in the pipeline used fordata storage requires only a single extra transistor (which lays outvery efficiently in silicon). In addition, two extra latches and a smallnumber of gates are preferably added to process the ACCEPT and VALIDsignals that are associated with the data latches in each half-stage.

FIG. 4 illustrates a hardware structure that implements a stage as shownin FIG. 3.

By way of example only, it is assumed that eight-bit data is to betransferred (with or without further manipulation in optionalcombinatorial logic circuits) in parallel through the pipeline. However,it will be appreciated that either more or less than eight-bit data canbe used in practicing the invention. Furthermore, the two-wire interfacein accordance with this embodiment is, however, suitable for use withany data bus width, and the data bus width may even change from onestage to the next if a particular application so requires. The interfacein accordance with this embodiment can also be used to process analogsignals.

As discussed previously, while other conventional timing arrangementsmay be used, the interface is preferably controlled by a two-phase,non-overlapping clock. In FIGS. 4-9, these clock phase signals arereferred to as PH0 and PH1. In FIG. 4, a line is shown for each clockphase signal.

Input data enters a pipeline stage over a multi-bit data bus IN₋₋ DATAand is transferred to a following pipeline stage or to subsequentreceiving circuitry over an output data bus OUT₋₋ DATA. The input datais first loaded in a manner described below into a series of inputlatches (one for each input data signal) collectively referred to asLDIN, which constitute the secondary storage elements described above.

In the illustrated example of this embodiment, it is assumed that the Qoutputs of all latches follow their D inputs, that is, they are"loaded", when the clock input is HIGH, i.e., at a logic "1" level.Additionally, the Q outputs hold their last values. In other words, theQ outputs are "latched" on the falling edge of their respective clocksignals. Each latch has for its clock either one of two non-overlappingclock signals PH0 or PH1 (as shown in FIG. 5), or the logical ANDcombination of one of these clock signals PH0, PH1 and one logic signal.The invention works equally well, however, by providing latches thatlatch on the rising edges of the clock signals, or any other knownlatching arrangement, as long as conventional methods are applied toensure proper timing of the latching operations.

The output data from the input data latch LDIN passes via an arbitraryand optional combinatorial logic circuit B1, which may be provided toconvert output data from input latch LDIN into intermediate data, whichis then later loaded in an output data latch LDOUT, which comprises theprimary storage elements described above. The output from the outputdata latch LDOUT may similarly pass through an arbitrary and optionalcombinatorial logic circuit B2 before being passed onward as OUT₋₋ DATAto the next device downstream. This may be another pipeline stage or anyother device connected to the pipeline.

In the practice of the present invention, each stage of the pipelinealso includes a validation input latch LVIN, a validation output latchLVOUT, an acceptance input latch LAIN, and an acceptance output latchLAOUT. Each of these four latches is, preferably, a simple, single-stagelatch. The outputs from latches LVIN, LVOUT, LAIN and LAOUT are,respectively, QVIN, QVOUT, QAIN, QAOUT. The output signal QVIN from thevalidation input latch is connected either directly as an input to thevalidation output latch LVOUT, or via intermediate logic devices orcircuits that may alter the signal.

Similarly, the output validation signal QVOUT of a given stage may beconnected either directly to the input of the validation input latchQVIN of the following stage, or via intermediate devices or logiccircuits, which may alter the validation signal. This output QVIN isalso connected to a logic gate (to be described below), whose output isconnected to the input of the acceptance input latch LAIN. The outputQAOUT from the acceptance output latch LAOUT is connected to a similarlogic gate (described below), optionally via another logic gate.

As shown in FIG. 4, the output validation signal QVOUT forms an OUT₋₋VALID signal that can be received by subsequent stages as an IN₋₋ VALIDsignal, or simply to indicate valid data to subsequent circuitryconnected to the pipeline. The readiness of the following circuit orstage to accept data is indicated to each stage as the signal OUT₋₋ACCEPT, which is connected as the input to the acceptance output latchLAOUT, preferably via logic circuitry, which is described below.Similarly, the output QAOUT of the acceptance output latch LAOUT isconnected as the input to the acceptance input latch LAIN, preferablyvia logic circuitry, which is described below.

In practicing the present invention, the output signals QVIN, QVOUT fromthe validation latches LVIN, LVOUT are combined with the acceptancesignals QAOUT, OUT₋₋ ACCEPT, respectively, to form the inputs to theacceptance latches LAIN, LAOUT, respectively. In the embodimentillustrated in FIG. 4, these input signals are formed as the logicalNAND combination of the respective validation signals QVIN, QVOUT, withthe logical inverse of the respective acceptance output signals QAOUT,OUT₋₋ ACCEPT. Conventional logic gates, NAND1 and NAND2, perform theNAND operation, and the inverters INV1, INV2 form the logical inversesof the respective acceptance signals.

As is well known in the art of digital design, the output from a NANDgate is a logical "1" when any or all of its input signals are in thelogical "0" state. The output from a NAND gate is, therefore, a logical"0" only when all of its inputs are in the logical "1" state. Also wellknown in the art, is that the output of a digital inverter such as INV1is a logical "1" when its input signal is a "0" and is a "0" when itsinput signal is a "1".

The inputs to the NAND gate NAND1 are, therefore, QVIN and NOT (QAOUT),where "NOT" indicates binary inversion. Using known techniques, theinput to the acceptance latch LAIN can be resolved as follows:

    NAND(QVIN,NOT(QAOUT))=NOT(QVIN) OR QAOUT

In other words, the combination of the inverter INV1 and the NAND gateNAND1 is a logical "1" either when the signal QVIN is a "0" or thesignal QAOUT is a "1", or both. The gate NAND1 and the inverter INV1can, therefore, be implemented by a single OR gate that has one of itsinputs tied directly to the QAOUT output of the acceptance latch LAOUTand its other input tied to the inverse of the output signal QVIN of thevalidation input latch LVIN.

As is well known in the art of digital design, many latches suitable foruse as the validation and acceptance latches may have two outputs, Q andNOT(Q), that is, Q and its logical inverse. If such latches are chosen,the one input to the OR gate can, therefore, be tied directly to theNOT(Q) output of the validation latch LVIN. The gate NAND1 and theinverter INV1 can be implemented using well known conventionaltechniques. Depending on the latch architecture used, however, it may bemore efficient to use a latch without an inverting output, and toprovide instead the gate NAND1 and the inverter INV1, both of which alsocan be implemented efficiently in a silicon device. Accordingly, anyknown arrangement may be used to generate the Q signal and/or itslogical inverse.

The data and validation latches LDIN, LDOUT, LVIN and LVOUT, load theirrespective data inputs when both clock signals (PH0 at the input sideand PH1 at the output side) and the output from the acceptance latch ofthe same side are logical "1". Thus, the clock signal (PH0 for the inputlatches LDIN and LVIN) and the output of the respective acceptance latch(in this case, LAIN) are used in a logical AND manner and data is loadedonly when they are both logical "1".

In particular applications, such as CMOS implementations of the latches,the logical AND operation that controls the loading (via the illustratedCK or enabling "input") of the latches can be implemented easily in aconventional manner by connecting the respective enabling input signals(for example, PH0 and QAIN for the latches LVIN and LDIN), to the gatesof MOS transistors connected in series in the input lines of thelatches. Consequently, is necessary to provide an actual logic AND gate,which might cause problems of timing due to propagation delay inhigh-speed applications. The AND gate shown in the figures, therefore,only indicates the logical function to be performed in generating theenable signals of the various latches.

Thus, the data latch LDIN loads input data only when PH0 and QAIN areboth "1". It will latch this data when either of these two signals goesto a "0".

Although only one of the clock phase signals PH0 or PH1, is used toclock the data and validation latches at the input (and output) side ofthe pipeline stage, the other clock phase signal is used, directly, toclock the acceptance latch at the same side. In other words, theacceptance latch on either side (input or output) of a pipeline stage ispreferably clocked "out of phase" with the data and validation latcheson the same side. For example, PH1 is used to clock the acceptance inputlatch, although PH0 is used in generating the clock signal CK for thedata latch LDIN and the validation latch LVIN.

As an example of the operation of a pipeline augmented by the two-wirevalidation and acceptance circuitry assume that no valid data isinitially presented at the input to the circuit, either from a precedingpipeline stage, or from a transmission device. In other words, assumethat the validation input signal IN₋₋ VALID to the illustrated stage hasnot gone to a "1" since the system was most recently reset. Assumefurther that several clock cycles have taken place since the system waslast reset and, accordingly, the circuitry has reached a steady-statecondition. The validation input signal QVIN1 from the validation latchLVIN is, therefore, loaded as a "0" during the next positive period ofthe clock PH0. The input to the acceptance input latch LAIN (via thegate NAND1 or another equivalent gate), is, therefore, loaded as a "1"during the next positive period of the clock signal PH1. In other words,since the data in the data input latch LDIN is not valid, the stagesignals that it is ready to accept input data (since it does not holdany data worth saving).

In this example, note that the signal IN₋₋ ACCEPT is used to enable thedata and validation latches LDIN and LVIN. Since the signal IN₋₋ ACCEPTat this time is a "1", these latches effectively work as conventionaltransparent latches so that whatever data is on the IN₋₋ DATA bus simplyis loaded into the data latch LDIN as soon as the clock signal PH0 goesto a "1". Of course, this invalid data will also be loaded into the nextdata latch LDOUT of the following pipeline stage as long as the outputQAOUT from its acceptance latch is a "1".

Hence, as long as a data latch does not contain valid data, it acceptsor "loads" any data presented to it during the next positive period ofits respective clock signal. On the other hand, such invalid data is notloaded in any stage for which the acceptance signal from itscorresponding acceptance latch is low (that is, a "0"). Furthermore, theoutput signal from a validation latch (which forms the validation inputsignal to the subsequent validation latch) remains a "0" as long as thecorresponding IN₋₋ VALID (or QVIN) signal to the validation latch aslow.

When the input data to a data latch is valid, the validation signal IN₋₋VALID indicates this by rising to a "1". The output of the correspondingvalidation latch then rises to a "1" on the next rising edge of itsrespective clock phase signal. For example, the validation input signalQVIN of Latch LVIN rises to a "1" when its corresponding IN₋₋ VALIDsignal goes high (that is, rises to a "1") on the next rising edge ofthe clock phase signal PH0.

Assume now, instead, that the data input latch LDIN contains valid data.If the data output latch LDOUT is ready to accept new data, itsacceptance signal QAOUT will be a "1". In this case, during the nextpositive period of the clock signal PH1, the data latch LDOUT andvalidation latch LVOUT will be enabled, and the data latch LDOUT willload the data present at its input. This will occur before the nextrising edge of the other clock signal PH0, since the clock signals arenon-overlapping. At the next rising edge of PH0, the preceding datalatch (LDIN) will, therefore, not latch in new input data from thepreceding stage until the data output latch LDOUT has safely latched thedata transferred from the latch LDIN.

Accordingly, the same sequence is followed by every adjacent pair ofdata latches (within a stage or between adjacent stages) that are ableto accept data, since they will be operating based on alternate phasesof the clock. Any data latch that is not ready to accept new databecause it contains valid data that cannot yet be passed, will have anoutput acceptance signal (the QA output from its acceptance latch LA)that is LOW, and its data latch LDIN or LDOUT will not be loaded. Hence,as long as the acceptance signal (the output from the acceptance latch)of a given stage or side (input or output) of a stage is LOW, itscorresponding data latch will not be loaded.

FIG. 4 also shows a reset feature included in a preferred embodiment. Inthe illustrated example, a reset signal NOTRESET0 is connected to aninverting reset input R (inversion is hereby indicated by a smallcircle, as is conventional) of the validation output latch LVOUT. As iswell known, this means that the validation latch LVOUT will be forced tooutput a "0" whenever the reset signal NOTRESET0 becomes a "0". Oneadvantage of resetting the latch when the reset signal goes low (becomesa "0") is that a break in transmission will reset the latches. They willthen be in their "null" or reset state whenever a valid transmissionbegins and the reset signal goes HIGH. The reset signal NOTRESET0,therefore, operates as a digital "ON/OFF" switch, such that it must beat a HIGH value in order to activate the pipeline.

Note that it is not necessary to reset all of the latches that holdvalid data in the pipeline. As depicted in FIG. 4, the validation inputlatch LVIN is not directly reset by the reset signal NOTRESET0, butrather is reset indirectly. Assume that the reset signal NOTRESET0 dropsto a "0". The validation output signal QVOUT also drops to a "0",regardless of its previous state, whereupon the input to the acceptanceoutput latch LAOUT (via the gate NAND1) goes HIGH. The acceptance outputsignal QAOUT also rises to a "1". This QAOUT value of "1" is thentransferred as a "1" to the input of the acceptance input latch LAINregardless of the state of the validation input signal QVIN. Theacceptance input signal QAIN then rises to a "1" at the next rising edgeof the clock signal PH1. Assuming that the validation signal IN₋₋ VALIDhas been correctly reset to a "0", then upon the subsequent rising edgeof the clock signal PH0, the output from the validation latch LVIN willbecome a "0", as it would have done if it had been reset directly.

As this example illustrates, it is only necessary to reset thevalidation latch in only one side of each stage (including the finalstage) in order to reset all validation latches. In fact, in manyapplications, it will not be necessary to reset every other validationlatch: If the reset signal NOTRESET0 can be guaranteed to be low duringmore than one complete cycle of both phases PH0, PH1 of the clock, thenthe "automatic reset" (a backwards propagation of the reset signal) willoccur for validation latches in preceding pipeline stages. Indeed, ifthe reset signal is held low for at least as many full cycles of bothphases of the clock as there are pipeline stages, it will only benecessary to directly reset the validation output latch in the finalpipeline stage.

FIGS. 5a and 5b (referred to collectively as FIG. 5) illustrate a timingdiagram showing the relationship between the non-overlapping clocksignals PH0, PH1, the effect of the reset signal, and the holding andtransfer of data for the different permutations of validation andacceptance signals into and between the two illustrated sides of apipeline stage configured in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4. In theexample illustrated in the timing diagram of FIG. 5, it has been assumedthat the outputs from the data latches LDIN, LDOUT are passed withoutfurther manipulation by intervening logic blocks B1, B2. This is by wayof example and not necessarily by way of limitation. It is to beunderstood that any combinatorial logic structures may be includedbetween the data latches of consecutive pipeline stages, or between theinput and output sides of a single pipeline stage. The actualillustrated values for the input data (for example the HEX data words"aa" or "04") are also merely illustrative. As is mentioned above, theinput data bus may have any width (and may even be analog), as long asthe data latches or other storage devices are able to accommodate andlatch or store each bit or value of the input word.

Preferred Data Structure--"tokens"

In the sample application shown in FIG. 4, each stage processes allinput data, since there is no control circuitry that excludes any stagefrom allowing input data to pass through its combinatorial logic blockB1, B2, and so forth. To provide greater flexibility, the presentinvention includes a data structure in which "tokens" are used todistribute data and control information throughout the system. Eachtoken consists of a series of binary bits separated into one or moreblocks of token words. Furthermore, the bits fall into one of threetypes: address bits (A), data bits (D)), or an extension bit (E). Assumeby way of example and, not necessarily by way of limitation, teat datais transferred as words over an 8-bit bus with a 1-bit extension bitline. An example of a four-word token is, in order of transmission:

    ______________________________________                                        First word:                                                                            E     A      A   A    D   D    D    D    D                           Second word:                                                                           E     D      D   D    D   D    D    D    D                           Third word:                                                                            E     D      D   D    D   D    D    D    D                           Fourth word:                                                                           E     D      D   D    D   D    D    D    D                           ______________________________________                                    

Note that the extension bit E is used as an addition (preferably) toeach data word. In addition, the address field can be of variable lengthand is preferably transmitted just after the extension bit of the firstword.

Tokens, therefore, consist of one or more words of (binary) digital datain the present invention. Each of these words is transferred in sequenceand preferably in parallel, although this method of transfer is notnecessary: serial data transfer is also possible using known techniques.For example, in a video parser, control information is transmitted inparallel, whereas data is transmitted serially.

As the example illustrates, each token has, preferably at the start, anaddress field (the string of A-bits) that identifies the type of datathat is contained in the token. In most applications, a single word orportion of a word is sufficient to transfer the entire address field,but this is not necessary in accordance with the invention, so long aslogic circuitry is included in the corresponding pipeline stages that isable to store some representation of partial address fields long enoughfor the stages to receive and decode the entire address field.

Note that no dedicated wires or registers are required to transmit theaddress field. It is transmitted using the data bits. As is explainedbelow, a pipeline stage will not be slowed down if it is not intended tobe activated by the particular address field, i.e., the stage will beable to pass along the token without delay.

The remainder of the data in the token following the address field isnot constrained by the use of tokens. These D-data bits may take on anyvalues and the meaning attached to these bits is of no importance here.That is, the meaning of the data can vary, for example, depending uponwhere the data is positioned within the system at a particular point intime. The number of data bits D appended after the address field can beas long or as short as required, and the number of data words indifferent tokens may vary greatly. The address field and extension bitare used to convey control signals to the pipeline stages. Because thenumber of words in the data field (the string of D bits) can bearbitrary, as can be the information conveyed in the data field can alsovary accordingly. The explanation below is, therefore, directed to theuse of the address and extension bits.

In the present invention, tokens are a particularly useful datastructure when a number of blocks of circuitry are connected together ina relatively simple configuration. The simplest configuration is apipeline of processing steps. For example, in the one shown in FIG. 1.The use of tokens, however, is not restricted to use on a pipelinestructure.

Assume once again that each box represents a complete pipeline stage. Inthe pipeline of FIG. 1, data flows from left to right in the diagram.Data enters the machine and passes into processing Stage A. This may ormay not modify the data and it then passes the data to Stage B. Themodification, if any, may be arbitrarily complicated and, in general,there will not be the same number of data items flowing into any stageas flow out. Stage B modifies the data again and passes it onto Stage C,and so forth. In a scheme such as this, it is impossible for data toflow in the opposite direction, so that, for example, Stage C cannotpass data to Stage A. This restriction is often perfectly acceptable.

On the other hand, it is very desirable for Stage A to be able tocommunicate information to Stage C even though there is no directconnection between the two blocks. Stage A and C communication is onlyvia Stage B. One advantage of the tokens is their ability to achievethis kind of communication. Since any processing stage that does notrecognize a token simply passes it on unaltered to the next block.

According to this example, an extension bit is transmitted along withthe address and data fields in each token so that a processing stage canpass on a token (which can be of arbitrary length) without having todecode its address at all. According to this example, any token in whichthe extension bit is HIGH (a "1") is followed by a subsequent word whichis part of the same token. This word also has an extension bit, whichindicates whether there is a further token word in the token. When astage encounters a token word whose extension bit is LOW (a "0"), it isknown to be the last word of the token. The next word is then assumed tobe the first word of a new token.

Note that although the simple pipeline of processing stages isparticularly useful, it will be appreciated that tokens may be appliedto more complicated configurations of processing elements. An example ofa more complicated processing element is described below.

It is not necessary, in accordance with the present invention, to usethe state of the extension bit to signal the last word of a given tokenby giving it an extension bit set to "0". One alternative to thepreferred scheme is to move the extension bit so that it indicates thefirst word of a token instead of the last. This can be accomplished withappropriate changes in the decoding hardware.

The advantage of using the extension bit of the present invention tosignal the last word in a token rather than the first, is that it isoften useful to modify the behavior of a block of circuitry dependingupon whether or not a token has extension bits. An example of this is atoken that activates a stage that processes video quantization valuesstored in a quantization table (typically a memory device). For example,a table containing 64 eight-bit arbitrary binary integers.

In order to load a new quantization table into the quantizer stage ofthe pipeline, a "QUANT₋₋ TABLE" token is sent to the quantizer. In sucha case the token, for example, consists of 65 token words. The firstword contains the code "QUANT₋₋ TABLE", i.e., build a quantizationtable. This is followed by 64 words, which are the integers of thequantization table.

When encoding video data, it is occasionally necessary to transmit sucha quantization table. In order to accomplish this function, a QUANT₋₋TABLE token with no extension words can be sent to the quantizer stage.On seeing this token, and noting that the extension bit of its firstword is LOW, the quantizer stage can read out its quantization table andconstruct a QUANT₋₋ TABLE token which includes the 64 quantization tablevalues. The extension bit of the first word (which was LOW) is changedso that it is HIGH and the token continues, with HIGH extension bits,until the new end of the token, indicated by a LOW extension bit on thesixty fourth quantization table value. This proceeds in the typical waythrough the system and is encoded into the bit stream.

Continuing with the example, the quantizer may either load a newquantization table into its own memory device or read out its tabledepending on whether the first word of the QUANT₋₋ ABLE token has itsextension bit set or not.

The choice of whether to use the extension bit to signal the first orlast token word in a token will, therefore, depend on the system inwhich the pipeline will be used. Both alternatives are possible inaccordance with the invention.

Another alternative to the preferred extension bit scheme is to includea length count at the start of the token. Such an arrangement may, forexample, be efficient if a token is very long. For example, assume thata typical token in a given application is 1000 words long. Using theillustrated extension bit scheme (with the bit attached to each tokenword), the token would require 1000 additional bits to contain all theextension bits. However, only ten bits would be required to encode thetoken length in binary form.

Although there are, therefore, uses for long tokens, experience hasshown that there are many uses for short tokens. Here the preferredextension bit scheme is advantageous. If a token is only one word long,then only one bit is required to signal this. However, a counting schemewould typically require the same ten bits as before.

Disadvantages of a length count scheme include the following: 1) it isinefficient for short tokens; 2) it places a maximum length restrictionon a token (with only ten bits, no more than 1023 words can be counted);3) the length of a token must be known in advance of generating thecount (which is presumably at the start of the token); 4) every block ofcircuitry that deals with tokens would need to be provided with hardwareto count words; and 5) if the count should get corrupted (due to a datatransmission error) it is not clear whether recovery can be achieved.

The advantages of the extension bit scheme in accordance with thepresent invention include: 1) pipeline stages need not include a blockof circuitry that decodes every token since unrecognized tokens can bepassed on correctly by considering only the extension bit; 2) the codingof the extension bit is identical for all tokens; 3) there is no limitplaced on the length of a token; 4) the scheme is efficient (in terms ofoverhead to represent the length of the token) for short tokens; and 5)error recovery is naturally achieved. If an extension bit is corruptedthen one random token will be generated (for an extension bit corruptedfrom "1" to "0") or a token will be lost (extension bit corrupted "0" to"1"). Furthermore, the problem is localized to the tokens concerned.After that token, correct operation is resumed automatically.

In addition, the length of the address field may be varied. This ishighly advantageous since it allows the most common tokens to besqueezed into the minimum number of words. This, in turn, is of greatimportance in video data pipeline systems since it ensures that allprocessing stages can be continuously running at full bandwidth.

In accordance to the present invention, in order to allow variablelength address fields, the addresses are chosen so that a short addressfollowed by random data can never be confused with a longer address. Thepreferred technique for encoding the address field (which also serves asthe "code" for activating an intended pipeline stage) is the well-knowntechnique first described by Huffman, hence the common name "HuffmanCode". Nevertheless, it will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill inthe art, that other coding schemes may also be successfully employed.

Although Huffman encoding is well understood in the field of digitaldesign, the following example provides a general background:

Huffman codes consist of words made up of a string of symbols (in thecontext of digital systems, such as the present invention, the symbolsare usually binary digits). The code words may have variable length andthe special property of Huffman code words is that a code word is chosenso that none of the longer code words start with the symbols that form ashorter code word. In accordance with the invention, token addressfields are preferably (although not necessarily) chosen using knownHuffman encoding techniques.

Also in the present invention, the address field preferably starts inthe most significant bit (MSB) of the first word token. (Note that thedesignation of the MSB is arbitrary and that this scheme can be modifiedto accommodate various designations of the MSB.) The address fieldcontinues through contiguous bits of lesser significance. If, in a givenapplication, a token address requires more than one token word, theleast significant bit in any given word the address field will continuein the most significant bit of the next word. The minimum length of theaddress field is one bit.

Any of several known hardware structures can be used to generate thetokens used in the present invention. One such structure is amicroprogrammed state machine. However, known nicroprocessors or otherdevices may also be used.

The principle advantage of the token scheme in accordance with thepresent invention, is its adaptability to unanticipated needs. Forexample, if a new token is introduced, it is most likely that this willaffect only a small number of pipeline stages. The most likely case isthat only two stages or blocks of circuitry are affected, i.e., the oneblock that generates the tokens in the first place and the block orstage that has been newly designed or modified to deal with this newtoken. Note that it is not necessary to modify any other pipelinestages. Rather, these will be able to deal with the new token withoutmodification to their designs because they will not recognize it andwill, accordingly, pass that token on unmodified.

This ability of the present invention to leave substantially existingdesigned devices unaffected has clear advantages. It may be possible toleave some semiconductor chips in a chip set completely unaffected by adesign improvement in some other chips in the set. This is advantageousboth from the perspective of a customer and from that of a chipmanufacturer. Even if modifications mean that all chips are affected bythe design change (a situation that becomes increasingly likely aslevels of integration progress so that the number of chips in a systemdrops) there will still be the considerable advantage of bettertime-to-market than can be achieved, since the same design can bereused.

In particular, note the situation that occurs when if becomes necessaryto extend the token set to include two word addresses. Even in thiscase, it is still not necessary to modify an existing design. Tokendecoders in the pipeline stages will attempt to decode the first word ofsuch a token and will conclude that it does not recognize the token. Itwill then pass on the token unmodified using the extension bit toperform this operation correctly. It will not attempt to decode thesecond word of the token (even though this contains address bits)because it will "assume" that the second word is part of the data fieldof a token that it does not recognize.

In many cases, a pipeline stage or a connected block of circuitry willmodify a token. This usually, but not necessarily, takes the form ofmodifying the data field of a token. In addition, it is common for thenumber of data words in the token to be modified, either by removingcertain data words or by adding new ones. In some cases, tokens areremoved entirely from the token stream.

In most applications, pipeline stages will typically only decode (beactivated by) a few tokens; the stage does not recognize other tokensand passes them on unaltered. In a large number of cases, only one tokenis decoded, the DATA Token word itself.

In many applications, the operation of a particular stage will dependupon the results of its own past operations. The "state" of the stage,thus, depends on its previous states. In other words, the stage dependsupon stored state information, which is another way of saying it mustretain some information about its own history one or more clock cyclesago. The present invention is well-suited for use in pipelines thatinclude such "state machine" stages, as well as for use in applicationsin which the latches in the data path are simple pipeline latches.

The suitability of the two-wire interface, in accordance with thepresent invention, for such "state machine" circuits is a significantadvantage of the invention. This is especially true where a data path isbeing controlled by a state machine. In this case, the two-wireinterface technique above-described may be used to ensure that the"current state" of the machine stays in step with the data which it iscontrolling in the pipeline.

FIG. 6 shows a simplified block diagram of one example of circuitryincluded in a pipeline stage for decoding a token address field. Thisillustrates a pipeline stage that has the characteristics of a "statemachine". Each word of a token includes an "extension bit" which is HIGHif there are more words in the token or LOW if this is the last word ofthe token. If this is the last word of a token, the next valid data wordis the start of a new token and, therefore, its address must be decoded.The decision as to whether or not to decode the token address in anygiven word, thus, depends upon knowing the value of the previousextension bit.

For the sake of simplicity only, the two-wire interface (with theacceptance and validation signals and latches) is not illustrated andall details dealing with resetting the circuit are omitted. As before,an 8-bit data word is assumed by way of example only and not by way oflimitation.

This exemplifying pipeline stage delays the data bits and the extensionbit by one pipeline stage. It also decodes the DATA Token. At the pointwhen the first word of the DATA Token is presented at the output of thecircuit, the signal "DATA₋₋ ADDR" is created and set HIGH. The data bitsare delayed by the latches LDIN and LDOUT, each of which is repeatedeight times for the eight data bits used in this example (correspondingto an 8-input, 8-output latch). Similarly, the extension bit is delayedby extension bit latches LEIN and LEOUT.

In this example, the latch LEPREV is provided to store the most recentstate of the extension bit. The value of the extension bit is loadedinto LEIN and is then loaded into LEOUT on the next rising edge of thenon-overlapping clock phase signal PH1. Latch LEOUT, thus, contains thevalue of the current extension bit, but only during the second half ofthe non-overlapping, two-phase clock. Latch LEPREV, however, loads thisextension bit value on the next rising edge of the clock signal PH0,that is, the same signal that enables the extension bit input latchLEIN. The output QEPREV of the latch LEPREV, thus, will hold the valueof the extension bit during the previous PH0 clock phase.

The five bits of the data word output from the inverting Q output, plusthe non-inverted MD 2!, of the latch LDIN are combined with the previousextension bit value QEPREV in a series of logic gates NAND1, NAND2, andNOR1, whose operations are well known in the art of digital design. Thedesignation "N₋₋ MD m! indicates the logical inverse of bit m of themid-data word MD 7:0!. Using known techniques of Boolean algebra, it canbe shown that the output signal SA from this logic block (the outputfrom NOR1) is HIGH (a "1") only when the previous extension bit is a "0"(QPREV="0") and the data word at the output of the non-inverting Q latch(the original input word) LDIN has the structure "000001xx", that is,the five high-order bits MD 7!-MD 3! bits are all "0" and the bit MD 2!is a "1" and the bits in the Zero-one positions have any arbitraryvalue.

There are, thus, four possible data words (there are four permutationsof "xx") that will cause SA and, therefore, the output of the addresssignal latch LADDR to whose input SA is connected, to become HIGH. Inother words, this stage provides an activation signal (DATA₋₋ ADDR="1")only when one of the four possible proper tokens is presented and onlywhen the previous extension bit was a zero, that is, the previous dataword was the last word in the previous series of token words, whichmeans that the current token word is the first one in the current token.

When the signal QPREV from latch LEPREV is LOW, the value at the outputof the latch LDIN is therefore the first word of a new token. The gatesNAND1, NAND2 and NOR1 decode the DATA token (000001xx). This addressdecoding signal SA is, however, delayed in latch LADDR so that thesignal DATA₋₋ ADDR has the same timing as the output data OUT₋₋ DATA andOUT₋₋ EXTN.

FIG. 7 is another simple example of a state-dependent pipeline stage inaccordance with the present invention, which generates the signal LAST₋₋OUT₋₋ EXTN to indicate the value of the previous output extension bitOUT₋₋ EXTN. One of the two enabling signals (at the CK inputs) to thepresent and last extension bit latches, LEOUT and LEPREV, respectively,is derived from the gate AND1 such that these latches only load a newvalue for them when the data is valid and is being accepted (the Qoutputs are HIGH from the output validation and acceptance latches LVOUTand LAOUT, respectively). In this way, they only hold valid extensionbits and are not loaded with spurious values associated with data thatis not valid. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, the two-wirevalid/accept logic includes the OR1 and OR2 gates with input signalsconsisting of the downstream acceptance signals and the inverting outputof the validation latches LVIN and LVOUT, respectively. This illustratesone way in which the gates NAND1/2 and INV1/2 in FIG. 4 can be replacedif the latches have inverting outputs.

Although this is an extremely simple example of a "state-dependent"pipeline stage, i.e., since it depends on the state of only a singlebit, it is generally true that all latches holding state informationwill be updated only when data is actually transferred between pipelinestages. In other words, only when the data is both valid and beingaccepted by the next stage. Accordingly, care must be taken to ensurethat such latches are properly reset.

The generation and use of tokens in accordance with the presentinvention, thus, provides several advantages over known encodingtechniques for data transfer through a pipeline.

First, the tokens, as described above, allow for variable length addressfields (and can utilize Huffman coding for example) to provide efficientrepresentation of common tokens.

Second, consistent encoding of the length of a token allows the end of atoken (and hence the start of the next token) to be processed correctly(including simple non-manipulative transfer), even if the token is notrecognized by the token decoder circuitry in a given pipeline stage.

Third, rules and hardware structures for the handling of unrecognizedtokens (that is, for passing them on unmodified) allow communicationbetween one stage and a downstream stage that is not its nearestneighbor in the pipeline. This also increases the expandability andefficient adaptability of the pipeline since it allows for futurechanges in the token set without requiring large scale redesigning ofexisting pipeline stages. The tokens of the present invention areparticularly useful when used in conjunction with the two-wire interfacethat is described above and below.

As an example of the above, FIGS. 8a and 8b, taken together (andreferred to collectively below as FIG. 8), depict a block diagram of apipeline stage whose function is as follows. If the stage is processinga predetermined token (known in this example as the DATA token), then itwill duplicate every word in this token with the exception of the firstone, which includes the address field of the DATA token. If, on theother hand, the stage is processing any other kind of token, it willdelete every word. The overall effect is that, at the output, only DATATokens appear and each word within these tokens is repeated twice.

Many of the components of this illustrated system may be the same asthose described in the much simpler structures shown in FIGS. 4, 6, and7. This illustrates a significant advantage. More complicated pipelinestages will still enjoy the same benefits of flexibility and elasticity,since the same two-wire interface may be used with little or noadaptation.

The data duplication stage shown in FIG. 8 is merely one example of theendless number of different types of operations that a pipeline stagecould perform in any given application. This "duplication stage"illustrates, however, a stage that can form a "bottleneck", so that thepipeline according to this embodiment will "pack together".

A Bottleneck" can be any stage that either takes a relatively long timeto perform its operations, or that creates more data in the pipelinethan it receives. This example also illustrates that the two-wireaccept/valid interface according to this embodiment can be adapted veryeasily to different applications.

The duplication stage shown in FIG. 8 also has two latches LEIN andLEOUT that, as in the example shown in FIG. 6, latch the state of theextension bit at the input and at the output of the stage, respectively.As FIG. 8a shows, the input extension latch LEIN is clockedsynchronously with the input data latch LDIN and the validation signalIN₋₋ VALID.

In the duplication stage, the output from the data latch LDIN formsintermediate data referred to as MID₋₋ DATA. This intermediate data wordis loaded into the data output latch LDOPT only when an intermediateacceptance signal (labeled "MID₋₋ ACCEPT" in FIG. 8a) is set HIGH.

The portion of the circuitry shown in FIG. 8 below the acceptancelatches LAIN, LAOUT, shows the circuits that are added to the basicpipeline structure to generate the various internal control signals usedto duplicate data. These include a "DATA₋₋ TOKEN" signal that indicatesthat the circuitry is currently processing a valid DATA Token, and aNOT₋₋ DUPLICATE signal which is used to control duplication of data.When the circuitry is processing a DATA Token, the NOT₋₋ DUPLICATEsignal toggles between a HIGH and a LOW state and this causes each wordin the token to be duplicated once (but no more times). When thecircuitry is not processing a valid DATA Token then the NOT₋₋ DUPLICATEsignal is held in a HIGH state. Accordingly, this means that the tokenwords that are being processed are not duplicated.

As FIG. 8a illustrates, the upper six bits of 8-bit intermediate dataword and the output signal QI1 from the latch LI1 form inputs to a groupof logic gates NOR1, NOR2, NAND18. The output signal from the gateNAND18 is labeled S1. Using well-known Boolean algebra, it can be shownthat the signal S1 is a "0" only when the output signal QI1 is a "1" andthe MID₋₋ DATA word has the following structure: "000001xx", that is,the upper five bits are all "0", the bit MID₋₋ DATA 2! is a "1" and thebits in the MID₋₋ DATA 1! and MID₋₋ DATA 0! positions have any arbitraryvalue. Signal S1, therefore, acts as a "token identification signal"which is now only when the MID₋₋ DATA signal has a predeterminedstructure and the output from the latch LI1 is a "1". The nature of thelatch LI1 and its output QI1 is explained further below.

Latch LO1 performs the function of latching the last value of theintermediate extension bit (labeled "MID₋₋ EXTN" and as signal S4), andit loads this value on the next rising edge of the clock phase PH0 intothe latch LI1, whose output is the bit QI1 and is one of the inputs tothe token decoding logic group that forms signal S1. Signal S1, as isexplained above, may only drop to a "0" if the signal QI1 is a "1" (andthe MID₋₋ DATA signal has the predetermined structure). Signal S1 may,therefore, only drop to a "0" whenever the last extension bit was "0",indicating that the previous token has ended. Therefore, the MID₋₋ DATAword is the first data word in a new token.

The latches LO2 and LI2 together with the NAND gates NAND20 and NAND22form storage for the signal, DATA₋₋ TOKEN. In the normal situation, thesignal QI1 at the input to NAND20 and the signal S1 at the input toNAND22 will both be at logic "1". It can be shown, again by thetechniques of Boolean algebra, that in this situation these NAND gatesoperate in the same manner as inverters, that is, the signal QI2 fromthe output of latch LI2 is inverted in NAND20 and then this signal isinverted again by NAND22 to form the signal S2. In this case, sincethere are two logical inversions in this path, the signal S2 will havethe same value as QI2.

It can also be seen that the signal DATA₋₋ TOKEN at the output of latchLO2 forms the input to latch LI2. As a result, as long as the situationremains in which both QI1 and S1 are HIGH, the signal DATA₋₋ TOKEN willretain its state whether "0" or "1"). This is true even though the clocksignals PH0 and PH1 are clocking the latches (LI2 and LO2 respectively).The value of DATA₋₋ TOKEN can only change when one or both of thesignals QI1 and S1 are "0".

As explained earlier, the signal QI1 will be "0" when the previousextension bit was "0". Thus, It will be "0" whenever the MID₋₋ DATAvalue is the first word of a token (and, thus, includes the addressfield for the token). In this situation, the signal S1 may be either "0"or "1". As explained earlier, signal S1 will be "0" if the MID₋₋ DATAword has the predetermined structure that in this example indicates a"DATA" Token. If the MID₋₋ DATA word has any other structure,(indicating that the token is some other token, not a DATA Token), S1will be "1".

If QI1 is "0" and S1 is "1", this indicates there is some token otherthan a DATA Token. As is well known in the field of digital electronics,the output of NAND20 will be "1". The NAND gate NAND22 will invert this(as previously explained) and the signal S2 will thus be a "0". As aresult, this "0" value will be loaded into latch LO2 at the start of thenext PH1 clock phase and the DATA₋₋ TOKEN signal will become "0",indicating that the circuitry is not processing a DATA token.

If QI1 is "0" and S0 is "0", thereby indicating a DATA token, then thesignal S2 will be "1" (regardless of the other input to NAND22 from theoutput of NAND20). As a result, this "1" value will be loaded into latchLO2 at the start of the next PH1 clock phase and the DATA₋₋ TOKEN signalwill become "1", indicating that the circuitry is processing a DATAtoken.

The NOT₋₋ DUPLICATE signal (the output signal QO3) is similarly loadedinto the latch LI3 on the next rising edge of the clock PH0. The outputsignal QI3 from the latch LI3 is combined with the output signal QI2 ina gate NAND24 to form the signal S3. As before, Boolean algebra can beused to show that the signal S3 is a "0" only when both of the signalsQI2 and QI3 have the value "1". If the signal QI2 becomes a "0", thatis, the DATA TOKEN signal is a "0", then the signal S3 becomes a "1". Inother words, if there is not a valid DATA TOKEN (QI2=0) or the data wordis not a duplicate (QI3=0), then the signal S3 goes high.

Assume now, that the DATA TOKEN signal remains HIGH for more than oneclock signal. Since the NOT₋₋ DUPLICATE signal (QO3) is "fed back" tothe latch LI3 and will be inverted by the gate NAND 24 (since its otherinput QI2 is held HIGH), the output signal QO3 will toggle between "0"and "1". If there is no valid DATA Token, however, the signal QI2 willbe a "0", and the signal S3 and the output QO3, will be forced HIGHuntil the DATE₋₋ TOKEN signal once again goes to a "1".

The output QO3 (the NOT₋₋ DUPLICATE signal) is also fed back and iscombined with the output QA1 from the acceptance latch LAIN in a seriesof logic gates (NAND16 and INV16, which together form an AND gate) thathave as their output a "1", only when the signals QA1 and QO3 both havethe value "1". As FIG. 8a shows, the output from the AND gate (the gateNAND16 followed by the gate INV16) also forms the acceptance signal,IN₋₋ ACCEPT, which is used as described above in the two-wire interfacestructure.

The acceptance signal IN₋₋ ACCEPT is also used as an enabling signal tothe latches LDIN, LEIN, and LVIN. As a result, if the NOT₋₋ DUPLICATEsignal is low, the acceptance signal IN₋₋ ACCEPT will also be low, andall three of these latches will be disabled and will hold the valuesstored at their outputs. The stage will not accept new data until theNOT₋₋ DUPLICATE signal becomes HIGH. This is in addition to therequirements described above for forcing the output from the acceptancelatch LAIN high.

As long as there is a valid DATA₋₋ TOKEN (the DATA₋₋ TOKEN signal QO2 isa "1"), the signal QO3 will toggle between the HIGH and LOW states, sothat the input latches will be enabled and will be able to accept data,at most, during every other complete cycle of both clock phases PH0,PH1. The additional condition that the following stage be prepared toaccept data, as indicated by a "HIGH" OUT₋₋ ACCEPT signal, must, ofcourse, still be satisfied. The output latch LDOUT will, therefore,place the same data word onto the output bus OUT₋₋ DATA for at least twofull clock cycles. The OUT₋₋ VALID signal will be a "1" only when thereis both a valid DATA₋₋ TOKEN (QO2 HIGH) and the validation signal QVOUTis HUGH.

The signal QEIN, which is the extension bit corresponding to MID₋₋ DATA,is combined with the signal S3 in a series of logic gates (INV10 andNAND10) to form a signal S4. During presentation of a DATA Token, eachdata word MID₋₋ DATA will be repeated by loading it into the outputlatch LDOUT twice. During the first of these, S4 will be forced to a "1"by the action of NAND10. The signal S4 is loaded in the latch LEOUT toform OUTEXTN at the same time as MID₋₋ DATA is loaded into LDOUT to formOUT₋₋ DATA 7:0!.

Thus, the first time a given MID₋₋ DATA is loaded into LEOUT, theassociated OUTEXTN will be forced high, whereas, on the second occasion,OUTEXTN will be the same as the signal QEIN. Now consider the situationduring the very last word of a token in which QEIN is known to be low.During the first time MID₋₋ DATA is loaded into LDOUT, OUTEXTN will be"1", and during the second time, OUTEXTN will be "0", indicating thetrue end of the token.

The output signal QVIN from the validation latch LVIN is combined withthe signal QI3 in a similar gate combination (INV12 and NAND12) to forma signal S5. Using known Boolean techniques, it can be shown that thesignal S5 is HIGH either when the validation signal QVIN is HIGH, orwhen the signal QI3 is low (indicating that the data is a duplicate).The signal S5 is loaded into the validation output latch LVOUT at thesame time that MID₋₋ DATA is loaded into LDOUT and the intermediateextension bit (signal S4) is loaded into LEOUT. Signal S5 is alsocombined with the signal QO2 (the data token signal) in the logic gatesNAND30 and INV30 to form the output validation signal OUT₋₋ VALID. Aswas mentioned earlier, OUT₋₋ VALID is HIGH only when there is a validtoken and the validation signal QVOUT is high.

In the present invention, the MID₋₋ ACCEPT signal is combined with thesignal S5 in a series of logic gates (NAND26 and INV26) that perform thewell-known AND function to form a signal S6 that is used as one of thetwo enabling signals to the latches LO1, LO2 and LO3. The signal S6rises to a "1" when the MID₋₋ ACCEPT signal is HIGH and when either thevalidation signal QVIN is high, or when the token is a duplicate (QI3 isa "0"). If the signal MID₋₋ ACCEPT is HIGH, the latches LO1-LO3 will,therefore, be enabled when the clock signal PH1 is high whenever validinput data is loaded at the input of the stage, or when the latched datais a duplicate.

From the discussion above, one can see that the stage shown in FIGS. 8aand 8b will receive and transfer data between stages under the controlof the validation and acceptance signals, as in previous embodiments,with the exception that the output signal from the acceptance latch LAINat the input side is combined with the toggling duplication signal sothat a data word will be output twice before a new word will beaccepted.

The various logic gates such as NAND16 and INV16 may, of course, bereplaced by equivalent logic circuitry (in this case, a single ANDgate). Similarly, if the latches LEIN and LVIN, for example, haveinverting outputs, the inverters INV10 and INV12 will not be necessary.Rather, the corresponding input to the gates NAND10 and NAND12 can betied directly to the inverting outputs of these latches. As long as theproper logical operation is performed, the stage will operate in thesame manner. Data words and extension bits will still be duplicated.

One should note that the duplication function that the illustrated stageperforms will not be performed unless the first data word of the tokenhas a "1" in the third position of the word and "0's" in the fivehigh-order bits. (Of course, the required pattern can easily be changedand set by selecting other logic gates and interconnections other thanthe NOR1, NOR2, NND18 gates shown.)

In addition, as FIG. 8 shows, the OUT₋₋ VALID signal will be forced lowduring the entire token unless the first data word has the structuredescribed above. This has the effect that all tokens except the one thatcauses the duplication process will be deleted from the token stream,since a device connected to the output terminals (OUTDATA, OUTEXTN andOUTVALID) will not recognize these token words as valid data.

As before, both validation latches LVIN, LVOUT in the stage can be resetby a single conductor NOT₋₋ RESET0, and a single resetting input R onthe downstream latch LVOUT, with the reset signal being propagatedbackwards to cause the upstream validation latch to be forced low on thenext clock cycle.

It should be noted that in the example shown in FIG. 8, the duplicationof data contained in DATA tokens serves only as an example of the way inwhich circuitry may manipulate the ACCEPT and VALID signals so that moredata is leaving the pipeline stage than that which is arriving at theinput. Similarly, the example in FIG. 8 removes all non-DATA tokenspurely as an illustration of the way in which circuitry may manipulatethe VALID signal to remove data from the stream. In most typicalapplications, however, a pipeline stage will simply pass on any tokensthat it does not recognize, unmodified, so that other stages furtherdown the pipeline may act upon them if required.

FIGS. 9a and 9b taken together illustrate an example of a timing diagramfor the data duplication circuit shown in FIGS. 8a and 8b. As before,the timing diagram shows the relationship between the two-phase clocksignals, the various internal and external control signals, and themanner in which data is clocked between the input and output sides ofthe stage and is duplicated.

Referring now more particularly to FIG. 10, there is shown areconfigurable process stage in accordance with one aspect of thepresent invention.

Input latches 34 receive an input over a first bus 31. A first outputfrom the input latches 34 is passed over line 32 to a token decodesubsystem 33. A second output from the input latches 34 is passed as afirst input over line 35 to a processing unit 36. A first output fromthe token decode subsystem 33 is passed over line 37 as a second inputto the processing unit 36. A second output from the token decode 33 ispassed over line 40 to an action identification unit 39. The actionidentification unit 39 also receives input from registers 43 and 44 overline 46. The registers 43 and 44 hold the state of the machine as awhole. This state is determined by the history of tokens previouslyreceived. The output from the action identification unit 39 is passedover line 38 as a third input to the processing unit 36. The output fromthe processing unit 36 is passed to output latches 41. The output fromthe output latches 41 is passed over a second bus 42.

Referring now to FIG. 11, a Start Code Detector (SCD) 51 receives inputover a two-wire interface 52. This input can be either in the form ofDATA tokens or as data bits in a data stream. A first output from theStart Code Detector 51 is passed over line 53 to a first logicalfirst-in first-out buffer (FIFO) 54. The output from the first FIFO 54is logically passed over line 55 as a first input to a Huffman decoder56. A second output from the Start Code Detector 51 is passed over line57 as a first input to a DRAM interface 58. The DRAM interface 58 alsoreceives input from a buffer manager 59 over line 60. Signals aretransmitted to and received from external DRAM (not shown) by the DRAMinterface 58 over line 61. A first output from the DRAM interface 58 ispassed over line 62 as a first physical input to the Huffman decoder 56.

The output from the Huffman decoder 56 is passed over line 63 as aninput to an Index to Data Unit (ITOD) 64. The Huffman decoder 56 and theITOD 64 work together as a single logical unit. The output from the ITOD64 is passed over line 65 to an arithmetic logic unit (ALU) 66. A firstoutput from the ALU 66 is passed over line 67 to a read-only memory(ROM) state machine 68. The output from the ROM state machine 68 ispassed over line 69 as a second physical input to the Huffman decoder56. A second-output from the ALU 66 is passed over line 70 to a TokenFormatter (T/F) 71.

A first output 72 from the T/F 71 of the present invention is passedover line 72 to a second FIFO 73. The output from the second FIFO 73 ispassed over line 74 as a first input to an inverse modeller 75. A secondoutput from the T/F 71 is passed over line 76 as a third input to theDRAM interface 58. A third output from the DRAM interface 58 is passedover line 77 as a second input to the inverse modeller 75. The outputfrom the inverse modeller 75 is passed over line 78 as an input to aninverse quantizer 79 The output from the inverse quantizer 79 is passedover line 80 as an input to an inverse zig-zag (IZZ) 81. The output fromthe IZZ 81 is passed over line 82 as an input to an inverse discretecosine transform (IDCT) 83. The output from the IDCT 83 is passed overline 84 to a temporal decoder (not shown).

Referring now more particularly to FIG. 12, a temporal decoder inaccordance with the present invention is shown. A fork 91 receives asinput over line 92 the output from the IDCT 83 (shown in FIG. 11). As afirst output from the fork 91, the control tokens, e.g., motion vectorsand the like, are passed over line 93 to an address generator 94. Datatokens are also passed to the address generator 94 for countingpurposes. As a second output from the fork 91, the data is passed overline 95 to a FIFO 96. The output from the FIFO 96 is then passed overline 97 as a first input to a summer 98. The output from the addressgenerator 94 is passed over line 99 as a first input to a DRAM interface100. Signals are transmitted to and received from external DRAM (notshown) by the DRAM interface 100 over line 101. A first output from theDRAM interface 100 is passed over line 102 to a prediction filter 103.The output from the prediction filter 103 is passed over line 104 as asecond input to the summer 98. A first output from the summer 98 ispassed over line 105 to output selector 106. A second output from thesummer 98 is passed over line 107 as a second input to the DRAMinterface 100. A second output from the DRAM interface 100 is passedover line 108 as a second input to the output selector 106. The outputfrom the output selector 106 is passed over line 109 to a VideoFormatter (not shown in FIG. 12).

Referring now to FIG. 13, a fork 111 receives input from the outputselector 106 (shown in FIG. 12) over line 112. As a first output fromthe fork 111, the control tokens are passed over line 113 to an addressgenerator 114. The output from the address generator 114 is passed overline 115 as a first input to a DRAM interface 116. As a second outputfrom the fork 111 the data is passed over line 117 as a second input tothe DRAM interface 116. Signals are transmitted to and received fromexternal DRAM (not shown) by the DRAM interface 116 over line 118. Theoutput from the DRAM interface 116 is passed over line 119 to a displaypipe 120.

It will be apparent from the above descriptions that each line maycomprise a plurality of lines, as necessary.

Referring now to FIG. 14a, in the MPEG standard a picture 131 is encodedas one or more slices 132. Each slice 132 is, in turn, comprised of aplurality of blocks 133, and is encoded row-by-row, left-to-right ineach row. As is shown, each slice 132 may span exactly one full line ofblocks 133, less than one line B or D of blocks 133 or multiple lines Cof blocks 133.

Referring to FIG. 14b, in the JPEG and H.261 standards, the CommonIntermediate Format (CIF) is used, wherein a picture 141 is encoded as 6rows each containing 2 groups of blocks (GOBs) 142. Each GOB 142 is, inturn, composed of either 3 rows or 6 rows of an indeterminate number ofblocks 143. Each GOB 142 is encoded in a zigzag direction indicated bythe arrow 144. The GOBs 142 are, in turn, processed row-by-row,left-to-right in each row.

Referring now to FIG. 14c, it can be seen that, for both MPEG and CIF,the output of the encoder is in the form of a data stream 151. Thedecoder receives this data stream 151. The decoder can then reconstructthe image according to the format used to encode it. In order to allowthe decoder to recognize start and end points for each standard, thedata stream 151 is segmented into lengths of 33 blocks 152.

Referring to FIG. 15, a Venn diagram is shown, representing the range ofvalues possible for the table selection from the Huffman decoder 56(shown in FIG. 11) of the present invention. The values possible for anMPEG decoder and an H.261 decoder overlap, indicating that a singletable selection will decode both certain MPEG and certain H.261 formats.Likewise, the values possible for an MPEG decoder and a JPEG decoderoverlap, indicating that a single table selection will decode bothcertain MPEG and certain JPEG formats. Additionally, it is shown thatthe H.261 values and the JPEG values do not overlap, indicating that nosingle table selection exists that will decode both formats.

Referring now more particularly to FIG. 16, there is shown a schematicrepresentation of variable length picture data in accordance with thepractice of the present invention. A first picture 161 to be processedcontains a first PICTURE₋₋ START token 162, first-picture information ofindeterminate length 163, and a first PICTURE₋₋ END token 164. A secondpicture 165 to be processed contains a second PICTURE₋₋ START token 166,second picture information of indeterminate length 167, and a secondPICTURE₋₋ END token 168. The PICTURE₋₋ START tokens 162 and 166 indicatethe start of the pictures 161 and 165 to the processor. Likewise, thePICTURE₋₋ END tokens 164 and 168 signify the end of the pictures 161 and165 to the processor. This allows the processor to process pictureinformation 163 and 167 of variable lengths.

Referring to FIG. 17, a split 171 receives input over line 172. A firstoutput from the split 171 is passed over line 173 to an addressgenerator 174. The address generated by the address generator 174 ispassed over line 175 to a DRAM interface 176. Signals are transmitted toand received from external DRAM (not shown) by the DRAM interface 176over line 177. A first output from the DRAM interface 176 is passed overline 178 to a prediction filter 179. The output from the predictionfilter 179 is passed over line 180 as a first input to a summer 181. Asecond output from the split 171 is passed over line 182 as an input toa first-in first-out buffer (FIFO) 183. The output from the FIFO 183 ispassed over line 184 as a second input to the summer 181. The outputfrom the summer 181 is passed over line 185 to a write signal generator186. A first output from the write signal generator 186 is passed overline 187 to the DRAM interface 176. A second output from the writesignal generator 186 is passed over line 188 as a first input to a readsignal generator 189. A second output from the DRAM interface 176 ispassed over line 190 as a second input to the read signal generator 189.The output from the read signal generator 189 is passed over line 191 toa Video Formatter (not shown in FIG. 17).

Referring now to FIG. 18, the prediction filtering process isillustrated. A forward picture 201 is passed over line 202 as a firstinput to a summer 203. A backward picture 204 is passed over line 205 asa second input to the summer 203. The output from the summer 203 ispassed over line 206.

Referring to FIG. 19, a slice 211 comprises one or more macroblocks 212.In turn, each macroblock 212 comprises four luminance blocks 213 and twochrominance blocks 214, and contains the information for an original16×16 block of pixels. Each of the four luminance blocks 213 and twochrominance blocks 214 is 8×8 pixels in size. The four luminance blocks213 contain a 1 pixel to 1 pixel mapping of the luminance (Y)information from the original 16×16 block of pixels. One chrominanceblock 214 contains a representation of the chrominance level of the bluecolor signal (Cu/b), and the other chrominance block 214 contains arepresentation of the chrominance level of the red color signal (Cv/r).Each chrominance level is subsampled such that each 8×8 chrominanceblock 214 contains the chrominance level of its color signal for theentire original 16×16 block of pixels.

Referring now to FIG. 20, the structure and function of the Start CodeDetector will become apparent. A value register 221 receives image dataover a line 222. The line 222 is eight bits wide, allowing for paralleltransmission of eight bits at a time. The output from the value register221 is passed serially over line 223 to a decode register 224. A firstoutput from the decode register 224 is passed to a detector 225 over aline 226. The line 226 is twenty-four bits wide, allowing for paralleltransmission of twenty-four bits at a time. The detector 225 detects thepresence or absence of an image which corresponds to astandard-independent start code of 23 "zero" values followed by a single"one" value. An 8-bit data value image follows a valid start code image.On detecting the presence of a start code image, the detector 225transmits a start image over a line 227 to a value decoder 228.

A second output from the decode register 224 is passed serially overline 229 to a value decode shift register 230. The value decode shiftregister 230 can hold a data value image fifteen bits long. The 8-bitdata value following the start code image is shifted to the right of thevalue decode shift register 230, as indicated by area 231. This processeliminates overlapping start code images, as discussed below. A firstoutput from the value decode shift register 230 is passed to the valuedecoder 228 over a line 232. The line 232 is fifteen bits wide, allowingfor parallel transmission of fifteen bits at a time. The value decoder228 decodes the value image using a first look-up table (not shown). Asecond output from the value decode shift register 230 is passed to thevalue decoder 228 which passes a flag to an index-to-tokens converter234 over a line 235. The value decoder 228 also passes information tothe index-to-tokens converter 234 over a line 236. The information iseither the data value image or start code index image obtained from thefirst look-up table. The flag indicates which form of information ispassed. The line 236 is fifteen bits wide, allowing for paralleltransmission of fifteen bits at a time. While 15 bits has been chosenhere as the width in the present invention it will be appreciated thatbits of other lengths may also be used. The index-to-tokens converter234 converts the information to token images using a second look-uptable (not shown) similar to that given in Table 12-3 of the UsersManual. The token images generated by the index-to-tokens converter 234are then output over a line 237. The line 237 is fifteen bits wide,allowing for parallel transmission of fifteen bits at a time.

Referring to FIG. 21, a data stream 241 consisting of individual bits242 is input to a Start Code Detector (not shown in FIG. 21). A firststart code image 243 is detected by the Start Code Detector. The StartCode Detector then receives a first data value image 244. Beforeprocessing the first data value image 244, the Start Code Detector maydetect a second start code image 245, which overlaps the first datavalue image 244 at a length 246. If this occurs, the Start Code Detectordoes not process the first data value image 244, and instead receivesand processes a second data value image 247.

Referring now to FIG. 22, a flag generator 251 receives data as a firstinput over a line 252. The line 252 is fifteen bits wide, allowing forparallel transmission of fifteen bits at a time. The flag generator 251also receives a flag as a second input over a line 253, and receives aninput valid image over a first two-wire interface 254. A first outputfrom the flag generator 251 is passed over a line 255 to an input validregister (not shown). A second output from the flag generator 251 ispassed over a line 256 to a decode index 257. The decode index 257generates four outputs; a picture start image is passed over a line 258,a picture number image is passed over a line 259, an insert image ispassed over a line 260, and a replace image is passed over a line 261.The data from the flag generator 251 is passed over a line 262a. Aheader generator 263 uses a look-up table to generate a replace image,which is passed over a line 262b. An extra word generator 264 uses theMPU to generate an insert image, which is passed over a line 262c. Line262a, and line 262b combine to form a line 262, which is first input tooutput latches 265. The output latches 265 pass data over a line 266.The line 266 is fifteen bits wide, allowing for parallel transmission offifteen bits at a time.

The input valid register (not shown) passes an image as a first input toa first OR gate 267 over a line 268. An insert image is passed over aline 269 as a second input to the first OR gate 267. The output from thefirst OR gate 267 is passed as a first input to a first AND gate 270over a line 271. The logical negation of a remove image is passed over aline 272 as a second input to the first AND gate 270 is passed as asecond input to the output latches 265 over a line 273. The outputlatches 265 pass an output valid image over a second two-wire interface274. An output accept image is received over the second two-wireinterface 274 by an output accept latch 275. The output from the outputaccept latch 275 is passed to an output accept register (not shown) overa line 276.

The output accept register (not shown) passes an image as a first inputto a second OR gate 277 over a line 278. The logical negation of theoutput from the input valid register is passed as a second input to thesecond OR gate 277 over a line 279. The remove image is passed over aline 280 as a third input to the second OR gate 277. The output from thesecond OR gate 277 is passed as a first input to a second AND gate 281over a line 282. The logical negation of an insert image is passed as asecond input to the second AND gate 281 over a line 283. The output fromthe second AND gate 281 is passed over a line 284 to an input acceptlatch 285. The output from the input accept latch 285 is passed over thefirst two-wire interface 254.

                  TABLE 600                                                       ______________________________________                                        Format    Image Received Tokens Generated                                     ______________________________________                                        1.   H.261    SEQUENCE START SEQUENCE START                                        MPEG     PICTURE START  GROUP START                                           JPEG     (None)         PICTURE START                                                                 PICTURE DATA                                     2.   H.261    (None)         PICTURE END                                           MPEG     (None)         PADDING                                               JPEG     (None)         FLUSH                                                                         STOP AFTER PICTURE                               ______________________________________                                    

As set forth in Table 600 which shows a relationship between the absenceor presence of standard signals in the certain machine independentcontrol tokens, the detection of an image by the Start Code Detector 51generates a sequence of machine independent Control Tokens. Each imagelisted in the "Image Received" column starts the generation of allmachine independent control tokens listed in the group in the "TokensGenerated" column. Therefore, as shown in line 1 of Table 600, whenevera "sequence start" image is received during H.261 processing or a"picture start" image is received during MPEG processing, the entiregroup of four control tokens is generated, each followed by itscorresponding data value or values. In addition, as set forth at line 2of Table 600, the second group of four control tokens is generated atthe proper time irrespective of images received by the Start CodeDetector 51.

                  TABLE 601                                                       ______________________________________                                        DISPLAY ORDER:                                                                             I1    B2    B3  P4  B5  B6  P7  B8  B9  I10                      TRANSMIT ORDER:                                                                            I1    P4    B2  B3  P7  B5  B6  I10 B8  B9                       ______________________________________                                    

As shown in line 1 of Table 601 which shows the timing relationshipbetween transmitted pictures and displayed pictures, the picture framesare displayed in numerical order. However, in order to reduce the numberof frames that must be stored in memory, the frames are transmitted in adifferent order. It is useful to begin the analysis from an intrafrare(I frame). The I1 frame is transmitted in the order it is to bedisplayed. The next predicted frame (P frame), P4, is then transmitted.Then, any bi-directionally interpolated frames (B frames) to bedisplayed between the I1 frame and P4 frame are transmitted, representedby frames B2 and B3. This allows the transmitted B frames to reference aprevious frame (forward prediction) or a future frame (backwardprediction). After transmitting all the B frames to be displayed betweenthe I1 frame and the P4 frame, the next P frame, P7, is transmitted.Next, all the B frames to be displayed between the P4 and P7 frames aretransmitted, corresponding to B5 and B6. Then, the next I frame, I10, istransmitted. Finally, all the B frames to be displayed between the P7and I10 frames are transmitted, corresponding to frames B8 and B9. Thisordering of transmitted frames requires only two frames to be kept inmemory at any one time, and does not require the decoder to wait for thetransmission of the next P frame or I frame to display an interjacent Bframe.

Further information regarding the structure and operation, as well asthe features, objects and advantages, of the invention will become morereadily apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art from the ensuingadditional detailed description of illustrative embodiment of theinvention which, for purposes of clarity and convenience of explanationare grouped and set forth in the following sections:

1. Multi-Standard Configurations

2. PEG Still Picture Decoding

3. Motion Picture Decompression

4. RAM Memory Map

5. Bitstream Characteristics

6. Reconfigurable Processing Stage

7. Multi-Standard Coding

8. Multi-Standard Processing Circuit-2nd Mode of Operation

9. Start Code Detector

10. Tokens

11. DRAM Interface

12. Prediction Filter

13. Accessing Registers

14. Microprocessor Interface (MPI)

15. MPI Read Timing

16. MPI Write Timing

17. Key Hole Address Locations

18. Picture End

19. Flushing Operation

20. Flush Function

21. Stop-After-Picture

22. Multi-Standard Search Mode

23. Inverse Modeler

24. Inverse Quantizer

25. Huffman Decoder and Parser

26. Diverse Discrete Cosine Transformer

27. Buffer Manager

1. MULTI-STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS

Since the various compression standards, i.e., JPEG, MPEG and H.261, arewell known, as for example as described in the aforementioned U.S. Pat.No. 5,212,742, the detailed specifications of those standards are notrepeated here.

As previously mentioned, the present invention is capable ofdecompressing a variety of differently encoded, picture data bitstreams.In each of the different standards of encoding, some form of outputformatter is required to take the data presented at the output of thespatial decoder operating alone, or the serial output of a spatialdecoder and temporal decoder operating in combination, (as subsequentlydescribed herein in greater detail) and reformatting this output foruse, including display in a computer or other display systems, includinga video display system. Implementation of this formatting variessignificantly between encoding standards and/or the type of displayselected.

In a first embodiment, in accordance with the present invention, aspreviously described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 an address generatoris employed to store a block of formatted data, output from either thefirst decoder (Spatial Decoder) or the combination of the first decoder(Spatial Decoder) and the second decoder (the Temporal Decoder), and towrite the decoded information into and/or from a memory in a rasterorder. The video formatter described hereinafter provides a wide rangeof output signal combinations.

In the preferred multi-standard video decoder embodiment of the presentinvention, the Spatial Decoder and the Temporal Decoder are required toimplement both an MPEG encoded signal and an H.261 video decodingsystem. The DRAM interfaces on both devices are configurable to allowthe quantity of DRAM required to be reduced when working with smallpicture formats and at low coded data rates. The reconfiguration ofthese DRAMs will be further described hereinafter with reference to theDRAM interface. Typically, a single 4 megabyte DRAM is required by eachof the Temporal Decoder and the Spatial Decoder circuits.

The Spatial Decoder of the present invention performs all the requiredprocessing within a single picture. This reduces the redundancy withinone picture.

The Temporal Decoder reduces the redundancy between the subject picturewith relationship to a picture which arrives prior to the arrival of thesubject picture, as well as a picture which arrives after the arrival ofthe subject picture. One aspect of the Temporal Decoder is to provide anaddress decode network which handles the complex addressing needs toread out the data associated with all of these pictures with the leastnumber of circuits and with high speed and improved accuracy.

As previously described with reference to FIG. 11, the data arrivesthrough the Start Code Detector, a FIFO register which precedes aHuffman decoder and parser, through a second FIFO register, an inversemodeller, an inverse quantizer, inverse zigzag and inverse DCT. The twoFIFOs need not be on the chip. In one embodiment, the data does not flowthrough a FIFO that is on the chip. The data is applied to the DRAMinterface, and the FIFO-IN storage register and the FIFO-OUT register isoff the chip in both cases. These registers, whose operation is entirelyindependent of the standards, will subsequently be described herein infurther detail.

The majority of the subsystems and stages shown in FIG. 11 are actuallyindependent of the particular standard used and include the DRAMinterface 58, the buffer manager 59 which is generating addresses forthe DRAM interface, the inverse modeller 75, the inverse zig-zag 81 andthe inverse DCT 83. The standard independent units within the Huffmandecoder and parser include the ALU 66 and the token formatter 71.

Referring now to FIG. 12, the standard-independent units include theDRAM interface 100, the fork 91, the FIFO register 96, the summer 98 andthe output selector 106. The standard dependent units are the addressgenerator 94, which is different in H.261 and in MPEG, and theprediction filter 103, which is reconfigurable to have the ability to doboth H.261 and MPEG. The JPEG data will flow through the entire machinecompletely unaltered.

FIG. 13 depicts a high level block diagram of the video formatter chip.The vast majority of this chip is independent of the standard. The onlyitems that are affected by the standard is the way the data is writteninto the DRAM in the case of H.261, which differs from MPEG or JPEG; andthat in H.261, it is not necessary to code every single picture. Thereis some timing information referred to as a temporal reference whichprovides some information regarding when the pictures are intended to bedisplayed, and that is also handled by the address generation type oflogic in the video formatter.

The remainder of the circuitry embodied in the video formatter,including all of the color space conversion, the up-sampling filters andall of the gamma correction RAMs, is entirely independent of theparticular compression standard utilized.

The Start Code Detector of the present invention is dependent on thecompression standard in that it has to recognize different start codepatterns in the bitstream for each of the standards. For example, H.261has a 16 bit start code, MPEG has a 24 bit start code and JPEG usesmarker codes which are fairly different from the other start codes. Oncethe Start Code Detector has recognized those different start codes, itsoperation is essentially independent of the compression standard. Forinstance, during searching, apart from the circuitry that recognizes thedifferent category of markers, much of the operation is very similarbetween the three different compression standards.

The next unit is the state machine 68 (FIG. 11) located within theHuffman decoder and parser. Here, the actual circuitry is almostidentical for each of the three compression standards. In fact, the onlyelement that is affected by the standard in operation is the resetaddress of the machine. If just the parser is reset, then it jumps to adifferent address for each standard. There are, in fact, four standardsthat are recognized. These standards are H.261, JPEG, MPEG and oneother, where the parser enters a piece of code that is used for testing.This illustrates that the circuitry is identical in almost every aspect,but the difference is the program in the microcode for each of thestandards. Thus, when operating in H.261, one program is running, andwhen a different program is running, there is no overlap between them.The same holds true for JPEG, which is a third, completely independentprogram.

The next unit is the Huffman decoder 56 which functions with the indexto data unit 64. Those two units cooperate together to perform theHuffman decoding. Here, the algorithm that is used for Huffman decodingis the same, irrespective of the compression standard. The changes arein which tables are used and whether or not the data coming into theHuffman decoder is inverted. Also, the Huffman decoder itself includes astate machine that understands some aspects of the coding standards.These different operations are selected in response to an instructioncoming from the parser state machine. The parser state machine operateswith a different program for each of the three compression standards andissues the correct command to the Huffman decoder at different timesconsistent with the standard in operation.

The last unit on the chip that is dependent on the compression standardis the inverse quantizer 79, where the mathematics that the inversequantizer performs are different for each of the different standards. Inthis regard, a CODING₋₋ STANDARD token is decoded and the inversequantizer 79 remembers which standard it is operating in. Then, anysubsequent DATA tokens that happen after that event, but before anotherCODING₋₋ STANDARD may come along, are dealt with in the way indicated bythe CODING₋₋ STANDARD that has been remembered inside the inversequantizer. In the detailed description, there is a table illustratingdifferent parameters in the different standards and what circuitry isresponding to those different parameters or mathematics.

The address generation, with reference to H.261, differs for each of thesubsystems shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13. The address generation in FIG.11, which generates addresses for the two FIFOs before and after theHuffman decoder, does not change depending on the coding standards. Evenin H.261, the address generation that happens on that chip is unaltered.Essentially, the difference between these standards is that in MPEG andJPEG, there is an organization of macroblocks that are in linear linesgoing horizontally across pictures. As best observed in FIG. 14a, afirst macroblock A covers one full line. A macroblock B covers less thana line. A macroblock C covers multiple lines. The division in MPEG isinto slices 132, and a slice may be one horizontal line, A, or it may bepart of a horizontal line B, or it may extend from one line into thenext line, C. Each of these slices 132 is made up of a row ofmacroblocks.

In H.261, the organization is rather different because the picture isdivided into groups of blocks (GOB). A group of blocks is three rows ofmacroblocks high by eleven macroblocks wide. In the case of a CIFpicture, there are twelve such groups of blocks. However, they are notorganized one above the other. Rather, there are two groups of blocksnext to each other and then six high, i.e., there are 6 GOB'svertically, and 2 GOB's horizontally.

In all other standards, when performing the addressing, the macroblocksare addressed in order as described above. More specifically, addressingproceeds along the lines and at the end of the line, the next line isstarted. In H.261, the order of the blocks is the same as describedwithin a group of blocks, but in moving onto the next group of blocks,it is almost a zig-zag.

The present invention provides circuitry to deal with the latter affect.That is the way in which the address generation in the spatial decoderand the video formatter varies for H.261. This is accomplished wheneverinformation is written into the DRAM. It is written with the knowledgeof the aforementioned address generation sequence so the place where itis physically located in the RAM is exactly the same as if this had beenan MPEG picture of the same size. Hence, all of the address generationcircuitry for reading from the DRAM, for instance, when formingpredictions, does not have to comprehend that it is H.261 standardbecause the physical placement of the information in the memory is thesame as it would have been if it had been in MPEG sequence. Thus, in allcases, only writing of data is affected.

In the Temporal Decoder, there is an abstraction for H.261 where thecircuitry pretends something is different from what is actuallyoccurring. That is, each group of blocks is conceptually stretched outso that instead of having a rectangle which is 11×3 macroblocks, themacroblocks are stretched out into a length of 33 blocks (see FIG. 14c)group of blocks which is one macroblock high. By doing that, exactly thesame counting mechanisms used on the Temporal Decoder for countingthrough the groups of blocks are also used for MPEG.

There is a correspondence in the way that the circuitry is designedbetween an H.261 group of blocks and an MPEG slice. When H.261 data isprocessed after the Start Code Detector, each group of blocks ispreceded by a slice₋₋ start₋₋ code. The next group of blocks is precededby the next slice start₋₋ code. The counting that goes on inside theTemporal Decoder for counting through this structure pretends that it isa 33 macroblock-long group that is one macroblock high. This issufficient, although the circuitry also counts every 11th interval. Whenit counts to the 11th macroblock or the 22nd macroblock, it resets somecounters. This is accomplished by simple circuitry with another counterthat counts up each macroblock, and when it gets to 11, it resets tozero. The microcode interrogates that and does that work. All thecircuitry in the temporal decoder of the present invention isessentially independent of the compression standard with respect to thephysical placement of the macroblocks.

In terms of multi-standard adaptability, there are a number of differenttables and the circuitry selects the appropriate table for theappropriate standard at the appropriate time. Each standard has multipletables; the circuitry selects from the set at any given time. Within anyone standard, the circuitry selects one table at one time and anothertable another time. In a different standard, the circuitry selects adifferent set of tables. There is some intersection between those tablesas indicated previously in the discussion of FIG. 15. For example, oneof the tables used in MPEG is also used in JPEG. The tables are not acompletely isolated set. FIG. 15 illustrates an H.261 set, an MPEG setand a JPEG set. Note that there is a much greater overlap between theH.261 set and the MPEG set. They are quite common in the tables theyutilize. There is a small overlap between MPEG and JPEG, and there is nooverlap at all between H.261 and JPEG so that these standards havetotally different sets of tables.

As previously indicated, most of the system units are compressionstandard independent. If a unit is standard independent, and such unitsneed not remember what CODING₋₋ STANDARD is being processed. All of theunits that are standard dependent remember the compression standard asthe CODING₋₋ STANDARD token flows by them. When informationencoded/decoded in a first coding standard is distributed through themachine, and a machine is changing standards, prior machines undermicroprocessor control would normally choose to perform in accordancewith the H.261 compression standard. The MPU in such prior machinesgenerates signals stating in multiple different places within themachine that the compression standard is changing. The MPU makes changesat different times and, in addition, may flush the pipeline through.

In accordance with the invention, by issuing a change of CODING₋₋STANDARD tokens at the Start Code Detector that is positioned as thefirst unit in the pipeline, this change of compression standard isreadily handled. The token says a certain coding standard is beginningand that control information flows down the machine and configures allthe other registers at the appropriate time. The MPU need not programeach register.

The prediction token signals how to form predictions using the bits inthe bitstream. Depending on which compression standard is operating, thecircuitry translates the information that is found in the standard, i.e.from the bitstream into a prediction node token. This processing isperformed by the Huffman decoder and parser state machine, where it iseasy to manipulate bits based on certain conditions. The Start CodeDetector generates this prediction mode token. The token then flows downThe machine to the circuitry of the Temporal Decoder, which is thedevice responsible for forming predictions. The circuitry of the spatialdecoder interprets the token without having to know what standard it isoperating in because the bits in it are invariant in the three differentstandards. The Spatial Decoder just does what it is told in response tothat token. By having these tokens and using them appropriately, thedesign of other units in the machine is simplified. Although there maybe some complications in the program, benefits are received in that someof the hard wired logic which would be difficult to design formulti-standards can be used here.

2. JPEG STILL PICTURE DECODING

As previously indicated, the present invention relates to signaldecompression and, more particularly, to the decompression of an encodedvideo signal, irrespective of the compression standard employed.

One aspect of the present invention is to provide a first decodercircuit (the Spatial Decoder) to decode a first encoded signal (the JPEGencoded video signal) in combination with a second decoder circuit (theTemporal Decoder) to decode a first encoded signal (the MPEG or H.261encoded video signal) in a pipeline processing system. The TemporalDecoder is not needed for JPEG decoding.

In this regard, the invention facilitates the decompression of aplurality of differently encoded signals through the use of a singlepipeline decoder and decompression system. The decoding anddecompression pipeline processor is organized on a unique and specialconfiguration which allows the handling of the multi-standard encodedvideo signals through the use of techniques all compatible with thesingle pipeline decoder and processing system. The Spatial Decoder iscombined with the Temporal Decoder, and the Video Formatter is used indriving a video display.

Another aspect of the invention is the use of the combination of theSpatial Decoder and the Video Formatter for use with only stillpictures. The compression standard independent Spatial Decoder performsall of the data processing within the boundaries of a single picture.Such a decoder handles the spatial decompression of the internal picturedata which is passing through the pipeline and is distributed withinassociated random access memories, standard independent addressgeneration circuits for handling the storage and retrieval ofinformation into the memories. Still picture data is decoded at theoutput of the Spatial Decoder, and this output is employed as input tothe multi-standard, configurable Video Formatter, which then provides anoutput to the display terminal. In a first sequence of similar pictures,each decompressed picture at the output of the Spatial Decoder is of thesame length in bits by the time the picture reaches the output of theSpatial Decoder. A second sequence of pictures may have a totallydifferent picture size and, hence, have a different length when comparedto the first length. Again, all such second sequence of similar picturesare of the same length in bits by the time such pictures reach theoutput of the Spatial Decoder.

Another aspect of the invention is to internally organize the incomingstandard dependent bitstream into a sequence of control tokens and DATAtokens, in combination with a plurality of sequentially-positionedreconfigurable processing stages selected and organized to act as astandard-independent, reconfigurable-pipeline-processor.

With regard to JPEG decoding, a single Spatial Decoder with no off chipDRAM can rapidly decode baseline JPEG images. The Spatial Decodersupports all features of baseline JPEG encoding standards. However, theimage size that can be decoded may be limited by the size of the outputbuffer provided. The Spatial Decoder circuit also includes a randomaccess memory circuit, having machine-dependent, standard independentaddress generation circuits for handling the storage of information intothe memories.

As previously, indicated the Temporal Decoder is not required to decodeJPEG-encoded video. Accordingly, signals carried by DATA tokens passdirectly through the Temporal Decoder without further processing whenthe Temporal Decoder is configured for a JPEG operation.

Another aspect of the present invention is to provide in the SpatialDecoder a pair of memory circuits, such as buffer memory circuits, foroperating in combination with the Huffman decoder/video demultiplexorcircuit (HD & VDM). A first buffer memory is positioned before the HD &VDM, and a second buffer memory is positioned after the HD & VDM. The HD& VDM decodes the bitstream from the binary ones and zeros that are inthe standard encoded bitstream and turns such stream into numbers thatare used downstream. The advantage of the two buffer system is forimplementing a multi-standard decompression system. These two buffers,in combination with the identified implementation of the Huffmandecoder, are described hereinafter in greater detail.

A still further aspect of the present multi-standard, decompressioncircuit is the combination of a Start Code Detector circuit positionedupstream of the first forward suffer operating in combination with theHuffman decoder. One advantage of this combination is increasedflexibility in dealing with the input bitstream, particularly padding,which has to be added to the bitstream. The placement of theseidentified components, Start Code Detector, memory buffers, and Huffmandecoder enhances the handling of certain sequences in the inputbitstream.

In addition, off chip DRAMs are used for decoding JPEG-encoded videopictures in real time. The size and speed of the buffers used with theDRAMs will depend on the video encoded data rates.

The coding standards identify all of the standard dependent types ofinformation that is necessary for storage in the DRAMs associated withthe Spatial Decoder using standard independent circuitry.

3. MOTION PICTURE DECOMPRESSION

In the present invention, if motion pictures are being decompressedthrough the steps of decoding, a further Temporal Decoder is necessary.The Temporal Decoder combines the data decoded in the Spatial Decoderwith pictures, previously decoded, that are intended for display eitherbefore or after the picture being currently decoded. The TemporalDecoder receives, in the picture coded datastream, information toidentify this temporally-displaced information. The Temporal Decoder isorganized to address temporally and spatially displaced information,retrieve it, and combine it in such a way as to decode the informationlocated in one picture with the picture currently being decoded andending with a resultant picture that is complete and is suitable fortransmission to the video formatter for driving the display screen.Alternatively, the resultant picture can be stored for subsequent use intemporal decoding of subsequent pictures.

Generally, the Temporal Decoder performs the processing between pictureseither earlier and/or later in time with reference to the picturecurrently being decoded. The Temporal Decoder reintroduces informationthat is not encoded within the coded representation of the picture,because it is redunant and is already available at the decoder. Morespecifically, it is probable that any given picture will contain similarinformation as pictures temporally surrounding it, both before andafter. This similarity can be made greater if motion compensation isapplied. The Temporal Decoder and decompression circuit also reduces theredundancy between related pictures.

In another aspect of the present invention, the Temporal Decoder isemployed for handling the standard-dependent output information from theSpatial Decoder. This standard dependent information for a singlepicture is distributed among several areas of DRAM in the sense that thedecompressed output information, processed by the Spatial Decoder, isstored in other DRAM registers by other random access memories havingstill other machine-dependent, standard-independent address generationcircuits for combining one picture of spatially decoded informationpacket of spatially decoded picture information, temporally displacedrelative to the temporal position of the first picture.

In multi-standard circuits capable of decoding MPEG-encoded signals,larger logic DRAM buffers may be required to support the larger pictureformats possible with MPEG.

The picture information is moving through the serial pipeline in 8 pelby 8 pel blocks. In one form of the invention, the address decodingcircuitry handles these pel blocks (storing and retrieving) along suchblock boundaries. The address decoding circuitry also handles thestoring and retrieving of such 8 by 8 pel blocks across such boundaries.This versatility is more completely described hereinafter.

A second Temporal Decoder may also be provided which passes the outputof the first decoder circuit (the Spatial Decoder) directly to the VideoFormatter for handling without signal processing delay.

The Temporal Decoder also reorders the blocks of picture data fordisplay by a display circuit. The address decode circuitry, describedhereinafter, provides handling of this reordering.

As previously mentioned, one important feature of the Temporal Decoderis to add picture information together from a selection of pictureswhich have arrived earlier or later than the picture under processing.When a picture is described in this context, it may mean any one of thefollowing:

1. The coded data representation of the picture;

2. The result, i.e., the final decoded picture resulting from theaddition of a process step performed by the decoder;

3. Previously decoded pictures read from the DRAM; and

4. The result of the spatial decoding, i.e., the extent of data betweena PICTURE₋₋ START token and a subsequent PICTURE₋₋ END token.

After the picture data information is processed by the temporal Decoder,it is either displayed or written back into a picture memory location.This information is then kept for further reference to be used inprocessing another different coded data picture.

Re-ordering of the MPEG encoded pictures for visual display involves thepossibility that a desired scrambled picture can be achieved by varyingthe re-ordering feature of the Temporal Decoder.

4. RAM MEMORY MAP

The Spatial Decoder, Temporal Decoder and Video Formatter all useexternal DRAM. Preferably, the same DRAM is used for all three devices.While all three devices use DRAM, and all three devices use a DRAMinterface in conjunction with an address generator, what each implementsin DRAM is different. That is, each chip, e.g. Spatial Decoder andTemporal Decoder, have a different DRAM interface and address generationcircuitry even through they use a similar physical, external DRAM.

In brief, the Spatial Decoder implements two FIFOs in the common DRAM.Referring again to FIG. 11, one FIFO 54 is positioned before the Huffmandecoder 56 and parser, and the other is positioned after the Huffmandecoder and parser. The FIFOs are implemented in a relativelystraightforward manner. For each FIFO, a particular portion of DRAM isset aside as the physical memory in which the FIFO will be implemented.

The address generator associated with the Spatial Decoder DRAM interface58 keeps track of FIFO addresses using two pointers. One pointer pointsto the first word stored in the FIFO, the other pointer points to thelast word stored in the FIFO, thus allowing read/write operation on theappropriate word. When, in the course of a read or write operation, theend of the physical memory is reached, the address generator "wrapsaround" to the start of the physical memory.

In brief, the Temporal Decoder of the present invention must be able tostore two full pictures or frames of whatever encoding standard (MPEG orH.261) is specified. For simplicity, the physical memory in the DRAMinto which the two frames are stored is split into two halves, with eachhalf being dedicated (using appropriate pointers) to a particular one ofthe two pictures.

MPEG uses three different picture types: Intra (I), Predicted (P) andBidirectionally interpolated (B). As previously mentioned, B picturesare based on predictions from two pictures. One picture is from thefuture and one from the past. I pictures require no further decoding bythe Temporal Decoder, but must be stored in one of the two picturebuffers for later us in decoding P and B pictures. Decoding P picturesrequires forming predictions from a previously decoded P or I picture.The decoded P picture is stored in a picture buffer for use decoding Pand B pictures. B pictures can require predictions form both of thepicture buffers. However, B pictures are not stored in the externalDRAM.

Note that I and P pictures are not output from the Temporal Decoder asthey are decoded. Instead, I and P pictures are written into one of thepicture buffers, and are read out only when a subsequent I or P picturearrives for decoding. In other words, the Temporal Decoder relies onsubsequent P or I pictures to flush previous pictures out of the twopicture buffers, as further discussed hereinafter in the section onflushing. In brief, the Spatial Decoder can provide a fake I or Ppicture at the end of a video sequence to flush out the last P or Ipicture. In turn, this fake picture is flushed when a subsequent videosequence starts.

The peak memory band width load occurs when decoding B pictures. Theworst case is the B frame may be formed from predictions from both thepicture buffers, with all predictions being made to half-pixel accuracy.

As previously described, the Temporal Decoder can be configured toprovide MPEG picture reordering. With this picture reordering, theoutput of P and I pictures is delayed until the next P or I picture inthe data stream starts to be decoded by the Temporal Decoder.

As the P or I pictures are reordered, certain tokens are storedtemporarily on chip as the picture is written into the picture buffers.When the picture is read out for display, these stored tokens areretrieved. At the output of the Temporal Decoder, the DATA Tokens of thenewly decoded P or I picture are replaced with DATA Tokens for the olderP or I picture.

In contrast, H.261 makes predictions only from the picture just decoded.As each picture is decoded, it is written into one of the two picturebuffers so it can be used in decoding the next picture. The only DRAMmemory operations required are writing 8×8 blocks, and formingpredictions with integer accuracy motion vectors.

In brief, the Video Formatter stores three frames or pictures. Threepictures need to be stored to accommodate such features as repeating orskipping pictures.

5. BITSTREAM CHARACTERISTICS

Referring now particularly to the Spatial Decoder of the presentinvention, it is helpful to review the bitstream characteristics of theencoded datastream as these characteristics must be handled by thecircuitry of the Spatial Decoder and the Temporal Decoder. For example,under one or more compression standards, the compression ratio of thestandard is achieved by varying the number of bits that it uses to codethe pictures of a picture. The number of bits can vary by a wide margin.Specifically, this means that the length of a bitstream used to encode areferenced picture of a picture might be identified as being one unitlong, another picture might be a number of units long, while still athird picture could be a fraction of that unit.

None of the existing standards (MPEG 1.2, JPEG, H.261) define a way ofending a picture, the implication being that when the next picturestarts, the current one has finished. Addition ally, the standards(H.261 specifically) allow incomplete pictures to be generated by theencoder.

In accordance with the present invention, there is provided a way ofindicating the end of a picture by using one of its tokens: PICTURE₋₋END. The still encoded picture data leaving the Start Code Detectorconsists of pictures starting with a PICTURE₋₋ START token and endingwith a PICTURE₋₋ END token, but still of widely varying length. Theremay be other information transmitted here (between the first and secondpicture), but it is known that the first picture has finished.

The data stream at the output of the Spatial Decoder consists ofpictures, still with picture-starts and picture-ends, of the same length(number of bits) for a given sequence. The length of time between apicture-start and a picture-end may vary.

The Video Formatter takes these pictures of non-uniform time anddisplays them on a screen at a fixed picture rate determined by the typeof display being driven. Different display rates are used throughout theworld, e.g. PAL-NTSC television standards. This is accomplished byselectively dropping or repeating pictures in a manner which is unique.Ordinary "frame rate converters," e.g. 2-3 pulldown, operate with afixed input picture rate, whereas the Video Formatter can handle avariable input picture rate.

6. RECONFIGURABLE PROCESSING STAGE

Referring again to FIG. 10, the reconfigurable processing stage (RPS)comprises a token decode circuit 33 which is employed to receive thetokens coming from a two wire interface 37 and input latches 34. Theoutput of the token decode circuit 33 is applied to a processing unit 36over the two-wire interface 37 and an action identification circuit 39.The processing unit 36 is suitable for processing data under the controlof the action identification circuit 39. After the processing iscompleted, the processing unit 36 connects such completed signals to theoutput, two-wire interface bus 40 through output latches 41.

The action identification decode circuit 39 has an input from the tokendecode circuit 33 over the two-wire interface bus 40 and/or from memorycircuits 43 and 44 over two-wire interface bus 46. The tokens from thetoken decode circuit 33 are applied simultaneously to the actionidentification circuit 39 and the processing unit 36. The actionidentification function as well as the RPS is described in furtherdetail by tables and figures in a subsequent portion of thisspecification.

The functional block diagram in FIG. 10 illustrates those stages shownin FIGS. 11, 12 and 13 which are not standard independent circuits. Thedata flows through the token decode circuit 33, through the processingunit 36 and onto the two-wire interface circuit 42 through the outputlatches 41. If the Control Token is recognized by the RPS, it is decodedin the token decode circuit 33 and appropriate action will be taken. Ifit is not recognized, it will be passed unchanged to the output two-wireinterface 42 through the output circuit 41. The present inventionoperates as a pipeline processor having a two-wire interface forcontrolling the movement of control tokens through the pipeline. Thisfeature of the invention is described in greater detail in thepreviously filed EPO patent application number 92306038.8.

In the present invention, the token decode circuit 33 is employed foridentifying whether the token presently entering through the two-wireinterface 42 is a DATA token or control token. In the event that thetoken being examined by the token decode circuit 33 is recognized, it isexited to the action identification circuit 39 with a proper indexsignal or flag signal indicating that action is to be taken. At the sametime, the token decode circuit 33 provides a proper flag or index signalto the processing unit 36 to alert it to the presence of the token beinghandled by the action identification circuit 39. Control tokens may alsobe processed.

A more detailed description of the various types of tokens usable in thepresent invention will be subsequently described hereinafter. For thepurpose of this portion of the specification, it is sufficient to notethat the address carried by the control token is decoded in the decoder33 and is used to access registers contained within the actionidentification circuit 39. When the token being examined is a recognizedcontrol token, the action identification circuit 39 uses itsreconfiguration state circuit for distributing the control signalsthroughout the state machine. As previously mentioned, this activatesthe state machine of the action identification decoder 39, which thenreconfigures itself. For example, it may change coding standards. Inthis way, the action identification circuit 39 decodes the requiredaction for handling the particular standard now passing through thestate machine shown with reference to FIG. 10.

Similarly, the processing unit 36 which is under the control of theaction identification circuit 39 is now ready to process the informationcontained in the data fields of the DATA token when it is appropriatefor this to occur. On many occasions, a control token arrives first,reconfigures the action identification circuit 39 and is immediatelyfollowed by a DATA token which is then processed by the processing unit36. The control token exits the output latches circuit 41 over theoutput two-wire interface 42 immediately preceding the DATA token whichhas been processed within the processing unit 36.

In the present invention, the action identification circuit, 39, is astate machine holding history state. The registers, 43 and 44 holdinformation that has been decoded from the token decoder 33 and storedin these registers. Such registers can be either on-chip or-off chip asneeded. These plurality of state registers contain action informationconnected to the action identification currently being identified in theaction identification circuit 39. This action information has beenstored from previously decoded tokens and can affect the action that isselected. The connection 40 is going straight from the token decode 33to the action identification block 39. This is intended to show that theaction can also be affected by the token that is currently beingprocessed by the token decode circuit 33.

In general, there is shown token decoding and data processing inaccordance with the present invention. The data processing is performedas configured by the action identification circuit 39. The action isaffected by a number of conditions and is affected by informationgenerally derived from a previously decoded token or, more specifically,information stored from previously decoded tokens in registers 43 and44, the current token under processing, and the state and historyinformation that the action identification unit 39 has itself acquired.A distinction is thereby shown between Control tokens and DATA tokens.

In any RPS, some tokens are viewed by that RPS unit as being Controltokens in that they affect the operation of the RPS presumably at somesubsequent time. Another set of tokens are viewed by the RPS as DATAtokens. Such DATA tokens contain information which is processed by theRPS in a way that is determined by the design of the particularcircuitry, the tokens that have been previously decoded and the state ofthe action identification circuit 39. Although a particular RPSidentifies a certain set of tokens for that particular RPS control andanother set of tokens as data, that is the view of that particular RPS.Another RPS can have a different view of the same token. Some of thetokens might be viewed by one RPS unit as DATA Tokens while another RPSunit might decide that it is actually a Control Token. For example, thequantization table information, as far as the Huffman decoder and statemachine is concerned, is data, because it arrives on its input as codeddata, it gets formatted up into a series of 8 bit words, and they getformed into a token called a quantization table token (QUANT₋₋ TABLE)which goes down the processing pipeline. As far as that machine isconcerned, all of that was data; it was handling data, transforming onesort of data into another sort of data, which is clearly a function ofthe processing performed by that portion of the machine. However, whenthat information gets to the inverse quantizer, it stores theinformation in that token a plurality of registers. In fact, becausethere are 64 8-bit numbers and there are many registers, in general,many registers may be present. This information is viewed as controlinformation, and then that control information affects the processingthat is done on subsequent DATA tokens because it affects the numberthat you multiply each data word. There is an example where one stageviewed that token as being data and another stage viewed it as beingcontrol.

Token data, in accordance with the invention is almost universallyviewed as being data through the machine. One of the important aspectsis that, in general, each stage of circuitry that has a token decoderwill be looking for a certain set of tokens, and any tokens that it doesnot recognize will be passed unaltered through the stage and down thepipeline, so that subsequent stages downstream of the current stage havethe benefit of seeing those tokens and may respond to them. This is animportant feature, namely there can be communication between blocks thatare not adjacent to one another using the token mechanism.

Another important feature of the invention is that each of the stages ofcircuitry has the processing capability within it to be able to performthe necessary operations for each of the standards, and the control, asto which operations are to be performed at a given time, come as tokens.There is one processing element that differs between the differentstages to provide this capability. In the state machine ROM of theparser, there are three separate entirely different programs, one foreach of the standards that are dealt with. Which program is executeddepends upon a CODING₋₋ STANDARD token. In otherwords, each of thesethree programs has within it the ability to handle both decoding and theCODING₋₋ STANDARD standard token. When each of these programs sees whichcoding standard, is to be decoded next, they literally jump to the startaddress in the microcode ROM for that particular program. This is howstages deal with multi-standardness.

Two things are affected by the different standards. First, it affectswhat pattern of bits in the bitstream are recognized as a start-code ora marker code in order to reconfigure the shift register to detect thelength of the start marker code. Second, there is a piece of informationin the microcode that denotes what that start or marker code means.Recall that the coding of bits differs between the three standards.Accordingly, the microcode looks up in a table, specific to thatcompressor standard, something that is independent of the standard,i.e., a type of token that represents the incoming codes. This token istypically independent of the standard since in most cases, each of thevarious standards provide a certain code that will produce it.

The inverse quantizer 79 has a mathematical capability. The quantizermultiplies and adds, and has the ability to do all three compressionstandards which are configured by parameters. For example, a flag bit inthe ROM in control tells the inverse quantizer whether or not to add aconstant, K. Another flag tells the inverse quantizer whether to addanother constant. The inverse quantizer remembers in a register theCODING₋₋ STANDARD token as it flows by the quantizer. When DATA tokenspass thereafter, the inverse quantizer remembers what the standard isand it looks up the parameters that it needs to apply to the processingelements in order to perform a proper operation. For example, theinverse quantizer will look up whether K is set to 0, or whether it isset to 1 for a particular compression standard, and will apply that toits processing circuitry.

In a similar sense the Huffman decoder 56 has a number of tables withinit, some for JPEG, some for MPEG and some for H.261. The majority ofthose tables, in fact, will service more than one of those compressionstandards. Which tables are used depends on the syntax of the standard.The Huffman decoder works by receiving a command from the state machinewhich tells it which of the tables to use. Accordingly, the Huffmandecoder does not itself directly have a piece of state going into it,which is remembered and which says what coding it is performing. Rather,it is the combination of the parser state machine and Huffman decodertogether that contain information within them.

Regarding the Spatial Decoder of the present invention, the addressgeneration is modified and is similar to that shown in FIG. 10, in thata number of pieces of information are decoded from tokens, such as thecoding standard. The coding standard and additional information as well,is recorded in the registers and that affects the progress of theaddress generator state machine as it steps through and counts themacroblocks in the system, one after the other. The last stage would bethe prediction filter 179 (FIG. 17) which operates in one of two modes,either H.261 or MPEG and are easily identified.

7. MULTI-STANDARD CODING

The system of the present invention also provides a combination of thestandard-independent indices generation circuits, which arestrategically placed throughout the system in combination with the tokendecode circuits. For example, the system is employed for specificallydecoding either the H.261 video standard, or the MPEG video standard orthe JPEG video standard. These three compression coding standardsspecify similar processes to be done on the arriving data, but thestructure of the datastreams is different. As previously discussed, itis one of the functions of the Start Code Detector to detect MPEGstart-codes, H.261 start-codes, and JPEG marker codes, and convert themall into a form, i.e., a control token which includes a token streamembodying the current coding standard. The control tokens are passedthrough the pipeline processor, and are used, i.e., decoded, in thestate machines to which they are relevant, and are passed through otherstate machines to which the tokens are not relevant. In this regard, theDATA Tokens are treated in the same fashion, insofar as they areprocessed only in the state machines that are configurable by thecontrol tokens into processing such DATA Tokens. In the remaining statemachines, they pass through unchanged.

More specifically, a control token in accordance with the presentinvention, can consist of more than one word in the token. In that case,a bit known as the extension bit is set specifying the use of additionalwords in the token for carrying additional information. Certain of theseadditional control bits contain indices indicating information for usein corresponding state machines to create a set of standard-independentindices signals. The remaining portions of the token are used toindicate and identify the internal processing control function which isstandard for all of the datastreams passing through the pipelineprocessor. In one form of the invention, the token extension is used tocarry the current coding standard which is decoded by the relative tokendecode circuits distributed throughout the machine, and is used toreconfigure the action identification circuit 39 of stages throughoutthe machine wherever it is appropriate to operate under a new codingstandard. Additionally, the token decode circuit can indicate whether acontrol token is related to one of the selected standards which thecircuit was designed to handle.

More specifically, an MPEG start code and a JPEG marker are followed byan 8 bit value. The H.261 start code is followed by a 4 bit value. Inthis context, the Start Code Detector 51, by detecting either an MPEGstart-code or a JPEG marker, indicates that the following 8 bits containthe value associated with the start-code. Independently, it can thencreate a signal which indicates that it is either an MPEG start code ora JPEG marker and not an H.261 start code. In this first instance, the 8bit value is entered into a decode circuit, part of which creates asignal indicating the index and flag which is used within the currentcircuit for handling the tokens passing through the circuit. This isalso used to insert portions of the control token which will be lookedat thereafter to determine which standard is being handled. In thissense, the control token contains a portion indicating that it isrelated to an MPEG standard, as well as a portion which indicates whattype of operation should be performed on the accompanying data. Aspreviously discussed, this information is utilized in the system toreconfigure the processing stage used to perform the function requiredby the various standards created for that purpose.

For example, with reference to the H.261 start code, it is associatedwith a 4 bit value which follows immediately after the start code. TheStart Code Detector passes this value into the token generator statemachine. The value is applied to an 8 bit decoder which produces a 3 bitstart number. The start number is employed to identify the picture-startof a picture number as indicated by the value.

The system also includes a multi-stage parallel processing pipelineoperating under the principles of the two-wire interface previouslydescribed. Each of the stages comprises a machine generally taking theform illustrated in FIG. 10. The token decode circuit 33 is employed todirect the token presently entering the state machine into the actionidentification circuit 39 or the processing unit 36, as appropriate. Theprocessing unit has been previously reconfigured by the next previouscontrol token into the form needed for handling the current codingstandard, which is now entering the processing stage and carried by thenext DATA token. Further, in accordance with this aspect of theinvention, the succeeding state machines in the processing pipeline canbe functioning under one coding standard, i.e., H.261, while a previousstage can be operating under a separate standard, such as MPEG. The sametwo-wire interface is used for carrying both the control tokens and theDATA Tokens.

The system of the present invention also utilizes control tokensrequired to decode a number of coding standards with a fixed number ofreconfigurable processing stages. More specifically, the PICTURE₋₋ ENDcontrol token is employed because it is important to have an indicationof when a picture actually ends. Accordingly, in designing amulti-standard machine, it is necessary to create additional controltokens within the multi-standard pipeline processing machine which willthen indicate which one of the standard decoding techniques to use. Sucha control token is the PICTURE₋₋ END token. This PICTURE₋₋ END token isused to indicate that the current picture has finished, to force thebuffers to be flushed, and to push the current picture through thedecoder to the display.

8. MULTI-STANDARD PROCESSING CIRCUIT--SECOND MODE OF OPERATION

A compression standard-dependent circuit, in the form of the previouslydescribed Start Code Detector, is suitably interconnected to acompression standard-independent circuit over an appropriate bus. Thestandard-dependent circuit is connected to a combinationdependent-independent circuit over the same bus and an additional bus.The standard-independent circuit applies additional input to thestandard dependent-independent circuit, while the latter providesinformation back to the standard-independent circuit. Information fromthe standard-independent circuit is applied to the output over anothersuitable bus. Table 600 illustrates that the multiple standards appliedas the input to the standard-dependent Start Code Detector 51 includecertain bit streams which have standard-dependent meanings within eachencoded bit stream.

9. START-CODE DETECTOR

As previously indicated the Start Code Detector, in accordance with thepresent invention, is capable of taking MPEG, JPEG and H.261 bit streamsand generating from them a sequence of proprietary tokens which aremeaningful to the rest of the decoder. As an example of howmulti-standard decoding is achieved, the MPEG (1 and 2) picture₋₋start₋₋ code, the H.261 picture₋₋ start₋₋ code and the JPEG start₋₋ of₋₋scan (SOS) marker are treated as equivalent by the Start Code Detector,and all will generate an internal PICTURE₋₋ START token. In a similarway, the MPEG sequence₋₋ start₋₋ code and the JPEG SOI (start₋₋ of₋₋image) marker both generate a machine sequence₋₋ start₋₋ token. TheH.261 standard, however, has no equivalent start code. Accordingly, theStart Code Detector, in response to the first H.261 picture₋₋ start₋₋code, will generate a sequence₋₋ start token.

None of the above described images are directly used other than in theSCD. Rather, a machine PICTURE₋₋ START token, for example, has beendeemed to be equivalent to the PICTURE₋₋ START images contained in thebit stream. Furthermore, it must be borne in mind that the machinePICTURE₋₋ START by itself, is not a direct image of the PICTURE₋₋ STARTin the standard. Rather, it is a control token which is used incombination with other control tokens to provide standard-independentdecoding which emulates the operation of the images in each of thecompression coding standards. The combination of control tokens incombination with the reconfiguration of circuits, in accordance with theinformation carried by control tokens, is unique in and of itself, aswell as in further combination with indices and/or flags generated bythe token decode circuit portion of a respective state machine. Atypical reconfigurable state machine will be described subsequently.

Referring again to Table 600, there are shown the names of a group ofstandard images in the left column. In the right column there are shownthe machine dependent control tokens used in the emulation of thestandard encoded signal which is present or not used in the standardimage.

With reference to Table 600, it can be seen that a machine sequence₋₋start signal is generated by the Start Code Detector, as previouslydescribed, when it decodes any one of the standard signals indicated inTable 600. The Start Code Detector creates sequence₋₋ start, group₋₋start, sequence₋₋ end, slice₋₋ start, user-data, extra-data andPICTURE₋₋ START tokens for application to the two-wire interface whichis used throughout the system. Each of the stages which operate inconjunction with these control tokens are configured by the contents ofthe tokens, or are configured by indices created by contents of thetokens, and are prepared to handle data which is expected to be receivedwhen the picture DATA Token arrives at that station.

As previously described, one of the compression standards, such asH.261, does not have a sequence₋₋ start image in its data stream, nordoes it have a PICTURE₋₋ END image in its data stream. The Start CodeDetector indicates the PICTURE₋₋ END point in the incoming bit streamand creates a PICTURE₋₋ END token. In this regard, the system of thepresent invention is intended to carry data words that are fully packedto contain a bit of information in each of the register positionsselected for use in the practice of the present invention. To this end,15 bits have been selected as the number of bits which are passedbetween two start codes. Of course, it will be appreciated by one ofordinary skill in the art, that a selection can be made to includeeither greater or fewer than 15 bits. In other words, all 15 of a dataword being passed from the Start Code Detector into the DRAM interfaceare required for proper operation. Accordingly, the Start Code Detectorcreates extra bits, called padding, which it inserts into the last wordof a DATA Token. For purposes of illustration 15 data bits has beenselected.

To perform the Padding operation, in accordance with the presentinvention, binary 0 followed by a number of binary 1's are automaticallyinserted to complete the 15 bit data word. This data is then passedthrough the coded data buffer and presented to the Huffman decoder,which removes the padding. Thus, an arbitrary number of bits can bepassed through a buffer of fixed size and width.

In one embodiment, a slice₋₋ start control token is used to identify aslice of the picture. A slice₋₋ start control token is employed tosegment the picture into smaller regions. The size of the region ischosen by the encoder, and the Start Code Detector identifies thisunique pattern or the slice₋₋ start code in order for themachine-dependent state stages, located downstream from the Start CodeDetector, to segment the picture being received into smaller regions.The size of the region is chosen by the encoder, recognized by the StartCode Detector and used by the recombination circuitry and control tokensto decompress the encoded picture. The slice₋₋ start₋₋ codes areprincipally used for error recovery.

The start codes provide a unique method of starting up the decoder, andthis will subsequently be described in further detail. There are anumber of advantages in placing the Start Code Detector before the codeddata buffer, as opposed to placing the Start Code Detector after thecoded is data buffer and before the Huffman decoder and videodemultiplexor. Locating the Start Code Detector before the first bufferallows it to 1) assemble the tokens, 2) decode the standard controlsignals, such as start codes, 3) pad the bitstream before the data goesinto the buffer, and 4) create the proper sequence of control tokens toempty the buffers, pushing the available data from the buffers into theHuffman Decoder.

Most of the control token output by the Start Code Detector directlyreflect syntactic elements of the various picture and video codingstandards. The Start Code Detector converts the syntactic elements intocontrol tokens. In addition to these natural tokens, some unique and/ormachine-dependent tokens are generated. The unique tokens include thosetokens which have been specifically designed for use with the system ofthe present invention which are unique in and of themselves, and areemployed for aiding in the multi-standard nature of the presentinvention. Examples of such unique tokens include PICTURE₋₋ END andCODING₋₋ STANDARD.

Tokens are also introduced to remove some of the syntactic differencesbetween the coding standards and to function in co-operation with theerror conditions. The automatic token generation is done after theserial analysis of the standard-dependent data. Therefore, the SpatialDecoder responds equally to tokens that have been supplied directly tothe input of the Spatial Decoder, i.e. the SCD, as well as to tokensthat have been generated following the detection of the start-codes inthe coded data. A sequence of extra tokens is inserted into the two-wireinterface in order to control the multi-standard nature of the presentinvention.

The MPEG and H.261 coded video streams contain standard dependent,non-data, identifiable bit patterns, one of which is hereinafter calleda start image and/or standard-dependent code. A similar function isserved in JPEG, by marker codes. These start/marker codes identifysignificant parts of the syntax of the coded datastream. The analysis ofstart/marker codes performed by the Start Code Detector is the firststage in parsing the coded data.

The start/marker code patterns are designed so that they can beidentified without decoding the entire bit stream. Thus, they can beused, in accordance with the present invention, to assist with errorrecovery and decoder start-up. The Start Code Detector providesfacilities to detect errors in the coded data construction and to assistthe start-up of the decoder. The error detection capability of the StartCode Detector will subsequently be discussed in further detail, as willthe process of starting up of the decoder.

The aforementioned description has been concerned primarily with thecharacteristics of the machine-dependent bit stream and its relationshipwith the addressing characteristics of the present invention. Thefollowing description is of the bit stream characteristics of thestandard-dependent coded data with reference to the Start Code Detector.

Each of the standard compression encoding systems employs a unique startcode configuration or image which has been selected to identify thatparticular compression specification. Each of the start codes alsocarries with it a start code value. The start code value is employed toidentify within the language of the standard the type of operation thatthe start code is associated with. In the multi-standard decoder of thepresent invention, the compatibility is based upon the control token andDATA token configuration as previously described. Index signals,including flag signals, are circuit-generated within each state machine,and are described hereinafter as appropriate.

The start and/or marker codes contained in the standards, as well asother standard words as opposed to data words, are sometimes identifiedas images to avoid confusion with the use of code and/ormachine-dependent codes to refer to the contents of control and/or DATAtokens used in the machine. Also, the term start code is often used as ageneric term to refer to JPEG marker codes as well as MPEG and H.261start codes. Marker codes and start codes serve the same purpose. Also,the term "flush" is used both to refer to the FLUSH token, and as averb, for example when referring to flushing the Start Code Detectorshift registers (including the signal "flushed"). To avoid confusion,the FLUSH token is always written in upper case. All other uses of theterm (verb or noun) are in lower case.

The standard-dependent coded input picture input stream comprises dataand start images of varying lengths. The start images carry with them avalue telling the user what operation is to be performed on the datawhich immediately follows according to the standard. However, in themulti-standard pipeline processing system of the present invention,where compatibility is required for multiple standards, the system hasbeen optimized for handling all functions in all standards. Accordingly,in many situations, unique start control tokens must be created whichare compatible not only with the values contained in the values of theencoded signal standard image, but which are also capable of controllingthe various stages to emulate the operation of the standard asrepresented by specified parameters for each standard which are wellknown in the art. All such standards are incorporated by reference intothis specification.

It is important to understand the relationship between tokens which,alone or in combination with other control tokens, emulate the nondatainformation contained in the standard bit stream. A separate set ofindex signals, including flag signals, are generated by each statemachine to handle some of the processing within that state machine.Values carried in the standards can be used to access machine dependentcontrol signals to emulate the handling of the standard data andnon-data signals. For example, the slice₋₋ start token is a two wordtoken, and it is then entered onto the two wire interface as previouslydescribed.

The data input to the system of the present invention may be a datasource from any suitable data source such as disk, tape, etc., the datasource providing 8 bit data to the first functional stage in the SpatialDecoder, the Start Code Detector 51 (FIG. 11). The Start Code Detectorincludes three shift registers; the first shift register is 8 bits wide,the next is 24 bits wide, and the next is 15 bits wide. Each of theregisters is part of the two-wire interface. The data from the datasource is loaded into the first register as a single 8 bit byte duringone timing cycle. Thereafter, the contents of the first shift registeris shifted one bit at a time into the decode (second) shift register.After 24 cycles, the 24 bit register is full.

Every 8 cycles, the 8 bit bytes are loaded into the first shiftregister. Each byte is loaded into the value shift register 221 (FIG.20), and 8 additional cycles are used to empty it and load the shiftregister 231. Eight cycles are used to empty it, so after three of thoseoperations or 24 cycles, there are still three bytes in the 24 bitregister. The value decode shift register 230 is still empty.

Assuming that there is now a PICTURE₋₋ START word in the 24 bit shiftregister, the detect cycle recognizes the PICTURE₋₋ START code patternand provides a start signal as its output. Once the detector hasdetected a start, the byte following it is the value associated withthat start code, and this is currently sitting in the value register221.

Since the contents of the detect shift register has been identified as astart code, its contents must be removed from the two wire interface toensure that no further processing takes place using these 3 bytes. Thedecode register is emptied, and the value decode shift register 230waits for the value to be shifted all the way over to such register.

The contents now of the low order bit positions of the value decodeshift register contains a value associated with the PICTURE₋₋ START. TheSpatial Decoder equivalent to the standard PICTURE₋₋ START signal isreferred to as the SD PICTURE₋₋ START signal. The SD PICTURE₋₋ STARTsignal itself is going to now be contained in the token header, and thevalue is going to be contained in the extension word to the tokenheader.

10. TOKENS

In the practice of the present invention, a token is a universaladaptation unit in the form of an interactive interfacing messengerpackage for control and/or data functions and is adapted for use with areconfigurable processing stage (RPS) which is a stage, which inresponse to a recognized token, reconfigures itself to perform variousoperations.

Tokens may be either position dependent or position independent upon theprocessing stages for performance of various functions. Tokens may alsobe metamorphic in that they can be altered by a processing stage andthen passed down the pipeline for performance of further functions.Tokens may interact with all or less than all of the stages and in thisregard may interact with adjacent and/or non-adjacent stages. Tokens maybe position dependent for some functions and position independent forother functions, and the specific interaction with a stage may beconditioned by the previous processing history of a stage.

A PICTURE₋₋ END token is a way of signalling the end of a picture in amulti-standard decoder.

A multi-standard token is a way of mapping MPEG, JPEG and H.261 datastreams onto a single decoder using a mixture of standard dependent andstandard independent hardware and control tokens.

A SEARCH₋₋ MODE token is a technique for searching MPEG, JPEG and H.261data streams which allows random access and enhanced error recovery.

A STOP₋₋ AFTER₋₋ PICTURE token is a method of achieving a clear end todecoding which signals the end of a picture and clears the decoderpipeline, i.e., channel change.

Furthermore, padding a token is a way of passing an arbitrary number ofbits through a fixed size, fixed width buffer.

The present invention is directed to a pipeline processing system whichhas a variable configuration which uses tokens and a two-wire system.The use of control tokens and DATA Tokens in combination with a two-wiresystem facilitates a multi-standard system capable of having extendedoperating capabilities as compared with those systems which do not usecontrol tokens.

The control tokens are generated by circuitry within the decoderprocessor and emulate the operation of a number of different typestandard-dependent signals passing into the serial pipeline processorfor handling. The technique used is to study all the parameters of themulti-standards that are selected for processing by the serial processorand noting 1) their similarities, 2) their dissimilarities, 3) theirneeds and requirements and 4) selecting the correct token function toeffectively process all of the standard signals sent into the serialprocessor. The functions of the tokens are to emulate the standards. Acontrol token function is used partially as an emulation/translationbetween the standard dependent signals and as an element to transmitcontrol information through the pipeline processor.

In prior art system, a dedicated machine is designed according towell-known techniques to identify the standard and then set up dedicatedcircuitry by way of microprocessor interfaces. Signals from themicroprocessor are used to control the flow of data through thededicated downstream components. The selection, timing and organizationof this decompression function is under the control of fixed logiccircuitry as assisted by signals coming from the microprocessor.

In contrast, the system of the present invention configures thedownstream functional stages under the control of the control tokens. Anoption is provided for obtaining needed and/or alternative control fromthe MPU.

The tokens provide and make a sensible format for communicatinginformation through the decompression circuit pipeline processor. In thedesign selected hereinafter and used in the preferred embodiment, eachword of a token is a minimum of 8 bits wide, and a single token canextend over one or more words. The width of the token is changeable andcan be selected as any number of bits. An extension bit indicateswhether a token is extended beyond the current word, i.e., if it is setto binary one in all words of a token, except the last word of a token.If the first word of a token has an extension bit of zero, thisindicates that the token is only one word long.

Each token is identified by an address field that starts at bit 7 of thefirst word of the token. The address field is variable in length and canpotentially extend over multiple words. In a preferred embodiment, theaddress is no longer than 8 bits long. However, this is not a limitationon the invention, but on the magnitude of the processing steps electedto be accomplished by use of these tokens. It is to be noted under theextension bit identification label that the extension bit in words 1 and2 is a 1, signifying that additional words will be coming thereafter.The extension bit in word 3 is a zero, therefore indicating the end ofthat token.

The token is also capable of variable bit length. For example, there are9 bits in the token word plus the extension bit for a total of 10 bits.In the design of the present invention, output buses are of variablewidth. The output from the Spatial Decoder is 9 bits wide, or 10 bitswide when the extension bit is included. In a preferred embodiment, theonly token that takes advantage of these extra bits is the DATA token;all other tokens ignore this extra bit. It should be understood thatthis is not a limitation, but only an implementation.

Through the use of the DATA token and control token configuration, it ispossible to vary the length of the data being carried by these DATAtokens in the sense of the number of bits In one word. For example, ithas been discussed that data bits in word of a DATA Token can becombined with the data bits in another word of the sane DATA token toform an 11 bit or 10 bit address for use in accessing the random accessmemories used throughout this serial decompression processor. Thisprovides an additional degree of variability that facilitates a broadrange of versatility.

As previously described, the DATA token carries data from one processingstage to the next. Consequently, the characteristics of this tokenchange as it passes through the decoder. For example, at the input tothe Spatial Decoder, DATA Tokens carry bit serial coded video datapacked into 8 bit words. Here, there is no limit to the length of eachtoken. However, to illustrate the versatility of this aspect of theinvention (at the output of the Spatial Decoder circuit), each DATAToken carries exactly 64 words and each word is 9 bits wide. Morespecifically, the standard encoding signal allows for different lengthmessages to encode different intensities and details of pictures. Thefirst picture of a group normally carries the longest number of databits because it needs to provide the most information to the processingunit so that it can start the decompression with as much information aspossible. Words which follow later are typically shorter in lengthbecause they contain the difference signals comparing the first wordwith reference to the second position on the scan information field.

The words are interspersed with each other, as required by the standardencoding system, so that variable amounts of data are provided into theinput of the Spatial Decoder. However, after the Spatial Decoder hasfunctioned, the information is provided at its output at a pictureformat rate suitable for display on a screen. The output rate in termsof time of the spatial decoder may vary in order to interface withvarious display systems throughout the world, such as NTSC, PAL andSECAM. The video formatter converts this variable picture rate to aconstant picture rate suitable for display. However, the picture data isstill carried by DATA tokens consisting of 64 words.

11. DRAM INTERFACE

A single high performance, configurable DRAM interface is used on eachof the 3 decoder chips. In general, the DRAM interface on each chip issubstantially the same; however, the interfaces differ from one toanother in how they handle channel priorities. This interface isdesigned to directly drive the external DRAMs used by the SpatialDecoder, the Temporal Decoder and the Video Formatter. Typically, noexternal logic, buffers or components will be required to connect theDRAM interface to the DRAMs in those systems.

In accordance with the present invention, the interface is configurablein two ways:

1. The detailed timing of the interface can be configured to accommodatea variety of different DRAM types.

2. The width of the data interface to the DRAM can be configured toprovide a cost/performance trade off for different applications.

In general, the DRAM interface is a standard-independent blockimplemented on each of the three chips in the system. Again, these arethe Spatial Decoder, Temporal Decoder and video formatter. Referringagain to FIGS. 11, 12 and 13, these figures show block diagrams thatdepict the relationship between the DRAM interface, and the remainingblocks of the Spatial Decoder, Temporal Decoder and video formatter,respectively. On each chip, the DRAM interface connects the chip to anexternal DRAM. External DRAM is used because, at present, it is notpractical to fabricate on chip the relatively large amount of DRAMneeded. Note: each chip has its own external DRAM and its own DRAMinterface.

Furthermore, while the DRAM interface is compressionstandard-independent, it still must be configured to implement each ofthe multiple standards, H.261, JPEG and MPEG. How the DRAM interface isreconfigured for multi-standard operation will be subsequently furtherdescribed herein.

Accordingly, to understand the operation of the DRAM interface requiresan understanding of the relationship between the DRAM interface and theaddress generator, and how the two communicate using the two wireinterface.

In general, as its name implies, the address generator generates theaddresses the DRAM interface needs in order to address the DRAM (e.g.,to read from or to write to a particular address in DRAM). With atwo-wire interface, reading and writing only occurs when the DRAMinterface has both data (from preceding stages in the pipeline), and avalid address (from address generator). The use of a separate addressgenerator simplifies the construction of both the address generator andthe DRAM interface, as discussed further below.

In the present invention, the DRAM interface can operate from a clockwhich is asynchronous to both the address generator and to the clocks ofthe stages through which data is passed. Special techniques have beenused to handle this asynchronous nature of the operation.

Data is typically transferred between the DRAM interface and the rest ofthe chip in blocks of 64 bytes (the only exception being prediction datain the Temporal Decoder). Transfers take place by means of a deviceknown as a "swing buffer". This is essentially a pair of RAMs operatedin a double-buffered configuration, with the DRAM interface filling oremptying one RAM while another part of the chip empties or fills theother RAM. A separate bus which carries an address from an addressgenerator is associated with each swing buffer.

In the present invention, each of the chips has four swing buffers, butthe function of these swing buffers is different in each case. In thespatial decoder, one swing buffer is used to transfer coded data to theDRAM, another to read coded data from the DRAM, the third to transfertokenized data to the DRAM and the fourth to read tokenized data fromthe DRAM. In the Temporal Decoder, however, one swing buffer is used towrite intra or predicted picture data to the DRAM, the second to readintra or predicted data from the DRAM and the other two are used to readforward and backward prediction data. In the video formatter, one swingbuffer is used to transfer data to the DRAM and the other three are usedto read data from the DRAM, one for each of luminance (Y) and the redand blue color difference data (Cr and Cb, respectively).

The following section describes the operation of a hypothetical DRAMinterface which has one write swing buffer and one read swing buffer.Essentially, this is the same as the operation of the Spatial Decoder'sDRAM interface. The operation is illustrated in FIG. 23.

FIG. 23 illustrates that the control interfaces between the addressgenerator 301, the DRAM interface 302, and the remaining stages of thechip which pass data are all two wire interfaces. The address generator301 may either generate addresses as the result of receiving controltokens, or it may merely generate a fixed sequence of addresses (e.g.,for the FIFO buffers of the Spatial Decoder). The DRAM interface treatsthe two wire interfaces associated with the address generator 301 in aspecial way. Instead of keeping the accept line high when it is ready toreceive an address, it waits for the address generator to supply a validaddress, processes that address and then sets the accept line high forone clock period. Thus, it implements a request/acknowledge (REQ/ACK)protocol.

A unique feature of the DRAM interface 302 is its ability to communicateindependently with the address generator 301 and with the stages thatprovide or accept the data. For example, the address generator maygenerate an address associated with the data in the write swing buffer(FIG. 24), but no action will be taken until the write swing buffersignals that there is a block of data ready to be written to theexternal DRAM. Similarly, the write swing buffer may contain a block ofdata which is ready to be written to the external DRAM, but no action istaken until an address is supplied on the appropriate bus from theaddress generator 301. Further, once one of the RAMs in the write swingbuffer has been filled with data, the other may be completely filled and"swung" to the DRAM interface side before the data input is stalled (thetwo-wire interface accept signal set low).

In understanding the operation of the DRAM interface 302 of the presentinvention, it is important to note that in a properly configured system,the DRAM interface will be able to transfer data between the swingbuffers and the external DRAM 303 at least as fast as the sum of all theaverage data rates between the swing buffers and the rest of the chip.

Each DRAM interface 302 determines which swing buffer it will servicenext. In general, this will either be a "round robin" (i.e., the nextserviced swing buffer is the next available swing buffer which has leastrecently had a turn), or a priority encoder, (i.e., in which some swingbuffers have a higher priority than others). In both cases, anadditional request will come from a refresh request generator which hasa higher priority than all the other requests. The refresh request isgenerated from a refresh counter which can be programmed via themicroprocessor interface.

Referring now to FIG. 24, there is shown a block diagram of a writeswing buffer. The write swing buffer interface includes two blocks ofRAM, RAM1 311 and RAM2 312. As discussed further herein, data is writteninto RAM1 311 and RAM2 312 from the previous stage, under the control ofthe write address 313 and control 314. From RAM1 311 and RAM2 312, thedata is written into DRAM 515. When writing data into DRAM 315, the DRAMrow address is provided by the address generator, and the column addressis provided by the write address and control, as described furtherherein. In operation, valid data is presented at the input 316 (datain). Typically, the data is received from the previous stage. As eachpiece of data is accepted by the DRAM interface, it is written into RAM1311 and the write address control increments the RAM1 address to allowthe next piece of data to be written into RAM1. Data continues to bewritten into RAM1 311 until either there is no more data, or RAM1 isfull. When RAM1 311 is full, the input side gives up control and sends asignal to the read side to indicate that RAM1 is now ready to be read.This signal passes between two asynchronous clock regimes and,therefore, passes through three synchronizing flip flops.

Provided RAM2 312 is empty, the next item of data to arrive on the inputside is written into RAM2. Otherwise, this occurs when RAM2 312 hasemptied. When the round robin or priority encoder (depending on which isused by the particular chip) indicates that it is now the turn of thisswing buffer to be read, the DRAM interface reads the contents of RAM1311 and writes them to the external DRAM 315. A signal is then sent backacross the asynchronous interface, to indicate that RAM1 311 is nowready to be filled again.

If the DRAM interface empties RAM1 311 and "swings" it before the inputside has filled RAM2 312, then data can be accepted by the swing buffercontinually. Otherwise, when RAM2 is filled, the swing buffer will setits accept single low until RAM1 has been "swung" back for use by theinput side.

The operation of a read swing buffer, in accordance with the presentinvention, is similar, but with the input and output data bussesreversed.

The DRAM interface of the present invention is designed to maximize theavailable memory bandwidth. Each 8×8 block of data is stored in the sameDRAM page. In this way, full use can be made of DRAM fast page accessmodes, where one row address is supplied followed by many columnaddresses. In particular, row addresses are supplied by the addressgenerator, while column addresses are supplied by the DRAM interface, asdiscussed further below.

In addition, the facility is provided to allow the data bus to theexternal DRAM to be 8, 16 or 32 bits wide. Accordingly, the amount ofDRAM used can be matched to the size and bandwidth requirements of theparticular application.

In this example (which is exactly how the DRAM interface on the spatialDecoder works) the address generator provides the DRAM interface withblock addresses for each of the read and write swing buffers. Thisaddress is used as the row address for the DRAM. The six bits of columnaddress are supplied by the DRAM interface itself, and these bits arealso used as the address for the swing buffer RAM. The data bus to theswing buffers is 32 bits wide. Hence, if the bus width to the externalDRAM is less than 32 bits, two or four external DRAM accesses must bemade before the next word is read from a write swing buffer or the nextword is written to a read swing buffer (read and write refer to thedirection of transfer relative to the external DRAM).

The situation is more complex in the case of the Temporal Decoder andthe Video Formatter. The Temporal Decoder's addressing is more complexbecause of its predictive aspects as discussed further in this section.The video formatter's addressing is more complex because of multiplevideo output standard aspects, as discussed further in the sectionsrelating to the video formatter.

As mentioned previously, the Temporal Decoder has four swing buffers:two are used to read and write decoded intra and predicted (I and P)picture data. These operate as described above. The other two are usedto receive prediction data. These buffers are more interesting.

In general, prediction data will be offset from the position of theblock being processed as specified in the motion vectors in x and y.Thus, the block of data to be retrieved will not generally correspond tothe block boundaries of the data as it was encoded (and written into theDRAM). This is illustrated in FIG. 25, where the shaded area representsthe block that is being formed whereas the dotted outline represents theblock from which it is being predicted. The address generator convertsthe address specified by the motion vectors to a block offset (a wholenumber of blocks), as shown by the big arrow, and a pixel offset, asshown by the little arrow.

In the address generator, the frame pointer, base block address andvector offset are added to form the address of the block to be retrievedfrom the DRAM. If the pixel offset is zero, only one request isgenerated. If there is an offset in either the x or y dimension then tworequests are generated, i.e., the original block address and the oneimmediately below. With an offset in both x and y, four requests aregenerated. For each block which is to be retrieved, the addressgenerator calculates start and stop addresses which is best illustratedby an example.

Consider a pixel offset of (1,1), as illustrated by the shaded area inFIG. 26. The address generator makes four requests, labelled A through Din the Figure. The problem to be solved is how to provide the requiredsequence of row addresses quickly. The solution is to use "start/stop"technology, and this is described below.

Consider block A in FIG. 26. Reading must start at position (1,1) andend at position (7,7). Assume for the moment that one byte is being readat a time (i.e., an 8 bit DRAM interface). The x value in theco-ordinate pair forms the three LSBs of the address, the y value thethree MSB. The x and y start values are both 1, providing the address,9. Data is read from this address and the x value is incremented. Theprocess is repeated until the x value reaches its stop value, at whichpoint, the y value is incremented by 1 and the x start value isreloaded, giving an address of 17. As each byte of data is read, the xvalue is again incremented until it reaches its stop value. The processis repeated until both x and y values have reached their stop values.Thus, the address sequence of 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17 . . . , 23,25, . . . , 31, 33, . . . , . . . , 57, . . . , 63 is generated.

In a similar manner, the start and stop co-ordinates for block B are:(1,0) and (7,0), for block C: (0,1) and (0,7), and for block D: (0,0)and (0,0).

The next issue is where this data should be written. Clearly, looking atblock A, the data read from address 9 should be written to address 0 inthe swing buffer, while the data from address 10 should be written toaddress 1 in the swing buffer, and so on. Similarly, the data read fromaddress 8 in block B should be written to address 15 in the swing bufferand the data from address 16 should be written to address 15 in theswing buffer. This function turns out to have a very simpleimplementation, as outlined below.

Consider block A. At the start of reading, the swing buffer addressregister is loaded with the inverse of the stop value. The y inversestop value forms the 3 MSBs and the x inverse stop value forms the 3LSB. In this case, while the DRAM interface is reading address 9 in theexternal DRAM, the swing buffer address is zero. The swing bufferaddress register is then incremented as the external DRAM addressregister is incremented, as consistent with proper predictionaddressing.

The discussion so far has centered on an 8 bit DRAM interface. In thecase of a 16 or 32 bit interface, a few minor modifications must bemade. First, the pixel offset vector must be "clipped" so that it pointsto a 16 or 32 bit boundary. In the example we have been using, for blockA, the first DRAM read will point to address 0, and data in addresses 0through 3 will be read. Second, the unwanted data must be discarded.This is performed by writing all the data into the swing buffer (whichmust now be physically larger than was necessary in the 8 bit case) andreading with an offset. When performing MPEG half-pel interpolation, 9bytes in x and/or y must be read from the DRAM interface. In this case,the address generator provides the appropriate start and stop addresses.Some additional logic in the DRAM interface is used, but there is nofundamental change in the way the DRAM interface operates.

The final point to note about the Temporal Decoder DRAM interface of thepresent invention, is that additional information must be provided tothe prediction filters to indicate what processing is required on thedata. This consists of the following:

a "last byte" signal indicating the last byte of a transfer (of 64, 72or 81 bytes);

an H.261 flag;

a bidirectional prediction flag;

two bits to indicate the block's dimensions (8 or 9 bytes in x and y);and

a two bit number to indicate the order of the blocks.

The last byte flag can be generated as the data is read out of the swingbuffer. The other signals are derived from the address generator and arepiped through the DRAM interface so that they are associated with thecorrect block of data as it is read out of the swing buffer by theprediction filter block.

In the Video Formatter, data is written into the external DRAM inblocks, but is read out in raster order. Writing is exactly the same asalready described for the Spatial Decoder, but reading is a little morecomplex.

The data in the Video Formatter, external DRAM is organized so that atleast 8 blocks of data fit into a single page. These 8 blocks are 8consecutive horizontal blocks. When rasterizing, 8 bytes need to be readout of each of 8 consecutive blocks and written into the swing bufferi.e., the same row in each of the 8 blocks).

Considering the top row (and assuming a byte-wide interface), the xaddress (the three LSBS) is set to zero, as is the y address (3 MSBS).The x address is then incremented as each of the first 8 bytes are readout. At this point, the top part of the address (bit 6 andabove--LSB=bit 0) is incremented and the x address (3 LSBS) is reset tozero. This process is repeated until 64 bytes have been read. With a 16or 32 bit wide interface to the external DRAM the x address is merelyincremented by two or four, respectively, instead of by one.

In the present invention, the address generator can signal to the DRAMinterface that less than 64 bytes should be read this may be required atthe beginning or end of a raster line), although a multiple of 8 bytesis always read. This is achieved by using start and stop values. Thestart value is used for the top part of the address (bit 6 and above),and the stop value is compared with the start value to generate thesignal which indicates when reading should stop.

The DRAM interface timing block in the present invention uses timingchains to place the edges of the DRAM signals to a precision of aquarter of the system clock period. Two quadrature clocks from the phaselocked loop are used. These are combined to form a notional 2x clock.Any one chain is then made from two shift registers in parallel, onopposite phases of the 2x clock.

First of all, there is one chain for the page start cycle and anotherfor the read/write/refresh cycles. The length of each cycle isprogrammable via the microprocessor interface, after which the pagestart chain has a fixed length, and the cycle chain's length changes asappropriate during a page start.

On reset, the chains are cleared and a pulse is created. The pulsetravels along the chains and is directed by the state information fromthe DRAM interface. The pulse generates the DRAM interface clock. EachDRAM interface clock period corresponds to one cycle of the DRAM,consequently, as the DRAM cycles have different lengths, the DRAMinterface clock is not at a constant rate.

Moreover, additional timing chains combine the pulse from the abovechains with the information from the DRAM interface to generate theoutput strobes and enables such as notcas, notras, notwe, notbe.

12. PREDICTION FILTERS

Referring again to FIGS. 12, 17, 18, and more particularly to FIG. 12,there is shown a block diagram of the Temporal Decoder. This includesthe prediction filter. The relationship between the prediction filterand the rest of the elements of the temporal decoder is shown in greaterdetail in FIG. 17. The essence of the structure of the prediction filteris shown in FIGS. 18 and 28. A detailed description of the operation ofthe prediction filter can be found in the section, "More DetailedDescription of the Invention."

In general, the prediction filter in accordance with the presentinvention, is used in the MPEG and H.261 modes, but not in the JPEGmode. Recall that in the JPEG mode, the Temporal Decoder just passes thedata through to the Video Formatter, without performing any substantivedecoding beyond that accomplished by the Spatial Decoder. Referringagain to FIG. 18, in the MPEG mode the forward and backward predictionfilters are identical and they filter the respective MPEG forward andbackward prediction blocks. In the H.261 mode, however, only the forwardprediction filter is used, since H.261 does not use backward prediction.

Each of the two prediction filters of the present invention issubstantially the same. Referring again to FIGS. 18 and 28 and moreparticularly to FIG. 28, there is shown a block diagram of the structureof a prediction filter. Each prediction filter consists of four stagesin series. Data enters the format stage 331 and is placed in a formatthat can be readily filtered. In the next stage 332 an I-D prediction isperformed on the X-coordinate. After the necessary transposition isperformed by a dimension buffer stage 333, an I-D prediction isperformed on the Y-coordinate in stage 334. How the stage perform thefiltering is further described in greater detail subsequently. Whichfiltering operations are required, are defined by the compressionstandard. In the case of H.261, the actual filtering performed issimilar to that of a low pass filter.

Referring again to FIG. 17, multi-standard operation requires that theprediction filters be reconfigurable to perform either MPEG or H.261filtering, or to perform no filtering at all in JPEG mode. As with manyother reconfigurable aspects of the three chip system, the predictionfilter is reconfigured by means of tokens. Tokens are also used toinform the address generator of the particular mode of operation. Inthis way, the address generator can supply the prediction filter withthe addresses of the needed data, which varies significantly betweenMPEG and JPEG.

13. ACCESSING REGISTERS

Most registers in the microprocessor interface (MPI) can only bemodified if the stage with which they are associated is stopped.Accordingly, groups of registers will typically be associated with anaccess register. The value zero in an access register indicates that thegroup of registers associated with that particular access registershould not be modified. Writing 1 to an access register requests that astage be stopped. The stage may not stop immediately, however, so thestages access register will hold the value, zero, until it is stopped.

Any user software associated with the MPI and used to perform functionsby way of the MPI should wait "after writing a 1 to a request accessregister" until 1 is read from the access register. If a user writes avalue to a configuration register while its access register is set tozero, the results are undefined.

14. MICRO-PROCESSOR INTERFACE

A standard byte wide micro-processor interface (MPI) is used on allcircuits with in the Spatial Decoder and Temporal Decoder. The MPIoperates asynchronously with various Spatial and Temporal Decoderclocks. Referring to Table A.6.1 of the subsequent further detaileddescription, there is shown the various MPI signals that are used onthis interface. The character of the signal is shown on the input/outputcolumn, the signal name is shown on the signal name column and adescription of the function of the signal is shown in the descriptioncolumn. The MPI electrical specification are shown with reference toTable A.6.2. All the specifications are classified according to type andthere types are shown in the column entitled symbol. The description ofwhat these symbols represent is shown in the parameter column. Theactual specifications are shown in the respective columns min, max andunits.

The DC operating conditions can be seen with reference to Table A.6.3.Here the column headings are the same as with reference to Table A.6.2.The DC electrical characteristics are shown with reference to TableA.6.4 and carry the same column headings as depicted in Tables A.6.2 andA.6.3.

15. MPI READ TIMING

The AC characteristics of the MPI read timing diagrams are shown withreference to FIG. 54. Each line of the Figure is labelled with acorresponding signal name and the timing is given in nano-seconds. Thefull microprocessor interface read timing characteristics are shown withreference to Table A.6.5. The column entitled Number is used to indicatethe signal corresponding to the name of that signal as set forth in thecharacteristic column. The columns identified by MIN and MAX provide theminimum length of time that the signal is present the maximum amount oftime that this signal is available. The Units column gives the units ofmeasurement used to describe the signals.

16. MPI WRITE TIMING

The general description of the MPI write timing diagrams are shown withreference to FIG. 54. This Figure shows each individual signal name asassociated with the MPI write timing. The name, the characteristic ofthe signal, and other various physical characteristics are shown withreference to Table 6.6.

17. KEYHOLE ADDRESS LOCATIONS

In the present invention, certain less frequently accessed memory maplocations have been placed behind keyhole registers. A keyhole registerhas two registers associated with it. The first register is a keyholeaddress register and the second register is a keyhole data register. Thekeyhole address specifies a location within a extended address space. Aread or a write operation to a keyhole data register accesses thelocations specified by the keyhole address register. After accessing akeyhole data register, the associated keyhole address registerincrements. Random access within the extended address space is onlypossible by writing in a new value to the keyhole address register foreach access. A circuit within the present invention may have more thanone keyhole memory maps. Nonetheless, there is no interaction betweenthe different keyholes.

18. PICTURE-END

Referring again to FIG. 11, there is shown a general block diagram ofthe Spatial Decoder used in the present invention. It is through the useof this block diagram that the function of PICTURE₋₋ END will bedescribed. The PICTURE₋₋ END function has the multi-standard advantageof being able to handle H.261 encoded picture information, MPEG and JPEGsignals.

As previously described, the system of FIG. 11 is interconnected by thetwo wire interface previously described. Each of the functional blocksis arranged to operate according to the state machine configurationshown with reference to FIG. 10.

In general, the PICTURE₋₋ END function in accordance with the inventionbegins at the Start Code Detector which generates a PICTURE₋₋ ENDcontrol token. The PICTURE₋₋ END control token is passed unalteredthrough the start-up control circuit to the DRAM interface. Here it isused to flush out the write swing buffers in the DRAM interface. Recall,that the contents of a swing buffer are only written to RAM when thebuffer is full. However, a picture may end at a point where the bufferis not full, therefore, causing the picture data to become stuck. ThePICTURE₋₋ END token forces the data out of the swing buffer.

Since the present invention is a multi-standard machine, the machineoperates differently for each compression standard. More particularly,the machine is fully described as operating pursuant tomachine-dependent action cycles. For each compression standard, acertain number of the total available action cycles can be selected by acombination of control tokens and/or output signals from the MPU or theycan be selected by the design of the control tokens themselves. In thisregard, the present invention is organized so as to delay theinformation from going into subsequent blocks until all of theinformation has been collected in an upstream block. The system waitsuntil the data has been prepared for passing to the next stage. In thisway, the PICTURE₋₋ END signal is applied to the coded data buffer, andthe control portion of the PICTURE₋₋ END signal causes the contents ofthe data buffers to be read and applied to the Huffman decoder and videodemultiplexor circuit.

Another advantage of the PICTURE₋₋ END control token is to identify, forthe use by the Huffman decoder demultiplexor, the end of picture eventhough it has not had the typically expected full range and/or number ofsignals applied to the Huffman decoder and video demultiplexor circuit.In this situation, the information held in the coded data buffer isapplied to the Huffman decoder and video demultiplexor as a totalpicture. In this way, the state machine of the Huffman decoder and videodemultiplexor can still handle the data according to system design.

Another advantage of the PICTURE₋₋ END control token is its ability tocompletely empty the coded data buffer so that no stray information willinadvertently remain in the off chip DRAM or in the swing buffers.

Yet another advantage of the PICTURE₋₋ END function is its use in errorrecovery. For example, assume the amount of data being held in the codeddata buffer is less than is typically used for describing the spatialinformation with reference to a single picture. Accordingly, the lastpicture will be held in the data buffer until a full swing buffer, but,by definition, the buffer will never fill. At some point, the machinewill determine that an error condition exits. Hence, to the extent thata PICTURE₋₋ END token is decoded and forces the data in the coded databuffers to be applied to the Huffman decoder and video demultiplexor,the final picture can be decoded and the information emptied from thebuffers. Consequently, the machine will not go into error recovery modeand will successfully continue to process the coded data.

A still further advantage of the use of a PICTURE₋₋ END token is thatthe serial pipeline processor will continue the processing ofuninterrupted data. Through the use of a PICTURE₋₋ END token, the serialpipeline processor is configured to handle less than the expected amountof data and, therefore, continues processing. Typically, a prior artmachine would stop itself because of an error condition. As previouslydescribed, the coded data buffer counts macroblocks as they come intoits storage area. In addition, the Huffman Decoder and VideoDemultiplexor generally know the amount of information expected fordecoding each picture, i.e., the state machine portion of the Huffmandecode and Video Demultiplexor know the number of blocks that it willprocess during each picture recovery cycle. When the correct number ofblocks do not arrive from the coded data buffer, typically an errorrecovery routine would result. However, with the PICTURE₋₋ END controltoken having reconfigured the Huffman Decoder and Video Demultiplexor,it can continue to function because the reconfiguration tells theHuffman Decoder and Video Demultiplexor that it is, indeed, handling theproper amount of information.

Referring again to FIG. 10, the Token Decoder portion of the BufferManager detects the PICTURE₋₋ END control token generated by the StartCode Detector. Under normal operations, the buffer registers fill up andare emptied, as previously described with reference to the normaloperation of the swing buffers. Again, a swing buffer which is partiallyfull of data will not empty until it is totally filled and/or it knowsthat it is time to empty. The PICTURE₋₋ END control token is decoded inthe Token Decoder portion of the Buffer Manager, and it forces thepartially full swing buffer to empty itself into the coded data buffer.This is ultimately passed to the Huffman Decoder and Video Demultiplexoreither directly or through the DRAM interface.

19. FLUSHING OPERATION

Another advantage of the PICTURE₋₋ END control token is its function inconnection with a FLUSH token. The FLUSH token is not associated witheither controlling the reconfiguration of the state machine or inproviding data for the system. Rather, it completes prior partialsignals for handling by the machine-dependent state machines. Each ofthe state machines recognizes a FLUSH control token as information notto be processed. Accordingly, the FLUSH token is used to fill up all ofthe remaining empty parts of the coded data buffers and to allow a fullset of information to be sent to the Huffman Decoder and VideoDemultiplexor. In this way, the FLUSH token is like padding for buffers.

The Token Decoder in the Huffman circuit recognizes the FLUSH token andignores the pseudo data that the FLUSH token has forced into it. TheHuffman Decoder then operates only on the data contents of the lastpicture buffer as it existed prior to the arrival of the PICTURE₋₋ ENDtoken and FLUSH token. A further advantage of the use of the PICTURE₋₋END token alone or in combination with a FLUSH token is thereconfiguration and/or reorganization of the Huffman Decoder circuit.With the arrival of the PICTURE₋₋ END token, the Huffman Decoder circuitknows that it will have less information than normally expected todecode the last picture. The Huffman decode circuit finishes processingthe information contained in the last picture, and outputs thisinformation through the DRAM interface into the Inverse Modeller. Uponthe identification of the last picture, the Huffman Decoder goes intoits cleanup mode and readjusts for the arrival of the next pictureinformation.

20. FLUSH FUNCTION

The FLUSH token, in accordance with the present invention, is used topass through the entire pipeline processor and to ensure that thebuffers are emptied and that other circuits are reconfigured to awaitthe arrival of new data. More specifically, the present inventioncomprises a combination of a PICTURE₋₋ END token, a padding word and aFLUSH token indicating to the serial pipeline processor that the pictureprocessing for the current picture form is completed. Thereafter, thevarious state machines need reconfiguring to await the arrival of newdata for new handling. Note also that the FLUSH Token acts as a specialreset for the system. The FLUSH token resets each stage as it passesthrough, but allows subsequent stages to continue processing. Thisprevents a loss of data. In other words, the FLUSH token is a variablereset, as opposed to, an absolute reset.

21. STOP-AFTER PICTURE

The STOP₋₋ AFTER₋₋ PICTURE function is employed to shut down theprocessing of the serial pipeline decompressing circuit at a logicalpoint in its operation. At this point, a PICTURE₋₋ END token isgenerated indicating that data is finished coming in from the data inputline, and the padding operation has been completed. The padding functionfills partially empty DATA tokens. A FLUSH token is then generated whichpasses through the serial pipeline system and pushes all the informationout of the registers and forces the registers back into their neutralstand-by condition. The STOP₋₋ AFTER₋₋ PICTURE event is then generatedand no more input is accepted until either the user or the system clearsthis state. In other words, while a PICTURE₋₋ END token signals the endof a picture, the STOP₋₋ AFTER₋₋ PICTURE operation signals the end ofall current processing.

22. MULTI-STANDARD--SEARCH MODE

Another feature of the present invention is the use of a SEARCH₋₋ MODEcontrol token which is used to reconfigure the input to the serialpipeline processor to look at the incoming bit stream. When the searchmode is set, the Start Code Detector searches only for a specific startcode or marker used in any one of the compression standards. It will beappreciated, however, that, other images from other data bitstreams canbe used for this purpose. Accordingly, these images can be usedthroughout this present invention to change it to another embodimentwhich is capable of using the combination of control tokens, and DATAtokens along with the reconfiguration circuits, to provide similarprocessing.

The use of search mode in the present invention is convenient in manysituations including 1) if a break in the data bit stream occurs; 2)when the user breaks the data bit stream by purposely changing channels,e.g., data arriving, by a cable carrying compressed digital video; or 3)by user activation of fast forward or reverse from a controllable datasource such as an optical disc or video disc. In general, a search modeis convenient when the user interrupts the normal processing of theserial pipeline at a point where the machine does not expect such aninterruption.

When any of the search modes are set, the Start Code Detector looks forincoming start images which are suitable for creating the machineindependent tokens. All data coming into the Start Code Detector priorto the identification of standard-dependent start images is discarded asmeaningless and the machine stands in an idling condition as it waitsfor this information.

The Start Code Detector can assume any one of a number ofconfigurations. For example, one of these configurations allows a searchfor a group of pictures or higher start codes. This pattern causes theStart Code Detector to discard all its input and look for the group₋₋start standard image. When such an image is identified, the Start CodeDetector generates a GROUP₋₋ START token and the search mode is resetautomatically.

It is important to note that a single circuit, the Huffman Decoder andVideo Demultiplex circuit, is operating with a combination of inputsignals including the standard-independent set-up signals, as well as,the CODING₋₋ STANDARD signals. The CODING₋₋ STANDARD signals areconveying information directly from the incoming bit stream as requiredby the Huffman Decoder and Video Demultiplex circuit. Nevertheless,while the functioning of the Huffman Decoder and Video Demultiplexcircuit is under the operation of the standard independent sequence ofsignals.

This mode of operation has been selected because it is the mostefficient and could have been designed wherein special control tokensare employed for conveying the standard-dependent input to the HuffmanDecoder and Video Demultiplexer instead of conveying the actual signalsthemselves.

23. INVERSE MODELLER

Inverse modeling is a feature of all three standards, and is the samefor all three standards. In general, DATA tokens in the token buffercontain information about the values of the quantized coefficients, andabout the number of zeros between the coefficients that are represented(a form of run length coding). The Inverse Modeller of the presentinvention has been adapted for use with tokens and simply expands theinformation about runs of zeros so that each DATA Token contains therequisite 64 values. Thereafter, the values in the DATA Tokens arequantized coefficients which can be used by the Inverse Quantizer.

24. INVERSE QUANTIZER

The Inverse Quantizer of the present invention is a required element inthe decoding sequence, but has been implemented in such away to allowthe entire IC set to handle multi-standard data. In addition, theInverse Quantizer has been adapted for use with tokens. The InverseQuantizer lies between the Inverse modeller and inverse DCT (IDCT).

For example, in the present invention, an adder in the Inverse Quantizeris used to add a constant to the pel decode number before the data moveson to the IDCT.

The IDCT uses the pel decode number, which will vary according to eachstandard used to encode the information. In order for the information tobe properly decoded, a value of 1024 is added to the decode number bythe Inverse Quantizer before the data continues on to the IDCT.

Using adders, already present in the Inverse Quantizer, to standardizethe data prior to it reaching the IDCT, eliminates the need foradditional circuitry or software in the IC, for handling data compressedby the various standards. Other operations allowing for multi-standardoperation are performed during a "post quantization function" and arediscussed below.

The control tokens accompanying the data are decoded and the variousstandardization routines that need to be performed by the InverseQuantizer are identified in detail below. These "post quantization"functions are all implemented to avoid duplicate circuitry and to allowthe IC to handle multi-standard encoded data.

25. HUFFMAN DECODER AND PARSER

Referring again to FIGS. 11 and 27, the Spatial Decoder includes aHuffman Decoder for decoding the data that the various compressionstandards have Huffman-encoded. While each of the standards, JPEG, MPEGand H.261, require certain data to be Huffman encoded, the Huffmandecoding required by each standard differs in some significant ways. Inthe Spatial Decoder of the present invention, rather than design andfabricate three separate Huffman decoders, one for each standard, thepresent invention saves valuable die space by identifying common aspectsof each Huffman Decoder, and fabricating these common aspects only once.Moreover, a clever multi-part algorithm is used that makes common moreaspects of each Huffman Decoder common to the other standards as wellthan would otherwise be the case.

In brief, the Huffman Decoder 321 works in conjunction with the otherunits shown in FIG. 27. These other units are the Parser State Machine322, the inshifter 323, the Index to Data unit 324, the ALU 325, and theToken Formatter 326. As described previously, connection between theseblocks is governed by a two wire interface. A more detailed descriptionof how these units function is subsequently described herein in greaterdetail, the focus here is on particular aspects of the Huffman Decoder,in accordance with the present invention, that support multi-standardoperation.

The Parser State Machine of the present invention, is a programmablestate machine that acts to coordinate the operation of the other blocksof the Video Parser. In response to data, the Parser State Machinecontrols the other system blocks by generating a control word which ispassed to the other blocks, side by side with the data, upon which thiscontrol word acts. Passing the control word alongside the associateddata is not only useful, it is essential, since these blocks areconnected via a two-wire interface. In this way, both data and controlarrive at the same time. The passing of the control word is indicated inFIG. 27 by a control line 327 that runs beneath the data line 328 thatconnects the blocks. Among other things, this code word identifies theparticular standard that is being decoded.

The Huffman decoder 321 also performs certain control functions. Inparticular, the Huffman Decoder 321 contains a state machine that cancontrol certain functions of the Index to Data 324 and ALU 325. Controlof these units by the Huffman Decoder is necessary for proper decodingof block-level information. Having the Parser State Machine 322 makethese decisions would take too much time.

An important aspect of the Huffman Decoder of the present invention, isthe ability to invert the coded data bits as they are read into theHuffman Decoder. This is needed to decode H.261 style Huffman codes,since the particular type of Huffman code used by H.261 (andsubstantially by MPEG) has the opposite polarity then the codes used byJPEG. The use of an inverter, thereby, allows substantially the sametable to be used by the Huffman Decoder for all three standards. Otheraspects of how the Huffman Decoder implements all three standards arediscussed in further detail in the "More Detailed Description of theInvention" section.

The Index to Data unit 324 performs the second part of the multi-partalgorithm. This unit contains a look up table that provides the actualHuffman decoded data. Entries in the table are organized based on theindex numbers generated by the Huffman Decoder.

The ALU 325 implements the remaining parts of the multi-part algorithm.In particular, the ALU handles sign-extension. The ALU also includes aregister file which holds vector predictions and DC predictions, the useof which is described in the sections related to prediction filters. TheALU, further, includes counters that count through the structure of thepicture being decoded by the Spatial Decoder. In particular, thedimensions of the picture are programmed into registers associated withthe counters, which facilitates detection of "start of picture," andstart of macroblock codes.

In accordance with the present invention, the Token Formatter 326 (TF)assembles decoded data into DATA tokens that are then passed onto theremaining stages or blocks in the Spatial Decoder.

In the present invention, the in shifter 323 receives data from a FIFOthat buffers the data passing through the Start Code Detector. The datareceived by the inshifter is generally of two types: DATA tokens, andstart codes which the Start Code Detector has replaced with theirrespective tokens, as discussed further in the token section. Note thatmost of the data will be DATA tokens that require decoding.

The ln shifter 323 serially passes data to the Huffman Decoder 321. Onthe other hand, it passes control tokens in parallel. In the Huffmandecoder, the Huffman encoded data is decoded in accordance with thefirst part of the multi-part algorithm. In particular, the particularHuffman code is identified, and then replaced with an index number.

The Huffman Decoder 321 also identifies certain data that requiresspecial handling by the other blocks shown in FIG. 27. This dataincludes end of block and escape. In the present invention, time issaved by detecting these in the Huffman Decoder 321, rather than in theIndex to Data unit 324.

This index number is then passed to the Index to Data unit 324. Inessence, the Index to Data unit is a look-up table. In accordance withone aspect of the algorithm, the look-up table is little more than theHuffman code table specified by JPEG. Generally, it is in the condenseddata format that JPEG specifies for transferring an alternate JPEGtable.

From the Index to Data unit 324, the decoded index number or other datais passed, together with the accompanying control word, to the ALU 325,which performs the operations previously described.

From the ALU 325, the data and control word is passed to the TokenFormatter 326 (TF). In the Token Formatter, the data is combined asneeded with the control word to form tokens. The tokens are thenconveyed to the next stages of the Spatial Decoder. Note that at thispoint, there are as many tokens as will be used by the system.

26. INVERSE DISCRETE COSINE TRANSFORM

The Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform (IDCT), in accordance with thepresent invention, decompresses data related to the frequency of the DCcomponent of the picture. When a particular picture is being compressed,the frequency of the light in the picture is quantized, reducing theoverall amount of information needed to be stored. The IDCT takes thisquantized data and decompresses it back into frequency information.

The IDCT operates on a portion of the picture which is 8×8 pixels insize. The math which performed on this data is largely governed by theparticular standard used to encode the data. However, in the presentinvention, significant use is made of common mathematical functionsbetween the standards to avoid unnecessary duplication of circuitry.

Using a particular scaling order, the symmetry between the upper andlower portions of the algorithms is increased, thus common mathematicalfunctions can be reused which eliminates the need for additionalcircuitry.

The IDCT responds to a number of multi-standard tokens. The firstportion of the IDCT checks the entering data to ensure that the DATAtokens are of the correct size for processing. In fact, the token streamcan be corrected in some situations if the error is not too large.

27. BUFFER MANAGER

The Buffer Manager of the present invention, receives incoming videoinformation and supplies the address generators with information on thetiming of the datas arrival, display and frame rate. Multiple buffersare used to allow changes in both the presentation and display rates.Presentation and display rates will typically vary in accordance withthe data that was encoded and the monitor on which the information isbeing displayed. Data arrival rates will generally vary according toerrors in encoding, decoding or the source material used to create thedata. When information arrives at the Buffer Manager, it isdecompressed. However, the data is in an order that is useful for thedecompression circuits, but not for the particular display unit beingused. When a block of data enters the Buffer Manager, the Buffer Managersupplies information to the address generator so that the block of datacan be placed in the order that the display device can use. In doingthis, the Buffer Manager takes into account the frame rate conversionnecessary to adjust the incoming data blocks so they are presentable onthe particular display device being used.

In the present invention, the Buffer Manager primarly suppliesinformation to the address generators. Nevertheless, it is also requiredto interface with other elements of the system. For example, there is aninterface with an input FIFO which transfers tokens to the BufferManager which, in turn, passes these tokens on to the write addressgenerators.

The Buffer Manager also interfaces with the display address generators,receiving information on whether the display device is ready to displaynew data. The Buffer Manager also confirms that the display addressgenerators have cleared information from a buffer for display.

The Buffer Manager of the present invention keeps track of whether aparticular buffer is empty, full, ready for use or in use. It also keepstrack of the presentation number associated with the particular data ineach buffer. In this way, the Buffer Manager determines the states ofthe buffers, in part, by making only one buffer at a time ready fordisplay. Once a buffer is displayed, the buffer is in a "vacant" state.When the Buffer Manager receives a PICTURE₋₋ START, FLUSH, valid oraccess token, it determines the status of each buffer and its readinessto accept new data. For example, the PICTURE₋₋ START token causes theBuffer Manager to cycle through each buffer to find one which is capableof accepting the new data.

The Buffer Manager can also be configured to handle the multi-standardrequirements dictated by the tokens it receives. For example, in theH.261 standard, data maybe skipped during display. If such a tokenarrives at the Buffer Manager, the data to be skipped will be flushedfrom the buffer in which it is stored.

Thus, by managing the buffers, data can be effectively displayedaccording to the compression standard used to encode the data, the rateat which the data is decoded and the particular type of display devicebeing used.

The foregoing description is believed to adequately describe the overallconcepts, system implementation and operation of the various aspects ofthe invention in sufficient detail to enable one of ordinary skill inthe art to make and practice the invention with all of its attendantfeatures, objects and advantages. However, in order to facilitate afurther, more detailed in depth understanding of the invention, andadditional details in connection with even more specific, commercialimplementation of various embodiments of the invention, the followingfurther description and explanation is preferred.

This is a more detailed description for a multi-standard video decoderchip-set. It is divided into three main sections: A, B and C.

Again, for purposes of organization, clarity and convenience ofexplanation, this additional disclosure is set forth in the followingsections.

Description of features common to chips in the chip-set:

Tokens

Two wire interfaces

DRAM interface

Microprocessor interface

Clocks

Description of the Spatial Decoder chip

Description of the Temporal Decoder chip

SECTION A.1

The first description section covers the majority of the electricaldesign issues associated with using the chip-set.

A.1.1 Typographic conventions

A small set of typographic conventions is used to emphasize some classesof information:

NAMES₋₋ OF₋₋ TOKENS

wire₋₋ name active high signal

wire₋₋ name active low signal

register₋₋ name

SECTION A.2 Video Decoder Family

30 MHz operation

Decodes MPEG, JPEG & H.261

Coded data rates to 25 Mb/s

Video data rates to 21 MB/s

MPEG resolutions up to 704×480, 30 Hz, 4:2:0

Flexible chroma sampling formats

Full JPEG baseline decoding

Glue-less page mode DRAM interface

208 pin PQFP package

Independent coded data and decoder clocks

Re-orders MPEG picture sequence

The Video decoder family provides a low chip count solution forimplementing high resolution digital video decoders. The chip-set iscurrently configurable to support three different video and picturecoding systems: JPEG, UNPEG and H.261.

Full JPEG baseline picture decoding is supported. 720×453, 30 Hz, 4:2:2JPEG encoded video can be decoded in real-time.

CIF (Common Interchange Format) and QCIF H.261 video can be decoded.Full feature MPEG video with formats up to 740×430, 30 Hz, 4:2:0 can bedecoded.

Note: The above values are merely illustrative, by way of example andnot necessarily by way of limitation, of one embodiment of the presentinvention. Accordingly, it will be appreciated that other values and/orranges nay be used.

A.2.1 system configurations

A.2.1.1 Output formatting

In each of the examples given below, some form of output formatter willbe required to take the data presented at the output of the SpatialDecoder or Temporal Decoder and re-format it for a computer or displaysystem. The details of this formatting will vary between applications.In a simple case, all that is required is an address generator to takethe block formatted data output by the decoder chip and write it intomemory in a raster order.

The Image Formatter is a single chip VLSI device providing a wide rangeof output formatting functions.

A.2.1.2 JPEG still picture decoding

A single Spatial Decoder, with no-off-chip DRAM, can rapidly decodebaseline JPEG images. The Spatial Decoder will support all features ofbaseline JPEG. However, the image size that can be decoded may belimited by the size of the output buffer provided by the user. Thecharacteristics of the output formatter may limit the chroma samplingformats and color spaces that can be supported.

A.2.1.3 JPEG video decoding

Adding off-chip DRAMs to the Spatial Decoder allows It to decode JPEGencoded video pictures in real-time. The size and speed of the requiredbuffers will depend on the video and coded data rates. The TemporalDecoder is not required to decode JPEG encoded video. However, if aTemporal Decoder is present in a multi-standard decoder chip-set, itwill merely pass the data through the Temporal Decoder withoutalteration or modification when the system is configured for JPEGoperation.

A.2.1.4 H.261 decoding

The Spatial Decoder and the Temporal Decoder are both required toimplement an H.261 video decoder. The DRAM interfaces on both devicesare configurable to allow the quantity of DRAM required for properoperation to be reduced when working with small picture formats and atlow coded data rates. Typically, a single 4 Mb (e.g. 512 k×8) DRAM willbe required by each of the Spatial Decoder and the Temperal Decoder.

A.2.1.5 MPEG decoding

The configuration required for MPEG operation is the same as for H.261.However, as will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art,larger DRAM buffers may be required to support the larger pictureformats possible with MPEG.

SECTION A.3 Tokens

A.3.1 Token format

In accordance with the present invention, tokens provide an extensibleformat for communicating information through the decoder chip-set. Whilein the present invention, each word of a Token is a minimum of 8 bitswide, one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that tokens canbe of any width. Furthermore, a single Token can be spread over one ormore words; this is accomplished using an extension bit in each word.The formats for the tokens are summarized in Table A.3.1.

The extension bit indicates whether a Token continues into another word.It is set to 1 in all words of a Token except the last one. If the firstword of a Token has an extension bit of 0, this indicates that the Tokenis only one word long.

Each Token is identified by an Address Field that starts in bit 7 of thefirst word of the Token. The Address Field is of variable length and canpotentially extend over multiple words (in the current chips no addressis more than 8 bits long, however, one of ordinary skill in the art willagain appreciate that addresses can be of any length).

Some interfaces transfer more than 8 bits of data. For example, theoutput of the Spatial Decoder is 9 bits wide (10 bits including theextension bit). The only Token that takes advantage of these extra bitsis the DATA Token. The DATA Token can have as many bits as are necessaryfor carrying out processing at a particular place in the system. Allother Tokens ignore the extra bits.

A.3.2 The DATA Token

The DATA Token carries data from one processing stage to the next.Consequently, the characteristics of this Token change as it passesthrough the decoder. Furthermore, the meaning of the data carried by theDATA Token varies depending on where the DATA Token is within thesystem, i.e., the data is position dependent. In this regard, the datamay be either frequency domain or Pel domain data depending on where theDATA Token is within the Spatial Decoder. For example, at the input ofthe Spatial Decoder, DATA Tokens carry bit serial coded video datapacked into 8 bit words. At this point, there is no limit to the lengthof each Token. In contrast, however, at the output of the SpatialDecoder each DATA Token carries exactly 64 words and each word is 9 bitswide.

A.3.3 Using Token formatted data

In some applications, it may be necessary for the circuitry that connectdirectly to the input or output of the Decoder or chip set. In mostcases it will be sufficient to collect DATA Tokens and to detect a fewTokens that provide synchronization information (such as PICTURE₋₋START). In this regard, see subsequent sections A.16, "Connecting to theoutput of Spatial Decoder", and A.19, "Connecting to the output of theTemporal Decoder".

As discussed above, it is sufficient to observe activity on theextension bit to identify when each new Token starts. Again, theextension bit signals the last word of the current token. In addition,the Address field can be tested to identify the Token. Unwanted orunrecognized Tokens can be consumed (and discarded) without knowledge oftheir content. However, a recognized token causes an appropriate actionto occur.

Furthermore, the data input to the Spatial Decoder can either besupplied as bytes of coded data, or in DATA Tokens (see Section A.10,"Coded data input"). Supplying Tokens via the coded data port or via themicroprocessor interface allows many of the features of the decoder chipset to be configured from the data stream. This provides an alternativeto doing the configuration via the micro processor interface.

                                      TABLE A.3.1                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Summary of Tokens                                                             7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Token Name     Reference                                      __________________________________________________________________________    0 0 1           QUANT.sub.-- SCALE                                            0 1 0           PREDICTION.sub.-- MODE                                        0 1 1           (reserved)                                                    1 0 0           MVD.sub.-- FORWARDS                                           1 0 1           MVD.sub.-- BACKWARDS                                          0 0 0 0 1       QUANT.sub.-- TABLE                                            0 0 0 0 0 1     DATA                                                          1 1 0 0 0 0     COMPONENT.sub.-- NAME                                         1 1 0 0 0 1     DEFINE.sub.-- SAMPLING                                        1 1 0 0 1 0     JPEG.sub.-- TABLE.sub.-- SELECT                               1 1 0 0 1 1     MPEG.sub.-- TABLE.sub.-- SELECT                               1 1 0 1 0 0     TEMPORAL.sub.-- REFERENCE                                     1 1 0 1 0 1     MPEG.sub.-- DCH.sub.-- TABLE                                  1 1 0 1 1 0     (reserved)                                                    1 1 0 1 1 1     (reserved)                                                    1 1 1 0 0 0 0   (reserved) SAVE.sub.-- STATE                                  1 1 1 0 0 0 1   (reserved) RESTORE.sub.-- STATE                               1 1 1 0 0 1 0   TIME.sub.-- CODE                                              1 1 1 0 0 1 1   (reserved)                                                    0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NULL                                                          0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (reserved)                                                    0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 (reserved)                                                    0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 (reserved)                                                    0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 SEQUENCE.sub.-- START                                         0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 GROUP.sub.-- START                                            0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 PICTURE.sub.-- START                                          0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 SLICE.sub.-- START                                            0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 SEQUENCE.sub.-- END                                           0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                        0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 PICTURE.sub.-- END                                            0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 FLUSH                                                         0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 FIELD.sub.-- INFO                                             0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 MAX.sub.-- COMP.sub.-- ID                                     0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA                                         0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 USER.sub.-- DATA                                              0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 DHT.sub.-- MARKER                                             0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 DQT.sub.-- MARKER                                             0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 (reserved) DNL.sub.-- MARKER                                  0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 (reserved) DRI.sub.-- MARKER                                  1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 (reserved)                                                    1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 (reserved)                                                    1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 (reserved)                                                    1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 (reserved)                                                    1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 BIT.sub.-- RATE                                               1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 VBV.sub.-- BUFFER.sub.-- SIZE                                 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 VBV.sub.-- DELAY                                              1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 PICTURE.sub.-- TYPE                                           1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 PICTURE.sub.-- RATE                                           1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 PEL.sub.-- ASPECT                                             1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 HORIZONTAL.sub.-- SIZE                                        1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 VERTICAL.sub.-- SIZE                                          1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 BROKEN.sub.-- CLOSED                                          1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 CONSTRAINED                                                   1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 (reserved) SPECTRAL.sub.-- LIMIT                              1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 DEFINE.sub.-- MAX.sub.-- SAMPLING                             1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (reserved)                                                    1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 (reserved)                                                    1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 (reserved)                                                    1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 (reserved)                                                    1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 HORIZONTAL.sub.-- MBS                                         1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 VERTICAL.sub.-- MBS                                           1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 (reserved)                                                    1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (reserved)                                                    __________________________________________________________________________

A.3.4 Description of Tokens

This section documents the Tokens which are implemented in the SpatialDecoder and the Temporal Decoder chips in accordance with the presentinvention; see Table A.3.2.

Note:

"r" signifies bits that are currently reserved and carry the value 0

unless indicated all integers are unsigned

                                      TABLE A.3.2                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Tokens implemented in the Spatial Decoder and Temporal Decoder                E 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description                                                 __________________________________________________________________________    1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 BIT.sub.-- RATE test info only                              1 r r r r r r b b Carries the MPEG bit rate parameter R. Generated by the                       Huffman                                                     1 b b b b b b b b decoder when decoding an MPEG bitstream.                    0 b b b b b b b b b - an 18 bit integer as defined by MPEG                    1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 BROKEN.sub.-- CLOSED                                        0 r r r r r r c b Carries two MPEG flags bits:                                                  c - closed.sub.-- gop                                                         b - broken.sub.-- link                                      1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                      0 s s s s s s s s s - an 8 bit integer indicating the current coding                            standard. The                                                                 values currently assigned are:                                                0 - H.261                                                                     1 - JPEG                                                                      2 - MPEG                                                    1 1 1 0 0 0 0 c c COMPONENT.sub.-- NAME                                       0 n n n n n n n n Communicates the relationship between a component ID                          and the                                                                       component name. See also ...                                                  c - 2 bit component ID                                                        n - 8 bit component "name"                                  1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 CONSTRAINED                                                 0 r r r r r r r c c - carries the constrained.sub.-- parameters.sub.--                          flag decoded from an                                                          MPEG bitstream.                                             1 0 0 0 0 0 1 c c DATA                                                        1 d d d d d d d d Carries data through the decoder chip-sel.                  0 d d d d d d d d c - a 2 bit integer component ID (see A.3.5.1  ). This                        field                                                                         is not defined for Tokens that carry coded data (rather                       than pixel                                                                    information).                                               1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 DEFINE.sub.-- MAX.sub.-- SAMPLING                           1 r r r r r r h h Max. Horizontal and Vertical sampling numbers. These                          describe                                                    0 r r r r r r v v the maximum number of blocks horizontally/vertically in                       any                                                                           component of a macroblock. See A.3.5.2                                        h - 2 bit horizontal sampling number.                                         v - 2 bit vertical sampling number.                         1 1 1 0 0 0 1 c c DEFINE.sub.-- SAMPLING                                      1 r r r r r r h h Horizontal and Vertical sampling numbers for a                                particular colour-                                          0 r r r r r r v v component. See A.3.5.2                                                        c - 2 bit component ID.                                                       h - 2 bit horizontal sampling number.                                         v - 2 bit vertical sampling number.                         0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 DHT.sub.-- MARKER                                                             This Token informs the Video Demux that the DATA Token                        that                                                                          follows contains the specification of a Huffman table                         described                                                                     using the JPEG "define Huffman table segment" syntax.                         This Token                                                                    is only valid when the coding standard is configured as                       JPEG.                                                                         This Token is generated by the start code detector                            during JPEG                                                                   decoding when a DHT marker has been encountered in the                        data                                                                          stream.                                                     0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 DNL.sub.-- MARKER                                                             This Token informs the Video Demux that the DATA Token                        that                                                                          follows contains the JPEG parameter NL which specifies                        the                                                                           number of lines in a frame.                                                   This Token is generated by the start code detector                            during JPEG                                                                   decoding when a DNL marker has been encountered in the                        data                                                                          stream.                                                     0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 DQT.sub.-- MARKER                                                             This Token informs the Video Demux that the DATA Token                        that                                                                          follows contains the specification of a quantisation                          table described                                                               using the JPEG "define quantisation table segment"                            syntax. This                                                                  Token is only valid when the coding standard is                               configured as                                                                 JPEG. The Video Demux generates a QUANT.sub.-- TABLE                          Token                                                                         containing the new quantisation table information.                            This Token is generated by the start code detector                            during JPEG                                                                   decoding when a DQT marker has been encountered in the                        data                                                                          stream.                                                     0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 DRI.sub.-- MARKER                                                             This Token informs the Video Demux that the DATA Token                        that                                                                          follows contains the JPEG parameter Ri which specifies                        the                                                                           number of minimum coding units between restart                                markers.                                                                      This Token is generated by the start code detector                            during JPEG                                                                   decoding when a DRI marker has been encountered in the                        data                                                                          stream.                                                     1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA JPEG                                  0 v v v v v v v v This Token informs the Video Demux that the DATA Token                        that                                                                          follows contains extension data. See A.11.3,                                  "Conversion start                                                             codes to Tokens",  and A.14.6, "Receiving User and                            Extension data",                                                              During JPEG operation the 8 bit field "v" carries the                         JPEG marker                                                                   value. This allows the class of extension data to be                          identified.                                                 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA MPEG                                                    This Token informs the Video Demux that the DATA Token                        that                                                                          follows contains extension data. See A.11.3,                                  "Conversion of start                                                          codes to Tokens",  and A.14.6, "Receiving User and                            Extension data",                                            1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 FIELD.sub.-- INFO                                           0 r r r t p f f f Carries information about the picture following to aid                        its display.                                                                  This function is not signalled by any existing coding                         standard.                                                                     t - if the picture is an interlaced frame this bit                            indicates if the upper                                                        field is first (t=0) or second.                                               p - if pictures are fields this indicates if the next                         picture is upper                                                              (p=0) or lower in the frame.                                                  f - a 3 bit number indicating position of the field in                        the 8 field PAL                                                               sequence.                                                   0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 FLUSH                                                                         Used to indicate the end of the current coded data and                        to push the                                                                   end of the data stream through the decoder.                 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 GROUP.sub.-- START                                                            Generated when the group of pictures start code is                            found when                                                                    decoding MPEG or the frame marker is found when                               decoding                                                                      JPEG.                                                       1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 HORIZONTAL.sub.-- MBS                                       1 r r r h h h h h h - a 13 bit number integer indicating the horizontal                         width of the                                                0 h h h h h h h h picture in macroblocks.                                     1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 HORIZONTAL.sub.-- SIZE                                      1 h h h h h h h h h - 16 bit number integer indicating the horizontal                           width of the                                                0 h h h h h h h h picture in pixels. This can be any integer value.           1 1 1 0 0 1 0 c c JPEG.sub.-- TABLE.sub.-- SELECT                             o r r r r r r t t Informs the inverse quantiser which quantisation table                        to use on                                                                     the specified colour component.                                               c - 2 bit component ID (see A.3.5.1                                           t - 2 bit integer table number.                             1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 MAX.sub.-- COMP.sub.-- ID                                   0 r r r r r r m m m - 2 bit integer indicating the maximum value of                             component ID                                                                  (see A.3.5.1  ) that will be used in the next picture.      0 1 1 0 1 0 1 c c MPEG.sub.-- DCH.sub.-- TABLE                                o r r r r f r t t Configures which DC coefficient Huffman table should be                       used for                                                                      colour component cc.                                                          c - 2 bit component ID (see A.3.5.1                                           t - 2 bit integer table number.                             0 1 1 0 0 1 1 d n MPEG.sub.-- TABLE.sub.-- SELECT                                               informs the inverse quantiser whether to use the                              default or user                                                               defined quantisation table for intra or non-intra                             information.                                                                  n - 0 indicates intra information, 1 non-intra.                               d - 0 indicates default table, 1 user defined.              1 1 0 1 d v v v v MVD.sub.-- BACKWARDS                                        0 v v v v v v v v Carries one component (either vertical or horizontal)                         of the                                                                        backwards motion vector.                                                      d - 0 indicates x component, 1 the y component                                v - 12 bit two's complement number. The LSB provides                          half pixel                                                                    resolution.                                                 1 1 0 0 d v v v v MVD.sub.-- FORWARDS                                         0 v v v v v v v v Carries one component (either vertical or horizontal)                         of the                                                                        forwards motion vector.                                                       d - 0 indicates x component, 1 the y component                                v - 12 bit two's complement number. The LSB provides                          half pixel                                                                    resolution.                                                 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NULL                                                                          Does nothing.                                               1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 PEL.sub.-- ASPECT                                           0 r r r r p p p p p - a 4 bit integer as defined by MPEG.                     0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 PICTURE.sub.-- END                                                            Inserted by the start code detector to indicate the end                       of the current                                                                picture.                                                    1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 PICTURE.sub.-- RATE                                         0 r r r r p p p p p - a 4 bit integer as defined by MPEG.                     1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 PICTURE.sub.-- START                                        0 r r r r n n n n Indicates the start of a new picture.                                         n - a 4 bit picture index allocated to one picture by                         the start code                                                                detector.                                                   1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 PICTURE.sub.-- TYPE MPEG                                    0 r r r r r r p p p - a 2 bit integer indicating the picture coding type                        of the picture                                                                that follows:                                                                 0 - Intra                                                                     1 - Predicted                                                                 2 - Bidirectionally Predicted                                                 3 - DC Intra                                                1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 PICTURE.sub.-- TYPE H.261                                   1 r r r r r r 0 1 Indicated various H.261 options are on (1) or off (0).                        These options                                               0 r r s d f q 1 1 are always off for MPEG and JPEG:                                             s - Split Screen Indicator                                                    d - Document Camera                                                           f - Freeze Picture Release                                                    Source picture format:                                                        q = 0 - QCIF                                                                  q = 1 - CIF                                                 0 0 1 0 h y x b f PREDICTION.sub.-- MODE                                                        A set ot flag bits that indicate the prediction mode                          for the                                                                       macroblocks that follow:                                                      f - forward predicton                                                         b - backward prediction                                                       x - reset forward vector predictor                                            y - reset backward vector predictor                                           h - enable H.261 loop filter                                0 0 0 1 s s s s s QUANT.sub.-- SCALE                                                            Informs the inverse quantiser of a new scale factor                           s - 5 bit integer in range 1 ... 31. The value 0 is                           reserved.                                                   1 0 0 0 0 1 r t t QUANT.sub.-- TABLE                                          1 q q q q q q q q Loads the specified inverse quantiser table with 64 8                         bit unsigned                                                                  integers. The values are in zig-zag order.                  0 q q q q q q q q t - 2 bit integer specifying the inverse quantiser                            table to be loaded.                                         0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 SEQUENCE.sub.-- END                                                           The MPEG sequence.sub.-- end.sub.-- code and the JPEG                         EOI marker cause                                                              this Token to be generated.                                 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 SEQUENCE.sub.-- START                                                         Generated by the MPEG sequence.sub.-- start start                             code.                                                       1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 SLICE.sub.-- START                                          0 s s s s s s s s Corresponds to the MPEG slice.sub.-- start, the H.261                         GOB and the                                                                   JPEG resync interval. The interpretation of 8 bit                             integer "S" differs                                                           between coding standards:                                                     MPEG - Slice Vertical Position - 1.                                           H.261 - Group of Blocks Number - 1.                                           JPEG - resychronisation interval identification (4 LSBs                       only).                                                      1 1 1 0 1 0 0 t t TEMPORAL.sub.-- REFERENCE                                   0 t t t t t t t t t - carries the temporal reference. For MPEG this is a                        10 bit integer.                                                               For H.261 only the 5 LSBs are used, the MSBs will                             always be zero.                                             1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 d TIME.sub.-- CODE                                            1 r r r h h h h h The MPEG time.sub.-- code:                                  1 r r m m m m m m d - Drop frame flag                                         1 r r s s s s s s h - 5 bit integer specifying hours                          0 r r p p p p p p m - 6 bit integer specifying minutes                                          s - 6 bit integer specifying seconds                                          p - 6 bit integer specifying pictures                       1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 USER.sub.-- DATA JPEG                                       0 v v v v v v v v This Token informs the Video Demux that the DATA Token                        that                                                                          follows contains user data. See A.11.3, "Conversion of                        start codes                                                                   to Tokens",   and A.14.6, "Receiving User and                                 Extension data".                                                              During JPEG operation the 8 bit field "v" carries the                         JPEG marker                                                                   value. This allows the class of user data to be                               identified.                                                 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 USER.sub.-- DATA MPEG                                                         This Token informs the Video Demux that the DATA Token                        that                                                                          follows contains user data. See A.11.3, "Conversion of                        start codes                                                                   to Tokens",   and A.14.6, "Receiving User and                                 Extension data".                                            1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 VBV.sub.-- BUFFER.sub.-- SIZE                               1 r r r r r r s s s - a 10 bit integer as defined by MPEG.                    0 s s s s s s s s                                                             1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 VBV.sub.-- DELAY                                            1 b b b b b b b b b - a 16 bit integer as defined by MPEG.                    0 b b b b b b b b                                                             1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 VERTICAL.sub.-- MBS                                         1 r r r v v v v v v - a 13 bit integer indicating the vertical size of                          the picture in                                              0 v v v v v v v v macroblocks.                                                1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 VERTICAL.sub.-- SIZE                                        1 v v v v v v v v v - a 16 bit integer indicating the vertical size of                          the picture in pixels.                                      0 v v v v v v v v This can be any integer value.                              __________________________________________________________________________

A.3.5 Numbers signalled in Tokens

A.3.5.1 Component Identification number

In accordance with the present invention, the Component ID number is a 2bit integer specifying a color component. This 2 bit field is typicallylocated as part of the Header in the DATA Token. With MPEG and H.261 therelationship is set forth in Table A.3.3.

                  TABLE A.3.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        Component ID for MPEG and H.261                                               Component ID   MPEG or H.261 colour component                                 ______________________________________                                        0              Luminance (Y)                                                  1              Blue difference signal (Cb/U)                                  2              Red difference signal (Cr/V)                                   3              Never used                                                     ______________________________________                                    

With JPEG the situation is more complex as JPEG does not limit the colorcomponents that can be used. The decoder chips permit up to 4 differentcolor components in each scan. The IDs are allocated sequentially as thespecification of color components arrive at the decoder.

A.3.5.2 Horizontal and Vertical sampling numbers

For each of the 4 color components, there is a specification for thenumber of blocks arranged horizontally and vertically in a macroblock.This specification comprises a two bit integer which is one less thanthe number of blocks.

For example, in MPEG (or H.261) with 4:2:0 chroma sampling (FIG. 36) andcomponent IDs allocated as per Table A.3.4.

                  TABLE A.3.4                                                     ______________________________________                                        Sampling numbers for 4:2:0/MPEG                                                        Horizontal          Vertical                                         Component                                                                              sampling  Width     sampling                                                                              Height                                   ID       number    in blocks number  in blocks                                ______________________________________                                        0        1         2         1       2                                        1        0         1         0       1                                        2        0         1         0       1                                        3        Not used  Not used  Not used                                                                              Not used                                 ______________________________________                                    

With JPEG and 4:2:2 chroma sampling (allocation of component tocomponent ID will vary between applications. See A.3.5.1. Note: JPEGrequires a 2:1:1 structure for its macroblocks when processing 4:2:2data. See Table A.3.5.

                  TABLE A.3.5                                                     ______________________________________                                        Sampling numbers for 4:2:2 JPEG                                                        Horizontal          Vertical                                         Component                                                                              sampling  Width     sampling                                                                              Height                                   ID       number    in blocks number  in blocks                                ______________________________________                                        Y        1         2         0       1                                        U        0         1         0       1                                        V        0         1         0       1                                        ______________________________________                                    

A.3.6 Special Token formats

In accordance with the present invention, tokens such as the DATA Tokenand the QUANT₋₋ TABLE Token are used in their "extended form" within thedecoder chip-set. In the extended form the Token includes some data. Inthe case of DATA Tokens, they can contain coded data or pixel data. Inthe case of QUANT₋₋ TABLE tokens, they contain quantizer tableinformation.

Furthermore, "non-extended form" of these Tokens is defined in thepresent invention as "empty". This Token format provides a place in theToken stream that can be subsequently filled by an extended version ofthe same Token. This format is mainly applicable to encoders and,therefore, it is not documented further here.

                  TABLE A.3.6                                                     ______________________________________                                        Tokens for different standards                                                Token Name        MPEG      JPEG   H.261                                      ______________________________________                                        BIT.sub.-- RATE   .check mark.                                                BROKEN.sub.-- CLOSED                                                                            .check mark.                                                CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                                                          .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               COMPONENT.sub.-- NAME       .check mark.                                      CONSTRAINED       .check mark.                                                DATA              .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               DEFINE.sub.-- MAX.sub.-- SAMPLING                                                               .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               DEFINE.sub.-- SAMPLING                                                                          .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               DHT.sub.-- MARKER           .check mark.                                      DNL.sub.-- MARKER           .check mark.                                      DQT.sub.-- MARKER           .check mark.                                      DRI.sub.-- MARKER           .check mark.                                      EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA                                                                           .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                      FIELD.sub.-- INFO                                                             FLUSH             .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               GROUP.sub.-- START                                                                              .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                      HORIZONTAL.sub.-- MBS                                                                           .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               HORIZONTAL.sub.-- SIZE                                                                          .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               JPEG.sub.-- TABLE.sub.-- SELECT                                                                           .check mark.                                      MAX.sub.-- COMP.sub.-- ID                                                                       .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               MPEG.sub.-- DCH.sub.-- TABLE                                                                    .check mark.                                                MPEG.sub.-- TABLE.sub.-- SELECT                                                                 .check mark.                                                MVD.sub.-- BACKWARDS                                                                            .check mark.                                                MVD.sub.-- FORWARDS                                                                             .check mark.     .check mark.                               NULL              .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               PEL.sub.-- ASPECT .check mark.                                                PICTURE.sub.-- END                                                                              .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               PICTURE.sub.-- RATE                                                                             .check mark.                                                PICTURE.sub.-- START                                                                            .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               PICTURE.sub.-- TYPE                                                                             .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               PREDICTION.sub.-- MODE                                                                          .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               QUANT.sub.-- SCALE                                                                              .check mark.     .check mark.                               QUANT.sub.-- TABLE                                                                              .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                      SEQUENCE.sub.-- END                                                                             .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                      SEQUENCE.sub.-- START                                                                           .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               SLICE.sub.-- START                                                                              .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               TEMPORAL.sub.-- REFERENCE                                                                       .check mark.     .check mark.                               TIME.sub.-- CODE  .check mark.                                                USER.sub.-- DATA  .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                      VBV.sub.-- BUFFER.sub.-- SIZE                                                                   .check mark.                                                VBV.sub.-- DELAY  .check mark.                                                VERTICAL.sub.-- MBS                                                                             .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               VERTICAL.sub.-- SIZE                                                                            .check mark.                                                                            .check mark.                                                                         .check mark.                               ______________________________________                                    

A.3.7 Use of Tokens for different standards

Each standard uses a different sub-set of the defined Tokens inaccordance with the present invention; as Table A.3.6.

SECTION A.4 The two wire interface

A.4.1 Two-wire interfaces and the Token Port

A simple two-wire valid/accept protocol is used at all levels in thechip-set to control the flow of information. Data is only transferredbetween blocks when both the sender and receiver are observed to beready when the clock rises.

1) Data transfer

2) Receiver not ready

3) Sender not ready

If the sender is not ready (as in 3 Sender not ready above) the input ofthe receiver must wait. If the receiver is not ready (as in 2 Receivernot ready above) the sender will continue to present the same data onits output until it is accepted by the receiver.

When Token information is transferred between blocks the two-wireinterface between the blocks is referred to as a Token Port.

A.4.2 Where used

The decoder chip-set, in accordance with the present invention, usestwo-wire interfaces to connect the three chips. In addition, the codeddata input to the Spatial Decoder is also a two-wire interface.

A.4.3 Bus signals

The width of the data word transferred by the two-wire interface variesdepending upon the needs of the interface concerned (See FIG. 35,"Tokens on interfaces wider than 8 bits". For example, 12 bitcoefficients are input to the Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform (IDCT),but only 9 bits are output.

                  TABLE A.4.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        Two wire interface data width                                                 Interface           Data Width (bits)                                         ______________________________________                                        Coded data input to Spatial Decoder                                                               8                                                         Output port of Spatial Decoder                                                                    9                                                         Input port of Temporal Decoder                                                                    9                                                         Output port of Temporal Decoder                                                                   8                                                         Input port of Image Formatter                                                                     8                                                         ______________________________________                                    

In addition to the data signals there are three other signalstransmitted via the two-wire interface:

Valid

accept

extension

A.4.3.1 The extension signal

The extension signal corresponds to the Token extension bit previouslydescribed.

A.4.4 Design considerations

The two wire interface is intended for short range, point to pointcommunication between chips.

The decoder chips should be placed adjacent to each other, so as tominimize the length of the PCB tracks between chips. Where possible,track lengths should be kept below 25 mm. The PCB track capacitanceshould be kept to a minimum.

The clock distribution should be designed to minimize the clock slewbetween chips. If there is any clock slew, it should be arranged so that"receiving chips" see the clock before "sending chips".¹

All chips communicating via two wire interfaces should operate from thesame digital power supply.

A.4.5 Interface timing

                  TABLE A.4.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        Two wire interface timing                                                                    30 MHz            Note.sup.a                                   Num.  Characteristic Min.    Max.  Unit  .sup.b                               ______________________________________                                        1     Input signal set-up time                                                                     5             ns                                         2     Input signal hold time                                                                       0             ns                                         3     Output signal drive time                                                                             23    ns                                         4     Output signal hold time                                                                      2             ns                                         ______________________________________                                         .sup.a Figures in Table A.4.2 may vary in accordance with design              variations                                                                    .sup.b Maximum signal loading is approximately 20 .sub.p F               

A.4.6 Signal levels

The two-wire interface uses CMOS inputs and output. V_(IHmin) approx.70% of V_(DD) and V_(Hmax) is approx. 30% of V_(DD). The values shown inTable A.4.3 are those for V_(IH) and V_(H) at their respective worstcase V_(DD). V_(DD) =5.0±0.25V.

                  TABLE A.4.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        DC electrical characteristics                                                 Symbol                                                                              Parameter      Min.      Max.    Units                                  ______________________________________                                        V.sub.IH                                                                            Input logic `1' voltage                                                                      3.68      V.sub.DD - 0.5                                                                        V                                      V.sub.IL                                                                            Input logic `0' voltage                                                                      GND - 0.5 1.43    V                                      V.sub.OH                                                                            Output logic `1' voltage                                                                     V.sub.DD - 0.1    V.sup.a                                                     V.sub.DD - 0.4    V.sup.b                                V.sub.OL                                                                            Output logic `0' voltage 0.1     V.sup.c                                                               0.4     V.sup.d                                I.sub.IN                                                                            Input leakage current    = 10    μA                                  ______________________________________                                         .sup.a 1.sub.OH ≦ 1 mA                                                 .sup.b 1.sub.OH ≦ 4 mA                                                 .sup.c 1.sub.OL ≦ 1 mA                                                 .sup.d 1.sub.OL ≦ 4 mA                                            

A.4.7 Control clock

In general, the clock controlling the transfers across the two wireinterface is the chip's decoder₋₋ clock. The exception is the coded dataport input to the Spatial Decoder. This is controlled by coded₋₋ clock.The clock signals are further described herein.

SECTION A.5 DRAM Interface

A.5.1 The DRAM interface

A single high performance, configurable, DRAM interface is used on eachof the video decoder chips. In general, the DRAM interface on each chipis substantially the same; however, the interfaces differ from oneanother in how they handle channel priorities. The interface is designedto directly drive the DRAM used by each of the decoder chips. Typically,no external logic, buffers or components will be necessary to connectthe DRAM interface to the DRAMs in most systems.

A.5.2 Interface signals

                  TABLE A.5.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        DRAM interface signals                                                                   Input/                                                             Signal Name                                                                              Output  Description                                                ______________________________________                                        DRAM.sub.-- data 31:0!                                                                   I/O     The 32 bit wide DRAM data bus. Option-                                        ally this bus can be configured to be 16 or                                   18 bits wide. See section A.5.8                            DRAM.sub.-- addr 10:0!                                                                   O       The 22 bit wide DRAM interface address                                        is time multiplexed over this 11 bit wide                                     bus.                                                       RAS        O       The DRAM Row Address Strobe signal                         CAS 3:0!   O       The DRAM Column Address Strobe                                                signal. One signal is provided per byte of                                    the interface's data bus. All the CAS                                         signals are driven simultaneously.                         WE         O       The DRAM Write Enable signal                               OE         O       The DRAM Output Enable signal                              DRAM.sub.-- enable                                                                       I       This input signal, when low, makes all the                                    output signals on the interface go high                                       impedance. Note: on-chip data processing                                      is not stopped when the DRAM interface                                        is high impedance. So, errors will occur if                                   the chip attempts to access DRAM while                                        DRAM.sub.-- enable is low.                                 ______________________________________                                    

In accordance with the present invention, the interface is configurablein two ways:

The detail timing of the interface can be configured to accommodate avariety of different DRAM types

The "width" of the DRAM interface can be configured to provide acost/performance trade-off in different applications.

A.5.3 Configuring the DRAM interface

Generally, there are three groups of registers associated with the DRAMinterface: interface timing configuration registers, interface busconfiguration registers and refresh configuration registers. The refreshconfiguration registers (registers in Table A.5.4) should be configuredlast.

A.5.3.1 Conditions after reset

After reset, the DRAM interface, in accordance with the presentinvention, starts operation with a set of default timing parameters(that correspond to the slowest mode of operation). Initially, the DRAMinterface will continually execute refresh cycles (excluding all othertransfers). This will continue until a value is written into refresh₋₋interval. The DRAM interface will then be able to perform other types oftransfer between refresh cycles.

A.5.3.2 Bus configuration

Bus configuration (registers in Table A.5.3) should only be done when nodata transfers are being attempted by the interface. The interface isplaced in this condition immediately after reset, and before a value iswritten into refresh₋₋ interval. The interface can be re-configuredlater, if required, only when no transfers are being attempted. See theTemporal Decoder chip₋₋ access register (A.18.3.1) and the SpatialDecoder buffer₋₋ manager₋₋ access register A.13.1.1).

A.5.3.3 Interface timing configuration

In accordance with the present invention, modifications to the interfacetiming configuration information are controlled by the interface₋₋timing₋₋ access register. Writing 1 to this register allows theinterface timing registers (in Table A.5.2) to be modified. Whileinterface₋₋ timing₋₋ access=1, the DRAM interface continues operationwith its previous configuration. After writing 1, the user should waituntil 1 can be read back from the interface₋₋ timing₋₋ access beforewriting to any of the interface timing registers.

When configuration is compete, 0 should be written to the interface₋₋timing₋₋ access. The new configuration will then be transferred to theDRAM interface.

A.5.3.4 Refresh configuration

The refresh interval of the DRAM interface of the present invention canonly be configured once following reset. Until refresh₋₋ interval isconfigured, the interface continually executes refresh cycles. Thisprevents any other data transfers. Data transfers can start after avalue is written to refresh₋₋ interval.

As is well known in the art, DRAMs typically require a "pause" ofbetween 100 μs and 500 μs after power is first applied, followed by anumber of refresh cycles before normal operation is possible.Accordingly, these DRAM start-up requirements should be satisfied beforewriting a value to refresh₋₋ interval.

A.5.3.5 Read access to configuration registers

All the DRAM interface registers of the present invention can be read atany time.

A.5.4 Interface timing (ticks)

The DRAM interface timing is derived from a Clock which is running atfour times the input Clock rate of the device (decoder₋₋ clock). Thisclock is generated by an on-chip PLL.

For brevity, periods of this high speed clock are referred to as ticks.

A.5.5 Interface registers

                  TABLE A.5.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        Interface timing configuration resigters                                                   Size/  Reset                                                     Register name                                                                              Dlr.   State  Description                                        ______________________________________                                        interface.sub.-- timing.sub.-- access                                                      1      0      This function enable register                                   bit           allows access to the DRAM                                                     interface timing configuration                                  rw            registers. The configuration                                                  registers should not be                                                       modified while this register                                                  holds the value 0. Writing a one                                              to this register requests access to                                           modify the configuration                                                      registers. After a 0 has been                                                 written to this register the                                                  DRAM interface will start to use                                              the new values in the timing                                                  configuration registers.                           page.sub.-- start.sub.-- length                                                            5      0      Specifies the length of the access                              bit           start in ticks. The minimum                                                   value that can be used is 4                                     rw            (meaning 4 ticks). 0 selects the                                              maximum length of 32 ticks.                        transfer.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length                                                        4      0      Specifies the length of the fast                                bit           page read or write cycle in ticks.                                            The minimum value that can be                                   rw            used is 4 (meaning 4 ticks). 0                                                selects the maximum length of                                                 16 ticks.                                          refresh.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length                                                         4      0      Specifies the length of the                                     bit           refresh cycle in ticks. The                                                   minimum value that can be used                                  rw            is 4 (meaning 4 ticks). 0 selects                                             the maximum length of 16 ticks.                    RAS.sub.-- falling                                                                         4      0      Specifies the number of ticks                                   bit           after the start of the access start                                           that RAS falls. The minimum                                     rw            value that can be used is 4                                                   (meaning 4 ticks). 0 selects the                                              maximum length of 16 ticks.                        CAS.sub.-- falling                                                                         4      8      Specifies the number of ticks                                   bit           after the start of a read cycle,                                              write cycle or access start that                                rw            CAS falls. The minimum value                                                  that can be used is 1 (meaning 1                                              tick). 0 selects the maximum                                                  length of 16 ticks.                                ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.5.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        Interface bus configuration registers                                                      Size/  Reset                                                     Register name                                                                              Dlr.   State  Description                                        ______________________________________                                        DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- width                                                              2      0      Specifies the number of bits                                    bit           used on the DRAM interface                                                    data bus DRAM.sub.-- data 31:0!.                                rw            See A.5.8                                          row.sub.-- address.sub.-- bits                                                             2      0      Specifies the number of bits                                    bit           used for the row address portion                                              of the DRAM interface address                                   rw            bus. See A.5.10                                    DRAM.sub.-- enable                                                                         1      1      Writing the value 0 in to this                                  bit           register forces the DRAM                                                      interface into a high impedance                                 rw            state. 0 will be read from this                                               register if either the                                                        DRAM.sub.-- enable signal is low or                                           0 has been written to the                                                     register.                                          CAS.sub.-- strength                                                                        3      6      These three bit registers                          RAS.sub.-- strength                                                                        bit           configure the output drive                         addr.sub.-- strength       strength of DRAM interface                         DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- strength                                                           rw            signals. This allows the interface                 OEWE.sub.-- strength       to be configured for various                                                  different loads. See A.5.13                        ______________________________________                                    

A.5.6 Interface operation

The DRAM interface uses fast page mode. Three different types of accessare supported:

Read

Write

Refresh

Each read or write access transfers a burst of 1 to 64 bytes to a singleDRAM page address. Read and write transfers are not mixed within asingle access and each successive access is treated as a random accessto a new DRAM page.

                  TABLE A.5.4                                                     ______________________________________                                        Refresh configuration registers                                                         Size/  Reset                                                        Register name                                                                           Dlr.   State  Description                                           ______________________________________                                        refresh.sub.-- interval                                                                 8      0      This value specifies the interval                               bit           between refresh cycles in periods of 16                                       decoder.sub.-- clock cycles. Values in the                      rw            range 1..255 can be configured. The                                           value 0 is automatically loaded after                                         reset and forces the DRAM interface to                                        continuously execute refresh cycles                                           until a valid refresh interval is config-                                     ured. It is recommended that                                                  refresh.sub.-- interval should be configured                                  only once after each reset.                           no.sub.-- refresh                                                                       1      0      Writing the value 1 to this register                            bit           prevents execution of any refresh                                             cycles.                                                         rw                                                                  ______________________________________                                    

A.5.7 Access structure

Each access is composed of two parts:

Access start

Data transfer

In the present invention, each access begins with an access start and isfollowed by one or more data transfer cycles. In addition, there is aread, write and refresh variant of both the access start and the datatransfer cycle.

Upon completion of the last data transfer for a particular access, theinterface enters its default state (see A.5.7.3) and remains in thisstate until a new access is ready to begin. If a new access is ready tobegin when the last access has finished, then the new access will beginimmediately.

A5.7.1 Access start

The access start provides the page address for the read or writetransfers and establishes some initial signal conditions. In accordancewith the present invention, there are three different access starts:

Start of read

Start of write

Start of refresh

                  TABLE A.5.5                                                     ______________________________________                                        DRAM Interface timing parameters                                              Num. Characteristic      Min.   Max. Unit Notes                               ______________________________________                                        5    RAS precharge period set by register                                                              4      16   tick                                          RAS.sub.-- falling                                                       6    Access start duration set by register                                                             4      32                                                 page.sub.-- start.sub.-- length                                          7    CAS precharge length set by register                                                              1      16        .sup.a                                   CAS.sub.-- falling.                                                      8    Fast page read or write cycle length                                                              4      16                                                 set by the register                                                           transfer.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length.                                     9    Refresh cycle length set by the                                                                   4      16                                                 register refresh.sub.-- cycle.                                           ______________________________________                                         .sup.a This value must be less than RAS.sub.-- falling to ensure CAS          before RAS refresh occurs.                                               

In each case, the timing of RAS and the row address is controlled by theregisters RAS₋₋ falling and page₋₋ start₋₋ length. The state of OE andDRAM₋₋ data 31:0! is held from the end of the previous data transferuntil **RAS falls. The three different access start types only vary inhow they drive OE and DRAM₋₋ data 31:0! when RAS falls. See FIG. 43.

A.5.7.2 Data transfer

In the present invention, there are different types of data transfercycles:

Fast page read cycle

Fast page late write cycle

Refresh cycle

A start of refresh can only be followed by a single refresh cycle. Astart of read (or write) can be followed by one or more fast page read(or write) cycles. At the start of the read cycle CAS is driven high andthe new column address is driven.

Furthermore, an early write cycle is used. WE is driven low at the startof the first write transfer and remains low until the end of the lastwrite transfer. The output data is driven with the address.

As a CAS before RAS refresh cycle is initiated by the start of refreshcycle, there is no interface signal activity during the refresh cycle.The purpose of the refresh cycle is to meet the minimum RAS low periodrequired by the DRAM.

A.5.7.3 Interface default state

The interface signals in the present invention enter a default state atthe end of an access:

RAS, CAS and WE high

data and OE remain in their previous state

addr remains stable

A.5.8 Data bus width

The two bit register, DRAM₋₋ data₋₋ width, allows the width of the DRAMinterface's data path to be configured. This allows the DRAM cost to beminimized when working with small picture formats.

                  TABLE A.5.6                                                     ______________________________________                                        Configuring DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- width                                     DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- width                                                 ______________________________________                                        .sup. 0.sup.a                                                                             8 bit wide data bus on DRAM.sub.-- data 31:24!.sup.b.             1           16 bit wide data bus on DRAM.sub.-- data 31:16!.sup. b!.          2           32 bit wide data bus on DRAM.sub.-- data 31:0!.                   ______________________________________                                         .sup.a Default after reset.                                                   .sup.b Unused signals are held high impedance.                           

A5.9 row address width

The number of bits that are taken from the middle section of the 24 bitinternal address in order to provide the row address is configured bythe register, row₋₋ address₋₋ bits.

                  TABLE A.5.7                                                     ______________________________________                                        Configuring row.sub.-- address.sub.-- bits                                    row.sub.-- address.sub.-- bits                                                                 Width of row address                                         ______________________________________                                        1                10 bits on DRAM.sub.-- addr 9:0!                             2                11 bits on DRAM.sub.-- addr 10:0!                            ______________________________________                                    

A.5.10 Address bits

On-chip, a 24 bit address is generated. How this address is used to formthe row and column addresses depends on the width of the data bus andthe number of bits selected for the row address. Some configurations donot permit all the internal address bits to be used and, therefore,produce "hidden bits)".

Similarly, the row address is extracted from the middle portion of theaddress. Accordingly, this maximizes the rate at which the DRAM isnaturally refreshed.

                  TABLE A.5.8                                                     ______________________________________                                        Mapping between internal and external addresses                               row   row address  data                                                       address                                                                             translation  bus    column address translation                          width internal → external                                                                 width  internal → external                          ______________________________________                                        9      14:6! →  8:0!                                                                      8       19:15! →  10:6!                                                                  5:0! →  5:0!                                         16      20:15! →  10:5!                                                                  5:1! →  4:0!                                         32      21:15! →  10:4!                                                                  5:2! →  3:0!                      10     15:6! →  9:0!                                                                      8       19:16! →  10:6!                                                                  5:0! →  5:0!                                         16      20:16! →  10:5!                                                                  5:1! →  4:0!                                         32      21:16! →  10:4!                                                                  5:2! →  3-:0!                     11      16:6! →  10:0!                                                                    8       19:17! →  10:6!                                                                  5:0! →  5:0!                                         16      20:17! →  10:5!                                                                  5:1! →  4:0!                                         32      21:17! →  10:4!                                                                  5:2! →  3:0!                      ______________________________________                                    

A.5.10.1 Low order column address bits

The least significant 4 to 6 bits of the column address are used toprovide addresses for fast page mode transfers of up to 64 bytes. Thenumber of address bits required to control these transfers will dependon the width of the data bus (see A.5.8).

A.5.10.2 Decoding row address to access more DRAM banks

Where only a single bank of DRAM is used, the width of the row addressused will depend on the type of DRAM used. Applications that requiremore memory than can be typically provided by a single DRAM bank, canconfigure a wider row address and then decode some row address bits toselect a single DRAM bank.

NOTE

The row address is extracted from the middle of the internal address. Ifsome bits of the row address are decoded to select banks of DRAM, thenall possible values of these "bank select bits" must select a bank ofDRAM. Otherwise, holes will be left in the address space.

A.5.11 DRAM Interface enable

In the present invention, there are two ways to make all the outputsignals on the DRAM interface become high impedance, i.e., by settingthe DRAM₋₋ enable register and the DRAM-enable signal. Both the registerand the signal rust be at a logic 1 in order for the drivers on the DRAMinterface to operate. If either is low then the interface is taken tohigh impedance.

Note: on-chip data processing is not terminated when the DRAM interfaceis at high impedance. Therefore, errors will occur if the chip attemptsto access DRAM while the interface is at high impedance.

In accordance with the present invention, the ability to take the DRAMinterface to high impedance is provided to allow other devices to testor use the DRAM controlled by the Spatial Decoder (or the TemporalDecoder) when the Spatial Decoder (or the Temporal Decoder) is not inuse. It is not intended to allow other devices to share the memoryduring normal operation.

A.5.12 Refresh

Unless disabled by writing to the register, no₋₋ refresh, the DRAMinterface will automatically refresh the DRAM using a CAS before RASrefresh cycle at an interval determined by the register, refresh₋₋interval.

The value in refresh₋₋ interval specifies the interval between refreshcycles in periods of 16 decoder₋₋ clock cycles. Values in the range1.255 can be configured. The value 0 is automatically loaded after resetand forces the DRAM interface to continuously execute refresh cycles(once enabled) until a valid refresh interval is configured. It isrecommended that refresh₋₋ interval should be configured only once aftereach reset.

While reset is asserted, the DRAM interface is unable to refresh theDRAM. However, the reset time required by the decoder chips issufficiently short, so that it should be possible to reset them and thento re-configure the DRAM interface before the DRAM contents decay.

A.5.13 Signal strengths

The drive strength of the outputs of the DRAM interface can beconfigured by the user using the 3 bit registers, CAS₋₋ strength, RAS₋₋strength, addr₋₋ strength, DRAM₋₋ data₋₋ strength, and OEWE₋₋ strength.The MSB of this 3 bit value selects either a fast or slow edge rate. Thetwo less significant bits configure the output for different loadcapacitances.

The default strength after reset is 6 and this configures the outputs totake approximately 10 ns to drive a signal between GND and V_(DD) ifloaded with 24_(p) F.

                  TABLE A.5.9                                                     ______________________________________                                        Output strength configurations                                                strength value  Drive characteristics                                         ______________________________________                                        0               Approx. 4 ns/V into 6 pf load                                 1               Approx. 4 ns/V into 12 pf load                                2               Approx. 4 ns/V into 24 pf load                                3               Approx. 4 ns/V into 48 pf load                                4               Approx. 2 ns/V into 6 pf load                                 5               Approx. 2 ns/V into 12 pf load                                .sup. 6.sup.a   Approx. 2 ns/V into 24 pf load                                7               Approx. 2 ns/V into 48 pf load                                ______________________________________                                         .sup.a Default after reset                                               

When an output is configured appropriately for the load it is driving,it will meet the AC electrical characteristics specified in TablesA.5.13 to A.5.16. When appropriately configured, each output isapproximately matched to its load and, therefore, minimal overshoot willoccur after a signal transition.

A.5.14 Electrical specifications

All information provided in this section is merely illustrative of oneembodiment of the present invention and is included by example and notnecessarily by way of limitation.

                  TABLE A.5.10                                                    ______________________________________                                        Maximum Ratings.sup.a                                                         Symbol Parameter      Min.      Max.   Units                                  ______________________________________                                        V.sub.DD                                                                             Supply voltage relative to                                                                   -0.5      6.5    V                                             GND                                                                    V.sub.IN                                                                             Input voltage on any pin                                                                     GND - 0.5 V.sub.DD + 0.5                                                                       V                                      T.sub.A                                                                              Operating temperature                                                                        -40       +85    °C.                             T.sub.S                                                                              Storage temperature                                                                          -55       +150   °C.                             ______________________________________                                    

Table A.5.10 sets forth maximum ratings for the illustrative embodimentonly. For this particular embodiment stresses below those listed in thistable should be used to ensure reliability of operation.

                  TABLE A.5.11                                                    ______________________________________                                        DC Operating conditions                                                       Symbol Parameter      Min.      Max.   Units                                  ______________________________________                                        V.sub.DD                                                                             Supply voltage relative to                                                                   4.75      5.25   V                                             GND                                                                    GND    Ground         0         0      V                                      V.sub.IH                                                                             Input logic `1' voltage                                                                      2.0       V.sub.DD + 0.5                                                                       V                                      V.sub.IL                                                                             Input logic `0' voltage                                                                      GND - 0.5 0.8    V                                      T.sub.A                                                                              Operating temperature                                                                        0         70     °C..sup.a                       ______________________________________                                         .sup.a With TBA linear ft/min transverse airflow                         

                  TABLE A.5.12                                                    ______________________________________                                        DC Electrical characteristics                                                 Symbol Parameter         Min.    Max.  Units                                  ______________________________________                                        V.sub.OL                                                                             Output logic `0' voltage  0.4   .sup. V.sup.a                          V.sub.OH                                                                             Output logic `1' voltage                                                                             2.8      V                                      I.sub.O                                                                              Output current    ± 100      .sup. μA.sup.b                      I.sub.OZ                                                                             Output off state leakage current                                                                ± 20       μA                                  I.sub.IZ                                                                             Input leakage current                                                                           ± 10       μA                                  I.sub.OO                                                                             RMS power supply current  500   mA                                     C.sub.IN                                                                             Input capacitance         5     pF                                     C.sub.OUT                                                                            Output/IO capacitance     5     pF                                     ______________________________________                                         .sup.a AC parameters are specified using V.sub.OLmax = 0.8V as the            measurement level.                                                            .sup.b This is the steady state drive capability of the interface.            Transient currents may be much greater.                                  

A.5.14.1 AC characteristics

                  TABLE A.5.13                                                    ______________________________________                                        Differences from nominal values for a strobe                                  Num.    Parameter  Min.   Max.    Unit Note.sup.a                             ______________________________________                                        10      Cycle time -2     +2      ns                                          11      Cycle time -2     +2      ns                                          12      High pulse -5     +2      ns                                          13      Low pulse  -11    +2      ns                                          14      Cycle time -8     +2      ns                                          ______________________________________                                         .sup.a As will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art, the        driver strength of the signal must be configured appropriately for its        load.                                                                    

                  TABLE A.5.14                                                    ______________________________________                                        Differences from nominal                                                      values between two strobes                                                    Num. Parameter           Min.   Max. Unit Note.sup.a                          ______________________________________                                        15   Strobe to strobe delay                                                                            -3     +3   ns                                       16   Low hold time       -13    +3   ns                                       17   Strobe to strobe precharge e.g. tCRP,                                                             -9     +3   ns                                            tRCS, tRCH, tRRH, tRPC                                                        CAS precharge pulse between any                                                                   -5     +2   ns                                            two CAS signals on wide DRAMs                                                 e.g. tCP, or between RAS rising and                                           CAS falling e.g. tRPC                                                    18   Precharge before disable                                                                          -12    +3   ns                                       ______________________________________                                         .sup.a The driver strength of the two signals must be configured              appropriately for their loads.                                           

                  TABLE A.5.15                                                    ______________________________________                                        Differences from nominal                                                      between a bus and a strobe                                                    Num.  Parameter      Min.    Max.  Unit  Note.sup.a                           ______________________________________                                        19    Set up time    -12     +3    ns                                         20    Hold time      -12     +3    ns                                         21    Address access time                                                                          -12     +3    ns                                         22    Next valid after strobe                                                                      -12     +3    ns                                         ______________________________________                                         .sup.a The driver strength of the bus and the strobe must be configured       appropriately for their loads.                                           

                  TABLE A.5.16                                                    ______________________________________                                        Differences from nominal                                                      between a bus and a strobe                                                    Num. Parameter           Min.   Max. Unit Note                                ______________________________________                                        23   Read data set-up time before CAS                                                                  0           ns                                            signal starts to rise                                                    24   Read data hold time after CAS signal                                                              0           ns                                            starts to go high                                                        ______________________________________                                    

When reading from DRAM, the DRAM interface samples DRAM₋₋ M data 31:0!as the CAS signals rise.

                  Table A.5.17                                                    ______________________________________                                        Cross-reference between "standard" DRAM                                       parameter names and timing parameter numbers                                  parameter    parameter     parameter                                          name    number   name     number name   number                                ______________________________________                                        tPC     10       tRSH     16     tRHCP  18                                                                     tCPRH                                        tRC     11       tCSH            tASR   19                                    tRP     12       tRWL            tASC                                         tCP              tCWL            tDS                                          tCPN             tRAC            tRAH   20                                    tRAS    13       tOAC/tOE        tCAH                                         tCAS             tCHR            tDH                                          tCAC             tCRP     17     tAR                                          tWP              tRCS            tAA    21                                    tRASP            tRCH            tRAL                                         tRASC            tRRH            tRAD   22                                    tACP/tCPA                                                                             14       tRPC                                                         tRCD    15       tCP                                                          tCSR             tRPC                                                         ______________________________________                                    

SECTION A.6 Microprocessor interface (MPI)

A standard byte wide microprocessor interface (MPI) is used on all chipsin the video decoder chip-set. However, one of ordinary skill in the artwill appreciate that microprocessor interfaces of other widths may alsobe used. The MPI operates synchronously to various decoder chip clocks.

A.6.1 MPI signals

                  TABLE A.6.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        MPI interface signals                                                         Signal  Input/                                                                Name    Output  Description                                                   ______________________________________                                        enable 1:0!                                                                           Input   Two active low chip enables. Both must be low to                              enable accesses via the MPI.                                  rw      Input   High indicates that a device wishes to read values                            from the video chip.                                                          This signal should be stable while the chip is                                enabled.                                                      addr n:0!                                                                             Input   Address specifies one of 2.sup.n locations in the chip's                      memory map                                                                    This signal should be stable while the chip is                                enabled.                                                      data 7:0!                                                                             Output  B bit wide data I/O port. These pins are high                                 impedance if either enable signal is high.                    irq     Output  An active low, open collector, interrupt request                              signal                                                        ______________________________________                                    

A.6.2 MPI electrical specifications

                  TABLE A.6.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        Absolute Maximum Ratings.sup.a                                                Symbol Parameter      Min.      Max.   Units                                  ______________________________________                                        V.sub.DD                                                                             Supply voltage relative to                                                                   -0.5      6.5    V                                             GND                                                                    V.sub.IN                                                                             Input voltage on any pin                                                                     GND - 0.5 V.sub.DD + 0.5                                                                       V                                      T.sub.A                                                                              Operating temperature                                                                        -40       +85    °C.                             T.sub.S                                                                              Storage temperature                                                                          -55       +150   °C.                             ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.6.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        DC Operating conditions                                                       Symbol Parameter      Min.      Max.   Units                                  ______________________________________                                        V.sub.DD                                                                             Supply voltage relative to                                                                   4.75      5.25   V                                             GND                                                                    GND    Ground         0         0      V                                      V.sub.IH                                                                             Input logic `1' voltage                                                                      2.0       V.sub.DD + 0.5                                                                       .sup. V.sup.a                          V.sub.IL                                                                             Input logic `0' voltage                                                                      GND - 0.5 0.8    .sup.  V.sup. a!                       T.sub.A                                                                              Operating temperature                                                                        0         70     °C..sup.b                       ______________________________________                                         .sup.a AC input parameters are measured at a 1.4V measurement level.          .sup.b With TBA linear ft/min transverse airflow.                        

                  TABLE A.6.4                                                     ______________________________________                                        DC Electrical characteristics                                                 Symbol                                                                              Parameter        Min.      Max.   Units                                 ______________________________________                                        V.sub.OL                                                                            Output logic `0' voltage   0.4    V                                     V.sub.OL∞                                                                     Open collector output logic                                                                              0.4    .sup. V.sup.a                               `0' voltage                                                             V.sub.OH                                                                            Output logic `1' voltage                                                                       2.4              V                                     I.sub.O                                                                             Output current   ± 100         μA.sup.b                           I.sub.O∞                                                                      Open collector output current                                                                  4.0       8.0    mA.sup.c                              I.sub.OZ                                                                            Output off state leakage   ± 20                                                                              μA                                       current                                                                 I.sub.IN                                                                            Input leakage current      ± 10                                                                              μA                                 I.sub.OO                                                                            RMS power supply current   500    mA                                    C.sub.IN                                                                            Input capacitance          5      pF                                    C.sub.OUT                                                                           Output/IO capacitance      5      pF                                    ______________________________________                                         .sup.a 1.sub.O ≦ 1.sub.O∞ min.                                   .sup.b This is the steady state drive capability of the interface.            Transient currents may be much greater.                                       .sup.c When asserted the open collector irq output pulls down with an         impedance of 100Ω or less.                                         

A.6.2.1 AC characteristics

                  TABLE A.6.5                                                     ______________________________________                                        Microprocessor interface read timing                                                                                    Notes                               Num. Characteristic      Min.   Max. Unit .sup.a                              ______________________________________                                        25   Enable low period   100         ns                                       26   Enable high period  50          ns                                       27   Address or rw set-up to chip enable                                                               0           ns                                       28   Address or rw hold from chip disable                                                              0           ns                                       29   Output turn-on time 20          ns                                       30   Read data access time      70   ns   .sup.b                              31   Read data hold time 5           ns                                       32   Read data turn-off time    20                                            ______________________________________                                         .sup.a The choice, in this example, of enable 0! to start the cycle and       enable 1! to end it is arbitrary. These signal are of equal status.           .sup.b The access time is specified for a maximum load of 50 .sub.p F on      each of the data 7.0!. Larger loads may increase the access time.        

                  TABLE A.6.6                                                     ______________________________________                                        Microprocessor interface write timing                                         Num.  Characteristic Min.    Max.  Unit  Notes                                ______________________________________                                        33    Write data set-up time                                                                       15            ns    .sup.a                               34    Write data hold time                                                                         0             ns                                         ______________________________________                                         .sup.a The choice, in this example, of enable 0! to start the cycle and       enable 1! to end it is arbitrary. These signal are of equal status.      

A.6.3 Interrupts

In accordance with the present invention, "event" is the term used todescribe an on-chip condition that a user might want to observe. Anevent can indicate an error or it can be informative to the user'ssoftware.

There are two single bit registers associated with each interrupt or"event". These are the condition event register and the condition maskregister.

A.6.3.1 condition event register

The condition event register is a one bit read/write register whosevalue is set to one by a condition occurring within the circuit. Theregister is set to one even if the condition was merely transient andhas now gone away. The register is then guaranteed to remain set to oneuntil the user's software resets it (or the entire chip is reset).

The register is set to zero by writing the value one

Writing zero to the register leaves the register unaltered.

The register must be set to zero by user software before anotheroccurrence of this condition can be observed.

The register will be reset to zero on reset.

A.6.3.2 Condition mask register

The condition mask register is one bit read/write register which enablesthe generation of an interrupt request if the corresponding conditionevent register(s) is(are) set. If the condition event is already setwhen 1 is written to the condition mask register, an interrupt requestwill be issued immediately.

The value 1 enables interrupts.

The register clears to zero on reset.

Unless stated otherwise a block will stop operation after generating aninterrupt request and will re-start operation after either the conditionevent or the condition mask register is cleared.

A.6.3.3 Event and mask bits

Event bits and mask bits are always grouped into corresponding bitpositions In consecutive bytes in the memory map (see Table A.9.6 andTable A.17.6). This allows interrupt service software to use the valueread from the mask registers as a mask for the value in the eventregisters to identify which event generated the interrupt.

A.6.3.4 The chip event and mask

Each chip has a single "global" event bit that summarizes the eventactivity on the chip. The chip event register presents the OR of all theon-chip events that have 1 in their mask bit.

A 1 in the chip mask bit allows the chip to generate interrupts. A 0 inthe chip mask bit prevents any on-chip events from generating interruptrequests.

Writing 1 to 0 to the chip event has no effect. It will only clear whenall the events (enabled by a 1 in their mask bit) have been cleared.

A.6.3.5 The irq signal

The irq signal is asserted if both the chip event bit and the chip eventmask are set.

The irq signal is an active low, "open collector" output which requiresan off-chip pull-up resistor. When active the irq output is pulled downby an impedance of 100Ω or less.

I will be appreciated that pull-up resistor of approximately 4 kΩ shouldbe suitable for most applications.

A.6.4 Accessing registers

A.6.4.1 Stopping circuits to enable access

In the present invention, most registers can only be modified if theblock with which they are associated is stopped. Therefore, groups ofregisters will normally be associated with an access register.

The value 0 in an access register indicates that the group of registersassociated with that access register should not be modified. Writing 1to an access register requests that a block be stopped. However, theblock may not stop immediately and block's access register will hold thevalue 0 until it is stopped.

Accordingly, user software should wait (after writing 1 to requestaccess) until 1 is read from the access register. If the user writes avalue to a configuration register while its access register is set to 0,the results are undefined.

A.6.4.2 Registers holding integers

The least significant bit: of any byte in the memory map is thatassociated with the signal data 0!.

Registers that hold integers values greater than 8 bits are split overeither 2 or 4 consecutive byte locations in the memory map. The byteordering is "big endian" as shown in FIG. 55. However, no assumptionsare made about the order in which bytes are written into multi-byteregisters.

Unused bits in the memory map will return a 0 when read except forunused bits in registers holding signed integers. In this case, the mostsignificant bit of the register will be sign extended. For example, a 12bit signed register will be sign extended to fill a 16 bit memory maplocation (two bytes). A 16 bit memory map location holding a 12 bitunsigned integer will return a 0 from its most significant bits.

A.6.4.3 Keyholed address locations

In the present invention, certain less frequently accessed memory maplocations have been placed behind "keyholes". A "keyhole" has tworegisters associated with it, a keyhole address register and a keyholedata register.

The keyhole address specifies a location within an extended addressspace. A read or a write operation to the keyhole data register accessesthe location specified by the keyhole address register.

After accessing a keyhole data register the associated keyhole addressregister increments. Random access within the extended address space isonly possible by writing a new value to the keyhole address register foreach access.

A chip in accordance with the present invention, may have more than one"keyholed" memory map. There is no interaction between the differentkeyholes.

A.6.5 Special registers

A.6.5.1 Unused registers

Registers or bits described as "not used" are locations in the memorymap that have not been used in the current implementation of the device.In general, the value 0 can be read from these locations. Writing 0 tothese locations will have no effect.

As will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art, in order tomaintain compatibility with future variants of these products, it isrecommended that the user's software should not depend upon values readfrom the unused locations. Similarly, when configuring the device, theselocations should either be avoided or set to the value 0.

A.6.5.2 Reserved registers

Similarly, registers or bits described as "reserved" in the presentinvention have un-documented effects on the behavior of the device andshould not be accessed.

A.6.5.3 Test registers

Furthermore, registers or bits described as "test registers" controlvarious aspects of the device's testability. Therefore, these registershave no application in the normal use of the devices and need not beaccessed by normal device configuration and control software.

SECTION A.7 Clocks

In accordance with the present inventions, many different clocks can beidentified in the video decoder system. Examples of clocks areillustrated in FIG. 56.

As data passes between different clock regimes within the video decoderchip-set, it is resynchronized (on-chip) to each new clock. In thepresent invention, the maximum frequency of any input clock is 30MH_(z). However, one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate thatother frequencies, including those greater than 30 MHz, may also beused. On each chip, the microprocessor interface (MPI) operatesasynchronously to the chip clocks. In addition, the Image Formatter cangenerate a low frequency audio clock which is synchronous to the decodedvideo's picture rate. Accordingly, this clock can be used to provideaudio/video synchronization.

A.7.1 Spatial Decoder clock signals

The Spatial Decoder has two different (and potentially asynchronous)clock inputs:

                  TABLE A.7.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        Spatial Decoder clocks                                                                 Input/                                                               Signal Name                                                                            Output  Description                                                  ______________________________________                                        coded.sub.-- clock                                                                     Input   This clock controls data transfer in to the coded                             data port of the Spatial Decoder.                                             On-chip this clock controls the processing of                                 the coded data until it reaches the coded data                                buffer.                                                      decoder.sub.-- clock                                                                   Input   The decoder clock controls the majority of the                                processing functions on the Spatial Decoder.                                  The decoder clock also controls the transfer of                               data out of the Spatial Decoder through its                                   output port.                                                 ______________________________________                                    

A.7.2 Temporal Decoder clock signals

Temporal Decoder has only one clock input:

                  TABLE A.7.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        Temporal Decoder clocks                                                                Input/                                                               Signal Name                                                                            Output  Description                                                  ______________________________________                                        decoder.sub.-- clock                                                                   Input   The decoder clock controls all of the processing                              functions on the Temporal Decoder.                                            The decoder clock also controls transfer of data                              in to the Temporal Decoder through its input                                  port and out via its output port.                            ______________________________________                                    

A.7.3 Electrical specifications

                  TABLE A.7.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        Input clock requirements                                                                     30 MHz                                                         Num.    Characteristic                                                                             Min.   Max.   Unit Note                                  ______________________________________                                        35      Clock period 33            ns                                         36      Clock high period                                                                          13            ns                                         37      Clock low period                                                                           13            ns                                         ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.7.4                                                     ______________________________________                                        Clock input conditions                                                        Symbol Parameter     Min.       Max.   Units                                  ______________________________________                                        V.sub.IH                                                                             Input logic `1` voltage                                                                     3.68       V.sub.DD + 0.5                                                                       V                                      V.sub.IL                                                                             Input logic `0` voltage                                                                     GND - 0.5  1.43   V                                      I.sub.OZ                                                                             Input leakage current    ±10 μA                                  ______________________________________                                    

A.7.3.1 CMOS levels

The clock input signals are CMOS inputs. V_(IHmin) is approx. 70% ofV_(DD) and V_(ILmax) is approx. 30% of V_(DD). The values shown in TableA.7.4 are those for V_(IH) and V_(IL) at their respective worst caseV_(DD). V_(DD) =5.0±0.25V.

A.7.3.2 Stability of clocks

In the present invention, clocks used to drive the DRAM interface andthe chip-to-chip interfaces are derived from the input clock signals.The timing specifications for these interfaces assume that the inputclock timing is stable to within ±100 ps.

SECTION A.8 JTAG

As circuit boards become more densely populated, it is increasinglydifficult to verify the connections between components by traditionalmeans, such as in-circuit testing using a bed-of-nails approach. In anattempt to resolve the access problem and standardize on a methodology,the Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) was formed. The work of this groupculminated in the "Standard Test Access Port and Boundary ScanArchitecture", now adopted by the IEEE as standard 1149.1. The SpatialDecoder and Temporal Decoder comply with this standard.

The standard utilizes a boundary scan chain which serially connects eachdigital signal pin on the device. The test circuitry is transparent innormal operation, but in test mode the boundary scan chain allows testpatterns to be shifted in, and applied to the pins of the device. Theresultant signals appearing on the circuit board at the inputs to theJTAG device, may be scanned out and checked by relatively simple testequipment. By this means, the inter-component connections can be tested,as can areas of logic on the circuit board.

All JTAG operations are performed via the Test Access Port (TAP), whichconsists of five pins. The trst (Test Reset) pin resets the JTAGcircuitry, to ensure that the device doesn't power-up in test mode. Thetck (Test Clock) pin is used to clock serial test patterns into the tdi(Test Data Input) pin, and out of the tdo (Test Data Output) pin.Lastly, the operational mode of the JTAG circuitry is set by clockingthe appropriate sequence of bits into the tms (Test Mode Select) pin.

The JTAG standard is extensible to provide for additional features atthe discretion of the chip manufacturer. On the Spatial Decoder andTemporal Decoder, there are 9 user instructions, including three JTAGmandatory instructions. The extra instructions allow a degree ofinternal device testing to be performed, and provide additional externaltest flexibility. For example, all device outputs may be made to floatby a simple JTAG sequence.

For full details of the facilities available and instructions on how touse the JTAG port, refer to the following JTAG Applications Notes.

A.8.1 Connection of JTAG pins in non-JTAG systems

                  TABLE A.8.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        How to connect JTAG inputs                                                    Signal                                                                              Direction                                                                              Description                                                    ______________________________________                                        trst  Input    This pin has an internal pull-up, but must be taken                           low at power-up even if the JTAG features are not                             being used. This may be achieved by connecting                                trst in common with the chip reset pin reset.                  tdi   Input    These pins have internal pull-ups, and may be left             tms            disconnected if the JTAG circuitry is not being used.          tck   Input    This pin does not have a pull-up, and should be tied                          to ground if the JTAG circuitry is not used.                   tdo   Output   High impedance except during JTAG scan                                        operations. If JTAG is not being used, this pin may                           be left disconnected.                                          ______________________________________                                    

A.8.2 Level of Conformance to IEEE 1149.1

A.8.2.1 Rules

All rules are adhered to, although the following should be noted:

                  TABLE A.8.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        JTAG Rules                                                                    Rules  Description                                                            ______________________________________                                        3.1.1(b)                                                                             The trst pin is provided.                                              3.5.1(b)                                                                             Guaranteed for all public instructions (see IEEE 1149.1                       5.2.1(c)).                                                             5.2.1(c)                                                                             Guaranteed for all public instructions. For some private                      instructions, the TDO pin may be active during any of the                     states Capture-DR, Exit 1-DR, Exit-2-DR & Pause-DR.                    5.3.1(a)                                                                             Power on-reset is achieved by use of the trst pin.                     6.2.1(e,f)                                                                           A code for the BYPASS instruction is loaded in the                            Test-Logic-Reset state.                                                7.1.1(d)                                                                             Un-allocated instruction codes are equivalent to BYPASS.               7.2.1(c)                                                                             There is no device ID register.                                        ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.8.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        JTAG Rules                                                                    Rules   Description                                                           ______________________________________                                         7.8.1(b)                                                                             Single-step operation requires external control                               of the system clock.                                                   7.9.1(...)                                                                           There is no RUNBIST facility.                                          7.11.1(...)                                                                          There is no IDCODE instruction.                                        7.12.1(...)                                                                          There is no USERCODE instruction.                                      8.1.1.(b)                                                                            There is no device identification register.                            8.2.1(c)                                                                             Guaranteed for all public instructions. The apparent                          length of the path from tdi to tdo may change under certain                   circumstances while private instruction codes are loaded.              8.3.1(d-i)                                                                           Guaranteed for all public instructions. Data may be loaded                    at times other than on the rising edge of tck                                 while private instructions codes are loaded.                          10.4.1(e)                                                                             During INTEST, the system clock pin must be controlled                        externally.                                                           10.6.1(c)                                                                             During INTEST, output pins are controlled by data                             shifted in via tdi.                                                   ______________________________________                                    

A.8.2.2 Recommendations

                  TABLE A.8.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        Recommendations met                                                           Recommendation                                                                          Description                                                         ______________________________________                                        3.2.1(b)  tck is a high-impedance CMOS input.                                 3.3.1(c)  tms has a high impedance pull-up.                                   3.6.1(d)  (Applies to use of chip).                                           3.7.1(a)  (Applies to use of chip).                                           6.1.1(e)  The SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction code is                                        loaded during Capture-IR.                                           7.2.1(f)  The INTEST instruction is supported.                                7.7.1(g)  Zeros are loaded at system output pins during                                 EXTEST.                                                             7.7.2(h)  All system outputs may be set high-impedance.                       7.8.1(f)  Zeros are loaded at system input pins during INTEST.                8.1.1(d,e)                                                                              Design-specific test data registers are not                                   publicly accessible.                                                ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.8.4                                                     ______________________________________                                        Recommendations not implemented                                               Recommendation                                                                          Description                                                         ______________________________________                                        10.4.1(f) During EXTEST, the signal driven into the on-chip                             logic from the system clock pin is that supplied                              externally.                                                         ______________________________________                                    

A.8.2.3 Permissions

                  TABLE A.8.5                                                     ______________________________________                                        Permissions met                                                               Permissions                                                                           Description                                                           ______________________________________                                         3.2.1(c)                                                                             Guaranteed for all public instructions.                                6.1.1(f)                                                                             The instruction register is not used to capture                               design-specific information.                                           7.2.1(g)                                                                             Several additional public instructions are provided.                   7.3.1(a)                                                                             Several private instruction codes are allocated.                       7.3.1(c)                                                                             (Rule?) Such instructions codes are documented.                        7.4.1(f)                                                                             Additional codes perform identically to BYPASS.                       10.1.1(i)                                                                             Each output pin has its own 3-state control.                          10.3.1(h)                                                                             A parallel latch is provided.                                         10.3.1(i,j)                                                                           During EXTEST, input pins are controlled by data                              shifted in via tdi.                                                   10.6.1(d,e)                                                                           3-state cells are not forced inactive in the Test-Logic-Reset                 state.                                                                ______________________________________                                    

SECTION A.9 Spatial Decoder

30 MH_(z) operation

Decodes MPEG, JPEG & H.261

Coded data rates to 25 Mb/s

Video data rates to 21 MB/s

Flexible chroma sampling formats

Full JPEG baseline decoding

Glue-less DRAM interface

Single +5V supply

208 pin PQFP package

Max. power dissipation 2.5 W

Independent coded data and decoder clocks

Uses standard page mode DRAM

The Spatial Decoder is a configurable VLSI decoder chip for use in avariety of JPEG, MPEG and H.261 picture and video decoding applications.

In a minimum configuration, with no off-chip DRAM, the Spatial Decoderis a single chip, high speed JPEG decoder. Adding DRAM allows theSpatial Decoder to decode JPEG encoded video pictures. 720×480, 30 Hz,4:2:2 "JPEG video" can be decoded in real-time.

With the Temporal Decoder Temporal Decoder the Spatial Decoder can beused to decode H.261 and MPEG (as well as JPEG). 704×480, 30 Hz, 4:2:0MPEG video can be decoded.

Again, the above values are merely illustrative, by way of example andnot necessarily by way of limitation, of typical values for oneembodiment in accordance with the present invention. Accordingly, thoseof ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that other values and/orranges may be used.

A.9.1 Spatial Decoder Signals

                                      TABLE A.9.1                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Spatial Decoder signals                                                       Signal Name                                                                            I/O                                                                             Pin Number     Description                                         __________________________________________________________________________    coded.sub.-- clock                                                                     I 182            Coded Data Port. Used to supply                     coded.sub.-- data 7:0!                                                                 I 172, 171, 169, 168, 167, 166, 164,                                                           coded data or Tokens to the Spatial                            163            Decoder.                                            coded.sub.-- extn                                                                      I 174            See sections A.10.1 and                             coded.sub.-- valid                                                                     I 162            A.4.1                                               coded.sub.-- accept                                                                    O 161                                                                byte.sub.-- mode                                                                       I 176                                                                enable 1:0!                                                                            I 126, 127       Micro Processor Interface (MPI).                    rw       I 125                                                                addr 6:0!                                                                              I 136, 135, 133, 132, 131, 130, 128                                  data 7:0!                                                                              O 152, 151, 149, 147, 145, 143, 141,                                                           See section A.6.1                                              140                                                                irq      O 154                                                                DRAM.sub.-- data 31:0!                                                                 I/O                                                                             15, 17, 19, 20, 22, 25, 27, 30, 31,                                                          DRAM Interface.                                                33, 35, 38, 39, 42, 44, 47, 49, 57,                                           59, 61, 63, 66, 68, 70, 72, 74, 76,                                                          See section A.5.2                                              79, 81, 83, 84, 85                                                 DRAM.sub.-- addr 10:0!                                                                 O 184, 186, 188, 189, 192, 193, 195,                                            197, 199, 200, 203                                                 RAS      O 11                                                                 CAS 3:0! O 2, 4, 6, 8                                                         WE       O 12                                                                 OE       O 204                                                                DRAM.sub.-- enable                                                                     I 112                                                                out.sub.-- data 8:0!                                                                   O 88, 89, 90, 92, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98                                                           Output Port.                                        out.sub.-- extn                                                                        O 87             See section A.4.1                                   out.sub.-- valid                                                                       O 99                                                                 out.sub.-- accept                                                                      I 100                                                                tck      I 115            JTAG port.                                          tci      I 116            See section A.8                                     tco      O 120                                                                tms      I 117                                                                trst     I 121                                                                decoder.sub.-- clock                                                                   I 177            The main decoder clock. See section                                           A.7                                                 reset    I 160            Reset.                                              __________________________________________________________________________

                  TABLE A.9.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        Spatial Decoder Test signals                                                  Signal Name                                                                           I/O   Pin Num. Description                                            ______________________________________                                        tph0ish I     122      If override = 1 then tph0ish and tph1ish               tph1ish I     123      are inputs for the on-chip two phase clock.            override                                                                              I     110      For normal operation set override = 0.                                        tph0ish and tph1ish are ignored (so                                           connect to GND or V.sub.DD).                           chiptest                                                                              I     111      Set chiptest = 0 for normal operation.                 tloop   I     114      Connect to GND or V.sub.DD duing normal                                       operation.                                             ramtest I     109      If ramtest = 1 test of the on-chip RAMs                                       is enabled.                                                                   Set ramtest = 0 for normal operation.                  pllselect                                                                             I     178      If pllselect = 0 the on-chip phase locked                                     loops are disabled.                                                           Set piiselect = 1 for normal operation.                ti      I     180      Two clocks required by the DRAM                        tq      I     179      interface during test operation.                                              Connect to GND or V.sub.DD during normal                                      operation.                                             pdout   O     207      These two pins are connections for an                  pdin    I     206      external filter for the phase lock                     ______________________________________                                                               loop.                                              

                                      TABLE A.9.3                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Spatial Decoder Pin Assignments                                               Signal Name                                                                           Pin                                                                              Signal Name                                                                          Pin                                                                              Signal Name                                                                           Pin                                                                              Signal Name                                                                           Pin                                   __________________________________________________________________________    nc      208                                                                              nc     156                                                                              nc      104                                                                              nc      52                                    test pin                                                                              207                                                                              nc     155                                                                              nc      103                                                                              nc      51                                    test pin                                                                              206                                                                              irq    154                                                                              nc      102                                                                              nc      50                                    GND     205                                                                              nc     153                                                                              VDD     101                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 15!                                                                  49                                    OE      204                                                                              data 7!                                                                              152                                                                              out.sub.-- accept                                                                     100                                                                              nc      48                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 0!                                                                   203                                                                              data 6!                                                                              151                                                                              out.sub.-- valid                                                                      99 DRAM.sub.-- data 16!                                                                  47                                    VDD     202                                                                              nc     150                                                                              out.sub.-- data 0!                                                                    98 nc      46                                    nc      201                                                                              data 5!                                                                              149                                                                              out.sub.-- data 1!                                                                    97 GND     45                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 1!                                                                   200                                                                              nc     148                                                                              GND     96 DRAM.sub.-- data 17!                                                                  44                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 2!                                                                   199                                                                              data 4!                                                                              147                                                                              out.sub.-- data 2!                                                                    95 nc      43                                    GND     198                                                                              GND    146                                                                              out.sub.-- data 3!                                                                    94 DRAM.sub.-- data 18!                                                                  42                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 3!                                                                   197                                                                              data 3!                                                                              145                                                                              out.sub.-- data 4!                                                                    93 VDD     41                                    nc      196                                                                              nc     144                                                                              out.sub.-- data 5!                                                                    92 nc      40                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 4!                                                                   195                                                                              data 2!                                                                              143                                                                              VDD     91 DRAM.sub.-- data 19!                                                                  39                                    VDD     194                                                                              nc     142                                                                              out.sub.-- data 6!                                                                    90 DRAM.sub.-- data 20!                                                                  38                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 5!                                                                   193                                                                              data 1!                                                                              141                                                                              out.sub.-- data 7!                                                                    89 nc      37                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 6!                                                                   193                                                                              data 0!                                                                              140                                                                              out.sub.-- data 8!                                                                    88 GND     36                                    nc      191                                                                              nc     139                                                                              out.sub.-- extn                                                                       87 DRAM.sub.-- data 21!                                                                  35                                    GND     190                                                                              VDD    138                                                                              GND     86 nc      34                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 7!                                                                   189                                                                              nc     137                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 0!                                                                   85 DRAM.sub.-- data 22!                                                                  33                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 8!                                                                   188                                                                              addr 6!                                                                              136                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 1!                                                                   84 VDD     32                                    VDD     187                                                                              addr 5!                                                                              135                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 2!                                                                   83 DRAM.sub.-- data 23!                                                                  31                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 9!                                                                   186                                                                              GND    134                                                                              VDD     82 DRAM.sub.-- data 24!                                                                  30                                    nc      185                                                                              addr 4!                                                                              133                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 3!                                                                   81 nc      29                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 10!                                                                  184                                                                              addr 3!                                                                              132                                                                              nc      80 GND     28                                    GND     183                                                                              addr 2!                                                                              131                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 4!                                                                   79 DRAM.sub.-- data 25!                                                                  27                                    coded.sub.-- clock                                                                    182                                                                              addr 1!                                                                              130                                                                              GND     78 nc      25                                    VDD     181                                                                              VDD    129                                                                              nc      77 DRAM.sub.-- data 26!                                                                  25                                    test pin                                                                              180                                                                              addr 0!                                                                              128                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 5!                                                                   76 nc      24                                    test pin                                                                              179                                                                              enable 0!                                                                            127                                                                              nc      75 VDD     23                                    test pin                                                                              178                                                                              enable 1!                                                                            126                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 6!                                                                   74 DRAM.sub.-- data 27!                                                                  22                                    decoder.sub.-- clock                                                                  177                                                                              rw     125                                                                              VDD     73 nc      21                                    byte.sub.-- mode                                                                      176                                                                              GND    124                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 7!                                                                   72 DRAM.sub.-- data 28!                                                                  20                                    GND     175                                                                              test pin                                                                             123                                                                              nc      71 DRAM.sub.-- data 29!                                                                  19                                    coded.sub.-- extn                                                                     174                                                                              test pin                                                                             122                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 8!                                                                   70 GND     18                                    nc      208                                                                              nc     156                                                                              nc      104                                                                              nc      52                                    test pin                                                                              207                                                                              nc     155                                                                              nc      103                                                                              nc      51                                    test pin                                                                              206                                                                              irq    154                                                                              nc      102                                                                              nc      50                                    GND     205                                                                              nc     153                                                                              VDD     101                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 15!                                                                  49                                    OE      204                                                                              data 7!                                                                              152                                                                              out.sub.-- accept                                                                     100                                                                              nc      48                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 0!                                                                   203                                                                              data 6!                                                                              151                                                                              out.sub.-- valid                                                                      99 DRAM.sub.-- data 16!                                                                  47                                    VDD     202                                                                              nc     150                                                                              out.sub.-- data 0!                                                                    98 nc      46                                    nc      201                                                                              data 5!                                                                              149                                                                              out.sub.-- data 1!                                                                    97 GND     45                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 1!                                                                   200                                                                              nc     148                                                                              GND     96 DRAM.sub.-- data 17!                                                                  44                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 2!                                                                   199                                                                              data 4!                                                                              147                                                                              out.sub.-- data 2!                                                                    95 nc      43                                    GND     198                                                                              GND    146                                                                              out.sub.-- data 3!                                                                    94 DRAM.sub.-- data 18!                                                                  42                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 3!                                                                   197                                                                              data 3!                                                                              145                                                                              out.sub.-- data 4!                                                                    93 VDD     41                                    nc      196                                                                              nc     144                                                                              out.sub.-- data 5!                                                                    92 nc      40                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 4!                                                                   195                                                                              data 2!                                                                              143                                                                              VDD     91 DRAM.sub.-- data 19!                                                                  39                                    VDD     194                                                                              nc     142                                                                              out.sub.-- data 6!                                                                    90 DRAM.sub.-- data 20!                                                                  38                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 5!                                                                   193                                                                              data 1!                                                                              141                                                                              out.sub.-- data 7!                                                                    89 nc      37                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 6!                                                                   192                                                                              data 0!                                                                              140                                                                              out.sub.-- data 8!                                                                    88 GND     36                                    nc      191                                                                              nc     139                                                                              out.sub.-- extn                                                                       87 DRAM.sub.-- data 21!                                                                  35                                    GND     190                                                                              VDD    138                                                                              GND     86 nc      34                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 7!                                                                   189                                                                              nc     137                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 0!                                                                   85 DRAM.sub.-- data 22!                                                                  33                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 8!                                                                   188                                                                              addr 6!                                                                              136                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 1!                                                                   84 VDD     32                                    VDD     187                                                                              addr 5!                                                                              135                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 2!                                                                   83 DRAM.sub.-- data 23!                                                                  31                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 9!                                                                   186                                                                              GND    134                                                                              VDD     82 DRAM.sub.-- data 24!                                                                  30                                    nc      185                                                                              addr 4!                                                                              133                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 3!                                                                   81 nc      29                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 10!                                                                  184                                                                              addr 3!                                                                              132                                                                              nc      80 GND     28                                    GND     183                                                                              addr 2!                                                                              131                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 4!                                                                   79 DRAM.sub.-- data 25!                                                                  27                                    coded.sub.-- clock                                                                    182                                                                              addr 1!                                                                              130                                                                              GND     78 nc      26                                    VDD     181                                                                              VDD    129                                                                              nc      77 DRAM.sub.-- data 26!                                                                  25                                    test pin                                                                              180                                                                              addr 0!                                                                              128                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 5!                                                                   76 nc      24                                    test pin                                                                              179                                                                              enable 0!                                                                            127                                                                              nc      75 VDD     23                                    test pin                                                                              178                                                                              enable 1!                                                                            126                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 6!                                                                   74 DRAM.sub.-- data 27!                                                                  22                                    decoder.sub.-- clock                                                                  177                                                                              rw     125                                                                              VDD     73 nc      21                                    byte.sub.-- mode                                                                      176                                                                              GND    124                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 7!                                                                   72 DRAM.sub.-- data 28!                                                                  20                                    GND     175                                                                              test pin                                                                             123                                                                              nc      71 DRAM.sub.-- data 29!                                                                  19                                    coded.sub.-- extn                                                                     174                                                                              test pin                                                                             122                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 8!                                                                   70 GND     18                                    nc      173                                                                              trst   121                                                                              GND     69 DRAM.sub.-- data 30!                                                                  17                                    coded.sub.-- data 7!                                                                  172                                                                              tdo    120                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 9!                                                                   68 nc      16                                    coded.sub.-- data 6!                                                                  171                                                                              nc     119                                                                              nc      67 DRAM.sub.-- data 31!                                                                  15                                    VDD     170                                                                              VDD    118                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 10!                                                                  66 VDD     14                                    coded.sub.-- data 5!                                                                  169                                                                              tms    117                                                                              VDD     65 nc      13                                    coded.sub.-- data 4!                                                                  168                                                                              tdi    116                                                                              nc      64 WE      12                                    coded.sub.-- data 3!                                                                  167                                                                              tck    115                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 11!                                                                  63 RAS     11                                    coded.sub.-- data 2!                                                                  166                                                                              test pin                                                                             114                                                                              nc      62 nc      10                                    GND     165                                                                              GND    113                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 12!                                                                  61 GND     9                                     coded.sub.-- data 1!                                                                  164                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- enable                                                                   112                                                                              GND     60 CAS 0!  8                                     coded.sub.-- data 0!                                                                  163                                                                              test pin                                                                             111                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 13!                                                                  59 nc      7                                     coded.sub.-- valid                                                                    162                                                                              test pin                                                                             110                                                                              nc      58 CAS 1!  6                                     coded.sub.-- accept                                                                   161                                                                              test pin                                                                             109                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 14!                                                                  57 VDD     5                                     reset   160                                                                              nc     108                                                                              VDD     66 CAS 2!  4                                     VDD     159                                                                              nc     107                                                                              nc      55 nc      3                                     nc      158                                                                              nc     106                                                                              nc      54 CAS 3!  2                                     nc      157                                                                              nc     105                                                                              nc      53 nc      1                                     __________________________________________________________________________

A.9.1.1 "nc" no connect pins

The pins labeled nc in Table A.9.3 are not currently, used these pinsshould be left unconnected.

A.9.1.2 V_(DD), and GND pins

As will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art, all theV_(DD) and GND pins provided should be connected to the appropriatepower supply. Correct device operation cannot be ensured unless all theV_(DD) and GND pins are correctly used.

A.9.1.3 Test pin connections for normal operation

Nine pins on the Spatial Decoder are reserved for internal test use.

A.9.1.4 JTAG pins for normal operation

See section A.8.1.

A.9.2 Spatial Decoder memory map

                  TABLE A.9.5                                                     ______________________________________                                        Overview of Spatial Decoder memory map                                        Addr. (hex)                                                                            Register Name          See table                                     ______________________________________                                        0x00 ... 0x03                                                                          Interrupt service area A.9.6                                         0x04 ... 0x07                                                                          Input circuit registers                                                                              A.9.7                                         0x08 ... 0x0F                                                                          Start code detector registers                                        0x10 ... 0x15                                                                          Buffer start-up control registers                                                                    A.9.8                                         0x16 ... 0x17                                                                          Not used                                                             0x18 ... 0x23                                                                          DRAM interface configuration registers                                                               A.9.9                                         0x24 ... 0x26                                                                          Buffer manager access and keyhole registers                                                          A.9.10                                        0x27     Not used                                                             0x28 ... 0x2F                                                                          Huffman decoder registers                                                                            A.9.13                                        0x30 ... 0x39                                                                          Inverse quantiser registers                                                                          A.9.14                                        0x3A ... 0x3B                                                                          Not used                                                             0x3C     Reserved                                                             0x30 ... 0x3F                                                                          Not used                                                             0x40 ... 0x7F                                                                          Test registers                                                       ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.9.6                                                     ______________________________________                                        Interrupt service area registers                                              Addr. Bit                                                                     (hex) num.   Register Name                                                    ______________________________________                                        0x00  7      chip.sub.-- event CED.sub.-- EVENT.sub.-- 0                            6      not used                                                               5      illegal.sub.-- length.sub.-- count.sub.-- event                               SCD.sub.-- ILLEGAL.sub.-- LENGTH.sub.-- COUNT                          4      reserved may read 1 or 0                                                      SCD.sub.-- JPEG.sub.-- OVERLAPPING.sub.-- START                        3      overlapping.sub.-- start.sub.-- event                                         SCD.sub.-- NON.sub.-- JPEG.sub.-- OVERLAPPING.sub.-- START             2      unrecognised.sub.-- start.sub.-- event                                        SCD.sub.-- UNRECOGNISED.sub.-- START                                   1      stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture.sub.-- event                                 SCD.sub.-- STOP.sub.-- AFTER.sub.-- PICTURE                            0      non.sub.-- aligned.sub.-- start.sub.-- event                                  SCD.sub.-- NON.sub.-- ALIGNED.sub.-- START                       0x01  7      chip.sub.-- mask CED.sub.-- MASK.sub.-- 0                              6      not used                                                               5      illegal.sub.-- length.sub.-- count.sub.-- mask                         4      reserved write 0 to this location                                             SCD.sub.-- JPEG.sub.-- OVERLAPPING.sub.-- START                        3      non.sub.-- jpeg.sub.-- overlapping.sub.-- start.sub.-- mask            2      unrecognised.sub.-- start.sub.-- mask                                  1      stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture.sub.-- mask                           0      non.sub.-- aligned.sub.-- start.sub.-- mask                      0x02  7      idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- few.sub.-- event IDCT.sub.-- DEFF.sub.                 -- NUM                                                                 6      idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- many.sub.-- event IDCT.sub.--                          SUPER.sub.-- NUM                                                       5      accept.sub.-- enable.sub.-- event BS.sub.-- STREAM.sub.--                     END.sub.-- EVENT                                                       4      target.sub.-- met.sub.-- event BS.sub.-- TARGET.sub.--                        MET.sub.-- EVENT                                                       3      counter.sub.-- flushed.sub.-- too.sub.-- early.sub.-- event                   BS.sub.-- FLUSH.sub.-- BEFORE.sub.-- TARGET.sub.-- MET.sub.--                  EVENT                                                                 2      counter.sub.-- flushed.sub.-- event BS.sub.-- FLUSH.sub.--                    EVENT                                                                  1      parser.sub.-- event DEMUX.sub.-- EVENT                                 0      huffman.sub.-- event HUFFMAN.sub.-- EVENT                        0x03  7      idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- few.sub.-- mask                                 6      idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- many.sub.-- mask                                5      accept.sub.-- enable.sub.-- mask                                       4      target.sub.-- met.sub.-- mask                                          3      counter.sub.-- flushed.sub.-- too.sub.-- early.sub.-- mask             2      counter.sub.-- flushed.sub.-- mask                                     1      parser.sub.-- mask                                                     0      huffman.sub.-- mask                                              ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.9.7                                                     ______________________________________                                        Start code detector and input circuit registers                               Addr   Bit                                                                    (hex)  num.       Register Name                                               ______________________________________                                        0x04   7          coded.sub.-- busy                                                  6          enable.sub.-- mpi.sub.-- input                                     5          coded.sub.-- extn                                                  4:0        not used                                                    0x05   7:0        coded.sub.-- data                                           0x06   7:0        not used                                                    0x07   7:0        not used                                                    0x08   7:1        not used                                                           0          start.sub.-- code.sub.-- detector.sub.-- access                               also input.sub.-- circuit.sub.-- access                                       CED.sub.-- SCD.sub.-- ACCESS                                0x09   7:4        not used CED.sub.-- SCD.sub.-- CONTROL                             3          stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture                                   2          discard.sub.-- extension.sub.-- data                               1          discard.sub.-- user.sub.-- data                                    0          Ignore.sub.-- non.sub.-- aligned                            0x0A   7:5        not used CED.sub.-- SCD.sub.-- STATUS                              4          insert.sub.-- sequence.sub.-- start                                3          discard.sub.-- all.sub.-- data                                     2:0        start.sub.-- code.sub.-- search                             0x0B   7:0        Test register length.sub.-- count                           0x0C   7:0                                                                    0x0D   7:2        not used                                                           1:0        start.sub.-- code.sub.-- detector.sub.-- coding.sub.--                        standard                                                    0x0E   7:0        start.sub.-- value                                          0x0F   7:4        not used                                                           3:0        picture.sub.-- number                                       ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.9.8                                                     ______________________________________                                        Buffer start-up registers                                                     Addr. Bit                                                                     (hex) num.    Register Name                                                   ______________________________________                                        0x10  7:1     not used                                                              0       startup.sub.-- access CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- ACCESS               0x22  7:3     not used                                                              2:0     bit.sub.-- count.sub.-- prescale CED.sub.-- BS.sub.--                         PRESCALE                                                        0x12  7:0     bit.sub.-- count.sub.-- target CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- TARGET      Ox13  7:0     bit.sub.-- count CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- COUNT                     0x14  7:1     not used                                                              0       offchip.sub.-- queue CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- QUEUE                 0x15  7:1     not used                                                              0       enable.sub.-- stream CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- ENABLE.sub.--                       NXT.sub.-- STM                                                  ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.9.9                                                     ______________________________________                                        DRAM interface configuration registers                                        Addr.  Bit                                                                    (hex)  num.      Register Name                                                ______________________________________                                        0x18   7:5       not used                                                     0x18   4:0       page.sub.-- start.sub.-- length                                               CED.sub.-- IT.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- START.sub.-- LENGTH         0x19   7:4       not used                                                            3:0       read.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length                              0x1A   7:4       not used                                                            3:0       write.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length                             0x1B   7:4       not used                                                            3:0       refresh.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length                           0x1C   7:4       not used                                                            3:0       CAS.sub.-- falling                                           0x1D   7:4       not used                                                            3:0       RAS.sub.-- falling                                           0x1E   7:1       not used                                                            0         interface.sub.-- timing.sub.-- access                        0x1F   7:0       refresh.sub.-- interval                                      0x20   7         not used                                                            6:4       DRAM.sub.-- addr.sub.-- strength 2:0!                               3:1       CAS.sub.-- strength 2:0!                                            0         RAS.sub.-- strength 2!                                       0x21   7:6       RAS.sub.-- strength 1:0!                                            5:3       OEWE.sub.-- strength 2:0!                                           2:0       DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- strength 2:0!                        0x22   7         ACCESS bit for pad strength etc. ? not                                        usedCED.sub.-- DRAM.sub.-- CONFIGURE                                6         zero.sub.-- buffers                                                 5         DRAM.sub.-- enable                                                  4         no.sub.-- refresh                                                   3:2       row.sub.-- address.sub.-- bits 1:0!                                 1:0       DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- width 1:0!                           0x23   7:0       Test registers CED.sub.-- PLL.sub.-- RES.sub.-- CONFIG       ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.9.10                                                    ______________________________________                                        Buffer manager access and keyhole registers                                   Addr.  Bit                                                                    (hex)  num.        Register Name                                              ______________________________________                                        0x24   7:1         not used                                                          0           buffer.sub.-- manager.sub.-- access                        0x25   7:6         not used                                                          5:0         buffer.sub.-- manager.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- address        0x26   7:0         buffer.sub.-- manager.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- data           ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.9.11                                                    ______________________________________                                        Buffer manager extended address space                                         Addr.    Bit                                                                  (hex)    num.            Register Name                                        ______________________________________                                        0x00     7:0             not used                                             0x01     7:2                                                                           1:0             cdb.sub.-- base                                      0x02     7:0                                                                  0x03     7:0                                                                  0x04     7:0             not used                                             0x05     7:2                                                                           1:0             cdb.sub.-- length                                    0x06     7:0                                                                  0x07     7:0                                                                  0x08     7:0             not used                                             0x09     7:0             cdb.sub.-- read                                      0x0A     7:0                                                                  0x0B     7:0                                                                  0x0C     7:0             not used                                             0x0D     7:0             cdb.sub.-- number                                    0x0E     7:0                                                                  0x0F     7:0                                                                  0x10     7:0             not used                                             0x11     7:0             tb.sub.-- base                                       0x12     7:0                                                                  0x13     7:0                                                                  0x14     7:0             not used                                             0x15     7:0             tb.sub.-- length                                     0x16     7:0                                                                  0x17     7:0                                                                  0x18     7:0             not used                                             0x19     7:0             tb.sub.-- read                                       0x1A     7:0                                                                  0x1B     7:0                                                                  0x1C     7:0             not used                                             0x1D     7:0             tb.sub.-- number                                     0x1E     7:0                                                                  0x1F     7:0                                                                  0x20     7:0             not used                                             0x21     7:0             buffer.sub.-- limit                                  0x22     7:0                                                                  0x23     7:0                                                                  0x24     7:4             not used                                                      3               cdb.sub.-- full                                               2               cdb.sub.-- empty                                              1               tb.sub.-- full                                                0               tb.sub.-- empty                                      ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.9.12                                                    ______________________________________                                        Video demux registers                                                         Addr. Bit                                                                     (hex) num.   Register Name                                                    ______________________________________                                        0x28  7      demux.sub.-- access CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- CTRL 7!                        6:4    huffman.sub.-- error.sub.-- code 2:0! CED.sub.-- H.sub.--                     CTRL 6:4!                                                              3:0    private huffman control bits  3! selects special                              CBP,  2! selects 4/8 bit fixed length CBP                        0x29  7:0    parser.sub.-- error.sub.-- code CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- DMUX.sub.                 -- ERR                                                           0x2A  7:4    not used                                                               3:0    demux.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- address                              0x2B  7:0    CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEYHOLE.sub.-- ADDR                          0x2C  7:0    demux.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- data CED.sub.-- H.sub.--                          KEYHOLE                                                          0x2D  7      dummy.sub.-- last.sub.-- picture CED.sub.-- H.sub.--                          ALU.sub.-- REG0,                                                              r.sub.-- dummy.sub.-- last.sub.-- frame.sub.-- bit                     6      field.sub.-- info CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- ALU.sub.-- REG0,                        r.sub.-- field.sub.-- info.sub.-- bit                                  5:1    not used                                                               0      continue CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- ALU.sub.-- REG0, r.sub.--                        continue.sub.-- bit                                              0x2E  7:0    rom.sub.-- revision CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- ALU.sub.-- REG1          0X2F  7:0    private register                                                 0x2F  7      CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- TRACE.sub.-- EVENT write 1 to single                      step, one                                                                     will be read when the step has been completed                          6      CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- TRACE.sub.-- MASK set to one to enter                     single                                                                        step mode                                                              5      CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- TRACE.sub.-- RST partial reset when                       sequenced                                                                     1,0                                                                    4:0    not used                                                         ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.9.13                                                    ______________________________________                                        Video demux extended address space                                            Addr. Bit                                                                     (hex) num.   Register Name                                                    ______________________________________                                        0x00  7:0    not used                                                         0x0F                                                                          0x10  7:0    horiz.sub.-- pels r.sub.-- horiz.sub.-- pels                     0x11  7:0                                                                     0x12  7:0    vert.sub.-- pels r.sub.-- vert.sub.-- pels                       0x13  7:0                                                                     0x14  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    buffer.sub.-- size r.sub.-- buffer.sub.-- size                   0x15  7:0                                                                     0x16  7:4    not used                                                               3:0    pel.sub.-- aspect r.sub.-- pel.sub.-- aspect                     0x17  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    bit.sub.-- rate r.sub.-- bit.sub.-- rate                         0x18  7:0                                                                     0x19  7:0                                                                     0x1A  7:4    not used                                                               3:0    pic.sub.-- rate r.sub.-- pic.sub.-- rate                         0x1B  7:1    not used                                                               0      constrained r.sub.-- constrained                                 0x1C  7:0    picture.sub.-- type                                              0x1D  7:0    h261.sub.-- pic.sub.-- type                                      0x1E  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    broken.sub.-- closed                                             0x1F  7:5    not used                                                               4:0    prediction.sub.-- mode                                           0x20  7:0    vbv.sub.-- delay                                                 0x21  7:0                                                                     0x22  7:0    private register MPEG full.sub.-- pel.sub.-- fwd, JPEG                        pending.sub.-- frame.sub.-- change                               0x23  7:0    private register MPEG full.sub.-- pel.sub.-- bwd, JPEG                        restart.sub.-- index                                             0x24  7:0    private register horiz.sub.-- mb.sub.-- copy                     0x25  7:0    pic.sub.-- number                                                0x26  7:1    not used                                                               1:0    max.sub.-- h                                                     0x27  7:1    not used                                                               1:0    max.sub.-- v                                                     0x28  7:0    private register scratch1                                        0x29  7:0    private register scratch2                                        0x2A  7:0    private register scratch3                                        0x2B  7:0    Nf MPEG unused1, H261 ingob                                      0x2C  7:0    private register MPEG first.sub.-- group, JPEG first.sub.--                   scan                                                             0x2D  7:0    private register MPEG in.sub.-- picture                          0x2E  7      dummy.sub.-- last.sub.-- picture r.sub.-- rom.sub.--                          control                                                                6      field.sub.-- info                                                      5:1    not used                                                               0      continue                                                         0x2F  7:0    rom.sub.-- revision                                              0x30  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 0                                          0x31  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 1                                          0x32  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 2                                          0x33  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 3                                          0x34  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 0                                          0x35  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 1                                          0x36  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 2                                          0x37  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 3                                          0x38  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    tq.sub.-- 0 r.sub.-- tq.sub.-- 0                                 0x39  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    tq.sub.-- 1 r.sub.-- tq.sub.-- 1                                 0x3A  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    tq.sub.-- 2 r.sub.-- tq.sub.-- 2                                 0x3B  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    tq.sub.-- 3 r.sub.-- tq.sub.-- 3                                 0x3C  7:0    component.sub.-- name.sub.-- 0 r.sub.-- c.sub.-- 0               0x3D  7:0    component.sub.-- name.sub.-- 1 r.sub.-- c.sub.-- 1               0x3E  7:0    component.sub.-- name.sub.-- 2 r.sub.-- c.sub.-- 2               0x3F  7:0    component.sub.-- name.sub.-- 3 r.sub.-- c.sub.-- 3               0x40  7:0    private registers                                                0x63                                                                          0x40  7:0    r.sub.-- dc.sub.-- pred.sub.-- 0                                 0x41  7:0                                                                     0x42  7:0    r.sub.-- dc.sub.-- pred.sub.-- 1                                 0x43  7:0                                                                     0x44  7:0    r.sub.-- dc.sub.-- pred.sub.-- 2                                 0x45  7:0                                                                     0x46  7:0    r.sub.-- dc.sub.-- pred.sub.-- 3                                 0x47  7:0                                                                     0x48  7:0    not used                                                         0x4F                                                                          0x50  7:0    r.sub.-- prev.sub.-- mhf                                         0x51  7:0                                                                     0x52  7:0    r.sub.-- prev.sub.-- mvf                                         0x53  7:0                                                                     0x54  7:0    r.sub.-- prev.sub.-- mhb                                         0x55  7:0                                                                     0x56  7:0    r.sub.-- prev.sub.-- mvb                                         0x57  7:0                                                                     0x58  7:0    not used                                                         0x5F                                                                          0x60  7:0    r.sub.-- horiz.sub.-- mbcnt                                      0x61  7:0                                                                     0x62  7:0    r.sub.-- vert.sub.-- mbcnt                                       0x63  7:0                                                                     0x64  7:0    horiz.sub.-- macroblocks r.sub.-- horiz.sub.-- mbs               0x65  7:0                                                                     0x66  7:0    vert.sub.-- macroblocks r.sub.-- vert.sub.-- mbs                 0x67  7:0                                                                     0x68  7:0    private register r.sub.-- restart.sub.-- cnt                     0x69  7:0                                                                     0x6A  7:0    restart.sub.-- interval r.sub.-- restart.sub.-- int              0x6B  7:0                                                                     0x6C  7:0    private register r.sub.-- blk.sub.-- h.sub.-- cnt                0x6D  7:0    private register r.sub.-- blk.sub.-- v.sub.-- cnt                0x6E  7:0    private register r.sub.-- compid                                 0x6F  7:0    max.sub.-- component.sub.-- id r.sub.-- max.sub.-- compid        0x70  7:0    coding.sub.-- standard r.sub.-- coding.sub.-- std                0x71  7:0    private register r.sub.-- pattern                                0x72  7:0    private register r.sub.-- fwd.sub.-- r.sub.-- size               0x73  7:0    private register r.sub.-- bwd.sub.-- r.sub.-- size               0x74  7:0    not used                                                         0x77                                                                          0x78  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 0 r.sub.-- blk.sub.-- h.sub.-- 0          0x79  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 1 r.sub.-- blk.sub.-- h.sub.-- 1          0x7A  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 2 r.sub.-- blk.sub.-- h.sub.-- 2          0x7B  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 3 r.sub.-- blk.sub.-- h.sub.-- 3          0x7C  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 0 r.sub.-- blk.sub.-- v.sub.-- 0          0x7D  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 1 r.sub.-- blk.sub.-- v.sub.-- 1          0x7E  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 2 r.sub.-- blk.sub.-- v.sub.-- 2          0x7F  7:2    not used                                                               1:0    blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 3 r.sub.-- blk.sub.-- v.sub.-- 3          0x7F  7:0    not used                                                         0xFF                                                                          0x100 7:0    dc.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 0 15:0! CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEY.sub.--                  DC.sub.-- CPB0                                                   0x10F                                                                         0x110 7:0    dc.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 1 15:0! CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEY.sub.--                  DC.sub.-- CPB1                                                   0x11F                                                                         0x120 7:0    not used                                                         0x13F                                                                         0x140 7:0    ac.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 0 15:0! CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEY.sub.--                  AC.sub.-- CPB0                                                   0x14F                                                                         0x150 7:0    ac.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 1 15:0! CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEY.sub.--                  AC.sub.-- CPB1                                                   0x15F                                                                         0x160 7:0    not used                                                         0x17F                                                                         0x180 7:0    dc.sub.-- zssss.sub.-- 0 CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEY.sub.--                       ZSSSS.sub.-- INDEX0                                              0x181 7:0    dc.sub.-- zssss.sub.-- 1 CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEY.sub.--                       ZSSSS.sub.-- INDEX1                                              0x182 7:0    not used                                                         0x187                                                                         0x188 7:0    ac.sub.-- eob.sub.-- 0 CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEY.sub.--                         EOB.sub.-- INDEX0                                                0x189 7:0    ac.sub.-- eob.sub.-- 1 CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEY.sub.--                         EOB.sub.-- INDEX1                                                0x18A 7:0    not used                                                         0x18B                                                                         0x18C 7:0    ac.sub.-- zrl.sub.-- 0 CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEY.sub.--                         ZRL.sub.-- INDEX0                                                0x18D 7:0    ac.sub.-- zrl.sub.-- 1 CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEY.sub.--                         ZRL.sub.-- INDEX1                                                0x18E 7:0    not used                                                         0x1FF                                                                         0x200 7:0    ac.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 0 161:0! CED.sub.-- H.sub.--                         KEY.sub.-- AC.sub.-- ITOD.sub.-- 0                               0x2AF                                                                         0x2B0 7:0    dc.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 0 11:0! CED.sub.-- H.sub.--                          KEY.sub.-- DC.sub.-- ITOD.sub.-- 0                               0x2BF                                                                         0x2C0 7:0    not used                                                         0x2FF                                                                         0x300 7:0    ac.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 1 161:0! CED.sub.-- H.sub.--                         KEY.sub.-- AC.sub.-- ITOD.sub.-- 1                               0x3AF                                                                         0x3B0 7:0    dc.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 1 11:0! CED.sub.-- H.sub.--                          KEY.sub.-- DC.sub.-- ITOD.sub.-- 1                               0x3BF                                                                         0x3C0 7:0    not used                                                         0x7FF                                                                         0x800 7:0    private registers                                                0xAC                                                                          0x800 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- TCOEFF.sub.-- CPB                          0x80F                                                                         0x810 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- CBP.sub.-- CPB                             0x81F                                                                         0x820 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- MBA.sub.-- CPB                             0x82F                                                                         0x830 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- MVD.sub.-- CPB                             0x83F                                                                         0x840 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- MTYPE.sub.-- I.sub.-- CPB                  0x84F                                                                         0x850 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- MTYPE.sub.-- P.sub.-- CPB                  0x85F                                                                         0x860 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- MTYPE.sub.-- B.sub.-- CPB                  0x86F                                                                         0x870 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- MTYPE.sub.-- H.261.sub.-- CPB              0x88F                                                                         0x880 7:0    not used                                                         0x900                                                                         0x901 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- HDSTROM.sub.-- 0                           0x902 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- HDSTROM.sub.-- 1                           0x903 7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- HDSTRDM.sub.-- 2                           0x90F                                                                         0x910 7:0    not used                                                         0xAB                                                                          F                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- WORD.sub.-- 0                   0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- WORD.sub.-- 1                   1                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- WORD.sub.-- 2                   2                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- WORD.sub.-- 3                   3                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- WORD.sub.-- 4                   4                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- WORD.sub.-- 5                   5                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- WORD.sub.-- 6                   6                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- WORD.sub.-- 7                   7                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- WORD.sub.-- 8                   8                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- WORK.sub.-- 9                   9                                                                             0xAC  7:0    not used                                                         A                                                                             0xAC                                                                          B                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- AINCR                           C                                                                             0xAC  7:0                                                                     D                                                                             0xAC  7:0    CED.sub.-- KEY.sub.-- DMX.sub.-- CC                              E                                                                             0xAC  7:0                                                                     F                                                                             ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.9.14                                                    ______________________________________                                        Inverse quantiser register                                                    Addr.                                                                              Bit                                                                      (hex)                                                                              num.     Register Name                                                   ______________________________________                                             7:1      not used                                                        0x30 7:1      not used                                                             0        lq.sub.-- access                                                0x31 7:2      not used                                                             1:0      lq.sub.-- coding.sub.-- standard                                0x32 7:5      not used                                                             4:0      test register iq.sub.-- scale                                   0x33 7:2      not used                                                             1:0      test register iq.sub.-- component                               0x34 7:2      not used                                                             1:0      test register inverse.sub.-- quantiser.sub.-- prediction.sub                  .-- mode                                                        0x35 7:0      test register jpeg.sub.-- indirection                           0x36 7:2      not used                                                             1:0      test register mpeg.sub.-- indirection                           0x37 7:0      not used                                                        0x38 7:0      iq.sub.-- table.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- address                   0x39 7:0      iq.sub.-- table.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- data                      ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.9.15                                                    ______________________________________                                        Iq table extended address space                                               Addr. (hex)   Register Name                                                   ______________________________________                                        0x00:0x3F     JPEG inverse quantisation table 0                                             MPEG default intra table                                        0x40:0x7F     JPEG inverse quantisation table 1                                             MPEG default non-intra table                                    0x80:0xBF     JPEG inverse quantisation table 2                                             MPEG down-loaded intra table                                    0xC0:0xFF     JPEG inverse quantisation table 3                                             MPEG down-loaded non-intra table                                ______________________________________                                    

SECTION A.10 Coded data input

The system in accordance with the present invention, must know whatvideo standard is being input for processing. Thereafter, the system canaccept either pre-existing Tokens or raw byte data which is then placedinto Tokens by the Start Code Detector.

Consequently, coded data and configuration Tokens can be supplied to theSpatial Decoder via two routes:

The coded data input port

The microprocessor interface (MPI)

The choice over which route(s) to use will depend upon the applicationand system environment. For example, at low data rates it might bepossible to use a single microprocessor to both control the decoderchip-set and to do the system bitstream de-multiplexing. In this case,it may be possible to do the coded data input via the MPI.Alternatively, a high coded data rate might require that coded data besupplied via the coded data port.

In some applications it may be appropriate to employee a mixture of MPIand coded data port input.

A.10.1 The coded data port

                  TABLE A.10.1                                                    ______________________________________                                        Coded data port signals                                                       Signal    Input/                                                              Name      Output  Description                                                 ______________________________________                                        coded.sub.-- clock                                                                      Input   A clock operating at up to 30 MHz                                             controlling the operation of                                                  the input circuit.                                          coded.sub.-- data 7:0!                                                                  Input   The standard 11 wires required to implement                 coded.sub.-- extn                                                                       Input   a Token Port transferring 8 bit data                        coded.sub.-- valid                                                                      Input   values. See section A.4 for an                              coded.sub.-- accept                                                                     Output  electrical description of this interface.                                     Circuits off-chip must package the                                            coded data into Tokens.                                     byte.sub.-- mode                                                                        Input   When high this signal indicates that                                          information is to be transferred across                                       the coded data port in byte                                                   mode rather than Token mode.                                ______________________________________                                    

The coded data port in accordance with the present invention, can beoperated in two modes: Token mode and byte mode.

A.10.1.1 Token mode

In the present invention, if byte₋₋ mode is low, then the coded dataport operates as a Token Port in the normal way and accepts Tokens underthe control of coded₋₋ valid and coded₋₋ accept. See section A.4 fordetails of the electrical operation of this interface.

The signal byte₋₋ mode is sampled at the same time as data 7:0!, coded₋₋extn and coded₋₋ valid, i.e., on the rising edge of coded₋₋ clock.

A.10.1.2 Byte mode

If, however, byte₋₋ mode is high, then a byte of data is transferred ondata 7:0! under the control of the two wire interface control signalscoded₋₋ valid and coded₋₋ accept. In this case, coded₋₋ extn is ignored.The bytes are subsequently assembled on-chip into DATA Tokens until theinput mode is changed.

1) First word ("Head") of Token supplied in token mode.

2) Last word of Token supplied (coded₋₋ extn goes low).

3) First byte of data supplied in byte mode. A new DATA Token isautomatically created on-chip.

A.10.2 Supplying data via the MPI

Tokens can be supplied to the Spatial decoder via the MPI by accessingthe coded data input registers.

A.10.2.1 writing Tokens via the MPI

The coded data registers of the present invention are grouped into twobytes in the memory map to allow for efficient data transfer. The 8 databits, coded₋₋ data 7:0!, are in one location and the control registers,coded₋₋ busy, enable₋₋ mpi₋₋ input and coded₋₋ extn are in a secondlocation.

(See Table A9.7).

When configured for Token input via the MPI, the current Token isextended with the current value of coded₋₋ extn each time a value iswritten into coded₋₋ data 7:0!. Software is responsible for settingcoded₋₋ extn to 0 before the last word of any Token is written tocoded₋₋ data 7:0!.

For example, a DATA Token is started by writing 1 into coded₋₋ extn andthen 0x04 into coded₋₋ data 7:0!. The start of this new DATA Token thenpasses into the Spatial Decoder for processing.

Each time a new 8 bit value is written to coded₋₋ data 7:0!, the currentToken is extended. Coded₋₋ extn need only be accessed again whenterminating the current Token, e.g. to introduce another Token. The lastword of the current Token is indicated by writing 0 to coded₋₋ extnfollowed by writing the last word of the current Token into coded data7:0!.

                                      TABLE A.10.2                                __________________________________________________________________________    Coded data input registers                                                    Register Size/                                                                             Reset                                                            name     Dir.                                                                              state                                                                            Description                                                   __________________________________________________________________________    coded.sub.-- extn                                                                      1   x  Tokens can be supplied to the Spacial Decoder                          rw     via the MPI by writing to these registers.                    coded.sub.-- data 7:0!                                                                 8   x                                                                         w                                                                    coded.sub.-- busy                                                                      1   1  The state of this registers indicates if the                           r      Spatial Decoder is able to accept Tokens                                      written into coded.sub.-- data 7:0!.                                          The value 1 indicates that the interface is busy                              and unable to accept data. Behaviour is                                       undefined if the user tries to write to                                       coded.sub.-- data 7:0! when coded.sub.-- busy = 1.            enable.sub.-- mpi.sub.-- input                                                         1   0  The value in this function enable registers                            rw     controls whether coded data input to the Spatial                              Decoder is via the coded data port (0) or via the                             MPI (1).                                                      __________________________________________________________________________

Each time before writing to coded₋₋ data 7:0!, coded₋₋ busy should beinspected to see if the interface is ready to accept more data.

A.10.3 Switching between input modes

Provided suitable precautions are observed, it is possible todynamically change the data input mode. In general, the transfer of aToken via any one route should be completed before switching modes.

                                      TABLE A.10.3                                __________________________________________________________________________    Switching data input modes                                                    Previous mode                                                                        Next Mode                                                                           Behaviour                                                        __________________________________________________________________________    Byte   Token The on-chip circuitry will use the last byte supplied in                MPI input                                                                           byte mode as the last byte of the DATA Token that                             it was constructing (i.e. the extn bit will be set to 0).                     Before accepting the next Token.                                 Token  Byte  The off-chip circuitry supplying the Token in Token                           mode is responsible for completing the Token (i.e.                            with the extn bit of the last byte of information set to                      0) before selecting byte mode.                                          MPI input                                                                           Access to input via the MPI will not be granted (i.e.                         coded.sub.-- busy will remain set to 1) until the off-chip                    circuitry supplying the Token in Token mode has                               completed the Token (i.e. with the extn bit of the last                       byte of information set to 0).                                   MPI input                                                                            Byte  The control software must have completed the                            MPI input                                                                           Token (i.e. with the extn bit of the last byte of                             information set to 0) before enable.sub.-- mpi.sub.-- input                   s set                                                                         to 0.                                                            __________________________________________________________________________

The first byte supplied in byte mode causes a DATA Token header to begenerated on-chip. Any further bytes transferred in byte mode arethereafter appended to this DATA Token until the input mode changes.Recall, DATA Tokens can contain as many bits as are necessary.

The MPI register bit, coded busy, and the signal, coded₋₋ accept,indicate on which interface the Spatial decoder is willing to acceptdata. Correct observation of these signals ensures that no data is lost.

A.10.4 Rate of accepting coded data

In the present invention, the input circuit passes Tokens to the StartCode Detector (see section A.11). The Start code Detector analyses datain the DATA Tokens bit serially. The Detector's normal rate ofprocessing is one bit per clock cycle (of coded₋₋ clock). Accordingly,it will typically decode a byte of coded data every 8 cycles of coded₋₋clock. However, extra processing cycles are occasionally required, e.g.,when a non-DATA Token is supplied or when a start code is encountered inthe coded data. When such an event occurs, the Start Code Detector will,for a short time, be unable to accept more information.

After the Start Code Detector, data passes into a first logical codeddata buffer. If this buffer fills, then the Start Code Detector will beunable to accept more information.

Consequently, no more coded data (or other Tokens) will be accepted oneither the coded data port, or via the MPI, while the Start CodeDetector is unable to accept more information. This will be indicated bythe state of the signal coded₋₋ accept and the register coded₋₋ busy.

By using coded₋₋ accept and/or coded₋₋ busy, the user is guaranteed thatno coded information will be lost. However, as will be appreciated byone of ordinary skill in the art, the system must either be able tobuffer newly arriving coded data (or stop new data for arriving) if theSpatial decoder is unable to accept data.

A.10.5 Coded data clock

In accordance with the present invention, the coded data port, the inputcircuit and other functions in the Spatial Decoder are controlled bycoded₋₋ clock. Furthermore, this clock can be asynchronous to the maindecoder₋₋ clock. Data transfer is synchronized to decoder₋₋ clockon-chip.

SECTION A.11 Start code detector

A.11.1 Start codes

As is well known in the art, MPEG and H.261 coded video streams containidentifiable bit patterns called start codes. A similar function isserved in JPEG by marker codes. Start/marker codes identify significantparts of the syntax of the coded data stream. The analysis ofstart/marker codes performed by the Start Code Detector is the firststage in parsing the coded data. The Start Code Detector is the firstblock on the Spatial Decoder following the input circuit.

The start/marker code patterns are designed so that they can beidentified without decoding the entire bitstream. Thus, they can be usedin accordance with the present invention, to help with error recoveryand decoder start-up. The Start Code Detector provides facilities todetect errors in the coded data construction and to assist the start-upof the decoder.

A.11.2 Start code detector registers

As previously discussed, many of the Start Code Detector registers arein constant use by the Start Code Detector. So, accessing theseregisters will be unreliable if the Start Code Detector is processingdata. The user is responsible for ensuring that the Start Code Detectoris halted before accessing its registers.

The register start₋₋ code₋₋ detector₋₋ access is used to halt the StartCode Detector and so allow access to its registers. The Start CodeDetector will halt after it generates an interrupt.

There are further constraints on when the start code search and discardall data modes can be initiated. These are described in A.11.8 andA.11.5.1.

                                      TABLE A.11.1                                __________________________________________________________________________    Start code detector registers                                                 Register name    Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                       __________________________________________________________________________    start.sub.-- code.sub.-- detector.sub.-- access                                                1    0     Writing 1 to this register requests that the                                  start                                                              rw         code detector stop to allow access to its                                     registers. The user should wait until the                                     value 1                                                                       can be read from this register indicating                                     that                                                                          operation has stopped and access is                                           possible.                                         illegal.sub.-- length.sub.-- count.sub.-- event                                                1    0     An illegal length count event will occur if                        rw         while decoding JPEG data, a length count                                      field                                             illegal.sub.-- length.sub.-- count.sub.-- mask                                                 1    0     is found carrying a value less than 2. This                        rw         should only occur as the result of an error                                   in                                                                            the JPEG data.                                                                If the mask register is set to 1 then an                                      interrupt                                                                     can be generated and the start code detector                                  will stop. Behaviour following an error is                                    not                                                                           predictable if this error is suppressed                                       (mask                                                                         register set to 0). See A.11.4.1                  jpeg.sub.-- overlapping.sub.-- start.sub.-- event                                              1    0     If the coding standard is JPEG and the                             rw         sequence 0xFF 0xFF is found while looking                                     for                                               jpeg.sub.-- overlapping.sub.-- start.sub.-- mask                                               1    0     a marker code this event will occur.                               rw         This sequence is a legal stuffing sequence.                                   If the mask register is set to 1 then an                                      interrupt                                                                     can be generated and the start code detector                                  will stop. See A.11.4.2                           overlapping.sub.-- start.sub.-- event                                                          1    0     If the coding standard is MPEG or H.261 and                        rw         an overlapping start code is found while          overlapping.sub.-- start.sub.-- mask                                                           1    0     looking for a start code this event will                                      occur. If                                                          rw         the mask register is set to 1 then an                                         interrupt                                                                     can be generated and the start code                                           detector will stop. See A.11.4.2                  unrecognised.sub.-- start.sub.-- event                                                         1    0     If an unrecognised start code is encountered                       rw         this event will occur. If the mask register                                   is set                                            unrecognised.sub.-- start.sub.-- mask                                                          1    0     to 1 then an interrupt can be generated and                                   the                                                                rw         start code detector will stop.                    start.sub.-- value                                                                             8    x     The start code value read from the bitstream                                  s                                                                  ro         available in the register start.sub.-- value                                  while the                                                                     start code detector is halted. See A.11.4.3                                   During normal opeation start.sub.-- value                                     contains                                                                      the value of the most recently decoded                                        start/                                                                        marker code.                                                                  Only the 4 LSBs of start.sub.-- value are                                     used during                                                                   H.261 operation. The 4 MSBs will be zero.         stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture.sub.-- event                                                  1    0     If the register stop.sub.-- after.sub.--                                      picture is set to 1                                                rw         then a stop after picture event will be                                       generated                                         stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture.sub.-- mask                                                   1    0     after the end of a picture has passed                                         through                                                            rw         the start code detector.                          stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture                                                               1    0     If the mask register is set to 1 then an                                      interrupt                                                          rw         can be generated and the start code detector                                  will stop. See A.11.5.1                                                       stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture does not                                     reset to 0 after                                                              the end of a picture has been detected so                                     should be cleared directly.                       non.sub.-- aligned.sub.-- start.sub.-- event                                                   1    0     When ignore.sub.-- non.sub.-- aligned is set                                  to 1, start                                                        rw         codes that are not byte aligned are ignored       non.sub.-- aligned.sub.-- start.sub.-- mask                                                    1    0     (treated as normal data).                                          rw         When ignore.sub.-- non.sub.-- aligned is set                                  to 0, H.261                                       ignore.sub.-- non.sub.-- aligned                                                               1    0     and MPEG start codes will be detected                              rw         regardless of byte alignment and the non-                                     aligned start event will be generated.                                        If the mask register is set to 1 then the                                     event                                                                         will cause an interrupt and the start code                                    detector will stop. See A.11.6                                                If the coding standard is configured as JPEG                                  ignore.sub.-- non.sub.-- aligned is ignored                                   and the non-                                                                  aligned start event will never be generated.      discard.sub.-- extension.sub.-- data                                                           1    1     When these registers are set to 1 extension                                   or                                                                 rw         user data that cannot be decoded by the           discard.sub.-- user.sub.-- data                                                                1    1     Spatial Decoder is discarded by the start                                     code                                                               rw         detector. See A.11.3.3                            discard.sub.-- all.sub.-- data                                                                 1    0     When set to 1 all data and Tokens are                              rw         discarded by the start code detector. This                                    continues until a FLUSH Token is supplied or                                  the register is set to 0 directly.                                            The FLUSH Token that resets this register is                                  discarded and not output by the start code                                    detector. See A.11.5..sup.†                insert.sub.-- sequence.sub.-- start                                                            1    1     See A.11.7                                                         rw                                                           start.sub.-- code.sub.-- search                                                                3    5     When this register is set to 0 the start                                      code                                                               rw         detector operates normally. When set to a                                     higher value the start code detector                                          discards                                                                      data until the specified type of start code                                   is                                                                            detected. When the specified start code s                                     detected the register is set to 0 and normal                                  operation follows. See A.11.8                     start.sub.-- code.sub.-- detector.sub.-- coding.sub.-- standard                                2    0     This register configures the coding standard                       rw         used by the start code detector. The                                          register                                                                      can be loaded directly or by using a                                          CODING.sub.-- STANDARD Token.                                                 Whenever the start code detector generates a                                  CODING.sub.-- STANDARD Token (see                                             A.11.7.4) it carries its current                                              coding standard configuration. This Token                                     will                                                                          then configure the coding standard used by                                    all                                                                           other parts of the decoded chip-set. See                                      A.21.1                                                                        and A.11.7                                        picture.sub.-- number                                                                          4    0     Each time the start coded detector detects a                       rw         picture start code in the data stream for                                     the                                                                           H.261 or JPEG equivalent) a                                                   PICTURE.sub.-- START Token is generated                                       which carries the current value of                                            picture.sub.-- number. This register then                                     increments.                                       __________________________________________________________________________

                  TABLE A.11.2                                                    ______________________________________                                        Start code detector test registers                                            Register Size/  Reset                                                         name     Dir.   State  Description                                            ______________________________________                                        length.sub.-- count                                                                    16     0      This register contains the current value of                     r0            the JPEG length count. This register is                                       modified under the control of the coded                                       data clock and should only be read via                                        the MPI when the start code detector                                          is stopped.                                            ______________________________________                                    

A.11.3 Conversion of start codes to Tokens

In normal operation the function of the Start Code Detector is toidentify start codes in the data stream and to then convert them to theappropriate start code Token. In the simplest case, data is supplied tothe Start code Detector in a single long DATA Token. The output of theStart Code Detector is a number of shorter DATA Tokens interleaved withstart code Tokens.

Alternatively, in accordance with the present invention, the input datato the Start Code Detector could be divided up into a number of shorterDATA Tokens. There is no restriction on how the coded data is dividedinto DATA Tokens other than that each DATA Token must contain 8×n bitswhere n is an integer.

Other Tokens can be supplied directly to the input of the Start CodeDetector. In this case, the Tokens are passed through the Start CodeDetector with no processing to other stages of the Spatial Decoder.These Tokens can only be inserted just before the location of a startcode in the coded data.

A.11.3.1 Start code formats

Three different start code formats are recognized by the Start CodeDetector of the present invention. This is configured via the register,start₋₋ code₋₋ detector₋₋ coding₋₋ standard.

                  TABLE A.11.3                                                    ______________________________________                                        Start code formats                                                            Coding Standard                                                                          Start Code Pattern (hex)                                                                     Size of start code value                            ______________________________________                                        MPEG       0x00 0x00 0x01 <value>                                                                       8 bit                                               JPEG       0xFF <value>   8 bit                                               H.261      0x00 0x01 <value>                                                                            4 bit                                               ______________________________________                                    

A.11.3.2 Start code Token equivalents

Having detected a start code, the Start Code Detector studies the valueassociated with the start code and generates an appropriate Token. Ingeneral, the Tokens are named after the relevant MPEG syntax. However,one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the Tokens canfollow additional naming formats. The coding standard currently selectedconfigures the relationship between start code value and the Tokengenerated. This relationship is shown in Table A.11.4.

                  TABLE A.11.4                                                    ______________________________________                                        Tokens from start code values                                                            Start Code Value                                                   Start code   MPEG     H.261    JPEG   JPEG                                    Token generated                                                                            (hex)    (hex)    (hex)  (name)                                  ______________________________________                                        PICTURE.sub.-- START                                                                       0x00     0x00     0xDA   SOS                                     SLICE.sub.-- START.sup.a                                                                   0x01 to  0x01 to  0xD0 to                                                                              RST.sub.0 to                                         0xAF     0x0C     0xD7   RST.sub.3                               SEQUENCE.sub.-- START                                                                      0xB3              0xD8   SOI                                     SEQUENCE.sub.-- END                                                                        0xB7              0xD9   EOI                                     GROUP.sub.-- START                                                                         0xB8              0xC0   SOF.sub.0.sup.b                         USER.sub.-- DATA                                                                           0xB2              0xE0 to                                                                              APP.sub.0 to                                                           0xEF   APP.sub.F                                                              0xFE   COM                                     EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA                                                                      0xB5              0xC8   JPG                                                                    0xF0 to                                                                              JPG.sub.0 to                                                           0xFD   JPG.sub.D                                                              0x02 to                                                                              RES                                                                    0xBF                                                                          0xC1 to                                                                              SOF.sub.1 to                                                           0xCB   SOF.sub.11                                                             0xCC   DAC                                     DHT.sub.-- MARKER              0xC4   DHT                                     DNL.sub.-- MARKER              0xDC   DNL                                     DQT.sub.-- MARKER              0xDB   DQT                                     DRI.sub.-- MARKER              0xDD   DRI                                     ______________________________________                                         .sup.a. This Token contains an 8 bit data field which is loaded with a        value determined by the start code value.                                     .sup.b. Indicates start of baseline DCT encoded data.                    

A.11.3.3 Extended features of the coding standards

The coding standards provide a number of mechanisms to allow data to beembedded in the data stream whose use is not currently defined by thecoding standard. This might be application specific "user data" thatprovides extra facilities for a particular manufacturer. Alternatively,it might be "extension data". The coding standards authorities reservedthe right to use the extension data to add features to the codingstandard in the future.

Two distinct mechanisms are employed. JPEG precedes blocks of user andextension data with marker codes. However, H.261 inserts "extrainformation" indicated by an extra information bit in the coded data.MPEG can use both these techniques.

In accordance with the present invention, MPEG/JPEG blocks of user andextension data preceded by start/marker codes can be detected by theStart Code Detector. H.261/MPEG "extra information" is detected by theHuffman decoder of the present invention. See A.14.7, "Receiving ExtraInformation".

The registers, discard₋₋ extension₋₋ data and discard₋₋ user₋₋ data,allow the Start Code Detector to be configured to discard user data andextension data. If this data is not discarded at the Start Code Detectorit can be accessed when it reaches the Video Demux see A.14.6,"Receiving User and Extension data".

The Spatial Decoder of the present invention supports the baselinefeatures of JPEG. The non-baseline features of JPEG are viewed asextension data by the Spatial Decoder. So, all JPEG marker codes thatprecede data for non-baseline JPEG are treated as extension data.

A.11.3.4 JPEG Table definitions

JPEG supports down loaded Huffman and quantizer tables. In JPEG data,the definition of these tables is preceded by the marker codes DNL andDQT. The Start Code Detector generates the Tokens DHT₋₋ MARKER and DQT₋₋MARKER when these marker codes are detected. These Tokens indicate tothe Video Demux that the DATA Token which follows contains coded datadescribing Huffman or quantizer table (using the formats described inJPEG).

A.11.4 Error detection

The Start Code Detector can detect certain errors in the coded data andprovides some facilities to allow the decoder to recover after an erroris detected (see A.11.8, "Start code searching").

A.11.4.1 Illegal JPEG length count

Most JPEG marker codes have a 16 bit length count field associated withthem. This field indicates how much data is associated with this markercode. Length counts of 0 and 1 are illegal. An illegal length shouldonly occur following a data error. In the present invention, this willgenerate an interrupt if illegal₋₋ length₋₋ count₋₋ mask is set to 1.

Recovery from errors in JPEG data is likely to require additionalapplication specific data due to the difficulty of searching for startcodes in JPEG data (see A.11.8.1).

A.11.4.2 Overlapping start/marker codes

In the present invention, overlapping start codes should only occurfollowing a data error. An MPEG, byte aligned, overlapping start code isillustrated in FIG. 64. Here, the Start Code Detector first sees apattern that looks like a picture start code. Next the Start CodeDetector sees that this picture start code is overlapped with a groupstart. Accordingly, the Start Code Detector generates a overlappingstart event. Furthermore, the Start Code Detector will generate aninterrupt and stop if overlapping₋₋ start₋₋ mask is set to 1.

It is impossible to tell which of the two start codes is the correct oneand which was caused by a data error. However, the Start Code Detectorin accordance with the present invention, discards the first start codeand will proceed decoding the second start code "as if it is correct"after the overlapping start code event has been serviced. If there are aseries of overlapped start codes, the Start Code Detector will discardall but the last (generating an event for each overlapping start code).

Similar errors are possible in non byte-aligned systems (H.261 orpossibly MPEG). In this case, the state of ignore₋₋ non₋₋ aligned mustalso be considered. FIG. 65 illustrates an example where the first startcode found is byte aligned, but it overlaps a non-aligned start code. Ifignore₋₋ non₋₋ aligned is set to 1, then the second overlapping startcode will be treated as data by the Start Code Detector and, thereforeno overlapping start code event will occur. This conceals a possibledata communications error. If ignore₋₋ non₋₋ aligned is set to 0,however the Start Code Detector will see the second, non aligned, startcode and will see that it overlaps the first start code.

A.11.4.3 Unrecognized start codes

The Start Code Detector can generate an interrupt when an unrecognizedstart code is detected (if unrecognized₋₋ start₋₋ mask=1). The value ofthe start code that caused this interrupt can be read from the registerstart₋₋ value.

The start code value 0xB4 (sequence error) is used in MPEG decodersystems to indicate a channel or media error. For example, this startcode may be inserted into the data by an ECC circuit if it detects anerror that it was unable to correct.

A.11.4.4 Sequence of event generation

In the present invention, certain coded data patterns (probablyindicating an error condition) will cause more than one of the aboveerror conditions to occur within a short space of time. Consequently,the sequence in which the Start Code Detector examines the coded datafor error conditions is:

1) Non-aligned start codes

2) Overlapping start codes

3) Unrecognized start codes

Thus, if a non-aligned start code overlaps another, later, start code,the first event generated will be associated with the non-aligned startcode. After this event has been serviced, the Start Code Detector'soperation will proceed, detecting the overlapped start code a short timelater.

The Start Code Detector only attempts to recognize the start code afterall tests for non-aligned and overlapping start codes are complete.

A.11.5 Decoder start-up and shutdown

The Start Code Detector provides facilities to allow the currentdecoding task to be completed cleanly and for a new task to be started.

There are limitations on using these techniques with JPEG coded video asdata segments can contain values that emulate marker codes (seeA.11.8.1).

A.11.5.1 Clean end to decoding

The Start Code Detector can be configured to generate an interrupt andstop once the data for the current picture is complete. This is done bysetting stop₋₋ after₋₋ picture=1 and stop₋₋ after₋₋ picture₋₋ mask=1.

Once the end of a picture passes through the Start Code Detector, aFLUSH Token is generated (A.11.7.2), an interrupt is generated, and theStart Code Detector stops. Note that the picture just completed will bedecoded in the normal way. In some applications, however, it may beappropriate to detect the FLUSH arriving at the output of the decoderchip-set as this will indicate the end of the current video sequence.For example, the display could freeze on the last picture output.

When the Start Code Detector stops, there may be data from the "old"video sequence "trapped" in user implemented buffers between the mediaand the decode chips. Setting the register, discard₋₋ all₋₋ data, willcause the Spatial Decoder to consume and discard this data. This willcontinue until a FLUSH Token reaches the Start Code Detector ordiscard₋₋ all₋₋ data is reset via the microprocessor interface.

Having discarded any data from the "old" sequence the decoder is nowready to start work on a new sequence.

A.11.5.2 When to start discard all mode

The discard all mode will start immediately after a 1 is written intothe discard₋₋ all₋₋ data register. The result will be unpredictable ifthis is done when the Start Code Detector is actively processing data.

Discard all mode can be safely initiated after any of the Start CodeDetector events (non-aligned start event etc.) has generated aninterrupt.

A.11.5.3 Starting a new sequence

If it is not known where the start of a new coded video sequence iswithin some coded data, then the start code search mechanism can beused. This discards any unwanted data that precedes the start of thesequence. See A.11.8.

A.11.5.4 Jumping between sequences

This section Illustrates an application of some of the techniquesdescribed above. The objective is to "jump" from one part of one codedvideo sequence to another. In this example, the filing system onlyallows access to "blocks" of data. This block structure might be derivedfrom the sector size of a disc or a block error correction system. So,the position of entry and exit points in the coded video data may not berelated to the filing system block structure.

The stop₋₋ after₋₋ picture and discard₋₋ all₋₋ data mechanisms allowunwanted data from the old video sequence to be discarded. Inserting aFLUSH Token after the end of the last filing system data block resetsthe discard₋₋ all₋₋ data mode. The start code search mode can then beused to discard any data in the next data block that precedes a suitableentry point.

A.11.6 Byte alignment

As is well known in the art, the different coding schemes have quitedifferent views about byte alignment of start/marker codes in the datastream.

For example, H.261 views communications as being bit serial. Thus, thereis no concept of byte alignment of start codes. By setting ignore₋₋non₋₋ aligned=0 the Start Code Detector is able to detect start codeswith any bit alignment. By setting non-aligned₋₋ start₋₋ mask=0, thestart code non-alignment interrupt is suppressed.

In contrast, however, JPEG was designed for a computer environment wherebyte alignment is guaranteed. Therefore, marker codes should only bedetected when byte aligned. When the coding standard is configured asJPEG, the register ignore₋₋ non₋₋ aligned is ignored and the non-alignedstart event will never be generated. However, setting ignore₋₋ non₋₋aligned=1 and non₋₋ aligned₋₋ start₋₋ mask=0 is recommended to ensurecompatibility with future products.

MPEG, on the other hand, was designed to meet the needs of bothcommunications (bit serial) and computer (byte oriented) systems. Startcodes in MPEG data should normally be byte aligned. However, thestandard is designed to be allow bit serial searching for start codes(no MPEG bit pattern, with any bit alignment, will look like a startcode, unless it is a start code). So, an MPEG decoder can be designedthat will tolerate loss of byte alignment in serial data communications.

If a non-aligned start code is found, it will normally indicate that acommunication error has previously occurred. If the error is a"bit-slip" in a bit-serial communications system, then data containingthis error will have already been passed to the decoder. This error islikely to cause other errors within the decoder. However, new dataarriving at the Start Code Detector can continue to be decoded afterthis loss of byte alignment.

By setting ignore₋₋ non₋₋ aligned=0 and non₋₋ aligned₋₋ start₋₋ mask=1,an interrupt can be generated if a non-aligned start code is detected.The response will depend upon the application. All subsequent startcodes will be non-aligned (until byte alignment is restored).Accordingly, setting non₋₋ aligned₋₋ start₋₋ mask=0 after byte alignmenthas been lost may be appropriate.

                  TABLE A.11.5                                                    ______________________________________                                        Configuring for byte alignment                                                              MPEG    JPEG    H.261                                           ______________________________________                                        ignore.sub.-- non.sub.-- aligned                                                              0         1       0                                           non.sub.-- aligned.sub.-- start.sub.-- mask                                                   1         0       0                                           ______________________________________                                    

A.11.7 Automatic Token generation

In the present invention, most of the Tokens output by the Start CodeDetector directly reflect syntactic elements of the various picture andvideo coding standards. In addition to these "natural" Tokens,someuseful "invented" Tokens are generated. Examples of these proprietarytokens are PICTURE₋₋ END and CODING₋₋ STANDARD. Tokens are alsointroduced to remove some of the syntactic differences between thecoding standards and to "tidy up" under error conditions.

This automatic Token generation is done after the serial analysis of thecoded data (see FIG. 61, "The Start Code Detector"). Therefore thesystem responds equally to Tokens that have been supplied directly tothe input of the Spatial Decoder via the Start Code Detector and toTokens that have been generated by the Start Code Detector following thedetection of start codes in the coded data.

A.11.7.1 Indicating the end of a picture

In general, the coding standards don't explicitly signal the end of apicture. However, the Start Code Detector of the present inventiongenerates a PICTURE₋₋ END Token when it detects information thatindicates that the current picture has been completed.

The Tokens that cause PICTURE₋₋ END to be generated are: SEQUENCE₋₋START, GROUP₋₋ START, PICTURE₋₋ START, SEQUENCE₋₋ END and FLUSH.

A.11.7.2 Stop after picture end option

If the register stop₋₋ after₋₋ picture is set, then the Start CodeDetector will stop after a PICTURE₋₋ END Token has passed through.However, a FLUSH Token is inserted after the PICTURE₋₋ END to "push" thetail end of the coded data through the decoder and to reset the system.See A.11.5.1.

A.11.7.3 Introducing sequence start for H.261

H.261 does not have a syntactic element equivalent to sequence start(see Table A.11.4). If the register insert₋₋ sequence₋₋ start is set,then the Start Code Detector will ensure that there is one SEQUENCE₋₋START Token before the next PICTURE₋₋ START, i.e., if the Start CodeDetector does not see a SEQUENCE₋₋ START before a PICTURE₋₋ START, onewill be introduced. No SEQUENCE₋₋ START will be introduced if one isalready present.

This function should not be used with MPEG or JPEG.

A.11.7.4 Setting coding standard for each sequence

All SEQUENCE₋₋ START Tokens leaving the Start Code Detector are alwayspreceded by a CODING₋₋ STANDARD Token. This Token is loaded with theStart Code Detector's current coding standard. This sets the codingstandard for the entire decoder chip set for each new video sequence.

A.11.8 Start code searching

The Start Code Detector in accordance with the invention, can be used tosearch through a coded data stream for a specified type of start code.This allows the decoder to re-commence decoding from a specified levelwithin the syntax of some coded data (after discarding any data thatprecedes it). Applications for this include:

start-up of a decoder after jumping into a coded data stream at anunknown position (e.g., random accessing).

to seek to a known point in the data to assist recovery after a dataerror.

For example, Table A.11.6 shows the MPEG start codes searched, fordifferent configurations of start₋₋ code₋₋ search. The equivalent H.261and JPEG start/marker codes can be seen in Table A.11.4.

                  TABLE A.11.6                                                    ______________________________________                                        Start code search modes                                                       start.sub.-- code.sub.-- search                                                             Start codes searched for ...                                    ______________________________________                                        0.sup.a       Normal operation                                                1             Reserved (will behave as discard data)                          3             sequence start                                                  4             group or sequence start                                         5.sup.b       picture, group or sequence start                                6             slice, picture, group or sequence start                         7             the next start or marker code                                   ______________________________________                                         .sup.a. A FLUSH Token places the Start Code Detector in this search mode.     .sup.b. This is the default mode after reset.                            

When a non-zero value is written into the start₋₋ code₋₋ searchregister, the Start Code Detector will start to discard all incomingdata until the specified start code is detected. The start₋₋ code₋₋search register will then reset to 0 and normal operation will continue.

The start code search will start immediately after a non-zero value iswritten into the start₋₋ code₋₋ search register. The result will beunpredictable if this is done when the Start Code Detector is activelyprocessing data. So, before initiating a start code search, the StartCode Detector should be stopped so no data is being processed. The StartCode Detector is always in this condition if any of the Start CodeDetector events (non-aligned start event etc.) has just generated aninterrupt.

A.11.8.1 Limitations on using start code search with JPEG

Most JPEG marker codes have a 16 bit length count field associated withthem. This field indicates the length of a data segment associated withthe marker code. This segment may contain values that emulate markercodes. In normal operation, the Start Code Detector doesn't look forstart codes in these segments of data.

If a random access into some JPEG coded data "lands" in such a segment,the start code search mechanism cannot be used reliably. In general,JPEG coded video will require additional external information toidentify entry points for random access.

SECTION A.12 Decoder start-up control

A.12.1 Overview of decoder start-up

In a decoder, video display will normally be delayed a short time aftercoded data is first available. During this delay, coded data accumulatesin the buffers in the decoder. This pre-filling of the buffers ensuresthat the buffers never empty during decoding and, this, thereforeensures that the decoder is able to decode new pictures at regularintervals.

Generally, two facilities are required to correctly start-up a decoder.First, there must be a mechanism to measure how much data has beenprovided to the decoder. Second, there must be a mechanism to preventthe display of a new video stream. The Spatial Decoder of the inventionprovides a bit counter near its input to measure how much data hasarrived and an output gate near its output to prevent the start of newvideo stream being output.

There are three levels of complexity for the control of thesefacilities:

Output gate always open

Basic control

Advanced control

With the output gate always open, picture output will start as soon aspossible after coded data starts to arrive at the decoder. This isappropriate for still picture decoding or where display is being delayedby some other mechanism.

The difference between basic and advanced control relates to how manyshort video streams can be accommodated in the decoder's buffers at anytime. Basic control is sufficient for most applications. However,advanced control allows user software to help the decoder manage thestart-up of several very short video streams.

A.12.2 MPEG video buffer verifier

MPEG describes a "video buffer verifier" (VBV) for constant data ratesystems. Using the VBV information allows the decoder to pre-fill itsbuffers before it starts to display pictures. Again, this pre-fillingensures that the decoder's buffers never empty during decoding.

In summary, each MPEG picture carries a vbv₋₋ delay parameter. Thisparameter specifies how long the coded data buffer of an "ideal decoder"should fill with coded data before the first picture is decoded. Havingobserved the start-up delay for the first picture, the requirements ofall subsequent pictures will be met automatically.

MPEG, therefore, specifies the start-up requirements as a delay.However, in a constant bit rate system this delay can readily beconverted to a bit count. This is the basis on which the start-upcontrol of the Spatial Decoder of the present invention operates.

A.12.3 Definition of a stream

In this application, the term stream is used to avoid confusion with theMPEG term sequence. Stream therefore means a quantity of video data thatis "interesting" to an application. Hence, a stream could be many MPEGsequences or it could be a single picture.

The decoder start-up facilities described in this chapter relate tomeeting the VBV requirements of the first picture in a stream. Therequirements of subsequent pictures in that stream are metautomatically.

A.12.4 Start-up control registers

                                      TABLE A.12.1                                __________________________________________________________________________    Decoder start-up registers                                                    Register name          Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                 __________________________________________________________________________    startup.sub.-- access  1    0     Writing 1 to this register requests                                           that the bit                                CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- ACCESS                                                                          rw         counter and gate opening logic stop to                                        allow                                                                         access to their configuration                                                 registers.                                  bit.sub.-- count       8    0     This bit counter is incremented as                                            coded data                                  CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- COUNT                                                                           rw         leaves the start code detector. The                                           number of                                   bit.sub.-- count.sub.-- prescale                                                                     3    0     bits required to increment bit.sub.--                                         count once is                               CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- PRESCALE                                                                        rw         approx. 2.sup.(bit.sbsp.--.sup.count.sbs                                      p.--.sup.prescale+1) × 512.                                             The bit counter starts counting bits                                          after a                                                                       FLUSH Token passes through the bit                                            counter.                                                                      It is reset to zero and then stops                                            incrementing                                                                  after the bit count target has been                                           met.                                        bit.sub.-- count.sub.-- target                                                                       8    x     This register specifies the bit count                                         target. A                                   CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- TARGET                                                                          rw         target met event is generated whenever                                        the                                                                           following condition becomes true:                                             bit.sub.-- count >= bit.sub.-- count.sub                                      .-- target                                  target.sub.-- met.sub.-- event                                                                       1    0     When the bit count target is met this                                         event will                                  BS.sub.-- TARGET.sub.-- MET.sub.-- EVENT                                                             rw         be generated. If the mask register is                                         set to 1                                    target.sub.-- met.sub.-- mask                                                                        1    0     then an interrupt can be generated,                                           however,                                                           rw         the bit counter will NOT stop                                                 processing data.                                                              This event will occur when the bit                                            counter                                                                       increments to its target. It will also                                        occur if a                                                                    target value is written which is less                                         than or                                                                       equal to the current value of the bit                                         counter                                                                       Writing 0 to bit.sub.-- count.sub.--                                          target will always                                                            generate a target met event.                counter.sub.-- flushed.sub.-- event                                                                  1    0     When a FLUSH Token passes through the                                         bit                                         BS.sub.-- FLUSH.sub.-- EVENT                                                                         rw         count circuit this event will occur. If                                       the mask                                    counter.sub.-- flushed.sub.-- mask                                                                   1    0     register is set to 1 then an interrupt                                        can be                                                             rw         generated and the bit counter will                                            stop.                                       counter.sub.-- flushed.sub.-- too.sub.-- early.sub.-- event                                          1    0     If a FLUSH Token passes through the                                           bit                                         BS.sub.-- FLUSH.sub.-- BEFORE.sub.-- TARGET.sub.-- MET.sub.-- EVENT                                  rw         count circuit and the bit count target                                        has not                                     counter.sub.-- flushed.sub.-- too.sub.-- early.sub.-- mask                                           1    0     been met this event will occur. If the                                        mask                                                               rw         register is set to 1 then an interrupt                                        can be                                                                        generated and the bit counter will                                            stop.                                                                         See A.12.10                                 offchip.sub.-- queue   1    0     Setting this register to 1 configures                                         the gate                                    CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- QUEUE                                                                           rw         opening logic to require                                                      microprocessor                                                                support. When this register is set to 0                                       the                                                                           output gate control logic will                                                automatically                                                                 control the operation of the output                                           gate.                                                                         See sections A.12.5 and A.12.7.             enable.sub.-- stream   1    0     When an off-chip queue is in use                                              writing to                                  CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- ENABLE.sub.-- NXT.sub.-- STM                                                    rw         enable.sub.-- stream controls the                                             behaviour of the                                                              output gate after the end of a stream                                         passes                                                                        through it.                                                                   A one in this register enables the                                            output gate to                                                                open.                                                                         The register will be reset when an                                            accept.sub.-- enable interrupt is                                             generated.                                  accept.sub.-- enable.sub.-- event                                                                    1    0     This event indicates that a FLUSH Token                                       has                                         BS.sub.-- STREAM.sub.-- END.sub.-- EVENT                                                             rw         passed through the output gate (causing                                       it to                                       accept.sub.-- enable.sub.-- mask                                                                     1    0     close) and that an enable was available                                       to allow                                                           rw         the gate to open.                                                             If the mask register is set to 1 then                                         an interrupt                                                                  can be generated and the register                                             enable.sub.-- stream will be reset. See                                       A.12.7.1                                    __________________________________________________________________________

A.12.5 Output gate always open

The output gate can be configured to remain open. This configuration isappropriate where still pictures are being decoded, or when some othermechanism is available to manage the start-up of the video decoder.

The following configurations are required after reset (having gainedaccess to the start-up control logic by writing 1 to startup₋₋ access):

set offchip₋₋ queue=1

set enable₋₋ stream=1

ensure that all the decoder start-up event mask registers are set to 0disabling their interrupts

(this is the default state after reset).

(See A.12.7.1 for an explanation of why this holds the output gateopen.)

A.12.6 Basic operation

In the present invention, basic control of the start-up logic issufficient for the majority of MPEG video applications. In this mode,the bit counter communicates directly with the output gate. The outputgate will close automatically as the end of a video stream passesthrough it as indicated by a FLUSH Token. The gate will remain closeduntil an enable is provided by the bit counter circuitry when a streamhas attained its start-up bit count.

The following configurations are required after reset (having gainedaccess to the start-up control logic by writing 1 to startup access):

set bit₋₋ count₋₋ prescale approximately for the expected range of codeddata rates

set counter₋₋ flushed₋₋ too₋₋ early₋₋ mask=1 to enable this errorcondition to be detected

Two interrupt service routines are required:

video Demux service to obtain the value of

vbv₋₋ delay for the first picture in each new stream

Counter flushed too early service to react to this condition

The video demux (also known as the video parser) can generate aninterrupt when it decodes the vbv₋₋ delay for a new video stream (i.e.,the first picture to arrive at the video demux after a FLUSH). Theinterrupt service routine should compute an appropriate value for bit₋₋count₋₋ target and write it. When the bit counter reaches this target,it will insert an enable into a short queue between the bit counter andthe output gate. When the output gate opens it removes an enable fromthis queue.

A.12.6.1 starting a new stream shortly after another finishes

As an example, the MPEG stream which is about to finish is called A andthe MPEG stream about to start is called B. A FLUSH Token should beinserted after the end of A. This pushes the last of its coded datathrough the decoder and alerts the various sections of the decoder toexpect a new stream.

Normally, the bit counter will have reset to zero, A having already metits start-up conditions. After the FLUSH, the bit counter will startcounting the bits in stream B. When the Video Demux has decoded thevbv₋₋ delay from the first picture in stream B, an interrupt will begenerated allowing the bit counter to be configured.

As the FLUSH marking the end of stream A passes through the output gate,the gate will close. The gate will remain closed until B meets itsstart-up conditions. Depending on a number of factors such as: thestart-up delay for stream B and the depth of the buffers, it is possiblethat B will have already met its start-up conditions when the outputgate closes. In this case, there will be an enable waiting in the queueand the output gate will immediately open. Otherwise, stream B will haveto wait until it meets its start-up requirements.

A.12.6.2 A succession of short streams

The capacity of the queue located between the bit counter and the outputgate is sufficient to allow 3 separate video streams to have met theirstart-up conditions and to be waiting for a previous stream to finishbeing decoded. In the present invention, this situation will only occurif very short streams are being decoded or if the off-chip buffers arevery large as compared to the picture format being decoded).

In FIG. 69 stream A is being decoded and the output gate is open).Streams B and C have met their start-up conditions and are entirelycontained within the buffers managed by the Spatial Decoder. Stream D isstill arriving at the input of the Spatial Decoder.

Enables for streams B and C are in the queue. So, when stream A iscompleted B will be able to start immediately. Similarly C can followimmediately behind B.

If A is still passing through the output gate when D meets its start-uptarget an enable will be added to the queue, filling the queue. If noenables have been removed from the queue by the time the end of D passesthe bit counter (i.e., A is still passing through the output gate) nonew stream will be able to start through the bit counter. Therefore,coded data will be held up at the input until A completes and an enableis removed from the queue as the output gate is opened to allow B topass through.

A.12.7 Advanced operation

In accordance with the present invention, advanced control of thestart-up logic allows user software to infinitely extend the length ofthe enable queue described in A.12.6, "Basic operation". This level ofcontrol will only be required where the video decoder must accommodate aseries of short video streams longer than that described in A.12.6.2, "Asuccession of short streams".

In addition to the configuration required for Basic operation of thesystem, the following configurations are required after reset (havinggained access to the start-up control logic by writing 1 to start₋₋ upaccess):

set offchip₋₋ queue=1

set accept₋₋ enable₋₋ mask=1 to enable interrupts when an enable hasbeen removed from the queue

set target₋₋ met₋₋ mask=1 to enable interrupts when a stream's bit counttarget is met.

Two-additional interrupt service routines are required:

accept enable interrupt

Target met interrupt

When a target met interrupt occurs, the service routine should add anenable to its off-chip enable queue.

A.12.7.1 Output gate logic behavior

Writing a 1 to the enable₋₋ stream register loads an enable into a shortqueue.

When a FLUSH (marking the end of a stream) passes through the outputgate the gate will close. If there is an enable available at the end ofthe queue, the gate will open and generate an accept₋₋ enable₋₋ event.If accept₋₋ enable₋₋ mask is set to one, an interrupt can be generatedand an enable is removed from the end of the queue (the registerenable₋₋ stream is reset).

However, if accept₋₋ enable₋₋ mask is set to zero, no interrupt isgenerated following the accept₋₋ enable₋₋ event and the enable is NOTremoved from the end of the queue. This mechanism can be used to keepthe output gate open as described in A.12.5.

A.12.8 Bit counting

The bit counter starts counting after a FLUSH Token passes through it.This FLUSH Token indicates the end of the current video stream. In thisregard, the bit counter continues counting until it meets the bit counttarget set in the bit₋₋ count₋₋ target register. A target met event isthen generated and the bit counter resets to zero and waits for the nextFLUSH Token.

The bit counter will also stop incrementing when it reaches it maximumcount (255).

A.12.9 Bit count prescale

In the present invention,2.sup.(bit.sbsp.--^(count).sbsp.--^(prescale-1)) ×512 bits are requiredto increment the bit counter once. Furthermore, bit₋₋ count₋₋ prescaleis a 3 bit register than can hold a value between 0 and 7.

                  TABLE A.12.2                                                    ______________________________________                                        Example bit counter ranges                                                    n          Range (bits)                                                                              Resolution (bits)                                      ______________________________________                                        0          0 to 262144 1024                                                   1          0 to 524288 2048                                                   7           0 to 31457280                                                                            122880                                                 ______________________________________                                    

The bit count is approximate, as some elements of the video stream willalready have been Tokenized (e.g., the start codes) and, thereforeincludes non-data Tokens.

A.12.10 Counter flushed too early

If a FLUSH token arrives at the bit counter before the bit count targetis attained, an event is generated which can cause an interrupt (ifcounter₋₋ flushed₋₋ too₋₋ early₋₋ mask=1). If the interrupt isgenerated, then the bit counter circuit will stop, preventing furtherdata input. It is the responsibility of the user's software to decidewhen to open the output gate after this event has occurred. The outputgate can be made to open by writing 0 as the bit count target. Thesecircumstances should only arise when trying to decode video streams thatlast only a few pictures.

SECTION A.13 Buffer Management

The Spatial Decoder manages two logical data buffers: the coded databuffer (CDB) and the Token buffer (TB).

The CDB buffers coded data between the Start Code Detector and the inputof the Huffman decoder. This provides buffering for low data rate codedvideo data. The TB buffers data between the output of the Huffmandecoder and the input of the spatial video decoding circuits (inversemodeler, quantizer and DCT). This second logical buffer allowsprocessing time to include a spread so as to accommodate processingpictures having varying amounts of data.

Both buffers are physically held in a single off-chip DRAM array. Theaddresses for these buffers are generated by the buffer manager.

A.13.1 Buffer manager registers

The Spatial Decoder buffer manager is intended to be configured onceimmediately after the device is reset. In normal operation, there is norequirement to reconfigure the buffer manager.

After reset is removed from the Spatial Decoder, the buffer manager ishalted (with its access register, buffer₋₋ manager₋₋ access, set to 1)awaiting configuration. After the registers have been configured,buffer₋₋ manager₋₋ access can be set to 0 and decoding can commence.

Most of the registers used in the buffer manager cannot be accessedreliably while the buffer manager is operating. Before any of the buffermanager registers are accessed buffer₋₋ manager₋₋ access must be setto 1. This makes it essential to observe the protocol of waiting untilthe value 1 can be read from buffer₋₋ manager₋₋ access. The time takento obtain and release access should be taken into consideration whenpolling such registers as cdb₋₋ full and cdb₋₋ empty to monitor bufferconditions.

                                      TABLE A.13.1                                __________________________________________________________________________    Buffer manager registers                                                      Register name  Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                         __________________________________________________________________________    buffer.sub.-- manager.sub.-- access                                                          1    1     This access bit stops the operation of the                                    buffer manager so that its                                         rw         various registers can be accessed reliably. See                               A.6.4.1                                                                       Note: this access register is unusual as its                                  default state after reset is                                                  1. i.e. after reset the buffer manager is                                     halted awaiting configuration                                                 via the microprocessor interface.                   buffer.sub.-- manager.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- address                                          6    x     Keyhole access to the extended address space                                  used for the buffer                                                rw         manager registers shown below. See A.6.4.3 for                                more                                                buffer.sub.-- manager.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- data                                             8    x     information about accessing registers through a                               keyhole.                                                           rw                                                             buffer.sub.-- limit                                                                          18   x     This specifies the overall size of the DRAM                                   array attached to the                                              rw         Spatial Decoder. All buffer addresses are                                     calculated MOD this buffer                                                    size and so will wrap round within the DRAM                                   provided.                                           cdb.sub.-- base                                                                              18   x     These registers point to the base of the coded                                data (cdb) and Token                                tb.sub.-- base rw         (tb) buffers.                                       cdb.sub.-- length                                                                            18   x     These registers specify the length (i.e. size)                                of the coded data (cdb)                             tb.sub.-- length                                                                             rw         and Token (tb) buffers.                             cdb.sub.-- read                                                                              18   x     These registers hold an offset from the buffer                                base and indicate                                   tb.sub.-- read ro         where data will be read from next.                  cdb.sub.-- number                                                                            18   x     These registers show how much data is currently                               held in the buffers.                                tb.sub.-- number                                                                             ro                                                             cdb.sub.-- full                                                                              1    x     These registers will be set to 1 if the coded                                 data (cdb) or Token (tb)                            tb.sub.-- full ro         buffer fills.                                       cdb.sub.-- empty                                                                             1    x     These registers will be set to 1 if the coded                                 data (cdb) or Token (tb)                            tb.sub.-- empty                                                                              ro         buffer empties.                                     __________________________________________________________________________

A.13.1.1 Buffer manager pointer values

Typically, data is transferred between the Spatial Decoder and the off₋₋chip DRAM in 64 byte bursts (using the DRAM's page mode). All the bufferpointers and length registers refer to these 64 byte (512 bit) blocks ofdata. So, the buffer manager's 18 bit registers describe a 256 k blocklinear address space (i.e., 128 Mb).

The 64 byte transfer is independent of the width (8, 16 or 32 bits) ofthe DRAM interface.

A.13.2 Use of the buffer manager registers

The Spatial Decoder buffer manager has two sets of registers that definetwo similar buffers. The buffer limit register (buffer₋₋ limit) definesthe physical upper limit of the memory space. All addresses arecalculated modulo this number.

Within the limits of the available memory, the extent of each buffer isdefined by two registers: the buffer base cdb₋₋ base and tb₋₋ base) andthe buffer length (cdb₋₋ length and tb₋₋ length). All the registersdescribed thus far must be configured before the buffers can be used.

The current status of each buffer is visible in 4 registers. The bufferread register (cdb₋₋ read and tb₋₋ read) indicates an offset from thebuffer base from which data will be read next. The buffer numberregisters (cdb₋₋ number and tb₋₋ number) indicate the amount of datacurrently held by buffers. The status bits cdb₋₋ full, tb₋₋ full, cdb₋₋empty and tb₋₋ empty indicate if the buffers are full or empty.

As stated in A.13.1.1, the unit for all the above mentioned registers isa 512 bit block of data. Accordingly, the value read from cdb₋₋ numbershould be multiplied by 512 to obtain the number of bits in the codeddata suffer.

A.13.3 Zero buffers

Still picture applications (e.g., using JPEG) that do not have a"real-time" requirement will not need the large off-chip bufferssupported by the buffer manager. In this case, the DRAM interface can beconfigured (by writing 1 to the zero₋₋ buffers register) to ignore thebuffer manager to provide a 128 bit stream on-chip FIFO for the codeddata buffer and the Token buffers.

The zero buffers option may also be appropriate for applications whichoperate working at low data rates and with small picture formats.

Note

The zero₋₋ buffers register is part of the DRAM interface and,therefore, should be set only during the post-reset configuration of theDRAM interface.

A.13.4 Buffer operation

The data transfer through the buffers is controlled by a handshakeProtocol. Hence, it is guaranteed that no data errors will occur if thebuffer fills or empties. If a suffer is filled, then the circuits tryingto send data to the buffer will be halted until there is space in thebuffer. If a buffer continues to be full, more processing stages "upsteam" of the buffer will halt until the Spatial Decoder is unable toaccept data on its input port. Similarly, if a buffer empties, then thecircuits trying to remove data from the buffer will halt until data isavailable.

As described in A.13.2, the position and size of the coded data andToken buffer are specified by the buffer base and length registers. Theuser is responsible for configuring these registers and for ensuringthat there is no conflict in memory usage between the two buffers.

SECTION A.14 Video Demux

The Video Demux or Video parser as it is also called, completes the taskof converting coded data into Tokens started by the Start Code Detector.There are four main processing blocks in the Video Demux: Parser StateMachine, Huffman decoder (including an ITOD), Macroblock counter andALC.

The Parser or state machine follows the syntax of the coded video dataand instructs the other units. The Huffman decoder converts variablelength coded (VLC) data into Integers. The Macroblock counter keepstrack of which section of a picture is being decoded. The ALU performsthe necessary arithmetic calculations.

A.14.1 Video Demux registers

                                      TABLE A.14.1                                __________________________________________________________________________    Top level Video Demux registers                                               Register name Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                          __________________________________________________________________________    demux.sub.-- access                                                                         1    0     This access bit stops the operation of the Video                              Demux so that it's                                   CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- CTRL 7!                                                                 rw         various registers can be accessed reliably. See                               A.6.4.1                                              huffman.sub.-- error.sub.-- code                                                            3          When the Video Demux stops following the                                      generation of a                                      CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- CTRL 6:4!                                                               ro         huffman.sub.-- event interrupt request this 3                                 bit register holds a value indicating                                         why the interrupt was generated. See A.14.5.1        parser.sub.-- error.sub.-- code                                                             8          When the Video Demux stops following the                                      generation of a parser.sub.-- event                  CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- DMUX.sub.-- ERR                                                         ro         interrupt request this 8 bit register holds a                                 value indicting why the                                                       interrupt was generated. See A.14.5.2.               demux.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- address                                                         12   x     Keyhole access to the Video Demux's extended                                  address space. See                                   CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEYHOLE.sub.-- ADDR                                                     rw         A.6.4.3 for more information about accessing                                  registers                                            demux.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- data                                                            8    x     through a keyhole.                                   CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- KEYHOLE                                                                 rw         Tables A.14.2, A.14.3 and A.14.4 describe the                                 registers that can be                                                         accessed via the keynole.                            dummy.sub.-- last.sub.-- picture                                                            1    0     When this register is set to 1 the Video Demux                                will generate information                            CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- ALU.sub.-- REG0                                                         rw         for a "dummy" intra picture as the last picture                               of an MPEG sequence.                                 r.sub.-- rom.sub.-- control                                                                            This function is useful when the Temporal                                     Decoder is configured for                            r.sub.-- dummy.sub.-- last.sub.-- frame.sub.-- bit                                                     automatic picture re-ordering (see A.18.3.5,                                  "Picture sequence re-                                                         ordering", to flush the last P or I picture out                               of the Temporal                                                               Decoder.                                                                      No "dummy" picture is required if:                                            • the Temporal Decoder is not configured                                for re-ordering                                                               • another MPEG sequence will be decoded                                 immediately (as this will also                                                flush out the last picture)                                                   • the coding standard is not MPEG              field.sub.-- info                                                                           1    0     When this register is set to 1 the first byte of                              any MPEG                                             CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- ALU.sub.-- REG0                                                         rw         extra.sub.-- information.sub.-- picture is                                    placed in the FIELD.sub.-- INFO Token. See           r.sub.-- rom.sub.-- control                                                                            A.14.7.1                                             r.sub.-- field.sub.-- info.sub.-- bit                                         continue      1    0     This register allows user software to control                                 how much extra, user or                              CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- ALU.sub.-- REG0                                                         rw         extension data it wants to receive when is it is                              detected by the decoder.                             r.sub.-- rom.sub.-- control                                                                            See A.14.6 and A.14.7                                r.sub.-- continue.sub.-- bit                                                  rom.sub.-- revision                                                                         8          Immediately following reset this holds a copy of                              the microcode ROM                                    CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- ALU.sub.-- REG1                                                         ro         revision number.                                     r.sub.-- rom.sub.-- revision                                                                           This register is also used to present to control                              software data values read                                                     from the coded data. See A.14.6, "Receiving User                              and Extension data"                                                           and A.14.7, "Receiving Extra Information".           huffman.sub.-- event                                                                        1    0     A Huffman event is generated if an error is                                   found in the coded data. See                                       rw         A.14.5.1 for a description of these events.          huffman.sub.-- mask                                                                         1    0     If the mask register is set to 1 then an                                      interrupt can be generated and the                                 rw         Video Demux will stop. If the mask register is                                set to 0 then no interrupt is                                                 generated and the Video Demux will attempt to                                 recover from the error.                              parser.sub.-- event                                                                         1    0     A Parser event can be in response to errors in                                the coded data or to the                                           rw         arrival of information at the Video Demux that                                requires software                                    parser.sub.-- mask                                                                          1    0     intervention. See A.14.5.2 for a description of                               these events.                                                      rw         If the mask register is set to 1 then an                                      interrupt can be generated and the                                            Video Demux will stop. If the mask register is                                set to 0 then no interrupt is                                                 generated and the Video Demux will attempt to                                 continue.                                            __________________________________________________________________________

                                      TABLE A.14.2                                __________________________________________________________________________    video demux picture construction registers                                    Register name                                                                           Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                              __________________________________________________________________________    component.sub.-- name.sub.-- 0                                                          8    x     During JPEG operation the register component.sub.--                           name.sub.-- n holds an 8 bit value                       component.sub.-- name.sub.-- 1                                                          rw         indicating (to an application) which colour                                   component has the component ID n.                        component.sub.-- name.sub.-- 2                                                component.sub.-- name.sub.-- 3                                                horiz.sub.-- pels                                                                       16   x     These registers hold the horizontal and vertical                              dimensions of the video being                                      rw         decoded in pixels.                                       vert.sub.-- pels                                                                        16   x     See section A.14.2                                                 rw                                                                  horiz.sub.-- macroblocks                                                                16   x     These registers hold the horizontal and vertical                              dimensions of the video being                                      rw         decoded in macroblocks.                                  vert.sub.-- macroblocks                                                                 16   x     See section A.14.2                                                 rw                                                                  max.sub.-- h                                                                            2    x     These registers hold the macroblock width and height                          in blocks (8 × 8 pixels).                                    rw         The values 0 to 3 indicate a width/height of 1 to 4                           blocks.                                                  max.sub.-- v                                                                            2    x     See section A.14.2                                                 rw                                                                  max.sub.-- component.sub.-- id                                                          2    x     The values 0 to 3 indicate that 1 to 4 different                              video components are currently                                     rw         being decoded.                                                                See section A.14.2                                       Nf        8    x     During JFEG operation this register holds the                                 parameter Nf (number of image                                      rw         components in frame).                                    blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 0                                                                2    x     For each of the 4 colour components the registers                             blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- n and                             blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 1                                                                rw         blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- n hold the number of blocks                            horizontally and vertically in a                         blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 2                                                                           macroblock for the colour component with component                            ID n.                                                    blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 3                                                                           See section A.14.2                                       blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 0                                                                2    x                                                              blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 1                                                                rw                                                                  blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 2                                                      blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 3                                                      tq.sub.-- 0                                                                             2    x     The two bit value held by the register tq.sub.-- n                            describes which inverse                                  tq.sub.-- 1                                                                             rw         Quantisation table is to be used when decoding data                           with component ID n.                                     tq.sub.-- 2                                                                   tq.sub.-- 3                                                                   __________________________________________________________________________

A.14.1.1 Register loading and Token generation

Many of the registers in the Video Demux hold values that relatedirectly to parameters normally communicated in the coded picture/videodata. For example, the horiz₋₋ pels register corresponds to the MPEGsequence header information, horizontal₋₋ size, and the JPEG frameheader parameter, X. These registers are loaded by the Video Demux whenthe appropriate coded data is decoded. These registers are alsoassociated with a Token. For example, the register, horiz₋₋ pels, isassociated with Token, HORIZONTAL₋₋ SIZE. The Token is generated by theVideo Demux when (or soon after) the coded data is decoded. The Tokencan also be supplied directly to the input of the Spatial Decoder. Inthis case, the value carried by the Token will configure the Video Demuxregister associated with it.

                                      TABLE A.14.3                                __________________________________________________________________________    Video demux Huffman table registers                                           Register name                                                                           Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                              __________________________________________________________________________    dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 0                                                                 2          The two bit value held by the register dc.sub.--                              huff.sub.-- n describes which Huffman                    dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 1                                                                 rw         decoding table is to be used when decoding the DC                             coefficients of data with                                dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 2                                                                            component ID n.                                          dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 3                                                                            Similarly ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- n describes the                               table to be used when decoding AC                        ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 0                                                                 2          coefficients.                                            ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 1                                                                 rw         Baseline JPEG requires up to two Huffman tables per                           scan. The only tables                                    ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 2                                                                            implemented are 0 and 1.                                 ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 3                                                       dc.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 0 15:0!                                                           8          Each of these is a table of 16, eight bit values.                             They provide the BITS                                    dc.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 1 15:0!                                                           rw         information (see JPEG Huffman table specification)                            which form part of the                                   ac.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 0 15:0!                                                           8          description of two DC and two AC Huffman tables.         ac.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 1 15:0!                                                           rw         See section A.14.3.1                                     dc.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 0 11:0!                                                        8          Each of these is a table of 12, eight bit values.                             They provide the HUFFVAL                                 dc.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 1 11:0!                                                        rw         information (see JPEG Huffman table specification)                            which form part of the                                                        description of two DC Huffman tables.                                         See section A.14.3.1                                     ac.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 0 161:0!                                                       8          Each of these is a table of 162, eight bit values.                            They provide the HUFFVAL                                 ac.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 1 161:0!                                                       rw         information (see JPEG Huffman table specification)                            which form part of the                                                        description of two AC Huffman tables.                                         See section A.14.3.1                                     dc.sub.-- zssss.sub.-- 0                                                                8          These 8 bit registers hold values that are "scecial                           cased" to accelerate the                                 dc.sub.-- zssss.sub.-- 1                                                                rw         decoding of certain frequently used JPEG VLCs.           ac.sub.-- eob.sub.-- 0                                                                  8          dc.sub.-- ssss - magnitude of DC coefficient is 0        ac.sub.-- eob.sub.-- 1                                                                  rw         ac.sub.-- eob - end of block                             ac.sub.-- zrf.sub.-- 0                                                                  8          ac.sub.-- zrf - run of 16 zeros                          ac.sub.-- zrf.sub.-- 1                                                                  rw                                                                  __________________________________________________________________________

                                      TABLE A.14.4                                __________________________________________________________________________    Other Video Demux registers                                                   Register name                                                                           Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                              __________________________________________________________________________    buffer.sub.-- size                                                                      10         This register is loaded when decoding MPEG data with                          a value indicating the                                             rw         size of VBV buffer required in an ideal decoder.                              This value is not used by the decoder chips.                                  However, the value it holds may                                               be useful to user software when configuring the                               coded data buffer size and to                                                 detemine whether the decoder is capable of decoding                           a particular MPEG data                                                        file.                                                    pel.sub.-- aspect                                                                       4          This register is loaded when decoding MPEG data with                          a value indicating the                                             rw         pel aspect ratio. The value is a 4 bit integer that                           is used as an index into a                                                    table defined by MPEG.                                                        See the MPEG standard for a definition of this                                table.                                                                        This value is not used by the decoder chips.                                  However, the value it holds may                                               be useful to user software when configuring a                                 display or output device.                                bit.sub.-- rate                                                                         18         This register is loaded when decoding MPEG data with                          a value indicating the                                             rw         coded data rate.                                                              See the MPEG standard for a definition of this                                value.                                                                        This value is not used by the decoder chips.                                  However, the value it holds may                                               be useful to user software when configuring the                               decoder start-up registers.                              pic.sub.-- rate                                                                         4          This register is loaded when decoding MPEG data with                          a value indicating the                                             rw         picture rate.                                                                 See the MPEG standard for a definition of this                                value.                                                                        This value is not used by the decoder chips.                                  However, the value it holds may                                               be useful to user software when configuring a                                 display or output device.                                constrained                                                                             1          This register is loaded when decoding MPEG data to                            indicate if the coded data                                         rw         meets MPEG's constrained parameters.                                          See the MPEG standard for a definition of this                                flag.                                                                         This value is not used by the decoder chips.                                  However, the value it holds may                                               be useful to user software to detemine whether the                            decoder is capable of                                                         decoding a particular MPEG data file.                    picture.sub.-- type                                                                     2          During MPEG operation this register holds the                                 picture type of the picture being                                  rw         decoded.                                                 n.sub.-- 261.sub.-- pic.sub.-- type                                                     8          This register is loaded when decoding H.261 data. It                          holds information about                                            rw         the picture format.                                                                 ##STR1##                                                                      ##STR2##                                                                     Flags:                                                                        s -- Split Screen indicator                                                   d -- Document Camera                                                          f -- Freeze Picture Release                                              This value is not used by the decoder chips.                                  However, the information should                                               be used when configuring horiz.sub.-- pels,                                   vert.sub.-- pels and the display or output                                    device.                                                  broken.sub.-- closed                                                                    2          During MPEG operation this register holds the                                 broken.sub.-- link and closed.sub.-- gop                           rw         information for the group of pictures being                                   decoded.                                                                            ##STR3##                                                                      ##STR4##                                                                     Flags:                                                                        c -- closed.sub.-- gop                              prediction.sub.-- mode                                                                  5          During MPEG and H.261 operation this register holds                           the current value of                                               rw         prediction mode.                                                                    ##STR5##                                                                      ##STR6##                                                                     Flags:                                                                        h -- enable H.261 loop filter                                                 y -- reset backward vector prediction               vbv.sub.-- delay                                                                        16         This register is loaded when decoding MPEG data with                          a value indicating the                                             rw         minimum start-up delay before decoding should                                 start.                                                                        See the MPEG standard for a definition of this                                value.                                                                        This value is not used by the decoder chips.                                  However, the value it holds may                                               be useful to user software when configuring the                               decoder start-up registers.                              pic.sub.-- number                                                                       8          This register holds the picture number for the                                picture that is currently being                                    rw         decoded by the Video Demux. This number was                                   generated by the start code                                                   detector when this picture arrived there.                                     See Table A.11.2 for a description of the picture                             number.                                                  dummy.sub.-- last.sub.-- picture                                                        1    0     These registers are also visble at the top level.                             See Table A.14.1                                                   rw                                                                  field.sub.-- info                                                                       1    0                                                                        rw                                                                  continue  1    0                                                                        rw                                                                  rom.sub.-- revision                                                                     8                                                                             rw                                                                  coding.sub.-- standard                                                                  2          This register is loaded by the CODING.sub.--                                  STANDARD Token to configure                                        ro         the Video Demux's mode of operation.                                          See section A.21.1                                       restart.sub.-- interval                                                                 8          This register is loaded when decoding JPEG data with                          a value indicating the                                             rw         minimum start-up delay before decoding should                                 start.                                                                        See the MPEG standard for a definition of this           __________________________________________________________________________                         value.                                               

                                      TABLE A.14.5                                __________________________________________________________________________    Register to Token cross reference                                             register  Token         standard                                                                          comment                                           __________________________________________________________________________    component.sub.-- name.sub.-- n                                                          COMPONENT.sub.-- NAME                                                                       JPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            MPEG                                                                              not used in standard.                                                     H.261                                                 horiz.sub.-- pels                                                                       HORIZONTAL.sub.-- SIZE                                                                      MPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                    vert.sub.-- pels                                                                        VERTICAL.sub.-- SIZE                                                                        JPEG                                                                          H.261                                                                             automatically derived from picture type.          horiz.sub.-- macroblocks                                                                HORIZONTAL.sub.-- MBS                                                                       MPEG                                                                              control software must derive from                 vert.sub.-- macroblocks                                                                 VERTICAL.sub.-- MBS                                                                         JPEG                                                                              horizontal and vertical picture size.                                     H.261                                                                             automatically derived from picture                                            type.                                             max.sub.-- h                                                                            DEFINE.sub.-- MAX.sub.-- SAMPLING                                                           MPEG                                                                              control software must configure.                  max.sub.-- v                Sampling structure is fixed by                                                standard.                                                                 JPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            H.261                                                                             automatically configured for 4:2.0                                            video.                                            max.sub.-- component.sub.-- id                                                          MAX.sub.-- COMP.sub.-- ID                                                                   MPEG                                                                              control software musst configure.                                             Sampling structure is fixed by                                                standard.                                                                 JPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            H.261                                                                             automatically configured for 4:2:0                                            video.                                            tq.sub.-- 0                                                                             JPEG.sub.-- TABLE.sub.-- SELECT                                                             JPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                    tq.sub.-- 1             MPEG                                                                              not used in standard.                             tq.sub.-- 2             H.261                                                 tq.sub.-- 3                                                                   blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 0                                                                DEFINE.sub.-- SAMPLING                                                                      MPEG                                                                              control software must configure.                  blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 1    Sampling structure is fixed by                    blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 2    standard.                                         blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 3                                                                              JPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                    blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 0                                                                              H.261                                                                             automatically configured for 4:2:0                blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 1    video.                                            blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 2                                                      blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 3                                                      dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 0                                                                 in scan header data                                                                         JPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                    dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 1                                                                 MPEG.sub.-- DCH.sub.-- TABLE                                                                MPEG                                                                              control software must configure.                  dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 2 H.261                                                                             not used in standard.                             dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 3                                                       ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 0                                                                 in scan header data                                                                         JPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                    ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 1 MPEG                                                                              not used in standard.                             ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 2 H.261                                                 ac.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 3                                                       dc.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 0 15:0!                                                           in DATA Token following                                                                     JPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                    dc.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 1 15:0!                                                           DHT.sub.-- MARKER Token                                             dc.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 0 11:0!                                                                      MPEG                                                                              control software must configure.                  dc.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 1 11:0!                                                                      H.261                                                                             not used in standard.                             dc.sub.-- zssss.sub.-- 0                                                      dc.sub.-- zssss.sub.-- 1                                                      ac.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 0 15:0!                                                           in DATA Token following                                                                     JPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                    ac.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 1 15:0!                                                           DHT.sub.-- MARKER Token                                             ac.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 0 161:0!                                                                     MPEG                                                                              not used in standard.                             ac.sub.-- huffval.sub.-- 1 161:0!                                                                     H.261                                                 ac.sub.-- eob.sub.-- 0                                                        ac.sub.-- eob.sub.-- 1                                                        ac.sub.-- zrl.sub.-- 0                                                        ac.sub.-- zrl.sub.-- 1                                                        buffer.sub.-- size                                                                      VBV.sub.-- BUFFER.sub.-- SIZE                                                               MPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            JPEG                                                                              not used in standard                                                      H.261                                                 pel.sub.-- aspect                                                                       PEL.sub.-- ASPECT                                                                           MPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            JPEG                                                                              not used in standard                                                      H.261                                                 bit.sub.-- rate                                                                         BIT.sub.-- RATE                                                                             MPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            JPEG                                                                              not used in standard                                                      H.261                                                 pic.sub.-- rate                                                                         PICTURE.sub.-- RATE                                                                         MPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            JPEG                                                                              not used in standard                                                      H.261                                                 constrained                                                                             CONSTRAINED   MPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            JPEG                                                                              not used in standard                                                      H.261                                                 picture.sub.-- type                                                                     PICTURE.sub.-- TYPE                                                                         MPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            JPEG                                                                              not used in standard                                                      H.261                                                 broken.sub.-- closed                                                                    BROKEN.sub.-- CLOSED                                                                        MPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            JPEG                                                                              not used in standard                                                      H.261                                                 prediction.sub.-- mode                                                                  PREDICTION.sub.-- MODE                                                                      MPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            JPEG                                                                              not used in standard                                                      H.261                                                 n.sub.-- 261.sub.-- pic.sub.-- type                                                     PICTURE.sub.-- TYPE                                                                         MPEG                                                                              not relevant                                                (when standard is H.261)                                                                    JPEG                                                                          H.261                                                                             in coded data.                                    vbv.sub.-- delay                                                                        VBV.sub.-- DELAY                                                                            MPEG                                                                              in coded data.                                                            JPEG                                                                              not used in standard                                                      H.261                                                 pic.sub.-- number                                                                       Carried by:   MPEG                                                                              Generated by start acode detector.                          PICTURE.sub.-- START                                                                        JPEG                                                                          H.261                                                 coding.sub.-- standard                                                                  CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                                                      MPEG                                                                              configured in start code by control                                       JPEG                                                                              software detector.                                                        H.261                                                 __________________________________________________________________________

A.14.2 Picture structure

In the present invention, picture dimensions are described to theSpatial Decoder in 2 different units: pixels and macroblocks. JPEG andMPEG both communicate picture dimensions in pixels. Communicating thedimensions in pixels determine the area of the buffer that contains thevalid data; this may be smaller than the total buffer size.Communicating dimensions in macroblocks determines the size of bufferrequired by the decoder. The macroblock dimensions must be derived bythe user from the pixel dimensions. The Spatial Decoder registersassociated with this information are: horiz₋₋ pels, vert₋₋ pels, horiz₋₋macroblocks and vert₋₋ macroblocks.

The Spatial Decoder registers, blocks₋₋ h₋₋ n, blocks₋₋ v₋₋ n, max₋₋ h,max₋₋ v and max₋₋ component₋₋ id specify the composition of themacroblocks (minimum coding units in JPEG). Each is a 2 bit registerthan can hold values in the range 0 to 3. All except max₋₋ component₋₋id specify a block count of 1 to 4. For example, if register max₋₋ hholds 1, then a macroblock is two blocks wide. Similarly, max₋₋component₋₋ id specifies the number of different color componentsinvolved.

                  TABLE A.14.6                                                    ______________________________________                                        Configuration for various macroblock formats                                               2:1:1                                                                              4:2:2     4:2:0  1:1:1                                      ______________________________________                                        max.sub.-- h   1      1         1    0                                        max.sub.-- v   0      1         1    0                                        max.sub.-- component.sub.-- id                                                               2      2         2    2                                        blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 0                                                                     1      1         1    0                                        blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 1                                                                     0      0         0    0                                        blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 2                                                                     0      0         0    0                                        blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 3                                                                     x      x         x    x                                        blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 0                                                                     0      1         1    0                                        blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 1                                                                     0      1         0    0                                        blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 2                                                                     0      1         0    0                                        blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 3                                                                     x      x         x    x                                        ______________________________________                                    

A.14.3 Huffman tables

A.14.3.1 JPEG style Huffman table descriptions

In the invention, Huffman table descriptions are provided to the Spatialdecoder via the format used by JPEG to communicate table descriptionsbetween encoders and decoders. There are two elements to each tabledescription: BITS and HUFFVAL. For a full description of how tables areencoded, the user is directed to the JPEG specification.

A.14.3.1.1 BITS

BITS is a table of values that describes how many different symbols areencoded with each length of VLC. Each entry is an 8 bit value. JPEGpermits VLCs with up to 16 bits long, so there are 16 entries in eachtable.

The BITS 0! describes how many different 1 bit VLCs exist while BITS 1!describes how many different 2 bit VLCs exist and so forth.

A.14.3.1.2 HUFFVAL

HUFFVAL is table of 8 bit data values arranged in order of increasingVLC length. The size of this table will depend on the number ofdifferent symbols that can be encoded by the VLC.

The JPEG specification describes in further detail how Huffman codingtables can be encoded or decoded into this format.

A.14.3.1.3 Configuration by Tokens

In a JPEG bitstream, the DHT marker precedes the description of theHuffman tables used to code AC and DC coefficients. When the Start CodeDetector recognizes a DHT marker, it generates a DHT₋₋ MARKER Token andplaces the Huffman table description in the following DATA Token (seeA.11.3.4).

Configuration of AC and DC coefficient Huffman tables within the SpatialDecoder can be achieved by supplying DATA and DHT₋₋ MARKER Tokens to theinput of the Spatial Decoder while the Spatial Decoder is configured forJPEG operation. This mechanism can be used for configuring the DCcoefficient Huffman tables required for MPEG operation, however, thecoding standard of the Spatial Decoder must be set to JPEG while thetables are down loaded.

                                      TABLE A.14.7                                __________________________________________________________________________    Huffman table configuration via Tokens                                        E 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Token Name                                                  __________________________________________________________________________    1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 = JPEG                                                    0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 DHT.sub.-- MARKER                                           1 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x DATA                                                        1 t t t t t t t t T.sub.h - Value indicating which Huffman table is to be                       loaded. JPEG allows 4          This sequence                                  tables to be downloaded.       can be repeated                                Values 0x00 and 0x01 specify DC coefficient coding                            tables 0 and 1.                to allow                                       Values 0x10 and 0x11 specifies AC coefficient coding                          tables 0 and 1.                several tables               1 n n n n n n n n L.sub.i - 16 words carrying BITS information                                                                 to be described              :                                                in a single Token            1 n n n n n n n n                                                             1 n n n n n n n n V.sub.ij - Words carrying HUFFVAL information (the          :                 number of words depends on the number of different          e n n n n n n n n symbols).                                                                     e - the extension bit will be 0 if this is the endof                          the DATA Token or 1 if                                                        another table description is contained in the same DATA                       Token.                                                      __________________________________________________________________________

A.14.3.1.4 Configuration by MPI

The AC and DC coefficient Huffman tables can also be written directly toregisters via the MPI. See Table A.14.3.

The registers dc₋₋ bits₋₋ 0 15:0! and dc₋₋ bits₋₋ 1 15:0! hold the BITSvalues for tables 0x00 and 0x01.

The registers ac₋₋ bits₋₋ 0 15:0! and ac₋₋ bits₋₋ 1 15:0! hold the BITSvalues for tables 0x10 and 0x11.

The registers dc₋₋ huffval₋₋ 0 11:0! and dc₋₋ huffval₋₋ 1 11:0! hold theHUFFVAL values for tables 0x00 and 0x01.

The registers ac₋₋ huffval₋₋ 0 161:0! and ac₋₋ huffval₋₋ 161:0! hold theHUFFVAL values for tables 0x10 and 0x11.

A.14.4 Configuring for different standards

The Video Demux supports the requirements of MPEG, JPEG and H.261. Thecoding standard is configured automatically by the CODING₋₋ STANDARDToken generated by the Start Code Detector.

A.14.4.1 H.261 Huffman tables

All the Huffman tables required to decode H.261 are held in ROMs withinthe Spatial Decoder and more particular in the parser state machine ofthe Video demux and, therefore require no user intervention.

A.14.4.2 H.261 Picture structure

H.261 is defined as supporting only two picture formats: CIF and QCIF.The picture format in use is signalled in the PTYPE section of thebitstream. When this data is decoded by the Spatial Decoder, it isplaced in the h₋₋ 261₋₋ pic₋₋ type registers and the PICTURE₋₋ TYPEToken. In addition, all the picture and macroblock constructionregisters are configured automatically.

The information in the various registers is also placed into theirrelated Tokens (see Table A.14.5), and this ensures that other decoderchips (such as the Temporal Decoder) are correctly configured.

A.14.4.3 MPEG Huffman tables

The majority of the Huffman coding tables required to decode MPEG areheld in ROMs within the Spatial Decoder (again, in the parser statemachine) and, thus, require no user intervention. The exceptions are thetables required for decoding the DC coefficients of Intral macroblocks.Two tables are required, one for chroma the other for luma. These mustbe configured by user software before decoding begins.

                  TABLE A.14.8                                                    ______________________________________                                        Automatic settings for H.261                                                               CIF/                                                             macroblock construction                                                                    QCIF   picture construction                                                                       CIF   QCIF                                   ______________________________________                                        max.sub.-- h 1      horiz.sub.-- pels                                                                          352   176                                    max.sub.-- v 1      vert.sub.-- pels                                                                           288   144                                    max.sub.-- component.sub.-- id                                                             2      horiz.sub.-- macroblocks                                                                   22    11                                     blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 0                                                                   1      vert.sub.-- macroblocks                                                                    18    9                                      blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 1                                                                   0                                                                blocks.sub.-- h.sub.-- 2                                                                   0                                                                blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 0                                                                   1                                                                blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 1                                                                   0                                                                blocks.sub.-- v.sub.-- 2                                                                   0                                                                ______________________________________                                    

Table A.14.10 shows the sequence of Tokens required to configure the DCcoefficient Huffman tables within the Spatial Decoder. Alternatively,the same results can be obtained by writing this information toregisters via the MPI.

The registers dc₋₋ huff₋₋ n control which DC coefficient Huffman tablesare used with each color component. Table A.14.9 shows how they shouldbe configured for MPEG operation. This can be done directly via the MPIor by the MPEG₋₋ DCH₋₋ TABLE Token.

                  TABLE A.14.9                                                    ______________________________________                                        MPEG DC Huffman table selection via MPI                                       ______________________________________                                                dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 0                                                               0                                                                     dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 1                                                               1                                                                     dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 2                                                               1                                                                     dc.sub.-- huff.sub.-- 3                                                               x                                                             ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.14.10                                                   ______________________________________                                        MPEG DC Huffman table configuration                                           E    7:0!  Token Name                                                         ______________________________________                                        1   0x15   CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                             0   0x01   1 = JPEG                                                           0   0x1C   DHT.sub.-- MARKER                                                  1   0x04   DATA (could be any colour component, 0 is used in this                        example)                                                           1   0x00   0 indicates that this Huffman table is DC coefficient coding                  table 0                                                            1   0x00   16 words carrying BITS information describing a total of 9         1   0x02   different VLCs:                                                    1   0x03   2,2 bit codes                                                      1   0x01   3,3 bit codes                                                      1   0x01   1,4 bit codes                                                      1   0x01   1,5 bit codes                                                      1   0x01   1,6 bit codes                                                      1   0x00   1,7 bit codes                                                      1   0x00   If configuring via the MPI rather than with Tokens these           1   0x00   values would be written into the dc.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 0 15:0!                registers.                                                         1   0x00                                                                      1   0x00                                                                      1   0x00                                                                      1   0x00                                                                      1   0x00                                                                      1   0x00                                                                      1   0x01   9 words carrying HUFFVAL information                               1   0x02   If configuring via the MPI rather than with Tokens these           1   0x00   values would be written into the dc.sub.-- huffval.sub.--                     0 11:0!                                                            1   0x03   registers.                                                         1   0x04                                                                      1   0x05                                                                      1   0x06                                                                      1   0x07                                                                      0   0x08                                                                      0   0x1C   DHT.sub.-- MARKER                                                  1   0x04   DATA (could be any colour component, 0 is used in this                        example)                                                           1   0x01   1 indicates that this Huffman table is DC coefficient coding                  table 1                                                            1   0x00   16 words carrying BITS information describing a total of 9         1   0x03   different VLCs:                                                    1   0x01   3,2 bit codes                                                      1   0x01   1,3 bit codes                                                      1   0x01   1,4 bit codes                                                      1   0x01   1,5 bit codes                                                      1   0x01   1,6 bit codes                                                      1   0x01   1,7 bit codes                                                      1   0x00   1,8 bit codes                                                      1   0x00   If configuring via the MPI rather than with Tokens these           1   0x00   values would be written into the dc.sub.-- bits.sub.-- 1 15:0!                registers.                                                         1   0x00                                                                      1   0x00                                                                      1   0x00                                                                      1   0x00                                                                      1   0x00                                                                      1   0x00   9 words carrying HUFFVAL information                               1   0x01   If configuring via the MPI rather than with Tokens these           1   0x02   values would be written into the dc.sub.-- huffval.sub.--                     1 11:0!                                                            1   0x03   registers.                                                         1   0x04                                                                      1   0x05                                                                      1   0x06                                                                      1   0x07                                                                      0   0x08                                                                      1   0xD4   MPEG.sub.-- DCH.sub.-- TABLE                                       0   0x00   Configure so table 0 is used for component 0                       1   0xD5   MPEG.sub.-- DCH.sub.-- TABLE                                       0   0x01   Configure so table 1 is used for component 1                       1   0xD6   MPEG.sub.-- DCH.sub.-- TABLE                                       0   0x01   Configure so table 1 is used for component 2                       1   0x15   CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                             0   0x02   2 = JPEG                                                           ______________________________________                                    

A.14.4.4 MPEG Picture structure

The macroblock construction defined for MPEG is the same as that used byH.261. The picture dimensions are encoded in the coded data.

For standard 4:2:0 operation, the macroblock characteristics should beconfigured as indicated in Table A.14.8. This can be done either bywriting to the registers as indicated or by applying the equivalentTokens (see Table A.14.5) to the input of the Spatial Decoder.

The approach taken to configure picture dimensions will depend upon theapplication. If the picture format is known before decoding starts, thenthe picture construction registers listed in Table A.14.8 can beinitialized with appropriate values. Alternatively, the picturedimensions can be decoded from the coded data and used to configure theSpatial Decoder. In this case the user must service the parser errorERR₋₋ MPEG₋₋ SEQUENCE, see A.14.8, "Changes at the MPEG sequence layer".

A.14.4.5 JPEG

Within baseline JPEG, there are a number of encoder options thatsignificantly alter the complexity of the control software required tooperate the decoder. In general, the Spatial Decoder has been designedso that the required support is minimal where the following condition ismet:

Number of color components per frame is less than 5(N_(f) ≦4)

A.14.4.6 JPEG Huffman tables

Furthermore, JPEG allows Huffman coding tables to be down loaded to thedecoder. These tables are used when decoding the VLCs describing thecoefficients. Two tables are permitted per scan for decoding DCcoefficients and two for the AC coefficients.

There are three different types of JPEG file: Interchange format, anabbreviated format for compressed image data, and an abbreviated formatfor table data. In an interchange format file there is both compressedimage data and a definition of all the tables (Huffman, Quantizationetc.) required to decode the image data. The abbreviated image dataformat file omits the table definitions. The abbreviated table formatfile only contains the table definitions.

The Spatial Decoder will accept all three formats. However, abbreviatedimage data files can only be decoded if all the required tables havebeen defined. This definition can be done via either of the other twoJPEG file types, or alternatively, the tables could be set-up by usersoftware.

If each scan uses a different set of Huffman tables, then the tabledefinitions are placed (by the encoder) in the coded data before eachscan. These are automatically loaded by the Spatial Decoder for useduring this and any subsequent scans.

To improve the performance of the Huffman decoding, certain commonlyused symbols are specially cased. These are: DC coefficient withmagnitude 0, end of block AC coefficients and run of 16 zero ACcoefficients. The values for these special cases should be written intothe appropriate registers.

A.14.4.6.1 Table selection

The registers dc₋₋ huff₋₋ n and ac₋₋ huff₋₋ n control which AC and DCcoefficient Huffman tables are used with which color component. DuringJPEG operation, these relationships are defined by the TD_(j) and Ta_(j)fields of the scan header syntax.

A.14.4.7 JPEG Picture structure

There are two distinct levels of baseline JPEG decoding supported by theSpatial Decoder: up to 4 components per frame (N_(f) ≦4) and greaterthan 4 components per frame (N_(f) >4). If N_(f) >4 is used, the controlsoftware required becomes more complex.

A.14.4.7.1 Nf≦4

The frame component specification parameters contained in the JPEG frameheader configure the macroblock construction registers (see TableA.14.8) when they are decoded. No user intervention is required, as allthe specifications required to decode the 4 different color componentsas defined.

For further details of the options provided by JPEG the reader shouldstudy the JPEG specification. Also, there is a short description of JPEGpicture formats in §A.16.1.

A.14.4.7.2 JPEG with more than 4 components

The Spatial Decoder can decode JPEG files containing up to 256 differentcolor components (the maximum permitted by JPEG). However, additionaluser intervention is required if more than 4 color component are to bedecoded. JPEG only allows a maximum of 4 components in any scan.

A.14.4.8 Non-standard variants

As stated above, the Spatial Decoder supports some picture formatsbeyond those defined by JPEG and MPEG.

JPEG limits minimum coding units so that they contain no more than 10blocks per scan. This limit does not apply to the Spatial Decoder sinceit can process any minimum coding unit that can be described by blocks₋₋h₋₋ n, blocks₋₋ v₋₋ n, max₋₋ h and max₋₋ v.

MPEG is only defined for 4:2:0 macroblocks (see Table A.14.8). However,the Spatial Decoder can process three other component macroblockstructures, (e.g., 4:2:2.

A.14.5 Video events and errors

The Video Demux can generate two types of events: parser events andHuffman events. See A.6.3, "Interrupts", for a description of how tohandle events and interrupts.

A.14.5.1 Huffman events

Huffman events are generated by the Huffman decoder. The event which isindicated in huffman₋₋ event and huffman₋₋ mask determines whether aninterrupt is generated. If huffman₋₋ mask is set to 1, an interrupt willbe generated and the Huffman decoder will halt. The register huffman₋₋error₋₋ code 2:0! will hold a value indicating the cause of the event.

If 1 is written to huffman₋₋ event after servicing the interrupt, theHuffman decoder will attempt to recover from the error. Also, ifhuffman₋₋ mask was set to 0 (masking the interrupt and not halting theHuffman decoder) the Huffman decoder will attempt to recover from theerror automatically.

A.14.5.2 Parser events

Parser events are generated by the Parser. The event is indicated inparser₋₋ event. Thereafter, parser₋₋ mask determines whether aninterrupt is generated. If parser₋₋ mask is set to 1, an interrupt willbe generated and the Parser will halt. The register parser₋₋ error₋₋code 7:0! will hold a value indicating the cause of event.

If 1 is written to huffman₋₋ event after servicing the interrupt, theHuffman decoder will attempt to recover from the error. Also, ifhuffman₋₋ mask was set to 0 (masking the interrupt and not halting theHuffman decoder) the Huffman decoder will attempt to recover form theerror automatically.

If 1 is written to parser₋₋ event after servicing the interrupt, theParser will start operation again. If the event indicated a bitstreamerror, the Video Demux will attempt to recover from the error.

If parser₋₋ mask was set to 0, the Parser will set its event bit, butwill not generate an interrupt or halt. It will continue operation andattempt to recover from the error automatically.

                  TABLE A.14.11                                                   ______________________________________                                        Huffman error codes                                                           huffman.sub.-- error.sub.-- code                                               2!   1!      0!    Description                                               ______________________________________                                        0    0       0      No error. This error should not occur during                                  normal operation.                                         X    0       1      Failed to find terminal code in VLC within 16                                 bits.                                                     X    1       0      Found serial data when Token expected                     X    1       1      Found Token when serial data expected                     1    X       X      Information describing more than 64                                           coefficients for a single block was decoded                                   indicating a bitstream error. The block output by                             the Video Demux will contain only 64                                          coefficients.                                             ______________________________________                                    

                                      TABLE A.14.12                               __________________________________________________________________________    Parser error codes                                                            parser.sub.-- error.sub.-- code 7:0!                                                     Description                                                        __________________________________________________________________________    0x00       ERR.sub.-- NO.sub.-- ERROR                                                    No Parser error has occured, this event should                                not occur during normal operation.                                 0x10       ERR.sub.-- EXTENSION.sub.-- TOKEN                                             An EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA Token has been detected                              by the Parser. The detection of this Token should                             preceed a DATA Token that contains the                                        extension data. See A.14.6                                         0x11       ERR.sub.-- EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA                                              Following the detection of an EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA Token,                    a DATA Token containing the extension                                         data has been detedcted. See A.14.6                                0x12       ERR.sub.-- USER.sub.-- TOKEN                                                  A USER.sub.-- DATA Token has been detected by the Parser.                     The detection of this Token should preceed                                    a DATA Token that contains the user data. See A.14.6               0x13       ERR.sub.-- USER.sub.-- DATA                                                   Following the detection of a USER.sub.-- DATA Token,                          a DATA Token containing the user data                                         has been detedcted. See A.14.6                                     0x20       ERR.sub.-- PSPARE                                                             H.261 PSARE information has been detected see A.14.7               0x21       ERR.sub.-- GSPARE                                                             H.261 GSARE information has been detected see A.14.7               0x22       ERR.sub.-- PTYPE                                                              The value of the H.261 picture type has changed.                              The register h.sub.-- 261.sub.-- pic.sub.-- type                              can be inspected to see what the new value is.                     0x30       ERR.sub.-- JPEG.sub.-- FRAME                                       0x31       ERR.sub.-- JPEG.sub.-- FRAME.sub.-- LAST                           0x32       ERR.sub.-- JPEG.sub.-- SCAN                                                   Picture size or Ns changed                                         0x33       ERR.sub.-- JPEG.sub.-- SCAN.sub.-- COMP                                       Component Change |                                                 0x34       ERR.sub.-- ONL.sub.-- MARKER                                       0x40       ERR.sub.-- MPEG.sub.-- SEQUENCE                                               One of the parameters communicated in                                         the MPEG sequence layer has changed.                                          See A.14.8                                                         0x41       ERR.sub.-- EXTRA.sub.-- PICTURE                                               MPEG extra.sub.-- information.sub.-- picture has                              been detected see A.14.7                                           0x42       ERR.sub.-- EXTRA.sub.-- SLICE                                                 MPEG extra.sub.-- information.sub.-- slice                                    has been detected see A.14.7                                       0x43       ERR.sub.-- VBV.sub.-- DELAY                                                   The VBV.sub.-- DELAY parameter for the first                                  picture in a new MPEG video sequence has                                      been detected by the Video Demux. The new                                     value of delay is available in the register                                   vbv.sub.-- delay.                                                             The first picture of a new sequence is                                        defined as the first picture after a sequence                                 end. FLUSH or reset.                                               0x80       ERR.sub.-- SHORT.sub.-- TOKEN                                                 An incorrectly formed Token has been detected.                                This error should not occur during                                            normal operation.                                                  0x90       ERR.sub.-- H261.sub.-- PIC.sub.-- END.sub.-- UNEXPECTED                       During H.261 operation the end of a picture has been                          encounterd at an unexpected                                                   position. This is likely to indicate an error in the coded                    data.                                                              0x91       ERR.sub.-- GN.sub.-- BACKUP                                                   During H.261 operation a group of blocks has been encountered                 with a group number                                                           less than that expected. This is likely to indicate an error                  in the coded data.                                                 0x92       ERR.sub.-- GN.sub.-- SKIP.sub.-- GOB                                          During H.261 operation a group of blocks has been encountered                 with a group number                                                           greater than that expected. This is likely to indicate an                     error in the coded data.                                           0xA0       ERR.sub.-- NBASE.sub.-- TAB                                                   During JPEG operation there has been an attempt to down load a                Huffman table that is                                                         not supported by baseline JPEG (baseline JPEG only supports                   tables 0 and 1 for                                                            entropy coding).                                                   0xA1       ERR.sub.-- QUANT.sub.-- PRECISION                                             During JPEG operation there has been an attempt to down load a                quantisation table that                                                       is not supported by baseline JPEG (baseline JPEG only supports                8 bit precision in                                                            quantisation tables).                                              0xA2       ERR.sub.-- SAMPLE.sub.-- PRECISION                                            During JPEG operation there has been an attempt to specify a                  sample precision greater                                                      than that supported by baseline JPEG (baseline JPEG only                      supports 8 bit precision).                                         0xA3       ERR.sub.-- NBASE.sub.-- SCAN                                                  One or more of the JPEG scan header parameters Ss, Se, Ah and                 Al is set to a value not                                                      supported by baseline JPEG (indicating spectral selection                     and/or successive                                                             approximation which are not supported in baseline JPEG).           0xA4       ERR.sub.-- UNEXPECTED.sub.-- DNL                                              During JPEG operation a DNL marker has been encountered in a                  scan that is not the                                                          first scan in a frame.                                             0xA5       ERR.sub.-- EOS.sub.-- UNEXPECTED                                              During JPEG operation an EOS marker has been encountered in an                unexpected place.                                                  0xA6       ERR.sub.-- RESTART.sub.-- SKIP                                                During JPEG operation a restart marker has been encountered                   either in in an                                                               unexpected place or the value of the restart marker is                        unexpected. If a restart marker is                                            not found when one is expected the Huffman event "Found seral                 data when Token                                                               expected" will be generated.                                       0xB0       ERR.sub.-- SKIP.sub.-- INTRA                                                  During MPEG operation, a macro block with a macro block                       address increment greater                                                     than 1 has been found within an intra (I) picture. This is                    illegal and probably indicates a                                              bitstream error.                                                   0xB1       ERR.sub.-- SKIP.sub.-- DINTRA                                                 During MPEG operation, a macro block with a macro block                       address increment greater                                                     than 1 has been found within an DC only (D) picture. This is                  illegal and probably                                                          indicates a bitstream error.                                       0xB2       ERR.sub.-- BAD.sub.-- MARKER                                                  During MPEG operation, a marker bit did not have the expected                 value. This s probably                                                        indicates a bitstream error.                                       0xB3       ERR.sub.-- D.sub.-- MBTYPE                                                    During MPEG operation, within a DC only (D) picture, a                        macroblock was found with a                                                   macroblock type other than 1. This is illegal and probably                    indicates a bitstream error.                                       0xB4       ERR.sub.-- D.sub.-- MBEND                                                     During MPEG operation, within a DC only (D) picture, a                        macroblock was found with 0                                                   in it's end of macroblock bit. This is illegal and probably                   indicates a bitstream error.                                       0xB5       ERR.sub.-- SVP.sub.-- BACKUP                                                  During MPEG operation, a slice has been encountered with a                    slice vertical position less                                                  than that expected. This is likely to indicate an error in the                coded data                                                         0xB6       ERR.sub.-- SVP.sub.-- SKIP.sub.-- ROWS                                        During MPEG operation, a slice has been encountered with a                    slice vertical position                                                       greater than that expected. This is likely to indicate an                     error in the coded data.                                           0xB7       ERR.sub.-- FST.sub.-- MBA.sub.-- BACKUP                                       During MPEG operation, a macroblock has been encountered with                 a macroblock                                                                  address less than that expected. This is likely to indicate an                error in the coded data.                                           0xB8       ERR.sub.-- FST.sub.-- MBA.sub.-- SKIP                                         During MPEG operation, a macroblock has been encountered with                 a macro block                                                                 address greater than that expected. This is likely to indicate                an error in the coded data.                                        0xB9       ERR.sub.-- PICTURE.sub.-- END.sub.-- UNEXPECTED                               During MPEG operation, a PICTURE.sub.-- END Token has been                    encountered in an                                                             unexpected place. This is likely to indicate an error in the                  coded data.                                                        0xE0 ... 0xEF                                                                            Errors reserved for internal test programs                         0xE0       ERR.sub.-- TST.sub.-- PROGRAM                                                 Mysteriously arrived in the test program                           0xE1       ERR.sub.-- NO.sub.-- PROGRAM                                                  If the test program is not compiled in                             0xE2       ERR.sub.-- TST.sub.-- END                                                     End of Test                                                        0xF0 ... 0xFF                                                                            Reserved errors                                                    0xF0       ERR.sub.-- UCODE.sub.-- ADDR                                                  fell off the end of the world                                      0xF1       ERR.sub.-- NOT.sub.-- IMPLEMENTED                                  __________________________________________________________________________

Each standard uses a different sub-set of the defined Parser errorcodes.

                  TABLE A.14.13                                                   ______________________________________                                        Parser error codes and the different standards                                Token Name           MPEG    JPEG    H.261                                    ______________________________________                                        ERR.sub.-- NO.sub.-- ERROR                                                                         .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- EXTENSION.sub.-- TOKEN                                                                  .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA                                                                   .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- USER.sub.-- TOKEN                                                                       .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- USER.sub.-- DATA                                                                        .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- PSPARE                    .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- GSPARE                    .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- PTYPE                     .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- JPE.sub.-- FRAME  .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- JPEG.sub.-- FRAME.sub.-- LAST                                                                   .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- JPEG.sub.-- SCAN  .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- JPEG.sub.-- SCAN.sub.-- COMP                                                                    .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- DNL.sub.-- MARKER .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- MPEG.sub.-- SEQUENCE                                                                    .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- EXTRA.sub.-- PICTURE                                                                    .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- EXTRA.sub.-- SLICE                                                                      .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- VBV.sub.-- DELAY                                                                        .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- SHORT.sub.-- TOKEN                                                                      .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- H261.sub.-- PIC.sub.-- END.sub.-- UNEXPECTED                                                            .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- GN.sub.-- BACKUP          .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- GN.sub.-- SKIP.sub.-- GOB .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- NBASE.sub.-- TAB  .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- QUANT.sub.-- PRECISION                                                                          .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- SAMPLE.sub.-- PRECISION                                                                         .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- NBASE.sub.-- SCAN .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- UNEXPECTED.sub.-- DNL                                                                           .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- EOS.sub.-- UNEXPECTED                                                                           .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- RESTART.sub.-- SKIP                                                                             .check mark.                                     ERR.sub.-- SKIP.sub.-- INTRA                                                                       .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- SKIP.sub.-- DINTRA                                                                      .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- BAD.sub.-- MARKER                                                                       .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- D.sub.-- MBTYPE                                                                         .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- D.sub.-- MBEND                                                                          .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- SVP.sub.-- BACKUP                                                                       .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- SVP.sub.-- SKIP.sub.-- ROWS                                                             .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- FST.sub.-- MBA.sub.-- BACKUP                                                            .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- FST.sub.-- MBA.sub.-- SKIP                                                              .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- PICTURE.sub.-- END.sub.-- UNEXPECTED                                                    .check mark.                                             ERR.sub.-- TST.sub.-- PROGRAM                                                                      .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- NO.sub.-- PROGRAM                                                                       .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- TST.sub.-- END                                                                          .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- UCODE.sub.-- ADDR                                                                       .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                             ERR.sub.-- NOT.sub.-- IMPLEMENTED                                                                  .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                                                                          .check mark.                             ______________________________________                                    

A.14.6 Receiving User and Extension data

MPEG and JPEG use similar mechanisms to embed user and extension data.The data is preceded by a start/marker code. The Start Code Detector canbe configured to delete this data (see A.11.3.3) if the application hasno interest in such data.

A.14.6.1 Identifying the source of the data

The Parser events, ERR₋₋ EXTENSION₋₋ TOKEN and ERR₋₋ USER₋₋ TOKEN,indicate the arrival of the EXTENSION₋₋ DATA or USER₋₋ DATA Token at theVideo Demux. If these Tokens have been generated by the Start CodeDetector, (see A.11.3.3) they will carry the value of the start/markercode that caused the Start Code Detector to generate the Token (seeTable A.11.4). This value can be read by is reading the rom₋₋ revisionregister while servicing the Parser interrupt. The Video Demux willremain halted until 1 is written to parser₋₋ event (see A.6.3,"Interrupts").

A.14.6.2 Reading the data

The EXTENSION₋₋ DATA and USER₋₋ DATA Tokens are expected to beimmediately followed by a DATA Token carrying the extension or userdata. The arrival of this DATA Token at the Video Demux will generateeither an ERR₋₋ EXTENSION₋₋ DATA or an ERR₋₋ USER₋₋ DATA Parser event.The first byte of the DATA Token can be read by reading the rom₋₋revision register while servicing the interrupt.

The state of the Video Demux register, continue, determines behaviorafter the event is cleared. If this register holds the value 0, then anyremaining data in the DATA Token will be consumed by the Video Demux andno events will be generated. If the continue is set to 1, an event willbe generated as each byte of extension or user data arrives at the VideoDemux. This continues until the DATA Token is exhausted or continue isset to 0.

NOTE

1) The first byte of the extension/user data is always presented via therom₋₋ revision register regardless of the state of continue.

2) There is no event indicating that the last byte of extension/userdata has been read.

A.14.7 Receiving Extra Information

H.261 and MPEG allow information extending the coding standard to beembedded within pictures and groups of blocks (H.261) or slices (MPEG).The mechanism is different from that used for extension and user data(described in Section A.14.6). No start code precedes the data and,thus, it cannot be deleted by the Start Code Detector.

During H.261 operation, the Parser events ERR₋₋ PSPARE and ERR₋₋ GSPAREindicate the detection of this information. The corresponding eventsduring MPEG operation are ERR₋₋ EXTRA₋₋ PICTURE and ERR₋₋ EXTRA₋₋ SLICE.

When the Parser event is generated, the first byte of the extrainformation is presented through the register, rom₋₋ revision.

The state of the Video Demux register, continue, determines behaviorafter the event is cleared. If this register holds the value 0, then anyremaining extra information will be consumed by the Video Demux and noevents will be generated. If the continue is set to 1, an event will begenerated as each byte of extra information arrives at the Video Demux.This continues until the extra information is exhausted or continue isset to 0.

NOTE

1) The first byte of the extension/user data is always presented via therom₋₋ revision register regardless of the state of continue.

2) There is no event indicating that the last byte of extension/userdata has been read.

A.14.7.1 Generation of the FIELD₋₋ INFO Token

During MPEG operation, if the register field₋₋ info is set to 1, thefirst byte of any extra₋₋ information₋₋ picture is placed in the FIELD₋₋INFO Token. This behavior is not covered by the standardizationactivities of MPEG. Table A.3.2 shows the definition of the FIELD₋₋ INFOToken.

If field₋₋ info is set to 1, no Parser event will be generated for thefirst byte of extra₋₋ information₋₋ picture. However, events will begenerated for any subsequent bytes of extra₋₋ information₋₋ picture. Ifthere is only a single byte of extra₋₋ information₋₋ picture, no Parserevent will occur.

A.14.8 Changes at the MPEG sequence layer

The MPEG sequence header describes the following characteristic of thevideo about to be decoded:

horizontal and vertical size

pixel aspect ratio

picture rate

coded data rate

video buffer verifier buffer size

If any of these parameters change when the Spatial Decoder decodes asequence header, the Parser event ERR₋₋ MPEG₋₋ SEQUENCE will begenerated.

A.14.8.1 Change in picture size

If the picture size has changed, the user's software should read thevalues in horiz₋₋ pels and vert₋₋ pels and compute new values to beloaded into the registers horiz₋₋ macroblocks and vert₋₋ macroblocks.

SECTION A.15 Spatial Decoding

In accordance with the present invention, the spatial decoding occursbetween the output of the Token buffer and the output of the SpatialDecoder.

There are three main units responsible for spatial decoding: the inversemodeler, the inverse quantizer and the inverse discrete cosinetransformer. At the input to this section (from the Token buffer) DATATokens contain a run and level representation of the quantizedcoefficients. At the output (of the inverse DCT) DATA Tokens contain 8×8blocks of pixel information.

A.15.1 The Inverse Modeler

DATA Tokens in the Token buffer contain information about the values ofquantized coefficients and the number of zeros between the coefficientsthat are represented. The Inverse Modeler expands the information aboutruns of zeros so that each DATA Token contains 64 values. At this point,the values in the DATA Tokens are quantized coefficients.

The inverse modelling process is the same regardless of the codingstandard currently being used. No configuration is required.

For a better understanding of the modelling and inverse modellingfunction all requirements the reader can examine any of the picturecoding standards.

A.15.2 Inverse Quantizer

In an encoder, the quantizer divides down the output of the DCT toreduce the resolution of the DCT coefficients. In a decoder, thefunction of the inverse quantizer is to multiply up these quantized DCTcoefficients to restore them to an approximation of their originalvalues.

A.15.2.1 Overview of the standard quantization schemes

There are significant differences in the quantization schemes used byeach of the different coding standards. To obtain a detailedunderstanding of the quantization schemes used by each of the standardsthe reader should study the relevant coding standards documents.

The register iq₋₋ coding₋₋ standard configures the operation of theinverse quantizer to meet the requirements of the different standards.In normal operation, this coding register is automatically loaded by theCODING₋₋ STANDARD Token. See section A.21.1 for more information aboutcoding standard configuration.

The main difference between the quantization schemes is the source ofthe numbers by which the quantized coefficients are multiplied. Theseare outlined below. There are also detail differences in the arithmeticoperations required (rounding etc.), which are not described here.

A.15.2.1.1 H.261 lQ overview

In H.261, a single "scale factor" is used to scale the coefficients. Theencoder can change this scale factor periodically to regulate the datarate produced. Slightly different rules apply to the "DC" coefficient inintra coded blocks.

A.15.2.1.2 JPEG lQ overview

Baseline JPEG allows for a picture that contains up to 4 different colorcomponents in each scan. For each of these 4 color components, a 64entry quantization table can be specified. Each entry in these tables isused as the "scale" factor for one of the 64 quantized coefficients.

The values for the JPEG quantization tables are contained in the codedJPEG data and will be loaded automatically into the quantization tables.

A.15.2.1.3 MPEG lQ overview

MPEG uses both H.261 and JPEG quantization techniques. Like JPEG, 4quantization tables, each with 64 entries, can be used. However, use ofthe tables is quite different.

Two "types" of data are considered: intra and non-intra. A differenttable is used for each data type. Two "default" tables are defined byMPEG. One is for use with intra data and the other with non-intra data(see Table A.15.2 and Table A.15.3). These default tables must bewritten into the quantization table memory of the Spatial Decoder beforeMPEG decoding is possible.

MPEG also allows two "down loaded" quantization tables. One is for usewith intra data and the other with non-intra data. The values for thesetables are contained in the MPEG data stream and will be loaded into thequantization table memory automatically.

The value output from the tables is modified by a scale factor.

A.15.2.2 Inverse quantizer registers

                  TABLE A.15.1                                                    ______________________________________                                        Inverse quantizer registers                                                               Size/  Reset                                                      Register name                                                                             Dlr.   State  Description                                         ______________________________________                                        iq.sub.-- access                                                                          1      0      This access bit stops the operation                             rw            of the inverse quantiser so that its                                          various registers can be accessed                                             reliably. See A.6.4.1                               iq.sub.-- coding.sub.-- standard                                                          2      0      This register configures the coding                             rw            standard used by the inverse                                                  quantiser. The register can be                                                loaded directly or by a                                                       CODING.sub.-- STANDARD Token.                                                 See A.21.1                                          iq.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- address                                                          8      x      Keyhole access to the which holds                               rw            the 4 quantiser tables. See A.6.4.3                                           for more information about acces-                   iq.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- data                                                             8      x      sing registers through a keyhole.                               rw                                                                ______________________________________                                    

In the present invention, the iq₋₋ access register must be set beforethe quantization table memory can be accessed. The quantization tablememory will return the value zero if an attempt is made to read it whileiq₋₋ access is set to 0.

A.15.2.3 Configuring the inverse quantizer

In normal operation, there is no need to configure the inversequantizer's coding standard as this will be automatically configured bythe CODING₋₋ STANDARD Token.

For H.261 operation, the quantizer tables are not used. No specialconfiguration is required. For JPEG operation, the tables required bythe inverse quantizer should be automatically loaded with informationextracted from the coded data.

MPEG operation requires that the default quantization tables are loaded.This should be done while iq₋₋ access is set to 1. The values in TableA.15.2 should be written into locations 0x00 to 0x3F of the inversequantizer's extended address space (accessible through the keyholeregisters iq₋₋ keyhole₋₋ address and iq₋₋ keyhole₋₋ data). Similarly,the values in Table A.15.3 should be written into locations 0x40 to 0x7Fof the inverse quantizer's extended address space.

                  TABLE A.15.2                                                    ______________________________________                                        Default MPEG table for intra coded blocks                                     i     w.sub.i,0.sup.b                                                                        i     w.sub.i,0                                                                            i   w.sub.i,0                                                                            i   w.sub.i,0                          ______________________________________                                        0     8        16    27     32  29     48  35                                 1     16       17    27     33  29     49  38                                 2     16       18    26     34  27     50  38                                 3     19       19    26     35  27     51  40                                 4     16       20    26     36  29     52  40                                 5     19       21    26     37  29     53  40                                 6     22       22    27     38  32     54  48                                 7     22       23    27     39  32     55  48                                 8     22       24    27     40  34     56  46                                 9     22       25    29     41  34     57  46                                 10    22       26    29     42  37     58  56                                 11    22       27    29     43  38     59  56                                 12    26       28    34     44  37     60  58                                 13    24       29    34     45  35     61  69                                 14    26       30    34     46  35     62  69                                 15    27       31    29     47  34     63  83                                 ______________________________________                                         .sup.a. Offset from start of quantization table memory                        .sup.b. Quantization table value.                                        

                  TABLE A.15.3                                                    ______________________________________                                        Default MPEG table for non-intra coded blocks                                 i     w.sub.i,1                                                                              i     w.sub.i,1                                                                            i   w.sub.i,1                                                                            i   w.sub.i,1                          ______________________________________                                        0     16       16    16     32  16     48  16                                 1     16       17    16     33  16     49  16                                 2     16       18    16     34  16     50  16                                 3     16       19    16     35  16     51  16                                 4     16       20    16     36  16     52  16                                 5     16       21    16     37  16     53  16                                 6     16       22    16     38  16     54  16                                 7     16       23    16     39  16     55  16                                 8     16       24    16     40  16     56  16                                 9     16       25    16     41  16     57  16                                 10    16       26    16     42  16     58  16                                 11    16       27    16     43  16     59  16                                 12    16       26    16     44  16     60  16                                 13    16       29    16     45  16     61  16                                 14    18       30    16     46  16     62  16                                 15    16       31    16     47  16     63  16                                 ______________________________________                                    

A.15.2.4 configuring tables from Tokens

As an alternative to configuring the inverse quantizer tables via theMPI, they can be initialized by Tokens. These Tokens can be supplied viaeither the coded data port or the MPI.

The QUANT₋₋ TABLE Token is described in Table A.3.2. It has a two bitfield tt which specifies which of the 4 (0 to 3) table locations isdefined by the Token. For MPEG operation, the default definitions oftables 0 and 1 need to be loaded.

A. 15.2.5 quantization table values

For both JPEG and MPEG, the quantization table entries are 8 bitnumbers. The values 255 to 1 are legal. The value 0 is illegal.

A.15.2.6 Number ordering of quantization tables

The quantization table values are used in "zig-zag" scan order (see thecoding standards). The tables should be viewed as a one dimensionalarray of 64 values (rather than a 8×8 array). The table entries at loweraddresses correspond to the lower frequency DCT coefficients.

When quantization table values are carried by a QUANT₋₋ TABLE Token, thefirst value after the Token header is the table entry for the "DC"coefficient.

A.15.2.7 Inverse quantizer test registers

                                      TABLE A.15.4                                __________________________________________________________________________    Inverse quantiser test registers                                              Register name                                                                           Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                              __________________________________________________________________________    iq.sub.-- quant.sub.-- scale                                                            5          This register holds the current value of the                                  quantisation scale factor, it is                                   rw         loaded by the QUANT.sub.-- SCALE Token. This is not                           used during JPEG                                                              operation.                                               iq.sub.-- component                                                                     2          This register holds the two bit component ID taken                            from the most recent                                               rw         DATA Token head. This value is involved in the                                selection of the                                                              quantiser table.                                                              The register will also hold the table ID after a                              QUANT.sub.-- TABLE Token                                                      arrives to load the table.                               iq.sub.-- prediction.sub.-- mode                                                        2          This holds the two LSBs of the most recent                                    PREDICTION.sub.-- MODE                                             rw         Token.                                                   iq.sub.-- jpeg.sub.-- indirection                                                       8          This register relates the two bit component ID                                number of DATA Token                                               rw         to the table number of the quantisation table that                            should be used.                                                               Bits 1:0 specify the table number that will be sued                           with component 0                                                              Bits 3:2 specify the table number that will be sued                           with component 1                                                              Bits 5:4 specify the table number that will be sued                           with component 2                                                              Bits 7:6 specify the table number that will be sued                           with component 3                                                              This register is loaded by JPEG.sub.-- TABLE.sub.--                           SELECT Tokens.                                           iq.sub.-- mpeg.sub.-- indirection                                                       2    0     This two bit register records whether to use default                          or down loaded                                                     rw         quantisation tables with the intra and non-intra                              data.                                                                         A 0 in the bit position indicates that the default                            table should be used.                                                         A 1 indicates that a down loaded table should be                              used.                                                                         Bit 0 refers to intra data. Bit 1 refers to                                   non-intra data. This register is                                              normally loaded by the Token MPEG.sub.-- TABLE.sub.--                          SELECT.                                                 __________________________________________________________________________

A.15.3 Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform

The inverse discrete transform processor of the present invention meetsthe requirements set out in CCITT recommendation H.261, the IEEEspecification P1180 and complies with the requirements described incurrent draft revision of MPEG.

The inverse discrete cosine transform process is the same regardless ofwhich coding standard is used. No, configuration by the user isrequired.

There are two events associated with the inverse discrete transformprocessor.

                                      TABLE A.15.5                                __________________________________________________________________________    Inverse DCT event registers                                                   Register name                                                                            Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                             __________________________________________________________________________    idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- few.sub.-- event                                                  1    0     The inverse DCT requires that all DATA Tokens                                 contain exactly 64                                                 rw         values. If less than 64 values are found then the                             too-few event will be                                   idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- few.sub.-- mask                                                   1    0     generated. If the mask register is set to 1 then an                           interrupt can be                                                   rw         generated and the inverse DCT will halt.                                      This event should only occur following an error in                            the coded data.                                         idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- many.sub.-- event                                                 1    0     The inverse DCT requires that all DATA Tokens                                 contain exactly 64                                                 rw         values. If more than 64 values are found then the                             too-many event will be                                  idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- many.sub.-- mask                                                  1    0     generated. If the mask register is set to 1 then an                           interrupt can be                                                   rw         generated and the inverse DCT will halt.                                      This event should only occur following an error in                            the coded data.                                         __________________________________________________________________________

For a better understanding of the DCT and inverse DCT function thereader can examine any of the picture coding standards.

SECTION A.16 Connecting to the output of Spatial Decoder

The output of the Spatial Decoder is a standard Token Port with 9 bitwide data words. See Section A.4 for more information about theelectrical behavior of the interface.

The Tokens present at the output will depend on the coding standardemployed. By way of example, this section of the disclosure looks at theoutput of the Spatial Decoder when configured for JPEG operation. Thissection also describes the Token sequence observed at the output of theTemporal Decoder during JPEG operation as the Temporal Decoder doesn'tmodify the Token sequence that results from decoding JPEG.

However, MPEG and H.261 both require the use of the Temporal Decoder.See section A.19 for information about connecting to the output of theTemporal Decoder when configured for MPEG and H.261 operation.

Furthermore, this section identifies which of the Tokens are availableat the output of the Spatial Decoder and which are most useful whendesigning circuits to display that output. Other Tokens will be present,but are not needed to display the output and, therefore, are notdiscussed here.

This section concentrates on showing:

How the start and end of sequences can be identified.

How the start and end of pictures can be identified.

How to identify when to display the picture.

How to identify where in the display the picture data should be placed.

A.16.1 Structure of JPEG pictures

This section provides an overview of some features of the JPEG syntax.Please refer to the coding standard for full details.

JPEG provides a variety of mechanisms for encoding individual pictures.JPEG makes no attempt to describe how a collection of pictures could beencoded together to provide a mechanism for encoding video.

The Spatial Decoder, in accordance with the present invention, supportsJPEG's baseline sequential mode of operation. There are three mainlevels in the syntax: Image, Frame and Scan. A sequential image onlycontains a single frame. A frame can contain between 1 and 256 differentimage (color) components. These image components can be grouped, in avariety of ways, into scans. Each scan can contain between 1 and 4 imagecomponents (see FIG. 81 "Overview of JPEG baseline sequentialstructure").

If a scan contains a single image component, it is non-interleaved, ifit contains more than one image component, it is an interleaved scan. Aframe can contain a mixture of interleaved and non-interleaved scans.The number of scans that a frame can contain is determined by the 256limit on the number of image components that a frame can contain.

Within an interleaved scan, data is organized into minimum coding units(MCUs) which are analogous to the macroblock used in MPEG and H.261.These MCUs are raster ordered within a picture. In a non-interleavedscan, the MCU is a single 8×8 block. Again, these are raster organized.

The Spatial Decoder can readily decode JPEG data containing 1 to 4different color components. Files describing greater numbers ofcomponents can also be decoded. However, some reconfiguration betweenscans may be required to accommodate the next set of components to bedecoded.

A.16.2 Token sequence

The JPEG markers codes are converted to an analogous MPEG named Token bythe Start Code Detector (see Table A.11.4, see FIG. 82 "Tokenized JPEGpicture").

SECTION A.17 Temporal Decoder

30 MH_(z) operation

Provides temporal decoding for MPEG & H.261 video decoders

H.261 CIF and QCIF formats

MPEG video resolutions up to 704×480, 30 Hz, 4:2:0

Flexible chroma sampling formats

Can re-order the MPEG picture sequence

Glue-less DRAM interface

Single +5V supply

208 pin PQFP package

Max. power dissipation 2.5 W

Uses standard page node DRAM

The Temporal Decoder is a companion chip to the Spatial Decoder. Itprovides the temporal decoding required by H.261 and MPEG.

The Temporal Decoder implements all the prediction forming featuresrequired by MPEG and H.261. With a single 4 Mb DRAM (e.g., 512 k×8) theTemporal Decoder can decode CIF and QCIF H.261 video. With 8 Mb of DRAM(e.g., two 256 k×16) the 704×480, 30 Hz, 4:2:0 MPES video can bedecoded.

The Temporal Decoder is not required for Intra coding schemes (such asJPEG). If included in a multi-standard decoder, the Temporal Decoderwill pass decoded JPEG pictures through to its output.

Note

The above values are merely illustrative, by way of example and notnecessarily by way of limitation, of one embodiment of the presentinvention. It will be appreciated that other values and ranges may alsobe used without departing from the invention.

A.17.1 Temporal Decoder Signals

                                      TABLE A.17.1                                __________________________________________________________________________    Temporal Decoder signals                                                      Signal Name                                                                            I/O                                                                             Pin Number        Description                                      __________________________________________________________________________    in.sub.-- data 8:0!                                                                    I 173, 172, 171, 169, 168, 167, 166, 164,                                                         Input Port. This is a standard two wire                     163               interface normally connected to the              in.sub.-- extn                                                                         I 174               Output Port of the Spatial Decoder.              in.sub.-- valid                                                                        I 162               See sections A.4 and                             in.sub.-- accept                                                                       O 161               A.18.1                                           enable 1:0!                                                                            I 126, 127          Micro Processor Interface (MPI).                 rw       I 125                                                                addr 7:0!                                                                              I 137, 136, 135, 133, 132, 131, 130, 128                             data 7:0!                                                                              O 152, 151, 149, 147, 145, 143, 141, 140                                                          See A.6.1 on page 59.                            irq      O 154                                                                DRAM.sub.-- data 31:0!                                                                 I/O                                                                             15, 17, 19, 20, 22, 25, 27, 30, 31, 33, 35                                                      DRAM Interface.                                             38, 39, 42, 44, 47, 49, 57, 59, 61, 63, 66,                                   68, 70, 72, 74, 76, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85                                                          See section A.5.2                                DRAM.sub.-- addr 10:0!                                                                 O 184, 186, 188, 189, 192, 193, 195, 197,                                       199, 200, 203                                                      RAS      O  11                                                                CAS 3:0! O 2, 4, 6, 8                                                         WE       O  12                                                                OE       O 204                                                                DRAM.sub.-- enable                                                                     I 112                                                                out.sub.-- data 7:0!                                                                   O 89, 90, 92, 93, 94, 95, 97, 96                                                                  Output Port. This is a standard two wire         out.sub.-- extn                                                                        O  87               interface.                                       out.sub.-- valid                                                                       O  99               See sections A.4 and A.19                        out.sub.-- accept                                                                      I 100                                                                tck      I 115               JTAG port.                                       tdi      I 116               See section A.8                                  tdo      O 120                                                                tms      I 117                                                                trst     I 121                                                                decoder.sub.-- clock                                                                   I 177               The main decoder clock. See                                                   Table A.7.2                                      reset    I 160               Reset.                                           __________________________________________________________________________

                                      TABLE A.17.2                                __________________________________________________________________________    Temporal Decoder Test signals                                                 Signal Name                                                                         I/O                                                                             Pin Num.                                                                           Description                                                      __________________________________________________________________________    tph0ish                                                                             I 122  If override = 1 then tph0ish and tph1ish are inputs for the                   on-chip                                                          tph1ish                                                                             I 123  two phase clock.                                                 override                                                                            I 110  For normal operation set override = 0. tph0ish and tph1ish                    are                                                                           ignored (so connect to GND or V.sub.DD).                         chiptest                                                                            I 111  Set chiptest = 0 for normal operation.                           tloop I 114  Connect to GND or V.sub.DD duing normal operation.               ramtest                                                                             I 109  If ramtest = 1 test of the on-chip RAMs is enabled.                           Set ramtest = 0 for normal operation.                            pllselect                                                                           I 178  If pllselect = 0 the on-chip phase locked loops are                           disabled.                                                                     Set pllselect = 1 for normal operation.                          ti    I 180  Two clocks required by the DRAM interface during test                         operation.                                                       tq    I 179  Connect to GND or V.sub.DD during normal operation.              pdout O 207  These two pins are connections for an                            pdin  I 206  external filter for the phase lock loop.                         __________________________________________________________________________

                                      TABLE A.17.3                                __________________________________________________________________________    Temporal Decoder Pin Assignments                                              Signal Name                                                                           Pin                                                                              Signal Name                                                                          Pin                                                                              Signal Name                                                                           Pin                                                                              Signal Name                                                                           Pin                                   __________________________________________________________________________    nc      208                                                                              nc     156                                                                              nc      104                                                                              nc      52                                    test pin                                                                              207                                                                              nc     155                                                                              nc      103                                                                              nc      51                                    test pin                                                                              206                                                                              irq    154                                                                              nc      102                                                                              nc      50                                    GND     205                                                                              nc     153                                                                              VDD     101                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 15!                                                                  49                                    OE      204                                                                              data 7!                                                                              152                                                                              out.sub.-- accept                                                                     100                                                                              nc      48                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 0!                                                                   203                                                                              data 6!                                                                              151                                                                              out.sub.-- valid                                                                      99 DRAM.sub.-- data 16!                                                                  47                                    VDD     202                                                                              nc     150                                                                              out.sub.-- data 0!                                                                    98 nc      46                                    nc      201                                                                              data 5!                                                                              149                                                                              out.sub.-- data 1!                                                                    97 GND     45                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 1!                                                                   200                                                                              nc     148                                                                              GND     96 DRAM.sub.-- data 17!                                                                  44                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 2!                                                                   199                                                                              data 4!                                                                              147                                                                              out.sub.-- data 2!                                                                    95 nc      43                                    GND     198                                                                              GND    146                                                                              out.sub.-- data 3!                                                                    94 DRAM.sub.-- data 18!                                                                  42                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 3!                                                                   197                                                                              data 3!                                                                              145                                                                              out.sub.-- data 4!                                                                    93 VDD     41                                    nc      196                                                                              nc     144                                                                              out.sub.-- data 5!                                                                    92 nc      40                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 4!                                                                   195                                                                              data 2!                                                                              143                                                                              VDD     91 DRAM.sub.-- data 19!                                                                  39                                    VDD     194                                                                              nc     142                                                                              out.sub.-- data 6!                                                                    90 DRAM.sub.-- data 20!                                                                  38                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 5!                                                                   193                                                                              data 1!                                                                              141                                                                              out.sub.-- data 7!                                                                    89 nc      37                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 6!                                                                   192                                                                              data 0!                                                                              140                                                                              nc      88 GND     36                                    nc      191                                                                              nc     139                                                                              out.sub.-- extn                                                                       87 DRAM.sub.-- data 21!                                                                  35                                    GND     190                                                                              VDD    138                                                                              GND     86 nc      34                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 7!                                                                   189                                                                              addr 7!                                                                              137                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 0!                                                                   85 DRAM.sub.-- data 22!                                                                  33                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 6!                                                                   188                                                                              addr 6!                                                                              136                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 1!                                                                   84 VDD     32                                    VDD     187                                                                              addr 5                                                                               135                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 2!                                                                   83 DRAM.sub.-- data 23!                                                                  31                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 9!                                                                   186                                                                              GND    134                                                                              VDD     82 DRAM.sub.-- data 24!                                                                  30                                    nc      185                                                                              addr 4!                                                                              133                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 3!                                                                   81 nc      29                                    DRAM.sub.-- addr 10!                                                                  184                                                                              addr 3!                                                                              132                                                                              nc      80 GND     28                                    GND     183                                                                              addr 2!                                                                              131                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 4!                                                                   79 DRAM.sub.-- data 25!                                                                  27                                    nc      182                                                                              addr 1!                                                                              130                                                                              GND     78 nc      26                                    VDD     181                                                                              VDD    129                                                                              nc      77 DRAM.sub.-- data 26!                                                                  25                                    test pin                                                                              180                                                                              addr 0!                                                                              128                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 5!                                                                   76 nc      24                                    test pin                                                                              179                                                                              enable 0!                                                                            127                                                                              nc      75 VDD     23                                    test pin                                                                              178                                                                              enable 1!                                                                            126                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 6!                                                                   74 DRAM.sub.-- data 27!                                                                  22                                    decoder.sub.-- clock                                                                  177                                                                              rw     125                                                                              VDD     73 nc      21                                    nc      176                                                                              GND    124                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 7!                                                                   72 DRAM.sub.-- data 28!                                                                  20                                    GND     175                                                                              test pin                                                                             123                                                                              nc      71 DRAM.sub.-- data 29!                                                                  19                                    in.sub.-- extn                                                                        174                                                                              test pin                                                                             122                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 8!                                                                   70 GND     18                                    in.sub.-- data 8!                                                                     173                                                                              trst   121                                                                              GND     69 DRAM.sub.-- data 30                                                                   17                                    in.sub.-- data 7!                                                                     172                                                                              tdo    120                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 9!                                                                   68 nc      16                                    in.sub.-- data 6!                                                                     171                                                                              nc     119                                                                              nc      67 DRAM.sub.-- data 31!                                                                  15                                    VDD     170                                                                              VDD    118                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 10!                                                                  66 VDD     14                                    in.sub.-- data 5!                                                                     169                                                                              tms    117                                                                              VDD     65 nc      13                                    in.sub.-- data 4!                                                                     168                                                                              tdi    116                                                                              nc      64 WE      12                                    in.sub.-- data 3!                                                                     167                                                                              tck    115                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 11!                                                                  63 RAS     11                                    in.sub.-- data 2!                                                                     166                                                                              test pin                                                                             114                                                                              nc      62 nc      10                                    GND     165                                                                              GND    113                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 12!                                                                  61 GND     9                                     in.sub.-- data 1!                                                                     164                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- enable                                                                   112                                                                              GND     60 CAS 0!  8                                     in.sub.-- data 0!                                                                     163                                                                              test pin                                                                             111                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 13!                                                                  59 nc      7                                     in.sub.-- valid                                                                       162                                                                              test pin                                                                             110                                                                              nc      58 CAS 1!  6                                     in.sub.-- accept                                                                      161                                                                              test pin                                                                             109                                                                              DRAM.sub.-- data 14!                                                                  57 VDD     5                                     reset   160                                                                              nc     108                                                                              VDD     56 CAS 2!  4                                     VDD     159                                                                              nc     107                                                                              nc      55 nc      3                                     nc      158                                                                              nc     106                                                                              nc      54 CAS 3!  2                                     nc      157                                                                              nc     105                                                                              nc      53 nc      1                                     __________________________________________________________________________

A.17.1.1 "nc" no connect pins

The pins labelled nc in Table A.17.3 are not currently used in thepresent invention and are reserved for future products. These pinsshould be left unconnected. They should not be connected to V_(DD), GND,each other or any other signal.

A.17.1.2 V_(DD) and GND pins

As will be appreciated all the V_(DD) and GND pins provided must beconnected to the appropriate power supply. The device will not operatecorrectly unless all the V_(DD) and GND pins are correctly used.

A.17.1.3 Test pin connections for normal operation

Nine pins on the Temporal Decoder are reserved for internal test use.

A.17.1.4 JTAG pins for normal operation

See Section A.8.1.

                  TABLE A.17.5                                                    ______________________________________                                        Overview of Temporal Decoder memory map                                       Addr. (hex)                                                                             Register Name        See table                                      ______________________________________                                        0x00 ... 0x01                                                                           Interrupt service area                                                                             A.17.6                                         0x02 ... 0x07                                                                           Not used                                                            0x08      Chip access          A.17.7                                         0x09 ... 0x0F                                                                           Not used                                                            0x10      Picture sequencing   A.17.8                                         0x11 ... 0x1F                                                                           Not used                                                            0x20 ... 0x2E                                                                           DRAM interface configuration registers                                                             A.17.9                                         0x2F ... 0x3F                                                                           Not used                                                            0x40 ... 0x53                                                                           Buffer configuration A.17.8                                         0x54 ... 0x5F                                                                           Not used                                                            x060 ... 0xFF                                                                           Test registers       A.17.11                                        ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.17.6                                                    ______________________________________                                        Interrupt service area registers                                              Addr.   Bit                                                                   (hex)   num.           Register Name                                          ______________________________________                                        0x00    7              chip.sub.-- event                                              6:2            not used                                                       1              chip.sub.-- stopped.sub.-- event                               0              count.sub.-- error.sub.-- event                        0x01    7              chip.sub.-- mask                                               6:2            not used                                                       1              chip.sub.-- stopped.sub.-- mask                                0              count.sub.-- error.sub.-- mask                         ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.17.7                                                    ______________________________________                                        Chip access register                                                          Addr.     Bit                                                                 (hex)     num.            Register Name                                       ______________________________________                                        0x08      7:1             not used                                                      0               chip.sub.-- access                                  ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.17.8                                                    ______________________________________                                        Picture sequencing                                                            Addr.    Bit                                                                  (hex)    num.           Register Name                                         ______________________________________                                        0x10     7:1            not used                                                       0              MPEG.sub.-- reordering                                ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.17.9                                                    ______________________________________                                        DRAM interface configuration registers                                        Addr.   Bit                                                                   (hex)   num.         Register Name                                            ______________________________________                                        0x20    7:5          not used                                                         4:0          page.sub.-- start.sub.-- length 4:0!                     0x21    7:4          not used                                                         3:0          read.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length 3:0!                     0x22    7:4          not used                                                         3:0          write.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length 3:0!                    0x23    7:4          not used                                                         3:0          refresh.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length 3:0!                  0x24    7:4          not used                                                         3:0          CAS.sub.-- falling 3:0!                                  0x25    7:4          not used                                                         3:0          RAS.sub.-- falling 3:0!                                  0x26    7:1          not used                                                         0            Interface.sub.-- timing.sub.-- access                    0x27    7:0          not used                                                 0x28    7:6          RAS.sub.-- strength 2:0!                                         5:3          OEWE.sub.-- strength 3:0!                                        2:0          DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- strength 3:0!                    0x29    7            not used                                                         6:4          DRAM.sub.-- addr.sub.-- strength 3:0!                            3:1          CAS.sub.-- strength 3:0!                                         0            RAS.sub.-- strength 3!                                   0x28    7            not used                                                         6:4          DRAM.sub.-- addr.sub.-- strength 3:0!                            3:1          CAS.sub.-- strength 3:0!                                         0            RAS.sub.-- strength 3!                                   0x29    7:6          RAS.sub.-- strength 2:0!                                         5:3          OEWE.sub.-- strength 3:0!                                        2:0          DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- strength 3:0!                    0x2A    7:0          refresh.sub.-- interval                                  0x2B    7:0          not used                                                 0x2C    7:6          not used                                                         5            DRAM.sub.-- enable                                               4            no.sub.-- refresh                                                3:2          row.sub.-- address.sub.-- bits 1:0!                              1:0          DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- width 1:0!                       0x2D    7:0          not used                                                 0x2E    7:0          Test registers                                           ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.17.10                                                   ______________________________________                                        Buffer configuration registers                                                Addr.   Bit                                                                   (hex)   num.         Register Name                                            ______________________________________                                        0x40    7:0          not used                                                 0x41    7:2                                                                           1:0          picture.sub.-- buffer.sub.-- 0 17:0!                     0x42    7:0                                                                   0x43    7:0                                                                   0x44    7:0          not used                                                 0x45    7:2                                                                           1:0          picture.sub.-- buffer.sub.-- 1 17:0!                     0x46    7:0                                                                   0x47    7:0                                                                   0x48    7:0          not used                                                 0x49    7:1                                                                           0            component.sub.-- offset.sub.-- 0 16:0!                   0x4A    7:0                                                                   0x4B    7:0                                                                   0x4C    7:0          not used                                                 0x4D    7:1                                                                           0            component.sub.-- offset.sub.-- 1 16:0!                   0x4E    7:0                                                                   0x4F    7:0                                                                   0x50    7:0          not used                                                 0x51    7:1                                                                           0            component.sub.-- offset.sub.-- 2 16:0!                   0x52    7:0                                                                   0x53    7:0                                                                   ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.17.11                                                   ______________________________________                                        Test registers                                                                Addr.    Bit                                                                  (hex)    num.           Register Name                                         ______________________________________                                        0x2E     7...4          PLL resistors                                                  3...0                                                                0x60     7...6          not used                                                       5...4          coding.sub.-- standard 1:0!                                    3...2          picture.sub.-- type 1:0!                                       1              H261.sub.-- filt                                               0              H261.sub.-- s.sub.-- f                                0x61     7...6          component.sub.-- id                                            5...4          prediction.sub.-- mode                                         3...0          max.sub.-- sampling                                   0x62     7...0          samp.sub.-- h                                         0x63     7...0          samp.sub.-- v                                         0x64     7...0          back.sub.-- h                                         0x65     7...0                                                                0x66     7...0          back.sub.-- v                                         0x67     7...0                                                                0x68     7...0          forw.sub.-- h                                         0x69     7...0                                                                0x6A     7...0          forw.sub.-- v                                         0x6B     7...0                                                                0x6C     7...0          width.sub.-- in.sub.-- mo                             0x6D     7...0                                                                ______________________________________                                    

SECTION A.18 Temporal Decoder Operation

A.18.1 Data input

The input data port of the Temporal Decoder is a standard Token Portwith 9 bit wide data words. In most applications, this will be connecteddirectly to the output Token Port of the Spatial Decoder. See SectionA.4 for more information about the electrical behavior of thisinterface.

A.18.2 Automatic configuration

Parameters relating to the coded video's picture format areautomatically loaded into registers within the Temporal Decoder byTokens generated by the Spatial Decoder.

                  TABLE A.18.1                                                    ______________________________________                                        Configuration of Temporal Decoder via Tokens                                  Token        Configuration performed                                          ______________________________________                                        CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                                                     The coding standard of the Temporal                                           Decoder is automatically configured by the                                    CODING.sub.-- STANDARD Token.                                                 This is generated by the Spatial                                              Decoder each time a new                                                       sequence is started. See FIG. 58                                 DEFINE.sub.-- SAMPLING                                                                     The horizontal and vertical chroma                                            sampling information for each of the color                                    components is automatically configured by                                     DEFINE.sub.-- SAMPLING Tokens.                                   HORIZONTAL.sub.-- MBS                                                                      The horizontal width of pictures in macro                                     blocks is automatically configured by                                         HORIZONTAL.sub.-- MBS Token.                                     ______________________________________                                    

A.18.3 Manual configuration

The user must configure (via the microprocessor interface) applicationdependent factors.

A.18.3.1 When to configure

The Temporal Decoder should only be configured when no data processingis taking place. This is the default state after reset is removed. TheTemporal Decoder can be stopped to allow re-configuration by writing 1to the chip₋₋ access register. After configuration is complete, 0 shouldbe written to chip₋₋ access.

See Section A.5.3 for details of when to configure the DRAM interface.

A.18.3.2 DRAM interface

The DRAM interface timing must be configured before it is possible todecode predictively coded video (e.g., H.261 or MPEG). See Section A.5,"DRAM Interface".

                                      TABLE A.18.2                                __________________________________________________________________________    Temporal Decoder registers                                                    Register name                                                                           Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                              __________________________________________________________________________    chip.sub.-- access                                                                      1    1     Writing 1 to chip.sub.-- access requests that the                             Temporal Decoder halt                                              rw         operation to allow re-configuration. The Temporal                             Decoder will                                             chip.sub.-- stopped.sub.-- event                                                        1    0     continue operating normally until it reaches the end                          of the current                                                     rw         video sequence. After reset is removed chip.sub.--                            access=: e the                                           chip.sub.-- stopped.sub.-- mask                                                         1    0     Temporal Decoder is halted.                                        rw         When the chip stops a chip stopped event will occur,                          if                                                                            chip.sub.-- stopped.sub.-- mask = 1 an interrupt                              will be generated.                                       count.sub.-- error.sub.-- event                                                         1    0     The Temporal Decoder has an adder that adds                                   predictions to error                                               rw         data. If there is a difference between the number of                          error data bytes                                         count.sub.-- error.sub.-- mask                                                          1    0     and the number of prediction data bytes then a count                          error event is                                                     rw         generated.                                                                    If count.sub.-- error.sub.-- mask = 1 an interrupt                            will be generated and                                                         prediction forming will stop.                                                 This event should only arise following a hardware                             error.                                                   picture.sub.-- buffer.sub.-- 0                                                          18   x     These specify the base addresses for the picture                              buffers.                                                           rw                                                                  picture.sub.-- buffer.sub.-- 1                                                          18   x                                                                        rw                                                                  component.sub.-- offset.sub.-- 0                                                        17   x     These specify the offset from the picture buffer                              pointer at which                                                   rw         each of the colour components is stored. Data with                            component ID =                                           component.sub.-- offset.sub.-- 1                                                        17   x     n is stored starting at the position indicated by                  rw         component.sub.-- offset.sub.-- n. See A.3.5.1,                                "Component identification                                component.sub.-- offset.sub.-- 2                                                        17   x     number"                                                            rw                                                                  MPEG.sub.-- reordering                                                                  1    0     Setting this register to 1 makes the Temporal                                 Decoder change the                                                 rw         picture order from the non-causal MPEG picture                                sequence to the                                                               correct display order by the. See A.18.3.5                                    This register should is ignored during JPEG and                               H.261 operation                                          __________________________________________________________________________

A.18.3.3 Numbers in picture buffer registers

The picture buffer pointers (18 bit) and the component offset (17 bit)registers specify a block (8×8 bytes) address, not a byte address.

A.18.3.4 Picture buffer allocation

To decode predictively coded video (either H.261 or MPEG) the TemporalDecoder must manage two picture buffers. See Section A.18.4 and A.18.4.4for more information about how these buffers are used.

The user must ensure that there is sufficient memory above each of thepicture buffer pointers (picture₋₋ buffer₋₋ 0 and picture₋₋ buffer₋₋ 1)to store a single picture of the required video format (withoutoverlapping with the other picture buffer) Normally, one of the picturebuffer pointers will be set to 0 (i.e., the bottom of memory) and theother will be set to point to the middle of the memory space.

A.18.3.4.1 Normal configuration for MPEG or H.261

H.261 and MPEG both use a 4:1:1 ratio between the different colorcomponents (i.e., there are 4 times as many luminance pels as there arepels in either of the chrominance components).

As documented in Section A.3.5.1, "Component Identification number",component 0 will be the luminance component and components 1 and 2 willbe chrominance.

An example configuration of the component offset registers is to setcomponent₋₋ offset₋₋ 0 to 0 so that component 0 starts at the picturebuffer pointer. Similarly, component₋₋ offset₋₋ 1 could be set to 4/6 ofthe picture buffer size and component₋₋ offset₋₋ 2 could be set to 5/6of the picture buffer size.

A.18.3.5 Picture sequence re-ordering

MPEG uses three different picture types: Intra (I), Predicted (P) andBidirectionally interpolated (B). B pictures are based on predictionsfrom two pictures: one from the future and one from the past. Thepicture order is modified at the encoder so that I and P picture can bedecoded from the coded date before they are required to decode Bpictures.

The picture sequence must be corrected before these pictures can bedisplayed. The Temporal Decoder can provide this picture re-ordering (bysetting register MPEG₋₋ reordering=1). Alternatively, the user may wishto implement the picture re-ordering as part of his display interfacefunction. Configuring the Temporal Decoder to provide picturere-ordering may reduce the video resolution that can be decoded, seeSection A.18.5.

A.18.4 Prediction forming

The prediction forming requirements of H.261 decoding and MPEG decodingare quite different. The CODING₋₋ STANDARD Token automaticallyconfigures the Temporal Decoder to accommodate the predictionrequirements of the different standards.

A.18.4.1 JPEG Operation

When configured for JPEG operation no predictions are performed sinceJPEG requires no temporal decoding.

A.18.4.2 H.261 Operation

In H.261, predictions are only from the picture just decoded. Motionvectors are only specified to integer pixel accuracy. The encoder canspecify that a low pass filter be applied to the result of anyprediction.

As each picture is decoded, it is written in to a picture buffer in theoff-chip DRAM so that it can be used in decoding the next picture.Decoded pictures appear at the output of the Temporal Decoder as theyare written into the off-chip DRAM.

For full details of prediction, and the arithmetic operations involved,the reader is directed to the H.261 standard. The Temporal Decoder ofthe present invention is fully compliant with the requirements of H.261.

A.18.4.3 MPEG Operation (without re-ordering)

The operation of the Temporal Decoder changes for each of the threedifferent MPEG picture types (I, P and B).

"I" pictures require no further decoding by the Temporal Decoder, butmust be stored in a picture buffer (frame store) for later use indecoding P and B pictures.

Decoding P pictures requires forming predictions from a previouslydecoded P or I picture. The decoded P picture is stored in a picturebuffer for use in decoding P and B pictures. MPEG allows motion vectorsspecified to half pixel accuracy. On-chip filters provide interpolationto support this half pixel accuracy.

B pictures can require predictions from both of the picture buffers. Aswith P pictures, half pixel motion vector resolution accuracy requireson chip interpolation of the picture information. B pictures are notstored in the off-chip buffers. They are merely transient.

All pictures appear at the output port of the Temporal Decoder as theyare decoded. So, the picture sequence will be the same as that in thecoded MPEG data (see the upper part of FIG. 85).

For full details of prediction, and the arithmetic operations involved,the reader is directed to the proposed MPEG standard draft. Theserequirements are met by the Temporal Decoder of the present invention.

A.18.4.4 MPEG Operation (with re-ordering)

When configured for MPEG operation with picture re-ordering (MPEG₋₋reordering=1), the prediction forming operations are as described abovein Section A.18.4.3. However, additional data transfers are performed tore-order the picture sequence.

B picture decoding is as described in section A.18.4.3. However, I and Ppictures are not output as they are decoded. Instead, they are writteninto the off-chip buffers (as previously described) and are read outonly when a subsequent I or P picture arrives for decoding.

A.18.4.4.1 Decoder start-up characteristics

The output of the first I picture is delayed until the subsequent P (orI) picture starts to decode. This should be taken into considerationwhen estimating the start-up characteristics of a video decoder.

A.18.4.4.2 Decoder shut-down characteristics

The Temporal Decoder relies on subsequent P or I pictures to flushprevious pictures out of its off-chip buffers (frame stores). This hasconsequences at the end of video sequences and when starting new videosequences. The Spatial Decoder provides facilities to create a "fake"I/P picture at the end of a video sequence to flush out the last P (orI) picture. However, this "fake" picture will be flushed out when asubsequent video sequence starts.

The Spatial Decoder provides the option to suppress this "fake" picture.This may be useful where it is known that a new video sequence will besupplied to the decoder immediately after an old sequence is finished.The first picture in this new sequence will flush out the last pictureof the previous sequence.

A.18.5 Video resolution

The video resolution that the Temporal Decoder can support when decodingMPEG is limited by the memory bandwidth of its DRAM interface. For MPEG,two cases need to be considered: with and without MPEG picturere-ordering.

Sections A.18.5.2 and A.18.5.3 discuss the worst case requirementsrequired by the current draft of the MPEG specification. Subsets of MPEGcan be envisioned that have lower memory bandwidth requirements. Forexample, using only integer resolution motion vectors or, alternatively,not using B pictures, significantly reduce the memory bandwidthrequirements. Such subsets are not analyzed here.

A.18.5.1 Characteristics of DRAM interface

The number of cycles taken to transfer data across the DRAM interfacedepends on a number of factors:

The timing configuration of the DRAM interface to suite the DRAMemployed

The data bus width (8, 16 or 32 bits)

The type of data transfer:

8×8 block read or write

for prediction to half pixel accuracy

for prediction to integer pixel accuracy

See section A.5, "DRAM Interface", for more information about the detailconfiguration of the DRAM interface.

Table A.18.3 shows how many DRAM interface "cycles" are required foreach type of data transfer.

                  TABLE A.18.3                                                    ______________________________________                                        Data transfer times for Temporal Decoder                                                           form prediction                                                                           form prediction                              Data bus width                                                                         read or write 8x8                                                                         (half pixel (integer pixel                               (bits)   block       accuracy)   accuracy)                                    ______________________________________                                        8        1 page address +                                                                          4 page address +                                                                          4 page address +                                      64 transfers                                                                              81 transfers                                                                              64 transfers                                 16       1 page address +                                                                          4 page address +                                                                          4 page address +                                      32 transfers                                                                              45 transfers                                                                              40 transfers                                 32       1 page address +                                                                          4 page address +                                                                          4 page address +                                      16 transfers                                                                              27 transfers                                                                              24 transfers                                 ______________________________________                                    

Table A.18.4 takes the figures in Table A.18.3 and evaluates them for a"typical" DRAM. In this example, a 27 MHz clock is assumed. It will beappreciated that while 27 MHz is used here, it is not intended as alimitation. The access start takes 11 ticks (102 ns) and the datatransfer takes 6 ticks (56 ns).

A.18.5.2 MPEG resolution without re-ordering

The peak memory bandwidth load occurs when decoding B pictures. In a"worst case" scenario, the B frame may be formed from predictions fromboth the picture buffers with all predictions being to half pixelaccuracy.

                  TABLE A.18.4                                                    ______________________________________                                        Illustration with "typical" DRAM                                                                   form prediction                                                                           form prediction                              Data bus width                                                                         read or write 8x8                                                                         (half pixel (integer pixel                               (bits)   block       accuracy)   accuracy)                                    ______________________________________                                        8        3657 ns     4907 ns     3963 ns                                      16       1880 ns     2907 ns     2185 ns                                      32        991 ns     1907 ns     1741 ns                                      ______________________________________                                    

Using the example figures from Table A.18.4, it can be seen that it willtake the DRAM interface 3815 ns to read the data required for twoaccurate half pixel accurate predictions (via a 32 bit wide interface).The resolution that the Temporal Decoder can support is determined bythe number of these predictions that can be performed within one picturetime. In this example, the Temporal Decoder can process 8737 8×8 blocksin a single 33 ms picture period (e g., for 30 Hz video).

If the required video format is 704×480, then each picture contains 79208×8 blocks (taking into consideration the 4:2:0 chroma sampling). It canbe seen that this video format consumes approx. 91% of the availableDRAM interface bandwidth (before any other factors such as DRAM refreshare taken into consideration). Accordingly, the Temporal Decoder cansupport this video format.

A.18.5.3 MPEG resolution with re-ordering

When MPEG picture re-ordering is employed the worst case scenario isencountered while P pictures are being decoded. During this time, thereare 3 loads on the DRAM interface:

form predictions

write back the result

read out the previous P or I picture

Using the example figures from Table A.18.3, we can find the time ittakes for each of these tasks when a 32 bit wide interface is available.Forming the prediction takes 1907 ns/n while the read and the write eachtake 991 ns, a total of 3889 ns. This permits the Temporal Decoder toprocess 8485 8×8 blocks in a 33 ms period.

Hence, processing 704×480 video will use approximately 93% of theavailable memory bandwidth (ignoring refresh).

A.18.5.4 H.261

H.261 only supports two picture formats CIF (352×288) and QCIF (172×144)at picture rates up to 30 Hz. A CIF picture contains 2376 8×8 blocks.The only memory operations required are the writing of 8×8 blocks andthe forming of predictions with integer accuracy motion vectors.

Using the example figures from Table A.18.4 for an 8 bit wide memoryinterface, it can be seen that writing each block will take 3657 nswhile forming the prediction for one block will take 3963 ns/n, a totalof 7620 ns per block. Therefore, the processing time for a single CIFpicture is about 18 ms, comfortably less than the 33 ms required tosupport 30 Hz video.

A.18.5.5 JPEG

The resolution of JPEG "video" that can be supported will be determinedby the capabilities of the Spatial Decoder of the invention or thedisplay interface. The Temporal Decoder does not affect JPEG resolution.

A.18.6 Events and Errors

A.18.6.1 Chip Stopped

In the present invention, writing 1 to chip₋₋ access requests that theTemporal Decoder halt operation to allow re-configuration. Oncereceived, the Temporal Decoder will continue operating normally until itreaches the end of the current video sequence. Thereafter, the TemporalDecoder is halted.

When the chip halts, a chip stopped event will occur. If chip₋₋stopped₋₋ mask=1, an interrupt will be generated.

A.18.6.2 Count Error

The Temporal Decoder, of the present invention, contains an adder thatadds predictions to error data. If there is a difference between thenumber of error data bytes and the number of prediction data bytes, thena count error event is generated.

If count₋₋ error₋₋ mask=1 an interrupt will be generated and formingprediction will stop.

Writing 1 to count₋₋ error₋₋ event clears the event and allows theTemporal Decoder to proceed. The DATA Token that caused the error willthen proceed. However, the DATA Token that caused the error will not beof the correct length (64 bytes). This is likely to cause furtherproblems. Thus, a count error should only arise if a significanthardware error has occurred.

SECTION A.19 Connecting to the output of the Temporal Decoder

The output of the Temporal Decoder is a standard Token Port with 8 bitwide data words. See Section A.4 for more information about theelectrical behavior of the interface.

The Tokens present at the output of the Temporal Decoder will depend onthe coding standard employed and, in the case of MPEG, whether thepictures are being re-ordered. This section identifies which of theTokens are available it, at the output of the Temporal decoder and whichare the most useful when designing circuits to display that output.Other Tokens will be present, but are not needed to display the outputand, therefore they are not discussed here.

This section concentrates on showing:

How the start and end of sequences can be identified.

How the start and end of pictures can be identified.

How to identify when to display the picture.

How to identify where in the display the picture data should be placed.

A.19.1 JPEG output

The Token sequence output by the Temporal Decoder when decoding JPEGdata is identical to that seen at the output of Spatial Decoder. Recall,JPEG does not require processing by the Temporal Decoder. However, theTemporal Decoder tests intra data Tokens for negative values (resultingfrom the finite arithmetic precision of the IDCT in the Spatial Decoder)and replaces them with zero.

See Section A.16 for further discussion of the output sequence observedduring JPEG operation.

A.19.2 H.261 Output

A.19.2.1 Start and end of sessions

H.261 doesn't signal the start and end of the video stream within thevideo data. Nevertheless, this is implied by the application. Forexample, the sequence starts when the telecommunication connection ismade and ends when the line is dropped. Thus, the highest layer in thevideo syntax is the "picture layer".

The Start Code Detector of the Spatial Decoder in accordance with theinvention, allows SEQUENCE₋₋ START and CODING₋₋ STANDARD Tokens to beinserted automatically before the first PICTURE₋₋ START. See sectionsA.11.7.3 and A.11.7.4.

At the end of an H.261 session (e.g., when the line is dropped) the usershould insert a FLUSH Token after the end of the coded data. This has anumber of effects (see Appendix A.31.1:

It ensures that PICTURE₋₋ END is generated to signal the end of the lastpicture.

It ensures that the end of the coded data is pushed through the decoder.

A.19.2.2 Acquiring pictures

Each picture is composed of a hierarchy of elements referred to aslayers in the syntax. The sequence of Tokens at the output of theTemporal Decoder when decoding H.261 reflects this structure.

A.19.2.1 Picture layer

Each picture is preceded by a PICTURE₋₋ START Token and each isimmediately followed by a PICTURE₋₋ END Token. H.261 doesn't naturallycontain a picture end. This Token is inserted automatically by the StartCode Detector of the Spatial Decoder.

After the PICTURE₋₋ START Token, there will be TEMPORAL₋₋ REFERENCE andPICTURE₋₋ TYPE Tokens. The TEMPORAL₋₋ REFERENCE Token carries a 10 bitnumber (of which only the 5 LSBs are used in H.261) that indicates whenthe picture should be displayed. This should be studied by any displaysystem as H.261 encoders can omit pictures from the sequence (to achievelower data rates). Omission of pictures can be detected by the temporalreference incrementing by more than one between successive pictures.

Next, the PICTURE₋₋ TYPE Token carries information about the pictureformat. A display system may study this information to detect if CIF orQCIF pictures are being decoded. However, information about the pictureformat is also available by studying registers within the Huffmandecoder.

<Xref to Huffman decoder section>

A.19.2.2.2 Group of Blocks Layer

Each H.261 picture is composed of a number of "groups of blocks". Eachof these is preceded by a SLICE₋₋ START Token (derived from the H.261group number and group start code). This Token carries an 8 bit valuethat indicates where in the display the group of blocks should beplaced. This provides an opportunity for the decoder to resynchronizeafter data errors. Moreover, it provides the encoder with a mechanism toskip blocks if there are areas of a picture that do not requireadditional information in order to describe them. By the time SLICE₋₋START reaches the output of the Temporal Decoder, this information iseffectively redundant as the Spatial Decoder and Temporal Decoder havealready used the information to ensure that each picture contains thecorrect number of blocks and that they are in the correct positions.Hence, it should be possible to compute where to position a block ofdata output by the Temporal Decoder just by counting the number ofblocks that have been output since the start of the picture.

The number carried by SLICE₋₋ START is one less than the H.261 group ofblocks number (see the H.261 standard for more information). FIG. 94shows the positioning of H.261 groups of blocks within CIF and QCIFpictures. NOTE: in the present invention, the block numbering shown isthe same as that carried by SLICE₋₋ START. This is different from theH.261 convention for numbering these groups.

Between the SLICE₋₋ START (which indicates the start of each group ofblocks) and the first macroblock there may be other Tokens. These can beignored as they are not required to display the picture data.

A.19.2.2.3 Macroblock layer

The sequence of macroblocks within each group of blocks is defined byH.261. There is no special Token information describing the position ofeach macroblock. The user should count through the macroblock sequenceto determine where to display each piece of information.

FIG. 96 shows the sequence in which macroblocks are placed in each groupof blocks.

Each macroblock contains 6 DATA Tokens. The sequence of DATA Tokens ineach group of 6 is defined by the H.261 macroblock structure. Each DATAToken should contain exactly 64 data bytes for an 8×8 area of pixels ofa single color component. The color component is carried in a 2 bitnumber in the DATA Token (see section A.3.5.1). However, the sequence ofthe color components in H.261 is defined.

Each group of DATA Tokens is preceded by a number of Tokenscommunicating information about motion vectors, quantizer scale factorsand so forth. These Tokens are not required to allow the pictures to bedisplayed and, thus, can be ignored.

Each DATA Token contains 64 data bytes for an 8×8 of a single colorcomponent. These are in a raster order.

A.19.3 MPEG output

MPEG has more layers in its syntax. These embody concepts such as avideo sequence and the group of pictures.

A.19.3.1 MPEG Sequence layer

A sequence can have multiple entry points (sequence starts) but shouldhave only a single exit point (sequence end). When an MPEG sequenceheader code is decoded, the Spatial Decoder generates a CODING₋₋STANDARD Token followed by a SEQUENCE₋₋ START Token.

After the SEQUENCE₋₋ START, there will be a number of Tokens of sequenceheader information that describe the video format and the like. See thedraft MPEG standard for the information that is signalled in thesequence header and Table A.3.2 for information about how this data isconverted into Tokens. This information describing the video format isalso available in registers in the Huffman decoder.

This sequence header information may occur several times within an MPEGsequence, if that sequence has several entry points.

A.19.3.2 Group of pictures layer

An MPEG group of pictures provides a different type of "entry" point tothat provided at a sequence start. The sequence header providesinformation about the picture/video format. Accordingly, if the decoderhas no knowledge of the video format used in a sequence, it must startat a sequence start. However, once the video format is configured intothe decoder, it should be possible to start decoding at any group ofpictures.

MPEG doesn't limit the number of pictures in a group. However, in manyapplications a group will correspond to about 0.5 seconds, as thisprovides a reasonable granularity of random access.

The start of a group of pictures is indicated by a GROUP₋₋ START Token.The header information provided after GROUP₋₋ START includes two usefulTokens: TIME₋₋ CODE and BROKEN₋₋ CLOSED.

TIME₋₋ CODE carries a subset of the SMPTE time code information. Thismay be useful in synchronizing the video decoder to other signals.BROKEN₋₋ CLOSED carries the MPEG closed₋₋ gap and broken₋₋ link bits.See Section A.19.3.8 for more on the implications of random access anddecoding edited video sequences.

A.19.3.3 Picture layer

The start of a new picture is indicated by the PICTURE₋₋ START Token.After this Token, there will be TEMPORAL₋₋ REFERENCE and PICTURE₋₋ TYPETokens. The temporary reference information may be useful if theTemporal Decoder is not configured to provide picture re-ordering. Thepicture type information may be useful if a display system wants tospecially process B pictures at the start of an open GOP (see SectionA.19.3.8).

Each picture is composed of a number of slices.

A.19.3.4 Slice layer

Section A.19.2.2.2 discusses the group of blocks used in H.261. Theslice in MPEG serves a similar function. However, the slice structure isnot fixed by the standard. The 8 bit value carried by the SLICE₋₋ STARTToken is one less than the "slice vertical position" communicated byMPEG. See the draft MPEG standard for a description of the slice layer.

By the time SLICE₋₋ START reaches the output of the Temporal Decoder,this information is effectively redundant since the Spatial Decoder andTemporal Decoder have already used the information to ensure that eachpicture contains the correct number of blocks in the correct positions.Hence, it should be possible to compute where to position a block ofdata output by the Temporal Decoder just by counting the number ofblocks that have been output since the start of the picture.

See section A.19.3.7 for discussion of the effects of using MPEG picturere-ordering.

A.19.3.5 Macroblock layer

Each macroblock contains 6 blocks. These appear at the output of theTemporal Decoder in raster order (as specified by the draft MPEGspecification).

A.19.3.6 Block layer

Each macroblock contains 6 DATA Tokens. The sequence of DATA Tokens ineach group of 6 is defined by the draft MPEG specification (this is thesame as the H.261 macroblock structure). Each DATA token should containexactly 64 data bytes for an 8×8 area of pixels of a single colorcomponent. The color component is carried in a 2 bit number in the DATAToken (see A.3.5.1). However, the sequence of the color components inMPEG is defined.

Each group of DATA Tokens is preceded by a number of Tokenscommunicating information about motion vectors, quantizer scale factors,and so forth. These Tokens are not required to allow the pictures to bedisplayed and, therefore, they can be ignored.

A.19.3.7 Effect of MPEG picture re-ordering

As described in A.18.3.5, the Temporal Decoder can be configured toprovide MPEG picture re-ordering (MPEG₋₋ reordering=1). The output of Pand I pictures is delayed until the next P/I picture in the data streamstarts to be decoded by the Temporal Decoder. At the output of theTemporal Decoder the DATA Tokens of the newly decoded P/I picture arereplaced with DATA Tokens from the older P/I picture.

When re₋₋ ordering P/I pictures, the PICTURE₋₋ START, TEMPORAL₋₋REFERENCE and PICTURE₋₋ TYPE Tokens of the picture are storedtemporarily on-chip as the picture is written into the off-chip picturebuffers. When the picture is read out for display, these stored Tokensare retrieved. Accordingly, re-ordered P/I pictures have the correctvalues for PICTURE₋₋ START, TEMPORAL₋₋ REFERENCE and PICTURE₋₋ TYPE.

All other tokens below the picture layer are not re-ordered. As there-ordered P/I picture is read-out for display it picks up the lowerlevel non-DATA tokens of the picture that has just been decoded. Hence,these sub-picture layer Tokens should be ignored.

A.19.3.8 Random access and edited sequences

The Spatial Decoder provides facilities to help correct video decodingof edited MPEG video data and after a random access into MPEG videodata.

A.19.3.8.1 Open GOPs

A group of pictures (GOP) can start with B pictures that are predictedfrom a P picture in a previous GOP. This is called an "open GOP". FIG.107 illustrates this. Pictures 17 and 18 are B pictures at the start ofthe second GOP. If the GOP is "open", then the encoder may have encodedthese two pictures using predictions from the P picture 16 and also theI picture 19. Alternatively, the encoder could have restricted itself tousing predictions from only the I picture 19. In this case, the secondGOP is a "closed GOP".

If a decoder starts decoding the video at the first GOP, it will have noproblems when it encounters the second GOP even if that GOP is opensince it will have already decoded the P picture 16. However, if thedecoder makes a random access and starts decoding at the second GOP itcannot decode B17 and B18 if they depend on P16 (i.e., if the GOP isopen).

If the Spatial Decoder of the present invention encounters an open GOPas the first GOP following a reset or it receives a FLUSH Token, it willassume that a random access to an open GOP has occurred. In this case,the Huffman decoder will consume the data for the B pictures in thenormal way. However, it will output B pictures predicted with (0,0)motion vectors off the I picture. The result will be that pictures B17and B18 (in the example above) will be identical to I19.

This behavior ensures correct maintenance of the MPEG VBV rules. Also,it ensures that B pictures exist in the output at positions within theoutput stream expected by the other data channels. For example, the MPEGsystem layer provides presentation time information relating audio datato video data. The video presentation time stamps refer to the firstdisplayed picture in a GOP, i.e., the picture with temporal reference 0.In the example above, the first displayed picture after a random accessto the second GOP is B17.

The BROKEN₋₋ CLOSED Token carries the MPEG closed₋₋ gop bit. Hence, atthe output of the Temporal Decoder it is possible to determine if the Bpictures output are genuine or "substitutes" have been introduced by theSpatial Decoder. Some applications may wish to take special measureswhen these "substitute" pictures are present.

A.19.3.8.2 Edited video

If an application edits an MPEG video sequence, it may break therelationship between two GOPs. If the GOP after the edit is an open GOPit will no longer be possible to correctly decode the B pictures at thebeginning of the GOP. The application editing the MPEG data can set thebroken₋₋ link bit in the GOP after the edit to indicate to the decoderthat it will not be able to decode these B pictures.

If the Spatial Decoder encounters a GOP with a broken link, the Huffmandecoder will decode the data for the B pictures in the normal way.However, it will output B pictures predicted with (0,0) motion vectorsoff the I picture. The result will be that pictures B17 and B18 (in theexample above) will be identical to I19.

The BROKEN₋₋ CLOSED Token carries the MPEG broken₋₋ link bit. Hence, atthe output of the Temporal Decoder it is possible to determine if the Bpictures output are genuine or "substitutes" that have been introducedby the Spatial Decoder. Some applications may wish to take specialmeasures when these "substitute" pictures are present.

SECTION A.20 Late Write DRAM Interface

The interface is configurable in two ways:

The detail timing of the interface can be configured to accommodate avariety of different DRAM types

The "width" of the DRAM interface can be configured to provide acost/performance trade-off

                                      TABLE A.20.1                                __________________________________________________________________________    DRAM interface signals                                                        Signal Name                                                                            Input/Output                                                                        Description                                                    __________________________________________________________________________    DRAM.sub.-- data 31:0!                                                                 I/O   The 32 bit wide DRAM data bus. Optionally this bus can be                     configured to                                                                 be 16 or 8 bits wide.                                          DRAM.sub.-- addr 10:0!                                                                 O     The 22 bit wide DRAM interface address is time multiplexed                    over this 11                                                                  bit wide bus.                                                  RAS      O     The DRAM Row Address Strobe signal                             CAS 3:0! O     The DRAM Column Address Strobe signal. One signal is                          provided per                                                                  byte of the interface's data bus. All the CAS signals are                     driven                                                                        simultaneously.                                                WE       O     The DRAM Write Enable signal                                   OE       O     The DRAM Output Enable signal                                  DRAM.sub.-- enable                                                                     I     This input signal, when low, makes all the output signals                     on the interface                                                              go high impedance and stops activity on the DRAM               __________________________________________________________________________                   interface.                                                 

                                      TABLE A.20.2                                __________________________________________________________________________    DRAM Interface configuration registers                                        Register name                                                                            Size/Dir.                                                                          Reset State                                                                         Description                                             __________________________________________________________________________    modify.sub.-- DRAM.sub.-- timing                                                         1 bit                                                                              0     This function enable register allows access to the                            DRAM interface                                                     rw         timing configuration registers. The configuration                             registers should not                                                          be modified while this register holds the value                               zero. Writing a one to                                                        this register requests access to modify the                                   configuration registers                                                       After a zero has been written to this register the                            DRAM interface will                                                           start to use the new values in the timing                                     configuration registers                                 page.sub.-- start.sub.-- length                                                          5 bit                                                                              0     Specifies the length of the access start in ticks.                            The minimum value                                                  rw         that can be used is 4 (meaning 4 ticks). 0 selects                            the maximum                                                                   length of 32 ticks.                                     read.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length                                                          4 bit                                                                              0     Specifies the length of the fast page read cycle in                           ticks. The                                                         rw         minimum value that can be used is 4 (meaning 4                                ticks). 0 selects the                                                         maximum length of 16 ticks.                             write.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length                                                         4 bit                                                                              0     Specifies the length of the fast page late write                              cycle in ticks. The                                                rw         minimum value that can be used is 4 (meaning 4                                ticks). 0 selects the                                                         maximum length of 16 ticks.                             refresh.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length                                                       4 bit                                                                              0     Specifies the length of the refresh cycle in ticks.                           The minimum value                                                  rw         that can be used is 4 (meaning 4 ticks). 0 selects                            the maximum                                                                   length of 16 ticks.                                     RAS.sub.-- falling                                                                       4 bit                                                                              0     Specifies the number of ticks after the start of                              the access start that                                              rw         RAS falls. The minimum value that can be used is 4                            (meaning 4                                                                    ticks). 0 selects the maximum length of 16 ticks.       CAS.sub.-- falling                                                                       4 bit                                                                              8     Specifies the number of ticks after the start of a                            read cycle, write                                                  rw         cycle or access start that CAS falls. The minimum                             value that can be                                                             used is 1 (meaning 1 tick). 0 selects the maximum                             length of 16 ticks.                                     DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- width                                                            2 bit                                                                              0     Specifies the number of bits used on the DRAM                                 interface data bus                                                 rw         DRAM.sub.-- data 31:0!. See A.20.4                      row.sub.-- address.sub.-- bits                                                           2 bit                                                                              0     Specifies the number of bits used for the row                                 address portion of the                                             rw         DRAM interface address bus. See A.20.5                  DRAM.sub.-- enable                                                                       1 bit                                                                              1     Writing the value 0 in to this register forces the                            DRAM interface into                                                rw         a high impedance state.                                                       0 will be read from this register if either the                               DRAM.sub.-- enable signal is                                                  low or 0 has been written to the register.              refresh.sub.-- interval                                                                  8 bit                                                                              0     This value specifies the interval between refresh                             cycles in periods of                                               rw         16 decoder.sub.-- clock cycles. Values in the range                           1..255 can be                                                                 configured. The value 0 is automatically loaded                               after reset and                                                               forces the DRAM interface to continuously execute                             refresh cycles                                                                until a valid refresh interval is configured. It is                           recommended that                                                              refresh.sub.-- interval should be configured only                             once after each reset.                                  no.sub.-- refresh                                                                        1 bit                                                                              0     Writing the value 1 to this register prevents                                 execution of any refresh                                           rw         cycles.                                                 CAS.sub.-- strength                                                                      3 bit                                                                              6     These three bit registers configure the output                                drive strength of                                       RAS.sub.-- strength                                                                      rw         DRAM interface signals.                                 addr.sub.-- strength  This allows the interface to be configured for                                various different loads.                                DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- strength                                              OEWE.sub.-- strength  See A.20.8                                              __________________________________________________________________________

A.20.1 Interface timing (ticks)

In the present invention, the DRAM interface timing is derived from aclock which is running at four times the input clock rate of the device(decoder₋₋ clock). This clock is generated by an on-chip PLL.

For brevity, periods of this high speed clock are referred to as ticks.

A.20.2 Interface operation

The interface uses of the DRAM fast page mode. Three different types ofaccess are supported:

Read

Write

Refresh

Each read or write access transfers a burst of between 1 and 64 bytes ata single DRAM page address. Read and write transfers are not mixedwithin a single access. Each successive access is treated as a randomaccess to a new DRAM page.

A.20.3 Access structure

Each access is composed of two parts:

Access start

Data transfer

Each access starts with an access start and is followed by one or moredata transfer cycles. There is a read, write and refresh variant of boththe access start and the data transfer cycle.

At the end of the last data transfer in an access the interface entersit's default state and remains in this state until a new access is readyto start. If a new access is ready to start when the last accessfinishes, then the new access will start immediately.

A.20.3.1 Access start

The access start provides the page address for the read or writetransfers and establishes some initial signal conditions. There arethree different access starts:

Start of read

Start of write

Start of refresh

In each case the timing of RAS and the row address is controlled by theregisters RAS₋₋ falling and page₋₋ start₋₋ length. The state of OE andDRAM₋₋ data 31:0! is held from the end of the previous data transferuntil RAS falls. The three different access start types are onlydifferent in how they drive OE and DRAM₋₋ data 31:0! when RAS falls. SeeFIG. 109.

                  TABLE A.20.3                                                    ______________________________________                                        Access start parameters                                                       Num. Characteristic      Min.   Max. Unit Notes                               ______________________________________                                        38   RAS precharge period set by                                                                       4      16   tick                                          register RAS.sub.-- falling                                              39   Access start duration set by register                                                             4      32                                                 page.sub.-- start.sub.-- length                                          40   CAS precharge length set by register                                                              1      16        .sup.a                                   CAS.sub.-- falling.                                                      41   Fast page read cycle length set by                                                                4      16                                                 the register read.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length.                            42   Fast page write cycle length set by                                                               4      16                                                 the register write.sub.-- cycle.sub.-- length.                           43   WE falls one tick after CAS.                                             44   Refresh cycle length set by the                                                                   4      16                                                 register refresh.sub.-- cycle.                                           ______________________________________                                         .sup.a. This value must be less than RAS.sub.-- falling to ensure CAS         before RAS refresh occurs.                                               

A.20.3.2 Data transfer

There are three different types of data transfer cycle:

Fast page read cycle

Fast page late write cycle

Refresh cycle

A start of refresh is only followed by a single refresh cycle. A startof read (or write) can be followed by one or more fast page read (orwrite) cycles.

At the start of the read cycle CAS is driven high and the new columnaddress is driven.

A late write cycle is used. WE is driven low one tick after CAS. Theoutput data is driven one tick after the address.

As a CAS before RAS refresh cycle is initiated by the start of refreshcycle, there is no interface signal activity during a refresh cycle. Thepurpose of the refresh cycle is to meet the minimum RAS low periodrequired by the DRAM.

A.20.3.3 Interface default state

The interface signals enter a default state at the end of an access:

RAS, CAS and WE high

data and OE remain in their previous state

addr remains stable

A.20.4 Data bus width

The two bit register DRAM₋₋ data₋₋ width allows the width of the DRAMinterfaces data path to be configured. This allows the DRAM cost to beminimized when working with small picture formats.

                  TABLE A.20.4                                                    ______________________________________                                        Configuring DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- width                                     DRAM.sub.-- data.sub.-- width                                                 ______________________________________                                        0.sup.a       8 bit wide data bus on DRAM.sub.-- data 31:24!.sup.b.           1            16 bit wide data bus on DRAM.sub.-- data 31:16!.sup.(b).         2            32 bit wide data bus on DRAM.sub.-- data 31:0!.                  ______________________________________                                         .sup.a. Default after reset.                                                  .sup.b. Unused signals are held high impedance.                          

A.20.5 Address bits

On-chip, a 24 bit address is generated. How this address is used to formthe row and column addresses depends on the width of the data bus andthe number of bits selected for the row address. Some configurations donot permit all the internal address bits to be used (and) therefore,produce "hidden bits).

The row address is extracted from the middle portion of the address.This maximizes the rate at which the DRAM is naturally refreshed.

A.20.5.1 Low order column address bits

The least significant 4 to 6 bits of the column address are used toprovide addresses for fast page mode transfers up to 64 bytes. Thenumber of address bits required to control these transfers will dependon the width of the data bus (see A.20.4).

A.20.5.2 Row address bits

The number of bits taken from the middle section of the 24 bit internaladdress to provide the row address is configured by the register row₋₋address₋₋ bits.

                  TABLE A.20.5                                                    ______________________________________                                        Configuring row.sub.-- address.sub.-- bits                                    row.sub.-- address.sub.-- bits                                                               Width of row address                                           ______________________________________                                        0               9 bits                                                        1              10 bits                                                        2              11 bits                                                        ______________________________________                                    

The width of row address used will depend on the type of DRAM used andwhether the MSBs of the row address are decoded off-chip to accessmultiple banks of DRAM.

NOTE

The row address is extracted from the middle of the internal address. Ifsome bits of the row address are decoded to select banks of DRAM, thenall possible values of these "bank select bits" must select a bank ofDRAM. Otherwise, holes will be left in the address space.

                  TABLE A.20.6                                                    ______________________________________                                        Selecting a value for row.sub.-- address.sub.-- bits                                                               DRAM                                     row.sub.-- address.sub.-- bits                                                           row address bits                                                                           bank select  depth                                    ______________________________________                                        0          DRAM.sub.-- addr 8:0!     256k                                     1          DRAM.sub.-- addr 8:0!                                                                      DRAM.sub.-- addr 9!                                                                        256k                                                DRAM.sub.-- addr 9:0!     512k                                                DRAM.sub.-- addr 9:0!     1024k                                    2          DRAM.sub.-- addr 8:0!                                                                      DRAM.sub.-- addr 10:9!                                                                     256k                                                DRAM.sub.-- addr 9:0!                                                                      DRAM.sub.-- addr 10!                                                                       512k                                                DRAM.sub.-- addr 9:0!                                                                      DRAM.sub.-- addr 10!                                                                       1024k                                               DRAM.sub.-- addr 10:0!    2048k                                               DRAM.sub.-- addr 10:0!    4096k                                    ______________________________________                                    

A.20.6 DRAM Interface enable

There are two ways to make all the output signals on the DRAM interfacebecome high impedance. The DRAM₋₋ enable register and the DRAM₋₋ enablesignal. Both the register and the signal must be at a logic 1 for theDRAM interface to operate. If either is low, then the interface is takento high impedance and data transfers through the interface are halted.

The ability to take the DRAM interface to high impedance is provided inorder to allow other devices to test or to use the DRAM controlled bythe Spatial Decoder (or the Temporal Decoder) when the Spatial Decoder(or the Temporal Decoder) is not in use. It is not intended to allowother devices to share the memory during normal operation.

A.20.7 Refresh

Unless disabled by writing to the register, no₋₋ refresh, the DRAMinterface will automatically refresh the DRAM using a CAS before RASrefresh cycle at an interval determined by the register refresh₋₋interval.

The value in refresh₋₋ interval specifies the interval between refreshcycles in periods of 16 decoder₋₋ clock cycles. Values in the range 1 to255 can be configured. The value 0 is automatically loaded after resetand forces the DRAM interface to continuously execute refresh cycles(once enabled) until a valid refresh interval is configured. It isrecommended that refresh₋₋ interval should be configured only once aftereach reset.

A.20.8 Signal strengths

The drive strength of the outputs of the DRAM interface can beconfigured by the user using the 3 bit registers, CAS₋₋ strength, RAS₋₋strength, addr₋₋ strength, DRAM₋₋ data₋₋ strength, OEWE₋₋ strength. TheMSB of this 3 bit value selects either a fast or slow edge rate. The twoless significant bits configure the output for different loadcapacitances.

The default strength after reset is 6, configuring the outputs to takeapproximately 10 ns to drive signal between GND and V_(DD) if loadedwith 12_(p) F.

                  TABLE A.20.7                                                    ______________________________________                                        Output strength configurations                                                strength value  Drive characteristics                                         ______________________________________                                        0               Approx. 4 ns/V into 6 pf load                                 1               Approx. 4 ns/V into 12 pf load                                2               Approx. 4 ns/V into 24 pf load                                3               Approx. 4 ns/V into 48 pf load                                4               Approx. 2 ns/V into 6 pf load                                 5               Approx. 2 ns/V into 12 pf load                                .sup. 6.sup.a   Approx. 2 ns/V into 24 pf load                                7               Approx. 2 ns/V into 48 pf load                                ______________________________________                                         .sup.a Default after reset                                               

When an output is configured approximately for the load it is driving,it will meet the AC electrical characteristics specified in TablesA.20.11 to Table A.20.12. When appropriately configured each output isapproximately matched to it's load and, therefore, minimal overshootwill occur after a signal transition.

A.20.9 After reset

After reset, the DRAM interface configuration registers are all reset totheir default values. Most significant of these default configurationsare:

The DRM interface is disabled and allowed to go high impedance.

The refresh interval is configured to the special value 0 which meansexecute refresh cycle continuously after the interface is re-enabled.

The DRAM interface is set to it's slowest configuration.

Most DRAMs require a "pause" of between 100 μs and 500 μs after power isfirst applied, followed by a number of refresh cycles before normaloperation is possible.

Immediately after reset, the DRAM interface is inactive until both theDRAM₋₋ enable signal and the DRAM₋₋ enable register are set. When thesehave been set, the DRAM interface will execute refresh cycles(approximately every 400 ns, depending upon the clock frequency used)until the DRAM interface is configured.

The user is responsible for ensuring that the DRAM's "pause" afterpower₋₋ up and for allowing sufficient time after enabling the DRAMinterface to ensure that the required number of refresh cycles haveoccurred before data transfers are attempted.

While reset is asserted, the DRAM interface is unable to refresh theDRAM. However, the reset time required by the decoder chips issufficiently short so that is should be possible to reset them and tothen re-enable the DRAM interface before the DRAM contents decay. Thismay be required during debugging.

                  TABLE A.20.8                                                    ______________________________________                                        Maximum Ratings.sup.a                                                         Symbol                                                                              Parameter       Min.       Max.   Units                                 ______________________________________                                        V.sub.DD                                                                            Supply voltage relative to                                                                    -0.5       6.5    V                                           GND                                                                     V.sub.IN                                                                            Input voltage on any pin                                                                      GND - 0.5  V.sub.DD + 0.5                                                                       V                                     T.sub.A                                                                             Operating temperature                                                                         -40        +85    °C.                            T.sub.S                                                                             Storage temperature                                                                           -55        +150   °C.                            ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE A.20.9                                                    ______________________________________                                        DC Operating conditions                                                       Symbol                                                                              Parameter       Min.      Max.   Units                                  ______________________________________                                        V.sub.DD                                                                            Supply voltage relative to                                                                    4.75      5.25   V                                            GND                                                                     GND   Ground          0         0      V                                      V.sub.IH                                                                            Input logic `1` voltage                                                                       2.0       V.sub.DD + 0.5                                                                       V                                      V.sub.IL                                                                            Input logic `0` voltage                                                                       GND - 0.5 0.8    V                                      T.sub.A                                                                             Operating temperature                                                                         0         70     °C..sup.a                       ______________________________________                                         .sup.a. With TBA linear ft/min transverse airflow                        

                  TABLE A.20.10                                                   ______________________________________                                        DC Electrical characteristics                                                 Symbol                                                                              Parameter          Min.    Max.  Units                                  ______________________________________                                        V.sub.OL                                                                            Output logic `0` voltage   0.4   V.sup.a                                V.sub.OH                                                                            Output logic `1` voltage                                                                         2.8           V                                      I.sub.O                                                                             Output current     ±100       μA.sup.b                            I.sub.OZ                                                                            Output off state leakage current                                                                 ±20        μA                                  I.sub.IZ                                                                            Input leakage current                                                                            ±10        μA                                  I.sub.DO                                                                            RMS power supply current   500   mA                                     C.sub.IN                                                                            Input capacitance          5     pF                                     C.sub.OUT                                                                           Output/IO capacitance      5     pF                                     ______________________________________                                         .sup.a. AC parameters are specified using V.sub.OLmax = 0.8 V as the          measurement level.                                                            .sup.b. This is the steady state drive capability of the interface.           Transient currents may be much greater.                                  

A.20.10.1 AC characteristics

                  TABLE A.20.11                                                   ______________________________________                                        Differences from nominal values for a strobe                                  Num. Parameter           Min.   Max. Unit Note.sup.a                          ______________________________________                                        45   Cycle time e.g. tPC -2     +2   ns                                       46   Cycle time e.g. tRC -2     +2   ns                                       47   High pulse e.g. tRP, tCP, tCPN                                                                    -5     +2   ns                                       48   Low pulse e.g. tRAS, tCAS,                                                                        -11    +2   ns                                            tCAC, tWP, tRASP, tRASC                                                  49   Cycle time e.g. tACP/tCPA                                                                         -8     +2   ns                                       ______________________________________                                         .sup.a. The driver strength of the signal must be configured appropriatel     for its load                                                             

                  TABLE A.20.12                                                   ______________________________________                                        Differences from nominal values between two strobes                           Num. Parameter           Min.   Max. Unit Note.sup.a                          ______________________________________                                        50   Strobe to strobe delay e.g. tRCD,                                                                 -3     +3   ns                                            tCSR                                                                     51   Low hold time e.g. tRSH, tCSH,                                                                    -13    +3   ns                                            tRWL, tCWL, tRAC, tOAC/OE,                                                    tCHR                                                                     52   Strobe to strobe precharge e.g. tCRP,                                                             -9     +3   ns                                            tRCS, tRCH, tRRH, tRPC                                                        CAS precharge pulse between any                                                                   -5     +2   ns                                            two CAS signals on wide DRAMs                                                 e.g. tCP, or between RAS rising and                                           CAS falling e.g. tRPC                                                    53   Precharge before disable e.g. tRHCP/                                                              -12    +3   ns                                            CPRH                                                                     ______________________________________                                         .sup.a. The driver strength of the two signals must be configured             appropriately for their loads                                            

SECTION B.1 Start Code Detector

B.1.1 Overview

As previously shown in FIG. 11, the Start Code Detector (SCD) is thefirst block on the Spatial Decoder. Its primary purpose is to detectMPEG, JPEG and H.261 start codes in the input data stream and to replacethem with relevant Tokens. It also allows user access to the input datastream via the microprocessor interface, and performs preliminaryformatting and "tidying up" of the token data stream. Recall, the SCDcan receive either raw byte data or data already assembled in Tokenformat.

Typically, start codes are 24, 16 and 8 bits wide for MPEG, H.261, andJPEG, respectively. The Start Code Detector takes the incoming data inbytes, either from the Microprocessor Interface (upi) or a token/byteport and shifts it through three shift registers. The first register isan 8 bit parallel in serial out, the second register is of programmablelength (16 or 24 bits) and is where the start codes are detected, andthe third register is 15 bits wide and is used to reformat the data into15 bit tokens. There are also two "tag" Shift Registers (SR) runningparallel with the second and third SRs. These contain tags to indicatewhether or not the associated bit in the data SR is good. Incoming bytesthat are not part of a DATA Token and are unrecognized by the SCD, areallowed to bypass the shift registers and are output when all threeshift registers are flushed (empty) and the contents outputsuccessfully. Recognized non-data tokens are used to configure the SCD,spring traps, or set flags. They also bypass the shift registers and areoutput unchanged.

B.1.2 Major Blocks

The hardware for the Start Code Detector consists of 10 state machines.

B.1.2.1 Input Circuit (scdipc.sch.iplm.M)

The input circuit has three modes of operation: token, byte andmicroprocessor interface. These modes allow data to be input either as araw byte stream (but still using the two-wire interface), as a tokenstream, or by the user via the upi. In all cases, the input circuit willalways output the correct DATA Tokens by generating DATA Token headerswhere appropriate. Transitions to and from upi mode are synchronized tothe system clocks and the upi may be forced to wait until a safe pointin the data stream before gaining access. The Byte mode pin determineswhether the input circuit is in token or byte mode. Furthermore,initially informing the system as to which standard is being decoded (soa CODING₋₋ STANDARD Token can be generated) can be done in any of thethree modes.

B.1.2.2 Token decoder (scdipnew.sch, scdipnem.M)

This block decodes the incoming tokens and issues commands to the otherblocks.

                  TABLE B.1.1.                                                    ______________________________________                                        Recognized input tokens                                                                   Command                                                           Input Token issued   Comments                                                 ______________________________________                                        NULL        WAIT     NULLs are removed                                        DATA        NORMAL   Load next byte into first SR                             CODING.sub.-- STD                                                                         BYPASS   Flush shift registers, perform padding,                                       output and swith to bypass mode.                                              Load CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                                   register.                                                FLUSH       BYPASS   Flush SRs with padding, output and                                            switch to bypass mode.                                   ELSE        BYPASS   Flush SRs with padding, output                           (unrecognised token) and switch to bypass mode.                               ______________________________________                                    

Note:

A change in coding standard is passed to all blocks via the two-wireinterface after the SRs are flushed. This ensures that the change fromone data stream to another happens at the correct point throughout theSCD. This principle is applied throughout the presentation so that achange in the coding standard can flow through the whole chip prior tothe new stream.

B.1.2.3 JPEG (scdjpeg.sch scdjpeqm.M)

Start codes (Markers) in JPEG are sufficiently different that JPEG has astate machine all to itself. In the present invention, this blockhandles all the JPEG marker detection, length counting/checking, andremoval of data. Detected JPEG markers are flagged as start codes (withv₋₋ not₋₋ t--see later text) and the command from scdipnew is overriddenand forced to bypass. The operation is best described in code.

    ______________________________________                                        switch (state)                                                                case (LOOKING):                                                               if(input == 0xff)                                                             {                                                                                    state = GETVALUE;/*Found a marker*/                                           remove; /*Marker gets removed*/                                        }                                                                             else                                                                          state = LOOKING;                                                              break;                                                                        case (GETVALUE);                                                              if(input == 0xff)                                                             {                                                                             state = GETVALUE;/*Overlapping markers*/                                      remove;                                                                       }                                                                             else if(input == 0x00)                                                        {                                                                             state = LOOKING;/*Wasn't a marker*/                                           insert(0xff);/*Put the 0xff back*/                                            }                                                                             else                                                                          {                                                                             command = BYPASS;/*override command*/                                         if(1c) /* Does the marker have a length count*/                                      state = GETLC0;                                                        else                                                                                 state = LOOKING;                                                       break;                                                                        case (GETLC0):                                                                loadlc0; /*Load the top length count byte*/                                   state = GETLC1;                                                               remove;                                                                       break;                                                                        case (GETLC1)                                                                 loadlc1;                                                                      remove;                                                                       state = DECLC;                                                                break;                                                                        case (DECLC):                                                                 lcnt = lcnt - 2                                                               state = CHECKLC;                                                              break;                                                                        case (CHECKLC):                                                               if (lcnt == 0)                                                                       state = LOOKING;/*No more to do*/                                      else if(lcnt < 0)                                                                    state = LOOKING;/*generate Illegal.sub.-- Length.sub.-- Error*/        else                                                                          state = COUNT;                                                                break;                                                                        case (COUNT):                                                                 decrement length count until 1                                                if (1c <= 1)                                                                         state = LOOKING;                                                       }                                                                             ______________________________________                                    

B.1.2.4 Input Shifter (scinshft.sch, scinshm.M)

The basic operation of this block is quite simple. This block takes abyte of data from the input circuit, loads the shift register and shiftsit out. However, it also obeys the commands from the input decoder andhandles the transitions to and from bypass mode (flushing the otherSRs): On receiving a BYPASS command, the associated byte is not loadedinto the shift register. Instead "rubbish" (tag=1) is shifted out toforce any data held in the other shift registers to the output. Theblock then waits for a "flushed" signal indicating that this "rubbish"has appeared at the token reconstructor. The input byte is then passeddirectly to the token reconstructor.

B.1.2.5 Start Code Detector (scdetect.sch, scdetm.M)

This block includes two shift registers which are programmable to 16 or24 bits, start code detection logic and "valid contents" detectionlogic. MPEG start codes require the full 24 bits, whereas H.261 requiresonly 16.

In the present invention, the first SR is for data and the secondcarries tags which indicate whether the bits in the data SR arevalid--there are no gaps or stalls (in the two-wire interface sense) inthe SRs, but the bits they contain can be invalid (rubbish) whilst theyare being flushed. On detection of a start code, the tag shift registerbits are set in order to invalidate the contents of the detector SR.

A start code cannot be detected unless the SR contents are all valid.Non byte-aligned start codes are detected and may be flagged. Moreover,when a start code is detected, it cannot be definitely flagged until anoverlapping start code has been checked for. To accomplish thisfunction, the "value" of the detected start code (the byte following it)is shifted right through scinshft, scdetect and into scoshift. Havingarrived at scoshift without the detection of another start code, it isoverlapping start codes have been eliminated and it is flagged as avalid start code.

B.1.2.6 Output Shifter (scoshift.sch, scoshm.M)

The basic operation of the output shifter is to take serial data (andtags) from scdetect, pack it into 15 bit words and output them. Otherfunctions are:

B.1.2.6.1 Data padding

The output consists of 15 bit words, but the input may consist of anarbitrary number of bits. In order to flush, therefore, we need to addbits to make the last word up to 15 bits. These extra bits are calledpadding and must be recognized and removed by the Huffman block. Paddingis defined to be:

After the last data bit, a "zero" is inserted followed by sufficient"ones" to make up a 15 bit word.

The data word containing the padding is output with a low extension bitto indicate that it is the end of a data token.

B.1.2.6.2 Generation of "flushed"

In accordance with the present invention, the generation of "flushed"operation involves detecting when all SRs are flushes and signallingthis to the input shifter. When the "rubbish" inserted by the inputshifter reaches the end of the output shifter, and the output shifterhas completed its padding, a "flushed" signal is generated. This"flushed" signal must pass through the token reconstructor before it issafe for the input shifter to enter bypass mode.

B.1.2.6.3 Flagging valid start codes

If scdetect indicates that it has found a start code, padding isperformed and the current data is output. The start code value (the nextbyte) is shifted through the detector to eliminate overlapping startcodes. If the "value" arrives at the output shifter without anotherstart code being detected, it was not overlapped and the value is passedout with a flag v₋₋ not₋₋ t (ValueNotToken) to indicate that is a startcode value. If, however, another start code is detected (by scdetect)whilst the output shifter is waiting for the value, an overlapping₋₋start₋₋ error is generated. In this case, the first value is discardedand the system then waits for the second value. This value can also beoverlapped, thus causing the same procedure to be repeated until anon-overlapped start code is found.

B.1.2.6.4 Tidying up after a start code

Having detected and output a good start code, a new DATA header isgenerated when data (not rubbish) starts arriving.

B.1.2.7 Data stream reconstructor (sctokrec.sch, sctokrem.M)

The Data Stream reconstructor has two-wire interface inputs: one fromscinshift for bypassed tokens, and one from scoshift for packed data andstart codes. Switching between the two sources is only allowed when thecurrent token (from either source) has been completed (low extension bitarrived).

B.1.2.8 Start value to start number conversion (scdromhw.sch, schrom.M)

The process of converting start values into tokens is done in twostages. This block deals mainly with coding standard dependent issuesreducing the 520 odd potential codes down to 16 coding standardindependent indices.

As mentioned earlier, start values (including JPEG ones) aredistinguished from all other data by a flag (value₋₋ not₋₋ token). Ifv₋₋ not₋₋ t is high, this block converts the 4 or 8 bit value, dependingon the CODING₋₋ STANDARD, into a 4 bit start₋₋ number which isindependent of the standard, and flags any unrecognized start codes.

The start numbers are as follows:

                                      TABLE B.1.2                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Start Code numbers (indices)                                                  Start/Marker Code                                                                          Index (start.sub.-- number)                                                                Resulting Token                                     __________________________________________________________________________    not.sub.-- a.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                      0            --                                                  sequence.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                          1            SEQUENCE.sub.-- START                               group.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                             2            GROUP.sub.-- START                                  picture.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                           3            PICTURE.sub.-- START                                slice.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                             4            SLICE.sub.-- START                                  user.sub.-- data.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                  5            USER.sub.-- DATA                                    extension.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                         6            EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA                               sequence.sub.-- end.sub.-- code                                                            7            SEQUENCE.sub.-- END                                 JPEG Markers                                                                  DHT          8            DHT                                                 DQT          9            DQT                                                 DNL          10           DNL                                                 DRI          11           DRI                                                 JPEG markers that can be mapped onto tokens for MPEG/H.261                    SOS          picture.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                           PICTURE.sub.-- START                                SOI          sequence.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                          SEQUENCE.sub.-- START                               EOI          sequence.sub.-- end.sub.-- code                                                            SEQUENCE.sub.-- END                                 SOF0         group.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                             GROUP.sub.-- START                                  JPEG markers that generate extn or user data                                  JPG          extension.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                         EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA                               JPGn         extension.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                         EXTENSION.sub.-- DATA                               APPn         user.sub.-- data.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                  USER.sub.-- DATA                                    COM          user.sub.-- data.sub.-- start.sub.-- code                                                  USER.sub.-- DATA                                    __________________________________________________________________________     NOTE: All unrecognized JPEG markers generate an extn.sub.-- start.sub.--      code index                                                               

B.1.2.9 Start number to token conversion (sconvert.sch, sconverm.M)

The second stage of the conversion is where the above start numbers (orindices) are converted into tokens. This block also handles tokenextensions where appropriate, discarding of extension and user data, andsearch modes.

Search modes are a means of entering a data stream at a random point.The search mode can be set to one of eight values:

0: Normal Operation--find next start code.

1/2: System level searches not implemented on Spatial Decoder

3: Search for Sequence or higher

4: Search for group or higher

5: Search for picture or higher

6: Search for slice or higher

7: Search for next start code

Any non-zero search mode causes data to be discarded until the desiredstart code (or higher in the syntax) is detected.

This block also adds the token extensions to PICTURE and SLICE starttokens:

PICTURE₋₋ START is extended with PICTURE₋₋ NUMBER, a four bit count ofpictures.

SLICE₋₋ START is extended with svp (slice vertical position). This isthe "value" of the start code minus one (MPEG, H.261), and minus 0XD0(JPEG).

B.1.2.10 Data Stream Formatting (scinsert.sch, scinserx.M)

In the present invention, Data Stream Formatting relates to conditionalinsertion of PICTURE₋₋ END, FLUSH, CODING₋₋ STANDARD, SEQUENCE₋₋ STARTtokens, and generation of the STOP₋₋ AFTER₋₋ PICTURE event. Its functionis best simplified and described in software:

    ______________________________________                                        switch (input.sub.-- data)                                                    case (FLUSH)                                                                  1.    if (in.sub.-- picture)                                                        output = PICTURE.sub.-- END                                             2.    output = FLUSH                                                          3.    if (in.sub.-- picture & stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture)                     sap.sub.-- error = HIGH                                                       in.sub.-- picture = FALSE;                                              4.    in.sub.-- picture = FALSE;                                              break                                                                         case (SEQUENCE.sub.-- START)                                                  1.    if (in.sub.-- picture)                                                        output = PICTURE.sub.-- END                                             2.    if (in.sub.-- picture & stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture)               2a.      output = FLUSH                                                       2b.      sap.sub.-- error = HIGH                                                       in.sub.-- picture = FALSE                                            3.    output = CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                         4.    output = standard                                                       5.    output = SEQUENCE.sub.-- START                                          6.    in.sub.-- picture = FALSE;                                              break                                                                         case (SEQUENCE.sub.-- END) case (GROUP.sub.-- START):                         1.    if (in.sub.-- picture)                                                        output = PICTURE.sub.-- END                                             2.    if (in.sub.-- picture & stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture)               2a.      output = FLUSH                                                       2b.      sap.sub.-- error = HIGH                                                       in.sub.-- picture = FALSE                                            3.    output = SEQUENCE.sub.-- END or GROUP.sub.-- START                      4.    in.sub.-- picture = FALSE;                                              break                                                                         case (PICTURE.sub.-- END)                                                     1.    output = PICTURE.sub.-- END                                             2.    if (stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture)                                   2a.      output = FLUSH                                                       2b.      sap.sub.-- error = HIGH                                              3.    in.sub.-- picture = FALSE                                               break                                                                         case (PICTURE.sub.-- START)                                                   1.    if (in.sub.-- picture)                                                        output = PICTURE.sub.-- END                                             2.    if (in.sub.-- picture & stop.sub.-- after.sub.-- picture)               2a.      output = FLUSH                                                       2b.      sap.sub.-- error = HIGH                                              3.    if (insert.sub.-- sequence.sub.-- start)                                3a.      output = CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                      3b.      output = standard                                                    3c.      output = SEQUENCE.sub.-- START                                                insert.sub.-- sequence.sub.-- start = FALSE                          4.    output = PICTURE.sub.-- START                                                 in.sub.-- picture = TRUE                                                break                                                                         default: Just pass it through                                                 ______________________________________                                    

SECTION B.2 Huffman Decoder and Parser

B.2.1 Introduction

This section describes the Huffman Decoder and Parser circuitry inaccordance with the present invention.

FIG. 118 shows a high level block diagram of the Huffman Decoder andParser. Many signals and buses are omitted from this diagram in theinterests of clarity, in particular, there are several places where datais fed backwards (within the large loop that is shown).

In essence, the Huffman Decoder and Parser of the present inventionconsist of a number of dedicated processing blocks (shown along thebottom of the diagram) which are controlled by a programmable statemachine.

Data is received from the Coded Data Buffer by the "Inshift" block. Atthis point, there are essentially two types of information which will beencountered: Coded data which is carried by DATA Tokens and start codeswhich have already been replaced by their respective Tokens by the StartCode Detector. It is possible that other Tokens will be encountered butall Tokens (other than the DATA Tokens) are treated in the same way.Tokens (start codes) are treated as a special case as the vast majorityof the data will still be encoded (in H.261, JPEG or MPEG).

In the present invention, all data which is carried by the DATA Tokensis transferred to the Huffman Decoder in a serial form (bit-by-bit).This data, of course, includes many fields which are not Huffman coded,but are fixed length coded. Nevertheless, this data is still passed tothe Huffman Decoder serially. In the case of Huffman encoded data, theHuffman Decoder only performs the first stage of decoding in which theactual Huffman code is replaced by an index number. If there are Ndistrict Huffman codes in the particular code table which is beingdecoded, then this "Huffman Index" lies in the range 0 to N-1.Furthermore, the Huffman Decoder has a "no op", i.e., "no operation"mode, which allows it to pass along data or token information to asubsequent stage without any processing by the Huffman Decoder.

The Index to Data Unit is a relatively simple block of circuitry whichperforms table look-up operations. It draws its name from the secondstage of the Huffman decoding process in which the index number obtainedin the Huffman Decoder is converted into the actual decoded data by asimple table look-up. The Index to Data Unit cooperates with the HuffmanDecoder to act as a single logical unit.

The ALU is the next block and is provided to implement othertransformations on the decoded data. While the Index to Data Unit issuitable for relatively arbitrary mappings, the ALU may be used wherearithmetic is more appropriate. The ALU includes a register file whichit can manipulate to implement various parts of the decoding algorithms.In particular, the registers which hold vector predictions and DCpredictions are included in this block. The ALU is based around a simpleadder with operand selection logic. It also includes dedicated circuitryfor sign-extension type operations. It is likely that a shift operationwill be implemented, but this will be performed in a serial manner;there will be no barrel shifter.

The Token Formatter, in accordance with the present invention, is thelast block in the Video Parser and has the task of finally assemblingdecoded data into Tokens which can be passed onto the rest of thedecoder. At this point, there are as many Tokens as will ever be used bythe decoder for this particular picture.

The Parser State Machine, which is 18 bits wide and has been adopted foruse with a two-wire interface has the task of coordinating the operationof the other blocks. In essence, it is a very simple state machine andit produces a very wide "micro-code" control word which is passed to theother blocks. FIG. 118 shows that the instruction word is passed fromblock-to-block by the side of the data. This is, indeed, the case and itis important to understand that transfers between the different blocksare controlled by two-wire interfaces.

In the present invention, there is a two-wire interface between each ofthe blocks in the Video Parser. Furthermore, the Huffman Decoder workswith both serial, data, the inshifter inputs data one bit at a time, andwith control tokens. Accordingly, there are two modes of operation. Ifdata is coming into the Huffman Decoder via a DATA Token, then it passesthrough the shifter one bit at a time. Again, there is a two-wireinterface between the inshifter and the Huffman Decoder. Other tokens,however, are not shifted in one bit at a time (serial) but rather in theheader of the token. If a DATA token is input, then the headercontaining the address information is deleted and the data following theaddress is shifted in one bit at a time. If it is not a DATA Token, thenthe entire token, header and all, is presented to the Huffman Decoderall at once.

In the present invention, it is important to understand that thetwo-wire interface for the Video Parser is unusual in that it has twovalid lines. One line is valid serially and one line is valid tokenly.Furthermore, both lines may not be asserted at the same time. One or theother may be asserted or if no valid data exists, then neither may beasserted although there are two valid lines, it should be recognizedthat there is only a single accept wire in the other direction. However,this is not a problem. The Huffman Decoder knows whether it wants serialdata or token information depending on what needs to be done next basedupon the current syntax. Hence, the valid and accept signals are setaccordingly and an Accept is sent from the Huffman Decoder to theinshifter. If the proper data or token is there, then the inshiftersends a valid signal.

For example, a typical instruction might decode a Huffman code,transform it in the Index to Data Unit, modify that result in the ALUand then this result is formed into a Token word. A single microcodeinstruction word is produced which contains all of the information to dothis. The command is passed directly to the Huffman Decoder whichrequests data bits one-by-one from the "Inshift" block until it hasdecoded a complete symbol. Control Tokens are input in parallel. Oncethis occurs, the decoded index value is passed along with the originalmicrocode word to the Index to Data Unit. Note that the Huffman Decoderwill require several cycles to perform this operation and, indeed, thenumber of cycles is actually determined by the data which is decoded.The Index to Data Unit will then map this value using a table which isidentified in the microcode instruction word. This value is again passedonto the next block, the ALU, along with the original microcode word.Once the ALU has completed the appropriate operation (the number ofcycles may again be data dependant) it passes the appropriate data ontothe Token Formatting block along with the microcode word which controlsthe way in which the Token word is formed.

The ALU has a number of status wires or "condition codes" which arepassed back to the Parser State Machine. This allows the State Machineto execute conditional jump instructions. In fact, all instructions areconditional jump instructions; one of the conditions that may beselected is hard-wired to the value "False". By selecting thiscondition, a "no jump" instruction may be constructed.

In accordance with the present invention, the Token Formatter has twoinputs: a data field from the ALU and/or a constant field coming fromthe Parser State Machine. In addition, there is an instruction thattells the Token Formatter how many bits to take from one source and thento fill in with the remaining bits from the other for a total of 8 bits.For example, HORIZONTAL₋₋ SIZE has an 8 bit field that is an invariantaddress identifying it as a HORIZONTAL₋₋ SIZE Token. In this case, the 8bits come from the constant field and no data comes from the ALU. If,however, it is a DATA Token, then you would likely have 6 bits from, theconstant field and two lower bits indicating the color components fromthe ALU. Accordingly, the Token Formatter takes this information andputs it into a token for use by the rest of he system. Note that thenumber of bits from each source in the above examples are merely forillustration purposes and one of ordinary skill in the art willappreciate that the number of bits from either source can vary.

The ALU includes a bank of counters that are used to count through thestructure of the picture. The dimensions of the picture are programmedinto registers associated with the counters that appear to the"microprogrammer" as part of the register bank. Several of the conditioncodes are outputs from this counter bank which allows conditional jumpsbased on "start of picture", "start of macroblock" and the like.

Note that the Parser State Machine is also referred to as the"Demultiplex State Machine". Both terms are used in this document.

Input Shifter

In the present invention, the Input Shifter is a very simple piece ofcircuitry consisting of a two pipeline stage datapath ("hfidp") andcontrolling Zcells ("hfi").

In the first pipeline stage, Token decoding takes place. At this stage,only the DATA token is recognized. Data contained in a DATA token isshifted one bit at a time into the Huffman Decoder. The second pipelinestage is the shift register. In the very last word of a DATA token,special coding takes place such that it is possible to transmit anarbitrary number of bits through the coded data buffer. The followingare all possible patterns in the last data word.

                                      TABLE B.2.1                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Possible Patterns in the Last Data Word                                       E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 No. of Bits                                     __________________________________________________________________________    0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 None                                            x 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1                                               x x 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2                                                 x x x 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3                                               x x x x 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4                                               x x x x x 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5                                               x x x x x x 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6                                               x x x x x x x 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7                                               x x x x x x x x 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 8                                               x x x x x x x x x 0 1 1 1 1 1 9                                               x x x x x x x x x x 0 1 1 1 1 10                                              x x x x x x x x x x x 0 1 1 1 11                                              x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 1 1 12                                              x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 1 13                                              x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 14                                              __________________________________________________________________________

As the data bits are shifted left, one by one, in the shift register,the bit pattern "0 followed by all ones" is looked for (padding). Thisindicates that the remaining bits in the shift register are not validand they are discarded. Note that this action only takes place in thelast word of a DATA Token.

As described previously, all other Tokens are passed to the HuffmanDecoder in parallel. They are still loaded into the second pipelinestage, but no shifting takes place. Note that the DATA header isdiscarded and is not passed to the Huffman at all. Two "valid" wires(out₋₋ valid and serial₋₋ valid) are provided. Only one is asserted at agiven time and it indicates what type of data is being presented at thatmoment.

B.2.2 Huffman Decoder

The Huffman Decoder has a number of modes of operation. The most obviousis that it can decode Huffman Codes, turning them into a Huffman IndexNumber. In addition, it can decode fixed length codes of a length (inbits) determined by the instruction word. The Huffman Decoder can alsoaccept Tokens from the Inshift block.

The Huffman Decode includes a very small state machine. This is usedwhen decoding block-level information. This is because it takes too longfor the Parser State Machine to make decisions (since it must wait fordata to flow through the Index to Data Unit and the ALU before it canmake a decision about that data and issue a new command). When thisState Machine is used, the Huffman Decoder itself issues commands to theIndex to Data Unit and ALU. The Huffman Decoder State Machine cannotcontrol all of the microcode instruction bits and, therefore, it cannotissue the full range of commands to the other blocks.

B.2.2.1 Theory of Operation

When decoding Huffman codes, the Huffman Decoder of the presentinvention uses an arithmetic procedure to decode the incoming code intoa Huffman Index Number. This number lies between 0 and N-1 (for a codetable that has N entries). Bits are accepted one by one from the Inputshifter.

In order to control the operation of the machine, a number of tables arerequired. These specify for each possible number of bits in a code (1 to16 bits) how many codes there are of that length. As expected, thisinformation is typically not sufficient to specify a general Huffmancode. However, in MPEG, H.261 and JPEG, the Huffman codes are chosensuch that this information alone can specify the Huffman code table.There is unfortunately just one exception to this; the Tcoefficienttable from H.261 which is also used in MPEG. This requires an additionaltable that is described elsewhere (the exception was deliberatelyintroduced in H.261 to avoid start code emulation).

It is important to realize that the tables used by this Huffman Decoderare precisely the same as those transmitted in JPEG. This allows thesetables to be used directly while other designs of Huffman decoders wouldhave required the generation of internal tables from the transmittedones. This would have required extra storage and extra processing to dothe conversion. Since the tables in MPEG and H.261 (with the exceptionnoted above) can be described in the same way, a multi-standard decoderbecomes practical.

The following fragment of "C" illustrates the decoding process;

    ______________________________________                                        int total = 0;                                                                int s = 0;                                                                    int bit = 0;                                                                  unsigned long code = 0;                                                       int index = 0;                                                                while (index>=total)                                                          if(bit>=max.sub.-- bits)                                                      fail("huff.sub.-- decode: ran off end of huff table\n");            code=(code<<1)Inext.sub.-- bit0;                                              index=code-s+total;                                                           total+=codes.sub.-- per.sub.-- bit bit!;                                      s=(s+codes.sub.-- per.sub.-- bit bit!)<<1;                                    bit++;                                                                        }                                                                             ______________________________________                                    

The process generally, is directly mapped into the siliconimplementation although advantage is taken of the fact that certainintermediate values can be calculated in clock phases before they arerequired.

From the code fragment we see that;

    total.sub.n+1 =total.sub.n +cpd.sub.n                      EQ 1.

    's.sub.n+1 =2('s.sub.n +cpb.sub.n)                         EQ 2.

    code.sub.n+1 =2code.sub.n +bit.sub.n                       EQ 3.

    index.sub.n+1 =2code.sub.n +bit.sub.n +total.sub.n -'s.sub.nEQ 4.

Unfortunately in the hardware it proved easier to use a modified set ofequations in which a variable "shifted" is used in place of the variable"s". In this case;

In the hardware, however, it proved easier to use a modified set ofequations in which a variable "shifted" is used in place of the variable"s". In this case;

    shifted.sub.n+1 =2shifted.sub.n +cpb.sub.n                 EQ 5.

It turns out that:

    s.sub.n =2shifted.sub.n                                    EQ 6.

and so substituting this back into Equation 4 we see that:

    index.sub.n+1 =2(code.sub.n -shifted.sub.n)+total.sub.n +bit.sub.nEQ 7.

In addition to calculating successive values of "index", it is necessaryto know when the calculation is completed. From the "C" code fragment wesee that we are done when:

    index.sub.n+1 <total.sub.n+1                               EQ 8.

Substituting from Equation 7 and Equation 1 we see that we are donewhen:

    2(code.sub.n -shifted.sub.n)+bit.sub.n -cpb.sub.n <0       EQ 9.

In the hardware implementation of the present invention, the common termin Equation 7 and Equation 9, (code_(n) -shifted_(n)) is calculated onephase before the remainder of these equations are evaluated to give thefinal result and the information that the calculation is "done".

One word of warning. In various pieces of "C" code, notably thebehavioral compiled code Huffman Decoder and the sm4code projects, the"C" fragment is used almost directly, but the variable "s" is actuallycalled "shifted". Thus, there are two different variables called"shifted". One in the "C" code and the other in the hardwareimplementation. These two variables differ by a factor of two.

B.2.2.1.1 Inverting the Data Bits

There is one other piece of information required to correctly decode theHuffman codes. This is the polarity of the coded data. It turns out thatH.261 and JPEG use opposite conventions. This reflects itself in thefact that the start codes in H.261 are zero bits whilst the marker bytesin JPEG are one bits.

In order to deal with both conventions, it is necessary to invert thecoded data bits as they are read into the Huffman Decoder n order todecode H.261 style Huffman codes. This is done in the obvious mannerusing an exclusive OR gate. Note that the inversion is only performedfor Huffman codes, as when decoding fixed length codes, the data is notinverted.

MPEG uses a mix of the two conventions. In those aspects inherited fromH.261, the H.261 convention is used. In those inherited from JPEG (thedecoding of DC intra coefficients) the JPEG convention is used.

B.2.2.1.2 Transform Coefficients Table

When using the transform coefficients table in H.261 and MPEG, there arenumber of anomalies. First, the table in MPEG is a super-set of thetable in H.261. In the hardware implementation of the present invention,there is no distinction drawn between the two standards and this meansthat an H.261 stream that contains codes from the extended part of thetable (i.e., MPEG codes) will be decoded in the "correct" manner. Ofcourse, other aspects of the compression standard may well be broken.For example, these extended codes will cause start code emulation inH.261.

Second, the transform coefficient table has an anomaly that means thatit is not describable in the normal manner with the codes₋₋ per₋₋ bittables. This anomaly occurs with the codes of length six bits. Thesecode words are systematically substituted by alternate code words. In anencoder, the correct result is obtained by first encoding in the normalmanner. Then, for all codes that are six bits or longer, the first sixbits are substituted by another six bits by a simple table look-upoperation. In a decoder, in accordance with the present invention, thedecoding process is interrupted just before the sixth bit is decoded,the code words are substituted using a table look-up, and the decodingcontinues.

In this case, there are only ten possible six-bit codes so the necessarylook-up table is very small. The operation is further helped by the factthat the upper two bits of the code are unaltered by the operation. As aresult, it is not necessary to use a true look-up table. Instead a smallcollection of gates are hard-wired to give the appropriatetransformation. The module that does this is called, "hftcfrng". Thistype of code substitution is defined herein as a "ring" since each codefrom the set of possible codes is replaced by another code from that set(no new codes are introduced or old codes omitted).

Furthermore, a unique implementation is used for the very firstcoefficient in a block. In this case, it is impossible for anend-of-block code to occur and, therefore, the table is modified so thatthe most commonly occurring symbol can use the code that would otherwisebe interpreted as end-of-block. This may save one bit. It turns out thatwith the architecture for decoding, in accordance with the presentinvention, this is easily accommodated. In short, for the first bit ofthe first coefficient the decoding is deemed "done" if "index" has thevalue zero. Furthermore, after decoding only a single bit there are onlytwo possible values for "index", zero and one, it is only necessary totest one bit.

B.2.2.1.3 Resister and Adder Size

The Huffman Decoder of the present invention can deal with Huffman codesthat may be as long as 16 bits. However, the decoding machine is onlyeight bits wide. This is possible because we know that the largestpossible value of the decoded Huffman Index number is 255. In fact, thiscould only happen in extended JPEG and, in the current application, thelimit is somewhat lower (but larger than 128, so 7 bits will notsuffice).

It turns out that for all legal Huffman codes, not only the final valueof "index", but all intermediate values lie in the range 0 to 255.However, for an illegal code, i.e., an attempt to decode a code that isnot in the current code table (probably due to a data error) the indexvalue may exceed 255. Since we are using an eight bit machine, it ispossible that at the end of decoding, the final value of "index" doesnot exceed 255 because the more significant bits that tell us an errorhas occurred have been discarded. For this reason, if at any time duringdecoding the index value exceeds 255 (i.e., carry out of the adder thatforms index) an error occurs and decoding is abandoned.

Twelve bits of "code" are preserved. This is not necessary for decodingHuffman codes where an eight bit register would have been sufficient.These upper bits are required for fixed length codes where up to twelvebits may be read.

B.2.2.1.4 Operation for Fixed Length Codes

For fixed length codes, the "codes per bit" value is forced to zero.This means that "total" and "shifted" remain at zero throughout theoperation and "index" is, therefore, the same as code. In fact, theadders and the like only allow an eight bit value to be produced for"index". Because of this, the upper bits of the output word are takendirectly from the "code" register when decoding fixed length codes. Whendecoding Huffman codes these upper bits are forced to zero.

The fact that sufficient: bits have been read from the input iscalculated in the obvious manner. A comparator compares the desirednumber of bits with the "bit" counter.

B.2.2.2 Decoding Coefficient Data

The Parser State Machine, in accordance with the present invention, isgenerally only used for fairly high-level decoding. The very lowestlevel decoding within an eight-by-eight block of data is not directlyhandled by this state machine. The Parser State Machine gives a commandto the Huffman Decoder of the form "decode a block". The HuffmanDecoder, Index to Data Unit and ALU work together under the control of adedicated state machine (essentially in the Huffman Decoder). Thisarrangement allows very high performance decoding of entropy codedcoefficient data. There are also other feedback paths operational inthis mode of operation. For instance, in JPEG decoding where the VLCsare decoded to provide SIZE and RUN information, the SIZE information isfed back directly from the output of the Index to Data Unit to theHuffman Decoder to instruct the Huffman Decoder how many FLC bits toread. In addition, there are several accelerators implemented. Forinstance, using the same example all VLC values which yield a SIZE ofzero are explicitly trapped by looking at the Huffman Index Value beforethe Index to Data stage. This means that in the case of non-zero SIZEvalues, the Huffman Decoder can proceed to read one FLC bit BEFORE theactual value of SIZE is known. This means that no clock cycles arewasted because this reading of the first FLC bit overlaps the singleclock cycle required to perform the table look-up in the Index to DataUnit.

B.2.2.2.1 MPEG and H.261 AC Coefficient Data

FIG. 127 shows the way in which AC Coefficients are decoded in MPEG andH.261. A flow chart detailing the operation of the Huffman Decoder isgiven in FIG. 119.

The process starts by reading a VLC code. In the normal course ofevents, the Huffman index is mapped directly into values representingthe six bit RUN and the absolute value of the coefficient. A one bit FLCis then read giving the sign of the coefficient. The ALU assembles theabsolute value of the coefficient with this sign bit to provide thefinal value of the coefficient.

Note that the data format at this point is sign-magnitude and,therefore, there is little difficulty in this operation. The RUN valueis passed on an auxiliary bus of six bits while the coefficients value(LEVEL) is passed on the normal data bus.

Two special cases exist and these are trapped by looking at the value ofthe decoded index before the Index to Data operation. These are End ofBlock (EOB) and Escape coded data. In the case of EOB, the fact thatthis occurred is passed along through the Index to Data Unit and the ALUblocks so that the Token Formatter can correctly close the open DATAToken.

Escape coded data is more complicated. First six bits of RUN are readand these are passed directly through the Index to Data Unit and arestored in the ALU. Then, one bit of FLC is read. This is the mostsignificant bit of the eight bits of escape that are described in MPEGand H.261 and it gives the sign of the level. The sign is explicitlyread in this implementation because it is necessary to send differentcommands to the ALU for negative values versus positive values. Thisallows the ALU to convert the twos complement value in the bit streaminto sign magnitude. In either case, the remaining seven bits of FLC arethen read. If this has the value zero, then a further eight bits must beread.

In the present invention, the Huffman Decoder's internal state machineis responsible for generating commands to control itself and to alsocontrol the Index to Data Unit, the ALU and the Token Formatter. Asshown in FIG. 124, the Huffman Decoder's instruction comes from one ofthree sources, the Parser State Machine, the Huffman State Machine or aninstruction stored in a register that has previously been received fromthe Parser State Machine. Essentially, the original instruction from theParser State Machine (that causes the Huffman State Machine to take overcontrol and read coefficients) is retained in a register, i.e., eachtime a new VLC is required, it is used. All the other instructions forthe decoding are supplied by the Huffman State Machine.

B.2.2.2.2 MPEG DC Coefficient Data

This is handled in the same way as JPEG DC Coefficient Data. The same(loadable) tables are used and it is the responsibility of thecontrolling microprocessor to ensure that their contents are correct.The only real difference from the MPEG standard is that the predictorsare reset to zero (like in JPEG) the correction for this being made inthe Inverse Quantizer.

B.2.2.2.3 JPEG Coefficient Data

FIG. 120 is a block diagram illustrating the hardware, in accordancewith the present invention, for decoding JPEG AC Coefficients. Since theprocess for DC Coefficients is essentially a simplication of the JPEGprocess, the diagram serves for both AC and DC Coefficients. The onlyreal addition to the previous diagram for the MPEG AC coefficients isthat the "SSSS" field is fed back and may be used as part of the HuffmanDecoder command to specify the number of FLC bits to be read. Theremainder of the command is supplied by the Huffman State Machine.

FIG. 121 depicts flow charts for the Huffman decoding of both AC and DCCoefficients.

Dealing first with the process for AC Coefficients, the process startsby reading a VLC using the appropriate tables (there are two AC tables).The Huffman index is then converted into the RUN and SIZE values in theIndex to Data Unit. Two values are trapped at the Huffman Index stage,these are for EOB and ZRL. These are the only two values for which noFLC bits are read. In the case when the decode index is neither of thesetwo values, the Huffman Decoder immediately reads one bit of FLC whileit waits for the Index to Data Unit to complete the look-up operation todetermine how many bits are actually required. In the case of EOB, nofurther processing is performed by the Huffman State Machine in theHuffman Decoder and another command is read from the Parser StateMachine.

In the case of ZRL, no FLC bits are required but the block is notcompleted. In this case, the Huffman decoder immediately commencesdecoding a further VLC (using the same table as before).

There is a particular problem with detecting the index values associatedwith ZRL and EOB. This is because (unlike H.261 and MPEG) the Huffmantables are downloadable. For each of the two JPEG AC tables, tworegisters are provided (one for ZRL and one for EOB). These are loadedwhen the table is downloaded. They hold the value of index associatedwith the appropriate symbol.

The ALU must convert the SIZE bit FLC code to the appropriatesign-magnitude value. These are loaded when the table is downloaded.They hold the value of index associated with the appropriate symbol.

The ALU must convert the SIZE bit FLC code to the appropriatesign-magnitude value. This can be done by first sign-extending the valuewith the wrong sign. If the sign bit is now set, then the remaining bitsare inverted (ones complement).

In the case of DC Coefficients, the decision making in the HuffmanDecoding Stage is somewhat easier because there is no equivalent of theZRL field. The only symbol which causes zero FLC bits to be read is theone indicating zero DC difference. This is again trapped at the HuffmanIndex stage, a register being provided to hold this index for each ofthe (downloadable) JPEG DC tables.

The ALU of the present invention has the job of forming the finaldecoded DC coefficient by retaining a copy of the last DC Coefficientvalue (known as the prediction). Four predictors are required, one foreach of the four active color components. When the DC difference hasbeen decoded, the ALU adds on the appropriate predictor to form thedecoded value. This is stored again as the predictor for the next DCdifference of that color component. Since DC coefficients are signed(because of the DC offset) conversion from twos complement to signmagnitude is required. The value is then output with a RUN of zero. Infact, the instructions to perform some of the last stages of this arenot supplied by the Huffman State Machine. They are simply executed bythe Parser State Machine.

In a similar manner to the AC Coefficients, the ALU must first form theDC difference from the SIZE bits of FLC. However, in this case, a twoscomplement value is required to be added to the predictor. This can beformed by first sign extending with the wrong sign, as before. If theresult is negative, then one must be added to form the correct value.This can, of course, be added at the same time as the predictor byjamming the carry into the adder.

B.2.2.3 Error Handling

Error handling deserves some mention. There are effectively four sourcesof error that are detected:

Ran off the end of a table.

Serial when token expected.

Token when serial expected.

Too many coefficients in a block.

The first of these occurs in two situations. If the bit counter reachessixteen (legal values being 0 to 15) then an error has occurred becausethe longest legal Huffman code is sixteen bits. If any intermediatevalue of "index" exceeds 255 then an error has occurred as described insection B.2.2.1.3.

The second occurs when serial data is encountered when a Token wasexpected. The third when the opposite condition arises.

The last type of error occurs if there are too many coefficients in ablock. This is actually detected in the Index to Data Unit.

When any of these conditions arises, the error is noted in the Huffmanerror register and the Parser state machine is interrupted. It is theresponsibility of the Parser State Machine to deal with the error and toissue the commands necessary to recover.

The Huffman cooperates with the Parser State Machine at the time of theinterrupt in order to assure correct operation. When the Huffman Decoderinterrupts the Parser State Machine, it is possible that a new commandis waiting to be accepted at the output of the Parser State Machine. TheHuffman Decoder will not accept this command for two whole cycles afterit has interrupted the Parser State Machine. This allows the ParserState Machine to remove the command that was there (which should not nowbe executed) and replace it with an appropriate one. After these twocycles, the Huffman Decoder will resume normal operation and accept acommand if a valid command is there. If not, then it will do nothinguntil the Parser State Machine presents a valid command.

When any of these errors occur, the "Huffman Error" event bit is setand, if the mask bit is set, the block will stop and the controllingmicroprocessor will be interrupted in the normal manner.

One complication occurs because in certain situations, what looks likean error, is not actually an error. The most important place where thisoccurs is when reading the macroblock address. It is legal in thesyntaxes of MPEG, H.261 and JPEG for a Token to occur in place of theexpected macroblock address. If this occurs in a legal manner, theHuffman error register is loaded with zero (meaning no error) but theParser State Machine is still interrupted. The Parser State Machine'scode must recognize this "no error" situation and respond accordingly.In this case, the "Huffman Error" event bit will not be set and theblock will not stop processing.

Several situations must be dealt with. First, the Token occursimmediately with no preceding serial bits. In this case, a "Token whenserial expected error" would occur. Instead, a "no error" error occursin the way just described.

Second, the Token is preceded by a few serial bits. In this case, adecision is made. If all of the bits preceding the Token had the valueone (remember that in H.261 and MPEG the coded data is inverted so theseare zero bits in the coded data file) then no error occurs. If, however,any of them were zero, then they are not valid stuffing bits and, thus,an error has occurred and a "Token when serial expected" error doesoccur.

Third, the token is preceded by many bits. In this case, the samedecision is made. If all sixteen bits are one, then they are treated aspadding bits and a "no error" error occurs. If any of them had beenzero, then "Ran off Huffman Table" error occurs.

Another place that a token may occur unexpectedly is in JPEG. Whendealing with either Huffman tables or Quantizer tables, any number oftables may occur in the same Marker Segment. The Huffman Decoder doesnot know how many there are. Because of this fact, after each table iscompleted It reads another 4-bit FLC assuming it to be a new tablenumber. If, however, a new marker segment starts, then a token will beencountered in place of the 4 bit FLC. This requirement is not foreseenand, therefore, an "Ignore Errors" command bit has been added.

B.2.2.4 Huffman Commands

Here are the bits used by the Parser State Machine to control theHuffman Decoder block and their definitions. Note that the Index to DataUnit command bits are also included in this table. From themicroprogrammer's point of view, the Huffman Decoder and the Index toData Unit operate as one coherent logical block.

                                      TABLE B.2.2                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Huffman Decoder Commands                                                      Bit Name      Function                                                        __________________________________________________________________________    11  Ignore Errors                                                                           Used to disable errors in certain circumstances.                10  Download  Either nominate a table for download or download data                         into that table.                                                9   Alutab    Use information from the ALU registers to specify the                         table number (or number of bits of FLC)                         8   Bypass    Bypass the index to Data Unit                                   7   Token     Decode a Token rather than FLC or VLC                           6   First Coeff                                                                             Selects first coefficient tncx for Tcoeff table and other                     special modes.                                                  5   Special   If set the Huffman State machine should take over                             control.                                                        4   VLC (not FLC)                                                                           Specify VLC or FLC                                              3   Table 3!  Specify the table to use for VLC                                2   Table 2!  or the number of bits to read for a FLC                         1   Table 1!                                                                  0   Table 0!                                                                  __________________________________________________________________________

B.2.2.4.1 Reading FLC

In this mode, Ignore Errors, Download, Alutab, Token, First Coeff,Special and VLC are all zero. Bypass will be set so that no Index toData translation occurs.

The binary number in Table 3:0! indicates how many bits are to be read.

The numbers 0 to 12 are legal. The value zero does indeed read zero bits(as would be expected) and this instruction is, therefore, the HuffmanDecoder NOP instruction. The values 13, 14 and 15 will not work and thevalue 15 is used when the Huffman State Machine is in control to denotethe use of "SSSS" as the number of bits of FLC to read.

B.2.2.4.2 Reading VLC

In this mode, Ignore Errors, Download, Alutab, Token, First Coefficientand Special are zero and VLC is one. Bypass will usually be zero so thatIndex to Data translation occurs.

In this mode Token, First Coefficient and Special are all zero, VLC isone.

The binary number in Table 3:0! indicates which table to use as shown:

                  TABLE B.2.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        Huffman Tables                                                                Table 3:0!     VLC Table to use                                               ______________________________________                                        0000           TCoefficient (MPEG and H.261)                                  0001           CBP (Coded Block Pattern)                                      0010           MBA (Macroblock Address)                                       0011           MVD (Motion Vector Data)                                       0100           Intra Mtype                                                    0101           Predicted Mtype                                                0110           Interpolated Mtype                                             0111           H.261 Mtype                                                    10x0           JPEG (MPEG) DC Table 0                                         10x1           JPEG (MPEG) DC Table 1                                         11x0           JPEG AC Table 0                                                11x1           JPEG AC Table 1                                                ______________________________________                                    

Note that in the case of the tables held in RAM (i.e., the JPEG tables)bit 1 is not used so that the table selections occur twice. If anon-baseline JPEG decoder is built, then there will be four DC tablesand four AC tables and Table 1! then be required.

If Table 3! is zero, then the input data is inverted as it is used orderthat the tables are read correctly as H.261 style tables. In the case ofTable 3:0!=0, the appropriate Ring modification is also applied.

B.2.2.4.3 NOP Instruction

As previously described, the action of reading a FLC of zero bits isused as a No Operation instruction. No data is read from the input ports(either Token or Serial) and the Huffman Decoder outputs a data value ofzero along with the instruction word.

B.2.2.4.4 TCoefficient First Coefficient

The H.261 and MPEG TCoefficient Table has a special non-Huffman codethat is used for the very first coefficient in the block. In order todecode a TCoefficient at the start of a block, the First Coefficient bitmay be set along with a VLC instruction with table zero. One of the manyeffects of the First Coefficient bit is to enable this code to bedecoded.

Note that in normal operation, it is unusual to issue a "simple" commandto read a TCoefficient VLC. This is because control is usually handed tothe Huffman Decoder by setting the Special Bit.

B.2.2.4.5 Reading Token Words

In order to read Token words, the Token bit should be set to one. TheSpecial and First Coefficient bits should be zero. The VLC bit shouldalso be set if the Table 0! bit is to work correctly.

In this mode, the bits Table 1! and Table 0! are used to modify thebehavior of the Token reading as follows:

    ______________________________________                                        Bit           Meaning                                                         ______________________________________                                        Table 0!      Discard padding bits of serial data                             Table 1!      Discard all serial data.                                        ______________________________________                                    

If both Table 0! and Table 1! are zero, then the presence of serial databefore the token is considered to be an error and will be signalled assuch.

If Table 1! is set, then all serial data is discarded until a Token Wordis encountered. No error will be caused by the presence of this serialdata.

If Table 0! is set, then padding bits will be discarded. It is, ofcourse, necessary to know the polarity of the padding bits. This isdetermined by Table 3! in exactly the same way as for reading VLC data.If Table 3! is zero, input data is first inverted and then any "one"bits are discarded. If Table 3! is set to one, the input data is NOTinverted and "one" bits are discarded. Since the action of inverting thedata depending upon the Table 3! bit is conditional on the VLC bit, thisbit must be set to one. If any bits that are not padding bits areencountered (i.e., "1" bits in H.261 and MPEG) an error is reported.

Note that in these instructions only a single Token word is read. Thestate of the extension bit is ignored and it is the responsibility ofthe Demux to test this bit and act accordingly. Instructions to readmultiple words are also provided--see the section on SpecialInstructions.

B.2.2.4.6 ALU Registers Specify Table

If the "Alutab" bit is set, registers in the ALU's register file can beused to determine the actual table number to use. The table numbersupplied in the command, together with the VLC bit, determines which ALUregisters are used;

                  TABLE B.2.4                                                     ______________________________________                                        ALU Register Selection                                                        VLC      table 3:0!       ALU table                                           ______________________________________                                        0        x0xx             fwd.sub.-- r.sub.-- size                            0        x1xx             bwd.sub.-- r.sub.-- size                            1        x0xx             dc.sub.-- huff compid!                              1        x1xx             ac.sub.-- huff compid!                              ______________________________________                                    

In the case of fixed length codes, the correct number of bits are readfor decoding the vectors. If r₋₋ size is zero, a NOP instructionresults.

In the case of Huffman codes, the generated table number has table 3!set to one so that the resulting number refers to one of the JPEGtables.

B.2.2.4.7 Special Instructions

All of the instructions (or modes of operation) described thus far areconsidered as "Simple" instructions. For each command that is received,the appropriate amount of input data (of either serial of token data) isread and the resulting data is output. If no error is detected, exactlyone output will be generated per command.

In the present invention, special instructions have the characteristicthat more than one output word may be generated for a single command. Inorder to accomplish this function, the Huffman Decoder's internal StateMachine takes control and will issue itself instructions as requireduntil it decides that the instruction which the Parser requested hasbeen complete.

In all Special instructions, the first real instruction of the sequencethat is to be executed is issued with the Special bit set to one. Thismeans that all sequences must have a unique first instruction. Theadvantage of this scheme is that the first real instruction of thesequence is available without a look-up operation being required basedupon the command received from the Parser.

There are four recognized special instructions:

TCoefficient

JPEG DC

JPEG AC

Token

The first of these reads H.261 and MPEG Transform coefficients, and thelike, until the end-of-block symbol is read. If the block is a non-intrablock, this command will read the entire block. In this case, the "FirstCoefficient" bit should be set so that the first coefficient trick isapplied. If the block is an intra block, the DC term should already havebeen read and the "First Coefficient" bit should be zero.

In the case of an intra block in H.261, the DC term is read using a"simple" instruction to read the 8 bits FLC value. In MPEG, the "JPEGDC" special instruction described below is used.

The "JPEG DC" command is used to read a JPEG style DC term (includingthe SSSS bits FLC indicated by the VLC). It is also used in MPEG. TheFirst Coefficient bit must be set in order that a counter (counting thenumber of coefficients) in the Index to Data Unit is reset.

The "JPEG AC" command is used to read the remainder of a block, afterthe DC term until either an EOB is encountered or the 64^(th)coefficient is read.

The "Token" command is used to read an entire Token. Token words areread until the extension bit is clear. It is a convenient method ofdealing with unrecognized tokens.

B.2.2.4.8 Downloading Tables

In the present invention, the Huffman Decoder tables can be downloadedby using the "Download" bit. The first step is to nominate which tableto download. This is done by issuing a command to read a FLC with boththe Download and First Coeff bits set. This is treated as an NOP so nobits are actually read, but the table number is stored in a register andis used to identify which table is being loaded in subsequentdownloading.

                  TABLE B.2.5                                                     ______________________________________                                        JPEG Tables                                                                   table 3:0!       Table nominated                                              ______________________________________                                        10xx             JPEG DC Codes per bit                                        11xx             JPEG AC Codes per bit                                        00xx             JPEG DC Index to Data                                        01xx             JPEG AC Index to Data                                        ______________________________________                                    

As the above table shows, either the AC or DC tables can be loaded andtable 3! determines whether it is the codes-per-bit table (in theHuffman decoder itself) or the Index to Data table that is loaded.

Once the table is nominated, data is downloaded into it by issuing acommand to read the required number of FLC (always 8 bits) with theDownload bits set (and the First Coeff bit zero). This causes thedecoded data to be written into the nominated table. An address counteris maintained, the data is written at the current address and then theaddress counter is incremented. The address counter is reset to zerowhenever a table is nominated.

When downloading the Index to Data tables, the data and addresses aremonitored. Note that the address is the Huffman Index number while thedata loaded into that address is the final decoded symbol. Thisinformation is used to automatically load the registers that hold theHuffman index number for symbols of interest. Accordingly, in a JPEG ACtable, when the data has the value corresponding to ZRL is recognized,the current address is written into the register CED₋₋ H₋₋ KEY₋₋ ZRL₋₋INDEX0 or CED₋₋ H₋₋ KEY₋₋ ZRL₋₋ INDEX1 as indicated by the table number.

Since decoded data is written into the codes-per-bit table one phaseafter it has been decoded, it is not possible to read data from thetable during this phase. Therefore, an instruction attempting to read aVLC that is issued immediately after a table download instruction willfail. There is no reason why such a sequence should occur in any realapplication (i.e., when doing JPEG). It is, however, possible to buildsimulation tests that do this.

B.2.2.5 Huffman State Machine

The Huffman State Machine, in accordance with the present invention,operates to provide the Huffman Decoder commands that are internallygenerated in certain cases. All of the commands that may be generated bythe internal state machine may also be provided to the Huffman Decoderby the Demux.

The basic structure of the State Machine is as follows. When a commandis issued to the Huffman Decoder, it is stored in a series of auxiliarylatches so that it may be reused at a later time. The command is alsoexecuted by the Huffman Decoder and analyzed by the Huffman StateMachine. If the command is recognized as being the first of a knowninstruction sequence and the SPECIAL bit is set, then the HuffmanDecoder State Machine takes over control of the Huffman Decoder from theParser State Machine.

At this point, there are three sources of instructions for the HuffmanDecoder:

1) The Parser State Machine--this choice is made at the completion ofthe special instruction (e.g., when EOB has been decoded) and the nextdemux command is accepted.

2) The Huffman State Machine. The Huffman State Machine may provideitself with an arbitrary command.

3) The original instruction that was issued by the Parser State Machineto start the instruction.

In case (2), it is possible that the table number is provided byfeedback from the Index to Data Unit, this would then replace the fieldin the Huffman State Machine ROM.

In case (1), in certain instances, table numbers are provided by valuesobtained from the ALU register file (e.g., in the case of AC and DCtable numbers and F-numbers). These values are stored in the auxiliarycommand storage, so that when that command is later reused the tablenumber is that which has been stored. It is not recovered again from theALU since, in general, the counters will have advanced in order to referto the next block.

Since the choice of the next instruction that will be used depends uponthe data that is being decoded, it is necessary for the decision to bemade very late in a cycle. Accordingly, the general structure is one inwhich all of the possible instructions are prepared in parallel andmultiplexing late in the cycle determines the actual instruction.

Note that in each case, in addition to determining the instruction thatwill be used by the Huffman Decoder in the next cycle, the state machineROM also determines the instruction that will be attached to the currentdata as it passes to the Index to Data Unit and then onto the ALU. Inexactly the same way, all three of these instructions are prepared inparallel and then a choice is made late in the cycle.

Again, there are three choices for this part of the instruction thatcorrespond to the three choices for the next Huffman Decoder instructionabove.

1) A constant instruction suitable for End of Block.

2) The Huffman State Machine. The Huffman State Machine may provide anarbitrary instruction for the Index to Data Unit.

3) The original instruction that was issued by the Parser to start theinstruction.

B.2.2.5.1 EOB Comparator

The EOB comparator's output essentially forces selection of the constantinstruction to be presented to the Index to Data Unit and will alsocause the next Huffman Instruction to be the next instruction from theParser. The exact function of the comparator is controlled by bits inthe Huffman State Machine ROM.

Behind the EOB comparator, there are four registers holding the index ofthe EOB symbol in the AC and DC JPEG tables. In the case of the DCtables, there is of course no End-Of-Block symbol but there is thezero-size symbol, that is generated by a DC difference of zero. Sincethis causes zero bits of FLC to be read in exactly the same way as theEOB symbol, they are treated identically.

In addition to the four index values held in registers, the constantvalue, 1, can also be used. This is the index number of the EOB symbolin H.261 and MPEG.

B.2.2.5.2 ZRL Comparator

In the present invention, this is the more general purpose comparator.It causes the choice of either the Huffman State Machine instruction orthe Original Instruction for use by the I to D.

Behind the ZRL comparator, there are four values. Two are in registersand hold the index of the ZRL code in the AC tables. The other twovalues are constants, one is the value zero and the other is 12 (theindex of ESCAPE in MPEG and H.261).

The constant zero is used in the case of an FLC. The constant 12 is usedwhenever the table number is less than 8 (and VLC). One of the tworegisters is used if the table number is greater than 7 (and VLC) asdetermined by the low order bit of the table number.

A bit in the state machine ROM is provided to enable the comparator andanother is provided to invert its action.

If the TOKEN bit in the instruction is set, the comparator output isignored and replaced instead by the extn bit. This allows for runninguntil the end of a Token.

B.2.2.5.3 Huffman State Machine ROM

The instruction fields in the Huffman State Machine are as follows:

nxtstate 4:0!

The address to use in the next cycle. This address may be modified.

statect1

Allows modification of the next state address. If zero, the statemachine address is unmodified, otherwise the LSB of the address isreplaced by the value of either of the two comparators as follows:

    ______________________________________                                        nxtstate 0!                                                                   ______________________________________                                        0               Replace Lsb by EOB match                                      1               Replace Lsb by ZRL match                                      ______________________________________                                    

Note

In any case, if the next Huffman Instruction is selected as "Re-runoriginal command" the state machine will jump to location 0, 1, 2 or 3as appropriate for the command.

eobct 1:0!

This controls the selection of the next Huffman instruction based uponthe EOB comparator and extn bit as follows:

    ______________________________________                                        eobctl 1:0!                                                                   ______________________________________                                        00              No effect - see zrlctl 1:0!                                   01              Take new (Parser) command if EOB                              10              Take new (Parser) command if extn low                         11              Unconditional Demux Instruction                               ______________________________________                                    

zrlct 1:0!

This controls the selection of the next Huffman instruction based uponthe ZRL comparator. If the condition is met, then it takes the statemachine instruction, otherwise it re-runs the original instruction. Ineither case, if an eobctl*+ condition takes a demux instruction thenthis (eobctl*+) takes priority as follows:

    ______________________________________                                        zrlctl 1:0!                                                                   ______________________________________                                        00              Never take SM (always re-run)                                 01              Always take SM command                                        10              SM if ZRL matches                                             11              SM if ZRL does not match                                      ______________________________________                                    

smtab 3:0!

In the present invention, this is the table number that will be used bythe Huffman Decoder if the selected instruction is the state machineinstruction. However, if the ZRL comparator matches, then the zrltab3:0! field is used in preference.

If it is not required that a different table number be used dependingupon whether a ZRL match occurs, then both smtab 3:0! and zrltab{3:0!will have the same value. Note, however, that this can lead to strangesimulation problems in Lsim. In the case of MPEG, there is no obviousrequirement to load the registers that indicate the Huffman index numberfor ZRL (a JPEG only construction). However, these are still selectedand the output of the ZRL comparator becomes "unknown" despite the factthat both smtab 3:0! and zrltab 3:0! have the same value in all casesthat the ZRL comparator may be "unknown" (so it does not matter which isselected) the next state still goes to "unknown".

zrltab 3:0!

This is the table number that will be used by the Huffman decoder if theselected instruction is the state machine instruction. However, if theZRL comparator matches then the zrltab 3:0! field is used in preference.

If it is not required that a different table number be used dependingupon whether a ZRL match occurs, then both smtab 3:0! and zrltab 3:0!will have the same value. Note, however, that this can lead to strangesimulation problems in Lsim. In the case of MPEG, there is no obviousrequirement to load the register that indicate the Huffman index numberfor ZRL (a JPEG only construction). However, these are still selectedand the output of the ZRL comparator becomes "unknown" despite the factthat both smtab 3:0! and zrltab 3:0! have the same value in all casesthat the ZRL comparator may be "unknown" (so it does not matter which isselected) the next state still goes to "unknown".

zrltab 3:0!

This is the table number that will be used by the Huffman Decoder if theselected instruction is the state machine instruction and the ZRLcomparator matches.

smvlc

This is the VLC bits used by the Huffman Decoder if the selectedinstruction is the state machine instruction.

aluzrl 1:0!

This field controls the selection of the instruction that is passed tothe ALU. It will either be the command from the Parser State Machine(that was stored at the start of the instruction sequence) or thecommand from the state machine:

    ______________________________________                                        aluzrl 1:0!                                                                   ______________________________________                                        00      Alway take the saved Parser State Machine Command                     01      Always take the Huffman State Machine Command                         10      Take the Huffman SM command if not EOB                                11      Take the Huffman SM command if not ZRL                                ______________________________________                                    

alueob

This wire controls modification of the instruction passed to the ALUbased upon the EOB comparator. This simply forces the ALU's output modeto "zinput". This is an arbitrary choice; any output mode apart from"none" will suffice. This is to ensure that the end-of-lock command wordis passed to the Token Formatter block where it controls the properformatting of DATA Tokens:

    ______________________________________                                        alueob                                                                        ______________________________________                                        0              Do not modify ALU outsrc field                                 1              Force "zinput" into outsrc if EOB match                        ______________________________________                                    

The remainder of the fields are the ALU instruction fields. These areproperly documented in the ALU description.

B.2.2.5.4 Huffman State Machine Modification

In one embodiment of the state machine, the Index to Data Unit needs to"know" when the RUN part of an escape-coded Tcoefficient is being passedto the Index to Data Unit. While this can be accomplished using anappropriate bit in the control ROM, but to avoid changing the ROM, analternative approach has been used. In this regard, the address goinginto the ROM is monitored and the address value five is detected. Thisis the appropriate location designated in the ROM dealing with the RUNfield. Of course, it will be apparent that the ROM could be programmedto use other selected address values. Moreover, the aforedescribedapproach of using a bit in the control ROM could be utilized.

B.2.2.6 Guided Tour of Schematics

In the present invention, the Huffman Decoder is called "hd". Logically,"hd" actually includes the Index to Data Unit (this is required by thelimitations of compiled code generation). Accordingly, "hd" includes thefollowing major blocks;

                  TABLE B.2.6                                                     ______________________________________                                        Huffman Modules                                                               Module Name  Description                                                      ______________________________________                                        hddp         Huffman Decoder (Arithmetic) datapath                            hdstdp       Huffman State Machine Datapath                                   hfitod       Index to Data Unit                                               ______________________________________                                    

The following description of the Huffman modules is accomplished by aglobal explanation of the various subsystem areas shown in greaterdetail in the drawings which are readily comprehended by one of ordinaryskill in the art.

B.2.2.6.1 Description of "hd"

The logic for the two-wire interface control usually includes threeports controlled by the two-wire interface; data input, data output andthe command. In addition, there are two "valid" wires from the inputshifter; token₋₋ valid indicating that a Token is being presented onin₋₋ data 7:0! and serial₋₋ valid indicating that data is beingpresented on serial.

The most important signals generated are the enables that go to thelatches. The most important being e1 which is the enable for the ph1latches. The majority of ph0 latches are not enabled whilst two enablesare provided for those that are; e0 associated with serial data and e0tassociated with Token data.

In the present invention, the "done" signals (done, notdone and theirph0 variants done0 and notdone0) indicate when a primitive Huffmancommand is completed. In the case when a Huffman State Machine commandis executed, "done" will be asserted at the completion of each primitivecommand that comprises the entire state-machine command. The signalnotnew prevents the acceptance of a new command from the Parser StateMachine until the entire Huffman State Machine command is completed.

Regarding control of information received from the Index to Data Unit,the control logic for the "size" field is fed back to the Huffmandecoder during JPEG coefficient decoding. This can actually happen intwo ways. If the size is exactly one, this is fed back on the dedicatedsignal notfbone0. Otherwise, the size is fed back from the output of theIndex to data unit (out₋₋ data 3:0! and a signal fbvalid1 indicates thatthis is occurring. The signal muxsize is produced to control themultiplexing of the fed-back data into the command register (sheet 10).

In addition, there is feedback that exactly 64 coefficients have beendecode. Since in JPEG the EOB is not coded in this situation, the signalforceeob is produced. By analogy, with the signals for feeding backsize, as mentioned above, there are in fact two ways in which this isdone. Either jpegeob is used (a ph1 signal) or jpegeob0. Note that inthe case when a normal feedback is made (jpegeob), the latch i₋₋ 971 isonly loaded as the data is fed back and not cleared until a new ParserState Machine command is accepted. The signal forceeob does not actuallyget generated until a Huffman code is decoded. Thus, the fixed lengthcode (i.e., size bits) is not affected, but the next Huffman codedinformation is replaced by the forced end of block. In the case whensize is one and jpegeob0 is used, only one bit is read and, therefore,i₋₋ 1255 and i₋₋ 1256 delay the signal to the correct time. Note that itis impossible for a size of zero to occur in this situation since theonly symbols with size zero are EOB and ZRL.

The decoding 1s fairly random decoding of the command to producetcoeff₋₋ tab0 (Huffman decoding using Tcoeff table), mba₋₋ tab0 (Huffmandecoding using the MBA table) and nop (no operation). There are severalreasons for generating nop. A Fixed length code of size zero is one, theforceeob signal is another (since no data should be read from the inputshifter even though an output is produced to signal EOB) and lastlytable download nomination is a third.

notfrczero (generated by a FLC of size zero, a NOP) ensures that theresult is zero when a NOP instruction is used. Furthermore, invertindicates when the serial bits should be inverted before Huffmandecoding (see section B.2.2.1.1). ring indicates when the transformcoefficient ring should be applied (see section B.2.2.1.2).

Decoding is also accomplished regarding addressing the codes-per-bitROMs. These are built out of the small data-path ROMs. The signals areduplicated (e.g., csha and csla) purely to get sufficient drive byseparating the ROMs into two sections. The address can be taken eitherfrom the bit counter (bit 3:0!) or from the microprocessor interfaceaddress (key-addr 3:0!) depending upon UPI access to the block beingselected.

Additional decoding is concerned with the UPI reading of registers suchas those that hold the Huffman index values for the JPEG tables (EOB,ZRL etc.). Also included is a tristate driver control for theseregisters and the UPI reading of the codes per bit RAMs.

Arithmetic datapath decoding is also provided for certain important bitnumbers. first₋₋ bit is used in connection with the Tcoeff firstcoefficient trick and bit₋₋ five is concerned with applying the ring inthe Tcoeff table. Note the use of forceeob to simulate the action thatthe EOB comparator matches the decoded index value.

Regarding the extn bit, if a token is read from the input shifter, thenthe associated extn bit is read along with it. Otherwise, the last valueof extn is preserved. This allows the testing of the extn bit by themicrocode program at any time after a token has been read.

When zerodat is asserted, the upper four bits of the Huffman output dataare forced to zero. Since these only have valid values when decodingfixed length codes, they are zeroed when decoding a VLC, a token or whena NOP instruction is executed for any reason.

Further circuitry detects when each command is completed and generatesthe "done" signals. Essentially, there are two groups of reasons forbeing "done"; normal reasons and exceptional reasons. These are eachhandled by one of the two three way multiplexers.

The lower multiplexer (i₋₋ 1275) handles the normal reasons. In the caseof a FLC, the signal ndnflc is used. This is the output of thecomparator comparing the bit counter with the table number. In the caseof a VLC, the signal ndnvlc is used. This is an output from thearithmetic datapath and reflects directly Equation 9. In the case of anNOP instruction or a Token, only one cycle is required and, therefore,the system is unconditionally "done".

In the present invention, the upper multiplexer (i₋₋ 1274) handlesexceptional cases. If the decoder is expecting a size to be fed back(fbexpctd0) in JPEG decoding and that size is one (notfbone0), then thedecoder is done because only one bit is required. If the decoder isdoing the first bit of the first coefficient using the Tcoeff table, itis done if bit zero of the current index is zero (see SectionB.2.2.1.2). If neither of these conditions are met then there is noexceptional reason for being done.

The NOR gate (i₋₋ 1293) finally resolves the "done" condition. Thecondition generated by i-570 (i.e., that the data is not valid) forces"done". This may seem a little strange. It is used primarily just afterreset to force the machine into its "done" state in preparation for thefirst command ("done" resets all counters, registers, etc.). Note thatany error condition also forces "done".

The signal notdonex is required for use in detecting errors. The normal"done" signals cannot be used since on detecting an error "done" isforced anyway. The use of "done" would give a combinatorial feedbackloop.

Error detection and handing, is accomplished by circuitry which detectsall of the possible error conditions. These are ORed together in i₋₋1190. In this case, i₋₋ 1193, i-585 and i₋₋ 584 constitute the three bitHuffman error register. Note i₋₋ 1253 and i-1254 which disable the errorin the cases when there is no "real" error (section B.2.2.3).

In addition, i₋₋ 580 and i₋₋ 579 along with the associated circuitryprovide a simple state machine that controls the acceptance of the firstcommand after an error is detected.

As previously indicated, control signals are delayed to match pipelinedelays in the Index to Data Unit and the ALU.

Itod₋₋ bypass is the actual bypass signal passed to the Index to DataUnit. It is modified when the Huffman State Machine is in control toforce bypass whenever a fixed length code is decoded.

Aluinstr 32! is the bit that causes the ALU to feedback (conditioncodes) to the Parser State Machine. Furthermore, it is important whenthe Huffman State Machine is in control that the signals are onlyasserted once (rather than each time one of the primitive commandscompletes).

Aluinstr 36! is the bit that allows the ALU to step the block counters(if other ALU instruction bits specify an increment too). This also mustonly be asserted once.

In addition, these bits must only be asserted for ALU instructions thatoutput data to the Token Formatter. Otherwise, the counters may beincremented prior to the first output to the Token formatter causing anincorrect value of "cc" in a DATA token.

In the illustrated embodiment of the invention, either alunode 1! oralunode 0! will be low if the ALU will output to the Token Formatter.

FIG. 118, similar to FIG. 27, illustrates the Huffman State Machinedatapath referred to as "hdstdp". There is also a UPI decode for readingthe output of the Huffman State machine ROM.

Multiplexing is provided to deal with the case when the table number isspecified by the ALU register file locations (see Section B.2.2.4.6).

The modification of aluinstr 3:2! deals with forcing the ALU outsrcinstruction field to non-none (section B.2.2.5.3, description of alueob)

Regarding the command register for the Huffman Decoder block (x), eachbit of the command has associated multiplexer which selects between thepossible sources of commands. Four control signals control thisselection:

Selhold causes the register to retain its current state.

Selnew causes a new command to be loaded from the Parser State Machine.This also enables loading of the registers that retain the originalParser State Machine command for later use.

Selold causes loading of the command from the registers that retain theoriginal Parser State Machine command.

/selsm causes loading of the command from the Huffman State Machine ROM.

In the case of the table number, the situation is slightly morecomplicated since the table number may also be loaded from the outputdata of the Index to Data Unit (selholdt and muxsize). Latches hold thecurrent address in the Huffman state machine ROM. The logic detectswhich of the possible four commands are being executed. These signalsare combined to form the lower two bits of the start address in the caseof a new command.

Logic also detects when the output of the state machine ROM ismeaningless (usually because the command is a "simple" command). Thesignal notignorerom effectively disables operation of the state machine,in particular, disabling any modification of the instruction passed tothe ALU.

The circuitry generating fixstate0 controls the limited jumpingcapability of this state machine.

Decoding is also provided for driving the signals into the Huffman StateMachine ROM. This is datapath-style combinatorial ROM.

The generation of escape₋₋ run is described in Section B.2.2.5.4.

Decoding also provides for the registers that hold the Huffman Indexnumber for symbols such as ZRL and EOB. These registers can be loadedfrom the UPI or the datapath. The decoding in the center(es 4:0! and zs3:0! is generating the select signals for the multiplexers that selectwhich register or constant value to compare against the decode HuffmanIndex.

Regarding the control logic for the Huffman State Machine. Here the"instruction" bits from the Huffman State Machine ROM are combined withvarious conditions to determine what to do next and how to modify theinstruction word for the ALU.

In the present invention, the signals notnew, notsm and notold are usedon sheet 10 to control the operation of the Huffman Decoder commandregister. They are generated here in an obvious manner from the controlbits in the state machine ROM (described in Section B.2.2.5.3) togetherwith the output of the Huffman Index comparators (neobmatch andnzrlmatch).

Selection is also accomplished of the source for the instruction passedto the ALU. The actual multiplexing is performed in the Huffman StateMachine datapath "hfstdp". Four control signals are generated.

In the case when the end-of-block has not been encountered, one ofaluseldmx (selecting the Parser State Machine instruction) or aluselsm(selecting the Huffman state machine instruction) will be generated.

In the case when the end-of-block has not been encountered, one ofaluseleobd (selecting the Parser State Machine instruction) oraluseleobd (selecting the Huffman State Machine instruction) will begenerated. In addition the "outsrc" field of the ALU instruction ismodified to force it to "zinput".

A register holds the nominated table number during table download.Decoding is provided for the codes-per-bit RAMs. Additional decodingrecognizes when symbols like EOB and ZRL are downloaded so that theHuffman Index number registers can be automatically loaded.

Regarding the bit counter, a comparator detects when the correct numberof bits have been read when reading a FLC.

B.2.2.6.2 Description cof "hddp"

Comparators detect the specific values of Huffman Index. Registers holdthe values for the downloadable tables. The multiplexers (meob 7:0! andmzr 7:0!) select which value to use and the exclusive-or gates andgating constitute the comparators.

Adders and registers directly evaluate the equations described inSection B.2.2.1. No further description is thought necessary here. Anexclusive or is used for inverting the data (i₋₋ 807) described inSection B.2.2.1.1.

The "code" register is 12 bits wide. A multiplexing arrangementimplements the "ring" substitution described in Section B.2.2.1.2.

Regarding the pipeline delays for data and multiplexing between decodedserial data (index 7:0!) and Token data (ntoken0 7:0!), the Huffmanindex value is decided in ZRL and EOB symbols.

Codes-per-bit ROMs and their multiplexing are used for deciding whichtable to use. This arrangement is used because the table selectinformation arrives late. All tables are then accessed and the correcttable selected.

Regarding the codes-per-bit RAM, the final multiplexing of thecodes-per-bit ROM and the output of the codes-per-bit RAM takes placeinside the block "hdcpbram".

B.2.2.6.3 Description of "hdstdp"

In the present invention, "Hdstdp" comprises two modules. "hndstdel" isconcerned with delaying the Parser State Machine control bits until theappropriate pipeline stage, e.g., when they are supplied to the ALU andToken Formatter. It only processes about half of the instruction wordthat is passed to the ALU, the remainder being dealt with by the othermodule "hdstmod".

"Hdstmod" includes the Huffman State Machine ROM. Some bits of thisinstruction are used by the Huffman State Machine control logic. Theremaining bits are used to replace that part of the ALU instruction word(from the Parser State Machine) that is not dealt with in "hdstdel".

"Hdstmod" is obvious and requires no explanation--there are onlypipeline delay registers.

"Hdstdel" is also very simple and is handled by a ROM and multiplexersfor modifying the ALU instruction. The remainder of the circuitry isconcerned with UPI read access to half of the Huffman State Machine ROMoutputs. Buffers are also used for the control signals.

B.2.3 The Token Formatter

The Huffman Decoder Token Formatter, in accordance with the presentinvention, sits at the end of the Huffman block. Its function, as itsname suggests, is to format the data from the Huffman Decoder into thepropriety Token structure. The input data is multiplexed with data inthe Microinstruction word, under control of the Microinstruction wordcommand field. The block has two operating nodes; DATA₋₋ WORD, andDATA₋₋ TOKEN.

B.2.3.1 The Microinstruction Word

                  TABLE B.2.7                                                     ______________________________________                                        The Microinstitution word consisting of seven fields                          Field Name       Bits                                                         ______________________________________                                        Token            0:7                                                          Mask              8:11                                                        Block Type (Bt)  12:13                                                        External Extn (Ee)                                                                             14                                                           Demux Extn (De)  15                                                           End of Block (Eb)                                                                              16                                                           Command (Cmd)    17                                                           ______________________________________                                    

    ______________________________________                                        17      16     15       14   12     8     0                                   ______________________________________                                        Cmd     Eb     De       Ee   Bt     Mask  Token                               ______________________________________                                         The Microinstruction word is governed by the same accept as the Data word                                                                              

The Microinstruction word is governed by the same accept as the Dataword.

B.2.3.2 Operating Modes

                  TABLE B.2.8                                                     ______________________________________                                        Bit Allocation                                                                Cmd                Mode                                                       ______________________________________                                        0                  Data.sub.-- Word                                           1                  Data.sub.-- Token                                          ______________________________________                                    

B.2.3.2.1 Data Word

In this mode, the top eight bits of the input are fed to the output. Thebottom eight bits will be either the bottom eight bits of the input, theToken field of the Microinstruction word or a mixture of both, dependingon the mask field. Mask represents the number of input bits in the mix,i.e.

    out.sub.-- data 16:8!=in.sub.-- data 16:8!

    out.sub.-- data{7:0!=(Token 7:0!&(ff<<mask))indata 7:0!

When mask is set to 0×8 or greater, the output data will equal the inputdata. This mode is used to output words in non-DATA Tokens. With maskset to 0, out₋₋ data 7:0! will be the Token field of theMicroinstruction word. This mode is used for outputting Token headersthat contain no data. When Token headers do contain data, the number ofdata bits is given by the mask field.

If External Extn(Ee) is set, out₋₋ extn=in₋₋ extn,

otherwise

out₋₋ extn=De.Bt and Eb are "don't care".

B.2.3.2.2 Data Token

This mode is used for formatting DATA Tokens and has two functionsdependent on a signal, first₋₋ coefficient. At reset, first₋₋coefficient is set. When the first data coefficient arrives along with aMicroinstruction word that has cmd set to 1, out₋₋ data 16:2! is set to0×1 and out₋₋ data 1:0! takes the value of the Bt field in theMicroinstruction word. This is the header of a DATA Token. When thisword has been accepted, the coefficient that accompanied the command isloaded into a register, RL and first₋₋ coefficient takes the value ofEb. When the next coefficient arrives, out₋₋ data 16:0! takes theprevious coefficient, stored in RL. RL and first₋₋ coefficient are thenupdated. This ensures that when the end of the block is encountered andEb is set, first₋₋ coefficient is set, ready for the next DATA Token,i.e.,

    ______________________________________                                               If(first.sub.-- coefficient)                                                  {                                                                               out.sub.-- data 16:2! = 0x1                                                   out.sub.-- data 1:0! = Bt 1:0!                                              RL 16:0! = in.sub.-- data 16:0!                                               }                                                                             else                                                                          {                                                                               out.sub.-- data 16:0! = RL: 16:0!                                             RL 16:0! = in.sub.-- data 16:0!                                             }                                                                             Ebt.sub.-- extn =                                                      ______________________________________                                    

B.2.3.3 Explanatory Discussion

In accordance with the present invention, most of the instruction bitsare supplied in the normal manner by the Parser State Machine. However,two of the fields are actually supplied by other circuitry. The "Bt"field mentioned above is connected directly to an output of the ALUblock. This two bit field gives the current value of "cc" or "colorcomponent". Thus, when a DATA Token header is constructed, the lowestorder two bits take the color component directly from the ALU counters.Secondly, the "Eb" bit is asserted in the Huffman decoder whenever andEnd-of-block symbols id decoded (or in the case of JPEG when one isassumed because the last coefficient in the block is coded).

The in₋₋ extn signal is derived in the Huffman Decoder. It only hasmeaning with respect to Tokens when the extension bit is supplied alongwith the Token word in the normal way.

B.2.4 The Parser State Machine

The Parser State Machine of the present invention is actually a verysimple piece of circuitry. The complication lies in the programming ofthe microcode ROM which is discussed in Section B.2.5.

Essentially the machine consists of a register which holds the currentaddress. This address is looked up in the microcode ROM to produce themicrocode word. The address is also incremented in a simple incrementerand this incremented address is one of two possible addresses to be usedfor the next state. The other address is a field in the microcode ROMitself. Thus, each instruction is potentially a jump instruction and mayjump to a location specified in the program. If the jump is not taken,control passes to the next location in the ROM.

A series sixteen condition code bits are provided. Any one of theseconditions may be selected (by a field in the microcode ROM) and, inaddition, it may be inverted (again a bit in the microcode ROM). Theresulting signal selects between either the incremented address or thejump address in the microcode ROM. One of the conditions is hard-wiredto evaluate as "False". If this condition is selected, no jump willoccur. Alternatively, if this condition is selected and then inverted,the jump is always taken; an unconditional jump.

                                      TABLE B.2.9                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Condition Code Bits                                                           Bit No.                                                                            Name   Description                                                       __________________________________________________________________________    0    user 0!                                                                              Connected to a register programmable by the user from             1    user 1!                                                                              the microprocessor interface. They allow "user defined"           2    cbp.sub.-- eight                                                                     condition codes tnat can be tested with little overhead.          3    cbp.sub.-- special                                                                   Two are defined to control non-standard "Coded block                          Pattern" processing for experimental 4 block and 8 block                      macroblock structures.                                            4    he 0!  These bits connect directly to the Huffman decoder's              5    he 1!  Huffman Error register.                                           6    he 2!                                                                    7    Extn   The Extension bit (for Tokens)                                    8    Bikptn The Block Pattern Shifter                                         9    MBstart                                                                              At Start of a Macroblock                                          10   Picstart                                                                             At Start of a Picture                                             11   Restart                                                                              At Start of a Restart Interval                                    12   Chngdet                                                                              The "Sticky" Change Detect bit                                    13   Zero   ALU zero condition                                                14   Sign   ALU sign condition                                                15   False  Hard wired to False.                                              __________________________________________________________________________

B.2.4.1 Two wire Interface Control

The two-wire interface control, in accordance with the invention, is alittle unusual in this block. There is a two-wire interface between theParser State Machine and the Huffman Decoder. This is used to controlthe progress of commands. The Parser State Machine will wait until agiven command has been accepted before it proceeds to read the nextcommand from the ROM. In addition, condition codes are fed back througha wire from the ALU.

Each command has a bit in the microcode ROM that allows it to specifythat it should wait for feedback. If this occurs, then after thatinstruction has been accepted by the Huffman Decoder, no new commandsare presented until the feedback wire from the ALU becomes asserted.This wire, fb₋₋ valid, indicates that the condition codes currentlybeing supplied by the ALU are valid in the sense that they reflect thedata associated with the command that requested the wait for feedback.

The intended use of the feature, in accordance with the presentinvention, is in constructing conditional jump commands that decide thenext state to jump to as a result of decoding (or processing) aparticular piece of data. without this facility it would be impossibleto test any conditions depending upon data in the pipeline since thetwo-wire control means that the time at which a certain command reachesa given processing block (i.e., the ALU in this case) is uncertain.

Not all instructions are passed to the Huffman Decoder. Someinstructions may be executed without the need for the data pipeline.These tend to be jump instructions. A bit in the microcode ROM selectswhether or not the instruction will be presented to the Huffman Decoder.If not, there is no requirement that the Huffman Decoder accept theinstruction and, therefore, execution can continue in thesecircumstances even if the pipeline is stalled.

B.2.4.2 Event Handling

There are two event bits located in the Parser State Machine. One isreferred to as the Huffman event and the other is referred to as theParser Event.

The Parser Event is the simplest of these. The "condition" beingmonitored by this event is simply a bit in the microcode ROM. Thus, aninstruction may cause a Parser Event by setting this bit. Typically, theinstruction that does this will write an appropriate constant into therom₋₋ control register so that the interrupt service routine candetermine the cause of the interrupt.

After servicing a Parser Event (or immediately if the event is maskedout) control resumes at the point where it left off. If the instructionthat caused the event has a jump instruction (whose condition evaluatestrue) then the jump is taken in the normal manner. Hence, it is possibleto jump to an error handler after servicing by coding the jump.

A Huffman event is rather different. The condition being monitored isthe "OR" of the three Huffman Error bits. In reality, this condition ishandled in a very similar manner to the Parser Event. However, anadditional wire from the Huffman Decoder, huffintrpt, is assertedwhenever an error occurs. This causes control to jump to an errorhandler in the microcode program.

When a Huffman error occurs, therefore, the sequence involves generatinginterrupt and stopping the block. After servicing, control istransferred to the error handler. There is no "call" mechanism andunlike a normal interrupt, it is not possible to return to the point inthe microcode before the error occurred following error handling.

It is possible for huffintrpt to be asserted without a Huffman errorbeing generated. This occurs in the special case of a "no-error" erroras discussed in Section B.2.2.3. In this case, no interrupt (to themicroprocessor interface) is generated, but control is still passed tothe error handler (in the microcode). Since the Huffman error registerwill be clear in this case, the microcode error handler can determinethat this is the situation and respond accordingly.

B.2.4.3 Special locations

There are several special locations in the microcode ROM. The first fourlocations in the ROM are entry points to the main program. Controlpasses to one of these four locations on reset. The location jumped todepends upon the coding standard selected in the ALU register, coding₋₋std. Since this location is itself reset to zero by a true reset controlpasses to location zero. However, it is possible to reset the ParserState Machine alone by using the UPI register bit CED₋₋ H₋₋ TRACE₋₋ RSTin CED₋₋ H₋₋ TRACE. In this case, the coding₋₋ std register is not resetand control passes to the appropriate one of the first four locations.

The second four locations (0×004 to 0×007) are used when a Huffmaninterrupt takes place. Typically, a jump to the actual error handler isplaced in each of these locations. Again, the choice of location is madeas a result of the coding standard.

B.2.4.4 Tracing

As a diagnostic aid, a trace mechanism is implemented. This allows themicrocode to be single-stepped. The bits CED₋₋ H₋₋ TRACE₋₋ EVENT andCED₋₋ H₋₋ TRACE₋₋ MASK in the register CED₋₋ H₋₋ TRACE control this. Astheir names suggest, they operate in a very similar fashion to thenormal event bits. However, because of several differences (inparticular no UPI interrupt is ever generated) they are not grouped withthe other event bits.

The tracing mechanism is turned on when CED₋₋ H₋₋ TRACE₋₋ MASK is set toone. After each microcode instruction is read from the ROM, but beforeit is presented to the Huffman Decoder, a trace event occurs. In thiscase, CED₋₋ H₋₋ TRACE₋₋ EVENT becomes one. It must be polled because nointerrupt will be generated. The entire microcode word is available inthe registers CED₋₋ H₋₋ KEY₋₋ DMX₋₋ WORD₋₋ 0 through CED₋₋ H₋₋ KEY₋₋DMX₋₋ WORD₋₋ 9. The instruction can be modified at this time ifrequired. Writing a one to CED₋₋ H₋₋ TRACE₋₋ EVENT causes theinstruction to be executed and clears CED₋₋ H₋₋ TRACE₋₋ EVENT. Shortlyafter this time, when the next microcode word to be executed has beenread from the ROM, a new trace event will occur.

B.2.5 The Microcode

The microcode is programmed using an assembler "hpp" which is a verysimple tool and much of the abstraction is achieved by using a macropreprocessor. A standard "C" preprocessor "cpp" may be used for thispurpose.

The code is instructed as follows:

Ucode.u is the main file. First, this includes tokens.h to define thetokens. Next, regfile.h defines the ALU register map. The fields.udefines the various fields in the microcode word, giving a list ofdefined symbols for each possible bit pattern in the field. Next, thelabels that are used in the code are defined. After this step, instr.uis included to define a large number of "cpp" macros which define thebasic instructions. Then, errors.h defines the numbers which define theParser events. Next, unword.u defines the order in which the fields areplaced to build the microcode word.

The remainder of ucode.u is the microcode program itself.

B.2.5.1 The Instructions

In this section the various instructions defined in ucode.u aredescribed. Not all instructions are described here since in many casesthey are small variations on a theme (particularly the ALUinstructions).

B.2.5.1.1 Huffman and Index to Data Instructions

In the invention, the H₋₋ NOP instruction is used by the HuffmanDecoder. It is the No-operation instruction. The Huffman does nothing inthe sense that no data is decoded. The data produced by this instructionis always zero. Accordingly, the associated instruction is passed ontothe ALU.

The next instructions are the Token groups; H₋₋ TOKSRCH, H₋₋ TOKSKIP₋₋PAD, H₋₋ TOKSKIP₋₋ JPAD, H₋₋ TOKPASS and H₋₋ TOKREAD. These all read atoken or tokens from the Input Shifter and pass them onto the rest ofthe machine. H₋₋ TOKREAD reads a single token word. H₋₋ TOKPASS can beused to read an entire token, up to and including, the word with a zeroextn bit. The associated command is repeated for each word of the Token.H₋₋ TOKSRCH discards all serial data preceding a Token and then readsone token word. H₋₋ TOKSKIP₋₋ PAD skips any padding bits (H.261 andMPEG) and then reads one Token word. H₋₋ TOKSKIP₋₋ JPAD does the samething for JPEG padding.

H₋₋ FLC(NB) reads a fixed length code of "NB" bits.

H₋₋ VLC(TBL) reads a vic using the indicated table (passes as mnemonic,e.g., H₋₋ VLC(tcoeff)).

H₋₋ FLC₋₋ IE(NB) is like H₋₋ FLC, but the "ignore errors" bit is set.

H₋₋ TEST₋₋ VLC(TBL) is like H₋₋ VLC, but the bypass bit is set so thatthe Huffman Index is passed through the Index to Data Unit unmodified.

H₋₋ FWD₋₋ R and H₋₋ BWD₋₋ R read a FLC of the size indicated by the ALUregisters r₋₋ fwd₋₋ r₋₋ size and r₋₋ bwd₋₋ r₋₋ size, respectively.

H₋₋ DCJ reads JPEG style DC coefficients, the table number from the ALU.

H₋₋ DCH reads a H.261 DC term.

H₋₋ TCOEFF and H₋₋ DCTCOEFF read transform coefficients. In H₋₋DCTCOEFF, the first coeff bit is set and is for non-intra blocks, whilstH₋₋ TCOEFF is for intra blocks after the DC term has already been read.

H₋₋ NOMINATE(TBL) nominates a table for subsequent download.

H₋₋ DNL(NB) reads NB bits and downloads them into the nominated table.

B.2.5.1.2 ALU Instructions

There really are too many ALU instructions to explain them all indetail. The basic way in which the Mnemonics are constructed isdiscussed and this should make the instructions readable. Furthermore,these should readily be understandable to one of ordinary skill in theart.

Most of the ALU instructions are concerned with moving data from placeto place and, therefore, a generic "load" instruction is used. In theMnemonic, A₋₋ LDxy, it is understood that the contents of y are loadedinto x., i.e., the destination is listed first and the source second:

                  TABLE B.2.10                                                    ______________________________________                                        Letters used to denote possible                                               sources and destinations of data                                              Letter             Meaning                                                    ______________________________________                                        A                  A register                                                 R                  Run register                                               I                  Data Input                                                 O                  Data Output                                                F                  ALU register File                                          C                  Constant                                                   Z                  Constant of zero                                           ______________________________________                                    

By way of example, LDAI loads the A register with the data from the datainput port of the ALU. If the ALU register file is specified, themnemonic will take an address so that LDAF(RA) loads A with the contentsof location RA in the register file.

The ALU has the ability to modify data as it is moved from source todestination. In this case, the arithmetic is indicated as part of thesource data. Accordingly, the Mnemonic LDA₋₋ AADDF(RA) loads A with theexisting contents of the A register plus the contents of the indicatedlocation in the register file. Another example is LDA₋₋ ISGXR, whichtakes the input data, sign extends from the bit indicated in the RUNregister, and stores the result in the A register.

In many cases, more than one destination for the same result isspecified. Again, by way of example, LDF₋₋ LDA₋₋ ASUBC(RA) which loadsthe result of A minus a constant into both the A register and theregister file.

Other mnemonics exist for specific actions. For example, "CLRA" is usedfor clearing the A register, "RMBC" to reset the macroblock counter.These are fairly obvious and are described in comments in instr.u.

One anomaly is the use of a suffix "₋₋ O" to indicate that the result ofthe operation is output to the Token formatter in addition to the normalaction. Thus LDFI₋₋ O(RA) stores the input data and also passes it tothe token formatter. Alternatively, this could have been LDF₋₋ LDO₋₋I(RA) if desired.

B.2.5.1.3 Token Formatter Instructions

This is the T₋₋ NOP "No-operation" instruction. This is really amisnomer as it is impossible to construct a no-operation instruction.However, this is used whenever the instruction is of no consequencebecause the ALU does not output to the Token Formatter.

T--TOK output a Token word.

T₋₋ DAT output a DATA Token word (used only with the Huffman StateMachine instructions).

T--GENT8 generates a token word based on the 8 bits of constant field.

T₋₋ GENT8E like T₋₋ GENT8, but the extension bit is one.

T₋₋ OPD(NB) NB bits of data from the bottom NB bits of the output withthe remainder of the bits coming from the constant field.

T₋₋ OPDE(NB) like T₋₋ OPD, but the extension bit is high.

T₋₋ OPD8 short-hand for T₋₋ OPD(8)

T₋₋ OPD8E short-hand for T₋₋ OPDE(8)

B.2.5.1.4 Parser State Machine Instructions

This instruction, D₋₋ NOP No-operation, i.e., the address increments asnormal and the Parser State Machine does nothing special. The Remainderof the instruction s passed to the data pipeline. No waiting occurs.

D₋₋ WAIT is like D₋₋ NOP, but waits for feedback to occur. The simplejump group. Mnemonics like D₋₋ JMP(ADDR) and D₋₋ JNX (ADDR) jump if thecondition is met. The instruction is not output to the Huffman Decoder.

The external jump group. Mnemonics like D₋₋ XJMP(ADDR) and D₋₋XJNX(ADDR). These are like their simple counterparts above, but theinstruction is output to the Huffman Decoder.

The jump and wait group. Mnemonics like D₋₋ WJNZ(ADDR). Theseinstructions are output to the Huffman Decoder and the Parser waits forfeedback from the ALU before evaluating the condition.

The following Mnemonics are used for the conditions themselves.

                  TABLE B.2.11                                                    ______________________________________                                        Mnemonics used for the conditions                                             Mnemonic    Meaning                                                           ______________________________________                                        JMP    --       Unconditional jump                                            JXT    JNX      Jump if extn=1(extn=0)                                        JHE0   JNHE0    Jump if Huffman error bit 0 set (clear)                       JHE1   JNHE1    Jump if Huffman error bit 1 set (clear)                       JHE2   JNHE2    Jump if Huffman error bit 2 set (clear)                       JPTN   --       Jump if pattern shifter LSB is set                            JPCST  JNPICST  Jump is at picture start (not at picture start)               JRSTST JNRSTST  Jump if at start of restart interval (not at start)           --     JNCPBS   Jump if not special CPB coding                                --     JNCPB8   Jump if not 8 block (i.e. 4 block) macroblock                 JMI    JPL      Jump if negative (jump if plus)                               JZE    JNZ      Jump if zero (jump if non-zero)                               JCHNG  JNCHNG   Jump if change detect bit set (clear)                         JMBST  JNMBST   Jump if at start of macroblock (not at start)                 ______________________________________                                    

D₋₋ EVENT causes generation of an event.

D₋₋ DFLT for construction of a default instruction. This causes an eventand then jumps to a location with the label "dflt". This instructionshould never be executed since they are used to fill a ROM so that ajump to an unused location is trapped.

D₋₋ ERROR causes an event and then jumps to a label "srch₋₋ dispatch"which is assumed to attempt recovery from the error.

SECTION B.3 HUFFMAN DECODER ALU

B.3.1 Introduction

The Huffman Decoder ALU sub-block, in accordance with the presentinvention, provides general arithmetic and logical functionality for theHuffman Decoder block. It has the ability to do add and subtractoperations, various types of sign-extend operations, and formatting ofthe input data into run-sign-level triples. It also has a flexiblestructure whose precise operation and configuration are specified by amicroinstruction word which arrives at the ALU synchronously with theinput data, i.e., under the control of the two-wire interface.

In addition to the 36-bit instruction and 12-bit data input ports, theALU has a 6-bit run port, and an 8-bit constant port (which actuallyresides on the token bus). All of these, with the exception of themicroinstruction word, drive buses of their respective widths throughthe ALU datapath. There is a single bit within the microinstruction wordwhich represents an extension bit and is output together with the17-bit-run-sign-level (out₋₋ data). There is a two-wire interface ateach end of the ALU datapath, and a set of condition codes which areoutput together with their own valid signal, cc₋₋ valid. There is aregister file which is accessible to other Huffman Decoder sub-blocksvia the ALU, and also to the microprocessor interface.

B.3.2.2 Basic Structure

The basic structure of the Huffman ALU is as shown in FIG. 126. Itcomprises the following components:

Input block 400

Output block 401

Condition Codes block 402

"A" register 403 with source multiplexing

Run register (6 bits) 404 with source multiplexing

Adder/Subtractor 405 with source multiplexing

Sign Extend logic 406 with source multiplexing

Register file 407.

Each of these blocks (except the output block) drives its output onto abus running through the datapath, and these buses are, in turn, used asinputs to the multiplexing for block sources. For example, the adderoutput has it own datapath bus which is one of the possible inputs tothe A register. Likewise, the A register has its own bus which forms oneof the possible inputs to the adder. Only a sub-set of all possibilitiesexist in this respect, as specified in Section 7 on the microinstructionword.

In a single cycle, it is possible to execute either an add-basedinstruction or a sign-extend-based instruction. Furthermore, it isallowable to execute both of these in a single cycle provided that theiroperation is strictly parallel. In other words, add then sign extend orsign extend then add sequences are not allowed. The register file may beeither read from or written to in a single cycle, but not both.

The output data has three fields:

run--6 bits

sign--1 bit

level--10 bits

If data is to be passed straight through the ALU, the least significant11 bits of the input data register are latched into the sign and levelfields.

It is possible to program limited multi-cycle operations of the ALU. Inthis regard, the number of cycles required is given by the contents ofthe register file location whose address is specified in themicroinstruction, and the same operation is performed repeatedly whilean iteration counter decrements to one. This facility is typically usedto effect left shifts, using the adder to add the A register to itselfand to store the result back in the A register.

B.3.3 The Adder/Subtractor Sub-Block

This is a 12-bit wide adder, with optional invert on its input2 andoptional setting of the carry-in bit. Output is a 0.12 bit sum, andcarry-out is not used. There are 7 modes of operation:

ADD: add with carry in set to zero: input1+input2

ADC: add with carry in set to one: input1+input2+1

SBC: invert input2, carry in set to zero: input1-input2-1

SUB: invert input2, carry in set to one: input1-input2

TCI: if input2<0, use SUB, else use ADD. This is used with input1 set tozero for obtaining a magnitude value from a two's compliment value.

DCD (DC difference): if input2<0 do ADC, otherwise do ADD.

VRA (vector residual add): if input1<0 do ADC, otherwise do SBC.

B.3.4 The Sign Extend Sub-Block

This is a 12-bit unit which sign extends, in various modes, the inputdata from the size input. Size is a 4 bit value ranging from 0 to 11 (0relates to the least significant bit, 11 to the most significant).Output is a 12 bit modified data value, and the "sign" bit.

In SGXMODE=NORMAL, all bits above (and including) the size-th bit, takethe value of the size-th bit. All those below remain unchanged. Signtakes the value of the size-th bit. For example:

data=1010 1010 1010

size=2

output=0000 0000 0010, sign=0

In SGXMOD=INVERSE, all bits above (and including) the size-th bit, takethe inverse of the size-th bit, while all those below remain unchanged.Sign takes the inverse of the size-th bit. For example:

data=1010 1010 1010

size=0

output=1111 1111 1111, sign=1

In SGXMODE=DIFMAG, if the size-th bit is zero, all the bits below (andincluding) the size-th bit are inverted, while all those above remainunchanged. If the size-th bit is one, all bits remain unchanged. In bothcases, sign takes the inverse of the size-th bit. This is used forobtaining the magnitude of AC difference values. For example:

data=0000 1010 1010

size=2

output=0000 1010 1101, sign=1

data=0000 1010 1010

size=1

output=0000 1010 1010, sign=0

In SGXMODE=DIFCOMP, all bits above (but not including) the size-th bit,take the inverse of the size-th bit, while all those below (andincluding) remain unchanged. Sign takes the inverse of the size-th bit.This is used for obtaining two's compliment values for DC differencevalues. For example:

data=1010 1010 1010

size=0

output=1111 1111 1110, sign=1

B.3.5 Condition Codes

There are two bytes (16 bits) of condition codes used by the Huffmanblock, certain bits of which are generated by the ALU/register file.These are the Sign condition code, the Zero condition code, theExtension condition code and a Change Detect bit. The last two of thesecodes are not really condition codes since they are not used by theParser in the same way as the others.

The Sign, Zero and Extension condition codes are updated when the Parserissues an instruction to do so, and for each of these instructions thecondition code valid signal is pulsed high once.

The Sign condition code is simply the sign extend sign output latched,while the Zero condition code is set to 1 if the input to the A registeris zero. The Extension condition code is the input extension bit latchedregardless of OUTSRC.

Condition codes may be used to evaluate certain condition types:

result equals constant--use subtract and Zero condition

result equals register value--use subtract and Zero condition

register equals constant--use subtract and Zero condition

register bit set--use sign extend and Sign condition result bit set--usesign extend and Sign condition

Note that when using the sign extend and Sign condition codecombination, it is possible only to evaluate a single specified bit,rather than multiple bits as would be the case with a conventionallogical AND.

The Change Detect bit, in the present invention, is generated using thesame logic as for the Zero condition code, but it does not have anassociated valid signal. A bit in the microinstruction indicates thatthe Change Detect bit should be updated if the value currently beingwritten to the register file is different from that already present(meaning that two clock cycles are necessary, first with REG-MODE set toREAD and second with REGMODE set to WRITE). A microprocessor interruptcan then be initiated if a changed value is detected. The Change Detectbit is reset by activating Change Detect in the normal way, but withREGMODE set to READ.

The hardwired macroblock counter structure (which forms part of theregister file--see below) also generates condition codes as follows:Mb₋₋ Start, Pattern₋₋ Code, Restart and Pic₋₋ Start.

B.3.6 The Register File

The address map for the register file is shown below. It uses a 7-bitaddress space, which is common to both the ALU datapath and the UPI. Anumber of locations are not accessed by the ALU, these typically beingcounters in the hardwired macroblock structure, and registers within theALU itself. The latter have dedicated access, but form part of theaddress map for the UPI. Some multi-byte locations (denoted in the tableby "O" for oversize) have a single ALU address, but multiple UPIaddresses. Similarly, groups of registers which are indexed by thecomponent count, CC (Indicated by I" in the table) are treated as asingle location by the ALU. This eases microprogramming forinitialization and resetting, and also for block-level operations.

All of the locations, except the dedicated ALU registers (UPI readonly), are read/write, and all of the counters are reset to zero by abit in the instruction word. The pattern code register has a right shiftcapability, its least significant bit forming the Pattern₋₋ Codecondition bit. All registers in the hardwired macroblock structure aredenoted in the table by "M", and those which are also counters (n-bit)are annotated with Cn.

In the present invention, certain locations have their contentshardwired to other parts of the Huffman sub-system-coding standard, twor-size locations, and a single location (2-bit word) for each of ac hufftable and dc huff table to the Huffman Decoder.

Addresses in bold indicate that locations are accessible by both the ALUand the UPI, otherwise they have UPI access only. Groups of registersthat are undirected through CC by the ALU can have a single ALU addressspecified in the instruction word and CC will select which physicallocation in the group to access. The ALU address may be that of any ofthe registers in the group, though conventionally, the address of thefirst should be used. This is also the case for multi-byte locationswhich should be accessed using the lowest address of the pair, althoughin practice, either address will suffice. Note that locations 2E and 2Fare accessible in the top-level address map (denoted "T"), i.e., notonly through the keyhole registers. These two locations are also resetto zero.

The register file is physically partitioned into four "banks" to improveaccess speed, but this does not affect the addressing in any way. Themain table shows allocations for MPEG, and the two repeated sectionsgive the variations for JPEG and H.261 respectively.

                  TABLE B.3.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        Table 1: Huffman Register File Address Map                                    Addr.   Location       Addr.  Location                                        ______________________________________                                             00     A register 1                                                                              I    3E   c2                                               01     A register 0                                                                              I    3F   c3                                               02     run         I,O  40   dc pred.sub.-- 01                                10     horiz pels 1                                                                              I,O  41   dc pred.sub.-- 00                                11     horiz pels 0                                                                              I,O  42   dc pred.sub.-- 11                                12     vert pels 1 I,O  43   dc pred.sub.-- 10                                13     vert pels 0 I,O  44   dc pred.sub.-- 21                                14     buff size 1 I,O  45   dc pred.sub.-- 20                                15     buff size 0 I,O  46   dc pred.sub.-- 31                                16     pel asp. ratio                                                                            I,O  47   dc pred.sub.-- 30                                17     bit rate 2  O    50   prev mhf 1                                       18     bit rate 1  O    51   prev mnf 0                                       19     bit rate 0  O    52   prev mvf 1                                       1A     pic rate    O    53   prev mvf 0                                       1B     constrained O    54   prev mhb 1                                       1C     picture type                                                                              O    55   prev mhb 0                                       1D     H261 picture type                                                                         O    56   prev mvb 1                                       1E     broken closed                                                                             O    57   prev mvb 0                                       1F     pred mode   M    60   mb horiz cnt1                                                                           C13                                    20     vbv delay 1 M    61   mb horiz cnt0                                    21     vbv delay 0 M    62   mb vert cnt1                                                                            C13                                    22     full pel fwd                                                                              M    63   mb vert cnt0                                     23     full pel bwd                                                                              M    64   horiz mb 1                                       24     horiz mb copy                                                                             M    65   horiz mb 0                                       25     pic number  M    66   vert mb 1                                        26     max h       M    67   vert mb 0                                        27     max v       M    68   restart count1                                                                          C16                                    28     --          M    69   restart count0                                   29     --          M    6A   restart gap1                                     2A     --          M    6B   restart gap0                                     2B     --          M    6C   horiz blk count                                                                         C2                                     2C     first group M    6D   vert blk count                                                                          C2                                     2D     in picture  H,M  6E   comp id   C2                                T,R  2E     rom control M    6F   max comp id                                 T,R  2F     rom revision                                                                              H,R  70   coding std                                  I,H  30     dc huff 0   M,H  71   pattern code                                                                            SR8                               I    31     dc huff 1   H    72   fwd r size                                  I    32     dc huff 2   H    73   bwd r size                                  I    33     dc huff 3                                                         I,H  34     ac huff 0                                                         I    35     ac huff 1                                                         I    36     ac huff 2   M,I  78   h0                                          I    37     ac huff 3   M,I  79   h1                                          I    38     tq0         M,I  7A   h2                                          I    39     tq1         M,I  7B   h3                                          I    3A     tq2         M,I  7C   v0                                          I    3B     tq3         M,I  7D   v1                                          I    3C     c0          M,I  7E   v2                                          I    3D     c1          M,I  7F   v3                                          ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE B.3.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        JPEG Variations:                                                              ______________________________________                                               10         horiz pels 1                                                       11         horiz pels 0                                                       12         vert pels 1                                                        13         vert pels 0                                                        14         buff size 1                                                        15         buff size 0                                                        16         pel asp. ratio                                                     17         bit rate 2                                                         18         bit rate 1                                                         19         bit rate 0                                                         1A         pic rate                                                           1B         constrained                                                        1C         picture type                                                       ID         H261 picture type                                                  IE         broken closed                                                      IF         pred mode                                                          20         vbv delay 1                                                        21         vbv delay 0                                                        22         pending frame ch                                                   23         restart index                                                      24         horiz mb copy                                                      25         pic number                                                         26         max h                                                              27         max v                                                              28         --                                                                 29         --                                                                 2A         --                                                                 2B         --                                                                 2C         first scan                                                         2D         in picture                                                         2E         rom control                                                        2F         rom revision                                                ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE B.3.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        H.261 Variations:                                                             ______________________________________                                               10         horiz pels 1                                                       11         horiz pels 0                                                       12         vert pels 1                                                        13         vert pels 0                                                        14         buff size 1                                                        15         buff size 0                                                        16         pel asp. ratio                                                     17         bit rate 2                                                         18         bit rate 1                                                         19         bit rate 0                                                         1A         pic rate                                                           1B         constrained                                                        1C         picture type                                                       ID         H261 picture type                                                  IE         broken closed                                                      IF         pred mode                                                          20         vbv delay 1                                                        21         vbv delay 0                                                        22         full pel fwd                                                       23         full pel bwd                                                       24         horiz mb copy                                                      25         pic number                                                         26         max h                                                              27         max v                                                              28         --                                                                 29         --                                                                 2A         --                                                                 2B         in gob                                                             2C         first group                                                        2D         in picture                                                         2E         rom control                                                        2F         rom revision                                                ______________________________________                                    

B.3.7 The Microinstruction Word

The ALU microinstruction word, in accordance with the present invention,is split into a number of fields, each controlling a different aspect ofthe structure described above. The total number of bits used in theinstruction word is 36, (plus 1 for the extension bit input) and aminimum of encoding across fields has been adopted so that maximumflexibility of hardware configuration is maintained. The instructionword is partitioned as detailed below. The default field values, thatis, those which do not alter the state of the ALU or register file, arethose given in the italics.

                                      TABLE B.3.4                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Table 2: Huffman ALU microinstruction fields                                  Field Value Description         Bits                                          __________________________________________________________________________    OUTSRC                                                                              RSA6  run, sign, A register as 6 bits                                                                   0000                                          (specifies                                                                          ZZA   zero, zero, A register                                                                            0001                                          sources for                                                                         ZZA8  zero, zero, A register ls 8 bits                                                                  0010                                          run. sign and                                                                       ZZADDU4                                                                             zero, zero, adder o/p ms 4 bits                                                                   0011                                          level output)                                                                       ZINPUT                                                                              zero, input data    0100                                                RSSGX run, sign, sign extend o/p                                                                        0111                                                RSADD run, sign, adder o/p                                                                              1000                                                RZADD run, zero, adder o/p                                                                              1001                                                RIZADD                                                                              input run, zero, adder output                                           ZSADD zero, sign, adder o/p                                                                             1010                                                ZZADD zero, zero, adder o/p                                                                             1011                                                NONE  no valid output - out.sub.-- valid set to zero                                                    11XX                                          REGADDR                                                                             00 - 7F                                                                             register file address for ALU access                                                              7 bits                                        REGSRC                                                                              ADD   drive adder o/p onto register file i/p                                                            0                                                   SGX   drive sign extend o/p onto register file i/p                                                      1                                             REGMODE                                                                             READ  read from register file                                                                           0                                                   WRITE write to register file                                                                            1                                             CNGDET                                                                              TEST  update change detect if REGMODE is                                                                0                                                         WRITE                                                             (change                                                                             HOLD  do not update change detect bit                                                                   1                                             detect)                                                                             CLEAR reset change detect if REGMODE is READ                                                            0                                             RUNSRC                                                                              RUNIN drive run i/p onto run.register i/p                                                               0                                             (run source)                                                                        ADD   drive adder o/p onto run register i/p                                                             1                                             RUNMODE                                                                             LOAD  update run register 0                                                   HOLD  do not update run register                                                                        1                                             ASRC  ADD   drive adder o/p onto A register i/p                                                               00                                            (A register                                                                         INPUT drive input data onto A register i/p                                                              01                                            source)                                                                             SGX   drive sign extend o/p onto A register i/p                                                         10                                                  REG   drive register file o/p onto A register i/p                                                       11                                            AMODE LOAD  update A register   0                                                   HOLD  do not update A register                                                                          1                                             SGXMODE                                                                             NORMAL                                                                              sign extend with sign                                                                             00                                            (sign extend                                                                        INVERSE                                                                             sign extend with ˜sign                                                                      01                                            mode - see                                                                          DIFMAG                                                                              invert lower bits if sign bit is 0                                                                10                                            section 4)                                                                          DIFCOMP                                                                             sign extend with ˜sign from next bit up                                                     11                                            SIZESRC                                                                             CONST drive const. i/p onto sign extend size i/p                                                        00                                            (source for                                                                         A     drive A register onto sign extend size i/p                                                        01                                            sign extend                                                                         REG   drive reg.file o/p onto sign extend size i/p                                                      10                                            size input)                                                                         RUN   drive run reg. onto sign extend size i/p                                                          11                                            SGXSRC                                                                              INPUT drive input data onto sign extend data i/p                                                        0                                             (sgx input)                                                                         A     drive A register onto sign extend data i/p                                                        1                                             ADDMODE                                                                             ADD   input1 + input2     000                                           (adder mode                                                                         ADC   input1 + input2 + 1 001                                           see sect. 3)                                                                        SBC   input1 - input2 - 1 010                                                 SUB   input1 - input2     011                                                 TCI   SUB if input2<0, else ADD - 2's comp.                                                             100                                                 DCD   ADC if input2<0, else ADD - DC diff                                                               101                                                 VRA   ADC if input1<0, else SBC-vec resid add                                                           110                                           ADDSRC1                                                                             A     drive A register onto adder input1                                                                00                                            (source for                                                                         REG   drive register file o/p onto adder i/p1                                                           01                                            adder i/p 1 -                                                                       INPUT drive input data onto adder input1                                                                10                                            non-invert)                                                                         ZERO  drive zero onto adder input1                                                                      11                                            ADDSRC2                                                                             CONST drive constant i/p onto adder input2                                                              00                                            (source for                                                                         A     drive A register onto adder input2                                                                01                                            inverting                                                                           INPUT drive input data onto adder input2                                                                10                                            input)                                                                              REG   drive register file o/p onto adder i/p2                                                           11                                            CNDC- TEST  update condition codes                                                                            0                                             MODE                                                                          (cond.                                                                              HOLD  do not update condition codes                                                                     1                                             codes)                                                                        CNTMODE                                                                             NOCOUNT                                                                             do not increment counters                                                                         X00                                           (mbstructure                                                                        BCINCR                                                                              increment block counter and ripple                                                                00                                            count mode)                                                                         CCINCR                                                                              force the component count to incr                                                                 010                                                 RESET reset all counters in mb structure                                                                011                                                 DISABLE                                                                             disable all counters                                                                              1XX                                           INSTMODE                                                                            MULTI iterate current instr multi times                                                                 0                                                   SINGLE                                                                              single cycle instruction only                                                                     1                                             __________________________________________________________________________

SECTION B.4 Buffer Manager

B.4.1 Introduction

This document describes the purpose, actions and implementation of theBuffer Manager, in accordance with the present invention (bman).

B.4.2 Overview

The buffer manager provides four addresses for the DRAM interface. Theseaddresses are page addresses in the DRAM. The DRAM interface maintainstwo FIFOs in the DRAM, the Coded Data Buffer and the Token Data Buffer.Hence, for the four addresses, there is a read and a write address foreach buffer.

B.4.3 Interfaces

The Buffer Manager is connected only to the DRAM interface and to themicroprocessor. The microprocessor need only be used for setting up the"Initialization registers" shown in Table B.4.4. The interface with theDRAM interface is the four eighteen bit addresses controlled by aREQuest/ACKnowledge protocol for each address. (Since the Buffer Manageris not in the datapath, the Buffer Manager lacks a two-wire interface.)

Furthermore, the Buffer Manager operates off the DRAM interface clockgenerator and on the DRAM interface scan chain.

B.4.4 Address Calculation

The read and write addresses for each buffer are generated from 9eighteen bit registers:

Initialization registers (RW from microprocessor)

BASECB--base address of coded data buffer

LENGTHCB--maximum size (in pages of coded data buffer

BASETB--base address of token data buffer

LENGTHTB--maximum size (in pages) of token data buffer

LIMIT--size (in pages) of the DRAM.

Dynamic registers (RO from microprocessor)

READCB--coded data buffer read pointer relative to BASECB

NUMBERCB--coded data buffer write pointer relative to READCB

READTB--token data buffer read pointer relative to BASETB

NUMBERTB--token data buffer write pointer relative to READTB

To calculate addresses:

    readaddr=(BASE+READ) mod LIMIT

    writeaddr=(((READ+NUMBER) mod LENGTH)+BASE) mod

LIMIT

The "mod LIMIT" term is used because a buffer may wrap around DRAM.

B.4.5 Block Description

In the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 127, the Buffer Manageris composed of three top level modules connected in a ring which snoopermonitors the DRAM interface connection. The modules are bmprtize(prioritize), bminstr (instruction), and bmrecalc (recalculate) arearranged in a ring of that order and omsnoop (snoopers) is arranged onthe address outputs. The module, Bmprtize, deals with the REQ/ACKprotocol, the FULL/EMPTY flags for the buffers and it maintains thestate of each address, i.e., "is it a valid address?". From thisinformation, it dictates to bminstr which (if any) address should berecalculated. It also operates the BUF₋₋ CSR (status) microprocessorregister, showing FULL/EMPTY flags, and the buf₋₋ access microprocessorregister, controlling microprocessor write access to the buffer managerregisters.

The module, Bminstr, on being told by bmprtize to calculate an address,issues six instructions (one every two cycles) to control bmrecalc tocalculating an address.

The module, Bmrecalc, recalculates the addresses under the instructionof bminstr. Running an instruction every two cycles, it contains all ofthe initialization and dynamic registers, and a simple ALU capable ofaddition, subtraction and modulus. It informs Sbmprtize of FULL/EMPTYstates it detects and when it has finished calculating an address.

B.4.6 Block Implementation

B.4.6.1 Bmprtize

At reset, the buf₋₋ access microprocessor register is set to one toallow the setting up of the initialization registers. While buf₋₋ accessreads back one, no address calculations are initiated because they aremeaningless without valid initialization registers.

Once buf₋₋ access is de-asserted (write zero to it) bmprtize goes aboutmaking all the addresses valid (by recalculating them) since its purposeis to keep all four addresses valid. At this stage, the Buffer Manageris "starting up" (i.e., all addresses have not yet been calculated),thus, no requests are asserted. Once all addresses have become validstart-up ends and all requests are asserted. From this point forward,when an address becomes invalid (because it has been used andacknowledged) it will be recalculated.

No prioritizing between addresses will ever need to be performed,because the DRAM interface can, at its fastest, use an address everyseventeen cycles, while the Buffer Manager can recalculate an addressevery twelve cycles. Therefore, only one address will ever be invalid atone time after start-up. Accordingly, bmprtize will recalculate anyinvalid address that is not currently being calculated.

In the invention, start-up will be re-entered whenever buf₋₋ access isasserted and, therefore, no addresses will be supplied to the DRAMinterface during microprocessor accesses.

B.4.6.2 Bminstr

The module, Bminstr, contains a MOD 12 cycle counter (the number ofcycle it takes to generate an address). Note that even cycles start aninstruction, whereas odd cycles end an instruction. The top 3 bits alongwith whether it is a read or a write calculation are decoded intoinstructions for bmrecalc as follows:

For read addresses:

                  TABLE B.4.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        Read address calculation                                                            Oper-                          Meaning of                               Cycle ation   BusA     BusB   Result results sign                             ______________________________________                                        0-1   ADD     READ     BASE                                                   2-3   MOD     Accum    LIMIT  Address                                         4-5   ADD     READ     "1"                                                    6-7   MOD     Accum    LENGTH READ                                            8-9   SUB     NUMBER   "1"    NUMBER                                          10-11 MOD     "0"      Accum         SET.sub.-- EMPTY                                                              (NUMBER>=0)                              ______________________________________                                    

For write addresses:

                  TABLE B.4.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        For write address calculations                                                                                       Meaning of                             Cycle  Operation                                                                              BusA     BusB   Result results sign                           ______________________________________                                        0-1    ADD      NUMBER   READ                                                 2-3    MOD      Accum    LIMIT                                                4-5    ADD      Accum    BASE                                                 6-7    MOD      Accum    LIMIT  Address                                       8-9    ADD      NUMBER   "1"    NUMBER                                        10-11  MOD      Accum    LENGTH        SET.sub.-- FULL                                                               (NUMBER                                                                       >=                                                                            LENGTH)                                ______________________________________                                    

Note

The result of the last operation is always held in the accumulator.

When there is no addresses to be recalculated, the cycle counter idlesat zero, thus causing an instruction that writes to none of theregisters. This has no affect.

B.4.6.3 Bmrecalc

The module, Bmrecalc, performs one operation every two clock cycles. Itlatches in the instruction from bminstr (and which buffer and io type)on an even counter cycle (start₋₋ alu₋₋ cyc), and latches the result ofthe operation on an odd counter cycle (end₋₋ alu₋₋ cyc). The result ofthe operation is always stored in the "Accum" register in addition toany registers specified by the instruction. Also, on end₋₋ alu₋₋ cyc,bmrecalc informs bmprtize as to whether the use of the address justcalculated will make the buffer full or empty, and when the address andfull/empty has been successfully calculated (load₋₋ addr).

Full/empty are calculated using the sign bit of the operation's result.

The modulus operation is not a true modulus, but A nod B is implementedas:

    (A>B?(A-B):A)

however this is only wrong when

    A>(2B-1)

which will never occur.

B.4.6.4 Bmsnoop

The module, Bmsnoop, is composed of four eighteen bit super snoopersthat monitor the addresses supplied to the DRAM interface. The snoopermust be "super" (i.e., can be accessed with the clocks running) to allowon chip testing of the external DRAM. These snoopers must work on aREQ/ACK system and are, therefore, different to any other on the device.

REQ/ACK is used on this interface, as opposed to a two-wire protocolbecause it is essential to transmit information (i.e., acknowledges)back to the sender which an accept will not do). Hence, this rigorouslymonitors the FIFO pointers.

B.4.7 Registers

To gain microprocessor write access to the initialization registers, aone should be written to buf₋₋ access, and access will be given whenbuf₋₋ access reads back one. Conversely, to give up microprocessor writeaccess, zero should be written to buf₋₋ access. Access will be givenwhen buf₋₋ access reads back zero. Note that buf₋₋ access is reset toone.

The dynamic and initialization registers of the present invention may beread at any time, however, to ensure that the dynamic registers are notchanging the microprocessor, write access must be gained.

It is intended that the initialization registers be written to onlyonce. Re-writing them may cause the buffers to operate incorrectly.However, it is envisioned to increase the buffer length on-the-fly andto have the buffer manager use the new length when appropriate.

No check is ever made to see that the values in the initializationregisters are sensible, e.g., that the buffers do not overlap. This isthe user's responsibility.

                  TABLE B.4.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        Buffer manager non-keyhole registers                                          Register Name     Usage        Address                                        ______________________________________                                        CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- ACCESS                                                                    xxxxxxxD     0x24                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- KEYHOLE.sub.-- ADDR                                                       xxDDDDDD     0x25                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- KEYHOLE                                                                   DDDDDDDD     0x26                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- WR.sub.-- SNP.sub.2                                             xxxxxxDD     0x54                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- WR.sub.-- SNP.sub.1                                             DDDDDDDD     0x55                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- WR.sub.-- SNP.sub.0                                             DDDDDDDD     0x56                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- RD.sub.-- SNP.sub.2                                             xxxxxxDD     0x57                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- RD.sub.-- SNP.sub.1                                             DDDDDDDD     0x58                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- RD.sub.-- SNP.sub.0                                             DDDDDDDD     0x59                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- WR.sub.-- SNP.sub.2                                             xxxxxxDD     0x5a                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- WR.sub.-- SNP.sub.1                                             DDDDDDDD     0x5b                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- WR.sub.-- SNP.sub.0                                             DDDDDDDD     0x5c                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- RD.sub.-- SNP.sub.2                                             xxxxxxDD     0x5d                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- RD.sub.-- SNP.sub.1                                             DDDDDDDD     0x5e                                           CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- RD.sub.-- SNP.sub.0                                             DDDDDDDD     0x5f                                           ______________________________________                                    

Where D indicates a registers bit and x shows no register bit.

                  TABLE B.4.4.                                                    ______________________________________                                        Registers in buffer manager keyhole                                           Keyhole Register Name                                                                         Usage       Key hole Address                                  ______________________________________                                        CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- 3                                                 xxxxxxxx    0x00                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- 2                                                 xxxxxxDD    0x01                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- 1                                                 DDDDDDDD    0x02                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- 0                                                 DDDDDDDD    0x03                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- LENGTH.sub.-- 3                                               xxxxxxxx    0x04                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- LENGTH.sub.-- 2                                               xxxxxxDD    0x05                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- LENGTH.sub.-- 1                                               DDDDDDDD    0x06                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- LENGTH.sub.-- 0                                               DDDDDDDD    0x07                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- READ.sub.-- 3                                                 xxxxxxxx    0x08                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- READ.sub.-- 2                                                 xxxxxxDD    0x09                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- READ.sub.-- 1                                                 DDDDDDDD    0x0a                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- READ.sub.-- 0                                                 DDDDDDDD    0x0b                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- NUMBER.sub.-- 3                                               xxxxxxxxx   0x0c                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- NUMBER.sub.-- 2                                               xxxxxxDD    0x0d                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- NUMBER.sub.-- 1                                               DDDDDDDD    0x0e                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CB.sub.-- NUMBER.sub.-- 0                                               DDDDDDDD    0x0f                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- 3                                                 xxxxxxxx    0x10                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- 2                                                 xxxxxxxD    0x11                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- 1                                                 DDDDDDDD    0x12                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- 0                                                 DDDDDDDD    0x13                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- LENGTH.sub.-- 3                                               xxxxxxxx    0x14                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- LENGTH.sub.-- 2                                               xxxxxxDD    0x15                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- LENGTH.sub.-- 1                                               DDDDDDDD    0x16                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- LENGTH.sub.-- 0                                               DDDDDDDD    0x17                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- READ.sub.-- 3                                                 xxxxxxxx    0x18                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- READ.sub.-- 2                                                 xxxxxxDD    0x19                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- READ.sub.-- 1                                                 DDDDDDDD    0x1a                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- READ.sub.-- 0                                                 DDDDDDDD    0x1b                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- NUMBER.sub.-- 3                                               xxxxxxxx    0x1c                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- NUMBER.sub.-- 2                                               xxxxxxDD    0x1d                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- NUMBER.sub.-- 1                                               DDDDDDDD    0x1e                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- TB.sub.-- NUMBER.sub.-- 0                                               DDDDDDDD    0x1f                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- LIMIT.sub.-- 3                                                          xxxxxxxx    0x20                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- LIMIT.sub.-- 2                                                          xxxxxxDD    0x21                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- LIMIT.sub.-- 1                                                          DDDDDDDD    0x22                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- LIMIT.sub.-- 0                                                          DDDDDDDD    0x23                                              CED.sub.-- BUF.sub.-- CSR                                                                     xxxxDDDD    0x24                                              ______________________________________                                    

B.4.8 Verification

Verification was conducted in Lsim with small FIFO's onto a dummy DRAMinterface, and in C-code as part of the top level chip simulation.

B.4.9 Testing

Test coverage to the bman is through the snoopers in bmsnoop, thedynamic registers (shown in B.4.4) and using the scan chain which ispart of the DRAM interface scan chain.

SECTION B.5 Inverse Modeler

B.5.1 Introduction

This document describes the purpose, actions and implementation of theInverse Modeller (imodel) and the Token Formatter (hsppk), in accordancewith the present invention.

Note: hsppk is a hierarchically part of the Huffman Decoder, butfunctionally part of the Inverse Modeller. It is, therefore, betterdiscussed in this section.

B.5.2 Overview

The Token buffer, which is between the imodel and hsppk, can contain agreat deal of data, all in off-chip DRAM. To ensure that efficient useis made of this memory, the data must be in a 16 bit format. TheFormatter "packs" the data from the Huffman Decoder into this format forthe Token buffer. Subsequently, the Inverse Modeler "unpacks" data fromthe Token buffer format.

However, the Inverse Modeller's main function is the expanding out of"run/level" codes into a run of zero data followed by a level.Additionally, the Inverse Modeller ensures that DATA tokens have atleast 64 coefficients and it provides a "gate" for stopping streamswhich have not met their start-up criteria.

B.5.3 Interfaces

B.5.3.1 Hsppk

In the present invention, Hsppk has the Huffman Decoder as input and theToken buffer as output. Both interfaces are of the two-wire type, theinput being a 17 bit token port, the output being 16 bit "packed data",plus a FLUSH signal. In addition, Hsppk is clocked from the Huffmanclock generator and, thus, connected to the Huffman scan chain.

B.5.3.2 Imodel

Imodel has the Token buffer start-up output gate logic (bsogl) as inputsand the Inverse Quantizer as output. Input from the Token buffer is 16bit "packed data", plus block₋₋ end signal, from the bsogl is onewirestream₋₋ enable. Output is an 11 bit token port. All interfaces arecontrolled by the two-wire interface protocol. Imodel has its own clockgenerator and scan chain.

Both blocks have microprocessor access only to the snoopers at theiroutputs.

B.5.4 Block description

B.5.4.1 Hsppk

Hsppk takes in the 17 bit data from the Huffman and outputs 16 bit datato the Token buffer. This is achieved by first, either truncating orsplitting the input data into 12 bit words, and second by packing thesewords into a 16 bit format.

B.5.4.1.1 Splitting

Hsppk receives 17 bit data from the Inverse Huffman. This data isformatted into 12 bits using the following formats.

Where F=specifies format; E=extension bit; R=Run bit; L=length bit (insign mag.) or non-DATA token bit; x=don't care.

FLLLLLLLLLLLFormat 0

ELLLLLLLLLLLFormat 0a FRRRRRRR00000Format 1

Normal tokens only occupy the bottom 12 bits, having the form:

ExxxxxxLLLLLLLLLLL

This is truncated to format 0a

However, DATA tokens have a run and a level in each word in the form:

ERRRRRRLLLLLLLLLLL.

This is broken in to the formats:

ERRRRRRLLLLLLLLLLL→FRRRRRR00000Format 1

ELLLLLLLLLLLFormat 0a

Or if the run is zero format 0 is used:

E000000LLLLLLLLLLL→FLLLLLLLLLLLFormat 0

It can be seen that in the format 0, the extension bit is lost andassumed to be one. Therefore, it cannot be used where the extension iszero. In this case, format 1 is unconditionally used.

B.5.4.1.2 Packing

After splitting, all data words are 12 bits wide. Every four 12 bitwords are "packed" into three 16 bit words:

                  TABLE B.5.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        Packing method                                                                Input words     Output words                                                  ______________________________________                                        000000000000    0000000000001111                                              111111111111    11111111222222222                                             222222222222    22223333333333333                                             333333333333                                                                  ______________________________________                                    

B.5.4.1.3 Flushing of the buffer

The DRAM interface of the present invention collects a block, 32 sixteenbit "packed" words, before writing them to the buffer. This implies thatdata can get stuck in the DRAM interface at the end of a stream, if theblock is only partially complete. Therefore a flushing mechanism isrequired. Accordingly, .Hsppk signals the DRAM interface to write itcurrent partially complete block unconditionally.

B.5.4.2.1 Imup (UnPacker)

Imup performs three functions:

4) Unpacking data from its sixteen bit format into 12 bit words.

                  TABLE B.5.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        Unpacking method                                                              Input words     Output words                                                  ______________________________________                                        0000000000001111                                                                              000000000000                                                  1111111122222222                                                                              111111111111                                                  2222333333333333                                                                              222222222222                                                                  333333333333                                                  ______________________________________                                    

5) Maintaining correct data during flushing of the Token buffer.

When the DRAM interface flushes, by unconditionally writing the currentpartially complete block, rubbish data remains in the block. The imupmust delete rubbish data, i.e., delete all data from a FLUSH token,until the end of a block.

6) Holding back data until Start-up Criteria are met.

Output of data from the block is conditional that a "valid" (stream₋₋enable) is accepted from the Buffer Start-up for each different stream.Consequently, twelve bit data is output to hsppk.

B.5.4.2.2 Imex (EXpander)

In the invention, Imex expands out all run length codes into runs ofzeros followed by a level.

B.5.4.2.3 Impad (PADder)

Impad ensures that all DATA Token bodies contain 64 (or more) words. Itdoes this by padding the last word of the Token with zeros. DATA Tokensare not checked for having over 64 words in the body.

B.5.5 Block implementation

B.5.5.1 Hsppk

Typically, both the Splitting and packing is done in a single cycle.

B.5.5.1.1 Splitting

First, the format must be determined

IF (datatoken)

IF (lastformat==1) use format 0a;

ELSE IF (run==0) use format 0;

ELSE use format 1;

ELSE use format 0a;

and format bit determined

format 0 format bit=0;

format 0a format bit=extension bit;

format 1 format bit=1;

If format 1 is used, no new data should be accepted in the next cyclebecause the level of the code has yet to be output.

B.5.5.1.2 Packing

The packing procedure cycles every four valid data inputs. The sixteenbit word output is formed from the last valid word, which is held, andthe succeeding word. If this is not valid, then the output is not valid.The procedure is:

                                      TABLE B.5.3                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Packing procedure                                                             Held Word     Succeeding Word                                                                       Packed Word                                             __________________________________________________________________________    valid cycle 0                                                                       xxxxxxxxxxxx                                                                          000000000000                                                                          xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx                                                                       don't output                                   valid cycle 1                                                                       000000000000                                                                          111111111111                                                                          000000000001111                                                                        output                                         valid cycle 2                                                                       1111111111111                                                                         222222222222                                                                          1111111122222222                                                                       output                                         valid cycle 3                                                                       222222222222                                                                          333333333333                                                                          2222333333333333                                                                       output                                         __________________________________________________________________________

Where x indicates undefined bits.

During valid cycle 0, no word is output because it is not valid.

The valid cycle number is maintained by a ring counter.

It is incremented by valid data from the splitter and an acceptedoutput.

When a FLUSH (or picture₋₋ end) token is received and the token itselfis ready to output, a flush signal is also output to the DRAM interfaceto reset the valid cycle to zero. If a FLUSH token arrives on anythingbut cycle 3, the flush signal must be delayed a valid cycle to ensurethe token itself it output.

B.5.5.2 Imodel

B5.5.2.1 Imup ((Unpacker)

As with the packer, the last valid input is stored, and combined withthe next input, allows unpacking.

                                      TABLE B.5.4                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Unpacking procedure                                                           Succeeding Word                                                                              Held Word                                                                              Unpacked Word                                         __________________________________________________________________________    valid cycle 0                                                                       0000000000001111                                                                       xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx                                                                       000000000000                                                                         input                                          valid cycle 1                                                                       1111111122222222                                                                       0000000000001111                                                                       111111111111                                                                         input                                          valid cycle 2                                                                       2222333333333333                                                                       1111111122222222                                                                       222222222222                                                                         don't input                                    valid cycle 3                                                                       2222333333333333                                                                       1111111122222222                                                                       333333333333                                                                         input                                          __________________________________________________________________________

Where x indicates undefined bits

The valid cycle is maintained by a ring counter. The unpacked datacontains the token's data, flush and PICTURE₋₋ END decoded from it.Additionally, format and extension bit are decoded from the unpackeddata.

formatbit₋₋ is₋₋ extn=(lastformat==1) 11 databody

format=databody && (formatbit && lastformatbit)

for token decoding and to be passed on to imex.

When a FLUSH (or picture₋₋ end) token is unpacked and output to imex,all data is deleted (Valid forced low) until the block end signal isreceived from the DRAM interface.

B.5.5.2.2 Imex (EXpander)

In accordance with the present invention, imex is a four state machineto expand run/level codes out. The state machine is:

state 0: load run count from run code.

state 1: decrement run count, outputting zeros.

state 2: input data and output levels; default state.

state 3: illegal state.

B.5.5.2.3 Impad (PADder)

Impad is informed of DATA Token headers by imex. Next, it counts thenumber of coefficients in the body of the token. If the token endsbefore there are 64 coefficients, zero coefficients are inserted at theend of the token to complete it to 64 coefficients. For example,unextended data headers have 64 zero coefficients inserted after them.DATA tokens with 64 or more coefficients are not affected by impad.

B.5.6 Registers

The imodel and hsppk of the present invention do not have microprocessorregisters, with the exception of their snooper.

                  TABLE B.5.5                                                     ______________________________________                                        Imodel & hsppk registers                                                      Register Name   Usage       Address                                           ______________________________________                                        CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- SNP.sub.-- 2                                                              VAxxxxxx    0x49                                              CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- SNP.sub.-- 1                                                              DDDDDDDD    0x4a                                              CED.sub.-- H.sub.-- SNP.sub.-- 0                                                              DDDDDDDD    0x4b                                              CED.sub.-- IM.sub.-- SNP.sub.-- 1                                                             VAExxDDD    0x4a                                              CED.sub.-- IM.sub.-- SNP.sub.-- 0                                                             DDDDDDDD    0x4d                                              ______________________________________                                    

Where V=valid bit; A=accept bit; E=extension bit; D=data bit.

B.5.7 Verification

Selected streams run through Lsim simulations.

B.5.8 Testing

Test coverage to the imodel at the input is through the Token bufferoutput snooper, and at the output through the imodel's own snooper.Logic is covered the imodel's own scan chain.

The output of the hsppk is accessible through the huffman outputsnooper. The logic is visible through the huffman scan chain.

SECTION B.6 Buffer Start-up

B.6.1 Introduction

This section describes the method and implementation of the bufferstart-up in accordance with the present invention.

B.6.2 Overview

To ensure that a stream of pictures can be displayed smoothly andcontinuously a certain amount of data must be gathered before decodingcan start. This is called the start-up condition. The coding standardspecifies a VBV delay which can be translated, approximately, into theamount of data needed to be gathered. It is the purpose of the "BufferStart-up" to ensure that every stream fulfills its start-up conditionbefore its data progresses from the token buffer, allowing decoding. Itis held in the buffers by a notional gate (the output gate) at theoutput of the token buffer (i.e., in the Inverse Modeler). This gatewill only be open for the stream once its start-up condition has beenmet.

B.6.3 Interfaces

Bscntbit (Buffer Start-up bit counter) is in the datapath, andcommunicates by two-wire interfaces, and is connected to themicroprocessor. It also branches with a two-wire interface to bsogl(Buffer Start-up Output Gate Logic). Bsogl via a two-wire interfacecontrols imup (Inverse Modeler Unpacker), which implements the outputgate.

B.6.4 Block Structure

As shown in FIG. 130, Bscntbit lies in the datapath between the StartCode Detector and the coded data buffer. This single cycle block countsthe valid words of data leaving the block and compares this number withthe startup condition (or target) which will be loaded from themicroprocessor. When the target is met, bsogl is informed. Data isunaffected by bscntbit.

Bsogl lies between bscntbit and imup (in the inverse modeler). Ineffect, it is a queue of indicators that streams have met their targets.The queue is moved along by streams leaving the buffers (i.e., FLUSHtokens received in the data stream at imup), when another "indicator" isaccepted by imup. If the queue is empty (i.e., there are no streams inthe buffers which have yet met their start-up target) the stream in imupis stalled.

The queue only has a finite depth, however, this may be indefinitelyexpanded by breaking the queue in bsogl and allowing the microprocessorto monitor the queue. These queue mechanisms are referred to as internaland external queues respectively.

B.6.5 Block Implementation

B.6.5.1 Bsbitcnt (Buffer Start-up bit counter)

Bscntbit counts all the valid words that are input into the bufferstart-up. The counter (bsctr) is a programmable counter of 16-24 bitswidth. Moreover, bsctr has carry look ahead circuitry to give itsufficient speed. Bsctr's width is programmed by ced₋₋ bs₋₋ prescale. Itdoes this by forcing bits 8-16 high, which makes them always pass acarry. They are, therefore, effectively not used. Only the top eightbits of bsctr are used for comparisons with the target (ced₋₋ bs₋₋target).

The comparison (ced₋₋ bs₋₋ count>=ced₋₋ bs₋₋ target) is done by bscmp.

The target is derived from the stream when the stream is in the HuffmanDecoder and calculated by the microprocessor. It will, therefore, onlybe set sometime after the start of the stream. Before start-up, thetarget₋₋ valid is set low. Writing to ced₋₋ bs₋₋ target sets target₋₋valid high and allows comparisons in bscmp to take place. When thecomparison shows ced₋₋ bs₋₋ count>=ced₋₋ bs₋₋ target, target₋₋ valid isset low. The target has been met.

When the target is met the count is reset. Note, it is not reset at theend of a stream. In addition, counting is disabled after the target ismet if it is before the end of the stream. The count saturates to 255.

When a stream ends (i.e., a flush) is detected in bsbitcnt, an abs₋₋flush₋₋ event is generated. If the stream ends before the target is met,an additional event is also generated (bs₋₋ flush₋₋ before₋₋ target₋₋met₋₋ event). When any of these events occur, the block is stalled. Thisallows the user to recommence the search for the next stream's target orin the case of a bs₋₋ flush₋₋ before₋₋ target₋₋ met₋₋ event eventeither:

1) write a target of zero which will force a target₋₋ met or

2) note that target was not met and allow the next stream to proceeduntil this combined with the last stream reaches the target. The targetfor this next stream can should adjusted accordingly.

B.6.5.2 BSOGL (buffer start-up output gate logic)

As previously described, Bsogl is a queue of indicators that a streamhas met its target. The queue type is set by ced₋₋ bs₋₋ queue(internal(0) or external(1)). This is a reset to select an internalqueue. The depth of the queue determines the maximum number of satisfiedstreams that can be in the coded data buffer, Huffman, and token buffer.When this number is reached (i.e. the queue is full) bsogl will forcethe datapath to stall at bsbitcnt.

Using an internal queue requires no action from the microprocessor.However, if it is necessary to increase the depth of the queue, anexternal queue can be set (by setting ced₋₋ bs₋₋ access to gain accessto ced₋₋ bs₋₋ queue which should be set, target₋₋ met₋₋ event andstream₋₋ end₋₋ event enabled and access relinquished).

The external queue (a count maintained by the microprocessor) isinserted into the internal queue. The external queue is maintained bytwo events. target₋₋ met₋₋ event and stream end₋₋ event. These cansimply be referred to as service₋₋ queue₋₋ input and service₋₋ queue₋₋output respectively! and a register ced₋₋ bs₋₋ enable₋₋ nxt₋₋ stream. Ineffect, target₋₋ met₋₋ event is the up stream end of the internal queuesupplying the queue. Similarly, ced₋₋ bs₋₋ enable₋₋ nxt₋₋ stream is thedown stream end of the internal queue consuming the queue. Similarly,stream₋₋ end₋₋ event is a request to supply the down stream queue;stream₋₋ end₋₋ event resets ced₋₋ bs₋₋ enable₋₋ nxt₋₋ stream. The twoevents should be serviced as follows:

    __________________________________________________________________________    /* TARGET.sub.-- MET.sub.-- EVENT */                                          j= micro.sub.-- read(CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- ENABLE.sub.-- NXT.sub.-- STM);      if (j == 0) /*Is next stream enabled ?*/                                      (/*no, enable it*/                                                             micro.sub.-- write(CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- ENABLE.sub.-- NXT.sub.-- STM,        1);                                                                            printf(" enable next stream (queue = 0x%x)\n",                     (context->queue));                                                            else /*yes, increment the queue of "target.sub.-- met" streams*/              {                                                                              queue++;                                                                      printf(" stream already enbled (queue = 0x%x)\n", (context-        >queue));                                                                     }                                                                             /* STREAM.sub.-- EVENT */                                                     if (queue > 0) /*are there any "target.sub.-- mets" left? */                  (/*yes, decrement the queue and enable another stream */                       queue--;                                                                      micro.sub.-- write(CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- ENABLE.sub.-- NXT.sub.-- STM,        1);                                                                            printf(" enable next stream (queue = 0x%x)\n",                     (context->queue));                                                             }                                                                             else                                                                          printf(" queue empty cannot enable next stream (queue = 0x%x)\n    ",                                                                            queue);                                                                       micro.sub.-- write(CED.sub.-- EVENT.sub.-- 1. 1 << BS.sub.-- STREAM.sub.--     END.sub.-- EVENT); /* clear event                                            */                                                                            __________________________________________________________________________

The queue type can be changed from internal to external at any time (bythe means described above), but they can only be changed external tointernal when the external queue is empty (from above "queue==0"), bysetting ced₋₋ bs₋₋ access to gain access to ced₋₋ bs₋₋ queue whichshould be reset, target₋₋ met₋₋ event and stream₋₋ end₋₋ event masked,and access relinquished.

On the other hand, disable checking of stream start-up conditions, setced₋₋ bs₋₋ queue (external), mask target₋₋ met₋₋ event and stream₋₋end₋₋ event and set ced₋₋ bs₋₋ enable₋₋ nxt₋₋ stream. In this way, allstreams will always be enabled.

B.6.6 Microprocessor registers

                  TABLE B.6.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        Bscntbit registers                                                            Register name        Usage       Address                                      ______________________________________                                        CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- ACCESS                                                                        xxxxxxxD    0x10                                         CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- PRESCALE*                                                                     xxxxxDDD    0x11                                         CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- TARGET*                                                                       DDDDDDDD    0x12                                         CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- COUNT*                                                                        DDDDDDDD    0x13                                         BS.sub.-- FLUSH.sub.-- EVENT                                                                       rrrrrDrr    0x02                                         BS.sub.-- FLUSH.sub.-- MASK                                                                        rrrrrDrr    0x03                                         BS.sub.-- FLUSH.sub.-- BEFORE.sub.-- TARGET.sub.-- ME                                              rrrrDrrr    0x02                                         T.sub.-- EVENT                                                                BS.sub.-- FLUSH.sub.-- BEFORE.sub.-- TARGET.sub.-- ME                                              rrrrDrrr    0x03                                         T.sub.-- MASK                                                                 ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE B.6.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        Bsogl registers                                                               Register name        Usage    Address                                         ______________________________________                                        TARGET.sub.-- MET.sub.-- EVENT                                                                     rrrDrrrr 0x02                                            TARGET.sub.-- MET.sub.-- MASK                                                                      rrrDrrrr 0x03                                            STREAM.sub.-- END.sub.-- EVENT                                                                     rrDrrrrr 0x02                                            STREAM.sub.-- END.sub.-- MASK                                                                      rrDrrrrr 0x03                                            CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- QUEUE*                                                                        xxxxxxxD 0x14                                            CED.sub.-- BS.sub.-- ENABLE.sub.-- NXT.sub.-- STM*                                                 xxxxxxxD 0x15                                            ______________________________________                                    

where

D is a register bit

x is a non-existent register bit

r is a reserved register bit

to gain access to these registers ced₋₋ bs₋₋ access must be set to oneand polled until it reads back one, unless in an interrupt serviceroutine. Access is given up by setting ced₋₋ bs₋₋ access to zero.

SECTION B.7 The DRAM Interface

B.7.1 Overview

In the present invention, the Spatial Decoder, Temporal Decoder andVideo Formatter each contain a DRAM interface block for that particularchip. In all three devices, the function of the DRAM interface is totransfer data from the chip to the external DRAM and from the externalDRAM into the chip via block addresses supplied by an address generator.

The DRAM interface typically operates from a clock which is asynchronousto both the address generator and to the clocks of the various blocksthrough which data is passed. This asynchronism is readily managed,however, because the clocks are operating at approximately the samefrequency.

Data is usually transferred between the DRAM Interface and the rest ofthe chip in blocks of 64 bytes (the only exception being prediction datain the Temporal Decoder). Transfers take place by means of a deviceknown as a "swing buffer". This is essentially a pair of RAMs operatedin a double-buffered configuration, with the DRAM interface filling oremptying one RAM while another part of the chip empties or fills theother RAM. A separate bus which carries an address from an addressgenerator is associated with each swing buffer.

Each of the chips has four swing buffers, but the function of theseswing buffers is different in each case. In the Spatial Decoder, oneswing buffer is used to transfer coded data to the DRAM, another to readcoded data from the DRAM, the third to transfer tokenized data to theDRAM and the fourth to read tokenized data from the DRAM. In theTemporal Decoder, one swing buffer is used to write Intra or Predictedpicture data to the DRAM, the second to read Intra or Predicted datafrom the DRAM and the other two to read forward and backward predictiondata. In the Video Formatter, one swing buffer is used to transfer datato the DRAM and the other three are used to read data from the DRAM, onefor each of Luminance (Y) and the Red and Blue color difference data (Crand Cb, respectively).

The following section describes the operation of a DRAM interface inaccordance with the present invention, which has one write swing bufferand one read swing buffer, which is essentially the same as theoperation of the Spatial Decoder DRAM Interface. This is illustrated inFIG. 131, "DRAM Interface,".

B.7.2 A Generic DRAM Interface

Referring to FIG. 131, the interfaces to the address generator 420 andto the blocks which supply and take the data are all two wireinterfaces. The address generator 420 may either generate addresses asthe result of receiving control tokens, or it may merely generate afixed sequence of addresses. The DRAM interface 421 treats the two wireinterfaces associated with the address generator in a special way.Instead of keeping the accept line high when it is ready to receive anaddress, it waits for the address generator to supply a valid address,processes that address and then sets the accept line high for one clockperiod. Thus, it implements a request/acknowledge (REQ/ACK) protocol.

A unique feature of the DRAM Interface is its ability to communicatewith the address generator and the blocks which provide or accept thedata completely independent of the other. For example, the addressgenerator may generate an address associated with the data in the writeswing buffer, but no action will be taken until the write swing buffersignals that there is a block of data which is ready to be written tothe external DRAM 422. However, no action is taken until an address issupplied on the appropriate bus from the address generator. Further,once one of the RAMs in the write swing buffer has been filled withdata, the other may be completely filled and "swung" to the DRAMInterface side before the data input is stalled (the two-wire interfaceaccept signal set low).

In understanding the operation of the DRAM Interface of the presentinvention, it is important to note that in a properly configured systemthe DRAM Interface will be able to transfer data between the swingbuffers and the external DRAM at least as fast as the sum of all theaverage data rates between the swing buffers and the rest of the chip.

Each DRAM Interface contains a method of determining which swing bufferit will service next. In general, this will be either a "round robin",in which the swing buffer which is serviced is the next available swingbuffer which has less recently had a turn, or a priority encoder inwhich some swing buffers have a higher priority than others. In bothcases, an additional request will come from a refresh request generatorwhich has a higher priority than all the other requests. The refreshrequest is generated from a refresh counter which can be programmed viathe microprocessor interface.

B.7.2.1 The swing Buffers

FIG. 132 illustrates a write swing buffer. The operation is as follows:

1) Valid data is presented at the input 430 (data in). As each piece ofdata is accepted it is written into RAM1 and the address is incremented.

2) When RAM1 is full, the input side gives up control and sends a signalto the read side to indicate that RAM1 is now ready to be read. Thissignal passes between two asynchronous clock regimes, and so passesthrough three synchronizing flip-flops.

3) The next item of data to arrive on the input side is written intoRAM2, which is still empty.

4) When the round robin or priority encoder indicates that it is theturn of this swing buffer to be read, the DRAM Interface reads thecontents of RAM1 and writes them to the external DRAM. A signal is thensent back across the asynchronous interface, as in (2), to indicate thatRAM1 is now ready to be filled again.

5) If the DRAM Interface empties RAM1 and "swings" it before the inputside has filled RAM2, then data can be accepted by the swing buffercontinually, otherwise when RAM2 is filled the swing buffer will set itsaccept signal low until RAM1 has been "swung" back for use by the inputside.

6) This process is repeated ad infinitum.

The operation of a read swing buffer is similar, but with input andoutput data busses reversed.

B.7.2.2 Addressing of External DRAM and Swing Buffers

The DRAM Interface is designed to maximize the available memorybandwidth. Consequently, it is arranged so that each 8×8 block of datais stored in the same DRAM page. In this way full use can be made ofDRAM fast page access modes, where one row address is supplied followedby many column addresses. In addition, a facility is provided to allowthe data bus to the external DRAM to be 8, 16 or 32 bits wide, so thatthe amount of DRAM used can be matched to the size and bandwidthrequirements of the particular application.

In this example (which is exactly how the DRAM Interface on the SpatialDecoder works), the address generator provides the DRAM Interface withblock addresses for each of the read and write swing buffers. Thisaddress is used as the row address for the DRAM. The six bits of columnaddress are supplied by the DRAM interface itself, and these bits arealso used as the address for the swing buffer RAM. The data bus to theswing buffers is 32 bits wide, so if the bus width to the external DRAMis less than 32 bits, two or four external DRAM accesses must be madebefore the next word is read from a write swing buffer or the next wordis written to a read swing buffer (read and write refer to the directionof transfer relative to the external DRAM).

The situation is more complex in the cases of the Temporal Decoder andthe Video Formatter. These are covered separately below.

B.7.3 DRAM Interface Timing

In the present invention, the DRAM Interface Timing block uses timingchains to place the edges of the DRAM signals to a precision of aquarter of the system clock period. Two quadrature clocks from the phaselocked loop are used. These are combined to form a notional 2x clock.Any one chain is then made from two shift registers in parallel, onopposite phases of the "2x clock".

First of all, there is one chain for the page start cycle and anotherfor the read/write/refresh cycles. The length of each cycle isprogrammable via the microprocessor interface, after which the pagestart chain has a fixed length, and the cycle chain's length changes asappropriate during a page start.

On reset, the chains are cleared and a pulse is created. This pulsetravels along the chains, being directed by the state information fromthe DRAM Interface. The DRAM Interface clock is generated by this pulse.Each DRAM Interface clock period corresponds to one cycle of the DRAM.Thus, as the DRAM cycles have different lengths, the DRAM Interfaceclock is not at a constant rate.

Further, timing chains combine the pulse from the above chains with theinformation from DRAM Interface to generate the output strobes andenables (notcas, notras, notwe, notoe).

SECTION B.8 Inverse Quantizer

B.8.1 Introduction

This document describes the purpose, actions and implementation of theinverse quantizer, (iq) in accordance with the present invention.

B.8.2 Overview

The inverse quantizer reconstructs coefficients from quantizedcoefficients, quantization weights and step sizes, all of which aretransmitted within the datastream.

B.8.3 Interfaces

The iq lies between the inverse modeler and the inverse DCT in thedatapath and is connected to a microprocessor. Datapath connections arevia two-wire interfaces. Input data is 10 bits wide, output is 11 bitswide.

B.8.4 Mathematics of Inverse Quantization

B.8.4.1 H261 Equations

For blocks coded in intra mode: ##EQU1##

For all other coded blocks: ##EQU2## B.8.4.2 JPEG Equations ##EQU3##B.8.4.3 MPEG Equations

For blocks coded in intra mode: ##EQU4## 1024 is added in intra DC caseto account for predictors in huffman being reset to zero. For all othercoded blocks: ##EQU5## B.8.4.4 JPEG Variation Equations ##EQU6## B.8.4.5All other tokens

All tokens except DATA Tokens must pass through the iq unquantized

Where: ##EQU7##

Floor(a) returns an integer such that: ##EQU8## Q_(i) are the quantizedcoefficients. C_(j) are the reconstructed coefficients

W_(i),j are the values in the quantisation table matrices

i is the coefficient index along the zig-zag

j is the quantisation table matrix number (0<=j<=3)

B.8.4.6 Multiple Standards combined

It can be shown that all the above standards and their variations (alsocontrol data which must be unchanged by the iq) can be mapped on tosingle equation: ##EQU9##

With the additional post inverse quantisation functions of:

Add 1024

Convert from sign magnitude to 2's complement representation.

Round all even numbers to the nearest odd number towards zero.

Saturate result to +2047 or -2048.

The variables k, x and y for each variation of the standards and whichfunctions they use is shown in Table B.8.1.

B.8.4.6 Multiple Standards combined

                                      TABLE B.8.1                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Control decoding                                                                       x   y         Add                                                                              Round                                                                             Sat.                                                                             Convert                                      Standard Weight                                                                            Scale   k 1024                                                                             Even                                                                              Res't                                                                            2's comp                                     __________________________________________________________________________    H261                                                                              intra DC                                                                            8  8       0 No No  Yes                                                                              Yes                                              intra                                                                              16  iq.sub.-- quant.sub.-- scale                                                          1 No Yes Yes                                                                              Yes                                              other                                                                              16  iq.sub.-- quant.sub.-- scale                                                          1 No Yes Yes                                                                              Yes                                          JPEG                                                                              DC   W.sub.i                                                                           8       0 Yes                                                                              No  Yes                                                                              Yes                                              other                                                                              W.sub.i                                                                           8       0 No No  Yes                                                                              Yes                                          MPEG                                                                              intra DC                                                                            8  8       0 Yes                                                                              No  Yes                                                                              Yes                                              intra                                                                              W.sub.i                                                                           iq.sub.--quant.sub.-- scale                                                           0 No No  Yes                                                                              Yes                                              other                                                                              W.sub.i                                                                           iq.sub.--quant.sub.-- scale                                                           1 No Yes Yes                                                                              Yes                                          XXX DC   W.sub.i                                                                           iq.sub.--quant.sub.-- scale                                                           0 Yes                                                                              No  Yes                                                                              Yes                                              other                                                                              W.sub.i                                                                           iq.sub.--quant.sub.-- scale                                                           0 No No  Yes                                                                              Yes                                          Other Tokens                                                                            1  8       0 No No  No No                                           __________________________________________________________________________

B.8.5 Block Structure

From B.8.4.6 and Table B.8.1, it can be seen that a single architecturecan be used for a multi-standard inverse quantizer. Its arithmetic blockdiagram is shown in FIG. 133 "Arithmetic Block":

Control for the arithmetic block can be functionally broken into twosections:

Decoding of tokens to load status registers or quantization tables.

Decoding of the status registers into control signals.

Tokens are decoded in iqca which controls the next cycle, i.e., iqcb'sbank of registers. It also controls the access to the four quantizationtables in igram. The arithmetic, that is, two multipliers and the postfunctions, are in iqarith. The complete block diagram for the iq isshown in FIG. 134.

B.8.6 Block Implementation

B.8.6.1 Iqca

In the invention, iqca is a state machine used to decode tokens intocontrol signals for igram and the register in iqcb. The state machine isbetter described as a state machine for each token since it is reset byeach new token. For example:

The code for the QUANT₋₋ SCALE (see B.8.7.4, "QUANT₋₋ SCALE") andQUANT₋₋ TABLE (see B.8.7.6, "QUANT₋₋ TABLE") are as follows:

    __________________________________________________________________________    if (tokenheader == QUANT.sub.-- SCALE)                                         sprintf(preport, "QUANT.sub.-- SCALE");                                       reg.sub.-- addr = ADDR.sub.-- IQ.sub.-- QUANT.sub.-- SCALE;                   rnotw = WRITE;                                                                enable = 1;                                                                  }                                                                             if (tokenheader == QUANT.sub.-- TABLE) /*QUANT.sub.-- TABLE token */          switch (substate)                                                             {                                                                             case 0: /* quantisation table header */                                        sprintf(preport, "QUANT.sub.-- TABLE.sub.-- %s.sub.-- s0*,                     (headerextn ? "(full)" : "(empty)"));                                        nextsubstate = 1;                                                             insertnext = (headerextn ? 0 : 1);                                            reg.sub.-- addr = ADDR.sub.-- IQ.sub.-- COMPONENT;                            rnotw = WRITE;                                                                enable = 1;                                                                   break;                                                                       case 1: /* quantisation table body */                                          sprintf(preport, "QUANT.sub.-- TABLE.sub.-- %s.sub.-- s1",                     (headerextn ? "(full)" : "(empty)"));                                        nextsubstate = 1;                                                             insertnext = (headerextn ? 0 : (qtm.sub.-- addr.sub.-- 63 ==0 0));            reg.sub.-- addr = USE.sub.-- QTM;                                             rnotw = (headerextn ? WRITE : READ);                                          enable = 1;                                                                   break;                                                                       default:                                                                       sprintf(preport, "ERROR in iq quantisation table tokendecoder                (substate %x)\n",                                                    substate);                                                                   break;                                                                        }                                                                             }                                                                             __________________________________________________________________________

Where a substate is a state within a token, QUANT₋₋ SCALE has, forexample, only one substate. However, the QUANT₋₋ TABLE has two, onebeing the header, the second the token body.

The state machine is implemented as a PLA. Unrecognized tokens cause nowordline to rise and the PLA to output default (harmless) controls.

Additionally, iqca supplies addresses to igram from BodyWord counter andinserts words into the stream, for example in an unextended QUANT₋₋TABLE (see B.8.7.4). This is achieved by stalling the input whilemaintaining the output valid. The words can be filled with the correctdata in succeeding blocks (iqcb or iqarith).

iqca is a single cycle in the datapath controlled by two-wireinterfaces.

B.8.6.2 iqcb

In the invention, iqcb holds the iq status registers.

Under the control of iqca it loads or unloads these from/to thedatapath.

The status registers are decoded (see Table B.8.1) into control wiresfor iqarith; to control the XY multiplier terms and the postquantization functions.

The sign bit of the datapath is separated here and sent to the postquantization functions. Also, zero valued words on the datapath aredetected here. The arithmetic is then ignored and zero muxed onto thedatapath. This is the easiest way to comply with the "zero in; zero out"spec of the iq.

The status registers are accessible from the microprocessor only whenthe register iq₋₋ access has been set to one and reads back one. In thissituation, iqcb has halted the datapath, thus ensuring the registershave a stable value and no data is corrupted in the datapath.

Iqcb is a single cycle in the datapath controlled by two wireinterfaces.

B.8.6.3 Iqram

Iqram must hold up to four quantization table matrices (QTM), each 64*8bits. It is, therefore, a 256*8 bits six transistor RAM, capable of oneread or one write per cycle. The RAM is enclosed by two-wire interfacelogic receiving its control and write data from iqca. It reads out datato iqarith. Similarly, igram occupies the same cycle in the datapath asiqcb.

The RAM may be read and written from the microprocessor when iq₋₋ accessreads back one. The RAM is placed behind a keyhole register, iq₋₋ qtm₋₋keyhole and addressed by iq₋₋ qtm₋₋ keyhole₋₋ addr. Accessing iq₋₋ qtm₋₋keyhole will cause the address to which it points, held in iq₋₋ qtm₋₋keyhole₋₋ addr to be incremented. Likewise, iq₋₋ qtm₋₋ keyhole₋₋ addrcan be written to directly.

B.8.6.4 iqarith

Note, iqarith is three functions pipelined and split over three cycles.The functions are discussed below (see FIG. 133).

B.8.6.4.1 XY multiplier

This is a 5(X) by 8(Y) bit carry save unsigned multiplier feeding on tothe datapath multiplier. The multiplier and multiplicand are selectedwith control wires from iqcb. The multiplication is in the first cycle,the resolving adder in the second.

At the input to the multiplier, data from iqram can be muxed onto thedatapath to read a QUANT₋₋ TABLE out onto the datapath.

B.8.6.4.2 (XY)* datapath multiplier

This 13 (XY) by 12 (datapath) bit carry save unsigned multiplier issplit over the three cycles of the block. Three partial products in thefirst cycle, seven in the second and the remaining two in the third.

Since all output from the multiplier is less than 2047 (non₋₋coefficient) or saturated to +2047/-2048, the top twelve bits don't everneed to be resolved. Accordingly, the resolving adder is just two bitswide. On the remainder of the high order bits, a zero detect suffices asa saturate signal.

B. 8.6.4.3 Post quantization functions

The post quantization functions are

Add 1024

Convert from sign magnitude to 2's complement representation.

Round all even numbers to the nearest odd number towards zero.

Saturate result to +2047 or -2048.

Set output to zero (see B.8.6.2)

The first three functions are implemented on a 12 bit adder (pipelinedover the second and third cycles). From this, it can be seen what eachfunction requires and these are then combined onto the single adder.

                  TABLE B.8.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        Post quantization adder functions                                             Function         if datapath > 0                                                                           if datapath > 0                                  ______________________________________                                        Convert to 2's complement                                                                      nothing     invert add one                                   Round all even numbers                                                                         subtract one                                                                              add one                                          Add 1024         add 1024    add 1024                                         ______________________________________                                    

As will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art, care shouldbe taken when reprogramming these functions as they are veryinterdependent when combined.

The saturate values, zero and zero +1024 are muxed onto the datapath atthe end of the third cycle.

B.8.7 Inverse Quantizer Tokens

The following notes define the behavior of the Inverse Quantizer foreach Token tp which it responds. In all cases, the Tokens are alsotransported to the output of the Inverse Quantizer. In most cases, theToken is unmodified by the Inverse Quantizer with the exceptions asnoted below. All unrecognized Tokens are passed unmodified to the outputof the Inverse Quantizer.

B.8.7.1 SEQUENCE₋₋ START

This Token causes the registers iq₋₋ prediction mode 1:0! and iq₋₋mpeg₋₋ indirection 1:0! to be reset to zero.

B.8.7.2 CODING₋₋ STANDARD

This Token causes iq₋₋ standard 1:0! to be loaded with the appropriatevalue based upon the current standard (MPEG, JPEG or H.261) beingdecoded.

B.8.7.3 PREDICTION₋₋ MODE

This Token loads iq-prediction₋₋ mode 1:0!. Although the PREDICTION₋₋MODE Token carries more than two bits, the Inverse Quantizer only needsaccess to the two lowest order bits. These determine whether or not theblock is intra coded.

B.8.7.4 QUANT₋₋ SCALE

This Token loads iq₋₋ quant₋₋ scale 4:0!.

B.8.7.5 DATA

In the present invention, this Token carries the actual quantizedcoefficients. The head of the token contains two bits identifying thecolor component and these are loaded into iq₋₋ component 1:0!. The nextsixty four Token words contain the quantized coefficients. These aremodified as a result of the inverse quantization process and arereplaced by the reconstructed coefficients.

If exactly sixty four extension words are not present in the Token, thebehavior of the Inverse Quantizer is undefined.

The DATA Token at the input of the Inverse Quantizer carries quantizedcoefficients. These are represented in eleven bits in a sign-magnitudeformat (ten bits plus a sign bit). The value "minus zero" should not beused but is correctly interpreted as zero.

The DATA Token at the output of the Inverse Quantizer carriesreconstructed coefficients. These are represented in twelve bits in atwos complement format (eleven bits plus a sign bit). The DATA Token atthe output will have the same number of Token Extension words as it hadat the input of the Inverse Quantizer.

B.8.7.6 QUANT₋₋ TABLE

This Token may be used to load a new quantization table or to read outan existing table. Typically, in the Inverse Quantizer, the Token willbe used to load a new table which has been decoded from the bit stream.The action of reading out an existing table is useful in the forwardquantizer of an encoder if that table is to be encoded into the bitstream.

The Token Head contains two bits identifying the table number that is tobe used. These are placed in iq₋₋ component 1:0!. Note that thisregister now contains a "table number" not a color component.

If the extension bit of the Token Head is one, the Inverse Quantizerexpects there to be exactly sixty four extension Token Words. Each oneis interpreted as a quantization table value and placed in a successivelocation of the appropriate table, starting at location zero. The ninthbit of each extension Token word is ignored. The Token is also passed tothe output of the Inverse Quantizer, unmodified, in the normal way.

If the extension bit of the Token Head is zero, then the InverseQuantizer will read out successive locations of the appropriate tablestarting at location zero. Each location becomes an extension Token word(the ninth bit will be zero). At the end of this operation, the Tokenwill contain exactly sixty four extension Token words.

The operation of the Inverse Quantizer in response to this token isundefined for all numbers of extension words except zero and sixty four.

B.8.7.7 JPEG₋₋ TABLE₋₋ SELECT

This token is used to load or unload translations of color components totable numbers to/from iq₋₋ ipeg₋₋ indirection. These translations areused in JPEG and other standards.

The Token Head contains two bits identifying the color component that iscurrently of interest. These are placed in iq₋₋ component 1:0!.

If the extension bit of the Token Head is one, the Token should containone extension word, the lowest two bits of which are written into theiq₋₋ ipeg₋₋ indirection 2*iq₋₋ component 1:0!+1:2*iq₋₋ component 1:0!!location. The value just read becomes a Token extension word (the upperseven bits will be zero). At the end of this operation, the Token willcontain exactly one Token extension word.

                  TABLE B.8.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        JPEG.sub.-- TABLE.sub.-- SELECT action                                        Colour component in header                                                                    bits of iq.sub.-- ipeg.sub.-- indirection                     ______________________________________                                                        accessed                                                      0                1:0!                                                         1                3:2!                                                         2                5:4!                                                         3                7:6!                                                         ______________________________________                                    

B.8.7.8 MPEG₋₋ TABLE₋₋ SELECT

This Token is used to define whether to use the default or user definedquantization tables while processing via the MPEG standard. The TokenHead contains two bits. Bit zero of the header determines which bit ifiq₋₋ mpeg₋₋ indirection is written into. Bit one is written into thatlocation.

Since the iq₋₋ mpeg₋₋ indirection 1:0! register is cleared by theSEQUENCE₋₋ START Token, it will only be necessary to use this Token if auser defined quantization table has been transmitted in the bit stream.

B.8.8 Microprocessor Registers

B.8.8.1 iq₋₋ access

To gain microprocessor access to any of the iq registers, iq₋₋ accessmust be set to one and polled until it reads back one (see B.8.6.2).Failure to do this will result in the registers being read still beingcontrolled by the datapath and, therefore, not being stable. In the caseof the igram, the accesses are locked out, reading back zeros.

Writing zero to iq₋₋ access relinquishes control back to the datapath.

B.8.8.2 Iq₋₋ coding₋₋ standard 1:0!

This register holds the coding standard that is being implemented by theInverse Quantizer.

                  TABLE B.8.4                                                     ______________________________________                                        Coding standard values                                                        iq.sub.-- coding.sub.-- standard                                                              Coding Standard                                               ______________________________________                                        0               H.261                                                         1               JPEG                                                          2               MPEG                                                          3               XXX                                                           ______________________________________                                    

This register is loaded by the CODING₋₋ STANDARD Token.

Although this is a two bit register, at present eight bits are allocatedin the memory map and future implementations can deal with more than theabove standards.

B.8.8.3 Iq₋₋ mpeg₋₋ indirection 1:0!

This two bit register is used during MPEG decoding operations tomaintain a record of which quantization tables are to be used.

Iq₋₋ mpeg₋₋ indirection 0!controls the table that is used for intracoded blocks. If it is zero then quantization table 0 is used and isexpected to contain the default quantization table. If it is one, thenquantization table 2 is used and is expected to contain the user definedquantization table for intra coded blocks.

This register is loaded by the MPEG₋₋ TABLE₋₋ SELECT Token and is resetto zero by the SEQUENCE₋₋ START Token.

B.8.8.4 Iq₋₋ ipeg₋₋ indirection 7:0!

This eight bit register determines which of the four quantization tableswill be used for each of the four possible color components that occurin a JPEG scan.

Bits 1:0! hold the table number that will be used for component zero.

Bits 3:2! hold the table number that will be used for component one.

Bits 5:4! hold the table number that will be used for component two.

Bits 7:6! hold the table number that will be used for component three.

This register is affected by the JPEG₋₋ TABLE₋₋ SELECT Token.

B.8.8.5 iq₋₋ quant₋₋ scale 4.0!

This register holds the current value of the quantization scale factor.This register is loaded by the QUANT₋₋ SCALE Token.

B.8.8.6 iq₋₋ component 1:0!

This register usually holds a value which is translated into theQuantization Table Matrix (QTM) number. It is loaded by a number ofTokens.

The DATA Token header causes this register be loaded with the colorcomponent of the block which is about to be processed. This informationis only used in JPEG and JPEG variations to determine the QTM number,which it does with reference to iq₋₋ ipeg₋₋ indirection 7:0!. In otherstandards, iq₋₋ component 1:0! is ignored.

The JPEG₋₋ TABLE₋₋ SELECT Token causes this register be loaded with acolor component. It is then used as an index into iq₋₋ ipeg₋₋indirection 7:0! which is accessed by the tokens body.

The QUANT₋₋ SCALE Token causes this register to be loaded with the QTMnumber. This table is then either loaded from the Token (if the extendedform of the Token is used) or read out from the table to form a properlyextended Token.

B.8.8.7 iq₋₋ prediction₋₋ mode 1:0!

This two bit register holds the prediction mode that will be used forsubsequent blocks. The only use that the Inverse Quantizer makes of thisinformation is to decide whether or not intra coding is being used. Ifboth bits of the register are zero, then subsequent blocks are intracoded.

This register is loaded by the PREDICTION₋₋ MODE Token. This register isreset to zero by the SEQUENCE₋₋ START Token.

Iq₋₋ prediction₋₋ mode 1:0! has no effect on the operation in JPEG andJPEG variation modes.

B.8.8.8 Iq₋₋ ipeg₋₋ indirection 7:0!

Iq₋₋ ipeg₋₋ indirection is used as a lookup table to translate colorcomponents into the QTM number. Accordingly, iq₋₋ component is used asan index to iq₋₋ ipeg₋₋ indirection as shown in Table B.8.3.

This register location is written to directly by the JPEG₋₋ TABLE₋₋SELECT Token if the extended form of the Token is used.

This register location is read directly by the JPEG₋₋ TABLE₋₋ SELECTToken if the non-extended form of the Token is used.

B.8.8.9 Iq₋₋ quant₋₋ table 3:0! 63:0! 7:0!

There are four quantization tables, each with 64 locations. Eachlocation is an eight bit value. The value zero should not be used in anylocation.

These registers are implemented as a RAM described in B.8.6.3, "Igram".

These tables may be loaded using the QUANT₋₋ TABLE Token.

Note that data in these tables are stored in zig-zag scan order. Manydocuments represent quantization table values as a square eight by eightarray of numbers. Usually, the DC term is at the top left withincreasing horizontal frequency running left to right and increasingvertical frequency running top to bottom. Such tables must be read alongthe zig-zag scan path as the numbers are placed into the quantizationtable with consecutive "i".

B.8.9 Microprocessor Register Map

                  TABLE B.8.5                                                     ______________________________________                                        Memory Map                                                                    Register       Location  Direction Reset State                                ______________________________________                                        iq.sub.-- access                                                                             0x30      R/W       0                                          iq.sub.-- coding.sub.-- standard 1:0!                                                        0x31      R/W       0                                          iq.sub.-- quant.sub.-- scale 4:0!                                                            0x32      R/W       ?                                          iq.sub.-- component 1:0!                                                                     0x33      R/W       ?                                          iq.sub.-- prediction.sub.-- mode 1:0!                                                        0x34      R/W       0                                          iq.sub.-- ipeg.sub.-- indirection 7:0!                                                       0x35      R/W       ?                                          iq.sub.-- mpeg.sub.-- indirection 1:0!                                                       0x36      R/W       0                                          iq.sub.-- qtm.sub.-- keyhole.sub.-- addr 7:0!                                                0x38      R/W       0                                          iq.sub.-- qtm.sub.-- keyhole 7:0!                                                            0x39      R/W       ?                                          ______________________________________                                    

B.8.10 Test

Test coverage to the Inverse Quantizer at the input is through theInverse Modeler's output snooper, and at the output through the InverseQuantizer's own snooper. Logic is covered by the Inverse Quantizer's ownscan chain.

Access can be gained to igram without reference to iq₋₋ access if theramtest signal is asserted.

SECTION B.9 IDCT

B.9.1 Introduction

The purpose of this description of the Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform(IDCT) block is to provide a source of engineering information for theIDCT. It includes information on the following.

purpose and main features of the IDCT

how it was designed and verified

structure

It is intended that the description should provide one of ordinary skillin the art sufficient information to facilitate or aid the followingtasks.

appreciation of the IDCT as a "sillicon macro function"

integration the IDCT onto another device

development of test programs for the IDCT silicon

modification, re-design or maintenance of the IDCT

development of a forward DCT block

B.9.2 Overview

A Discrete Cosine Transform/Zig-Zag (DCT/ZZ) performs a transformationon blocks of pixels wherein each block represents an area of the screen8 pixels high by 8 pixels wide. The purpose of the transform is torepresent the pixel block in a frequence domain, sorted according tofrequency. Since the eye is sensitive to DC components in a picture, butmuch less sensitive to high frequency components, the frequency dataallows each component to be reduced in magnitude separately, accordingto the eye's sensitivity. The process of magnitude reduction is known asquantization. The quantization process reduces the information containedin the picture, that is, the quantization process is lossy. Lossyprocesses give overall data compression by eliminating some information.The frequency data is sorted so that high frequencies, most likely to bequantized to zero, all appear consecutively. The consecutive zeros meansthat coding the quantized data by using run-length coding schemes yieldsfurther data compression, although run-length coding is generally not alossy process.

The IDCT block (which actually includes an Inverse Zig-Zag RAM, or IZZ,and an IDCT) takes frequency data, which is sorted, and transforms itinto spatial data. This inverse sorting process is the function of IZZ.

The picture decompression system, of which the IDCT block forms a part,specifies the pixels as integers. This means that the IDCT block musttake, and yield, integer values. However, since the IDCT function is notinteger based, the internal number representation uses fractional partsto maintain internal accuracy. Full floating-point arithmetic ispreferable, but the implementation described herein uses fixed-pointarithmetic. There is some loss of accuracy using fixed-point arithmetic,but the accuracy of this implementation exceeds the accuracy specifiedby H.261 and the IEEE.

B.9.3 Design Objectives

The main design objective, in accordance with the present invention, wasto design a functionally correct IDCT block which uses a minimum siliconarea. The design was also required to run with a clock speed of 30 MHzunder the specified operating conditions, but it was considered that thedesign should also be adaptable for the future. Higher clock rates willbe needed in the future, and the architecture of the design allows forthis wherever possible.

B.9.4 IDCT Interfaces Description

The IDCT block has the following interfaces.

a 12-bit wide Token data input port

a 9-bit wide Token data output port

a microprocessor interface port

a system services input port

a test interface

resynchronizing signals

Both the Token data ports are the standard Two-Wire Interface typepreviously described. The widths illustrated, refer to the number ofbits in the data representation, not the total number of wires in aport. In addition, associated with the input Token data port are theclock and reset signals used for resynchronization to the output of theprevious block. There are also two resynchronizing clocks associatedwith the output Token data port and used by the subsequent block.

The microprocessor interface is standard and uses four bits of address.There are also three externally decoded select inputs which are used toselect the address spaces for events, internal registers and testregisters. This mechanism provides the flexibility to map the IDCTaddress space into different positions in different chips. There is alsoa single event output, idctevent, and two i/o signals, n₋₋ derrd and n₋₋serrd, which are the event tristate data wires to be connectedexternally to the IDCT and to the appropriate bits of the microprocessornotdata bus.

The system services port consists of the standard clock and reset inputsignals, as well as, the 2-phase override clocks and associated clockoverride mode select input.

The test interface consists of the JTAG clock and reset signals, thescan-path data and control signals and the ramtest and chiptest inputs.

In normal operation, the microprocessor port is inactive since the IDCTdoes not require any microprocessor access to achieve its specifiedfunction. Similarly, the test interface is only active when testing orverification is required.

B.9.5 The Mathematical Basis for the Discrete Cosine Transformation

In video bandwidth compression, the input data represents a square areaof the picture. The transform applied must, therefore, betwo-dimensional. Two-dimensional transforms are difficult to computeefficiently, but the two-dimensional DCT has the property of beingseparable. Separable transforms can be computed along each dimensionindependent of the other dimensions. This implementation uses aone-dimensional IDCT algorithm designed specifically for mapping ontohardware; the algorithm is not appropriate for software models. Theone-dimensional algorithm is applied successively to obtain atwo-dimensional result.

The mathematical definition of the two-dimensional DCT for an N by Nblock of pixels is as follows: ##EQU10##

The above definition is mathematically equivalent to multiplying two Nby N matrices, twice in succession, with a matrix transposition betweenthe multiplications. A one-dimensional DCT is mathematically equivalentto multiplying two N by N matrices. Mathematically the two-dimensionalcase is:

    Y= X C!.sup.T C

Where C is the matrix of cosine terms.

Thus the DCT is sometimes described in terms of matrix manipulation.Matrix descriptions can be convenient for mathematical reductions of thetransform, but it must be stressed that this only makes notation easier.Note that the 2/N term governs the DC level. The constants c(j) and c(k)are known as the normalization factors.

B.9.6 The IDCT Transform Algorithm

As subsequently explained in further detail, the algorithm used tocompute the actual IDCT transform should be a "fast" algorithm. Thealgorithm used is optimized for an efficient hardware architecture andimplementation. The main features of the algorithm are the use of √2scaling in order to remove one multiplication, and a transformation ofthe algorithm designed to yield a greater symmetry between the upper andlower sections. This symmetry results in an efficient re-use of many ofthe most costly arithmetic elements.

In the diagram illustrating the algorithm (FIG. 136), the symmetrybetween the upper and lower halves is evident in the middle section. Thefinal column of adders and subtractors also has a symmetry, the addersand subtractors can be combined with relatively little cost (4adder/subtractors being significantly smaller than 4 adders+4subtractors as illustrated).

Note that all the outputs of a single dimensional transform are scaledby √2. This means that the final 2-dimensional answer will be scaled by2. This can then be easily corrected in the final saturation androunding stage by shifting.

The algorithm shown was coded in double precision floating-point C andthe results of this compared with a reference IDCT (usingstraightforward matrix multiplication). A further stage was then used tocode a bit-accurate integer version of the algorithm in C (no timinginformation was included) which could be used to verify the performanceand accuracy of the algorithm as it would be implemented on silicon. Theallowable inaccuracies of the transform are specified in the H.261standard and this method was used to exercise the bit-accurate model andmeasure the delivered accuracy.

FIG. 137 shows the overall IDCT Architecture in a way that illustratesthe commonality between the upper and lower sections and which alsoshows the points at which intermediate results need to be stored. Thecircuit is time multiplexed to allow the upper and lower sections to becalculated separately.

B.9.7 The IDCT Transform Architecture

As described previously, the IDCT algorithm is optimized for anefficient architecture. The key features of the resulting architectureare as follows:

significant re-use of the costly arithmetic operations

small number of multipliers, all being constant coefficient rather thangeneral purpose (reduces multiplier size and removes need for separatecoefficient store)

small number of latches, no more than required for pipelining thearchitecture

operations are arranged so that only a single resolving operation isrequired per pipeline stage

can arrange to generate results in natural order

no complex crossbar switching or significant multiplexing (both costlyin a final implementation)

advantage is taken of resolved results in order to remove two carry-saveoperations (one addition, one subtraction)

architecture allows each stage to take 4 clock cycles, i.e., removes therequirement for very fast (large) arithmetic operations

architecture will support much faster operation than current 30 MHzpixel-clock operation by simply changing resolving operations fromsmall/slow ripple carry to larger/faster carry-lookahead versions. Theresolving operations require the largest proportion of the time requiredin each stage so speeding up only these operations has a significanteffect on the overall operations speed, whilst having only a relativelysmall increase on the overall size of the transform. Further increasesin speed can also be achieved by increasing the depth of pipelining.

control of the transform data-flow is very straightforward and efficient

The diagram of the 1D Transform Micro-Architecture (FIG. 141)illustrates how the algorithm is mapped onto a small set of hardwareresources and then pipelined to allow the necessary performanceconstraints to be met. The control of this architecture is achieved bymatching a "control shift-register" to the data-flow pipeline. Thiscontrol is straightforward to design and is efficient in silicon layout.

The named control signals on FIG. 141 (latch,sel₋₋ byp etc.) are thevarious enable signals used to control the latches and, thus, the signalflow. The clock signals to the latches are not shown.

Several implementation details are significant in terms of allowing thetransform architecture to meet the required accuracy standards whilstminimizing the transform size. The techniques used generally fall intotwo major classes.

Retention of maximum dynamic range, with a fixed word width, at eachintermediate state by individual control of the fixed-point position.

Making use of statistical definition of the accuracy requirement inorder to achieve accuracy by selective manipulation of arithmeticoperations (rather than increasing accuracy by simply increasing theword width of the entire transform)

The straightforward way to design a transform would involve a simplefixed-point implementation with a fixed word-width made large enough toachieve accuracy. Unfortunately, this approach results in much largerword widths and, therefore, a larger transform. The approach used in thepresent invention allows the fixed point position to vary throughout thetransform in a manner that makes the maximum use of the availabledynamic range for any particular intermediate value, achieving themaximum possible accuracy.

Because the allowable results are specified statistically, selectiveadjustments can be made to any intermediate value truncation operationin order to improve overall accuracy. The adjustments chosen are simplemanipulations of LSB calculations, which have little or no cost. Thealternative to this technique is to increase the word width, involvingsignificant cost. The adjustments effectively "weight" final results ina given direction, if it is found that previously, these results tend inthe opposite direction. By adjusting the fractional parts of results, weare effectively shifting the overall average of these results.

B.9.8 IDCT Block Diagram Description

The block diagram of the IDCT shows all the blocks that are relevant tothe processing of the Token Stream. This diagram, FIG. 138, does notshow details of clocking, test and microprocessor access and the eventmechanism. Snooper blocks, used to provide test access, are not shown inthe diagram.

B.9.8.1 DATA Error Checker

The first block is the DATA error checker and corrector, called"decheck" which takes and produces a 12-bit wide Token Stream, parsesthis stream and checks the DATA Tokens. All other Tokens are ignored andare passed straight through. The checks that are performed are for DATATokens with a number of extensions not equal to 64. The possible errorsare termed "deficient" (<64 extensions) an idct₋₋ too₋₋ few₋₋ event, and"supernumerary" (>64 extensions), an idct₋₋ too₋₋ many₋₋ event. Sucherrors are signalled with the standard event mechanism, but the blockalso attempts simple error recovery by manipulation of the Token Stream.In the case of deficient errors, the DATA Token is packed with "0" valueextensions (stops accepting input and performs insert) to make up thecorrect 64 extensions. In the case of a supernumerary error, theextension bit is forced to "0" for the 64th extension and all extraextensions are removed from the Token Stream.

B.9.8.2 Inverse Zig-Zag

The next block on the Spatial Decoder in FIG. 138 is the inverse zig-zagRAM 441, "izz", and again it takes and produces a 12-bit wide TokenStream. As with all other blocks, the stream is parsed, but only DATATokens are recognized. All other Tokens are passed through unchanged.DATA Tokens are also passed through, but the order of the extensions ischanged. This block relies on correct DATA Tokens (i.e., 64 extensionsonly). If this is not true, then operation is unspecified. Thereordering is done according to the standard inverse Zig-Zag patternand, by default, is done so as to provide horizontally scanned data atthe IDCT output. It is also possible to change the ordering to providevertically scanned output. In addition to the standard IZZ ordering,this block performs an extra re-ordering of each 8-word row. This isdone because of the specific requirements of the IDCT one-dimensionaltransform block and results in rows being output in the order(1,3,5,7,0,2,4,6) rather than (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7).

B.9.8.3 Input Formatter

The next block in FIG. 138 is the input formatter 442, "ip₋₋ fmt", whichformats DATA input for the first dimension of the IDCT transform. Thisblock has a 12-bit wide Token Stream input and 22-bit wide token Streamoutput. DATA Tokens are shifted left so as to move the integer part tothe correct significance in the IDCT transform standard 22-bit wideword, the fractional part being set to 0. This means that there are 10bits of fraction at this point. All other Tokens are unshifted and theextra unused bits are simply set to 0.

B.9.8.4 1-Dimensional Transform--1st Dimension

The next block shown in FIG. 138 is the first single dimension IDCTtransform block 443, "oned". This inputs and outputs 22-bit wide tokenStreams and, as usual, the stream is parsed and DATA Tokens arerecognized. All other tokens are passed through unaltered. The DATATokens pass through a pipelined datapath that performs an implementationof a single dimension of an 8-by-8 Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform. Atthe output of the first dimension, there are 7 bits of fraction in thedata word. All other Tokens run through a merely shift register datapaththat simply matches the DATA transform latency and are recombined intothe Token Stream before output.

B.9.8.5 Transpose RAM

The transpose RAM 444 "tram", is similar in many ways to the inversezig-zag RAM 441 in the way it handles a Token Stream. The width ofTokens handled (22 bits) and the re-ordering performed are different,but otherwise they work in the same way and actually share much of theircontrol logic. Again, rows are additionally re-ordered for therequirements of the following IDCT dimension as well as the fundamentalswapping of columns into rows.

B.9.8.6 1-Dimensional Transform--2nd Dimension

The next block shown is another instance of a single dimension IDCTtransform and is identical in every way to the first dimension. At theoutput of this dimension there are 4 bits of fraction.

B.9.8.7 Round and Saturate

The round-and-saturate block 446 in FIG. 138, "ras", takes a 22-bit wideToken Stream containing DATA extensions in 22-bit fixed point format andoutputs a 9-bit wide Token Stream where DATA extensions have beenrounded (towards +ve infinity) into integers and saturated into 9-bittwo's complement representation and all other Tokens have been passedstraight through.

B.9.9 Hardware Descriptions of Blocks

B.9.9.1 Standard Block Structure

For all the blocks that handle a Token Stream there is a standardnotional structure as shown in FIG. 139. This separates the two-wireinterface latches from the section that performs manipulation of theToken Stream. Variations on this structure can include extra internalblocks (such as a RAM core). In some blocks shown, the structure is madeless obvious in the schematic (although it does actually still exist)because of the requirement of grouping together all the "datapath" logicand separate this from all the standard cell logic. In the case of avery simple block, such as "ras", it is possible to take the latchedout₋₋ accept straight into the input two-wire latch without logicalmanipulation.

B.9.9.2 "Decheck"--DATA Error Checking/Recovery

The first block 440 in the Token Stream performs DATA checking andcorrecting as specified in the Block Diagram Overview section. Thedetected errors are handled with the standard event mechanism whichmeans that events can be masked and the block can either continue withthe recovery procedure when an error is detected or be stopped dependingon event mask status. The IDCT should never see incorrect DATA Tokensand, therefore, the recovery that it attempted is only a fairly simpleattempt to contain what may be a serious problem.

This block has a pipeline depth of two stages and is implementedentirely in zcells. The input two-wire interface latch is of the "front"type, meaning that all inputs arrive onto transistor gates to allow safeoperation when this block (at the front of the IDCT) is on a separatepower supply regime from the one preceding it. This block works byparsing a Token Stream and passing non-DATA Tokens straight through.When a DATA Token is found, a count is started of the number ofextensions found after the header. If the extension bit is found to be"0" when the count does not equal 63, an error signal is generated(which goes to the event logic) and depending on the state of the maskbit for that event, "decheck" will either be stopped (i.e., no longeraccept input or generate output) or will begin error recovery. Therecovery mechanism for "deficient" errors uses the counter to controlthe insertion of the correct number of extensions into the Token Stream(the value inserted is always "0"). Obviously, input is not acceptedwhilst this insertion proceeds. When it is found that the extension bitis not "0" on the 64th extension, a "supernumerary" error is generated,the DATA Token is completed by forcing the extension bit to "0", and allsucceeding words with the extension bit set to "1" are deleted from theToken Stream by continuing to accept data but invalidating the output.

Note that the two error signals are not persistent (unless the block isstopped) i.e., the error signal only remains active from the point whenan error is detected until recovery is complete. This is a minimum ofone complete cycle and can persist forever in the case of a infinitelysupernumerary DATA Token.

B.9.9.3 "Izz" and "tram"--Reordering RAMs

The "izz" 441 (inverse zig-zag RAM) and the "tram" 444 (transpose RAM)are considered here together since they both perform a variation on thesame function and they have more similarities than differences. Boththese blocks take a Token Stream and re-order the extensions of a DATAToken whilst passing through all other Tokens unchanged. The widths ofthe extensions handled and the sequences of the re-ordering aredifferent, but a large section of the control logic for each RAM isidentical and is actually organized into a "common control" block whichis instanced in the schematic for each RAM. The difference in width hasno effect upon this control section so it is only necessary to use adifferent "sequence address generator" for each RAM together with RAMcores and two-wire interface blocks of the appropriate width.

The overall behavior of each RAM is essentially that of a FIFO. This isstrictly true at the Token level and a particular modification to theoutput order is made for the extension words of a DATA Token. The depthof the FIFO is 128 stages. This is necessary to fulfill the requirementfor a sustainable 30 MHz throughout the system since output of the FIFOis held up after the start of the output of a DATA Token is detected.This is because the features of the reordering sequences used requirethat a complete block of 64 extensions be gathered in the FIFO beforere-ordered output can begin. More precisely, the minimum number requiredis different for inverse zig-zag and transpose sequences and is somewhatless than 64 in both cases. However, the complications of controlling aFIFO which has a length which is not a power of two, means that thesmall saving in RAM core would be outweighed by the additionalcomplexity of control logic required.

The RAM core is implemented with a design which allows a read and awrite (to the same or separate addresses) in a single 30 MHz cycle. Thismeans that the RAM is effectively operating with an internal 60 MHzcycle time.

The re-ordering operation is performed by generating a particularsequence of read addresses ("sequence address generation") in the range0→63, but not in natural order. The sequences required are specified bythe standard zig-zag sequence (for eight horizontal or verticalscanning) or by the sequence needed for normal matrix transposition.These standard sequences are then further reordered by the requirementto output each row in Odd/Even format (i.e. 1,3,5,7,0,2,4,6) rather than(0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7)) because of the requirements of the IDCT transform1-dimensional blocks.

Transpose address sequence generation is quite straightforwardalgorithmically. Straight transpose sequence generation simply requiresthe generation of row and column addresses separately, both implementedwith counters. The row re-ordering requirement simply means that rowaddresses are generated with a simple specific state machine rather thana natural counter.

Inverse zig-zag sequences are rather less straightforward to generatealgorithmically. Because of this fact, a small ROM is used to hold theentire 64 6 bit values of address, this being addressed with row andcolumn counters which can be swapped in order to change betweenhorizontal and vertical scan modes. A ROM based generator is very quickto design and it further has the advantage that it is trivial toimplement a forward zig-zag (ROM re-program) or to add other alternativesequences in the future.

B.9.9.4 "Oned"--Single Dimension IDCT Transform

This block has a pipeline depth of 20 stages and the pipeline is rigidwhen stalled. This rigidity greatly simplifies the design and should notunduly affect overall dynamics since the pipeline depth is not thatgreat and both dimensions come after a RAM which provides a certainamount of buffering.

The block follows the standard structure, but has separate pathsinternally for DATA Token extensions (which are to be processed) and allother items which should be passed through unchanged. Note that theschematic is drawn in a particular way. First, because of therequirements to group together all the datapath logic and second, toallow automatic compiled code generation (this explains the controllogic at the top level).

Tokens are parsed as normal and then DATA extensions, and other values,are routed respectively through two different parallel paths beforebeing re-combined with a multiplexer before the output two-wireinterface latch block. The parallel paths are required because it is notpossible to pass values unchanged through the transform datapath. Thelatency of the transform datapath is matched with a simple shiftregister to handle the remainder of the Token Stream.

The control section of "oned" needs to parse the Token Stream andcontrol the splitting and re-combination of the Tokens. The other majorsection controls the transform datapath. The main mechanism for thecontrol of this datapath is a control shift-register which matches thedatapath pipeline and is tapped-off to provide the necessary controlsignals for each stage of the datapath pipeline.

The "oned" block has the requirement that it can only start operation oncomplete rows of DATA extensions, i.e., groups of 8. It is not able tohandle invalid data ("Gaps") in the middle of rows, although, in fact,the operation of "izz" and the "tram" ensure that complete DATA blocksare output as an uninterrupted sequence of 64 valid extension values.

B.9.9.4.1 Transform Datapath

The micro-architecture of the transform datapath, "t₋₋ dp" waspreviously shown in FIG. 141. Note that some detail (e.g., clocking,shifts, etc.) is not shown. This diagram does illustrate, however, howthe datapath operates on four values simultaneously at any stage in thepipeline. The basic sub-Structure of the datapath, i.e., the three mainsections can also be seen (e.g., pre-common, common and post-common) ascan the arithmetic and latch resources required. The named controlsignals are the enables for the pipeline latches (and the add/subselector) which are sequenced with decodes of the control shift-registerstate. Note that each pipeline stage is actually four clock cycles inlength.

Within the transform datapath there are a number of latch stages whichare required to gather input, store intermediate results in thepipeline, and serialize the output. Some of latches are of the muxingtype, i.e., they can be conditionally loaded from more than one source.All the latches are of the enabled type, i.e., there are separate clockand enable inputs. This means that it is easy to generate enable signalswith the correct timing, rather than having to consider issues of skewthat would arise if a generated clock scheme was adopted.

The main arithmetic elements required are as follows.

a number of fixed coefficient multipliers (carry-save output)

carry-save adders

carry-save subtractors

resolving adders

resolving adder/subtractors

All arithmetic is performed in two's complement representation. This caneither be in normal (resolved) form or in carry-save form (i.e., twonumbers whose sum represents the actual value). All numbers are resolvedbefore storage and only one resolving operation is performed perpipeline stage since this is the most expensive operation in terms oftime. The resolving operations performed here all use simpleripple-carry. This means that the resolvers are quite small, butrelatively slow. Since the resolutions dominate the total time in eachstage, there is obviously an opportunity to speed up the entiretransform by employing fast resolving arithmetic units.

B.9.9.5 "Ras"--Rounding and Saturation

In the present invention, the "ras" block has the task of taking 22-bitfixed point numbers from the output of the second dimension "oned" andturning these into the correctly rounded and saturated 9-bit signedinteger results required. This block also performs the necessarydivide-by-4 inherent in the scheme (the 2/N term) and to furtherdivide-by-2 required to compensate for the √2 pre-scaling performed ineach of the two dimensions. This division by 8 implies that the fixedpoint position is interpreted as being three bits further left thananticipated, i.e., treat the result as having 15 bits of integerrepresentation and 7 bits of fraction (rather than 4 bits of fraction).The rounding mode implemented is "round to positive infinity", i.e., addone for fractions of exactly 0.5. This is primarily done because it isthe simplest rounding mode to implement. After rounding (a conditionalincrement of the integer part) is complete, this result is inspected tosee whether the 9-bit signed result requires saturation to the maximumor minimum value in this range. This is done by inspection of theincrement carry out together with the upper bits of the original integervalue.

As usual, the Token Stream is parsed and the round and saturationoperation is only applied to DATA Token extension values. The block hasa pipeline depth of two stages and is implemented entirely in zcells.

B.9.9.6 "Idctsels"--IDCT Register Select Decoder

This block is a simple decoder which decodes the 4 microprocessorinterface address lines, and the "sel₋₋ test" input, into select linesfor individual blocks test access (snoopers and RAMs). The blockconsists only of zcells combinatorial logic. The selects decoded areshown in Table B.9.2.

                  TABLE B.9.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        IDCT Test Address Space                                                       Addr.       Bit                                                               (hex)       num.      Register Name                                           ______________________________________                                        0x0         7..1      not used                                                            0         TRAM keyhole address                                    0x1         7..0                                                              0x2         7..0      TRAM keyhole data                                       0x3         7..0      TRAM keyhole data.sup.a                                 0x4         7..0      IZZ keyhole address                                     0x5         7..0      IZZ keyhole data                                        0x6         7..3      not used                                                            2         ipfsnoop test select                                                1         ipfsnoop valid                                                      0         ipfsnoop accept                                         0x7         7..6      not used                                                            5..0      ipfsnoop bits 21:16!                                    0x8         7..0      ipfsnoop bits 15:8!                                     0x9         7..0      ipfsnoop bits 7:0!                                      0xA         7..3      not used                                                            2         d2snoop test select                                                 1         d2snoop valid                                                       0         d2snoop accept                                          0xB         7..6      not used                                                            5..0      d2snoop bits 21:16!                                     0xC         7..0      d2snoop bits 15:8!                                      0xD         7..0      d2snoop bits 7:0!                                       0xE         7         outsnoop test select                                                6         outsnoop valid                                                      5         outsnoop accept                                                     4..2      not used                                                0xE         1..0      outsnoop data 9:8!                                      0xF         7..0      outsnoop data 7:0!                                      ______________________________________                                         .sup.a Repeated address                                                  

B.9.9.7 "Idetregs"--IDCT Control Register and Events

This block of the invention contains instances of the standard eventlogic blocks to handle the DATA deficient and supernumerary errors andalso a single memory mapped bit "vscan" which can be used to make the"izz" re-ordering change such that the IDCT output is verticallyscanned. This bit is reset to the value "0", i.e., the default mode ishorizontally scanned output. The two possible events are OR-ed togetherto form an idctevent signal which can be used as an interrupt. SeeSection B.9.10 for the addresses and bit positions of registers andevents.

B.9.9.8 Clock Generators

Two "standard" type ("clkgen") clock generators are used in the IDCT.This is done so that there can be two separate scan-paths. The clockgenerators are called "idctcga" and "idctcgb". Functionally, the onlydifference is that "idctcgb" does not need to generate the "notrst1"signal. The amounts of buffering for each of the clock and reset outputsin the two clock generators is individually tailored to the actual loadsdriven by each clock or reset. The loads that are matched were actuallymeasured from the gate and track capacitances of the final layout.

When the IDCT top-level Block Place and Route (BPR) was performed,advantage was taken of the capabilities of the interactive globalrouting feature to increase the widths of tracks of the first sectionsof the clock distribution trees for the more heavily loaded clocks(ph0₋₋ b and ph1₋₋ b) since these tracks will carry significantcurrents.

B.9.9.9 JTAG Control Blocks

Since the IDCT has two separate scan-chains, and two clock generators,there are two instances of the standard JTAG control block, "jspctle".These interface between the test port and the two scan-paths.

B.9.10 Event and Control Registers

The IDCT can generate two events and has a single bit of control. Thetwo events are idct₋₋ too₋₋ few₋₋ event and idct₋₋ too₋₋ many₋₋ eventwhich can be generated by the "decheck" block at the front of the IDCTif incorrect DATA Tokens are detected. The single control bit is "vscan"which is set if it is required to operate the IDCT with the outputvertically scanned. This bit, therefore, controls the "izz" block. Allthe event logic and the memory mapped control bit are located in theblock "idctregs".

From the point of view of the IDCT, these registers are located in thefollowing locations. The tristate i/o wires n₋₋ derrd and n-serrd areused to read and write to these locations as appropriate.

                  TABLE B.9.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        IDCT Control Register Address Space                                           Addr.     Bit                                                                 (hex)     num.            Register Name                                       ______________________________________                                        0x0       7..1            not used                                                      0               vscan                                               ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE B.9.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        IDCT Event Address Space                                                      Addr.       Bit                                                               (hex)       name       Register Name                                          ______________________________________                                        0x0         n.sub.-- derrd                                                                           idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- few.sub.-- event                            n.sub.-- serrd                                                                           idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- many.sub.-- event               0x1         n.sub.-- derrd                                                                           idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- few.sub.-- mask                             n.sub.-- serrd                                                                           idct.sub.-- too.sub.-- many.sub.-- mask                ______________________________________                                    

B.9.11 Implementation Issues

B.9.11.1 Logic Design Approach

In the design of all the IDCT blocks, in accordance with the invention,there was an attempt to use a unified and simple logic design strategywhich would mean that it was possible to do a "safe" design in a quickand straightforward manner. For the majority of control logic, a simplescheme of using master-slaves only was adopted. Asynchronous set/resetinputs were only connected to the correct system resets. Although itmight often be possible to come up with clever non-standard circuitconfigurations to perform the same functions more efficiently, thisscheme possesses the following advantages.

conceptually simple

easy to design

speed of operation is fairly obvious (cf. latch→logic→latch>logic styledesign) and amenable to automatic analysis

glitches not a problem (cf. SR latches)

using only system reset for initialization allows scan paths to workcorrectly

allows automatic complied C-code generation

There are a number of places where transparent d-type latches were usedand these are listed below.

B.9.11.1.1 two-wire interface latches

The standard block structure uses latches for the input and outputtwo-wire interfaces. No logic exists between an output two-wire latchand the following input two-wire latch.

B.9.11.1.2 ROM interface

Because of the timing requirements of the ROM circuit, latches are usedin the IZZ sequence generator at the output of the ROM.

B.9.11.1.3 Transform Datapath and Control Shift-Resister

It is possible to implement every pipeline storage stage as a fullmaster-slave device, but because of the amount of storage required thereis a significant savings to be had by using latches. However, thisscheme requires the user to consider several factors.

control shift-register must now produce control signals of both phasesfor use as enables (i.e., need to use latches in this shift-register)

timing analysis complicated by use of latches

the "t₋₋ postc" will no longer automatically produce compiled code sinceone latch outputs to another latch of the same phase (because of thetiming of the enables this is not a problem for the circuit)

Nonetheless, the area saved by the use of latches makes it worthwhile toaccept these factors in the present invention.

B.9.11.1.4 Microprocessor interfaces

Due to the nature of this interface, there is a requirement for latches(and resynchronizers) in the Event and register block "idctregs" and inthe keyhole logic for RAM cores.

B.9.11.1.5 JTAG Test Control

These standard blocks make use of latches.

B.9.11.2 Circuit Design Issues

Apart from the work done in the design of the library cells that wereused in the IDCT design (standard cells, datapath library, RAMs, ROMs,etc.) there is no requirement for any transistor level circuit design inthe IDCT. Circuit simulations (using Hspice) were performed of some ofthe known critical paths in the transform datapath and Hspice was alsoused to verify the results of the Critical Path Analysis (CPA) tool inthe case of paths that were close to the allowed maximum length.

Note that the IDCT is fully static in normal operation (i.e., we canstop the system clocks indefinitely) but there are dynamic nodes inscanable latches which will decay when test clocks are stopped (or veryslow). Due to the non-restored nature of some nodes which exhibit a Vtdrop (e.g., mux outputs) the IDCT will not be "micro-power" when static.

B.9.11.3 Layout Approach

The overall approach to the layout implementation of the presentinvention was to use BPR (some manual intervention) to lay out acomplete IDCT which consisted of many zcells and a small number of macroblocks. These macro blocks were either hand-edited layout (e.g., RAMs,ROM, clock generators, datapaths) or, in the case of the "oned" block,had been built using BPR from further zcells and datapaths.

Datapaths were constructed from kdplib cells. Additionally, locallydefined layout variations of kdplib cells were defined and used wherethis was perceived as providing a worthwhile size benefit. The datapathused in each of the "oned" blocks, "oned₋₋ d", is by far the largestsingle element in the design and considerable effort was put intooptimizing the size (height) of this datapath.

The organization of the transform datapath, "t₋₋ dp", is rather crucialsince the precise ordering of the elements within the datapath willaffect the way the interconnect is handled. It is important to minimizethe number of "overs" (vertical wires not connecting to a sub-block)which occur at the most congested point since there is a maximum allowedvalue (ideally 8, 10 is also possible, although highly inconvenient).The datapath is split logically into three major sub-sections and thisis the way that the datapath layout was performed. In each subsection,there are really four parallel data flows (which are combined at variouspoints) and there are, therefore, many ways of organizing the flows ofdata (and, thus, the positions of all the elements) within eachsubsection. The ordering of the blocks within each subsection, and alsothe allocation of logical buses to physical bus pitches was worked outcarefully before layout commenced in order to make it possible toachieve a layout that could be connected correctly.

B.9.12 Verification

The verification of the IDCT was done at a number of levels, fromtop-level verification of the algorithms to final layout checks.

The initial work on the transform architecture was done in C, bothfull-precision and bit-accurate integer models were developed. Varioustests were performed on the bit-accurate model in order to prove theconformance to the H.261 accuracy specification and to measure thedynamic ranges of the calculations within the transform architecture.

The design progressed in many cases by writing an M behavioraldescription of sub-blocks (for example, the control of datapaths andRAMs). Such descriptions were simulated in Lsim before moving onto thedesign of the schematic description of that block. In some cases (e.g.,RAMs, clock generators) the behavioral descriptions were still used fortop-level simulations.

The strategy for performing logic simulation was to simulate theschematics for everything that would simulate adequately at that level.The low-level library cells (i.e., zcells and kdplib) were mainlysimulated using their behavioral descriptions since this results in farsmaller and quicker simulations. Additionally, the behavioral librarycells provide timing check features which can highlight some circuitconfiguration problems. As a confidence check, some simulations wereperformed using the transistor descriptions of the library cells. Allthe logic simulations were in the zero-delay manner and, therefore, wereintended to verify functional performance. The verification of the realtiming behavior is done with other techniques.

Lsim switch-level simulations (with RC₋₋ Timing mode being used) weredone as a partial verification of timing performance, but also providechecks for some other potential transistor level problems (e.g., glitchsensitive circuits).

The main verification technique for checking timing problems was the useof the CPA tool, the "path" option for "datechk". This was used toidentify the longer signal paths (some were already known) and Hspicewas used to verify the CPA analysis in some critical cases.

Most Lsim simulations were performed with the standard source→block→sinkmethodology since the bulk of the IDCT behavior is exercised by the flowof Tokens through the device. Additional simulations are also necessaryto test the features accessed through the microprocessor interface(configuration, event and test logic) and those test features accessedvia JTAG/scan.

Compiled-code simulations can be readily accomplished by one of ordinaryskill in the art for entire IDCT, again using the standardsource→bloc→sink method and many of the same Token Streams that wereused in the Lsim verification.

B.9.13 Testing and Test Support

This section deals with the mechanisms which are provided for testingand an analysis of how each of the blocks might be tested.

The three mechanisms provided for test access are as follows:

microprocessor access to RAM cores

microprocessor access to snooper blocks

scan path access to control and datapath logic

There are two "snooper" blocks and one "super snooper" block in theIDCT. FIG. 140 shows the positions of the snooper blocks and the othermicroprocessor test access.

Using these, and the two RAM blocks, it is possible to isolate each ofthe major blocks for the purpose of testing their behavior in relationto the Token flow. Using microprocessor access, it is possible tocontrol the Token inputs to any block and then to observe the Token portoutput of that block in isolation. Furthermore, there are two separatescan paths which run through (almost) all of the flip-flops and latchesin the control sections of each block and also some of the datapathlatches in the case of the "oned" transform datapath pipeline. The twoscan paths are denoted "a" and "b", the former running from the"decheck" block to the "ip₋₋ fmt" block and the latter from the first"oned" block to the "ras" block.

Access to snoopers is possible by accessing the appropriate memorymapped locations in the normal manner. The same is true of the RAM cores(using the "ramtest" input as appropriate). The scan paths are accessedthrough the JTAG port in the normal way.

Each of the blocks is now discussed with reference to the various testissues.

B.9.13.1 "Decheck"

This block has the standard structure (see FIG. 139) where two latchesfor the input and output two-wire interfaces surround a processingblock. As usual, no scan is provided to the two-wire latches since thesesimply pass on data whenever enabled and have no depth of logic to betested. In this block, the "control" section consists of a 1-stagepipeline of zcells which are all on scanpath "a". The logic in thecontrol section is relatively simple, the most complex path is probablyin the generation of the DATA extension count where a 6-bit incrementeris used.

B.9.13.2 "Izz"

This block is a variant of the standard structure and includes a RAMcore block added to the two-wire interface latches and the controlsection. The control section is implemented with zcells and a small ROMused for address sequence generation. All the zcells are on scanpath "a"and there is access to the ROM address and data via zcell latches. Thereis also further logic, e.g., for the generation of numbers plus theability to increment or decrement. In addition, there is a 7-bit fulladder used for read address generation. The RAM core is accessiblethrough keyhole registers, via the microprocessor interface, see TableB.9.1.

B.9.13.3 "lp₋₋ fmt"

This block again has the standard structure. Control logic isimplemented with some rather simple zcell logic (all on scanpath "a")but the latching and shifting/muxing of the data is performed in adatapath with no direct access since the logic here is very shallow andsimple.

B.9.13.4 "Oned"

Again, this block follows the standard structure and divides into randomlogic and datapath sections. The zcell logic is relativelystraightforward, all the zcells are on scanpath "a". The control signalsfor the transform pipeline datapath are derived from a long shiftregister consisting of zcell latches which are on the scanpath.Additionally, some of the pipeline latches are on the scanpath, thisbeing done because there is a considerable depth of logic between somestages of the pipeline (e.g., multipliers and adders). The non-DATATokens are passed along a shift register, implemented as a datapath, andthere is no test access to any of the stages.

B.9.13.5 Tram'

This block is very similar to the "izz" block. In this case, however,there is no ROM used in the address sequence address generation. This isperformed algorithmically. All the zcell control states are on datapath"b".

B.9.13.6 Rras'

This block follows the standard structure and is entirely implementedwith zcells. The most complex logical function is the 8-bit incrementerused when rounding up. All other logic is fairly simple. All states arescanpath "b".

B.9.13.7 Other top-level blocks

There are several other blocks that appear at the top level of the IDCT.The snoopers are obviously part of the test access logic, as are theJTAG control blocks. There are also the two clock generators which donot have any special test access (although they support various testfeatures). The block "idctsels" is combinatorial zcell logic fordecoding microprocessor addresses and the block "idctregs" contains themicroprocessor accessible event and control bits associated with theIDCT.

SECTION B.10 Introduction

B.10.1 Overview of the Temporal Decoder

The internal structure of the Temporal Decoder, in accordance with theinvention, is shown in FIG. 142.

All data flow between the blocks of the chip (and much of the data flowwithin blocks) is controlled by means of the usual two-wire interfacesand each of the arrows in FIG. 142 represents a two-wire interface. Theincoming token stream passes through the input interface 450 whichsynchronizes the data from the external system clock to the internalclock derived from the phase-locked-loop (ph0/ph1). The token stream isthen split into two paths via a Top Fork 451; one stream passes to theAddress Generator 452 and the other to a 256 word FIFO 453. The FIFObuffers data while data from previous I or P frames is fetched from theDRAM and processed in the Prediction Filters 454 before being added tothe incoming error data from the Spatial Decoder in the Prediction Adder455 (P and B frames). During MPEG decoding, frame reordering data mustalso be fetched for I and P frames so that the output frames are in thecorrect order, the reordered data being inserted into the stream in theRead Rudder block 456.

The Address Generator 452 generates separate addresses for forward andbackward predictions, reorder, read and write-back, the data which iswritten back being split from the stream in the Write Rudder block 457.Finally, data is resynchronized to the external clock in the OutputInterface Block 458.

All the major blocks in the Temporal Decoder are connected to theinternal microprocessor interface (UPI) bus. This is derived from theexternal microprocessor interface (MPI) bus in the MicroprocessorInterface block 459. This block has address decodes for the variousblocks in the chip associated with it. Also associated with themicroprocessor interface is the event logic.

The rest of the logic of the Temporal Decoder is concerned primarilywith test. First, the IEE 1149.1 (JTAG) interface 460 provides aninterface to internal scan paths as well as to JTAG boundary-scanfeatures. Secondly, two-wire interface stages which allow intrusiveaccess to the data flow via the microprocessor interface while in testmode are included at strategic points in the pipeline architecture.

SECTION B.11 Clocking, Test and Related Issues

B.11.1 Clock Regimes

Before considering the individual functional blocks within the chip, itis helpful to have an appreciation of the clock regimes within the chipand the relationship between them.

During normal operation, most blocks of the chip run synchronously tothe signal pllsysclk from the phase-locked-loop (PLL) block. Theexception to this is the DRAM interface whose timing is governed by theneed to be synchronous to the iftime sub-block, which generates the DRAMcontrol signals (notwe, notoe, notcas, notras). The core of this blockis clocked by the two-phase non-overlapping clocks clk0 and clk1, whichare derived from the quadrature two-phase clocks supplied independentlyfrom the PLL cki0, cki1 and clkq0, ckq1.

Because the clk0, clk1 DRAM interface clocks are asynchronous to theclocks in the rest of the chip, measures have been taken to eliminatethe possibility of metastable behavior (as far as practically possible)at the interfaces between the DRAM interface and the rest of the chip.The synchronization occurs in two areas: in the output interfaces of theAddress Generator (addrgen/predread/psgsync, addrgen/ip₋₋ wrt2/sync18and addrger√ip₋₋ rd2/sync18) and in the blocks which control the"swinging" of the swing-buffer RAMs in the DRAM Interface (see sectionon the DRAM Interface). In each case, the synchronization process isachieved by means of three metastable-hard flip-flops in series. Itshould be noted that this means that clk0/clk1 are used in the outputstages of the Address Generator.

In addition to these completely asynchronous clock regimes, there are anumber of separate clock generators which generate two-phasenon-overlapping clocks (ph0, ph1) from pllsysclk. The Address Generator,Prediction Filters and DRAM Interface each have their own clockgenerators; the remainder of the chip is run off a common clockgenerator. The reasons for this are twofold. First, it reduces thecapacitive load on individual clock generators, allowing smaller clockdrivers and reduced clock routing widths. Second, each scan path iscontrolled by a clock generator, so increasing the number of clockgenerators allows shorter scan-paths to be used.

It is necessary to resynchronize signals which are driven across theseclock-regime boundaries because the minor skews between thenon-overlapping clocks derived from different clock generators couldmean that underlap occurred at the interfaces. Circuitry built into each"Snooper" block (see Section B.11.4) ensures that this does not occur,and Snooper blocks have been placed at the boundaries between all theclock regimes, excepting at the front of the Address Generator, wherethe resynchronization is performed in the Token Decode block.

B.11.2 Control of Clocks

Each standard clock generator generates a number of different clockswhich allow operation in normal mode and scan-test mode. The control ofclocks in scan-test mode is described in detail elsewhere, but it isworth noting that several of the clocks generated by a clock generator(tph0, tph1, tckm, tcks) do not usually appear to be joined to anyprimitive symbols on the schematics. This is because scan paths aregenerated automatically by a post-processor which correctly connectsthese clocks. From a functional point of view, the fact that thepost-processor has connected different clocks from those shown on theschematics can be ignored; the behavior is the same.

During normal operation, the master clocks can be derived in a number ofdifferent ways. Table B.11.1 indicates how various modes can be selecteddepending on the states of the pins pllselect and override.

                  TABLE B.11.1                                                    ______________________________________                                        Clock Control Modes                                                           pllselect                                                                           override                                                                              Mode                                                            ______________________________________                                        0     0       pllsysclk is connected directly to external sysclk,                           bypassing the PLL; DRAM Interface clocks (cki0,                               cki1, ckq0, ckq1) are controlled directly from the pins                       ti and tq.                                                      0     1       Override mode -- ph0 and ph1 clocks are controlled                            directly from pins tphoish and tph1ish; DRAM                                  Interface clocks (cki0, cki1, ckq0, ckq1) are controlled                      directly from the pins ti and tq.                               1     0       Normal operation. pllsysclk is the clock generated by                         the PLL; DRAM Interface clocks are generated by the                           PLL.                                                            1     1       External resistors connected to ti and tq are used                            instead of the internal resistors (debug only).                 ______________________________________                                    

B.11.3 The Two-wire Interface

The overall functionality of the two-wire interface is described indetail in the Technical Reference. However, the two-wire interface isused for all block-to-block communication within the Temporal Decoderand most blocks consist of a number of pipeline stages, all of which arethemselves two-wire interface stages. It is, therefore, essential tounderstand the internal implementation of the two-wire interface inorder to be able to interpret many of the schematics. In general, theseinternal pipeline stages are structured as shown in FIG. 143.

FIG. 143 shows a latch-logic-latch representation as this is theconfiguration which is normally used. However, when a number of stagesare put together, it is equally valid to think of a "stage" as beinglatch-latch-logic (for many engineers a more familiar model). The use ofthe latch-logic-latch configuration allows all inter-block communicationto be latch to latch, without any intervening logic in either thesending or receiving block.

Referring again to FIG. 143, a simple two-wire interface FIFO stage canbe constructed by removing the logic block, connecting the data andvalid signals directly between the latches and the latched in₋₋ validdirectly into the NOR gate on the input to the in₋₋ accept latch in thesame way as out₋₋ valid and out₋₋ accept are gated. Data and validsignals then propagate when the corresponding accept signal is high. ByORing in₋₋ valid with out₋₋ accept₋₋ reg in the manner shown, data willbe accepted if in₋₋ valid in low, even if out₋₋ accept₋₋ reg is low. Inthis way gaps (data with the valid bit low) are removed from thepipeline whenever a stall (accept signal low) occurs.

With the logic block inserted, as shown in FIG. 143, in₋₋ accept andout₋₋ valid may also be dependent on the data or the state of the block.In the configuration shown, it is standard for any state within theblock to be held in master-slave devices with the master enabled by ph1and the slave enabled by ph0.

B.11.4 Snooper Blocks

Snooper blocks enable access to the data stream at various points in thechip via the Microprocessor Interface. There are two types of snooperblocks. Ordinary Snoopers can only be accessed in test mode where theclocks can be controlled directly. "Super Snoopers" can be accessedwhile the clocks are running and contain circuitry which synchronizesthe asynchronous data from the Microprocessor bus to the internal chipclocks. Table B.11.2 lists the locations and types of all Snoopers inthe Temporal Decoder.

                  TABLE B.11.2                                                    ______________________________________                                        Snoopers in Temporal Decoder                                                  Location                Type                                                  ______________________________________                                        addrgen/vec.sub.-- pipe/snoopz31                                                                      Snooper                                               addrgen/cnt.sub.-- pipe/midsnp                                                                        Snooper                                               addrgen/cnt.sub.-- pipe/endsnp                                                                        Snooper                                               addrgen/predread/snoopz44                                                                             Snooper                                               addrgen/ip.sub.-- wrt2/superz10                                                                       Super Snooper                                         addrgen/ip.sub.-- rd2/superz10                                                                        Super Snooper                                         dramx/dramif/ifsnoops/snoopz15 (fsnp)                                                                 Snooper                                               dramx/dranif/ifsnoops/snoopz15 (bsnp)                                                                 Snooper                                               dranx/dramif/ifsnoops/superz9                                                                         Super Snooper                                         wrudder/superz9         Super Snooper                                         pflts/fwdflt/dimbuff/snoopk13                                                                         Snooper                                               pflts/bwdflt.dimbuff/snoopk13                                                                         Snooper                                               pflts/snoopz9           Snooper                                               ______________________________________                                    

Details on the use of both Snoopers are contained in the test section.Details of the operation of the JTAG interface are contained in the JTAGdocument.

SECTION B.12 Functional Blocks

B.12.1 Top Fork

The Top Fork, in accordance with the present invention, serves twodifferent functions. First, it forks the data stream into two separatestreams: one to the Address Generator and the other to the FIFO. Second,it provides the means of starting and stopping the chip so that the chipcan be configured.

The fork part aspect of the component is very simple. The same data ispresented to both the Address Generator and the FIFO, and has to havebeen accepted by both blocks before an accept is sent back to theprevious stage. Thus, the valids of the two branches of the fork aredependent on the accepts from the other branch. If the chip is in astopped state, the valids to both branches are held low.

The chip powers up in a state where in₋₋ accept is held low until theconfigure bit is set high. This ensures that no data is accepted untilthe user has configured the chip. If the user needs to configure thechip at any other time, he must set the configure bit and wait until thechip has finished the current stream. The stopping process is asfollows:

1) If the configure bit has been set, do not accept any more data aftera flush token has been detected by the Top Fork.

2) The chip will have finished processing the stream when the FLUSHToken reaches the Read Rudder. This causes the signal seq₋₋ done to gohigh.

3) When seq₋₋ done goes high, set an event bit which can be read by theMicroprocessor. The event signal can be masked by the Event block.

B.12.2 Address Generator

In the present invention, the address generator (addrgen) is responsiblefor counting the numbers of blocks within a frame, and for generatingthe correct sequence of addresses for DRAM data transfers. The addressgenerator's input is the token stream from the token input port (viatopfork), and its output to the DRAM interface consists of addresses andother information, controlled by a request/acknowledge protocol.

The principal sections of the address generator are:

token decode

block counting and generation of the DRAM block address

conversion of motion vector data into an address offset

request and address generator for prediction transfers

reorder read address generator

write address generator

B.12.2.1 Token Decode (tokdec)

In the Token Decoder, tokens associated with coding standards, frame andblock information and motion vectors are decoded. The informationextracted from the stream is stored in a set of registers which may alsobe accessed via the upi. The detection of a DATA token header issignalled to subsequent blocks to enable block counting and addressgeneration. Nothing happens when running JPEG.

List of tokens decoded:

CODING₋₋ STANDARD

DATA

DEFINE₋₋ MAX₋₋ SAMPLING

DEFINE₋₋ SAMPLING

HORIZONTAL₋₋ MBS

MVD₋₋ BACKWARDS

MVD₋₋ FORWARDS

PICTURE₋₋ START

PICTURE₋₋ TYPE

PREDICTION₋₋ MODE

This block also combines information from the request generators tocontrol the toggling of the frame pointers and to stall the inputstream. The stream is stalled when a new frame appears at the input (inthe form of a PICTURE₋₋ START token) but the writeback or reorder readassociated with the previous frame is incomplete.

B.12.2.2 Macroblock Counter (mblkcntr)

The macroblock counter of the present invention consists of four basiccounters which point to the horizontal and vertical position of themacroblock in the frame and to the horizontal and vertical position ofthe block within the macroblock. At the beginning of time, and on eachPICTURE₋₋ START, all counters are reset to zero. As DATA Token headersarrive, the counters increment and reset according to the colorcomponent number in the token header and the frame structure. This framestructure is described by the sampling registers in the token decoder.

For a given color component, the counting proceeds as follows. Thehorizontal block count is incremented on each new DATA Token of the samecomponent until it reaches the width of the macroblock, and then itresets. The vertical block count is incremented by this reset until itreaches the height of the macroblock, and then it resets. When thishappens, the next color component is expected. Hence, this sequence isrepeated for each of the components in the macroblock--the horizontaland vertical size of the macroblock, possibly being different for eachcomponent. If, for any component, fewer blocks are received than areexpected, the count will still proceed to the next component withouterror.

When the color component of the DATA Token is less than the expectedvalue, the horizontal macroblock count is incremented. (Note that thiswill also occur when more than the expected number of blocks appear fora given color component, as the counters will then be expecting a highercomponent index.) This horizontal count is reset when the count reachesthe picture width in macroblocks. This reset increments the verticalmacroblock count.

There is a further ability to count macroblocks in H.261 CIF format. Inthis case, there is an extra level hierarchy between macroblocks and thepicture called the group of blocks. This is eleven macroblocks wide andthree deep, and a picture is always two groups wide. The token decoderextracts the CIF bit from the PICTURE₋₋ TYPE token and passes this tothe macroblock counter to instruct it to count groups of blocks.Instances of too few or too many blocks per component will provokesimilar reactions as above.

B.12.2.3 Block Calculation (blkcalc)

The Block calculation converts the macroblock andblock-within-macroblock coordinates into coordinates for the block'sposition in the picture, i.e., it knocks out the level of hierarchy.This, of course, has to take into account the sampling ratios of thedifferent color components.

B.12.2.4 Base block Address (bsblkadr)

The information from the blkcalc, together with the color componentoffsets, is used to calculate the block address within the linear DRAMaddress space. Essentially, for a given color component, the linearblock address is the number of blocks down times the width of thepicture plus the number of blocks long. This is added to the colorcomponent offset to form the base block address.

B.12.2.5 Vector Offset (vec₋₋ pipe)

The motion vector information presented by the token decoder is in theform of horizontal and vertical pixel offset coordinates. That is, foreach of the forward and backward vectors there is an (x,y) which givesthe displacement in half-pixels from the block being formed to the blockfrom which it is being predicted. Note that these coordinates may bepositive or negative. They are first scaled according to the sampling ofeach color component, and used to form the block and new pixel offsetcoordinates.

In FIG. 145, the shaded area represents the block that is being formed.The dotted outline is the block from which it is being predicted. Thebig arrow shows the block offset--the horizontal and vertical vector tothe DRAM block that contains the prediction block's origin--in this case(1,4). The small arrow shows the new pixel offset--the position of theprediction block origin within that DRAM block. As the DRAM block is 8×8bytes, the pixel offset looks to be (7,2).

The multiplier array vmarrla then converts the block vector offset intoa linear vector offset. The pixel information is passed to theprediction request generator as an (x,y) coordinate (pix₋₋ info).

B.12.2.6 Prediction Requests

The frame pointer, base block address and vector offset are added toform the address of the block to be fetched from the DRAM (Inblkad3). Ifthe pixel offset is zero, only one request is generated. If there is anoffset in either the x OR y dimension, then two requests aregenerated--the original block address and the one either immediately tothe right or immediately below. With an offset in both x and y, fourrequests are generated.

Synchronization between the chip clock regime and the DRAM interfaceclock regime takes place between the first addition (Inblkad3) and thestate machine that generates the appropriate requests. Thus, the statemachine (psgstate) is clocked by the DRAM interface clocks, and itsscanned elements form part of the DRAM interface scan chain.

B.12.2.7 Reorder Read Requests and Write Requests

As there is no pixel offset involved here, each address is formed byadding the base block address to the relevant frame pointer. The reorderread uses the same frame store as the prediction and data is writtenback to the other frame store. Each block includes a short FIFO to storeaddresses as the transfer of read and write data is likely to lag theprediction transfer at the corresponding address. (This is because theread/write data interacts with stream further along the chip dataflowthan the prediction data). Each block also includes synchronizationbetween the chip clock and the DRAM interface clock.

B.12.2.8 Offsets

The DRAM is configured as two frame stores, each of which contains up tothree color components. The frame store pointers and the color componentoffsets within each frame must be programmed via the upi.

B.12.2.9 Snoopers

In the present invention, snoopers are positioned as follows:

Between blkcalc and bsblkadr--this interface comprises the horizontaland vertical block coordinates, the appropriate color component offsetand the width of the picture in blocks (for that component).

After bsblkadr--the base block address.

After vec₋₋ pipe--the linear block offset, the pixel offset within theblock, together with information on the prediction mode, color componentand H.261 operation.

After Inblkad3--the physical block address, as described under"Prediction Requests".

Super snoopers are located in the reorder read and write requestgenerators for use during testing of the external DRAM. See the DRAMInterface section for all the details.

B.12.2.10 Scan

The addrgen block has its own scan chain, the clocking of which iscontrolled by the block's own clock generator (adclkgen). Note that therequest generators at the back end of the block fall within the DRAMinterface clock regime.

B.12.3 **Prediction Filters

The overall structure of the Prediction Filters, in accordance with thepresent invention, is shown in FIG. 146. The forward and backwardfilters are identical and filter the MPEG forward and backwardprediction blocks. Only the forward filter is used in H.261 mode (theh261₋₋ on input of the backward filter should be permanently low becauseH.261 streams do not contain backward predictions). The entirePrediction Filters block is composed of pipelines of two-wire interfacestages.

B.12.3.1 A Prediction Filter

Each Prediction Filter acts completely independently of the other,processing data as soon as valid data appears at its input. It can beseen from FIG. 147 that a Prediction Filter consists of four separateblocks, two of which are identical. It is best if the operation of theseblocks is described independently for MPEG and H.261 operation. H.261being the more complex, is described first.

B.12.3.1.1 H.261 Operation

The one-dimensional filter equation used is as follows: ##EQU11##

This is applied to each row of the 8×8 block by the x Prediction Filterand to each column by the y Prediction Filter. The mechanism by whichthis is achieved is illustrated in FIG. 148, which is basically arepresentation of the pfltldd schematic. The filter consists of threetwo-wire interface pipeline stages. For the first and last pixels in arow, registers A and C are reset and the data passes unaltered throughregisters B, D and F (the contents of B and D being added to zero). Thecontrol of Bx2mux is set so that the output of register B is shiftedleft by one. This shifting is in addition to the one place which it isalways shifted in any event. Thus, all values are multiplied by 4 (moreof this later). For all other pixels, x_(i+1) is loaded into register C,x_(i) into register B and x_(i-1) into register A. It can be seen fromFIG. 148 that the H.261 filter equation is then implemented. Becausevertical filtering is performed in horizontal groups of three (see noteson the Dimension Buffer, below) there is no need to treat the first andlast pixels in a row differently. The control and the counting of thepixels within a row is performed by the control logic associated witheach 1-D filter. It should be noted that the result has not been dividedby 4. Division by 16 (shift right by 4) is performed at the input of thePrediction Filters Adder (Section B.12.4.2) after both horizontal andvertical filtering has been performed, so that arithmetic accuracy isnot lost. Registers DA, DD and DF pass control information down thepipeline. This includes h261₋₋ on and last₋₋ byte.

Of the other blocks found in the Prediction Filter, the function of theFormatter is merely to ensure that data is presented to the x-filter inthe correct order. It can be seen above that this merely requires athree-stage shift register, the first stage being connected to the inputof register C, the second to register B and the third to register A.

Between the x and y filters, the Dimension Buffer buffers data so thatgroups of three vertical pixels are presented to the y-filter. Thesegroups of three are still processed horizontally, however, so that notransposition occurs within the Prediction Filters. Referring to FIG.149, the sequence in which pixels are output from the Dimension Bufferis illustrated in Table B.12.1.

                  TABLE B.12.1                                                    ______________________________________                                        H.261 Dimension Buffer Sequence                                               Clock                                                                              Input Pixel                                                                             Output Pixel                                                                            Clock                                                                              Input Pixel                                                                           Output Pixel                            ______________________________________                                        1    0             55 a! 17   16      7                                       2    1         56        18   17      F (0, 8, 16)  b!                        3    2         57        19   18      F (1, 9, 17)                            4    3         58        20   19      F (2, 10, 18)                           5    4         59        21   20      F (3, 11, 19)                           6    5         60        22   21      F (4, 12, 20)                           7    5         61        23   22      F (5, 13, 21)                           8    7         62        24   23      F (6, 14, 22)                           9    8         63        25   24      F (7, 15, 23)                           10   9          0        26   25      F (8, 16, 24)                           11   10         1        27   26      F (9, 17, 25)                           12   11         2        28   27      F (10, 18, 26)                          13   12         3        29   2B      F (11, 19, 27)                          14   13         4        30   29      F (12, 20, 28)                          15   14         5        31   30      F (12, 20, 28)                          16   15         6        32   31      F (14, 22, 30)                          ______________________________________                                          a! Least row of pixels from previous block or invalid data if there was      no previous block (or if there was a long gap between blocks.)                 b! F(x) indicates the function in H.261 filter equation.                

B.12.3.1.2 MPEG Operation

During MPEG operation, a Prediction Filter performs a simple half pelinterpolation: ##EQU12##

This is the default filter operation unless the h261₋₋ on input is low.If the signal dim into a 1-D filter is low then integer pelinterpolation will be performed. Accordingly, if h261₋₋ on is low andxdim and ydim are low, all pixels are passed straight through withoutfiltering. It is an obvious requirement that when the dim signal into a1-D filter is high, the rows (or columns) will be 8 pixels wide (orhigh). This is summarized in Table B.12.2. Referring to FIG. 148, "1-DPrediction Filter,", the operation of the 1-D filter is the same forMPEG inter pel as it is for the first and last pixels in a row in H.261.For MPEG half-pel operation, register A is permanently reset and theoutput of register C is shifted left by 1 (the output of register B isalways shifted left by 1 anyway). Thus, after a couple of clocksregister F contains (2B+2C), four times the required result, but this istaken care of at the input of the Prediction Filters Adder, where thenumber, having passed through both x and y filters, is shifted right by4.

                  TABLE B.12.1                                                    ______________________________________                                        1-D Filter Operation                                                          h261.sub.-- on                                                                           xdim   ydim       Function                                         ______________________________________                                        0          0      0          F.sub.i = x.sub.i                                0          0      1          MPEG 8x9 block                                   0          1      0          MPEG 9x8 block                                   0          1      1          MPEG 9x9 block                                   1          0      0          H.261 Low-pass Filter                            1          0      1          Illegal                                          1          1      0          Illegal                                          1          1      1          Illegal                                          ______________________________________                                    

The function of the Formatter and Dimension Buffer are also simpler inMPEG. The formatter must collect two valid pixels before passing them tothe x-filter for half-pel interpolation; the Dimension Buffer only needsto buffer one row. It is worth noting that after data has passed throughthe x-filter, there can only ever be 8 pixels in a row, because thefiltering operation converts 9-pixel rows into 8-pixel rows. "Lost"pixels are replaced by gaps in the data stream. When performing half-pelinterpolation, the x-filter inserts a gap at the end of each row (afterevery 8 pixels); the y-filter inserts 8 gaps at the end of the block.This is significant because the group of 8 or 9 gaps at the end of ablock align with DATA Token headers and other tokens between DATA Tokensin the stream coming out of the FIFO. This minimizes the worst-casethroughput of the chip which occurs when 9×9 blocks are being filtered.

B.12.3.2 The Prediction Filters Adder

During MPEG operation, predictions may be formed using an earlierpicture, a later picture, or the average of the two. Predictions formedfrom an earlier frame termed forward predictions and those formed from alater frame are called backward predictions. The function of thePrediction Filters Adder (pfadd) is to determine which filteredprediction values are being used (forward, backward or both) and eitherpass through the forward or backward filtered predictions or the averageof the two (rounded towards positive infinity).

The prediction mode can only change between blocks, i.e., at power-up orafter the fwd₋₋ 1st₋₋ byte and/or bwd₋₋ 1st₋₋ byte signals are active,indicating the last byte of the current prediction block. If the currentblock is a forward prediction then only fwd₋₋ 1st₋₋ byte is examined. Ifit is a backward prediction then only bwd₋₋ 1st₋₋ byte is examined. Ifit is a bidirectional prediction, then both fwd₋₋ 1st₋₋ byte and bwd₋₋1st₋₋ byte are examined.

The signals fwd₋₋ on and bwd₋₋ on determine which prediction values areused. At any time, either both or neither of these signals may beactive. At start-up, or if there is a gap when no valid data is presentat the inputs of the block, the block enters a state when neither signalis active.

Two criteria are used to determine the prediction mode for the nextblock: the signals fwd₋₋ ima₋₋ twin and bwd₋₋ ima₋₋ twin, which indicatewhether a forward or backward block is part of a bidirectionalprediction pair, and the buses fwd₋₋ p₋₋ num 1:0! and bwd₋₋ p₋₋ num1:0!. These buses contain numbers which increment by one for each newprediction block or pair of prediction blocks. These blocks arenecessary because, for example, if there are two forward predictionblocks followed by a bidirectional prediction block, the DRAM interfacecan fetch the backward block of the bidirectional predictionsufficiently far ahead so that it reaches the input of the PredictionFilters Adder before the second of the forward prediction blocks.Similarly, other sequences of backward and forward predictions can getout of sequence at the input of the Prediction Filters Adder. Thus, thenext prediction mode is determined as follows:

1) If valid forward data is present and fwd₋₋ ima₋₋ twin is high, thenthe block stalls until valid backward data arrives with bwd₋₋ ima₋₋ twinset and then it goes through the blocks averaging each pair ofprediction values.

2) If valid backward data is present and bwd₋₋ ima₋₋ twin is high, thenthe block stalls until valid forward data arrives with fwd₋₋ ima₋₋ twinset and then it proceeds as above. If forward and backward data arevalid together, there is no stall.

3) If valid forward data is present, but fwd₋₋ ima₋₋ twin is not set,then fwd₋₋ p₋₋ num is examined. If this equals the number from theprevious prediction plus one (stored in pred₋₋ num) then the predictionmode is set to forward.

4) If valid backward data is present but bwd₋₋ ima₋₋ twin is not set,then bwd₋₋ p₋₋ num is examined. If this equals the number from theprevious prediction plus one (stored in pred₋₋ num) then the predictionmode is set to backward.

Note that "early₋₋ valid" signals from one stage back in the pipelineare used so that the Prediction Filters Adder mode can be set up beforethe first data from a new block arrives. This ensures that no stalls areintroduced into the pipeline.

The ima₋₋ twin and pred₋₋ num signals are not passed along the forwardand backward prediction filter pipelines with the filtered data. This isbecause:

1) These signals are only examined when fwd₋₋ 1st₋₋ byte and/or bwd₋₋1st₋₋ byte are valid. This saves about 25 three-bit pipeline stages ineach prediction filter.

2) The signals remain valid throughout a block and, therefore, are validat the time when

    fwd.sub.-- 1st.sub.-- byte

and/or bwd₋₋ 1st₋₋ byte reach the Prediction Filters Adder.

3) The signals are examined a clock before data arrives anyway.

B.12.4 Prediction Adder and FIFO

The prediction adder (padder) forms the predicted frame by adding thedata from the prediction filters to the error data. To compensate forthe delay from the input through the address generator, DRAM interfaceand prediction filters, the error data passes through a 256 word FIFO(sfifo) before reaching padder.

The CODING₋₋ STANDARD, PREDICTION₋₋ MODE and DATA Tokens are decoded todetermine when a predicted block is being formed. The 8-bit predictiondata is added to the 9-bit two's complement error data in the DATAToken. The result is restricted to the range 0 to 255 and passes to thenext block. Note that this data restriction also applies to allintra-coded data, including JPEG.

The prediction adder of the present invention also includes a mechanismto detect mismatches in the data arriving from the FIFO and theprediction filters. In theory, the amount of data from the filtersshould exactly correspond to the number of DATA Tokens from the FIFOwhich involve prediction. In the event of a serious malfunction,however, padder will attempt to recover.

The end of the data blocks from the FIFO and filters are marked,respectively, by the in₋₋ extn and fl₋₋ last inputs. Where the end ofthe filter data is detected before the end of the DATA Token, theremainder of the token continues to the output unchanged. If, on theother hand, the filter block is longer than the DATA Token, the input isstalled until all the extra filter data has been accepted and discarded.

There is no snooper in either the FIFO or the prediction adder, as thechip can be configured to pass data from the token input port directlyto these blocks, and to pass their output directly to the token outputport.

B.12.5 Write and Read Rudders

B.12.5.1 The Write Rudder (wrudder)

The Write Rudder passes all tokens coming from the Prediction Adder onto the Read Rudder. It also passes all data blocks in I or P pictures inMPEG, and all data blocks in H.261 to the DRAM interface so that theycan be written back into the external frame stores under the control ofthe Address Generator. All the primary functionality is contained withinone two-wire interface stage, although the write-back data passesthrough a snooper on its way to the DRAM interface.

The Write Rudder decodes the following tokens:

                  TABLE B.12.3                                                    ______________________________________                                        Tokens Decoded by the Write Rudder                                            Token Name   Function in Write Rudder                                         ______________________________________                                        CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                                                     Write-back is inhibited for JPEG streams.                        PICTURE.sub.-- TYPE                                                                        Write-back only occurs in I and P frames, not                                 B frames.                                                        DATA         Only the data within DATA tokens is written                                   back.                                                            ______________________________________                                    

After the DATA Token header has been detected, all data bytes are outputto the DRAM Interface. The end of the DATA Token is detected by in₋₋extn going low and this causes a flush signal to be sent to the DRAMInterface swing buffer. In normal operation, this will align with thepoint when the swing buffer would swing anyway, but if the DATA Tokendoes not contain 64 bytes of data this provides a recovery mechanism(although it is likely that the next few output pictures would beincorrect).

B.12.5.2 The Read Rudder (rrudder)

The Read Rudder of the present invention has three functions, the twomajor ones relating to picture sequence reordering in MPEG:

1) To insert data which has been read-back from the external frame storeinto the token stream at the correct places.

2) To reorder picture header information in I and P pictures.

3) To detect the end of a token stream by detecting the FLUSH token (seeSection B.12.1, "Top Fork").

The structure of the Read Rudder is illustrated in FIG. 150. The entireblock is made from standard two-wire interface technology. Tokens in theinput interface latches are decoded and these decodes determine theoperation of the block:

                                      TABLE B.12.4                                __________________________________________________________________________    Tokens decoded by the Read Rudder                                             Token Name    Function in Read Rudder                                         __________________________________________________________________________    FLUSH         Signals to Top Fork.                                            CODING.sub.-- STANDARD                                                                      Reordering is inhibited if the coding standarad is not                        MPEG                                                            SEQUENCE.sub.-- START                                                                       The read-back data for the first picture of a reordered                       sequence is invalid.                                            PICTURE.sub.-- START                                                                        Signals that the current output FIFO must be swapped (I or                    P pictures).                                                                  The first of the picture header tokens.                         PICTURE.sub.-- END                                                                          All tokens above the picture layer are allowed through          TEMPORTAL.sub.-- REFERENCE                                                                  The second of the picture header tokens.                        PICTURE.sub.-- TYPE                                                                         The third of the picture header tokens.                         DATA          When reordering, the contents of DATA tokens are replaced                     with                                                                          recordered data.                                                __________________________________________________________________________

The reorder function is turned on via the Microprocessor Interface, butis inhibited if the coding standard is not MPEG, regardless of the stateof the register. The same MPI register controls whether the AddressGenerator generates a reorder address and thus, reorder is an outputfrom this block. To understand how the Read Rudder works, consider theinput and output control logic separately, bearing in mind that thesequence of tokens is as follows:

CODING₋₋ STANDARD

SEQUENCE₋₋ START

PICTURE₋₋ START

TEMPORAL₋₋ REFERENCE

PICTURE₋₋ TYPE

Picture containing DATA Tokens and other tokens

PICTURE₋₋ END

. .

PICTURE₋₋ START

. .

B.12.5.2.1 Input Control Logic

From the power-up, all tokens pass into FIFO 1 (called the current inputFIFO) until the first PICTURE₋₋ TYPE token for an I or P picture isencountered. FIFO 2 then becomes she current input FIFO and all input isdirected to it until the next PICTURE₋₋ TYPE for an I or P picture isencountered and FIFO 1 becomes the current input FIFO again. Within Iand P pictures, all tokens between PICTURE₋₋ TYPE and PICTURE₋₋ END,except DATA Tokens, are discarded. This is to prevent motion vectors,etc. from being associated with the wrong pictures in the reorderedstream, where they would have no meaning.

A three-bit code is put into the FIFO, along with the token stream, toindicate the presence of certain token headers. This saves having toperform token decoding on the output of the FIFOs.

B.12.5.2.2 Output Control Logic

From the power-up, tokens are accepted from FIFO 1 (called the currentoutput FIFO) until a picture start code is encountered, after which FIFO2 becomes the current output FIFO. Referring back to Section B.12.5.2.1,it can be seen that at this stage the three picture header tokens,PICTURE₋₋ START, TEMPORAL₋₋ REFERENCE and PICTURE₋₋ START are retainedin FIFO 1. The current output FIFO is swapped every time a picture startcode is encountered in an I or P frame. Accordingly, the three pictureheader tokens are stored until the next I or P frame, at which time theywill become associated with the correctly reordered data. B pictures arenot reordered and, hence, pass through without any tokens beingdiscarded. All tokens in the first picture, including PICTURE₋₋ END arediscarded.

During I and P pictures, the data contained in DATA Tokens in the tokenstream is replaced by reordered data from the DRAM Interface. During thefirst picture, "reordered" data is still present at the reordered datainput because the Address Generator still requests the DRAM interface tofetch it. This is considered garbage and is discarded.

SECTION B.13 The DRAM Interface

B.13.1 Overview

In the present invention, the Spatial Decoder, Temporal Decoder andVideo Formatter each contain a DRAM Interface block for that particularchip. In all three devices, the function of the DRAM Interface is totransfer data from the chip to the external DRAM and from the externalDRAM into the chip via block addresses supplied by an address generator.

The DRAM Interface typically operates from a clock which is asynchronousto both the address generator and to the clocks of the various blocksthrough which data is passed.

This asynchronism is readily managed, however, because the clocks areoperating at approximately the same frequency.

Data is usually transferred between the DRAM Interface and the rest ofthe chip in blocks of 64 bytes (the only exception being prediction datain the Temporal Decoder). Transfers take place by means of a deviceknown as a "swing buffer". This is essentially a pair of RAMs operatedin a double-buffered configuration, with the DRAM interface filling oremptying one RAM while another part of the chip empties or fills theother RAM. A separate bus which carries an address from an addressgenerator is associated with each swing buffer.

Each of the chips has four swing buffers, but the function of theseswing buffers is different in each case. In the Spatial Decoder, oneswing buffer is used to transfer coded data to the DRAM, another to readcoded data from the DRAM, the third to transfer tokenized data to theDRAM and the fourth to read tokenized data from the DRAM. In theTemporal Decoder, one swing buffer is used to write Intra or Predictedpicture data to the DRAM, the second to read Intra or Predicted datafrom the DRAM and the other two to read Intra or Predicted data from theDRAM and the other two to read forward and backward prediction data. Inthe Video Formatter, one swing buffer is used to transfer data to theDRAM and the other three are used to read data from the DRAM, one ofeach of Luminance (Y) and the Red and Blue color difference data (Cr andCb respectively).

The operation of the generic features of the DRAM Interface is describedin the Spatial Decoder document. The following section describes thefeatures peculiar to the Temporal Decoder.

B.13.2 The Temporal Decoder DRAM Interface

As mentioned in section B.13.1, the Temporal Decoder has four swingbuffers: two are used to read and write decoded Intra and Predicted (Iand P) picture data and these operate as described above. The other twoare used to fetch prediction data.

In general, prediction data will be offset from the position of theblock being processed as specified by motion vectors in x and y. Thus,the block of data to be fetched will not generally correspond to theblock boundaries of the data as it was encoded (and written into theDRAM). This is illustrated in FIGS. 151 and 25, where the shaded arearepresents the block that is being formed. The dotted outline shows theblock from which it is being predicted. The address generator convertsthe address specified by the motion vectors to a block offset (a wholenumber of blocks), as shown by the big arrow, and a pixel offset, asshown by the little arrow.

In the address generator, the frame pointer, base block address andvector offset are added to form the address of the block to be fetchedfrom the DRAM. If the pixel offset is zero, only one request isgenerated. If there is an offset in either the x or y dimension, thentwo requests are generated--the original block address and the oneeither immediately to the right or immediately below. With an offset inboth x and y, four requests are generated. For each block which is to befetched, the address generator calculates start and stop addressesparameters and passes these to the DRAM interface. The use of thesestart and stop addresses is best illustrated by an example, as outlinedbelow.

Consider a pixel offset of (1, 1), as illustrated by the shaded area inFIG. 152 and FIG. 26. The address generator makes four requests,labelled A through D in the figure. The problem to be solved is how toprovide the required sequence of row addresses quickly. The solution isto use "start/stop" technology, and this is described below.

Consider block A in FIG. 152. Reading must start at position (1, 1) andend at position (7, 7). Assume for the moment that one byte is beingread at a time (i.e. an 8 bit DRAM Interface). The x value in thecoordinate pair forms the three LSBs of the address, the y value thethree MSBs. The x and y start values are both 1, giving the address 9.Data is read from this address and the x value is incremented. Theprocess is repeated until the x value reaches its stop value. At thispoint, the y value is incremented by 1 and the x start value isreloaded, giving an address of 17. As each byte of data is read, the xvalue is again incremented until it reaches its stop value. The processis repeated until both x and y values have reached their stop values.Thus, the address sequence of 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, . . . , 23,25, . . . , 31, 33, . . . , . . . , 57, . . . , 63 is generated.

In a similar manner, the start and stop coordinates for block B are: (1,0) and (7, 0), for block C: (0,1) and (0,7), and for block D: (0, 0) and(0, 0).

The next issue is where this data should be written. Clearly, looking atblock A, the data read from address 9 should be written to address 0 inthe swing buffer, the data from address 10 to address 15 in the swingbuffer, and so on. Similarly, the data read from address 8 in block Bshould be written to address 15 in the swing buffer and the data fromaddress 16 into address 15 in the swing buffer. This function turns outto have a very simple implementation as outlined below.

Consider block A. At the start of reading, the swing buffer addressregister is loaded with the inverse of the stop value, the y inversestop value forming the 3 MSBs and the x inverse stop value forming the 3LSBs. In this case, while the DRAM Interface is reading address 9 in theexternal DRAM, the swing buffer address is zero. The swing bufferaddress register is then incremented as the external DRAM addressregister is incremented, as illustrated in Table B.13.1:

                  TABLE B.13.1                                                    ______________________________________                                        Illustration of Prediction Addressing                                                                 Ext        Swing                                                              DRAM Ad.   Buff Ad.                                   Ext DRAM Address                                                                         Swing Buff Address                                                                         (Binary)   (Binary)                                   ______________________________________                                         9 = y-start, x-start                                                                    0 = y-stop, x-stop                                                                         001 001    000 000                                    10         1            111 110    000 001                                    11         2            001 011    000 010                                    15         6            001 111    000 110                                    17 = y-1, x-start                                                                        8 = y+1, x-stop                                                                            010 001    001 000                                    18         9            010 010    001 001                                    ______________________________________                                    

The discussion thus far has centered on an 8 bit DRAM Interface. In thecase of a 16 or 32 bit interface, a few minor modifications must bemade. First, the pixel offset vector must be "clipped" so that it pointsto a 16 or 32 bit boundary. In the example we have been using, for blockA, the first DRAM read will point to address 0, and data in addresses 0through 3 will be read. Next, the unwanted data must be discarded. Thisis performed by writing all the data into the swing buffer (which mustnow be physically bigger than was necessary in the 8 bit case) andreading with an offset. When performing MPEG half-pel interpolation, 9bytes in x and/or y must be read from the DRAM Interface. In this case,the address generator provides the appropriate start and stop addressesand some additional logic in the DRAM Interface is used, but there is nofundamental change in the way the DRAM Interface operates.

The final point to note about the Temporal Decoder DRAM Interface isthat additional information must be provided to the prediction filtersto indicate what processing is required on the data. This consists ofthe following:

a "last byte" signal indicating the last byte of a transfer (of 64, 72or 81 bytes)

an H.261 flag

a bidirectional prediction flag

two bits to indicate the block's dimensions (8 or 9 bytes in x and y)

a two bit number to indicate the order of the blocks

The last byte flag can be generated as the data is read out of the swingbuffer. The other signals are derived from the address generator and arepiped through the DRAM Interface so that they are associated with thecorrect block of data as it is read out of the swing buffer by theprediction filter block.

SECTION B.14 UPI Documentation

B.14.1 Introduction

This document is intended to give the reader an appreciation of theoperation of the microprocessor interface in accordance with the presentinvention. The interface is basically the same on both the SPATIALDECODER and the Temporal Decoder, the only difference being the numberof address lines.

The logic described here is purely the microprocessor internal logic.The relevant schematics are:

UPI

UPI101

UPI102

DINLOGIC

DINCELL

UPIN

TDET

NONOVRLP

WRTGEN

READGEN

VREFCKT

The circuits UPI, UPI101, UPI102 are all the same except that the UPI01has a 7 bit address input with the 8th bit hardwired to ground, whilethe other two have an 8 bit address input.

Input/Output Signals

The signals described here are a list of all the inputs and outputs(defined with respect to the UPI) to the UPI module with a notedetailing the source or destination of these signals:

NOTRSTInputGlobal chip reset, active low, from Pad Input Driver

E1InputEnable signal 1, active low, from the Pad Input Driver (Schmitt).

E2InputEnable signal 2, active low, from the Pad Input Driver (Schmitt).

RNOTWInputRead not Write signal from the Pad Input Driver (Schmitt).

ADDRIN 7:0!InputAddress bus signals from the Pad Input Drivers(Schmitt).

NOTDIN 7:0!Inputlnput data bus from the Input Pad

Drivers of the Bi-directional Microprocessor Data pins (TTLin).

INT₋₋ RNOTWOutputThe Internal Read not Write signal to the internalcircuitry being accessed by microprocessor interface (See memory map).

INT₋₋ ADDR 7:0!OutputThe Internal Address Bus to all the circuits beingaccessed by the microprocessor interface (See memory map).

INTDBUS 7:0!Input/OutputThe Internal Data bus to all the circuits beingaccessed by the microprocessor interface (See the memory map) and alsothe microprocessor data output pads. The internal Data bus transfersdata which is the inverse to that on the pins of the chip.

READ₋₋ STROutputAn is an internal timing signal which indicates a readof a location in the device memory map.

WRITE₋₋ STROutputAn is an internal signal which indicates a write of alocation in the internal memory map.

TRISTATEDPADOutputAn is an internal signal which connects to themicroprocessor data output pads which indicates that they should betristate.

General Comments

The UPI schematic consists of 6 smaller modules: NONOVRLP, UPIN,DINLOGIC, VREFCKT, READGEN, WRTGEN. It should be noted from the overalllist of signals that there are no clock signals associated with themicroprocessor interface other than the microprocessor bus timingsignals which are asynchronous to all the other timing signals on thechip. Therefore, no timing relationship should be assumed between theoperation of the microprocessor and the rest of the device other thanthose that can be forced by external control. For example, stopping ofthe System clock externally while accessing the microprocessor interfaceon a test system.

The other implication of not having a clock in the UPI is that someinternal timing is self timed. That is, the delay of some signals iscontrolled internally to the UPI block.

The overall function of the UPI is to take the address, data and enableand read/write signals from the outside world and format them so thatthey can drive the internal circuits correctly. The internal signalsthat define access to the memory map are INT₋₋ RNOTW₋₋ INT₋₋ ADDR . . .!, INTDBUS . . . ! and READ₋₋ STR and WRITE₋₋ STR. The timingrelationship of these signals is shown below for a read cycle and awrite cycle. It should be noted that although the datasheet definitionand the following diagram always shows a chip enable cycle, the circuitoperation is such that the enable can be held low and the address can becycled to do successive read or write operations. This function ispossible because of the address transition circuits.

Also, the presence of the INT₋₋ RNOTW and the READ₋₋ STR, WRITE₋₋ STRdoes reflect some redundancy. It allows internal circuits to use eithera separate READ₋₋ STR and WRITE₋₋ STR (and ignore INT₋₋ RNOTW) or to usethe INT₋₋ RNOTW and a separate Strobe signal (Strobe signal beingderived from OR of READ₋₋ STR and WRITE₋₋ STR).

The internal databus is precharged High during a read cycle and it alsohas resistive pullups so that for extended periods when the internaldata bus is not driven it will default to the 0XFF condition. As theinternal databus is the inverse of the data on the pins, this translatesto 0x00 on the external pins, when they are enabled. This means that, ifany external cycle accesses a register or a bit of a register which is ahole in the memory map, then the output data id determinate and is Low.

Circuit Details

UPIN

This circuit is the overall change detect block. It contains asub-circuit called TDET which is a single bit change detect circuit.UPIN has a TDET module for each address bit and rnotw and for eachenable signal. UPIN also contains some combinatorial logic to gatetogether the outputs of the change detect circuits. This gatinggenerates the signals:

TRAN--which indicates a transition on one of the input signals, and

UPD-DONE--which indicates that transitions have been completed and acycle can be performed.

CHIP₋₋ EN--which indicates that the chip has been selected.

TDET

This is the single bit change detect circuit. It consists of a 2latches, and 2 exclusive OR gates. The first latch is clocked by thesignal SAMPLE and the second by the signal UPDATE. These twonon-overlapping signals come from the module NONOVRLP. The generaloperation is such that an input transition causes a CHANGE which, inturn, causes a SAMPLE. All input changes while SAMPLE is high areaccepted and when input changes cease then CHANGE goes low and SAMPLEgoes low which causes UPDATE to go high which then transfers data to theoutput latch and indicates UPD₋₋ DONE.

NONOVRLP

This circuit is basically a non-overlapping clock generator which inputsTRAN and generates SAMPLE and UPDATE. The external gating on the outputof UPDATE stops UPDATE from going high until a write pulse has beencompleted.

DINLOGIC

This module consists of eight instances of the data input circuitDINCELL and some gating to drive the TRISTATEPAD signal. This indicatesthat the output data port will only drive if Enablel is low, Enable2 islow, RnotW is high and the internal read₋₋ str is high.

DINCELL

This circuit consists of the data input latch and a tristate driver todrive the internal databus. Data from the input pad is latched when thesignal DATAHOLD is high and when both Enable1 and Enable2 are low. Thetristate driver drives the internal data bus whenever the internalsignal INT₋₋ RNOTW is low. The internal databus precharge transistor andthe bus pullup are also included in this module.

WRTGEN

This module generates the WRITE₋₋ STR, and the latch signal DATAHOLD forthe data latches. The write strobe is a self timed signal, however, theself time delay is defined in the VREFCKT. The output from the timingcircuit RESETWRITE is used to terminate the WRITE₋₋ STR signal. Itshould be noted that the actual write pulse which writes a register onlyoccurs after an access cycle is concluded. This is because the datainput to the chip is sampled only on the back edge of the cycle. Hence,data is only valid after a normal access cycle has concluded.

READGEN

This circuit, as its name suggests, generates the READ₋₋ STR and it alsogenerates the PRECH signal which is used to precharge the internaldatabus. The PRECH signal is also a self timed signal whose period isdependant on VREFCKT and also on the voltage on the internal databus.The READ₋₋ STR is not self timed, but lasts from the end of theprecharge period until the end of the cycle. The precharge circuitryuses inverters with their transfer characteristic biased so that theyneed a voltage of approximately 75% of supply before they invert. Thiscircuit guarantees that the internal bus is correctly precharged beforea READ₋₋ STR begins. In order to stop a PRECH pulse tending to zerowidth if the internal bus is already precharged, the timing circuitguarantees a minimum, width via the signal RESETREAD.

VREFCKT

The VREFCKT is the only circuit which controls the self timing of theinterface. Both the delays, 1/Width of WRITE₋₋ STR and 2/Width of PRECH,are controlled by a current through a P transistor. The gate on this Ptransistor is controlled by a signal VREF and this voltage is set by adiffusion resistor of 25K ohm.

SECTION C.1 Overview

C.1.1. Introduction

The structure of the image Formatter, in accordance with the presentinvention, is shown in FIG. 155. There are two address generators, onefor writing and one for reading, a buffer manager which supervises thetwo address generators and which provides frame-rate conversion, a dataprocessing pipeline, including both vertical and horizontal unsamplers,color-space conversion and gamma correction, and a final control blockwhich regulates the output of the processing pipeline.

C.1.2 Buffer manager

Tokens arriving at the input to the Image Formatter are buffered in theFIFO and then transferred into the buffer manager. This block detectsthe arrival of new pictures and determines the availability of a bufferin which to store each picture. If there is a buffer available, it isallocated to the arriving picture and its index is transferred to thewrite address generator. If there is no buffer available, the incomingpicture will be stalled until one becomes available. All tokens arepassed on to the write address generator.

Each time the read address generator receives a VSYNC signal from thedisplay system, a request is made to the buffer manager for a newdisplay buffer index. If there is a buffer containing complete picturedata, and that picture is deemed ready for display, then that buffer'sindex will be passed to the display address generator. If not, thebuffer manager sends the index of the last buffer to be displayed. Atstart-up, zero is passed as the index until the first buffer is full.

A picture is ready for display if its number (calculated as each pictureis input) is greater than or equal to the picture number which isexpected at the display (presentation number) given the encoding framerate. The expected number is determined by counting picture clockpulses, where picture clock can be generated either locally by the clockdividers, or externally. This technology allows frame-rate conversion(e.g., 2-3 pull-down).

External DRAM is used for the buffers, which can be either two or threein number. Three are necessary if frame-rate conversion is to beeffected.

C.1.3 Write Address Generator

The write address generator receives tokens from the buffer manager anddetects the arrival of each new DATA Token. As each DATA Token arrives,the address generator calculates a new address for the DRAM interfacefor storing the arriving block. The raw data is then passed to the DRAMinterface where it is written into a swing buffer. Note that DRAMaddresses are block addresses, and pictures in the DRAM or organized asrasters of blocks. Incoming picture data, however, is actually organizedsequences of macroblocks, so the address generation algorithm must takeinto account line-width (in blocks) offsets for the lower rows of blockswithin the macroblock.

The arrival buffer index provided by the buffer manager is used as anaddress offset for the whole of the picture being stored. Furthermore,each component is stored in a separate area within the specified buffer,so component offsets are also used in the calculation.

C.1.4 Read Address Generator

The Read Address Generator (dispaddr) does not receive or generatetokens, it generates addresses only. In response to a VSYNC, it may,depending on field₋₋ info, read₋₋ start, sync₋₋ mode, and lsb₋₋ invert,request a buffer index from the buffer manager. Having received anindex, it generates three sets of addresses, one for each component, forthe current picture to be read in raster order. Different setups allowfor: interlaced/progressive display and/or data, vertical unsampling,and field synchronization (to an interlaced display). At the lowerlevel, the Read Address Generator converts base addresses into asequence of block addresses and byte counts for each of the threecomponents that are compatible with the page structure of the DRAM. Theaddresses provided to the DRAM interface are page and line addressesalong with block start and block end counts.

C.1.5 Output Pipeline

Data from the DRAM interface feeds the output pipeline. The threecomponent streams are first vertically interpolated, then horizontallyinterpolated. Following the interpolators, the three components shouldbe of equal ratios (4:4:4), and are passed through the color-spaceconverter and color lookup tables/gamma correction. The output interfacemay hold the streams at this point until the display has reached anHSYSC. Thereafter, output controller directs the three components intoone, two or three 8-bit buses, multiplexing as necessary.

C.1.6 Timing Regimes

There are basically two principal timing regimes associated with theImage Formatter. First, there is a system clock, which provides timingfor the front end of the chip (address generators and buffer manager,plus the front end of the DRAM interface). Second, there is a pixelclock which drives all the timing for the back end (DRAM interfaceoutput, and the whole of the output pipeline).

Each of the two aforementioned clocks drives a number of on-chip clockgenerators. The FIFO, buffer manager and read address generator operatefrom the same clock (DΦ) with the write address generator using asimilar, but separate clock (WΦ). Data is clocked into the DRAMinterface on an internal DRAM interface clock, (outΦ). DΦ, wΦ and outΦare all generated from syscik.

Read and write addresses are clocked in the DRAM interface by the DRAMinterface's own clock.

Data is read out of the DRAM interface on bifRΦ, and is transferred tothe section of the output pipeline named "bushy₋₋ ne" (north-east--byvirtue of its physical location) which operates on clocks denoted byNEΦ. The section of the pipeline from the gamma RAMs onward is clockedon a separate, but similar, clock (RΦ). bifRΦ, NEΦ and RΦ are allderived from the pixel clock, pixin.

For testing, all of the major interfaces between blocks have eithersnoopers or super-snoopers attached. This depends on the timing regimesand the type of access required. Block boundaries between separate, butsimilar timing regimes have retiming latches associated therewith.

SECTION C.2 Buffer Management

C.2.1. Introduction

The purpose of the buffer management block, in accordance with thepresent invention, is to supply the address generators with indicesidentifying any of either two or three external buffers for writing andreading of picture data. The allocation of these indices is influencedby three principal factors, each representing the effect of one of thetiming regimes in operation. These are the rate at which picture dataarrives at the input to Image Formatter (coded data rate), the rate atwhich data is displayed (display data rate), and the frame rate of theencoded video sequence (presentation rate).

C.2.2 Functional Overview

A three-buffer system allows the presentation rate and the display rateto differ (e.g., 2-3 pulldown), so that frames are either repeated orskipped as necessary to achieve the best possible sequence of framesgiven the timing constraints of the system. Pictures which present somedifficulty in decoding may also be accommodated in a similar way, sothat if a picture takes longer than the available display time todecode, the previous frame will be repeated while everything else"catches up". In a two-buffer system, the three timing regimes must belocked--it is the third buffer which provides the flexibility for takingup the slack.

The buffer manager operates by maintaining certain status informationassociated with each external buffer. This includes flags indicating ifthe buffer is in use, if it is full of data, or ready for display, andthe picture number within the sequence of the picture currently storedin the buffer. The presentation number is also recorded, this being anumber which increments every time a picture clock pulse is received,and represents the picture number which is currently expected fordisplay based on the frame rate of the encoded sequence.

An arrival buffer (a buffer to which incoming data will be written) isallocated every time a PICTURE₋₋ START token is detected at the input.This buffer is then flagged as IN₋₋ USE. On PICTURE₋₋ END, the arrivalbuffer will be deallocated (reset to zero) and the buffer flagged aseither FULL or READY depending on the relationship between the picturenumber and the presentation number.

The display address generator requests a new display buffer, once everyvsync, via a two-wire interface. If there is a buffer flagged as READY,then that will be allocated to display by the buffer manager. If thereis no READY buffer, the previously displayed buffer will be repeated.

Each time the presentation number changes, it is detected and everybuffer containing a complete picture is tested for READY-ness byexamining the relationship between its picture number and thepresentation number. Buffers are considered in turn. When any of thebuffers are deemed to be READY, this automatically cancels theREADY-ness of any buffer which was previously flagged as READY. Theprevious buffer is then flagged as EMPTY. This works because laterpicture numbers are stored, by virtue of the allocation scheme, in thebuffers that are considered later.

TEMPORAL₋₋ REFERENCE tokens in H.261 cause a buffer's picture number tobe modified if skipped pictures in the input stream are indicated. Thisfeature, although envisioned, is not currently included, however.Similarly, TEMPORAL-REFERENCE tokens in MPEG have no effect.

A FLUSH token causes the input to stall until every buffer is eitherEMPTY or has been allocated as the display buffer. Thereafter,presentation number and picture number are reset and a new sequence cancommence.

C.2.3 Architecture

C.2.3.1 Interfaces

C.2.3.1.1. Interface to bm front

All data is input to the buffer manager from the input FIFO, bm₋₋ front.This transfer takes place via a two-wire interface, the data being 8bits wide plus an extension bit. All data arriving at the buffer manageris guaranteed to be a complete token. This is a necessity for thecontinued processing of presentation numbers and display buffer requestsin the event of significant gaps in the data upstream.

C.2.3.1.2 Interface to waddrgen

Tokens (8 bit data, 1 bit extension) are transferred to the writeaddress generator via a two-wire interface. The arrival buffer index isalso transferred on the same interface, so that the correct index isavailable for address generation at the same time as the PICTURE₋₋ STARTtoken arrives at waddrgen.

C.2.3.1.3 Interface to dispaddr

The interface to the read address generator comprises two separatetwo-wire interfaces which can be considered to act as "request" and"acknowledge" signals, respectively. Single wires are not adequate,however, because of the two two-wire-based state machines at either end.

The sequence of events normally associated with the dispaddr interfaceis as follows. First, dis-paddr invokes a request in response to a vsyncfrom the display device by asserting the drq₋₋ valid input to the buffermanager. Next, when the buffer manager reaches an appropriate point inits state machine, it will accept the request and go about allocating abuffer to be displayed. Thereafter, the disp₋₋ valid wire is asserted,the buffer index is transferred, and this is typically acceptedimmediately by dispaddr. Furthermore, there is an additional wireassociated with this last two-wire interface (rst₋₋ fld) which indicatesthat the field number associated with the current index must be resetregardless of the previous field number.

C.2.3.1.4 Microprocessor Interface

The buffer manager block uses four bits of microprocessor address space,together with the 8-bit data bus and read and write strobes. There aretwo select signals, one indicating user-accessible locations and theother indicating test locations which should not require access undernormal operating conditions.

C.2.3.1.5 Events

The buffer manager is capable of producing two different events, indexfound and late arrival. The first of these is asserted when a picturearrives and its PICTURE₋₋ START extension byte (picture index) matchesthe value written into the BU₋₋ BM₋₋ TARGET₋₋ IX register at setup. Thesecond event occurs when a display buffer is allocated and its picturenumber is less than the current presentation number, i.e., theprocessing in the system pipeline up to the buffer manager has notmanaged to keep up with the presentation requirements.

C.2.3.1.6 Picture Clock

In the present invention, picture clock is the clock signal for thepresentation number counter and is either generated on-chip or takenfrom an external source (normally the display system). The buffermanager accepts both of these signals and selects one based on the valueof pclk₋₋ ext (a bit in the buffer manager's control register). Thissignal also acts as the enable for the pad picoutpad, so that if theImage Formatter is generating its own picture clock, this signal is alsoavailable as an output from the chip.

C.2.3.2. Major Blocks

The following sections describe the various hardware blocks that make upthe buffer manager schematic (bmlogic).

C.2.3.2.1 Input/Output block (bm input)

This module contains all of the hardware associated with the fourtwo-wire interfaces of the buffer manager (input and output data, drq₋₋valid/accept and disp₋₋ valid/accept). The input data register is shown,together with some token decoding hardware attached thereto. The signalvheader at the input to bm₋₋ tokdec is used to ensure that the tokendecoder outputs can only be asserted at a point where a header would bevalid (i.e., not in the middle of a token. The rtimd block acts as theoutput data registers, adjacent to the duplicate input data registersfor the next block in the pipeline. This accounts for timing differencesdue to different clock generators. Signals go and ngo are based on theAND of data valid, accept and not stopped, and are used elsewhere in thestate machine to indicate if things are "bunged up" at either the inputor the output.

The display index part of this module comprises the two-wire interfacestogether with equivalent "go" signals as for data. The rst₋₋ fld bitalso happens here, this being a signal which, if set, remains high untildisp₋₋ valid has been high for one cycle. Thereafter, it is reset. Inaddition, rst₋₋ fld is reset after a FLUSH token has caused all of theexternal buffers to be flagged either as EMPTY or IN₋₋ USE by thedisplay buffer. This is the same point at which both picture numbers andpresentation number are reset.

There is a small amount of additional circuitry associated with theinput data register which appears at the next level up the hierarchy.This circuitry produces a signal which indicates that the input dataregister contains a value equal to that written into BU₋₋ BM₋₋ TARGIXand it is used for event generation.

C.2.3.2.2 Index block (bm index)

The Index block consists mainly of the 2-bit registers denoting thevarious strategic buffer indices. These are arr₋₋ buf, the buffer towhich arriving picture data is being written, disp₋₋ buf, the bufferfrom which picture data is being read for display, and rdy₋₋ buf, theindex of the buffer containing the most up to date picture which couldbe displayed if a buffer was requested by dispaddr. There is also aregister containing buf₋₋ ix, which is used as a general pointer to abuffer. This register gets incremented ("D" input to mux) to cyclethrough the buffers examining their status, or which gets assigned thevalue of one of arr₋₋ buf, disp₋₋ buf or rdy₋₋ buf when the status needschanging. All of these registers (ph0 versions) are accessible from themicroprocessor as part of the test address space. Old₋₋ ix is just are-timed version of buf₋₋ ix and is used for enabling buffer status andpicture number registers in the bm₋₋ stus block. Both buf₋₋ ix and old₋₋ix are decoded into three signals (each can hold the value 1 to 3) whichare output from this block. Other outputs indicate whether buf₋₋ ix hasthe same value as either arr₋₋ buf or disp₋₋ buf, and whether either ofrdy₋₋ buf and disp₋₋ buf have the value zero. Zero is not a reference toa buffer. It merely indicates that there is no arrival/display/readybuffer currently allocated.

Arr₋₋ buf and disp₋₋ buf are enabled by their respective two-wireinterface output accept registers.

Additional circuitry at the bmlogic level is used to determine if thecurrent buffer index (buf₋₋ ix) is equal to the maximum index in use asdefined by the value written into the control register at setup. A "1"in the control register indicates a three-buffer system, and a "0"indicates a two-buffer system.

C.2.3.2.3 Buffer Status

The main components in the buffer status are status and picture numberregisters for each buffer. Each of the groups of three is a master-slavearrangement where the slaves are the banks of three registers, and themaster is a single register whose output is directed to one of theslaves (switched, using register enables, by old₋₋ ix). One of thepossible inputs to the master is multiplexed between the different slaveoutputs (indexed by buf₋₋ ix at the bmlogic level). Buffer status, whichis decoded at the bmlogic level, for use in the state machine logic cantake any of the values shown in Table C.2.1, or recirculate its previousvalue. Picture number can take the previous value or the previous valueincremented by one (or one plus delta, the difference between actual andexpected temporal reference, in the case of H.261). This value issupplied by the 8-bit adder present in the block. The first input tothis adder is this₋₋ pnum, the picture number of the data currentlybeing written.

                  TABLE C.2.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        Buffer Status Values                                                                 Buffer Status                                                                         Value                                                          ______________________________________                                               EMPTY   00                                                                    FULL    01                                                                    READY   10                                                                    IN.sub.-- USE                                                                         11                                                             ______________________________________                                    

This needs to be stored separately (in its own master-slave arrangement)so that any of the three buffer picture number registers can be easilyupdated based on the current (or previous) picture number rather than ontheir own previous picture number (which is almost always out of date).This₋₋ pnum is reset to -1 so that when the first picture arrives it isadded to the output from the adder and, hence, the input to the firstbuffer picture number register, is zero.

Note that in the current version, delta is connected to zero because ofthe absence of the temporal reference block which should supply thevalue.

C.2.3.2.4 Presentation Number

The 8-bit presentation number register has an associated presentationflag which is used in the state machine to indicate that thepresentation number has changed since it was last examined. This isnecessary because the picture clock is essentially asynchronous and maybe active during any state, not just those which are concerned with thepresentation number. The rest of the circuitry in this block isconcerned with detecting that a picture clock pulse has occurred and"remembering" this fact. In this way, the presentation number can beupdated at a time when it is valid to do so. A representative sequenceof events is shown in FIG. 156. The signal incr₋₋ prn goes active thecycle after the re-timed picture clock rising edge, and persists until astate is entered during which presentation number can be modified. Thisis indicated by the signal en₋₋ prnum. The reason for only allowingpresentation number to be updated during certain states is because it isused to drive a significant amount of logic, including a standard-cell,not-very-fast 8-bit adder to provide the signal rdyst. It must,therefore, be changed only during states in which the subsequent statedoes not use the result.

C.2.3.2.5 Temporal Reference

The temporal reference block in accordance with the present invention,has been omitted from the current embodiment of the Image Formatter, butits operation is described here for completeness.

The function of this block is to calculate delta, the difference betweenthe temporal reference value received in a token in an H,261 datastream, and the "expected" temporal reference (one plus the previousvalue). This allows frames to be skipped in H.261. Temporal referencetokens are ignored in all non-H.261 streams. The calculated value isused in the status block to calculate picture numbers for the buffers.The effect of omitting the block from bmlogic is that picture numberswill always be sequential in any sequence, even if the H.261 streamindicates that some should be skipped.

The main components of the block (visible in the schematic bm₋₋ tref)are registers for tr, exptr and delta. In the invention, tr is reset tozero and loaded, when appropriate, from the input data register.Similarly, exptr is reset to -1, and is incremented by either 1 or deltaduring the sequence of temporal reference states. In addition, delta isreset to zero and is loaded with the difference between the other tworegisters. All three registers are reset after a FLUSH token. The adderin this block is used for calculation of both delta and exptr, i.e., asubtract and an add operation, respectively, and is controlled by thesignal delta₋₋ calc.

C.2.3.2.6 Control Registers (bm₋₋ uregs)

Control registers for the buffer manager reside in the block bm₋₋ uregs.These are the access bit register, setup register (defining the maximumnumber of external buffers, and internal/external picture clock), andthe target index register. The access bit is synchronized as expected.The signals stopd₋₋ 0, stopd₋₋ 1 and nstopd₋₋ 1 are derived form the ORof the access bit and the two event stop bits. Upi address decoding forall of bmlogic is done by the block bm₋₋ udec, which takes the lower 4bits of the upi data bus together with the 2 select signals from theImage Formatter top-level address decode.

C.2.3.2.7 Controlling State Machine

The state machine logic originally occupied its own block, bm₋₋ state.For code generation reasons, however, it has now been flattened andresides on sheet 2 of the bmlogic schematic.

The main sections of this logic are the same. This includes thedecoding, the generation of logic signals for the control of otherbmlogic blocks, and the new state encoding, including the flags from₋₋ps and from₋₋ fl which are used to select routes through the statemachine. There are separate blocks to produce the mux control signalsfor bm₋₋ stus and bm₋₋ index.

Signals in the state machine hardware have been given simple alphabeticnames for ease of typing and reference. They are all listed in TableC.2.2, together with the logic expressions which they represent. Theyalso appear as comments in the behavioral M. description of bmlogic(bmlogic.M).

                                      TABLE C.2.2                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Signal Names Used in the State Machine                                        Signal Name                                                                          Logic Expression                                                       __________________________________________________________________________    A      ST.sub.-- PPES1.presflg.(bstate==FULL).rdytst.(rdy==0).(ix==max)       B      ST.sub.-- PRES1.presflg.(bstate==FULL).rdytst.(rdy==0).(ix==max)       C      ST.sub.-- PRES1.presflg.(bstate==FULL).rdytst.(rdy==0)                 D      ST.sub.-- PRES1.presflg.|(bstate==FULL).rdytst).(ix==max)              E      ST.sub.-- PRES1.presflg.|(bstate==FULL).rdytst).(ix==max)              F      ST.sub.-- PRES1.presflg                                                G      ST.sub.-- DRQ.drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc.(rdy==0).(disp|=0)      PP     ST.sub.-- DRQ.drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc.(rdy==0).(disp|=0).f           romps                                                                  QQ     ST.sub.-- DRQ.drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc.(rdy==0).(disp|=0).f           romfl                                                                  RR     ST.sub.-- DRQ.drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc.(rdy==0).(disp|=0).|           (fromps+fromfl)                                                        H      ST.sub.-- DRQ.drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc.(rdy|==0).(disp|=0)     I      ST.sub.-- DRQ.drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc.(rdy|==0).(disp|=0)     J      ST.sub.-- DRQ.drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc.(rdy==0).(disp|=0).f           romps                                                                  NN     ST.sub.-- DRQ.drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc.(rdy==0).(disp|=0).f           romfl                                                                  OO     ST.sub.-- DRQ.drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc.(rdy==0).(disp|=0).|           (fromps+fromfl)                                                        K      ST.sub.-- DRQ.|(drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc).fromps               LL     ST.sub.-- DRQ.|(drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc).fromfl               MM     ST.sub.-- DRQ.|(drq.sub.-- valid.disp.sub.-- acc).|(fromps+fromfl)     L      ST.sub.-- TOKEN.ivr.oar.(idr==TEMPORAL.sub.-- REFERENCE)               SS     ST.sub.-- TOKEN.ivr.oar.(idr==TEMPORAL.sub.-- REFERENCE).H251          TT     ST.sub.-- TOKEN.ivr.oar.(idr==TEMPORAL.sub.-- REFERENCE).|H251         M      ST.sub.-- TOKEN.ivr.oar.(idr==FLUSH)                                   N      ST.sub.-- TOKEN.ivr.oar.(idr==PICTURE.sub.-- START)                    O      ST.sub.-- TOKEN.ivr.oar.(idr==PICTURE.sub.-- END)                      P      ST.sub.-- TOKEN.ivr.oar.(idr==<OTHER.sub.-- TOKEN>)                    JJ     ST.sub.-- TOKEN.ivr.oar.(idr==<OTHER.sub.-- TOKEN>).in.sub.--                 extn                                                                   KK     ST.sub.-- TOKEN.ivr.oar.(idr==<OTHER.sub.-- TOKEN>).|in.sub.--                extn                                                                   Q      ST.sub.-- TOKEN.|(iv.oar)                                              S      ST.sub.-- PICTURE.sub.-- END.(ix==arr).|rdyts.oar                      T      ST.sub.-- PICTURE.sub.-- END.(ix==arr).rdytst.(rdy==0).oar             U      ST.sub.-- PICTURE.sub.-- END.(ix==arr).rdytst.(rdy|=0).oar             VV     ST.sub.-- PICTURE.sub.-- END.|oar                                      R or VV                                                                              ST.sub.-- PICTURE.sub.-- END.|((ix==arr).oar)                          V      ST.sub.-- TEMP.sub.-- REF0.ivr.oar                                     W      ST.sub.-- TEMP.sub.-- REF0.|(ivr.oar)                                  X      ST.sub.-- OUTPUThd --TAIL.ivr.oar                                      FF     ST.sub.-- OUTPUT.sub.-- TAlL.ivr.oar.|in extn                          Y      ST.sub.-- OUTPUT.sub.-- TAIL.|(ivr.oar)                                GG     ST.sub.-- OUTPUT.sub.-- TAlL.|(ivr.oar).in extn                        DD     ST.sub.-- FLUSH.(ix==max).((bstate==VAC)+((bstate==USE).(ix==disp))           N                                                                      z      ST.sub.-- FLUSH.(ix|=max).((bstate==VAC)+((bstate==USE).(ix==disp))           O                                                                      DD or EE                                                                             |((bstate=VAC)+((bstate==USE).(ix==disp))+(ix==max)                    AA     ST.sub.-- ALLOC.(bstate==VAC).oar                                      BB     ST.sub.-- ALLOC.(bstate|=VAC).(ix==max)                                CC     ST.sub.-- ALLOC.(bstate|=VAC).(ix|=max)                                UU     ST.sub.-- ALLOC.|oar                                                   __________________________________________________________________________

C.2.3.2.8 Monitoring Operation (bminfo)

In the present invention, the module, bminfo, is included so that bufferstatus information, index values and presentation number can be observedduring simulations. It is written in M and produces an output each timeone of its inputs changes.

C.2.3.3 Register Address Map

The buffer manager's address space is split into two areas,user-accessible and test. There are, therefore, two separate enablewires derived from range decodes at the top-level. Table C.2.3 shows theuser-accessible registers, and Table C.2.4 shows the contents of thetest space.

                                      TABLE C.2.3                                 __________________________________________________________________________    User-Accessible Registers                                                                        Reset                                                      Register Name                                                                            Access                                                                            Bits                                                                              State                                                                             Function                                               __________________________________________________________________________    BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- ACCESS                                                               0x10                                                                              (0) 1   Access bit for buffer manager                          BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- CTL0                                                                 0x11                                                                              (0) 1   Max buf lsb: 1-> 3 buffers 0-> 2                                      (1) 1   External picutre clock select                          BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- TARGET.sub.-- IX                                                     0x12                                                                              (3:0)                                                                             0x0 For detecting arrival of picture                       BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- PRES.sub.-- NUM                                                      0x13                                                                              (7:0)                                                                             0x00                                                                              Presentation number                                    BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- THIS.sub.-- PNUM                                                     0x14                                                                              (7:0)                                                                             0xFF                                                                              Current picture number                                 BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- PIC.sub.-- NUM0                                                      0x15                                                                              (7:0)                                                                             none                                                                              Picture number in buffer 1                             BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- PIC.sub.-- NUM1                                                      0x16                                                                              (7:0)                                                                             none                                                                              Picture number in buffer 2                             BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- PIC.sub.-- NUM2                                                      0x17                                                                              (7:0)                                                                             none                                                                              Picture number in buffer 3                             BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- TEMP.sub.-- REF                                                      0x18                                                                              (4:0)                                                                             0x00                                                                              Temporal reference from stream                         __________________________________________________________________________

                                      TABLE C.2.4                                 __________________________________________________________________________    16/23 Test Registers                                                                             Reset                                                      Register Name                                                                            Access                                                                            Bits                                                                              State                                                                             Function                                               __________________________________________________________________________    BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- PRES.sub.-- FLAG                                                     0x80                                                                               0! 0   Presentation flag                                      BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- EXP.sub.-- TR                                                        0x81                                                                               4:0!                                                                             0xFF                                                                              Expected temporal reference                            BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- TR.sub.-- DELTA                                                      0x82                                                                               4:0!                                                                             0x00                                                                              Delta                                                  BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- ARR.sub.-- IX                                                        0x83                                                                               1:0!                                                                             0x0 Arrival buffer index                                   BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- DSP.sub.-- IX                                                        0x84                                                                               1:0!                                                                             0x0 Display buffer index                                   BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- RDY.sub.-- IX                                                        0x85                                                                               1:0!                                                                             0x0 Ready buffer index                                     BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- BSTATE3                                                              0x88                                                                               1:0!                                                                             0x0 Buffer 3 status                                        BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- BSTATE2                                                              0x87                                                                               1:0!                                                                             0x0 Buffer 2 status                                        BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- BSTATE1                                                              0x88                                                                               1:0!                                                                             0x0 Buffer 1 status                                        BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- INDEX                                                                0x89                                                                               1:0!                                                                             0x0 Current buffer index                                   BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- STATE                                                                0x8A                                                                               4:0!                                                                             0x00                                                                              Buffer manager state                                   EU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- FROMPS                                                               0x8B                                                                               0! 0x0 From PICTURE.sub.-- START                                                     flag                                                   BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- FROMFP                                                               0x8C                                                                               0! 0x0 From FLUSH.sub.-- TOKEN.flag                           __________________________________________________________________________

C.2.4 Operation of The State Machine

There are 19 states in the buffer manager's state machine, as detailedin Table C.2.5. These interact as shown in FIG. 157, and also asdescribed in the behavioral description bmlogic.M.

                  TABLE C.2.5                                                     ______________________________________                                        Buffer States                                                                        State           Value                                                  ______________________________________                                               PRES0           0x00                                                          PRES1           0x10                                                          ERROR           0x1F                                                          TEMP.sub.-- REF0                                                                              0x04                                                          TEMP.sub.-- REF1                                                                              0x05                                                          TEMP.sub.-- REF2                                                                              0x06                                                          TEMP.sub.-- REF3                                                                              0x07                                                          ALLOC           0x03                                                          NEW.sub.-- EXP.sub.-- TR                                                                      0x0D                                                          SET.sub.-- ARR.sub.-- IX                                                                      0x0E                                                          NEW.sub.-- PIC.sub.-- NUM                                                                     0x0F                                                          FLUSH           0x01                                                          DRQ             0x0B                                                          TOKEN           0x0C                                                          OUTPUT.sub.-- TAIL                                                                            0x08                                                          VACATE.sub.-- RDY                                                                             0x17                                                          USE.sub.-- RDY  0x0A                                                          VACATE.sub.-- DISP                                                                            0x09                                                          PICTURE.sub.-- END                                                                            0x02                                                   ______________________________________                                    

C.2.4.1 The Reset State

The reset state is PRES0, with flags set to zero such that the main loopcirculated initially.

C.2.4.2 The Main Loop

The main loop of the state machine comprises the states shown in FIG.153 (high-lighted in the main diagram--FIG. 152). States PRES0 and PRES1are concerned with detecting a picture clock via the signal presflg. Twocycles are allowed for the tests involved since they all depend on thevalue of rdyst, the adder output signal described in C.2.3.2.4. If apresentation flag is detected, all of the buffers are examined forpossible `readiness`, otherwise the state machine just advances to stateDRQ. Each cycle around the PRES0-PRES1 loop examines a different buffer,checking for full and ready conditions. If these are met, the previousready buffer (if one exists) is cleared, the new ready buffer isallocated and its status is updated. This process is repeated until allbuffers have been examined (index==max buf) and the state then advances.A buffer is deemed to be ready for display when any of the following istrue:

    (pic.sub.-- num>pres.sub.-- num)&&((pic.sub.-- num-pres.sub.-- num)>=128)

    or

    (pic.sub.-- num<pres.sub.-- num)&&((pres.sub.-- num-pic.sub.-- num)<=128)

    or

    pic.sub.-- num==pres.sub.-- num

State DRQ checks for a request for a display buffer (drq₋₋ valid₋₋ reg&& disp₋₋ acc₋₋ reg). If there is no request the state advances(normally to state TOKEN--as will be described later). Otherwise, adisplay buffer index is issued as follows. If there is no ready buffer,the previous index is re-issued or, if there is no previous displaybuffer, a null index (zero) is issued. If a buffer is ready for display,its index is issued and its state is updated. If necessary, the previousdisplay buffer is cleared. The state machine then advances as before.

State TOKEN is the typical option for completing the main loop. If thereis valid input and the output is not stalled, tokens are examined forstrategic values (described in later sections), otherwise controlreturns to state PRES0.

Control only diverges from the main loop when certain conditions aremet. These are described in the following sections.

C.2.4.3 Allocating The Ready Buffer Index

If during the PRES0-PRES1 loop a buffer is determined to be ready, anyprevious ready buffer needs to be vacated because only one buffer can bedesignated ready at any time. State VACATE₋₋ RDY clears the old readybuffer by setting its state to VACANT, and it resets the buffer index to1 so that when control returns to the PRES0 state, all buffers will betested for readiness. The reason for this is that the index is by nowpointing at the previous ready buffer (for the purpose of clearing it)and there is no record of our intended new ready buffer index. It isnecessary, therefore, to re-test all of the buffers.

C.2.4.4 Allocating The Display Buffer Index

Allocation of the display buffer index takes place either directly fromstate DRQ (state USE₋₋ RDY) or via state VACATE₋₋ DISP which clears theold display buffer state. The chosen display buffer is flagged as IN₋₋USE, the value of rdy₋₋ buf is set to zero, and the index is reset to 1to return to state DRQ. Moreover, disp₋₋ buf is given the required indexand the two-wire interface wires (disp₋₋ valid and drq₋₋ acc) arecontrolled accordingly. Control returns to state DRQ only so that thedecision between states TOKEN, FLUSH and ALLOC does not need to be madein state USE₋₋ RDY.

C.2.4.5 Operation when PICTURE₋₋ END Received

On receipt of a PICTURE₋₋ END token, control transfers from state TOKENto state PICTURE₋₋ END where, if the index is not already pointing atthe current arrival buffer, it is set to point there so that its statuscan be updated. Assuming both out₋₋ acc₋₋ reg and en₋₋ full are true,status can be updated as described below. If not, control remains instate PICTURE₋₋ END until they are both true. The en₋₋ full signal issupplied by the write address generator to indicate that the swingbuffer has swung, i.e., the last block has been successfully written andit is, therefore, safe to update the buffer status.

The just-completed buffer is tested for readiness and given the statuseither FULL or READY depending on the result of the test. If it isready, rdy₋₋ buf is given the value of its index and the set₋₋ la₋₋ evsignal (late arrival event) is set high (indicating that the expecteddisplay has got ahead in time of the decoding). The new value of arr₋₋buf now becomes zero and, if the previous ready buffer needs its statusclearing, the index is set to point there and control moves to stateVACATE₋₋ RDY. Otherwise, the index is reset to 1 and control returns tothe start of the main loop.

C.2.4.6 Operation When PICTURE₋₋ START Received (Allocation of ArrivalBuffer)

When a PICTURE₋₋ START token arrives during state TOKEN, the flag from₋₋ps is set, causing the basic state machine loop to be changed such thatstate ALLOC is visited instead of state TOKEN. State ALLOC is concernedwith allocating an arrival buffer (into which the arriving picture datacan be written), and cycles through the buffers until it finds one whosestatus is VACANT. A buffer will only be allocated if out₋₋ acc₋₋ reg ishigh since it is output on the data two-wire interface. Accordingly,cycling around the loop will continue until this is indeed the case.Once a suitable arrival buffer has been found, the index is allocated toarr₋₋ buf and its status is flagged as IN₋₋ USE. Index is set to 1, theflag from₋₋ ps is reset, and the state is set to advance to NEW₋₋ EXP₋₋TR. A check is made on the picture's index (contained in the wordfollowing the PICTURE₋₋ START) to determine if it is the same as targ₋₋ix (the target index specified at setup) and, if so, set₋₋ if+₋₋ ev(index found event) is set high.

The three states NEW₋₋ EXP₋₋ TR, SET₋₋ ARR₋₋ IX and NEW₋₋ PIC₋₋ NUM setup the new expected temporal reference and picture number for theincoming data. The middle state just sets the index to be arr₋₋ buf sothat the correct picture number register is updated (note that this₋₋pnum is also updated). Control then proceeds to state OUTPUT₋₋ TAILwhich outputs data (assuming favorable two-wire interface signals) untila low extension is encountered. At this point, the main loop isre-started. This means that whole data blocks (64 items) are output, inbetween which, there are no tests for presentation flags or displayrequests.

C.2.4.7 Operation When FLUSH Received

A FLUSH token in the data stream indicates that sequence information(presentation number, picture number, rst₋₋ fld) should be reset. Thiscan only occur when all of the data leading up to the FLUSH has beencorrectly processed. Accordingly, it is necessary, having received aFLUSH, to monitor the status of all of the buffers until it is certainthat all frames have been handed over to the display, i.e., all but oneof the buffers have status EMPTY, and the other is IN₋₋ USE (as thedisplay buffer). At that point, a "new sequence" can safely be used.

When a FLUSH token is detected in state TOKEN, the flag from₋₋ fl isset, causing the basic state machine loop to be changed such that stateFLUSH is visited instead of state TOKEN. State FLUSH examines the statusof each buffer in turn, waiting for it to become VACANT or IN₋₋ USE asdisplay. The state machine simply cycles around the loop until thecondition is true, then increments its index and repeats the processuntil all of the buffers have been visited. When the last bufferfulfills the condition, presentation number, picture number, and all ofthe temporal reference registers assume their reset values rst₋₋ fld isset to 1. The flag from₋₋ fl is reset and the normal main loop operationis resumed.

C.2.4.8 Operation When TEMPORAL₋₋ REFERENCE Received

When a TEMPORAL₋₋ REFERENCE token is encountered, a check is made on theH.261 bit and, if set, the four states TEMP₋₋ REF0 to TEMP₋₋ REF3 arevisited. These perform the following operations:

TEMP₋₋ REF0:temp₋₋ ref=in₋₋ data₋₋ reg;

TEMP₋₋ REF1:delta=temp₋₋ ref-exp₋₋ tr;index=arr₋₋ buf;

TEMP₋₋ REF2:exp₋₋ tr=delta+exp₋₋ tr;

TEMP₋₋ REF3:pic₋₋ num i!=this₋₋ pnum+delta;index=1.

C.2.4.9 Other Tokens and Tails

State TOKEN passes control to state OUTPUT₋₋ TAIL in all cases otherthan those outlined above. Control remains here until the last word ofthe token is encountered (in₋₋ extn₋₋ reg is low) and the main loop isthen re-entered.

C.2.5 Applications Notes

C.2.5.1 State Machine Stalling Buffer Manager Input

This requirement repeatedly check for the "asynchronous" timing eventsof picture clock and display buffer request. The necessity of having thebuffer manager input stalled during these checks means that when thereis a continuous supply of data at the input to the buffer manager, therewill be a restriction on the data rate through the buffer manager. Atypical sequence of states may be PRES0, PRES1, DRQ, TOKEN, OUTPUT₋₋TAIL, each, with the exception of OUTPUT₋₋ TAIL, lasting one cycle. Thismeans that for each block of 64 data items, there will be an overhead of3 cycles during which the input is stalled (during states PRES0, PRES1and DRQ) thereby slowing the write rate by 3/64 or approximately 5%.This number may occasionally increase to up to 13 cycles of overheadwhen auxiliary branches of the state machine are executed underworst-case conditions. Note that such large overheads will only apply ona once-per-frame basis.

C.2.5.2 Presentation Number Behavior During An Access

The particular embodiment of the bm₋₋ pres illustrated by the schematicshown in C.2.3.2.4 means that presentation number free-runs during upiaccesses. If presentation number is required to be the same when accessis relinquished as it was when access was gained, this can be effectedby reading presentation number after access is granted, and writing itback just before it is relinquished. Note that this is asynchronous, soit may be desirable to repeat the accesses several times to furtherensure effectiveness.

C.2.5.3 H261 Temporal Reference Numbers

The module bm₋₋ tref (not shown) should be included in the bmlogic. TheH.261 temporal reference values are correctly processed by directingdelta input from the bmtref to the bm₋₋ stus module. The delta input canbe tied to zero if the frames are always sequential.

SECTION C.3 Write Address Generation

C.3.1 Introduction

The function of the write address generation hardware, in accordancewith the present invention, is to produce block addresses for data to bewritten away to the buffers. This takes account of buffer baseaddresses, the component indicated in the stream, horizontal andvertical sampling within a macroblock, picture dimensions, and codingstandard. Data arrives in macroblbck form, but must be stored so thatlines may be retrieved easily for display.

C.3.2 Functional overview

Each time a new block arrives in the data stream (indicated by a DATAtoken), the write address generator is required to produce a new blockaddress. It is not necessary to produce the address immediately, becauseup to 64 data words can be stored by the DRAM interface (in the swingbuffer) before the address is actually needed. This means that thevarious address components can be added to a running total in successivecycles, and thus, hence obviating the need for any hardware multipliers.The macroblock counter function is effected by storing strategicterminal values and running counts in the register file, these being theoperands for comparisons and conditional updates after each blockaddress calculation.

Considering the picture format shown in FIG. 161, expected addresssequences can be derived for both standard and H.261-like data streams.These are shown below. Note that the format does not actually conform tothe H.261 specification because the slices are not wide enough (3macroblocks rather than 11) but the same "half-picture-width-slice"concept is used here for convenience and the sequence is assumed to be"H.261-type". Data arrives as full macroblocks, 4:2:0 in the exampleshown, and each component is stored in its own area of the specifiedbuffer.

    ______________________________________                                                 Standard address sequence:                                                    000,001,00C,00D,100,200;                                                      002,003,00E,00F,101,201;                                                      004,005,010,011,102,202;                                                      006,007,012,013,103,203;                                                      008,009,014,015,104,105:                                                      00A,00B,016,017,105,205;                                                      018,019,024,025,106,107;                                                      01A,01B,026 . . .                                                             . . .                                                                         080,081,08C,080,122,222;                                                      082,083,08E,08F,123,223;                                                      H261 type sequence:                                                           000,001,00C,00D,100,200;                                                      002,003,00E,00F,101,201;                                                      004,005,010,011,102,202:                                                      018,019,024,025,106,107;                                                      01A,01B,026,027,107,207;                                                      01C,01D,028,029,108,208;                                                      030,031,03C,03D,10C,20C,                                                      032,033,03E,03F,10D,20D;                                                      034,035,040,041,10E,20E;                                                      006,007,012,013,103,203;                                                      008.009,014,015,104,105;                                                      00A,00B,016,017,105,205;                                                      01E,01F,02A,02B,109,209;                                                      020,021,02C,020,10A,20A;                                                      022,023,02E,02F,10B,20B;                                                      036,037,042,043,10F,20F;                                                      038,039,044,045,110,210;                                                      03A,03B,046,047,111,211;                                                      048,049,054,055,112,212;                                                      04A,04B,056 . . .                                                             . . .                                                                         06A,06B,076,077,11D,21D;                                                      07E,07F,0BA,0BB,121,221;                                                      080,081,080,08D,122,222;                                                      082,083,08E,08F,123;223;                                             ______________________________________                                    

C.3.3 Architecture

C.3.3.1 Interfaces

C.3.3.1.1 Interface to buffer manager

The buffer manager outputs data and the buffer index directly to thewrite address generator. This is performed under the control of atwo-wire-interface. In some ways, it is possible to consider the writeaddress generator block as an extension of the buffer manager becausethe two are very closely linked. They do, however, operate from twoseparate (but similar) clock generators.

C.3.3.1.2 Interface to dramif

The write address generator provides data and addresses for the DRAMinterface. Each of these has their own two-wire-interface, and thedramif uses each of them in different clock regimes. In particular, theaddress is clocked into the dramif on a clock which is not related tothe write address generator clock. It is, therefore, synchronized at theoutput.

C.3.3.1.3 Microprocessor Interface

The write address generator uses three bits of microprocessor addressspace together with 8-bit data bus and read and write strobes. There isa single select bit for register access.

C.3.3.1.4 Events

The write address generator is capable of producing five differentevents. Two are in response to picture size information appearing in thedata stream (hrbs and vmbs), and three are in response to DEFINE₋₋SAMPLING tokens (one event for each component.

C.3.3.2 Basic Structure

The structure of the write address generator is shown in the schematicwaddrgen.sch. It comprises a datapath, some controlling logic, andsnoopers and synchronization.

C.3.3.2.1 The Datapath (bwadpath)

The datapath is of the type described in Chapter C.5 of this document,comprising an 18-bit adder/subtractor and register file (see C.3.3.4),and producing a zero flag (based on the adder output) for use in thecontrol logic.

C.3.3.2.2 The Controlling Logic

The controlling logic of the present invention consists of hardware togenerate all of the register file load and drive signals, the addercontrol signals, the two-wire-interface signals, and also includes thewritable control registers.

C.3.3.2.3 Snoopers and Synchronization

Super snoopers exist on both the data and address ports. Snoopers in thedatapaths, controlled as super-snoopers from the zcells. The address hassynchronization between the write address generator clock and thedramif's "clk" regime. Syncifs are used in the zcells for the two-wireinterface signals, and simplified synchronizers are used in the datapathfor the address.

C.3.3.3 Controlling Logic and State Machine

C.3.3.3.1 Input/Output Block (wa inout)

This block contains the input and two output two-wire interfaces,together with latches for the input data (for token decode) and arrivalbuffer index (for decoding four ways).

C.3.3.3.2 Two Cycle Control Block (wa fc)

The flag fc (first cycle) is maintained here and indicates whether thestate machine is in the middle of a two-cycle operation (i.e., anoperation involving an add).

C.3.3.3.3. Component Count (wa comp)

Separate addresses are required for data blocks in each component, andthis block maintains the current component under consideration based onthe type of DATA header received in the input stream.

C.3.3.3.4 Modulo-3 Control (wa mod3)

When generating address sequences for H.261 data streams, it isnecessary to count three rows of macroblocks to half way along thescreen (see C.3.2). This is effected by maintaining a modulo-3 counter,incremented each time a new row of macroblocks is visited.

C.3.3.3.5 Control Registers (wa uregs)

Module wa₋₋ uregs contains the setup register and the coding standardregister--the latter is loaded from the data stream. The setup registeruses 3 bits: QCIF (lsb) and the maximum component expected in the datastream (bits 1 and 2). The access bit also resides in this block(synchronized as usual), with the "stopped" bits being derived at thenext level up the hierarchy (walogic) as the OR of the access bit andthe event stop bits. Microprocessor address decoding is done by theblock wa₋₋ udec which takes read and write strobes, a select wire, andthe lower two bits of the address bus.

C.3.3.3.6 Controlling State Machine (wa state)

The logic in this block is split into several distinct areas. The satedecode, new state encode, derivation of "intermediate" logic signals,datapath control signals (drivea, driveb, load, adder controls andselect signals), multiplexer controls, two-wire-interface controls, andthe five event signals.

C.3.3.3.7 Event Generation

The five event bits are generated as a result of certain tokens arrivingat the input. It is important that, in each case, the entire token isreceived before any events are generated because the event serviceroutines perform calculations based on the new values received. For thisreason, each of the bits is delayed by a whole cycle before being inputto the event hardware.

C.3.3.4 Register Address Map

There are two sets of registers in the write address generator block.These are the top-level setup type registers located in the standardcell section, and keyholed datapath registers. These are listed in TableC.3.1 and C.3.2, respectively.

                  TABLE C.3.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        Top-Level Registers                                                                                         Reset                                           Register Name  Address Bits   State                                                                              Function                                   ______________________________________                                        BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COD.sub.-- STD                                                        0x4     2      0    Cod std from data                                                             stream                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- ACCESS                                                                0x5     1      0    Access bit                                 BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- CTL1                                                                  0x6     3      0    max component                                                                  2:1! and                                                                     QCIF 0!                                    BU.sub.-- WA.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- SNP2                                                         0xB0    8           snooper on the                             BU.sub.-- WA.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- SNP1                                                         0xB1    8           write address                              BU.sub.-- WA.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- SNP0                                                         0xB2    8           generator address                                                             c/p.                                       BU.sub.-- WA.sub.-- DATA.sub.-- SNP1                                                         0xB4    8           snooper on data                            BU.sub.-- WA.sub.-- DATA.sub.-- SNP0                                                         0xB5    8           output of WA                               ______________________________________                                    

    __________________________________________________________________________                                 Keyhole                                          Keyhole Register Name        Address                                                                           Bits                                                                             Comments                                  __________________________________________________________________________    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER0.sub.-- BASF.sub.-- MSB                                                      0x85                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER0.sub.-- BASF.sub.-- MID                                                      0x86                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER0.sub.-- BASF.sub.-- LSB                                                      0x87                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER1.sub.-- BASF.sub.-- MSB                                                      0x99                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER1.sub.-- BASF.sub.-- MID                                                      0x8a                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER1.sub.-- BASF.sub.-- LSB                                                      0x8b                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER2.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MSB                                                      0x8d                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER2.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MID                                                      0x8e                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER2.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- LSB                                                      0x8f                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x91                                                                              2  Test only                                 BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                     0x92                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x93                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x95                                                                              2  Test only                                 BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                     0x96                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x97                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x99                                                                              2  Test only                                 BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                     0x9a                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x9b                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x9d                                                                              2  Test only                                 BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                     0x9e                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x9f                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                     0xa1                                                                              2  Test only                                 BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                     0xa2                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                     0xa3                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- VMSADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                     0xa5                                                                              2  Test only                                 BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                     0xa6                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                     0xa7                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- VBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                                   0xa9                                                                              2  Test only                                 BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- VBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                                   0xaa                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- VBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                                   0xab                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCKS.sub.-- MSB            0xad                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCKS.sub.-- MID            0xae                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCKS.sub.-- LSB            0xaf                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCKS.sub.-- MSB            0xb1                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCKS.sub.-- MID            0xb2                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCKS.sub.-- LSB            0xb3                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCKS.sub.-- MSB            0xb5                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCKS.sub.-- MID            0xb6                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCKS.sub.-- LSB            0xb7                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- HB.sub.-- MSB                                                                       0xb9                                                                              2  Test only                                 BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- HB.sub.-- MID                                                                       0xba                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- HB.sub.-- LSB                                                                       0xbb                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MSB                                                      0xbd                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MID                                                      0xbe                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- LSB                                                      0xbf                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MSB                                                      0xc1                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MID                                                      0xc2                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- LSB                                                      0xc3                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MSB                                                      0xc5                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MID                                                      0xc6                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- LSB                                                      0xc7                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- SCRATCH.sub.-- MSB                                                                  0xc9                                                                              2  Test only                                 BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- SCRATCH.sub.-- MID                                                                  0xca                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- SCRATCH.sub.-- LSB                                                                  0xcb                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- WIDE.sub.-- MSB                                                          0xcd                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- WIDE.sub.-- MID                                                          0xce                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- WIDE.sub.-- LSB                                                          0xcf                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- HIGH.sub.-- MSB                                                          0xd1                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- HIGH.sub.-- MID                                                          0xd2                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- HIGH.sub.-- LSB                                                          0xd3                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MSB               0xd5                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MID               0xd6                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- LSB               0xd7                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MSB               0xd9                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MID               0xda                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- LSB               0xdb                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MSB               0xdd                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MID               0xde                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- LSB               0xdf                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- MSB   0xe1                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- MID   0xe2                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- LSB   0xe3                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- MSB   0xe5                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- MID   0xe6                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- LSB   0xe7                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- MSB   0xe9                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- MOD   0xea                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- LSB   0xeb                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- IN.sub.--          MB.sub.-- MSB                0xed                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- IN.sub.--          MB.sub.-- MID                0xee                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- IN.sub.--          MB.sub.-- LSB                0xef                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- IN.sub.--          MB.sub.-- MSB                0xf1                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- IN.sub.--          MB.sub.-- MID                0xf2                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- IN.sub.--          MB.sub.-- LSB                0xf3                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- IN.sub.--          MB.sub.-- MSB                0xf5                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- IN.sub.--          MB.sub.-- MID                0xf6                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW.sub.-- IN.sub.--          MB.sub.-- LSB                0xf7                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MSB               0cf9                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MID               0xfa                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- LSB               0xfb                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MSB               0xfd                                                                              2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MID               0xfe                                                                              8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- LSB               0xff                                                                              8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MSB               0x101                                                                             2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MID               0x102                                                                             8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- LSB               0x103                                                                             8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                       0x105                                                                             2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                       0x106                                                                             8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                       0x107                                                                             8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                       0x109                                                                             2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                       0x10a                                                                             8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                       0x10b                                                                             8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                       0x10d                                                                             2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                       0x10e                                                                             8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                       0x10f                                                                             8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                         0x111                                                                             2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                         0x112                                                                             8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                         0x113                                                                             8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                         0x115                                                                             2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                         0x116                                                                             8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                         0x117                                                                             8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                         0x119                                                                             2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                         0x11a                                                                             8  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                         0x11b                                                                             8                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- MAXHB                                                                  0x11f                                                                             2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- MAXHB                                                                  0x123                                                                             2  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- MAXHB                                                                  0x127                                                                             2                                            BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- MAXVB                                                                  0x12b                                                                             2  Must be                                   BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- MAXVB                                                                  0x12f                                                                             2  Loaded                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- MAXVB                                                                  0x133                                                                             2                                            __________________________________________________________________________

The keyhole registers fall broadly into two categories. Those which mustbe loaded with picture size parameters prior to any address calculation,and those which contain running totals of various (horizontal andvertical) block and macroblock counts. The picture size parameters maybe loaded in response to any of the interrupts generated by the writeaddress generator, i.e., when any of the picture size or sampling tokensappear in the data stream. Alternatively, if the picture size is knownprior to receiving the data stream, they can be written just afterreset. Example setups are given in Sectionr C.13, and the picture sizeparameter registers are defined in the next section.

C.3.4 Programming the Write Address Generator

The following datapath registers must contain the correct picture sizeinformation before address calculation can proceed. They are illustratedin FIG. 162.

1) WADDR₋₋ HALF₋₋ WIDTH₋₋ IN₋₋ BLOCKS: this defines the half width, inblocks, of the incoming picture.

2) WADDR₋₋ MBS₋₋ WIDE: this defines the width, in macroblocks, of theincoming picture.

3) WADDR₋₋ MBS₋₋ HIGH: this defines the height, in macroblocks, of theincoming picture.

4) WADDR₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ IN₋₋ ROW: this defines the block number of thetop left hand block of the last macroblock in a single, full-width rowof macroblocks. block numbering starts at zero in the top left corner ofthe left-most macroblock, increases across the frame with each block andsubsequently with each following row of blocks within the macroblockrow.

5) WADDR₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ IN₋₋ HALF₋₋ ROW: this is similar to the previousitem, but defines the block number of the top left block in the lastmacroblock in a half-width row of macroblocks.

6) WADDR₋₋ LAST₋₋ ROW₋₋ IN₋₋ MB: this defines the block number of theleft most block in the last row of blocks within a row of macroblocks.

7) WADDR₋₋ BLOCKS₋₋ PER₋₋ MB₋₋ ROW: this defines the total number ofblocks contained in a single, full-width row of macroblocks.

8) WADDR₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ ROW: this defines the top left block address ofthe left-most macroblock in the last row of macroblocks in the picture.

9) WADDR₋₋ HBS: this defines the width in blocks of the incomingpicture.

10) WADDR₋₋ MAXHB: this defines the block number of the right-most blockin a row of blocks in a single macroblock.

11) WADDR₋₋ MAXVB: this defines the height-1, in blocks, of a singlemacroblock.

In addition, the registers defining the organization of the DRAM must beprogrammed. These are the three buffer base registers, and the ncomponent offset registers, where n is the number of components expectedin the data stream (it can be defined in the data stream, and can be 1minimum and 3 maximum).

Note that many of the parameters specify block numbers or blockaddresses. This is because the final address is expected to be a blockaddress, and the calculation is based on a cumulative algorithm.

The screen configuration illustrated in FIG. 162 yields the followingregister values:

1) WADDR₋₋ HALF₋₋ WIDTH₋₋ IN₋₋ BLOCKS=0x16

2) WADDR₋₋ MBS₋₋ WIDE=0x16

3) WADDR₋₋ MBS₋₋ HIGH=0x12

4) WADDR₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ IN₋₋ ROW=0x2A

5) WADDR₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ IN₋₋ HALF₋₋ ROW=0x14

6) WADDR₋₋ LAST₋₋ ROW₋₋ IN₋₋ MB=0x2C

7) WADDR₋₋ BLOCKS₋₋ PER₋₋ MB₋₋ ROW=0x58

8) WADDR₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ ROW=0x5D8

9) WADDR₋₋ HBS=0x2C

10) WADDR₋₋ MAXVB=1

11) WADDR₋₋ MAXHB=1

C.3.5 Operation of The State Machine

There are 19 states in the buffer manager's state machine, as detailedin Table C.3.3. These interact as shown in FIG. 164, and also asdescribed in the behavioral description, bmlogic.M.

                  TABLE C.3.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        Write Address Generator States                                                State                   Value                                                 ______________________________________                                        IDLE                    0x00                                                  DATA                    0x10                                                  CODING.sub.-- STANDARD  0x0C                                                  HORZ.sub.-- MBS0        0x07                                                  HORZ.sub.-- MBS1        0xC6                                                  VERT.sub.-- MBS0        0xC8                                                  VERT.sub.-- MBS1        0xCA                                                  OUTPUT.sub.-- TAIL      0x08                                                  HB                      0x11                                                  MB0                     0x1D                                                  MB1                     0x12                                                  MB2                     0x1E                                                  MB3                     0x13                                                  MB4                     0x0E                                                  MB5                     0x14                                                  MB6                     0x15                                                  MB4A                    0x18                                                  MB48                    0x09                                                  MB4C                    0x17                                                  MB4D                    0x16                                                  ADDR1                   0x19                                                  ADDR2                   0x1A                                                  ADDR3                   0x1B                                                  ADDR4                   0x1C                                                  ADDR5                   0x03                                                  HSAMP                   0x05                                                  VSAMP                   0x04                                                  PIC.sub.-- ST1          0x0f                                                  PIC.sub.-- ST2          0x01                                                  PlC.sub.-- ST3          0x02                                                  ______________________________________                                    

C.3.5.1 Calculation of the Address

The major section of the write address generator state machine isillustrated down the left hand side of FIG. 164. On receipt of a DATAtoken, the state machine moves from state IDLE to state ADDR1 and thenthrough to state ADDR5, from which an 18-bit block address is outputwith two-wire-interface controls. The calculations performed by thestates ADDR1 through to ADDR5 are:

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ SCRATCH=BU₋₋ BUFFERn₋₋ BASE+BU₋₋ COMPm₋₋ OFFSET;

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ SCRATCH=BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ SCRATCH+BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ VMBADDR;

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ SCRATCH=BU₋₋ WADDR--SCRATCH+BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ HMBADDR;

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ SCRATCH=BU+WADDR₋₋ SCRATCH+BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ VBADDR;

out₋₋ addr=BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ SCRATCH+BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ HB;

The registers used are defined as follows:

1) BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ VMBADDR: the block address (the top left block) of theleft-most macroblock of the row of macroblocks in which the block whoseaddress is being calculated is contained.

2) BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ HKBADDR: the block address (top left block) of the topmacroblock of the column of macroblocks in which the block whose addressis being calculated is contained.

3) BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ VBADDR: the block address, within the macroblock row, ofthe left-most block of the row of blocks in which the block whoseaddress is being calculated is contained.

4) BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ HB: the horizontal block number, within the macroblock,of the block whose address is being calculated.

5) BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ SCRATCH: the scratch register used for temporary storageof intermediate results.

Considering FIG. 163, and taking, for example, the calculation of theblock whose address is 0x62D, the following sequence of calculationswill take place;

SCRATCH=BUFFERn₋₋ BASE+COMPm₋₋ OFFSET; (assume 0)

SCRATCH=0+0x5D8;

SCRATCH=0x5D8+0x28;

SCRATCH=0x600+0x2C;

block address=0x62C+1=0x62D;

The contents of the various registers are illustrated in the Figure.

C.3.5.2 Calculation of New Screen Location Parameters

When the address has been output, the state machine continues to performcalculations in order to update the various screen location parametersdescribed above. The states HB and MB0 through to MB6 do thecalculations, transferring control at some point to state DATA fromwhich the reminder of the DATA Token is output.

These states proceed in pairs, the first of a pair calculating thedifference between the current count and its terminal value and, hence,generating a zero flag. The second of the pair either resets theregister or adds a fixed (based on values in the setup registers derivedfrom screen size) offset. In each case, if the count under considerationhas reached its terminal value (i.e., the zero flag is set), controlcontinues down the "MB" sequence of states. If not, all counts aredeemed to be correct (ready for the next address calculation) andcontrol transfers to state DATA.

Note that all states which involve the use of an addition or subtractiontake two cycles to complete (allowing the use of a standard,ripple-carry adder), this being effected by the use of a flag, fc (firstcycle) which alternates between 1 and 0 for adder-based states.

All of the address calculation and screen location calculation statesallow data to be output assuming favorable two-wire interfaceconditions.

C.3.5.2.1 Calculations for Standard (MPEG-style) Sequences

The sequence of operations is as follows (in which the zero flag isbased on the output of the adder):

    ______________________________________                                        states HB and MBO:                                                            scratch = hb - maxhb;                                                         if (z)                                                                        hb = 0;                                                                       else                                                                          hb = hb + 1                                                                   new.sub.-- state = DATA;                                                      )                                                                             states MB1 and MB2:                                                           scratch = vb.sub.-- addr - last.sub.-- row.sub.-- in.sub.-- mb;               if (z)                                                                        vb.sub.-- addr = 0;                                                           else                                                                          (                                                                             vb.sub.-- addr = vb.sub.-- addr + width.sub.-- in.sub.-- blocks;              new.sub.-- state = DATA;                                                      )                                                                             states MB3 and MB4:                                                           scratch = hmb.sub.-- addr - last.sub.-- mb.sub.-- in.sub.-- row;              if (z)                                                                        hmb.sub.-- addr = 0;                                                          else                                                                          (                                                                             hmb.sub.-- addr = hmb.sub.-- addr + maxhb;                                    new.sub.-- state = DATA;                                                      )                                                                             states MB5 and MB6:                                                           scratch = vmb.sub.-- addr - last.sub.-- mb.sub.-- row;                        if (|Z)                                                                       vmb.sub.-- addr = vmb.sub.-- addr + blocks.sub.-- per.sub.-- mb.sub.--        row;                                                                          ______________________________________                                    

(vmb₋₋ addr is reset after a PICTURE₋₋ START token is detected, ratherthan when the end of a picture is inferred from the calculations).

C.3.5.2.2 Calculations for H.261 Sequences

The sequence for H.261 calculations diverges from the standard sequenceat state MB4:

    ______________________________________                                        states HB and MBO:-as above                                                   states MB1 and MB2:-as above                                                  states MB3 and MB4:                                                           scratch = hmb.sub.-- addr - last.sub.-- mb.sub.-- in.sub.-- row;              if (z & (mod3==2)) /*end of slice on right of screen*/                        hmb.sub.-- addr - 0;                                                          new.sub.-- state - MB5;                                                       )                                                                             else if (z) /*end of row on right of screen*/                                 hmb.sub.-- addr = halt.sub.-- width.sub.-- in.sub.-- blocks;                  new.sub.-- state = MB4A;                                                      )                                                                             else                                                                          (                                                                             scratch = hmb.sub.-- addr - last.sub.-- mb.sub.-- in.sub.-- half.sub.--       row;                                                                          new-state = MB4B;                                                             }                                                                             state M64A:                                                                   vmb.sub.-- add4 = vmb.sub.-- addr + blocks.sub.-- per.sub.-- mb.sub.--        row;                                                                          new.sub.-- state = DATA;                                                      state (MB4) and MB4B:                                                         (scratch = hmb.sub.-- addr - last.sub.-- mb.sub.-- in.sub.-- half.sub.--      row;)                                                                         if (z & (mod3==2)) /*end of slice on left of screen*/                         (                                                                             hmb.sub.-- addr = hmb.sub.-- addr + maxhb;                                    new.sub.-- state = MB4C;                                                      }                                                                             else if (z) /*end of row on left of screen*/                                  {                                                                             hmb.sub.-- addr = 0;                                                          new.sub.-- state = MB4A;                                                      }                                                                             else                                                                          {                                                                             hmb.sub.-- addr = hmb.sub.-- addr + maxhb;                                    new.sub.-- state = DATA;                                                      }                                                                             states MB4C and MB4D:                                                         vmb.sub.-- addr = vmb.sub.-- addr - blocks.sub.-- per.sub.-- mb.sub.--        row;                                                                          vmb.sub.-- addr = vmb.sub.-- addr - blocks.sub.-- per.sub.-- mb.sub.--        row;                                                                          new.sub.-- state = DATA;                                                      states MB5and MB6:- as above                                                  ______________________________________                                    

C.3.5.3 Operation on PICTURE₋₋ START Token

When a PICTURE₋₋ START token is received, control passes to state PIC₋₋ST1 where the vb₋₋ addr register (BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ VBADDR) is reset to 0.Each of states PIC₋₋ ST2 and PIC₋₋ ST3 are then visited, once for eachcomponent, resetting hmb₋₋ addr and vmb₋₋ addr respectively. Controlthen returns, via state OUTPUT₋₋ TAIL, to IDLE.

C.3.5.3 Operation on PICTURE₋₋ START Token

When a PICTURE₋₋ START token is received, control passes to state PIC₋₋ST1 where the vb₋₋ addr register (BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ VBADDR) is reset to 0.Each of states PIC₋₋ ST2 and PIC₋₋ ST3 are then visited, once for eachcomponent, resetting hmb₋₋ addr and vmb₋₋ addr, respectively. Controlthen returns, via state OUTPUT₋₋ TAIL, to IDLE.

C.3.5.4 Operation on DEFINE₋₋ SAMPLING Token

When a DEFINE₋₋ SAMPLING token is received, the component register isloaded with the least significant two bits of the input data. Inaddition, via states HSAMP and VSAMP, the maxhb and maxvb registers forthat component are loaded. Furthermore, the appropriate define samplingevent bit is triggered (delayed by one cycle to allow the whole token tobe written).

C.3.5.5 Operation on HORIZONTAL₋₋ MBS and VERTICAL₋₋ MBS

When each of HORIZONTAL₋₋ MBS and VERTICAL₋₋ MBS arrive, the 14-bitvalue contained in the token is written, in two cycles, to theappropriate register. The relevant event bit is triggered, delayed byone cycle.

C.3.5.6 Other Tokens

The CODING₋₋ STANDARD token is detected and causes the top-level BU₋₋WADDR₋₋ COD₋₋ STD register to be written with the input data. This isdecoded and the nh261 flag (not H261) is hardwired to the buffer managerblock. All other tokens cause control to move to state OUTPUT₋₋ TAIL,which accepts data until the token finishes. Note, however, that it doesnot actually output any data.

SECTION C.4 Read Address Generator

C.4.1 Overview

The read address generator of the present invention consists of fourstate machine/datapath blocks. The first, "dline", generates lineaddresses and distributes them to the other three (one for eachcomponent) identical page/block address generators, "dramctls". Allblocks are linked by two wire interfaces. The modes of operation includeall combinations of interlaced/progressive, first field upper/lower, andframe start on upper/lower/both. The Table C.3.4 shows the names,addresses, and reset states of the dispaddr control registers, andChapter C.13 gives a programming example for both address generators.

C.4.2 Line Address Generator (dline)

This block calculates the line start addresses for each component. TableC.3.4 shows the 18 bit datapath registers in dline.

Note the distinction between DISP₋₋ register₋₋ name and ADDR₋₋register₋₋ name DISP₋₋ name registers are in dispaddr only and meansthat the register is specific to the display area to be read out of theDRAM. ADDR₋₋ name means that the register describes something about thestructure of the external buffers.

Operation

The basic operation of dline, ignoring all modes repeats etc. is:

    ______________________________________                                        if (vsync.sub.-- start)/* first active cycle of vsync*/                       comp = 0                                                                      DISP.sub.-- VB.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- COMP comp!=0;                                LINE comp!=BUFFER.sub.-- BASE comp!+0;                                        LINE!comp!=LINE comp!+DISP.sub.-- COMP.sub.-- OFFSET comp!;                   while (VB.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- COMP comp!<DISP.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- COMP comp!      (                                                                             while (line.sub.-- count comp!<8)                                             (                                                                             (                                                                             while (comp<3)                                                                (                                                                             →OUTPUT LINE comp! to dramctl comp!                                    line comp!=LINE comp!+ADDR.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- COMP comp!;                      comp = comp + 1;                                                              )                                                                             line.sub.-- count comp!=line.sub.-- count comp!+1;                            VB.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- COMP comp!=VB.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- COMP comp!+1;            line.sub.-- count comp!==0;                                                   )                                                                             )                                                                             ______________________________________                                    

                                      TABLE C.3.4                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Dispaddr Datapath Registers                                                                  Keyhole                                                        Register Names                                                                            Bus                                                                              Address                                                                              Description                                                                           Comments                                        __________________________________________________________________________    BUFFER.sub.-- BASE0                                                                       A  0x00,01,02,03                                                                        Block address                                                                         These registers                                 BUFFER.sub.-- BASE1                                                                       A  0x04,05,06,07                                                                        of the start of                                                                       must be loaded                                  BUFFER.sub.-- BASE2                                                                       A  0x08,09,0a,0b                                                                        each buffer.                                                                          by the upi before                               DISP.sub.-- COMP.sub.-- OFFSET0                                                           B  0x24,25,26,27                                                                        Offsets from the                                                                      operation can                                   DISP.sub.-- COMP.sub.-- OFFSET1                                                           B  0x28,29,2a,2b                                                                        buffer base to                                                                        begin.                                          DISP.sub.-- COMP.sub.-- OFFSET2                                                           B  0x2c,2d,2e,2f                                                                        where reading                                                                 begins.                                                 DISP.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- COMP0                                                              B  0x30,31,32,33                                                                        Number of                                               DISP.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- COMP1                                                              B  0x34,35,36,37                                                                        vertical blocks                                         DISP.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- COMP2                                                              B  0x38,39,3a,3b                                                                        to be read                                              ADDR.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- COMP0                                                              B  0x3c,3d,3e,3f                                                                        Number of                                               ADDR.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- COMP1                                                              B  0x40,41.42,43                                                                        horizontal                                              ADDR.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- COMP2                                                              B  0x44,45,46,4                                                                         blocks IN THE                                                                 DATA                                                    LINE0       A  0x0c,0d,0e,0f                                                                        Current line                                                                          These registers                                 LINE1       A  0c10,11,12,13                                                                        address are termporary                                  LINE2       A  0x14,15,16,17  locations used                                  DISP.sub.-- VB.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- COMP0                                                    A  0x18,19,1a,1b                                                                        Number of                                                                             by dispaddr.                                    DISP.sub.-- VB.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- COMP1                                                    A  0x1c,1d,1e,1f                                                                        vertical blocks                                                                       Note: All                                       DISP.sub.-- VB.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- COMP2                                                    A  0x20,21,22,3                                                                         remaining to be                                                                       registers are R/                                                      read.   W from the upi                                  __________________________________________________________________________

C.4.3 Dline Control Registers

The above operation is modified by the dispaddr control registers whichare shown in the Table C.4.3 below.

                                      TABLE C.4.3                                 __________________________________________________________________________    CONTROL REGISTERS                                                                                   Reset                                                   Register Name                                                                              Address                                                                            Bits                                                                              State                                                                             Function                                            __________________________________________________________________________    LINES.sub.-- IN.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW0                                                    0x08  2:0!                                                                             0x07                                                                              These three registers                               LINES.sub.-- IN.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW1                                                    0x09  2:0!                                                                             0x07                                                                              determine the number of                             LINES.sub.-- IN.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW2                                                    0x0a  2:0!                                                                             0x07                                                                              lines (out of 8) of the last                                                  row of blocks to read out                           DISPADDR.sub.-- ACCESS                                                                     0x0b  0! 0x00                                                                              Access bit for dispaddr                             DISADDR.sub.-- CTL0                                                                        0x0c  1:0!                                                                             0x0 SYNC.sub.-- MODE                                    See below for a detailed                                                                         2! 0x0 READ.sub.-- START                                   description of these                                                                             3! 0x1 INTERLACED/PROG                                     control bits       4! 0x0 LSB.sub.-- INVERT                                                      7:5!                                                                             0x0 LINE.sub.-- RPT                                     DISPADDR.sub.-- CTL1                                                                       0x0d  0! 0x1 COMP0HOLD                                           __________________________________________________________________________     Dispaddr Control Registers                                               

C.4.3.1 LINES₋₋ IN₋₋ LAST₋₋ ROW component!

These three registers determine, for each component, the number of linesin the last row of blocks that are to be read. Thus, the height of theread window may be an arbitrary number of lines. This is a back-upfeature since the top, left and right edges of the window are on blockboundaries, and the output controller can clip (discard) excess lines.

C.4.3.2 DISPADDR₋₋ ACCESS

This is the access bit for the whole of dispaddr. On writing a "1" tothis location, dispaddr is halted synchronously to the clocks. The valueread back from the access bit will remain "0" until dispaddr has safelyhalted. Having reached this state, it is safe to perform asynchronousupi accesses to all the dispaddr registers. Note that the upi isactively locked out from the datapath registers until the access bit is"1". In order for access to dispaddr to be achieved without disruptingthe current display or datapath operation, access will only given andreleased under the following circumstances.

Stopping: Access will only be granted if the datapath has finished itscurrent two cycle operation (if it were doing one), and the "safe"signal from the output controller is high. This signal represents thearea on the screen below the display window and is programmed in theoutput controller (not dispaddr). Note: It is, therefore, necessary toprogram the output controller before trying to gain access to dispaddr.

Starting-Access will only be released when "safe" is high, or duringvsync. This ensures that display will not start too close to the activewindow.

This scheme allows the controlling software to request access, polluntil end of display, modify dispaddr, and release access. If thesoftware is too slow and doesn't release the access bit until aftervsync, dispaddr will not start until the next safe period. Border colorwill be displayed during this "lost" picture (rather than rubbish).

C.4.3.3 DISPADDR₋₋ CTL0 7:0!

When reading the following descriptions, it is important to understandthe distinction between interlaced data and an interlaced display.

Interlaced data can be of two forms. The Top-Level Registers supportsfield-pictures (each buffer contains one field), and frames (each buffercontains an entire frame--interlaced or not)

DISPADDR₋₋ CTL0 7:0!contains the following control bits:

SYNC₋₋ MODE 1:0!

With an interlaced display, vsyncs referring to top and bottom fieldsare differentiated by the field₋₋ info pin. In this context, field₋₋info=HIGH meaning the top field. These two control bits determine whichvsyncs dispaddr will request a new display buffer from the buffermanager and, thus, synchronize the fields in the buffers (if the datawere interlaced) with the fields on the display:

0: New Display Buffer On Top Field

1: Bottom Field

2: Both Fields

3: Both Fields

At startup, dispaddr will request a buffer from the buffer manager onevery vsync. Until a buffer is ready, dispaddr will receive a zero (nodisplay) buffer. When it finally gets a good buffer index, dispaddr hasno idea where it is on the display. It may, therefore, be necessary tosynchronize the display startup with the correct vsync.

READ₋₋ START

For interlaced displays at startup, this bit determines on which vsyncdisplay will actually start. Furthermore, having received a displaybuffer index, dispaddr may "sit out" the current vsync in order to lineup fields on the display with the fields in the buffer.

INTERLACED/PROGRESSIVE

0: Progressive

1: Interlaced

In progressive mode, all lines are read out of the display area of thebuffer. In interlaced mode, only alternate lines are read. Whetherreading starts on the first or second line depends on field₋₋ info. Notethat with (interlaced) field-pictures, the system wants to read alllines from each buffer so the setting of this bit would be progressive.The mapping between field₋₋ info and first/second line start may beinverted by lsb₋₋ invert (so named for historical reasons).

LSB₋₋ INVERT

When set, this bit inverts the field₋₋ info signal seen by the linecounter. Thus, reading may be started on the correct line of a frame andaligned to the display regardless of the convention adopted by theencoder, the display or the Top-Level Registers.

LINE₋₋ RPT 2:0!

Each bit, when set, causes the lines of the corresponding component tobe read twice (bit 0 affects component 0 etc.). This forms the firstpart of the vertical unsampling. It is used in the 8 times chromaupsampling required for conversion from QFIF to 601.

COMP0HOLD

This bit is used to program the ratio of the number of lines to be read(as opposed to displayed) for component 0 to those of components 1 and2).

0: Same number of lines, i.e., 4:4:4 data in the buffers.

1: Twice as many component 0 lines, i.e., 4:2:0.

Page/Block Address Generators (dramctls)

When passed a line address, these blocks generate a series of page/lineaddresses and blocks to read along the line. The minimum page width of 8blocks is always assumed and the resulting outputs consist of a pageaddress, a 3 bit line number, a 3 bit block start, and a 3 bit blockstop address. (The line number is calculated by dline and passed throughthe dramctls unmodified). Thus, to read out 48 pixels of line 5 formpage 0xaa starting from the third block from the left (an arbitrarypoint along an arbitrary line), the addresses passed to the DRAMinterface would be:

Page=0xaa

Line=5

Block start=2

Block stop=7

Each of these three machines has 5 datapath registers. These are shownin Table C.3.4. The basic behavior of each dramct1 is:

    __________________________________________________________________________    Block start = 2                                                               Block start = 7                                                               Each of these three machines has 5 datapath registers. These are shown in     Table C.3.4                                                                   The basic behaviour of each dramctl is:-                                      while (true)                                                                  CNT.sub.-- LEFT=0;                                                            GET.sub.-- A.sub.-- NEW.sub.-- LINE.sub.-- ADDRESS from dline;                BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR=input block addr + 0;                                       PAGE.sub.-- ADDR=input.sub.-- page.sub.-- addr + 0;                           CNT.sub.-- LEFT=DISP.sub.-- HBS + 0;                                          while (CNT.sub.-- LEFT > BLOCKS.sub.-- LEFT)                                  {                                                                             BLOCKS.sub.-- LEFT=8-BLOCK ADDR:                                              →output PAGE.sub.-- ADDR, start=BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR, stop=7.             PAGE.sub.-- ADDR=PAGE.sub.-- ADDR + 1;                                        BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR=0;                                                          CNT.sub.-- LEFT=CNT.sub.-- LEFT-BLOCKS.sub.-- LEFT:                           }                                                                             /* Last Page of line */                                                       CNT.sub.-- LEFT=CNT.sub.-- LEFT+BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR:                            CNT.sub.-- LEFT=CNT.sub.-- LEFT-1;                                            →output PAGE.sub.-- ADDR.start=BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR,stop=CNT.sub.--       LEFT                                                                          }                                                                             __________________________________________________________________________

                                      TABLE C.3.5                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Dramctl(0, 1 & 2) Datapath Registers                                                        Keyhole                                                         Register Name                                                                           Bits                                                                              Address                                                                              Description                                                                           Comments                                         __________________________________________________________________________    DISP.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS                                                            A   0x48,49,4a,4b                                                                        The number of                                                                         The register                                     DISP.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS                                                            A   0x4c,4d,4e,4f                                                                        horizantal                                                                            must be loaded                                   DISP.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS                                                            A   0x50,51,52,53                                                                        blocks to be                                                                          before                                                                read. c.f.                                                                            operation can                                                         ADDR.sub.-- HBS                                                                       begin.                                           CNT.sub.-- LEFT0                                                                        A   0x54,55,56,57                                                                        Number of                                                                             These registers                                  CNT.sub.-- LEFT1                                                                        A   0x58,59,5a,5b                                                                        blocks remaining                                                                      are temporary                                    CNT.sub.-- LEFT2                                                                        A   0x5c,5d,5e,5f                                                                        to be read                                                                            locations used                                   PAGE.sub.-- ADDR0                                                                       A   0x60,61,62,63                                                                        The address of                                                                        by dispaddr.                                     PAGE.sub.-- ADDR1                                                                       A   0x64,65,66,67                                                                        the current                                                                           Note: All                                        PAGE.sub.-- ADDR2                                                                       A   0x68,69,6a,6b                                                                        page    registers are R/                                 BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR0                                                                      B   0x6c,6d,6e,6f                                                                        Current block                                                                         W from the upi                                   BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR1                                                                      B   0x70,71,72,73                                                                        address                                                  BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR2                                                                      B   0x74,75,76,77                                                   BLOCKS.sub.-- LEFT0                                                                     B   0x78,79,7a,7b                                                                        Blocks left in                                           BLOCKS.sub.-- LEFT1                                                                     B   0x7c,7d,7e,7f                                                                        current page                                             BLOCKS.sub.-- LEFT2                                                                     B   0x80,81,82,83                                                   __________________________________________________________________________

Programming

The following 15 dispaddr registers must be programmed before operationcan begin.

BUFFER₋₋ BASE0,1,2

DISP₋₋ COMP₋₋ OFFSET0,1,2

DISP₋₋ VBS₋₋ COMP0,1,2

ADDR₋₋ HBS₋₋ COMP0,1,2

DISP₋₋ COMP0,1,2₋₋ HBS

Using the reset state of the dispaddr control registers will give a 4:2ninterlaced display with no line repeats synchronized and starting on thetop field (field₋₋ info=HIGH). FIG. 159, "Buffer 0 Containing a SIF (22by 18 macroblocks) picture," shows a typical buffer setup for a SIFpicture. (This example is covered in more detail in Section C.13). Notethat in this example, DISP₋₋ HBS₋₋ COMPn is equal to ADDR₋₋ HBS₋₋ COMPnand likewise the vertical registers DISP₋₋ VBS₋₋ COMPn and theequivalent write address generator register are equal, i.e., the area tobe read is the entire buffer.

Windowing with the Read Address Generator

It is possible to program dispaddr such that it will read only a portion(window) of the buffer. The size of the window is programmed for eachcomponent by the registers DISP₋₋ HBS, DISP₋₋ VBS, COMPONENT₋₋ OFFSET,and LINES₋₋ IN₋₋ LAST₋₋ ROW. FIG. 160, "SIF Component 0 with a displaywindow," shows how this is achieved (for component 0 only).

In this example, the register setting would be:

BUFFER₋₋ BASE0=0x00

DISP₋₋ COMP₋₋ OFFSET0=0x2D

DISP₋₋ VBS₋₋ COMP0=0x22

ADDR₋₋ HBS₋₋ COMP0=0x2C

DISP₋₋ HBS₋₋ COM0=0x2A

Notes

The window may only start and stop on block boundaries. In this examplewe have left LINES₋₋ IN₋₋ LAST₋₋ ROW equal to 7 (meaning all eight).

This example is not practical with anything other than 4:4:4 data. Inorder to correspond, the window edges for the other two components couldnot be on block boundaries.

The color space converter will hang up if the data it receives is not4:4:4. This means that these read windows, in conjunction with theupsamplers must be programmed to achieve this.

SECTION C.5 Datapaths for Address Generation

The datapaths used in dispaddr and waddrgen are identical in structureand width (18 bits), only differing in the number of registers, somemasking, and the flags returned to the state machine. The circuit of oneslice is shown in FIG. 165, "Slice Of Datapath,". Registers are uniquelyassigned to drive the A or B bus and their use (assignment) is optimizedin the controller. All registers are loadable from the C bus, however,not all "load" signals are driven. All operations involving the addercover two cycles allowing the adder to have ordinary ripple carry. FIG.166, "Two cycle operation of the datapath," shows the timing for the twocycle sum of two registers being loaded back into the "A" bus register.The various flags are "ph0"ed within the datapath to allow ccodegeneration. For the same reason, the structure of the datapathschematics is a little unusual. The tristates for all the registers(onto the A and B buses) are in a single block which eliminates thecombinatorial path in the cell, therefore, allowing better ccodegeneration. To gain upi access to the datapaths, the access bit must beset, for without this, the upi is locked out. Upi access is differentfrom read and write:

Writing: When the access bit is set, all load signals are disabled andone of a set of three byte addressed write strobes driven to theappropriate byte of one of the registers. The upi data bus passesvertically down the datapath (replicated, 2-8-8 bits) and the 18 bitregister is written as three separate byte writes

Reading: This is achieved using the A and B buses. Once again, theaccess bit must be set. The addressed register is driven onto the A or Bbus and a upi byte select picks a byte from the relevant bus and drivesit onto the upi bus.

As double cycle datapath operations require the A and B buses to retaintheir values, and upi accesses disrupt these, access must only be givenby the controlling state machine before the start of any datapathoperation.

All datapath registers in both address generators are addressed througha 9 bit wide keyhole at the top level address 0x28 (msb) and 0x29 (lsb)for the keyhole, and 0x2A for the data. The keyhole addresses are givenin Table C.11.2.

Notes

1) All address registers in the address generators (dispaddr andwaddrgen) contain blocked addresses. Pixel addresses are never used andthe only registers containing line addresses are the three LINES₋₋ IN₋₋LAST₋₋ ROW registers.

2) Some registers are duplicated between the address generators, e.g.,BUFFER₋₋ BASE0 occurs in the address space for dispaddr and waddrgen.These are two separate registers which BOTH need loading. This allowsdisplay windowing (only reading a portion of the display store), andeases the display of formats other than 3 component video.

SECTION C.6 The DRAM Interface

C.6.1 Overview

In the present invention, the Spacial Decoder, Temporal Decoder andVideo Formatter each contain a DRAM Interface block for that particularchip. In all three devices, the function of the DRAM Interface is totransfer data from the chip to the external DRAM and from the externalDRAM into the chip via block addresses supplied by an address generator.

The DRAM interface typically operates from a clock which is asynchronousto both the address generator and to the clocks of the various blocksthrough which data is passed. This asynchronism is readily managed,however, because the clocks are operating at approximately the samefrequency.

Data is usually transferred between the DRAM Interface and the rest ofthe chip in blocks of 64 bytes (the only exception being prediction datain the Temporal Decoder). Transfers take place by means of a deviceknown as a "swing buffer". This is essentially a pair of RAMs operatedin a double-buffered configuration, with the DRAM interface filling oremptying one RAM while another part of the chip empties or fills theother RAM. A separate bus which carries an address from an addressgenerator is associated with each swing buffer.

Each of the chips has four swing buffers, but the function of theseswing buffers is different in each case. In the Spacial Decoder, oneswing buffer is used to transfer coded data to the DRAM, another to readcoded data from the DRAM, the third to transfer tokenized data to theDRAM and the fourth to read tokenized data from the DRAM. In theTemporal Decoder, one swing buffer is used to write Intra or Predictedpicture data to the DRAM, the second to read Intra or Predicted datafrom the DRAM and the other two to read forward and backward predictiondata. In the Video Formatter, one swing buffer is used to transfer datato the DRAM and the other three are used to read data from the DRAM, onefor each of Luminance (Y) and the Red and Blue color difference data (Crand Cb, respectively).

The operation of a generic DRAM Interface is described in the SpacialDecoder document. The following section describes those features of theDRAM Interface, in accordance with the present invention, peculiar tothe Video Formatter.

C.6.2 The Video Formatter DRAM Interface

In the video formatter, data is written into the external DRAM inblocks, but read out in raster order. Writing is exactly the same asalready described for the Spacial Decoder, but reading is a little morecomplex.

The data in the Video Formatter external DRAM is organized so that atleast 8 blocks of data fit into a single page. These 8 blocks are 8consecutive horizontal blocks. When rasterizing, 8 bytes need to be readout of each of 8 consecutive blocks and written into the swing buffer(i.e., the same row in each of the 8 blocks).

Considering the top row (and assuming a byte-wide interface), the xaddress (the three LSBs) is set to zero, as is the y address (3 MSBs).The x address is then incremented as each of the first 8 bytes are readout. At this point, the top part of the address (bit 6 andabove--LSB=bit 0) is incremented and the x address (3 LSBs) is reset tozero. This process is repeated until 64 bytes have been read. With a 16or 32 bit wide interface to the external DRAM, the x address is merelyincremented by two or four instead of by one.

The address generator can signal to the DRAM Interface that less than 64bytes should be read (this may be required at the beginning or end of araster line) although a multiple of 8 bytes is always read. This isachieved by using start and stop values. The start value is used for thetop part of the address (bit 6 and above), and the stop value iscompared with this and a signal generated which indicates when readingshould stop.

SECTION C.7 Vertical Upsampling

C.7.1 Introduction

Given a raster scan of pixels of one color component at its input, thevertical upsampler in accordance with the present invention, can providean output scan of twice the height. Mode selection allows the outputpixel values to be formed in a number of ways.

C.7.2 Ports

Input two wire interface:

in₋₋ valid

in₋₋ accept

in₋₋ data 7:0!

in₋₋ lastpel

in₋₋ lastline

Output two wire interface:

out₋₋ valid

out₋₋ accept

out₋₋ data 9:0!

out₋₋ last

mode 2:0!

nupdata 7:0!, upaddr, upsel 3:0!, uprstr, upwstr ramtest

tdin, tdout, tph0, tckm, tcks

ph0, ph1, notrst0

C.7.3 Mode

As selected by the input bus mode 2:0!.

Mode register values 1 and 7 are not used.

In each of the above modes, the output pixels are represented as 10-bitvalues, not as bytes. No rounding or truncation takes place in thisblock. Where necessary, values are shifted left to use the same range.

C.7.3.1 Mode 0: Fifo

The block simply acts as a FIFO store. The number of output pixels isexactly the same as at the input. The values are shifted left by two.

C.7.3.2 Mode 2: Repeat

Every line in the input scan is repeated to produce an output scan twiceas high. Again, the pixel values are shifted left by two.

A→ABACBDBCCDD

C.7.3.3 Mode 4: Lower

Each input line produces two output lines. In this "lower" mode, thesecond of these two lines (the lower on the display) is the same as theinput line. The first of the pair is the average of the current inputline and the previous input line. In the case of the first input line,where there is no previous line to use, the input line is repeated.

This should be selected where chroma samples are co-sited with the lowerluma samples.

A→ABAC(A+B)/2DB(B+C)/2C(C+D)/2D

C.7.3.4 Mode 5: Upper

Similar to the "lower" mode, but in this case the input line forms theupper of the output pair, and the lower is the average of adjacent inputlines. The last output line is a repeat of the last input line.

This should be selected where chroma samples are co-sited with the upperluma samples.

A→AB(A+B)/2CBD(B+C)/2C(C+D)/2DD

C.7.3.5 Mode 6: Central

This "central" mode corresponds to the situation where chroma sampleslie midway between luma samples. In order to co-site the output chromapixels with the luma pixels, a weighted average is used to form theoutput lines.

A→AB(3A+B)/4C(A+3B)/4D(3B+C)/4(B+3C)/4(3C+D)/4(C+3D)/4D

C.7.4 How It Works

There are two linestores, imaginatively designated "a" and "b". In"FIFO" and "repeat" modes, only linestore "a" is used. Each store canaccommodate a line of up to 512 pixels (vertical upsampling should beperformed before any horizontal upsamplng). There is no restriction onthe length of the line in "FIFO" mode.

The input signals in₋₋ lastpel and in₋₋ lastline are used to indicatethe end of the input line and the end of the picture. In₋₋ lastpel, itshould be high coincident with the last pixel of each line. In₋₋lastline, it should be high coincident with the last pixel of the lastline of the picture.

The output signal out₋₋ last is high coincident with the last pixel ofeach output line.

In "repeat" mode, each line is written into store "a". The line is thenread out twice. As it is read out for the second time, the next line maystart to be written.

In "lower", "upper" and "central" modes, lines are written alternatelyinto stores "a" and "b". The first line of a picture is always writteninto store "a". Two tiny state machines, one for each store, keep trackof what is in each store and which output line is being formed. Fromthese states are generated the read and write requests to the linestoreRAMs, and the signals that determine when the next line may overwritethe present data.

A register (lastaddr) stores the write address when in₋₋ lastpel ishigh, thereby providing the length of the line for the formation of theoutput lines.

C.7.5 UPI

This block contains two 512×8 bit RAM arrays, which may be accessed viathe microprocessor interface in the typical way. There are no registerswith microprocessor access.

SECTION C.8 The Horizontal Up-Samplers

C.8.1 Overview

In the present invention, top-Level Registers contain three identicalHorizontal Up-samplers, one for each color component. All three arecontrolled independently and, therefore, only one need be describedhere. From the user's point of view, the only difference is that eachHorizontal Up-sampler is mapped into a different set of in the memorymap.

The Horizontal Up-sampler performs a combined replication and filteringoperation. In all, there are four modes of operation:

                  TABLE C.7.1                                                     ______________________________________                                        Horizontal Up-sampler Modes                                                   Mode      Function                                                            ______________________________________                                        0         Straight-through (no processing). The reset state.                  1         No up-sampling, filter using a 3-tap FIR filter.                    2         x2 up-sampling and filtering                                        3         x4 up-sampling and filtering                                        ______________________________________                                    

C.8.2 Using a Horizontal Up-Sampler

The address map for each Horizontal Up-sampler consists of 25 locationscorresponding to 12 13-bit coefficient registers and one 2-bit moderegister. The number written to the mode register determines the mode ofoperation, as outlined in Table C.7.1. Depending on the mode, some orall of the coefficient registers may be used. The equivalent FIR filteris illustrated below.

Depending on the mode of operation, the input, x_(n), is held constantfor one, two or four clock periods. The actual coefficients that areprogrammed for each mode are as follows:

                  TABLE C.7.2                                                     ______________________________________                                        Coefficients for Mode 1                                                              Coeff                                                                              All clock periods                                                 ______________________________________                                               k0   c00                                                                      k1   c10                                                                      k2   c20                                                               ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE C.7.3                                                     ______________________________________                                        Coefficients for Mode 2                                                       Coeff      1st clock period                                                                          2nd clock period                                       ______________________________________                                        k0         c00         c01                                                    k1         c10         c11                                                    k2         c20         c21                                                    ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE C.7.4                                                     ______________________________________                                        Coefficients for Mode 3                                                               1st clock                                                                              2nd clock  3rd clock                                                                            4th clock                                  Coeff   period   period     period period                                     ______________________________________                                        k0      c00      c01        c02    c03                                        k1      c10      c11        c12    c13                                        k2      c20      c21        c22    c23                                        ______________________________________                                    

Coefficients which are not used in a particular mode need not beprogrammed when operating in that mode.

In order to achieve symmetrical filtering, the first and last pixels ofeach line are repeated prior to filtering. For example, when up-samplingby two, the first and last pixels of each line are replicated four timesrather than two. Because residual data in the filter is discarded at theend of each line, the number of pixels output is still always exactlyone, two or four times the number in the input stream.

Depending on the values of the coefficients, output samples can beplaced either coincident with or shifted from the input samples.Following are some example values for coefficients in some sample modes.A "-" indicates that the value of the coefficient is "don't care." Allvalues are in hexadecimal.

                  TABLE C.7.5                                                     ______________________________________                                        Sample Coefficients                                                                   ×2 up-sample,                                                           o/p pels   ×2 up-sample,                                                coincident o/p pels in                                                                              ×4 up-sample, o/p pels in                 Coefficient                                                                           with i/p   between i/p                                                                              between i/p                                     ______________________________________                                        c00     0000       01BD       00E9                                            c01     0000       010B       00B6                                            c02     --         --         012A                                            c03     --         --         0102                                            c10     0800       0538       0661                                            c11     0400       0538       0661                                            c12     --         --         0446                                            c13     --         --         029F                                            c20     0000       010B       00B6                                            c21     0400       01BD       00E9                                            c22     --         --         0290                                            c23     --         --         045F                                            ______________________________________                                    

C.8.3 Description of a Horizontal Up-Sampler

The datapath of the Horizontal Up-sampler is illustrated in FIG. 168.

The operation is outlined below for the x4 upsample case. In addition,x2 upsampling and x1 filtering (modes 2 and 1) are degenerate cases ofthis, and bypass (mode 0) the entire filter, data passing straight fromthe input latch to the output latch via the final mux, as illustrated.

1) When valid data is latched in the input latch ("L"), it is held for 4clock periods.

2) The coefficient registers (labelled "COEFF") are multiplexed onto themultipliers for one clock period, each in turn, at the same time as thetwo sets of four pipeline registers (labelled "PIPE") are clocked. Thus,for input data x_(n), the first PIPE will fill up with the valuesc00.x_(n), c01.x_(n), c02.x_(n), c03.x_(n).

3) Similarly, the second multiplier will multiply x_(n) by of itscoefficients, in turn, and the third multiplier by all its coefficients,in turn.

It can be seen that the output will be of the form shown in Table C.7.6

                  TABLE C.7.6                                                     ______________________________________                                        Output Sequence for Mode 3                                                    Clock1 Period                                                                              Output                                                           ______________________________________                                        0            c20.x.sub.n + c10.x.sub.n-1 + c00.x.sub.n-2                      1            c21.x.sub.n + c11.x.sub.n-1 + c01.x.sub.n-2                      2            c22.x.sub.n + c12.x.sub.n-1 + c02.x.sub.n-2                      3            c23.x.sub.n + c13.x.sub.n-1 + c03.x.sub.n-2                      ______________________________________                                    

From the point of view of the output, each clock period produces anindividual pixel. Since each output pixel is dependent on the weightedvalues of 12 input pixels (although there are only three differentvalues), this can be thought of as implementing a 12 tap filter on x4up-sampled input pixels.

For x2 upsampling, the operation is essentially the same, except theinput data is only held for two clock periods. Furthermore, only twocoefficients are used and the "PIPE" blocks are shortened by means ofthe multiplexers illustrated. For x1 filtering, the input is only heldfor one clock period. As expected, one coefficient and one "PIPE" stageare used.

We now discuss a few notes about some peculiarities of theimplementation in the present invention.

1) The datapath width and coefficient width (13 bit 2's complement) werechosen so that the same multiplier could be used, as was designed forthe Color-Space Converter. These widths are more than adequate for thepurpose of the Horizontal Up-sampler.

2) The multiplexers which multiplex the coefficients onto themultipliers are shared with the UPI readback. This has led to somecomplications in the structure of the schematics (primarily because ofdifficulty in CCODE generation), but the actual circuit is smaller.

3) As in the Color-Space Converter, carry-save multipliers are used, theresult only being resolved at the end.

Control for the entire Horizontal Up-sampler can be regarded as a singletwo-wire interface stage which may produce two or four times the amountof data at its output as there is on its input. The mode which isprogrammed in via the UPI determines the length of a programmable shiftregister (bob). The selected mode produces an output pulse every clockperiod, every two clock periods or every four clock periods. This, inturn, controls the main state machine, whose state is also determined byin₋₋ valid, out₋₋ accept (for the two-wire interface) and the signal "inlast". This signal is passed on from the vertical up-sampler and is highfor the last pixel of every line. This allows the first and last pixelsof each line to be replicated twice-over and the clearing down of thepipeline between lines (the pipeline contains partially-processedredundant data immediately after a line has been completed).

SECTION C.9 The Color-Space Converter

C.9.1 Overview

The Color-Space Converter in the present invention (CSC) performs a 3×3matrix multiplication on the incoming 9-bit data, followed by anaddition: ##EQU13##

Where x0-2 are the input data, y0-2 are the output data and cnm are thecoefficients. The slightly unconventional naming of the matrixcoefficients is deliberate, since the names correspond to signal namesin the schematics.

The CSC is capable of performing conversions between a number ofdifferent color spaces although a limited set of these conversions areused in Top-Level Registers. The design color-space conversions are asfollows:

    E.sub.R, E.sub.G, E.sub.B →Y, C.sub.R, C.sub.B

    R, G, B→Y, C.sub.R, C.sub.B

    Y, C.sub.R, C.sub.B →E.sub.R, E.sub.G, E.sub.B

    Y, C.sub.R, C.sub.B →R, G, B

Where R, G and B are in the range (0..511) and all other quantities arein the range of (32..470). Since the input to the Top-Level RegistersCSC is Y, C_(R), C_(B), only the third and fourth of these equations areof relevance.

In the CSC design, the precision of the coefficients was chosen so that,for 9 bit data, all output values were within plus or minus 1 bit of thevalues produced by a full floating point simulation of the algorithm(this is the best accuracy that it is possible to achieve). This gave 13bit twos-complement coefficients for cx0-cx3 and 14 bit twos-complementcoefficients for cx4. The coefficients for all the design conversionsare given below in both decimal and hex.

                                      TABLE C.8.1                                 __________________________________________________________________________    Coefficients for Various Conversions                                          E.sub.R ->Y R->Y   Y->E.sub.R                                                                             Y->R                                              Coeff                                                                             Dec Hex Dec Hex                                                                              Dec  Hex Dec  Hex                                          __________________________________________________________________________    c01 0.299                                                                             0132                                                                              0.256  1.0  0400                                                                              1.169                                                                              04AD                                         c02 0.587                                                                             0259                                                                              0.502  1.402                                                                              059C                                                                              1.639                                                                              068E                                         c03 0.114                                                                             0075                                                                              0.098  0.0  0000                                                                              0.0  0000                                         c04 0.0 0000                                                                              16     -179.456                                                                           F4C8                                                                              -228.478                                                                           F1B8                                         c11 0.5 0200                                                                              0.428  1.0  0400                                                                              1.169                                                                              04AD                                         c12 -0.419                                                                            FE53                                                                              -0.358 -0.714                                                                             FD25                                                                              -0.835                                                                             FCA9                                         c13 -0.081                                                                            FFAD                                                                              -0.070 -0.344                                                                             FEA0                                                                              -0.402                                                                             FE64                                         c14 128.0                                                                             0800                                                                              128    135.5                                                                              0878                                                                              139.7                                                                              08BA                                         c21 -0.169                                                                            FF53                                                                              -0.144 1.0  0400                                                                              1.169                                                                              04AD                                         c22 -0.331                                                                            FEAD                                                                              -0.283 0.0  0000                                                                              0.0  0000                                         c23 0.5 0200                                                                              0.427  1.772                                                                              0717                                                                              2.071                                                                              0849                                         c24 128 0800                                                                              128    -226.816                                                                           F1D2                                                                              -283.84                                                                            EE42                                         __________________________________________________________________________

All these numbers are calculated from the fundamental equation:

    Y=0.299E.sub.R +0.587E.sub.G +0.0114 E.sub.B

and the following color-difference equations:

    C.sub.R =E.sub.R -Y

    C.sub.B =E.sub.B -Y

The equations in R, G and B are derived from these after the full-scaleranges of these quantities are considered.

C.9.2 Using the Color-Space Converter

On reset, c01, c12, and c23 are set to 1 and all other coefficients areset to 0. Thus, y0=x0, y1=x1 and y2=x2 and all data is passed throughunaltered. To select a color-space conversion, simply write theappropriate coefficients (from Table C.8.1, for example) into thelocations specified in the address map.

Referring to the schematics, x0..2 correspond to in₋₋ data0..2 and y0..2correspond to out₋₋ data0..2. Users should remember that input data tothe CSC must be up-sampled to 4:4:4. If this is not the case, not onlywill the color-space transforms have no meaning, but the chip will lock.

It should be noted that each output can be formed from any allowedcombination of coefficients and inputs plus (or minus) a constant. Thus,for any given color-space conversion, the order of the outputs can bechanged by swapping the rows in the transform matrix (i.e., theaddresses into which the coefficients are written).

The CSC is guaranteed to work for all the transforms in Table C.8.1. Ifother transforms are used the user must remember the following:

1) The hardware will not work if any intermediate result in thecalculation requires greater than 10 bits of precision (excluding thesign bit).

2) The output of the CSC is saturated to 0 and 511. That is, any numberless than 0 is replaced with 0 and any number more than 511 is replacedwith 511. The implementation of the saturation logic assumes that theresults will only be slightly above 511 or slightly below 0. If the CSCis programmed incorrectly, then a common symptom will be that the outputappears to saturate all (or most of) the time.

C.9.3 Description of the CSC

The structure of the CSC is illustrated in FIG. 169, where only two ofthe three "components" have been shown because of space limitations. Inthe Figure, "register" or "R" implies a master-slave register and"latch" or "L" implies a transparent latch.

All coefficients are loaded into read-write UPI registers which are notshown explicitly in the Figure. To understand the operation, considerthe following sequence with reference to the left-most "component" (thatwhich produces output out₋₋ data0):

1) Data arrives at inputs x0-2 (in₋₋ data0-2). This represents a singlepixel in the input color-space. This is latched.

2) x0 is multiplied by c01 and latched into the first pipeline register.x1 and x2 move on one register.

3) x1 is multiplied by c02, added to (x1.c01) and latched into the nextpipeline register. x2 moves on one register.

4) x2 is multiplied by c03 and added to the result of (3), producing(x1.c01+x2.c02+x3.c03). The result is latched into the next pipelineregister.

5) The result of (4) is added to c04. Since data is kept in carry-saveformat through the multipliers, this adder is also used to resolve thedata from the multiplier chain. The result is latched in the nextpipeline register.

6) The final operation is to saturate the data. Partial results arepassed from the resolving adder to the saturate block to achieve this.

It can be seen that the result is y0, as specified in the matrixequation at the start of this section. Similarly, y1 and y2 are formedin the same manner.

Three multipliers are used, with the coefficients as the multiplicandand the data as the multiplicator. This allows an efficient layout to beachieved, with partial results flowing down the datapath and the sameinput data being routed across three parallel and identical datapaths,one for each output.

To achieve the reset state described in Section C.9.2, each of the three"components" must be reset in a different way. In order to avoid havingthree sets of schematics and three slightly different layouts, this isachieved by having inputs to the UPI registers which are tied high orlow at the top level.

The CSC has almost no control associated with it. Nevertheless, eachpipeline stage is a two-wire interface stage, so there is a chain ofvalid and accept latches with their associated control (in₋₋accept=out₋₋ accept₋₋ r+lin₋₋ valid₋₋ r). The CSC is, therefore, a5-stage deep two-wire interface, capable of holding 10 levels of datawhen stalled.

The output of the CSC contain re-synchronizing latches because the nextfunction in the output pipe runs off a different clock generator.

SECTION C.10 Output Controller

C.10.1 Introduction

The output controller, in accordance with the present invention, handlesthe following functions:

It provides data in one of three modes

24-bit 4:4:4

16-bit 4:2:2

8-bit 4:2:2

It aligns the data to the video display window defined by the vsync andhsync pulses and by programmed timing registers

It adds a border around the video window, if required

C.10.2 Ports

Input two wire interface:

in₋₋ valid

in₋₋ accept

in₋₋ data 23:0!

Output two wire interface:

out₋₋ valid

out₋₋ accept

out₋₋ data 23:0!

out₋₋ active

out₋₋ window

out₋₋ comp 1:0!

in₋₋ vsync, in₋₋ hsync

nupdata 7:0!, upaddr 4:0!, upsel, rstr, wstr tdin, tdout, tph0, tckm,tcks chiptest ph0, ph1, notrst0, notrst1

C.10.3 Out Modes

The format of the output is selected by writing to the opmode register.

C.10.3.1 Mode 0

This mode is 24-bit 4:4:4 RGB or YCrCb. Input data passes directly tothe output.

C.10.3.2 Modes 1 and 2

These modes present 4:2:2 YCrCb. Assuming in₋₋ data 23:16! is Y, in₋₋data 15:8! is Cr and in₋₋ data 7:0! is Cb.

C.10.3.2.1 Mode 1

In 16-bit YCrCb, Y is presented on out data 15:8!. Cr and Cb are timemultiplexed on out₋₋ data 7:0!, Cb first. Out₋₋ data 23:16! is not used.

C.10.3.2.2 Mode 2

In 8-bit YCrCb, Y,Cr and Cb are time multiplexed on out₋₋ data 7:0! inthe order Cb, Y, Cr, Y. Out₋₋ data 23:8! is not used.

C.10.3.3 Output Timing

The following registers are used to place the data in a video displaywindow.

vdelay--The number of hsync pulses following a vsync pulse before thefirst line of video or border.

hdelay--The number of clock cycles between hsync and the first pixel ofvideo or border.

height--The height of the video window, in lines.

width--The width of the video window, in pixels.

north, south--The height of the border, respectively, above and belowthe video window, in lines.

west, east--The width of the border, respectively, to the left and tothe right of the video window, in pels.

The minimum vdelay is zero. The first hsync is the first active line.The minimum value that can be programmed into hdelay is 2. Note,however, that the actual delay from in₋₋ hsync to the first activeoutput pixel is hdelay+1 cycles.

Any edge of the border can have the value zero. The color of the borderis selected by writing to the registers border₋₋ r, border₋₋ g andborder₋₋ b. The color of the area outside the border is selected bywriting to the registers blank₋₋ r, blank₋₋ g and blank₋₋ b. Note thatthe multiplexing performed in output modes 1 and 2 will also affect theborder and blank.components. That is, the values in these registerscorrespond with in₋₋ data 23:16!, in₋₋ data 15:8! and in₋₋ data 7:0!.

C.10.4 Output Flags

out₋₋ active indicates that the output data is part of the activewindow, i.e., video data or border.

out₋₋ window indicates that the output data is part of the video window.

out₋₋ comp 1:0! indicates which color component is present on out₋₋ data7:0! in output modes 1 and 2. In mode 1, 0=Cb, 1=Cr. In mode 2, 0=Y,1=Cr, 2=Cb.

C.10.5 Two-Wire Mode

The two-wire mode of the present invention is selected by writing 1 tothe two wire register. It is not selected following reset. In two wiremode, the output timing registers and sync signals are ignored and theflow of data through the block is controlled by out₋₋ accept. Note thatin normal operation, out₋₋ accept should be tied high.

C.10.6 Snooper

There is a super-snooper on the output of the block which includesaccess to the output flags.

C.10.7 How It Works

Two identical down-counters keep track of the position in the display."Vcount" decrements on hsyncs and loads from the appropriate timingregister on vsync or at its terminal count. "Hcount" decrements on everypixel and loads on hsync or at its terminal count. Note that in outputmode 2, one pixel corresponds to two clock cycles.

SECTION C.11 The Clock Dividers

C.11.1 Overview

Top-Level Registers in the present invention contain two identical ClockDividers, one to generate a PICTURE₋₋ CLK and one to generate an AUDIO₋₋CLK. The Clock Dividers are identical and are controlled independently.Therefore, only one need be described here. From the user's point ofview, the only difference is that each Clock Divider's divisor registeris mapped into a different set of addresses in the memory map.

The Clock Divider's function is to provide a 4×sysclk divided clockfrequency, with no requirement for an even mark-space ratio.

The divisor is required to lay in the range ˜0 to ˜16,000,000 and,therefore, it can be represented using 24 bits with the restriction thatthe minimum divisor be 16. This is because the Clock Divider willapproximate an equal mark-space ratio (to within one sysclk cycle) byusing divisor/2. As the maximum clock frequency available is sysclk, themaximum divided frequency available is sysclk/2. Furthermore, becausefour counters are used in cascade divisor/2 must never be less than 8,else the divided clock output will be driven to the positive power rail.

C.11.2 Using a Clock Divider

The address map for each Clock Divider consists of 4 locationscorresponding to three 8-bit divisor registers and one 1-bit accessregister. The Clock Divider will power-up inactive and is activated bythe completion of an access to its divisor register.

The divisor registers may be written in any order according to theaddress map in Table C.10.1. The Clock Divider is activated by sensing asynchronized 0 to 1 transition in its access bit. The first time atransition is sensed, the Clock Divider will come out of reset andgenerate a divided clock. Subsequent transitions (assuming the divisorhas also been altered) will merely cause the Clock Divider to lock toits new frequency "on-the-fly." Once activated, there is no way ofhalting the Clock Divider other than by Chip RESET.

                  TABLE C.10.1                                                    ______________________________________                                        Clock Divider Registers                                                              Address      Register                                                  ______________________________________                                               00b          access bit                                                       01b          divisor MSB                                                      10b          divisor                                                          11b          divisor LSB                                               ______________________________________                                    

Any divisor value in the range 16 to 16,777,216 may be used.

C.11.3 Description of the Clock Divider

The Clock Divider is implemented as four 22 bit counters which arecascaded such that as one counter carries, it will activate the nextcounter in turn. A counter will count down the value of divisor/4 beforecarrying and, therefore, each counter will take it, in turn, to generatea pulse of the divided clock frequency.

After carrying, the counter will reload with divisor/8 and this iscounted down to produce the approximate equal mark-space ratio dividedclock. As each counter reloads from the divisor register when it isactivated by the previous counter, this enables the divided clockfrequency to be changed on the fly by simply altering the contents ofthe divisor.

Each counter is clocked by its own independent clock generator in orderto control clock skew between counters precisely and to allow eachcounter to be clocked by a different set of clocks.

A state machine controls the generation of the divisor/4 and divisor/8values and also multiplexes the correct source clocks from the PLL tothe clock generators. The counters are clocked by different clocksdependent on the value of the divisor. This is because different divisorvalues will produce a divided clock whose edges are placed usingdifferent combinations of the clocks provided from the PLL.

C.11.4 Testing the Clock Divider

The Clock Divider may be tested by powering up the Chip with CHIPTESTHigh. This will have the effect of forcing all of the clocked logic inthe Clock Divider to be clocked by sysclk, as opposed to, the clocksgenerated by the PLL.

The Clock Divider has been designed with full scan and, thus, maysubsequently be tested using standard JTAG access, as long as the Chiphas been powered up as above.

The functionality of the Clock Divider is NOT guaranteed if CHIPTEST isheld High while the device is running in normal operation.

SECTION C.12 Address Maps

C.12.1 Top Level Address Map

Notes

1) The register for the Top Level Address Map as set forth in TableC.11.1 are the names used during the design. They are not necessarilythe names that will appear on the datasheet.

2) Since this is a full address map, many of the locations listed hereinclude locations for test only.

                                      TABLE C.11.1                                __________________________________________________________________________    Top-Level Registers A Top Level Address Map                                   REGISTER NAME        Address                                                                           Bits                                                                              COMMENT                                          __________________________________________________________________________    BU.sub.-- EVENT      0x0 8   Write 1 to reset                                 BU.sub.-- MASK       0x1 8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- EN.sub.-- INTERRUPTS                                                                     0x2 1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COD.sub.-- STD                                                              0x4 2   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- ACCESS                                                                      0x5 1   R/W-access                                       BU.sub.-- WAADR.sub.-- CTL1                                                                        0x6 3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- LINES.sub.-- IN.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW0                                  0x8 3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- LINES.sub.-- IN.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW1                                  0x9 3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- LINES.sub.-- IN.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- ROW2                                  0xa 3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DlSPADDR.sub.-- ACCESS                                                                   0xb 1   R/W-access                                       BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- CTL0                                                                     0xc 8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DISPDDR.sub.-- CTL1                                                                      0xd 1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- ACCESS                                                                         0x10                                                                              1   RAV-access                                       BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- CTL0                                                                           0x11                                                                              2   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- TARGET.sub.-- IX                                                               0x12                                                                              4   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- PRES.sub.-- NUM                                                                0x13                                                                              8   R/W-asynchronous                                 BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- THIS.sub.-- PNUM                                                               0x14                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- PIC.sub.-- NUM0                                                                0x15                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- PIC.sub.-- NUM1                                                                0x16                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- PIC.sub.-- NUM2                                                                0x17                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- TEMP.sub.-- REF                                                                0x18                                                                              5   RO                                               BU.sub.-- ADDRGEN.sub.-- KEYHOLE.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- MSB                                            0x28                                                                              1   R/W-Address generator                            BU.sub.-- ADDRGEN.sub.-- KEYHOLE.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- LSB                                            0x29                                                                              8   keyhole. See                                     BU.sub.-- ADDRGEN.sub.-- KEYHOLE.sub.-- DATA                                                       0x2a                                                                              8   Table C.11.2 for contents                        BU.sub.-- IT.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- START                                                              0x30                                                                              5   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- IT.sub.-- READ.sub.-- CYCLE                                                              0x31                                                                              4   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- IT.sub.-- WRITE.sub.-- CYCLE                                                             0x32                                                                              4   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- IT.sub.-- REFRESH.sub.-- CYCLE                                                           0x33                                                                              4   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- IT.sub.-- RAS.sub.-- FALLING                                                             0x34                                                                              4   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- IT.sub.-- CAS.sub.-- FALLING                                                             0x35                                                                              4   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- IT.sub.-- CONFIG                                                                         0x36                                                                              1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- ACCESS                                                                         0x40                                                                              1   R/W access                                       BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- MODE                                                                           0x41                                                                              2   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- 2WIRE                                                                          0x42                                                                              1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- BORDER.sub.-- R                                                                0x49                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- BORDER.sub.-- G                                                                0x4a                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- BORDER.sub.-- B                                                                0x4b                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- BLANK.sub.-- R                                                                 0x4d                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- BLANK.sub.-- G                                                                 0x4e                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- BLANK.sub.-- B                                                                 0x4f                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- HDELAY.sub.-- 1                                                                0x50                                                                              3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- HDELAY.sub.-- 0                                                                0x51                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- WEST.sub.-- 1                                                                  0x52                                                                              3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- WEST.sub.-- 0                                                                  0x53                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- EAST.sub.-- 1                                                                  0x54                                                                              3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- EAST.sub.-- 0                                                                  0x55                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- 1                                                                 0x56                                                                              3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- 0                                                                 0x57                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- VDELAY.sub.-- 1                                                                0x58                                                                              3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- VDELAY.sub.-- 0                                                                0x59                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- NORTH.sub.-- 1                                                                 0x5a                                                                              3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- NORTH.sub.-- 0                                                                 0x5b                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- SOUTH.sub.-- 1                                                                 0x5c                                                                              3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- SOUTH.sub.-- 0                                                                 0x5d                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- HEIGHT.sub.-- 1                                                                0x5e                                                                              3   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- HEIGHT.sub.-- 0                                                                0x5f                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- IF.sub.-- CONFIGURE                                                                      0x60                                                                              5   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- MODE                                                                           0x61                                                                              6   R/W-xnnnxnnn                                     BU.sub.-- COEFF.sub.-- KEYADDR                                                                     0x62                                                                              7   R/W - See Table C.11.3                           BU.sub.-- COEFF.sub.-- KEYDATA                                                                     0x63                                                                              8   for contents                                     BU.sub.-- GA.sub.-- ACCESS                                                                         0x68                                                                              1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- GA.sub.-- BYPASS                                                                         0x69                                                                              1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- GA.sub.-- RAM0.sub.-- ADDR                                                               0x6a                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- GA.sub.-- RAM0.sub.-- DATA                                                               0x6b                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- GA.sub.-- RAM1.sub.-- ADDR                                                               0x6c                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- GA.sub.-- RAM1.sub.-- DATA                                                               0x6d                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- GA.sub.-- RAM2.sub.-- ADDR                                                               0x6e                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- GA.sub.-- RAM2.sub.-- DATA                                                               0x6f                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DIVA.sub.-- 3                                                                            0x70                                                                              1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DIVA.sub.-- 2                                                                            0x71                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DIVA.sub.-- 1                                                                            0x72                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DIVA.sub.-- 0                                                                            0x73                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DIVP.sub.-- 3                                                                            0x74                                                                              1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DIVP.sub.-- 2                                                                            0x75                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DIVP.sub.-- 1                                                                            0x76                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DIVP.sub.-- 0                                                                            0x77                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- PAD.sub.-- CONFIG.sub.-- 1                                                               0x78                                                                              7   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- PAD.sub.-- CONFIG.sub.-- 0                                                               0x79                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- PLL.sub.-- RESISTORS                                                                     0x7a                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- REF.sub.-- INTERVAL                                                                      0x7b                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- REVISION   0xff                                                                              8   RO-revision                                      The following registers are in the "test space".                              They are unlikely to appear on the datasheet.                                 BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- PRES.sub.-- FLAG                                                               0x80                                                                              1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- EXP.sub.-- TR                                                                  0x81                                                                              --  These registers are                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- TP.sub.-- DELTA                                                                0x82                                                                              --  missing on revA                                  BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- ARR.sub.-- IX                                                                  0x83                                                                              2   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- DSP.sub.-- IX                                                                  0x84                                                                              2   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- RDY.sub.-- IX                                                                  0x85                                                                              2   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- BSTATE3                                                                        0x86                                                                              2   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- BSTATE2                                                                        0x87                                                                              2   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- BSTATE1                                                                        0x88                                                                              2   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- INDEX                                                                          0x89                                                                              2   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- STATE                                                                          0x8a                                                                              5   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- FROMPS                                                                         0x8b                                                                              1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- 7-FROMFL                                                                       0x8c                                                                              1   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- SNP3                                                              0x90                                                                              8   R/W - These are the three                        BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- SNP2                                                              0x91                                                                              8   snoopers on the display                          BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- SNP1                                                              0x92                                                                              8   address generators                               BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- SNP0                                                              0x93                                                                              8   address output                                   BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- SNP3                                                              0x94                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- SNP2                                                              0x95                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- SNP1                                                              0x96                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- SNP0                                                              0x97                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- SNP3                                                              0x98                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- SNP2                                                              0x99                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- SNP1                                                              0x9a                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- DA.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- SNP0                                                              0x9b                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM1A.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- 1                                                     0xa0                                                                              8   R/W - up test access into                        BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM1A.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- 0                                                     0xa1                                                                              8   the vertical upsamolers                          BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM1A.sub.-- DATA                                                              0xa2                                                                              8   RAMs                                             BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM1B.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- 1                                                     0xa4                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM1B.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- 0                                                     0xa5                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM1B.sub.-- DATA                                                              0xa6                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM2A.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- 1                                                     0xa8                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM2A.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- 0                                                     0xa9                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM2A.sub.-- DATA                                                              0xaa                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM2B.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- 1                                                     0xac                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM2B.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- 0                                                     0xad                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- UV.sub.-- RAM2B.sub.-- DATA                                                              0xae                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- WA.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- SNP2                                                               0xb0                                                                              8   R/W - snooper on the write                       BU.sub.-- WA.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- SNP1                                                               0xb1                                                                              8   address generator address                        BU.sub.-- WA.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- SNP0                                                               0xb2                                                                              8   o/p.                                             BU.sub.-- WA.sub.-- DATA.sub.-- SNP1                                                               0xb4                                                                              8   R/W - snooper on data                            BU.sub.-- WA.sub.-- DATA.sub.-- SNP0                                                               0xb5                                                                              8   output of WA                                     BU.sub.-- IF.sub.-- SNP0.sub.-- 1                                                                  0xb8                                                                              8   R/W - Three snoopers on                          BU.sub.-- IF.sub.-- SNP0.sub.-- 0                                                                  0xb9                                                                              8   the dramif data outputs                          BU.sub.-- IF.sub.-- SNP1.sub.-- 1                                                                  0xba                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- IF.sub.-- SNP1.sub.-- 0                                                                  0xbb                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- IF.sub.-- SNP2.sub.-- 1                                                                  0xbc                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- IF.sub.-- SNP2.sub.-- 0                                                                  0xbd                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- IFRAM.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- 1                                                               0xc0                                                                              1   R/W - upi access it IF RAM                       BU.sub.-- IFRAM.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- 0                                                               0xc1                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- IFRAM.sub.-- DATA                                                                        0xc2                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- SNP.sub.-- 3                                                                   0xc4                                                                              8   R/W - snooper on output of                       BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- SNP.sub.-- 2                                                                   0xc5                                                                              8   chip                                             BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- SNP.sub.-- 1                                                                   0xc6                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- OC.sub.-- SNP.sub.-- 0                                                                   0xc7                                                                              8                                                    BU.sub.-- YAPLL.sub.-- CONFIG                                                                      0xc8                                                                              8   R/W                                              BU.sub.-- BM.sub.-- FRONT.sub.-- BYPASS                                                            0xca                                                                              1   R/W                                              __________________________________________________________________________

C.12.1 Address Generator Keyhole Space

Notes on address generator keyhole table:

1) All registers in the address generator keyhole take up 4 bytes ofaddress space regardless of their width. The missing addresses (0x00,0x04 etc.) will always read back zero.

2) The access bit of the relevant block (dispaddr or waddrgen) must beset before accessing this keyhole.

                                      TABLE C.11.2                                __________________________________________________________________________    Top-Level RegistersA                                                          Address Generator Keyhole                                                                                 Keyhole                                           Keyhole Register Name       Address                                                                           Bits                                                                             Comments                                   __________________________________________________________________________    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BUFFER0.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MSB                                                  0x01                                                                              2  18 bit                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BUFFER0.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MID                                                  0x02                                                                              3  register-                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BUFFER0.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- LSB                                                  0x03                                                                              8  Must be                                                                       loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BUFFER1.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MSB                                                  0x05                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BUFFER1.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MID                                                  0x06                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BUFFER1.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- LSB                                                  0x07                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BUFFER2.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MSB                                                  0x09                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BUFFER2.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MID                                                  0x0a                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BUFFER2.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- LSB                                                  0x0b                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- LINE0.sub.-- MSB                                                                 0x0d                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- LINE0.sub.-- MID                                                                 0x0e                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- LINE0.sub.-- LSB                                                                 0x0f                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- LINE1.sub.-- MSB                                                                 0x11                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- LINE1.sub.-- MID                                                                 0x12                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- LINE1.sub.-- LSB                                                                 0x13                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- LINE2.sub.-- MSB                                                                 0x15                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- LINE2.sub.-- MID                                                                 0x16                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- LINE2.sub.-- LSB                                                                 0x17                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- VBCNT0.sub.-- MSB                                                                0x19                                                                              2  Test only                                  SU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- VSCNT0.sub.-- MID                                                                0x1a                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- VBCNT0.sub.-- LSB                                                                0x1b                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- VBCNT1.sub.-- MSB                                                                0x1d                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- VBCNT1.sub.-- MID                                                                0x1e                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- VBCNT1.sub.-- LSB                                                                0x1f                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- VBCNT2.sub.-- MSB                                                                0x21                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- VSCNT2.sub.-- MID                                                                0x22                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DLDPATH.sub.-- VBCNT2.sub.-- LSB                                                                0x23                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MSB                                                  0x25                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MID                                                  0x26                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- LSB                                                  0x27                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MSB                                                  0x29                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MID                                                  0x2a                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- LSB                                                  0x2b                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MSB                                                  0x2d                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MID                                                  0x2e                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- LSB                                                  0x2f                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x31                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- MID                                                     0x32                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x33                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x35                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- MID                                                     0x36                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x37                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x39                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- MID                                                     0x3a                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- VBS.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x3b                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                         0x3d                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                         0x3e                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                         0x3f                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                         0x41                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                         0x42                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                         0x43                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                         0x45                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                         0x46                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- ADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                         0x47                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x49                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                     0x4a                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x4b                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x4d                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                     0x4e                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x4f                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x51                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                     0x52                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x53                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- LEFT0.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x55                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- LEFT0.sub.-- MID                                                     0x56                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- LEFT0.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x57                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- LEFT1.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x59                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- LEFT1.sub.-- MID                                                     0x5a                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- LEPT1.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x5b                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- LEPT2.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x5d                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- LEPT2.sub.-- MID                                                     0x5e                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- CNT.sub.-- LEPT2.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x5f                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- ADDR0.sub.-- MSB                                                    0x61                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- ADDR0.sub.-- MID                                                    0x62                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- ADDR0.sub.-- LSB                                                    0x63                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- ADDR1.sub.-- MSB                                                    0x65                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- ADDR1.sub.-- MID                                                    0x66                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- ADDR1.sub.-- LSB                                                    0x67                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- ADDR2.sub.-- MSB                                                    0x69                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- ADDR2.sub.-- MID                                                    0x6a                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- PAGE.sub.-- ADDR2.sub.-- LSB                                                    0x6b                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR0.sub.-- MSB                                                   0x6d                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR0.sub.-- MID                                                   0x6e                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR0.sub.-- LSB                                                   0x6f                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR1.sub.-- MSB                                                   0x71                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR1.sub.-- MID                                                   0x72                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR1.sub.-- LSB                                                   0x73                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR2.sub.-- MSB                                                   0x75                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR2.sub.-- MID                                                   0x76                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCK.sub.-- ADDR2.sub.-- LSB                                                   0x77                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- LEPT0.sub.-- MSB                                                  0x79                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- LEPT0.sub.-- MID                                                  0x7a                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- LEPT0.sub.-- LSB                                                  0x7b                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- LEPT1.sub.-- MSB                                                  0x7d                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- LEPT1.sub.-- MID                                                  0x7e                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- LEPT1.sub.-- LSB                                                  0x7f                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- LEPT2.sub.-- MSB                                                  0x81                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- LEPT2.sub.-- MID                                                  0x82                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- DISPADDR.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- LEPT2.sub.-- LSB                                                  0x83                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER0.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x85                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER0.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MID                                                     0x86                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER0.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x87                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER1.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x89                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER1.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MID                                                     0x8a                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER1.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x8b                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER2.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MSB                                                     0x8d                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER2.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- MID                                                     0x8e                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- BUFFER2.sub.-- BASE.sub.-- LSB                                                     0x8f                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                    0x91                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                    0x92                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                    0x93                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                    0x95                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                    0x96                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                    0x97                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                    0x99                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                    0x9a                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                    0x9b                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                    0x9d                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                    0x9e                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                    0x9f                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                    0xa1                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                    0xa2                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                    0xa3                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                    0xa5                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                    0xa6                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- VMBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                    0xa7                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- VBADDR.sub.-- MSB                                                                  0xa9                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- VBADDR.sub.-- MID                                                                  0xaa                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- VBADDR.sub.-- LSB                                                                  0xab                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCK.sub.-- MSB            0xad                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCK.sub.-- MID            0xae                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCK.sub.-- LSB            0xaf                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCK.sub.-- MSB            0xb1                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCK.sub.-- MID            0xb2                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCK.sub.-- LSB            0xb3                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCK.sub.-- MSB            0xb5                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCK.sub.-- MID            0xb6                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HALF.sub.-- WIDTH.sub.-- IN.sub.--        BLOCK.sub.-- LSB            0xb7                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- HB.sub.-- MSB                                                                      0xb9                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- HB.sub.-- MID                                                                      0xba                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- HB.sub.-- LSB                                                                      0xbb                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MSB                                                     0xbd                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MID                                                     0xbe                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- LSB                                                     0xbf                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MSB                                                     0xc1                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MID                                                     0xc2                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- LSB                                                     0xc3                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MSB                                                     0xc5                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- MID                                                     0xc6                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- OFFSET.sub.-- LSB                                                     0xc7                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- SCRATCH.sub.-- MSB                                                                 0xc9                                                                              2  Test only                                  BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- SCRATCH.sub.-- MID                                                                 0xca                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- SCRATCH.sub.-- LSB                                                                 0xcb                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- WIDE.sub.-- MSB                                                         0xcd                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- WIDE.sub.-- MID                                                         0xce                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- WIDE.sub.-- LSB                                                         0xcf                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- HIGH.sub.-- MSB                                                         0xd1                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- HIGH.sub.-- MID                                                         0xd2                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- MBS.sub.-- HIGH.sub.-- LSB                                                         0xd3                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MSB              0xd5                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MID              0xd6                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- LSB              0xd7                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MSB              0xd9                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MID              0xda                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- LSB              0xdb                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MSB              0xdd                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- MID              0xde                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           ROW.sub.-- LSB              0xdf                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- MSB             0xe1                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- MID             0xe2                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- LSB             0xe3                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- MSB             0xe5                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- MID             0xe6                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- LSB             0xe7                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- MSB             0xe9                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- MID             0xea                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- IN.sub.--           HALF.sub.-- LSB             0xeb                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- IN.sub.-- MB.sub.--                                       0xed                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- IN.sub.-- MB.sub.--                                       0xee                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- IN.sub.-- MB.sub.--                                       0xef                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- IN.sub.-- MB.sub.--                                       0xf1                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- IN.sub.-- MB.sub.--                                       0xf2                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- IN.sub.-- MB.sub.--                                       0xf3                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- IN.sub.-- MB.sub.--                                       0xf5                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- IN.sub.-- MB.sub.--                                       0xf6                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- IN.sub.-- MB.sub.--                                       0xf7                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MSB              0xf9                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MID              0xfa                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- LSB              0xfb                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MSB              0xfd                                                                              2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MID              0xfe                                                                              8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- LSB              0xff                                                                              8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MSB              0x101                                                                             2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- MID              0x102                                                                             8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- BLOCKS.sub.-- PER.sub.-- MB.sub.--        ROW.sub.-- LSB              0x103                                                                             8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                      0x105                                                                             2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                      0x106                                                                             8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                      0x107                                                                             8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                      0x109                                                                             2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                      0x10a                                                                             8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                      0x10b                                                                             8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                      0x10d                                                                             2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                      0x10e                                                                             8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- LAST.sub.-- MB.sub.-- ROW.sub.--                                      0x10f                                                                             8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                        0x111                                                                             2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                        0x112                                                                             8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                        0x113                                                                             8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                        0x115                                                                             2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                        0x116                                                                             8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                        0x117                                                                             8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MSB                                                        0x119                                                                             2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- MID                                                        0x11a                                                                             8  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- HBS.sub.-- LSB                                                        0x11b                                                                             8                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- MAXHB                                                                 0x11f                                                                             2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- MAXHB                                                                 0x123                                                                             2  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- MAXHB                                                                 0x127                                                                             2                                             BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP0.sub.-- MAXVB                                                                 0x12b                                                                             2  Must be                                    BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP1.sub.-- MAXVB                                                                 0x12f                                                                             2  Loaded                                     BU.sub.-- WADDR.sub.-- COMP2.sub.-- MAXVB                                                                 0x133                                                                             2                                             __________________________________________________________________________

C.12.3 Horizontal Upsampler and Color Space Converter Keyhole

                  TABLE C.11.3                                                    ______________________________________                                        H-Upsamplers and Cspace Keyhole Address Map                                   Keyhole Register                                                                            Keyhole                                                         Name          Address   Bits    Comment                                       ______________________________________                                        BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A00.sub.-- 1                                                           0x0       5       R/W - Coeff 0.0                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A00.sub.-- 0                                                           0x1       8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A01.sub.-- 1                                                           0x2       5       R/W - Coeff 0.1                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A01.sub.-- 0                                                           0x3       8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A02.sub.-- 1                                                           0x4       5       R/W - Coeff 0.2                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A02.sub.-- 0                                                           0x5       8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A03.sub.-- 1                                                           0x6       5       R/W - Coeff 0.0                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A03.sub.-- 0                                                           0x7       8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A10.sub.-- 1                                                           0x8       5       R/W - Coeff 1.0                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A10.sub.-- 0                                                           0x9       8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A11.sub.-- 1                                                           0xa       5       R/W - Coeff 1.1                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A11.sub.-- 0                                                           0xb       8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A12.sub.-- 1                                                           0xc       5       R/W - Coeff 1.2                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A12.sub.-- 0                                                           0xd       8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A13.sub.-- 1                                                           0xe       5       R/W - Coeff 1.3                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A13.sub.-- 0                                                           0xf       8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A20.sub.-- 1                                                           0x10      5       R/W - Coeff 2.0                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A20.sub.-- 0                                                           0x11      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A21.sub.-- 1                                                           0x12      5       R/W - Coeff 2.1                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A21.sub.-- 0                                                           0x13      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A22.sub.-- 1                                                           0x14      5       R/W - Coeff 2.2                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A22.sub.-- 0                                                           0x15      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A23.sub.-- 1                                                           0x16      5       R/W - Coeff 2.3                               BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- A23.sub.-- 0                                                           0x17      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH0.sub.-- MODE                                                                   0x18      2       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A00.sub.-- 1                                                           0x20      5       R/W - Coeff 0.0                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A00.sub.-- 0                                                           0x21      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A01.sub.-- 1                                                           0x22      5       R/W - Coeff 0.1                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A01.sub.-- 0                                                           0x23      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A02.sub.-- 1                                                           0x24      5       R/W - Coeff 0.2                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A02.sub.-- 0                                                           0x25      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A03.sub.-- 1                                                           0x26      5       R/W - Coeff 0.0                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A03.sub.-- 0                                                           0x27      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A10.sub.-- 1                                                           0x28      5       R/W - Coeff 1.0                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A10.sub.-- 0                                                           0x29      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A11.sub.-- 1                                                           0x2a      5       R/W - Coeff 1.1                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A11.sub.-- 0                                                           0x2b      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A12.sub.-- 1                                                           0x2c      5       R/W - Coeff 1.2                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A12.sub.-- 0                                                           0x2d      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A13.sub.-- 1                                                           0x2e      5       R/W - Coeff 1.3                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A13.sub.-- 0                                                           0x2f      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A20.sub.-- 1                                                           0x30      5       R/W - Coeff 2.0                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A20.sub.-- 0                                                           0x31      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A21.sub.-- 1                                                           0x32      5       R/W - Coeff 2.1                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A21.sub.-- 0                                                           0x33      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A22.sub.-- 1                                                           0x34      5       R/W - Coeff 2.2                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A22.sub.-- 0                                                           0x35      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A23.sub.-- 1                                                           0x36      5       R/W - Coeff 2.3                               BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- A23.sub.-- 0                                                           0x37      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH1.sub.-- MODE                                                                   0x38      2       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A00.sub.-- 1                                                           0x40      5       R/W - Coeff 0.0                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A00.sub.-- 0                                                           0x41      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A01.sub.-- 1                                                           0x42      5       R/W - Coeff 0.1                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A01.sub.-- 0                                                           0x43      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A02.sub.-- 1                                                           0x44      5       R/W - Coeff 0.2                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A02.sub.-- 0                                                           0x45      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A03.sub.-- 1                                                           0x46      5       R/W - Coeff 0.0                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A03.sub.-- 0                                                           0x47      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A10.sub.-- 1                                                           0x48      5       R/W - Coeff 1.0                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A10.sub.-- 0                                                           0x49      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A11.sub.-- 1                                                           0x4a      5       R/W - Coeff 1.1                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A11.sub.-- 0                                                           0x4b      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A12.sub.-- 1                                                           0x4c      5       R/W - Coeff 1.2                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A12.sub.-- 0                                                           0x4d      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A13.sub.-- 1                                                           0x4e      5       R/W - Coeff 1.3                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A13.sub.-- 0                                                           0x4f      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A20.sub.-- 1                                                           0x50      5       R/W - Coeff 2.0                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A20.sub.-- 0                                                           0x51      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A21.sub.-- 1                                                           0x52      5       R/W - Coeff 2.1                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A21.sub.-- 0                                                           0x53      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A22.sub.-- 1                                                           0x54      5       R/W - Coeff 2.2                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A22.sub.-- 0                                                           0x55      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A23.sub.-- 1                                                           0x56      5       R/W - Coeff 2.3                               BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- A23.sub.-- 0                                                           0x57      8                                                     BU.sub.-- UH2.sub.-- MODE                                                                   0x58      2       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A00.sub.-- 1                                                            0x60      5       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A00.sub.-- 0                                                            0x61      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A10.sub.-- 1                                                            0x62      5       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A10.sub.-- 0                                                            0x63      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A20.sub.-- 1                                                            0x64      5       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A20.sub.-- 0                                                            0x65      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- B0.sub.-- 1                                                             0x66      6       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- B0.sub.-- 0                                                             0x67      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A01.sub.-- 1                                                            0x68      5       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A01.sub.-- 0                                                            0x69      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A11.sub.-- 1                                                            0x6a      5       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A11.sub.-- 0                                                            0x6b      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A21.sub.-- 1                                                            0x6c      5       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A21.sub.-- 0                                                            0x6d      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- B1.sub.-- 1                                                             0x6e      6       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- B1.sub.-- 0                                                             0x6f      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A02.sub.-- 1                                                            0x70      5       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A02.sub.-- 0                                                            0x71      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A12.sub.-- 1                                                            0x72      5       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A12.sub.-- 0                                                            0x73      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A22.sub.-- 1                                                            0x74      5       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- A22.sub.-- 0                                                            0x75      8                                                     BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- B2.sub.-- 1                                                             0x76      6       R/W                                           BU.sub.-- CS.sub.-- B2.sub.-- 0                                                             0x77      8                                                     ______________________________________                                    

SECTION C.13 Picture Size Parameters

C.13.1 Introduction

The following stylized code fragments illustrate the processingnecessary to respond to picture size interrupts from the write addressgenerator. Note that the picture size parameters can be changed"on-the-fly" by sending combinations of HORIZONTAL₋₋ MBS, VERTICAL₋₋MBS, and DEFINE₋₋ SAMPLING (for each component) tokens, resulting inwrite address generator interrupts. These tokens may arrive in any orderand, in general, any one should necessitate the re-calculation of all ofthe picture size parameters. At setup time, however, it would be moreefficient to detect the arrival of all of the events before performingany calculations.

It is possible to write specific values into the picture size parameterregisters at setup and, therefore, to not rely on interrupt processingin response to tokens. For this reason, the appropriate register valuesfor SIF pictures are also given.

C.13.2 Interrupt Processing for Picture Size Parameters

There are five picture size events, and the primary response of each isgiven below:

    ______________________________________                                                 if (hmbs.sub.-- event))                                                          load(mbs.sub.-- wide);                                                     else if (vmbs.sub.-- evnet)                                                      load(mbs.sub.-- high);                                                     else if (def.sub.-- samp0.sub.-- event)                                       (                                                                                load (maxhb 0!);                                                              load (maxvb 0!);                                                           )                                                                                else if (def.sub.-- samp1.sub.-- event)                                    (                                                                                load (maxhb 1!);                                                              load (maxvb 1!);                                                           )                                                                             else if (def.sub.-- samp2.sub.-- event)                                       (                                                                                load (maxhb 2!);                                                              load (maxvb 2!);                                                           )                                                                    ______________________________________                                    

In addition, the following calculations are necessary to retainconsistent picture size parameters:

    ______________________________________                                        if (hmbs.sub.-- event||vmbs.sub.-- event|.vertl    ine.                                                                          def.sub.-- samp0.sub.-- event||def.sub.-- samp1.sub.--      event||def.sub.-- samp2.sub.-- event)                       for (i=0; i<max.sub.-- component; i++)                                        {                                                                             hbs i! = addr.hbs i! = (maxhb i!+1) * mbs.sub.-- wide;                        half.sub.-- width.sub.-- in .sub.-- blocks i! = ((maxhb i!+1) *               mbs.sub.-- wide)/2;                                                           last.sub.-- mb.sub.-- in.sub.-- row i! = hbs i! -  maxhb i!+1);               last.sub.-- mb.sub.-- in.sub.-- half.sub.-- row i! = half.sub.-- width.sub    .-- in.sub.-- blocks i! -                                                     (maxhb i!+1);                                                                 last.sub.-- row.sub.-- in.sub.-- mb i! = hbs i! * maxvb i!;                   blocks.sub.-- per.sub.-- mb.sub.-- row i!= last.sub.-- row.sub.--             in.sub.-- mb i! + hbs i!;                                                     last.sub.-- mb.sub.-- row i! = blocks.sub.-- per.sub.-- mb.sub.-- row i!      + (mbs.sub.-- high-1);                                                        }                                                                             }                                                                             ______________________________________                                    

Although it is not strictly necessary to modify the dispaddr registervalues (such as the display window size) in response to picture sizeinterrupts, this may be desirable depending on the applicationrequirements.

C.13.3 Register Values for SIF Pictures

The values contained in all the picture size registers after the aboveinterrupt processing for an SIF, 4:2:0 stream will be as follows:

C.13.3.1 Primary Values

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ MBS₋₋ WIDE=0x16

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ MBS₋₋ HIGH=0x12

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP0₋₋ MAXHB=0x01

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP1₋₋ MAXHB=0x00

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP2₋₋ MAXHB=0x00

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP0₋₋ MAXVB=0x01

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP1₋₋ MAXVB=0x00

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP2₋₋ MAXVB=0x00

C.13.3.2 Secondary Values--After Calculation

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP0₋₋ HBS=0x2C

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP1₋₋ HBS=0x16

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP2₋₋ HBS=0x16

BU₋₋ ADDR₋₋ COMP0₋₋ HBS=0x2C

BU₋₋ ADDR₋₋ COMP1₋₋ HBS=0x16

BU₋₋ ADDR₋₋ COMP2₋₋ HBS=0x16

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP0₋₋ HALF₋₋ WIDTH₋₋ IN₋₋ BLOCKS=0x16

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP1₋₋ HALF₋₋ WIDTH₋₋ IN₋₋ BLOCKS=0x0B

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP2₋₋ HALF₋₋ WIDTH₋₋ IN₋₋ BLOCKS=0x0B

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP0₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ IN₋₋ ROW=0x2A

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP1₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ IN₋₋ ROW=0x15

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP2₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ IN₋₋ ROW=0x15

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP0₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ IN₋₋ HALF₋₋ ROW=0x14

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP1₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ IN₋₋ HALF₋₋ ROW=0x0A

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP2₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ IN₋₋ HALF₋₋ ROW=0x0A

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP0₋₋ LAST₋₋ ROW₋₋ IN₋₋ MB=0x2C

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP1₋₋ LAST₋₋ ROW₋₋ IN₋₋ MB=0x0

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP2₋₋ LAST₋₋ ROW₋₋ IN₋₋ MB=0x0

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP0₋₋ BLOCKS₋₋ PER₋₋ MB₋₋ ROW=0x58

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP1₋₋ BLOCKS₋₋ PER₋₋ MB₋₋ ROW=0x16

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP2₋₋ BLOCKS₋₋ PER_(--MB) ₋₋ ROW=0x16

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP0₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ ROW=0x5D8

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP1₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ ROW=0x176

BU₋₋ WADDR₋₋ COMP2₋₋ LAST₋₋ MB₋₋ ROW=0x176

Note that if these values are to be written explicitly at setup, accountmust be taken of the multi-byte nature of most of the locations.

Note that additional Figures, which are self explanatory to those ofordinary skill in the art, are included with this application forproviding further insight into the detailed structure and operation ofthe environment in which the present invention is intended to function.

The aforedescribed pipeline system of the present invention satisfies along existing need for an improved system having a Huffman decoder fordecoding data words encoded according to the Huffman coding provisionsof either H.261, JPEg or MPEG standards, the data words including anidentifier that identifies the Huffman code standard under which thedata words were coded, including means for receiving the Huffman codeddata words, means for reading the identifier to determine which standardgoverned the Huffman coding of the received data words, if necessary, inresponse to reading the identifier that identifies the Huffman codeddata words as H.261 or MPEG Huffman coded, means operably connected tothe Huffman coded data words receiving means, for generating an indexnumber associated with each JPEG Huffman coded data word received fromthe Huffman coded data words receiving means, means for operating alookup table containing a Huffman code table having the format usedunder the JPEG standard to transmit JPEG Huffman table information,including an input for receiving an index number from the index numbergenerating means, and including an output that is a decoded data wordcorresponding to the index number.

The improved system includes a multi-standard video decompressionapparatus having a plurality of stages interconnected by a two-wireinterface arranged as a pipeline processing machine. Control tokens andDATA Tokens pass over the single two-wire interface for carrying bothcontrol and data in token format. A token decode circuit is positionedin certain of the stages for recognizing certain of the tokens ascontrol tokens pertinent to that stage and for passing unrecognizedcontrol tokens along the pipeline. Reconfiguration processing circuitsare positioned in selected stages and are responsive to a recognizedcontrol token for reconfiguring such stage to handle an identified DATAToken. A wide variety of unique supporting subsystem circuitry andprocessing techniques are disclosed for implementing the system.

It will be apparent from the foregoing that, while particular forms ofthe invention have been illustrated and described, various modificationcan be made without departing from the spirit and scope of theinvention. Accordingly, it is not intended that the invention belimited, except as by the appended claims.

I claim:
 1. A Huffman decoder for decoding data words encoded accordingto the Huffman coding provisions of either H.261 or MPEG standards, thedata words including an identifier that identifies the Huffman codestandard under which the data words were coded, comprising:means forreceiving the Huffman coded data words, including means for reading theidentifier to determine which standard governed the Huffman coding ofthe received data words, and means for converting the data words to JPEGHuffman coded data words, in response to reading the identifier thatidentifies the Huffman coded data words as H.261 or MPEG Huffman coded;means, operably connected to the Huffman coded data words receivingmeans, for generating an index number associated with each JPEG Huffmancoded data word receiving an index number from the index numbergenerating means, and including an output that is a decoded data wordcorresponding to the index number.
 2. The decoder according to claim 1,wherein the Huffman coded data words are found in a token comprising aplurality of words and each said word includes an extension bit whichindicates a presence of additional words therein; whereby the token isunlimited in length.
 3. A method for decoding data words encodedaccording to the Huffman coding provisions of either H.261 or MPEGstandards, the data words including an identifier that identifies theHuffman code standard under which the data words were coded, the stepscomprising:receiving the Huffman coded data words, the stepscomprising:receiving the Huffman coded data words, including reading theidentifier to determine which standard governed the Huffman coding ofthe received data words, and converting the data words to JPEG Huffmancoded data words in response to reading the identifier that identifiesthe Huffman coded data words as H.261 or MPEG Huffman coded; generatingan index number associated with each JPEG Huffman coded data wordreceived; and operating a lookup table containing a Huffman code tablehaving the format used under the JPEG standard to transmit JPEG Huffmantable information, including receiving an index number, and generating adecoded data word corresponding to the received index number.
 4. Themethod according to claim 3, wherein the Huffman coded data words arefound in a token comprising a plurality of words and each said wordincludes an extension bit which indicates a presence of additional wordstherein; whereby the token is unlimited in length.